JP2022104438A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which can improve the reliability for a display performance including the change in prescribed information.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises: a CPU of a display control device which outputs a display command for displaying display information including prescribed information (for example, a long push charge image) on a third pattern display device; and a CPU of a sub control device which outputs an instruction command (for example, a long press charge +1 command) that instructs the CPU of the display control device to display prescribed information changing to different information (for example, a value obtained by adding 1 to a value of a long press charge counter) from information (for example, a value of the long press charge counter) on the basis of the operation of a decision button. The game machine determines whether or not an error in which the different information instructed by the instruction command does not match the prescribed information (for example, the value of the long push charge image) displayed by the display command occurs, and performs prescribed error corresponding processing corresponding to the error when the error occurs.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 261

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, as a gaming machine of this type, for example, when the operation of the operation means is performed in a specific mode within the valid period in which the operation of the operation means such as the operation button or the operation lever is valid, the specific operation correspondence effect is produced. , There is a gaming machine that is executed during a predetermined display effect (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2015-112124 (pages 39-40, FIG. 20)

However, in the case of the conventional example having such a configuration, there are the following problems.
That is, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the change of the predetermined information is not correctly displayed and the reliability of the display effect including the change of the predetermined information cannot be improved.

The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the reliability of a display effect including a change in predetermined information.

In order to achieve such an object, the present invention has the following configuration.
That is, the invention according to claim 1 is
The operation means to receive the operation by the player and
The main control means that performs the main control related to the game,
A display control means that outputs a display command for displaying a display effect including predetermined information on the display means, and a display control means.
Sub-control that outputs an instruction command instructing the display control means to change the predetermined information from one information to another based on the result of the determination by the main control means or based on the operation of the operation means. It is a gaming machine equipped with means and
An error determining means for determining whether or not an error has occurred in which the other information instructed by the instruction command and the predetermined information displayed by the display command do not match.
It is characterized by comprising an error handling means for performing a predetermined error handling process corresponding to the error when the error has occurred.

[Action / Effect] According to the invention of claim 1, it is possible to improve the fun of the display effect including the change of predetermined information.

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the fun of a display effect including a change in predetermined information.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine of Example 1 of this invention. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the right side view of the pachinko machine, and is the figure which shows the state which attached the illumination cover by the AA cross section of FIG. It is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and is the figure which shows the state which attached the illumination cover by the BB cross section of FIG. It is a plan view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the third symbol display device, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a hold display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of various counters used for game control. (A) is a special figure 1 big hit lottery table, and (b) is a special figure 2 big hit lottery table. It is a table for selecting a variable pattern of the main decorative pattern. (A) is an example of the variable display effect of the jackpot normal reach and the off-normal reach, and (b) is an example of the variable display effect of the jackpot super reach and the off-target super reach. (A) is an example of the variable display effect of the jackpot super reach and the out-of-order super reach, and (b) is an example of the variable display effect of the jackpot super reach and the out-of-order super reach. This is a table for determining the ending effect pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the next game state setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the opening and closing process of a big prize opening. It is a flowchart which shows the right-handed error determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process for look-ahead. It is a flowchart which shows the launch control process. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by a payout control device. It is a flowchart which shows the payout control process. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball lending control process. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the customer waiting effect processing by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring and effect processing by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the decision button input monitoring / effect processing by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the selection button input monitoring / effect processing by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the sound editing and output management processing by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the effect execution management process by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead variation pattern specification command reception processing by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the opening / closing mode (big hit) display setting processing by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display mode setting process by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the next game state display mode setting process by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the right-handed error notification display mode setting process by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process of a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the switching process such as a display mode by a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol string variation display process by a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the specific operation screen display process by a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot opening round display processing by a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot ending display processing by a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the high probability / support state transition display process by a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the low probability / support state transition display process by a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the specific operation period notification processing by a display control device. It is a figure explaining the display mode in the specific operation period in the 3rd symbol display device. It is a figure explaining the display mode during a specific operation period in the high-speed fluctuation of a main decorative symbol. It is a figure explaining the display mode in the specific operation period after the reach establishment. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating a display mode during a specific operation period after the establishment of reach following FIG. 56. It is a figure explaining the display mode when the decision button is left while being pressed during a specific operation period during high-speed fluctuation. It is a figure explaining the display mode when the enter button and the selection button are pressed during the specific operation period during high-speed fluctuation. (A) is a special figure 1 big hit lottery table of the second embodiment, and (b) is a special figure 2 big hit lottery table. This is a table for setting the ending effect pattern. (A) is the special figure 1 big hit lottery table of the third embodiment, and (b) is the special figure 2 big hit lottery table. This is a table for setting the ending effect pattern. (A1) to (a3) are diagrams for explaining the display mode of the end-of-term proximity information of the specific operation period in the fourth embodiment, and (b1) to (b3) are different displays from (a1) to (a3). It is a figure explaining an embodiment. (A1) to (a3) are diagrams for explaining the display mode of the next game state proximity information in the fifth embodiment, and (b1) to (b3) are display modes different from (a1) to (a3). It is a figure explaining. (A) to (e) are diagrams for explaining the display mode of the next game state proximity information of the sixth embodiment. (A) to (f) are diagrams for explaining the display mode of the next game state proximity information of the seventh embodiment. (A) to (f) are diagrams for explaining the display mode of the next game state proximity information of the eighth embodiment. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the specific operation period after the end of the jackpot round game of Example 9. FIG. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the specific operation period after the end of the jackpot round game of Example 10. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the specific operation period after the end of the jackpot round game of Example 11. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the specific operation period in the jackpot round game of Example 12. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the specific operation period in the reach display effect of Example 13. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the specific operation period in the reach display effect of Example 14. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the specific operation period after the end of the jackpot round game of Example 15. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the specific operation period after the end of the jackpot round game of Example 16. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the specific operation period after the end of the jackpot round game of Example 17. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the specific operation period after the end of the jackpot round game of Example 18. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the specific operation period in the reach display effect of Example 19. It is a figure explaining the display mode different from FIG. 79 in the specific operation period during the reach display effect. (A) is a special figure 1 big hit lottery table in Example 20, and (b) is a special figure 2 big hit lottery table. FIG. 1 is a table for selecting a main decorative symbol variation pattern according to a special figure 20 of the twenty embodiment. It is a table for determining the ending effect pattern of Example 20. It is a figure explaining the display mode from the reach display effect to the jackpot round display effect. It is a flowchart explaining the auxiliary effect determination process by the display control device 45 of Example 21. (A) is a flowchart explaining the one-announcement lottery process by the display control device 45, and (b) is a flowchart explaining the one-announcement display process by the display control device 45. (A) and (b) are diagrams for explaining an ending effect pattern determination table. It is a figure explaining the display mode from the reach display effect to the jackpot ending display effect. It is a figure explaining the ending effect pattern determination table in Example 22. It is a figure explaining another display mode of a jackpot ending display effect. It is a front view of the pachinko machine of Example 23 in the state where the illumination cover of the size different from FIG. 1 is attached. It is the right side view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 91, and is the figure which shows the state in which the illumination cover of a different size is attached in the CC cross section. It is the left side view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 91, and is the figure which shows the state which the electric decoration cover of a different size is attached in the DD cross section. (A) and (b) are diagrams illustrating the adjustment of the light emitting region when the illuminated covers of different sizes are attached. (A) and (b) are diagrams illustrating the adjustment of the light emitting region in Example 24. It is a front view of the pachinko machine of Example 25. It is the left side view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 96, and is the figure which shows the state in which the illumination cover is attached in the EE cross section. It is a front view of a pachinko machine with different size lighting covers attached. It is the left side view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 98, and is the figure which shows the state which the illumination cover of a different size is attached in the FF cross section. (A) and (b) are diagrams illustrating the adjustment of the light emitting region when the illuminated covers of different sizes are attached. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process by a sub-control device. It is a front view of the pachinko machine of Example 26. It is the left side view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 102, and is the figure which shows the state in which the illumination cover is attached in the GG cross section. It is a front view of the pachinko machine with the illumination cover having different light emitting areas attached. It is the left side view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 104, and is the figure which shows the state which the electric decoration cover of a different size is attached in the HH cross section. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process by a sub-control device. It is a front view of the game board of Example 27. It is the II cross-sectional view of the game board shown in FIG. 107, and is the figure which shows the adjustment of the light emitting area of the movable illumination part. It is a front view of the game board with the movable illumination part protruding. It is a JJ sectional view of the game board shown in FIG. 109, and is the figure which shows the adjustment of the light emitting area of the movable illumination part. It is a figure which shows the adjustment of the light emitting area of the movable Illuminations part of Example 28. It is a front view of the game board of Example 29. It is a KK sectional view of the game board shown in FIG. 112, and is the figure which shows the adjustment of the light emitting area of the movable illumination part. FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line KK of the game board shown in FIG. 112, showing adjustment of a light emitting region in a state where the movable illumination portion is projected. It is a front view of the game board of Example 30. It is the LL sectional view of the game board shown in FIG. 115, and is the figure which shows the adjustment of the light emitting area of the movable illumination part. It is a front view of the game board with the movable illumination part protruding. It is the MM sectional view of the game board shown in FIG. 117, and is the figure which shows the adjustment of the light emitting area of the movable illumination part. (A) and (b) are diagrams for explaining the mounting direction of the illuminated cover and another illuminated cover of the thirty-one embodiment. (A) and (b) are diagrams illustrating before and after the change in the light emitting region of the illuminated cover of Example 32. (A) and (b) are diagrams illustrating before and after the change in the light emitting region of the third illuminated cover of Example 33. It is a special figure 1 big hit lottery table of Example 34. Special figure 2 It is a big hit lottery table. Special figure 1 It is a table for big hit ending production. Special figure 2 It is a table for big hit ending production. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the opening / ending time determination processing by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the opening and closing process of a big prize opening by a main control device. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine of Example 35. Special figure 1 Big hit lottery table. Special figure 2 It is a big hit lottery table. Special figure 2 It is a table for big hit ending production. It is a table for special figure 2 jackpot ending production following FIG. 132. It is a table for special figure 2 jackpot ending production following FIG. 133. It is a figure explaining the display mode of an ending effect. It is a figure explaining another display mode of an ending effect. It is a table for special figure 2 jackpot ending effect of Example 36. It is a table for special figure 2 jackpot ending production following FIG. 137. It is a figure explaining the display mode of an ending effect. It is a figure explaining another display mode of an ending effect. It is a table for special figure 2 jackpot ending effect of Example 37. It is a special figure 1 big hit lottery table of Example 38. Special figure 2 It is a big hit lottery table. It is a time chart of the opening timing of the large winning opening opening / closing member and the V area opening / closing member. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the V winning area opening / closing process by a main control device. The special figure 1 jackpot lottery table of the thirty-nineth embodiment, (a) shows a table referred to in a normal gaming state, and (b) shows a table referred to in a low probability support gaming state. It is a special figure 2 big hit lottery table referred to in the low probability support gaming state. This is a special figure 2 jackpot lottery table referred to in a high-probability gaming state. It is a time chart of the opening timing of the large winning opening opening / closing member and the V area opening / closing member. It is a flowchart which shows the opening / ending time determination processing by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the opening / ending time determination processing following FIG. 151. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an opening / ending time determination process following FIG. 152. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the effect performed during the big hit round game to the value-added game. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the effect performed during the value-added game from the jackpot round game following FIG. 154. It is a figure explaining another display mode of the effect performed during the big hit round game to the value-added game. It is a figure explaining the display mode different from FIG. 156 of the effect performed during the big hit round game to the value-added game. It is a figure explaining the display mode different from FIGS. 156 and 157 of the effect performed during the big hit round game to the value-added game. It is a front view of the game board of Example 40. Special figure 1 Big hit lottery table. Special figure 2 It is a big hit lottery table. Special figure 2 This is a table for selecting a main decorative pattern variation pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the opening and closing process of a big prize opening by a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit opening interval time setting process by a main control device. It is a time chart of the opening timing of the large winning opening opening / closing member and the start winning device for the second special figure 1. It is a front view of the game board of Example 41. It is a lottery table per special figure 1. It is a lottery table per special figure 2. It is a table for setting a specific period for a small hit that occurs during the value-added game after hitting the special figure 2. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit opening interval time setting process by a main control device. It is a time chart of the opening timing of the large winning opening opening / closing member. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the effect performed during the big hit round game to the value-added game. It is a figure explaining another display mode of the effect performed during the big hit round game to the value-added game. It is a table for setting a specific period for a small hit that occurs during the value-added game after hitting the special figure 2 of the embodiment 42. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the effect performed during the big hit round game to the value-added game. It is a table for setting a specific period for a small hit that occurs during the value-added game after hitting the special figure 2 of the embodiment 43. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the effect performed during the big hit round game to the value-added game. It is a flowchart which shows the decision button input monitoring / effect processing by the sub-control device of Example 44. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display mode setting process by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the button long press effect setting process by a sub control device. It is a flowchart which shows the button long-pressing effect display processing by a display control device. It is a time chart which shows the effect corresponding to a long press when a long press operation is performed. It is a time chart which shows the effect corresponding to a long press when the long press operation is performed in a mode different from FIG. 182. It is a time chart which shows the effect corresponding to the long press when the long press operation is performed in the mode different from FIGS. 182 and 183. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the effect corresponding to a long press when a long press operation is performed. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the long press correspondence effect when the long press operation different from FIG. 185 is performed. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the long press correspondence effect when the long press operation different from FIG. 185 and FIG. 186 is performed. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the long press correspondence effect when the long press operation of Example 45 is performed. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the long press correspondence effect when the long press operation of Example 46 is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the decision button input monitoring / effect processing by the sub-control device of Example 48. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display mode setting process by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of receiving a look-ahead variation pattern specification command by a sub-control device. (A) is a diagram for explaining the hold display pattern A, and (b) is a diagram for explaining the hold display pattern B. It is a flowchart which shows the hand-release effect display process by a display control device. It is a time chart which shows the effect corresponding to a long press when the first release operation is performed. It is a time chart which shows the effect corresponding to a long press when the next release operation is performed. It is a time chart which shows the effect corresponding to a long press when the last release operation is performed. FIG. 197 is a time chart showing an effect corresponding to a long press when the hand release operation is too long. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the effect corresponding to a long press when the first release operation is performed. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the effect corresponding to a long press when the next hand release operation is performed. It is a time chart which shows the display mode of the effect corresponding to a long press when the last hand release operation is performed. FIG. 201 is a diagram showing a display mode of a long press response effect when the hand release operation is too long. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing a hand-release effect display process by the display control device of the 49th embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the effect corresponding to a long press when the first release operation is performed. It is a time chart which shows the effect corresponding to a long press when the next release operation is performed. It is a time chart which shows the effect corresponding to a long press when the last release operation is performed. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the effect corresponding to a long press when the first release operation is performed. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the effect corresponding to a long press when the next hand release operation is performed. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the effect corresponding to a long press when the last hand release operation is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the hand-release effect display process by the display control device of Example 50. It is a flowchart which shows the long press effect sound setting process by a sub control device. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the effect corresponding to a long press when the first release operation is performed. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the effect corresponding to a long press when the next hand release operation is performed. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the effect corresponding to a long press when the last hand release operation is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the decision button input monitoring / effect processing by the sub-control device 262 of Example 51. It is a table for selecting a charge pattern in a long press charge effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the effect corresponding to a long press when the long press operation is performed without interruption. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the effect corresponding to a long press when the long press operation is interrupted for a moment. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the long press mode effect of Example 52. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the long press mode effect of Example 53. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display mode setting process by the sub-control device of Example 54. It is a flowchart which shows the decision button input monitoring / effect processing by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the color change lottery process by a sub control device. It is a flowchart which shows the color change lottery process following FIG. 223. It is a flowchart which shows the long press color change effect setting process performed by the CPU of a sub control device. It is a flowchart which shows the long-pressed color change effect display processing performed by the CPU of a display control device. This is a table for selecting a color change pattern. It is a table for color change lottery. It is a graph which shows the color change display for each color change pattern. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the color change for each color change pattern. It is a graph which shows the color change for each color change pattern when the operation different from the operation of a long press mode is performed. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the long press color change effect of a color change pattern A. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the long press color change effect of a color change pattern B. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the long press color change effect of a color change pattern C. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the long press color change effect of a color change pattern D. It is a graph which shows the color change for each color change pattern when the operation different from the operation of the long press mode of Example 55 is performed. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the color change for each color change pattern. It is a flowchart which shows the decision button input monitoring / effect processing by the sub-control device of Example 56. It is a table for selecting a point get pattern. It is a table for long press point lottery in each point get pattern. It is a lottery result of a long press point lottery in each point get pattern. It is a time chart of the point get pattern A. It is another time chart of the point get pattern A shown in FIG. 242. It is a time chart of the point get pattern C. It is another time chart of the point get pattern C shown in FIG. 244. It is a figure which shows the display mode corresponding to FIG. 242 of the point get pattern A. It is a figure which shows the display mode corresponding to FIG. 243 of the point get pattern A. It is a figure which shows the display mode corresponding to FIG. 244 of the point get pattern C. It is a figure which shows the display mode corresponding to FIG. 245 of the point get pattern C. (A) is a table for selecting a point get pattern according to the 57th embodiment, and (b) is a lottery result of a long press point lottery in the point get pattern S. It is a time chart of the point get pattern S. It is a time chart of another point get pattern similar to the point get pattern S. It is a display mode corresponding to the point get pattern S. It is a display mode corresponding to another point get pattern similar to the point get pattern S. It is a time chart of the point get pattern A shown in Example 59. It is a figure which shows the display mode corresponding to the point get pattern A. It is a time chart which shows the point get pattern of Example 61. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the point get pattern of FIG. 257. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process by the sub-control device of Example 62. It is a flowchart which shows the effect execution management process by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the display / inter-sub counter consistency confirmation processing by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the button long-pressing effect display processing by a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the display count information error display processing by a display control device. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the display count information error. It is a flowchart which shows the display / inter-sub counter consistency confirmation processing by the sub-control device of Example 63. It is a flowchart which shows the symbol string variation display process by a display control device. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the remaining fluctuation number information error.

The present specification also discloses the following inventions relating to gaming machines and the problems to be solved by the inventions.

<First task>
Conventionally, as this type of gaming machine, for example, when the gaming state shifts from a predetermined gaming state such as a jackpot round gaming state to the next gaming state, a jackpot ending effect of displaying a jackpot ending image on a display device is used. There is a gaming machine that executes a display effect at the time of transition. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-230281 (pages 28-29, FIGS. 9, 10)).
However, in the case of the conventional example having such a configuration, there are the following problems.
That is, this transition display effect is included in the predetermined gaming state when this effect is started, but in the conventional gaming machine, this transition display effect is included in the next gaming state. May be misidentified as. In this case, the player may start a necessary operation (for example, an operation of launching a game ball) in the next game state even though the ending effect is being performed. In that case, various disadvantages may occur by misidentifying that the current game state in which the transition display effect is being executed is the next gaming state. For example, when the game state is changed to the support game state after the jackpot round game state, if the game ball is fired before the state is changed to the support game state, the benefit of the support game state cannot be obtained and the ball is wasted. It is a problem that it becomes.
The invention according to the following (A1) has been made in view of such circumstances, and reduces the disadvantage caused by misidentifying that the current game state in which the transition display effect is being executed is the next gaming state. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can be played.
The invention according to the following (A1) has the following configuration in order to achieve such an object.

(A1) When the gaming state shifts from a predetermined gaming state (for example, a jackpot round gaming state) to the next gaming state (for example, a support gaming state), a predetermined timing at the end of the predetermined gaming state (for example, the end of the final round). From (after) to the start timing of the next gaming state (for example, the start timing of the support gaming state), an execution means for executing a transition display effect (for example, a jackpot ending effect) for displaying a predetermined image on the display means, and an execution means.
Non-arrival suggestion information (for example, ending right-handed information 44k, next game state proximity information, which will be described later) that suggests to the player that the start timing of the next game state has not arrived during the execution of the transition display effect. A gaming machine provided with a notification means for notifying a player of 44l, ending countdown information 44v).

According to the gaming machine described in (A1), when the gaming state shifts from the predetermined gaming state to the next gaming state, the next gaming state starts from a predetermined timing at the end of the predetermined gaming state. Until the timing, the execution means executes a transition display effect of displaying a predetermined image on the display means. During the execution of the transition display effect, the notification means notifies the player of unarrival suggestion information suggesting to the player that the start timing of the second gaming state has not arrived. As a result, the player recognizes that the current game state in which the transition display effect is being executed is the predetermined gaming state, in other words, the current time in which the transition display effect is being executed is not yet the next gaming state. It will be easier to do. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by misidentifying that the current game state in which the transition display effect is being executed is the next gaming state.

(A2) In the gaming machine according to (A1) above,
The predetermined gaming state is a first gaming state (for example, a jackpot round gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
The next gaming state is an advantageous gaming state different from the first gaming state, and it is possible to acquire another advantageous gaming value in a situation where the player is operating the operating means. Including the second gaming state (for example, high probability / support state, low probability / support state),
The non-arrival suggestion information is advantageous game state non-arrival suggestion information (for example, during the ending described later) that suggests to the player that the start timing of the second gaming state has not arrived during the execution of the transition display effect. A gaming machine characterized by including right-handed information 44k, next game state proximity information 44l, ending countdown information 44v).

According to the gaming machine described in (A2), the next gaming state (second gaming state) that shifts from the predetermined gaming state (first gaming state) is an advantageous gaming state different from the first gaming state. It includes a gaming state in which another advantageous gaming value can be obtained in a situation where the player is operating the operating means. Therefore, the player can easily operate the operation means for acquiring another advantageous game value based on the misunderstanding that the current time when the transition display effect is being executed is the second game state, but this operation Is performed during the first game state, so that another advantageous game value cannot be obtained. However, during the execution of the transition display effect, the advantageous game state non-arrival suggestion information that suggests to the player that the start timing of the second gaming state has not arrived is notified, so that the transition display effect is executed. It is difficult to misidentify that the current state of the game is the second game state. Further, since it is possible to suppress the operation of the operating means by misunderstanding that the other advantageous game value can be obtained, it is possible to reduce the waste of the operation. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by misidentifying that the current time when the transition display effect is being executed is the second gaming state.

(A3) In the gaming machine described in (A2) above,
The first game state is based on the fact that the result of the lottery by the lottery means triggered by the entry into the ball entry means is a specific result, and the period from the opening state to the closed state of the specific entry means is 1 It is a round game state in which a round game is performed a predetermined number of times.
The transition display effect is from a predetermined timing after the time when the specific ball-entry means is closed in the final round of the round gaming state to the start timing of the next gaming state (start timing of the support gaming state). , A gaming machine characterized in that it is an effect at the end of a round gaming state in which a predetermined image is displayed on a display means.

According to the gaming machine described in (A3), the first gaming state is based on the fact that the result of the lottery by the lottery means triggered by the entry into the ball entry means is a specific result. This is a round game state in which a round game is performed a predetermined number of times from the opening state to the closed state. The transition display effect is a round game in which a predetermined image is displayed on the display means from a predetermined timing after the specific ball entry means is closed in the final round of the round game state to the start timing of the next game state. It is a production at the end of the state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by misidentifying that the current time when the effect at the end of the round game state is being executed is the next game state.

(A4) In the gaming machine according to (A3) above,
A variable ball-entry means that changes into an open state in which a game ball is easy to enter and a closed state in which a game ball is difficult to enter, and the variable ball-in means that triggers a lottery by the lottery means.
It is provided with an actuating ball-entry means for the game ball to enter, and the actuating ball-entry means for the ball entry to act as an actuating lottery for operating the variable ball-entry means.
The second gaming state is a support gaming state in which the result of the actuation lottery based on the ball entry of the actuating ball entry means tends to be a specific result of operating the variable ball entry means.
The gaming machine characterized in that the advantageous gaming state non-arrival suggestion information suggests to the player that the start timing of the support gaming state has not arrived during the execution of the transition time display effect.

According to the gaming machine described in (A4) above, the variable ball-entry means is a ball-entry means that changes between an open state in which a game ball is easy to enter and a closed state in which a game ball is difficult to enter. Is the trigger for the lottery by the lottery means. The actuated ball entry means is a ball entry means into which a game ball enters, and the entry triggers an actuated lottery to operate the variable ball entry means. The second gaming state is a support gaming state in which the result of the actuation lottery based on the entry of the actuation entry means tends to be a specific result of operating the variable entry means. The advantageous gaming state non-arrival suggestion information suggests to the player that the start timing of the support gaming state has not arrived during the execution of the transition display effect. As a result, the player accidentally launches the game ball during the transition display effect before the transition to the support game state in order to allow the game ball to enter the operating ball entry means quickly in the support game state. It is easy to get rid of. In this respect, by seeing the information suggesting that the advantageous gaming state has not arrived during the execution of the transition display effect, the disadvantage caused by misidentifying that the current time when the transition display effect is being executed is the support gaming state is reduced. be able to.

(A5) In the gaming machine according to (A3) above,
The second gaming state is a high-probability gaming state in which the probability that the result of the lottery by the lottery means will be the specific result is higher than that in the normal gaming state.
The gaming machine characterized in that the advantageous gaming state non-arrival suggestion information suggests to the player that the start timing of the high-probability gaming state has not arrived during the execution of the transition time display effect. ..

According to the gaming machine described in (A5), the second gaming state is a high-probability gaming state in which the probability that the result of the lottery by the lottery means will be a specific result is higher than that in the normal gaming state. The advantageous gaming state non-arrival suggestion information suggests to the player that the start timing of the high-probability gaming state has not arrived during the execution of the transition display effect. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by misidentifying that the current time when the transition display effect is being executed is the high-probability gaming state.

(A6) In the gaming machine according to (A4) above,
In the second gaming state, the probability that the result of the lottery by the lottery means will be a specific result and the probability that the result of the actuation lottery by the actuated lottery means will be a specific result will be higher than in the normal gaming state. The advantageous gaming state non-arrival suggestion information, which is a stochastic gaming state, suggests to the player that the start timing of the supported high-probability gaming state has not arrived during the execution of the transition time display effect. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine described in (A6) above, in the second gaming state, the probability that the result of the lottery by the lottery means will be a specific result and the probability that the result of the actuation lottery by the actuated lottery means will be a specific result are usually. It is a specific high-probability gaming state that is higher than the gaming state of. The advantageous gaming state non-arrival suggestion information suggests to the player that the start timing of the supported high-probability gaming state has not arrived during the execution of the transition display effect. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by misidentifying that the current time when the transition display effect is being executed is the supported high-probability gaming state.

(A7) In the gaming machine according to (A1) above,
The transition display effect is such that a plurality of types of images are continuously executed in a predetermined combination.
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a specific result, the predetermined combination is displayed in a different combination according to the type of the specific result.
The non-arrival suggestion information suggests to the player that the start timing of the next gaming state has not arrived until the timing at which the plurality of types of images are continuously executed in the predetermined combination. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine according to the above (A7), the transition display effect is continuously executed in a predetermined combination of a plurality of types of images. When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a specific result, the predetermined combination is displayed in a different combination according to the type of the specific result. Therefore, conventionally, if the player misunderstands that the end timing of the display time of a certain image in the transition display effect is the end timing of a series of transition display effects, the display time of the subsequent image is displayed. There is a risk that you will be disadvantaged by misunderstanding that you have moved to the next game state. However, in the present invention, the non-arrival suggestion information suggests to the player that the start timing of the next gaming state has not arrived until the timing at which the plurality of types of images are continuously executed in the predetermined combination. .. As a result, it is suggested that the start timing of the next gaming state has not arrived due to the unarrival suggestion information until the timing when the plurality of types of images are continuously executed in the predetermined combination during the transition display effect. Therefore, the risk of suffering the above-mentioned disadvantages is reduced.

(A8) In the gaming machine according to (A7) above,
The transition display effect has a plurality of combination patterns in which a predetermined image is combined from the plurality of types of images.
The combination pattern is a gaming machine characterized in that it differs depending on the type of the specific gaming state.

According to the gaming machine according to the above (A8), the transition display effect has a plurality of combination patterns in which a predetermined image is combined from a plurality of types of images, and the combination pattern is a type of a specific gaming state. It is possible to show the player a combination of images preferable to the player according to the type of the specific gaming state as a display effect at the time of transition.

(A9) In the gaming machine according to (A8) above,
The transition display effect according to the specific gaming state of a predetermined type has a predetermined combination pattern in which the plurality of types of images are combined in a predetermined combination.
In the transition display effect according to the specific gaming state of another type, another combination pattern is configured by reducing one or a plurality of images among the plurality of types of images included in the predetermined combination pattern. A gaming machine characterized by being able to play.

According to the gaming machine according to the above (A9), the transition display effect according to a predetermined type of specific gaming state has a predetermined combination pattern in which a plurality of types of images are combined in a predetermined combination, and is different. In the transition display effect according to the specific gaming state of the type, another combination pattern is configured by reducing one or a plurality of images among the plurality of types of images included in the predetermined combination pattern. As a result, for the gaming machine, the processing load when determining the transition display effect according to the type of the specific gaming state is reduced. Further, since the combination pattern of the transition display effect is determined for each type of the specific game state, it becomes easy to provide the player with the transition display effect associated with the type of the specific game state.

(A10) In the gaming machine according to (A1) above,
The transition display effect is such that a plurality of types of images are continuously executed in a predetermined combination.
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a specific result, the predetermined combination is displayed in a different combination according to the type of the identification information variation display effect corresponding to the specific result.
The non-arrival suggestion information suggests to the player that the start timing of the next gaming state has not arrived until the timing at which the plurality of types of images are continuously executed in the predetermined combination. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine according to the above (A10), the transition display effect is continuously executed in a predetermined combination of a plurality of types of images. When the result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes a specific result, the predetermined combination is displayed in a different combination according to the identification information variation display effect corresponding to the specific result. As a result, the same specific result as the specific result that generates a certain type of specific game state is obtained, but when the type of the identification information variation display effect up to the specific result is different, the same transition display effect is displayed. It is possible to reduce the disadvantages caused by this. In addition, during the transition display effect, it is suggested that the start timing of the next gaming state has not arrived by the non-arrival suggestion information until the timing when a plurality of types of images are continuously executed in a predetermined combination. Even when the same specific result is displayed but different transition display effects are displayed, the risk of suffering the above-mentioned disadvantage is reduced.

(A11) In the gaming machine according to (A9) above,
The transition display effect has a plurality of combination patterns in which a predetermined image is combined from the plurality of types of images.
The combination pattern is a gaming machine characterized in that the combination pattern differs depending on the length of time during which the identification information variation display effect is performed.

According to the gaming machine described in (A11), the transition display effect has a plurality of combination patterns in which a predetermined image is combined from a plurality of types of images, and the combination pattern is an identification information variation display effect. It is possible to show the player a combination of images preferable to the player according to the length of time of the identification information variation display effect as the transition display effect.

(A12) In the gaming machine according to (A9) above,
The transition display effect has a plurality of combination patterns in which a predetermined image is combined from the plurality of types of images.
The combination pattern is a gaming machine characterized in that the combination pattern differs depending on the degree of expectation that the specific result is generated in the identification information variation display effect.

According to the gaming machine described in (A12), the transition display effect has a plurality of combination patterns in which a predetermined image is combined from a plurality of types of images, and the combination pattern is an identification information variation display effect. By differently depending on the degree of expectation that a specific result will occur in the above, it is possible to show the player a combination of images that is preferable for the player according to the degree of expectation that a specific result will occur in the identification information variation display effect as a transition display effect. can.

(A13) In the gaming machine according to (A9) above,
The transition display effect has a plurality of combination patterns in which a predetermined image is combined from the plurality of types of images.
The combination pattern is characterized in that it differs depending on the number of times the identification information variation display effect is executed from the occurrence of the specific gaming state last time to the next occurrence of the specific gaming state.

According to the gaming machine described in (A13), the transition display effect has a plurality of combination patterns in which predetermined images are combined from a plurality of types of images, and the combination pattern is the previous specific gaming state. Is different depending on the number of times the identification information variation display effect is executed from the occurrence of the occurrence to the next occurrence of the specific gaming state, so that the specific gaming state occurs next after the previous specific gaming state occurs. It is possible to show the player a combination of images preferable to the player as a transition display effect according to the number of executions of the identification information variation display effect up to.

(A14) In the gaming machine according to (A1) above,
In the combination pattern, the result of the lottery by the lottery means that triggers the entry into the ball entry means becomes a specific result, or the result of the lottery by the lottery means that triggers the entry into the variable ball entry means. A gaming machine characterized in that the combination of the plurality of types of images in the transition display effect differs depending on whether a specific result is obtained.

According to the gaming machine described in (A14) above, in the combination pattern, the result of the lottery by the lottery means that triggers the entry into the ball entry means becomes a specific result, or the combination pattern is triggered by the entry into the variable ball entry means. The combination of a plurality of types of images in the transition display effect differs depending on whether the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a specific result. As a result, it is possible to show the player a combination of images preferable to the player according to the difference in the opportunity of the lottery as a display effect at the time of transition.

(A15) In the gaming machine according to (A3) above,
The non-arrival suggestion information is a gaming machine that suggests to the player that the start timing of the next gaming state has not arrived immediately after the end of the final round in the round gaming state. ..

According to the gaming machine described in (A15), the non-arrival suggestion information suggests to the player that the start timing of the next gaming state has not arrived immediately after the end of the final round in the round gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused as a result of misidentifying that the game is shifting to the next gaming state immediately after the end of the final round in the round gaming state.

(A16) In the gaming machine according to (A3) above,
The gaming machine characterized in that the non-arrival suggestion information suggests to the player that the start timing of the next gaming state has not arrived at the same time as the execution of the transition display effect.

According to the gaming machine described in (A16), it is suggested to the player that the start timing of the next gaming state has not arrived at the same time as the execution of the transition display effect. It is possible to reduce the disadvantages that occur as a result of misidentifying that the game is shifting to the next gaming state at the same time as the execution of.

(A17) In the gaming machine according to (A3) above,
The non-arrival suggestion information tells the player that the start timing of the next gaming state has not arrived after a predetermined time has elapsed from the execution of the transition display effect during the execution of the transition display effect. A gaming machine characterized by being suggestive.

According to the gaming machine described in (A17), the start timing of the next gaming state has not arrived after a predetermined time has elapsed from the execution of the transition display effect during the execution of the transition display effect. Since it is a suggestion to the player, it is not possible as a result of misidentifying that the transition display effect is being executed, but the transition to the next game state has occurred after a predetermined time has elapsed from the execution of the transition display effect. Profit can be reduced.

(A18) The game state shifts from a predetermined state (for example, a jackpot round game state, a self-character selection state of a confrontation type reach development effect) to the next state (for example, a support game state, a confrontation execution state of a confrontation type reach development effect). In this case, from the predetermined timing of the predetermined state (for example, after the end of the final round, the selection of the own character starts) to the predetermined timing of the next state (for example, the start timing of the support game state, the confrontation start timing of the confrontation type reach development effect). ), And the execution means for executing the transition display effect (for example, the jackpot ending effect, the self-character selection effect of the confrontation type reach development effect) that displays a predetermined image on the display means.
Non-arrival suggestion information (for example, end-of-term proximity information 44e of specific operation period, ending right-handed information 44k,) suggesting to the player that the start timing of the next state has not arrived during the execution of the transition display effect. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a notification means for notifying a player of next game state proximity information 44l and ending countdown information 44v).

According to the gaming machine according to the above (A18), the gaming state is changed from a predetermined state (for example, a jackpot round gaming state, a state in which the player can select the own character of the confrontation type reach development effect) to the next state (for example, a support gaming state, a confrontation type). When shifting to the reach development effect confrontation execution state), the predetermined timing of the predetermined state (for example, after the end of the final round, the start of selecting the own character) is changed to the predetermined timing of the next state (for example, the start of the support game state). An execution means for executing a transition display effect (for example, a jackpot ending effect, a confrontation type reach development effect) that displays a predetermined image on the display means until the timing, the confrontation start timing of the confrontation type reach development effect, and a transition display effect. Unarrival suggestion information (for example, end-of-term proximity information 44e of specific operation period, ending right-handed information 44k, next game state proximity information 44l) suggesting to the player that the start timing of the next state has not arrived during the execution of , Ending countdown information 44v) is provided with a notification means for notifying the player. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the current state in which the transitional display effect is being executed is in a predetermined state, in other words, the current time in which the transitional display effect is being executed is not yet in the next state. Become. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by misidentifying that the current state in which the transition display effect is being executed is the next state.

(A19) In the gaming machine according to (A18) above,
The predetermined state is a predetermined gaming state (for example, a jackpot round gaming state), and the next state is the next gaming state (for example, a support gaming state) that occurs after the predetermined gaming state. The predetermined timing of the predetermined state is the final stage of the predetermined gaming state (for example, the timing after the end of the final round), and the predetermined timing of the next state is the start timing of the next gaming state (support gaming state). (Start timing of Machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (A19), the gaming machines described in (A1) to (A17) can be realized.

(A20) In the gaming machine according to (A18) above,
The predetermined state is a predetermined display state (self-character selectable state) in a predetermined display effect (for example, a confrontation type reach development effect), and the next state is a predetermined display state in the predetermined display effect. It is the next display state (confrontation execution state) that occurs next, and the predetermined timing of the predetermined state is a predetermined timing in the predetermined display effect (for example, the own character selection start timing of the reach development effect). The predetermined timing of the next state is a predetermined timing in the next display state (for example, the confrontation start timing of the confrontation type reach development effect), and the unarrival suggestion information (for example, the end-of-term proximity information 44e of the specific operation period) is notified. A game machine characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine described in (A20), the predetermined state is a predetermined display state (self-character selectable state) in a predetermined display effect (for example, a confrontation type reach development effect), and the next state is It is the next display state (confrontation execution state) that occurs next to the predetermined display state in the predetermined display effect, and the predetermined timing of the predetermined state is the predetermined timing (for example, reach development effect) in the predetermined display effect. The own character selection start timing), and the predetermined timing of the next state is the predetermined timing in the next display state (for example, the confrontation start timing of the confrontation type reach development effect), and the unarrival suggestion information (for example, specific). Notify the end-of-operation period proximity information 44e). As a result, the player can see that the current time when the transition display effect is being executed is the predetermined display state in the predetermined display effect, in other words, the current time when the transition display effect is being executed is still the predetermined display effect. It becomes easy to recognize that it is not the next display state in. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by misidentifying that the current time when the transition display effect is being executed is the next display state in the predetermined display effect.

(A21) In the gaming machine according to (A20) above,
In the transition display effect (for example, the self-character selection effect of the confrontation type reach development effect), a plurality of types of images (for example, first player information PYA, second player information PYB, third player information PYC, fourth player information) are used. It is executed continuously in a predetermined combination,
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a specific result, the predetermined combination is displayed in a different combination according to the type of the specific result (for example, in the case of a probabilistic jackpot, the first player information PYA to the fourth). Player information PYD is displayed, and in the case of a normal jackpot, 1st player information PYA to 3rd player information PYC are displayed),
The non-arrival suggestion information (for example, the proximity information 44e at the end of the specific operation period) is used until the timing when the plurality of types of images are continuously executed in the predetermined combination (for example, from the first player information PYA to the fourth player information PYD). A gaming machine characterized in that it suggests to the player that the start timing of the next display state has not arrived (until two rounds of display).

According to the gaming machine described in (A21), the transition display effect (for example, the self-character selection effect of the confrontation type reach development effect) includes a plurality of types of images (for example, first player information PYA, second player information PYB, etc.). The third player information PYC, the fourth player information PYD) are continuously executed in a predetermined combination, and the predetermined combination is the specific combination when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a specific result. It is displayed in different combinations depending on the type of result (for example, in the case of a probabilistic jackpot, it is displayed from the first player information PYA to the fourth player information PYD, and in the case of a normal jackpot, it is displayed from the first player information PYA to the third player information PYC. (Displayed), the unarrival suggestion information (for example, the end-of-term proximity information 44e of the specific operation period) is from the first player information PYA until the timing when a plurality of types of images are continuously executed in a predetermined combination (for example, if it is a probability variation jackpot). It is intended to suggest to the player that the start timing of the next display state has not arrived (until two rounds of the display of the fourth player information PYD). As a result, conventionally, if the player mistakenly recognizes that the end timing of the display time of a certain image in the transition display effect is the end timing of a series of transition display effects, the subsequent image is displayed. There is a risk of mistaking the time as being transferred to the next playing state, which will result in a disadvantage. However, in the present invention, during the transition display effect, the start timing of the next gaming state has not arrived due to the unarrival suggestion information until the timing at which the plurality of types of images are continuously executed in the predetermined combination. Is suggested, the risk of suffering the above-mentioned disadvantages is reduced.

<Second task>
Conventionally, as this type of gaming machine, for example, when the player operates the operating means within a predetermined period during the identification information fluctuation display (for example, the high-speed fluctuation period of the symbol), this operating means is used. For example, an image for volume adjustment operation for performing a setting operation such as volume adjustment is displayed, and the operation means is operated outside the predetermined period (for example, reach display period) during the identification information fluctuation display. In some cases, there is a gaming machine that does not display the image for volume adjustment operation (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-193546 (page 43, FIG. 28)).
However, in the case of the conventional example having such a configuration, there are the following problems.
That is, it is easy to misunderstand that the predetermined period has not passed even though the predetermined period during the identification information fluctuation display has passed, and the volume adjustment operation period has elapsed without the volume adjustment operation being performed. Therefore, there is a problem that the player cannot enjoy the identification information fluctuation display at a comfortable volume.
The invention according to the following (B1) was made in view of such circumstances, and has a disadvantage caused by misunderstanding that it is possible to display an image for specific operation at the present time during the identification information fluctuation display. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can be reduced.

(B1) When the player operates the operation means (for example, the decision button 81) within a predetermined period (for example, the display period of the normal screen 43a, the demo screen 43b, and the high-speed changing screen 43c), at least the operation is performed. Displaying a specific operation image (for example, displaying a specific operation screen 44b having a volume control display) for performing a specific operation (volume adjustment operation) using means is executed, and the period outside the predetermined period (for example, reach display period) is executed. ), When the operation of the operation means is performed, the execution means that does not execute the display of the image for specific operation and the execution means.
Non-arrival suggestion information that suggests to the player that the end timing of the displayable period of the specific operation image has not arrived during the predetermined period (for example, information 44a during the specific operation period described later, the end of the specific operation period). A gaming machine provided with a notification means for notifying a player of proximity information 44e).

According to the gaming machine according to the above (B1), the executing means is for causing at least a specific operation using the operating means when the operating means is operated by the player within a predetermined period. The display of the image for specific operation is executed, and when the operation of the operation means is performed outside the predetermined period, the display of the image for specific operation is not executed. The notifying means notifies the player of the non-arrival suggestion information suggesting to the player that the end timing of the displayable period of the specific operation image has not arrived during this predetermined period. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the end timing of the displayable period of the specific operation image has not yet arrived at the present time, in other words, the display of the specific operation image is possible at the present time. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by misunderstanding that the image for specific operation can be displayed at the present time.

(B2) In the gaming machine described in (B1) above,
The gaming machine, characterized in that the non-arrival suggestion information includes a specific operable period notification image for notifying that the specific operation image is a displayable period.

According to the gaming machine described in (B2) above, the non-arrival suggestion information includes a specific operable period notification image for notifying that the specific operation image is a displayable period. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the predetermined period during the identification information variation display is the period during which the specific operation can be performed.

(B3) In the gaming machine according to (B1) above,
The non-arrival suggestion information includes a remaining time notification image that informs the remaining time of the displayable period of the specific operation image or a remaining time suggestion image that suggests the remaining time of the displayable period of the specific operation image. A featured gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (B3), the non-arrival suggestion information is the remaining time of the displayable period of the specific operation image or the remaining time notification image for notifying the remaining time of the displayable period of the specific operation image. Includes suggested remaining time suggestive images. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the remaining time of the period during which the specific operation can be performed in the predetermined period during the identification information variation display.

(B4) The non-arrival suggestion information is characterized in that, if the specific operation image is displayed within the predetermined period, a non-notification period is provided in which the non-arrival suggestion information is not notified thereafter. Gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (B4) above, if the non-arrival suggestion information is displayed in the specific operation image within a predetermined period, the non-notification that does not execute the display of the specific operation image is not performed thereafter. There will be a period. As a result, the image for specific operation is frequently displayed within a predetermined period (that is, the player performs an operation to display the image for specific operation), and the effect within the predetermined period is sufficiently seen by the player. It can be reduced that it cannot be used.

(B5) In the gaming machine according to (B1) above,
The gaming machine characterized in that the non-arrival suggestion information is continuously notified even when the image for specific operation is displayed within the predetermined period.

According to the gaming machine described in (B5) above, the non-arrival suggestion information is continuously notified even when the image for specific operation is displayed within a predetermined period. As a result, even when a specific operation for displaying a specific operation image is performed, the player can easily correct the content within a predetermined period.

(B6) In the gaming machine according to (B1) above,
The gaming machine characterized in that the non-arrival suggestion information is displayed even while the image for specific operation is being displayed.

According to the gaming machine described in (B6), the non-arrival suggestion information is displayed even during the display of the specific operation image. As a result, the player recognizes the end timing of the displayable period of the specific operation image even when viewing the display screen of the specific operation screen after seeing the non-arrival suggestion information and operating the operation means. It will be easier.

(B7) In the gaming machine according to (B1) above,
A gaming machine characterized in that the image being displayed can be visually recognized even while the image for specific operation is being displayed.

According to the gaming machine described in (B7), the image being displayed during the predetermined period can be visually recognized even while the image for specific operation is being displayed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize what the displayed image will look like during the predetermined period even while the specific operation screen is being displayed.

(B8) In the gaming machine according to (B1) above,
The non-arrival suggestion information can be displayed within the high-speed fluctuation period during the identification information fluctuation display period, and cannot be displayed after the high-speed fluctuation period even during the identification information fluctuation display period. A game machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (B8) above, the non-arrival suggestion information can be displayed within the high-speed fluctuation period during the identification information fluctuation display period, and even during the identification information fluctuation display period, after the high-speed fluctuation period. Is not displayable. As a result, even during the identification information fluctuation display period, after the high-speed fluctuation period ends, the period is the period that the player wants to see / the player wants to see (variation display result display and reach effect). Is displayed, which can reduce inconvenience.

(B9) In the gaming machine according to (B1) above,
The non-arrival suggestion information is the next in the specific gaming state when the specific gaming state shifts to the next gaming state and the specific operation image cannot be displayed in the next gaming state. A gaming machine characterized in that it can be displayed during the production at the time of transition to the gaming state.

According to the gaming machine described in (B9), the non-arrival suggestion information is a case where the specific gaming state shifts to the next gaming state, and the image for specific operation cannot be displayed in the next gaming state. In this case, it can be displayed during the transition to the next gaming state in the specific gaming state. As a result, it is possible to reduce the inconvenience caused by the inability to perform the specific operation after the specific gaming state shifts to the next gaming state.

<Third task>
Conventionally, as this type of gaming machine, for example, there is a gaming machine in which a right-handed gaming is performed in a gaming state with a jackpot round gaming state and a subsequent support state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-255733 (No. 2 to No. 2). Page 3)).
However, in the case of the conventional example having such a configuration, there are the following problems.
That is, since it is necessary to notify the player that this type of gaming machine is a right-handed gaming during a jackpot round gaming state or a gaming state with a support status thereafter, the main display screen or LED is used. Notification that it is a right-handed game is being performed. This right-handed notification is also performed during the ending effect performed after the end of the final round in the jackpot round gaming state. Therefore, even though the jackpot round game has ended during the ending production period and the support state has not started, the player is hitting right with the right-handed notification, causing a waste ball. There's a problem.
The invention according to the following (C1) is made in view of such circumstances, and is a gaming machine capable of reducing the disadvantage caused by misunderstanding that the present time is the execution timing of the right-handed game. The purpose is to provide.
The invention according to the following (C1) has the following configuration in order to achieve such an object.

(C1) A first notification means for performing right-handed notification to notify the player that the game is to be performed by right-handed in a predetermined gaming state.
A second notification means for performing right-handed notification to notify the player that the game is to be performed by right-handed in the next gaming state that occurs after the end of the predetermined gaming state.
When shifting from the predetermined gaming state to the next gaming state, the transition of displaying a predetermined image on the display means from the end timing of the right-handed game in the predetermined gaming state to the start timing of the next gaming state. Equipped with an execution means to execute the time display effect,
The first notification means performs right-handed notification in the first aspect during the right-handed game in the predetermined gaming state, and changes to a mode different from the first aspect during the execution of the transition display effect. A gaming machine characterized by performing right-handed notification in a mode.

According to the gaming machine described in (C1), the first notification means performs right-handed notification to notify the player that the game is to be played by right-handed in a predetermined gaming state. The second notification means performs right-handed notification to notify the player that the game is to be performed by right-handed in the next game state that occurs after the end of the predetermined game state. When the execution means shifts from a predetermined gaming state to the next gaming state, the execution means shifts to display a predetermined image on the display means from the end timing of the right-handed game in the predetermined gaming state to the start timing of the next gaming state. Execute the time display effect. The first notification means performs right-handed notification in the first aspect during the right-handed game in a predetermined gaming state, and right in the second aspect changed to a mode different from the first aspect during the execution of the transition display effect. Make a hit notification. As a result, the player has a predetermined game at the present time due to the difference in the notification mode between the right-handed notification performed until the transition display effect is executed in the predetermined game state and the right-handed notification during the transition display effect. It is easy to notice that the display effect at the time of transition is being executed, not the right-handed game in the state, and it is not the execution timing of the right-handed game. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by misidentifying that the current time during which the transition display effect is being executed is the execution timing of the right-handed game.

(C2) In the gaming machine according to (C1) above,
The predetermined game state is a round in which a round game is performed a predetermined number of times from the opening state to the closing state of the specific ball entry means, based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means being a specific result. It is in a game state,
The next gaming state is an advantageous gaming state that occurs after the end of the round gaming state, which is advantageous for the player, based on the result of the lottery being the specific result.
The transition display effect is executed from the end timing of the final round in the round gaming state to the start timing of the advantageous gaming state when shifting from the round gaming state to the advantageous gaming state.
The first notification means is a gaming machine characterized in that during the round game, right-handed notification is performed in the first aspect, and during execution of the transition display effect, right-handed notification is performed in the second aspect.

According to the gaming machine described in (C2), the predetermined gaming state is from the opening state to the closed state of the specific ball entry means based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means being a specific result. It is a round game state in which a round game of one round is performed a predetermined number of times. The next gaming state is an advantageous gaming state that occurs after the end of the round gaming state, which is advantageous for the player, based on the result of the lottery being a specific result. The transition display effect is executed from the end timing of the final round in the round gaming state to the start timing of the advantageous gaming state when shifting from the round gaming state to the advantageous gaming state. The first notification means performs right-handed notification in the first aspect during the round game, and right-handed notification in the second aspect during the execution of the transition display effect. As a result, the player is not currently in the round game but is executing the transition display effect due to the difference in the notification mode between the right-handed notification during the round game and the right-handed notification during the transition display effect. , It becomes easy to notice that it is not the execution timing of the right-handed game. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by misidentifying that the current time during which the transition display effect is being executed is the execution timing of the right-handed game in the advantageous gaming state.

(C3) In the gaming machine according to (C1) above,
The second aspect is a gaming machine characterized in that it is more difficult for a player to perform a right-handed operation than the first aspect.

According to the gaming machine described in (C3), the second aspect of the right-handed notification is a mode in which it is more difficult for the player to perform the right-handed operation than the first aspect of the right-handed notification. As a result, the recognition that the execution timing of the right-handed game is during the transition display effect is lowered, so that the current time during the transition display effect is misunderstood as the execution timing of the right-handed game in the advantageous gaming state. It is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by doing so. The mode in which the right-handed operation is difficult to be performed is, for example, an image that discourages the right-handed operation or an image in which the right-handed operation is inconspicuous, which will be described later.

(C4) In the gaming machine according to (C1) above,
The second aspect is a gaming machine characterized in that it is less noticeable to the player than the first aspect.

According to the gaming machine described in (C4), the second aspect of the right-handed notification is a mode that is less noticeable to the player than the first aspect of the right-handed notification. As a result, the recognition that the execution timing of the right-handed game is during the transition display effect is lowered, so that the current time during the transition display effect is misunderstood as the execution timing of the right-handed game in the advantageous gaming state. It is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by doing so. Inconspicuous aspects are, for example, that if the right-handed notification is an image, the size of the image is small and the color of the image is light. The image of the right-handed notification may be gradually reduced, or the color of the image may be gradually reduced.

(C5) In the gaming machine according to (C1) above,
The first notification means is a gaming machine characterized in that, at the final stage of the transition display effect, right-handed notification is performed in a third aspect suggesting that the second aspect returns to the first aspect.

According to the gaming machine described in (C5), the first notification means performs right-handed notification in a third aspect suggesting that the second aspect returns to the first aspect at the final stage of the transition display effect. As a result, right-handed notification can be quickly resumed at the timing when the transition display effect shifts to the next gaming state.

(C6) A first notification means for performing right-handed notification to notify the player that the game is to be performed by right-handed in a predetermined gaming state.
A second notification means for performing right-handed notification to notify the player that the game is to be performed by right-handed in the next gaming state that occurs after the end of the predetermined gaming state.
When shifting from the predetermined gaming state to the next gaming state, the transition of displaying a predetermined image on the display means from the end timing of the right-handed game in the predetermined gaming state to the start timing of the next gaming state. Execution means to execute the time display effect,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the transition display effect, the next gaming state proximity information notifying means for notifying the next gaming state proximity information indicating that the start timing of the next gaming state is approaching.

According to the gaming machine described in (C6), the next gaming state proximity information notification means notifies the next gaming state proximity information indicating that the start timing of the next gaming state is approaching in the transition display effect. do. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by misidentifying that the current time during which the transition display effect is being executed is the execution timing of the right-handed game in the next game state.

(C7) A first notification means for performing right-handed notification to notify the player that the game is to be performed by right-handed in a predetermined gaming state.
A second notification means for performing right-handed notification to notify the player that the game is to be performed by right-handed in the next gaming state that occurs after the end of the predetermined gaming state.
When shifting from the predetermined gaming state to the next gaming state, the transition of displaying a predetermined image on the display means from the end timing of the right-handed game in the predetermined gaming state to the start timing of the next gaming state. Execution means to execute the time display effect,
The game is characterized by comprising a next game operation start time proximity information notifying means for notifying the proximity information of the next game operation start time indicating that the start timing of the right-handed operation for the next game state is approaching. Machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (C7), the next game operation start time proximity information notification means notifies the next game operation start time proximity information indicating that the start timing of the next game state is approaching. This makes it easier to grasp the start timing of the right-handed operation for the next gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by not being able to properly grasp the start timing of the right-handed operation for the next gaming state.

(C8) In the gaming machine according to (C7) above,
The next game operation start time proximity information notification means is a gaming machine characterized in that the next game operation start time proximity information is notified from the transition display effect to the next game state.

According to the gaming machine described in (C8), the next game operation start time proximity information notification means notifies the next game operation start time proximity information from the transition display effect to the next game state. As a result, it is possible to be aware of the right-handed operation for the next game state from the period of the transition display effect, and to quickly execute the right-handed operation at an appropriate timing after entering the next game state.

(C9) In the gaming machine according to (C7) above,
The next game operation start time proximity information notification means is a gaming machine characterized in that the next game operation start time proximity information is notified in the transition time display effect.

According to the gaming machine described in (C9), the next game operation start time proximity information notification means notifies the next game operation start time proximity information in the transition time display effect. As a result, the player can execute the right-handed operation for the next game state at an appropriate timing during the transition display effect.

<Fourth task>
Conventionally, as a gaming machine of this kind, for example, there is a gaming machine in which a player can change the volume (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-089649 (pages 41 to 42)).
However, in the case of the conventional example having such a configuration, there are the following problems.
That is, this type of gaming machine has a problem that the operation of changing the volume by the player is not interesting.
The invention according to the following (D1) has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player's operation of changing the volume. ..
The invention according to the following (D1) has the following configuration in order to achieve such an object.

(D1) A display means capable of displaying a display effect related to a game,
A sound output means that outputs sound according to the display effect,
Operation means that can be operated by the player,
A volume change control means capable of changing the volume of the sound output from the sound output means based on the operation to the operation means, and a volume change control means.
The volume change control means is a gaming machine characterized in that an operation sound at the time of volume change can be a sound related to the display effect displayed during a period in which the volume can be changed.

According to the gaming machine described in (D1), a display means capable of displaying a display effect, a sound output means for outputting sound according to the display effect, an operation means capable of being operated by a player, and an operation means. The volume change control means that can change the volume of the sound output from the sound output means based on the operation to, and the volume change control means display the operation sound at the time of volume change during the period when the volume can be changed. It is possible to make the sound related to the production. As a result, the player can change the volume while listening to the sound related to the display effect when the volume is changed, so that the player can improve the interest of the operation of changing the volume.

(D2) In the gaming machine according to (D1) above,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the operation sound is a sound related to the changed display effect when the display effect at the time of changing the volume is changed to a different display effect.

According to the gaming machine described in (D2), the operation sound is a sound related to the changed display effect when the display effect at the time of changing the volume is changed to a different display effect. As a result, when the volume is changed, the player can change the volume while listening to the sound related to the display effect displayed at the time of the change operation, so that the optimum volume can be set at the time of the change operation.

(D3) In the gaming machine according to (D1) above,
The operation sound is a sound related to the display effect when the display effect at the time of changing the volume is a predetermined display effect that can be associated with the display effect, and the display effect at the time of changing the volume is a predetermined association. A gaming machine characterized in that the sound is not related to the display effect when the display effect is impossible.

According to the gaming machine described in (D3), the operation sound is a sound related to the display effect when the display effect at the time of changing the volume is a predetermined and associable display effect, and the volume is changed. When the time display effect is a predetermined display effect that cannot be associated, it is a sound that is not related to the display effect. As a result, when the display effect at the time of changing the volume is a predetermined display effect that cannot be associated, the player is given discomfort or inconvenience by forcibly associating the display effect that is inappropriate for the association. Can be prevented.

(D4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (D1) to (D3) above.
The display means is a gaming machine characterized in that the display effect and volume information can be displayed when the volume is changed.

According to the gaming machine described in (D4), the display means can display the display effect and the volume information when the volume is changed. As a result, when the volume is changed, the player can change the volume while watching the display effect and listening to the sound related to the display effect, so that the player can improve the fun of the operation of changing the volume.

(D5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (D1) to (D4) above.
The gaming machine characterized in that the image of the display effect displayed during the volume change operation is displayed in a smaller size than the image of the display effect displayed before the volume change operation.

According to the gaming machine described in (D5), the image of the display effect displayed during the volume change operation is displayed in a smaller size than the image of the display effect displayed before the volume change operation. .. As a result, the image of the display effect is reduced during the volume change operation, so that the volume change operation becomes easy. In addition, the player can check the displayed display effect on the reduced image while performing the volume change operation, so he / she does not have to worry that the display effect may end during the volume change operation. In addition, you can change the volume with confidence.

(D6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (D1) to (D4) above.
A gaming machine characterized in that, at least a part of the image of the display effect displayed during the volume change operation is superimposed behind the image for the volume change operation in a visible manner.

According to the gaming machine according to the above (D6), the image of the display effect displayed during the volume change operation is superimposed at least partly behind the image for the volume change operation in a visible manner. Is displayed. As a result, a sufficient area for displaying an image for the volume change operation can be secured, so that the volume change operation becomes easy. Also, while the player is performing the volume change operation, the display effect being displayed can be confirmed by the image displayed superimposed on the back, so the display effect may end during the volume change operation. You can change the volume without worrying about it.

<Fifth task>
Conventionally, as this type of gaming machine, for example, there is a gaming machine in which a display effect for displaying information that can be visually recognized by a player is performed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-081588 (pages 44 to 46)).
However, in the case of the conventional example having such a configuration, there are the following problems.
That is, this type of gaming machine has a problem that the pattern in which information is displayed is fixed, so that the display effect is not interesting.
The invention according to the following (E1) has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of display production.
The invention according to the following (E1) has the following configuration in order to achieve such an object.

(E1)
Display means that can display display effects related to games,
A display control means for controlling the display of the display effect on the display means in a predetermined pattern is provided.
The predetermined pattern is
A first pattern in which predetermined display information is displayed in a predetermined display time and in a predetermined display mode, and
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined display information has a display time shorter than the predetermined display time and a second pattern displayed in a display mode different from the predetermined display mode.

According to the gaming machine according to the above (E1), a display means capable of displaying a display effect related to the game and a display control means for controlling the display effect to be displayed on the display means in a predetermined pattern are provided, and a predetermined value is provided. The pattern is different from the first pattern in which the predetermined display information is displayed in the predetermined display time and in the predetermined display mode, and the predetermined display information has a display time shorter than the predetermined display time and is different from the predetermined display mode. It has a second pattern displayed in a display mode. As a result, it is possible to execute the display effect in various variations in which the display time for displaying the predetermined display information and the display mode are different. As a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the display effect.

(E2) In the gaming machine according to (E1) above,
The first pattern is a pattern in which the predetermined display information is displayed in a predetermined order.
The second pattern is a gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined display information is displayed in a shortened state in which the predetermined display time is shortened while maintaining the predetermined order.

According to the gaming machine described in (E2), the first pattern is a pattern in which predetermined display information is displayed in a predetermined order, and the second pattern is a predetermined display information in a predetermined order. It is a pattern that is displayed in a shortened state in which the display time of is shortened. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the display effect without impairing the identity of the content and the way of displaying the display effect between the first pattern and the second pattern.

(E3) In the gaming machine according to (E1) above,
The first pattern is a pattern in which the predetermined display information is displayed in a predetermined order.
The second pattern is a gaming machine characterized in that it is a pattern displayed in a composite state in which the predetermined information displayed in the predetermined order is combined.

According to the gaming machine described in (E3), the first pattern is a pattern in which predetermined display information is displayed in a predetermined order, and the second pattern is a predetermined information displayed in a predetermined order. It is a pattern that is displayed in a compounded state. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the display effect without impairing the identity of the content of the display effect between the first pattern and the second pattern.

(E4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (E1) to (E3) above.
A gaming machine characterized in that the length of the display period of the display effect executed in the first pattern and the length of the display period of the display effect executed in the second pattern are the same.

According to the gaming machine described in (E4), the length of the display period of the display effect executed in the first pattern is the same as the length of the display period of the display effect executed in the second pattern. As a result, in the display effect executed in the second pattern, by shortening the display time for displaying the predetermined display information, it is possible to increase the variation of the display effect by utilizing the surplus time generated.

(E5) In the gaming machines described in (E1) to (E4) above,
The predetermined display information is a gaming machine characterized in that it is ending effect information after a jackpot round game.

According to the gaming machine described in (E5), the predetermined display information is the ending effect information after the jackpot round game. This makes it possible to increase the variation of the ending effect after the jackpot round game.

(E6) In the gaming machines described in (E1) to (E4) above,
The gaming machine, characterized in that the predetermined display information is suggestive effect information displayed during the reach effect.

According to the gaming machine according to the above (E6), it is the suggestion effect information displayed during the reach effect. It is possible to increase the variation of the suggestion effect displayed during the reach effect.

<Sixth task>
Conventionally, as this type of gaming machine, for example, there is a gaming machine in which a display effect for displaying information that can be visually recognized by a player is performed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-081588 (pages 44 to 46)). Even in this type of gaming machine, a display accompanied by an operation of the operating means may be performed in the middle of the display effect.
However, in the case of the conventional example having such a configuration, there are the following problems.
That is, this type of gaming machine has a problem that the fun of the display effect is reduced because a part of the display effect is replaced with the display accompanied by the operation of the operation means.
The invention according to the following (F1) has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of display production.
The invention according to the following (F1) has the following configuration in order to achieve such an object.

(F1)
Display means for displaying display effects related to games,
An operation means that can be operated by the player according to the display effect,
A display control means for controlling the display of the display effect on the display means is provided.
The display control means is
An operation request execution means that controls the display of an operation request image that requests the player to operate the operation means during the display effect, and an operation request execution means.
The operation display effect execution means for controlling the display of the operation display effect using the operation means during the display effect, triggered by the player's operation on the operation request image, is provided.
The predetermined pattern is
A first pattern in which predetermined display information is displayed in a predetermined display time and in a predetermined display mode when the operation request image is displayed and the player does not perform an operation on the operation request image.
When the operation request image is displayed and the player performs an operation on the operation request image, the predetermined display information is displayed in a shorter display time than the first pattern and different from the first pattern. A gaming machine characterized in that it is displayed in an embodiment and has a second pattern in which the operation display effect is executed after the display of the predetermined display information is completed.

According to the gaming machine described in (F1), a display means for displaying a display effect related to a game, an operation means that can be operated by a player according to the display effect, and a control for displaying the display effect on the display means are performed. The display control means includes an operation request execution means for controlling the display of the operation request image requesting the player to operate the operation means during the display effect, and the player's operation on the operation request image. The operation display effect execution means for controlling the display of the operation display effect using the operation means during the display effect is provided, and the predetermined pattern is such that the operation request image is displayed and the operation request image is displayed. When the player does not perform the operation, the first pattern in which the predetermined display information is displayed in the predetermined display time and in the predetermined display mode, the operation request image is displayed, and the game is performed with respect to the operation request image. When a person performs an operation, the predetermined display information is displayed in a display mode different from that of the first pattern with a shorter display time than the first pattern, and the operation display effect is displayed after the display of the predetermined display information is completed. It has a second pattern to be performed. As a result, when the operation means is effectively operated with respect to the operation request image, the interest of the display effect can be improved by entertaining the operation display effect without significantly impairing the interest of the display effect. can.

(F2) In the gaming machine described in (F1) above,
The first pattern is a pattern in which the predetermined display information is displayed in a predetermined order in the predetermined display time.
The second pattern is a gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined display information is displayed in a shortened state in which the predetermined display time is shortened while maintaining the predetermined order.

According to the gaming machine described in (F2), the first pattern is a pattern in which predetermined display information is displayed in a predetermined order in a predetermined display time, and the second pattern is a predetermined display information. It is a pattern that is displayed in a shortened state in which a predetermined display time is shortened while keeping the order of. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the operation display effect without impairing the identity of the content and the presentation of the display effect between the first pattern and the second pattern.

(F3) In the gaming machine described in (F1) above,
The first pattern is a pattern in which the predetermined display information is displayed in a predetermined order in the predetermined display time.
The second pattern is characterized in that it is displayed in a composite state in which the predetermined display time is shortened by displaying the predetermined display information displayed in the predetermined order in combination. A game machine to play.

According to the gaming machine described in (F3), the first pattern is a pattern in which predetermined display information is displayed in a predetermined order in a predetermined display time, and the second pattern is displayed in a predetermined order. This is a pattern in which the predetermined display information that has been displayed is displayed in a composite state, so that the predetermined display time is shortened and the predetermined display information is displayed in a composite state. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the operation display effect without impairing the identity of the content of the display effect between the first pattern and the second pattern.

(F4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (F1) to (F3).
A gaming machine characterized in that the length of the display period of the display effect executed in the first pattern and the length of the display period of the display effect executed in the second pattern are the same.

According to the gaming machine described in (E4), the length of the display period of the display effect executed in the first pattern is the same as the length of the display period of the display effect executed in the second pattern. As a result, in the display effect executed in the second pattern, by shortening the display time for displaying the predetermined display information, the generated surplus time can be used to increase the variation of the operation display effect. ..

(F5) In the gaming machines described in (F1) to (F4) above,
The predetermined display information is a gaming machine characterized in that it is ending effect information after a jackpot round game.

According to the gaming machine described in (F5), the predetermined display information is the ending effect information after the jackpot round game. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the operation display effect performed during the ending effect after the jackpot round game.

(F6) In the gaming machines described in (F1) to (F4) above,
The gaming machine, characterized in that the predetermined display information is suggestive effect information displayed during the reach effect.

According to the gaming machine described in (F6), the predetermined display information is suggestive effect information displayed during the reach effect. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the operation display effect performed during the suggestion effect displayed during the reach effect.

<7th task>
Conventionally, as a gaming machine of this kind, for example, there is a gaming machine that displays an ending image after the end of a jackpot round game (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-205375 (pages 89 to 90)).
However, in the case of the conventional example having such a configuration, there are the following problems.
That is, this type of gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult to further improve the fun of the ending effect.
The invention according to the following (G1) has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the ending production.
The invention according to the following (G1) has the following configuration in order to achieve such an object.

(G1)
A display means that can display a display effect triggered by a lottery based on the establishment of starting conditions,
A display control means for controlling the display of the display effect on the display means is provided.
The display control means is
A specific effect execution means for controlling the execution of a specific effect during the display effect, and a specific effect execution means.
Based on the result of the lottery being a specific result, the variable ball entry means is executed a predetermined number of times as one round from the open state in which the game ball can enter to the closed state in which the game ball cannot enter. A round game is provided with an ending effect executing means for controlling the display of an ending effect that displays predetermined information during the ending period from the end of the game to the start of the next game.
The ending effect executing means is a gaming machine capable of controlling to display information related to the specific effect executed during the display effect in the ending effect.

According to the gaming machine according to the above (G1), a display means capable of displaying a display effect triggered by a lottery based on the establishment of a start condition and a display control means for controlling the display effect to be displayed on the display means are provided. The display control means is open so that the game ball can enter the specific effect execution means that controls the execution of the specific effect during the display effect and the variable ball entry means based on the result of the lottery being the specific result. An ending that displays predetermined information during the ending period from the end of the round game to the start of the next game, which is executed a predetermined number of times as one round from the state to the closed state in which the game ball cannot enter. The ending effect executing means is provided with an ending effect executing means for controlling the display of the effect, and the ending effect executing means can control to display information related to the specific effect executed during the display effect in the ending effect. As a result, the ending effect and the display effect up to the ending effect are related by the specific effect, and the fun of the display effect continues to the ending effect through the specific effect, so that the fun of the ending effect can be improved. ..

(G2) In the gaming machine described in (G1) above,
A gaming machine characterized in that the information related to the specific effect is information indicating a component of the specific effect.

According to the gaming machine described in (G2), the information related to the specific effect is information indicating a component of the specific effect. This makes it easier to remember the display effect by displaying the components of the specific effect, so that the interest of the ending effect can be further improved.

(G3) In the gaming machine described in (G1) above,
The gaming machine characterized in that the information related to the specific effect is information indicating the influence given to the player by the specific effect.

According to the gaming machine described in (G3), the information related to the specific effect is information indicating the influence given to the player by the specific effect. As a result, it is possible to appeal to the player who has been influenced by the specific effect, so that the interest of the ending effect can be further improved.

(G4) In the gaming machines according to the above (G1) to (G3).
The display effect on which the specific effect is executed is a gaming machine characterized in that the display effect is a variable display effect of identification information that makes it possible to identify whether or not the result of the lottery is the specific result.

According to the gaming machine described in (G4), the display effect in which the specific effect is executed is a variable display effect of the identification information that makes it possible to identify whether or not the result of the lottery is the specific result. This makes it easier to remember the specific effect as well as the variable display effect, so that the fun of the ending effect can be improved.

(G5) In the gaming machine described in (G4) above,
A gaming machine characterized in that the display effect on which the specific effect is executed is a reach display effect of the identification information.

According to the gaming machine described in (G5), the display effect in which the specific effect is executed is the reach display effect of the identification information. This makes it easier to remember the specific effect as well as the reach display effect, so that the interest of the ending effect can be improved.

(G6) In the gaming machines according to the above (G1) to (G3).
A gaming machine characterized in that the display effect on which the specific effect is executed is a round display effect displayed during the round game.

According to the gaming machine described in (G6), the display effect in which the specific effect is executed is a round display effect displayed during the round game. This makes it easier to remember the specific effect as well as the round display effect, so that the fun of the ending effect can be improved.

(G7) In the gaming machines according to the above (G1) to (G6).
The gaming machine, characterized in that the specific effect is a specific suggestion effect that suggests that the possibility of the specific effect is higher than that in the case where the specific effect is not executed.

According to the gaming machine described in (G7), the specific effect is a specific suggestion effect that suggests that the possibility of a specific result is higher than that in the case where the specific effect is not executed. As a result, the player who understands the meaning of the suggestion can easily remember the specific suggestion effect, and thus the interest of the ending effect can be improved.

(G8) In the gaming machines according to the above (G1) to (G6).
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific effect is a specific notification effect that notifies that the possibility of the specific effect is higher than that in the case where the specific effect is not executed.

According to the gaming machine described in (G8), the specific effect is a specific notification effect that notifies that the possibility of a specific result is higher than that in the case where the specific effect is not executed. As a result, it becomes easier for the player who sees, hears, and experiences the notification to remember the specific notification effect, so that the interest of the ending effect can be improved.

(G9) In the gaming machines according to the above (G1) to (G8).
The display control means includes selection request execution means for controlling the display of a selection request image requesting a player to make a predetermined selection during the display effect.
The specific effect is a gaming machine characterized in that it is executed when there is a predetermined selection requested by the selection request image.

According to the gaming machine according to the above (G9), the display control means includes a selection request execution means for controlling the display of a selection request image requesting the player to make a predetermined selection during the display effect, and the specific effect is , Selection request Executed when there is a predetermined selection requested by the image. As a result, it becomes easy to remember the specific effect together with the predetermined selection requested by the operation request image, so that the interest of the ending effect can be improved.

(G10) In the gaming machines according to the above (G1) to (G9).
The selection request image is a gaming machine characterized in that it is displayed during a variable display effect of identification information that makes it possible to identify whether or not the result of the lottery is the specific result.

According to the gaming machine described in (G10), the selection request image is displayed during the variable display effect of the identification information that makes it possible to identify whether or not the result of the lottery is a specific result. As a result, the impression of the specific effect is likely to remain strong along with the variable display effect, and the fun of the ending effect can be improved.

(G11) In the gaming machines according to the above (G1) to (G9).
The gaming machine characterized in that the selection request image is displayed during the ending effect and at the same time as the information related to the specific effect or after displaying the information related to the specific effect.

According to the gaming machine described in (G11), the selection request image is displayed during the ending effect and at the same time as the information related to the specific effect or after displaying the information related to the specific effect. .. This makes it possible to reconsider whether or not to make a predetermined selection while looking at the information related to the specific effect or after seeing the information related to the specific effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the ending effect. ..

(G12) In the gaming machines according to the above (G1) to (G11).
The specific effect is a gaming machine including one that is executed when the specific effect can be executed by a lottery based on the establishment of the start condition.

According to the gaming machine described in (G12), the specific effect may be executed when the specific effect can be executed by a lottery based on the establishment of the start condition.

<8th task>
Conventionally, there are pachinko machines and slot machines as typical examples of gaming machines. Some gaming machines of this type include, for example, decorative parts having a light emitting region. (For example, refer to Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-100905 (pages 4 to 8, FIGS. 3 to 8)).
However, in the case of the conventional example having such a configuration, there are the following problems.
That is, in the conventional pachinko machine, for example, there is a problem that it is difficult to appropriately change the light emitting region.
The following inventions (H0), (H00), and (H1) have been made in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately changing the light emitting region. do.

(H0) Irradiation means for irradiating light and
When the light emitted from the irradiation means emits the first light emitting region, the control means for controlling the mode of the light emitted from the irradiation means to the first aspect capable of emitting the first light emitting region. And, with
When the light emitted from the irradiation means emits light in the second light emitting region, the control means has a second aspect in which the light emitted from the irradiation means can emit light in the second light emitting region. A gaming machine characterized by being controlled to.

According to the gaming machine according to the above (H0), whether the light emitted from the irradiation means emits light in the first light emitting region or the light emitted from the irradiation means emits light in the second light emitting region. Since it can be dealt with by controlling the mode of the light emitted from the irradiation means, the light emitting region can be suitably changed.

(H00) A decorative member arranged on the front side of the main body of the gaming machine, and
In a gaming machine provided with an irradiation means for irradiating light toward the back surface side of the decorative member.
The gaming machine can shift a predetermined area of the decorative member that receives the light emitted from the irradiation means to a different position.
When the predetermined region is located at the first position, the light emitted from the irradiation means executes the first control of emitting the predetermined region located at the first position as the first light emitting region. When the predetermined region is located at the second position, a second control is executed in which the light emitted from the irradiation means emits the predetermined region located at the second position as the second light emitting region. A gaming machine characterized by having a control means for performing.

The gaming machine according to (H00) includes a decorative member arranged on the front surface side of the gaming machine main body and an irradiation means for irradiating light toward the back surface side of the decorative member. Since the gaming machine can shift a predetermined area of the decorative member that receives the light emitted from the irradiating means to a different position, the front side of the gaming machine responds to the change in the position of the predetermined area of the decorative member. You can make a different impression. When the predetermined region is located at the first position, the light emitted from the irradiating means executes the first control to emit the predetermined region located at the first position as the first light emitting region, and the predetermined region becomes the predetermined region. When it is located at the second position, it is provided with a control means for executing a second control in which the light emitted from the irradiation means emits a predetermined region located at the second position as the second light emitting region. By optimizing the irradiation direction of light according to the transition of a predetermined region of the member, the light emitting region can be suitably changed.

(H1) Decorative members arranged on the front side of the main body of the gaming machine,
In a gaming machine provided with an irradiation means for irradiating light toward the back surface side of the decorative member.
The gaming machine can change a predetermined surface of the decorative member that receives the light emitted from the irradiation means to a different position.
When the predetermined surface is located at the first position, the light emitted from the irradiation means executes the first control of emitting the predetermined surface located at the first position as the first light emitting region. When the predetermined surface is located at the second position, a second control is executed in which the light emitted from the irradiation means emits the predetermined surface located at the second position as the second light emitting region. A gaming machine characterized by having a control means for performing.

The gaming machine according to (H1) is provided with a decorative member arranged on the front surface side of the gaming machine main body and an irradiation means for irradiating light toward the back surface side of the decorative member. Since the gaming machine can shift the predetermined surface of the decorative member that receives the light emitted from the irradiating means to a different position, the front side of the gaming machine responds to the change in the position of the predetermined surface of the decorative member. You can make a different impression. When the predetermined surface is located at the first position, the light emitted from the irradiating means executes the first control to emit the predetermined surface located at the first position as the first light emitting region, and the predetermined surface becomes When it is located at the second position, it is provided with a control means for executing a second control in which the light emitted from the irradiation means emits the predetermined surface located at the second position as the second light emitting region. By optimizing the irradiation direction of light according to the transition of a predetermined surface of the member, the light emitting region can be suitably changed.

(H2) In the gaming machine according to (H1) above,
The decorative member is a replaceable decorative cover disposed on the front side of the gaming machine main body.
The first light emitting region is provided on the predetermined surface of the decorative cover.
The gaming machine characterized in that the second light emitting region is provided on the predetermined surface of another decorative cover to be replaced with the decorative cover.

According to the gaming machine described in (H2), the light emitting region can be suitably changed even when the decorative cover arranged on the front surface side of the gaming machine main body is replaced with another decorative cover.

(H3) In the gaming machine according to (H1) or (H2) above.
The irradiation means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is a light emitting substrate mounted on a front portion constituting the front surface of the gaming machine main body.

According to the gaming machine described in (H3), when the decorative cover arranged on the front surface constituting the front surface of the gaming machine main body is replaced with another decorative cover, the light emitting substrate is not on the decorative cover side but on the front surface. Even when it is provided on the portion side, the light emitting region can be suitably changed.

(H4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (H1) to (H3) above.
In the first control, the light emitted from the irradiation means is set to the irradiation angle of the light emitted from the irradiation means with respect to the first light emitting region, or the first emission is performed. The irradiation area of the light emitted from the irradiation means to the region is set as the first irradiation area, or a predetermined point (for example, the center point) of the first light emitting region and a predetermined point (for example, the center point) of the irradiation means. ) Is set as the first irradiation distance, or at least one of the irradiation distances is included.
The second control is a second irradiation angle different from the first irradiation angle, a second irradiation area different from the first irradiation area, or the first irradiation distance. Is a gaming machine characterized by having at least one of different second irradiation distances.

According to the gaming machine described in (H4), the light emitting region can be suitably changed by changing at least one of the irradiation angle, the irradiation area, and the irradiation distance.

(H5) In the gaming machines described in (H2) to (H4) above,
The separate decorative cover is a gaming machine characterized in that the second light emitting region changes according to its shape.

According to the gaming machine described in (H5), even when the shape of the separate decorative cover is changed from the shape of the decorative cover before the change, the light emitting region can be suitably changed.

(H6) In the gaming machines described in (H2) to (H5) above,
The decorative cover and the separate decorative cover are game machines characterized in that they can be replaced without using a tool.

According to the gaming machine described in (H6), the replacement work for appropriately changing the light emitting region can be easily performed.

(H7) In the gaming machines described in (H1) to (H6) above,
The irradiation means is a gaming machine capable of at least one of rotation, rotation, tilting, bending, bending, stretching and contracting, and movement including a front-back direction and a left-right direction.

According to the gaming machine according to the above (H7), whether the light emitted from the irradiation means emits light in the first light emitting region or the light emitted from the irradiation means emits light in the second light emitting region. The irradiation angle can be easily adjusted by rotation, rotation, and tilting. In addition, the irradiation area can be easily adjusted by bending the structure that can be bent with a hinge or the like, bending it if it is a flexible substrate, or expanding or contracting it if it has a structure that can be expanded or contracted by a slide mechanism or the like. can do. The irradiation distance may be easily adjusted by moving including the front-back direction and the left-right direction.

(H8) In the gaming machines according to the above (H1) to (H7).
A translucent means for transmitting light emitted from the irradiation means to the first light emitting region or the second light emitting region is provided.
The translucent means is a gaming machine capable of at least one of rotation, rotation, tilting, bending, bending, expansion and contraction, and movement including front-back direction and left-right direction.

According to the gaming machine described in (H8), not only the irradiation means can be tilted but also the translucent means can be tilted, as in (H7), the irradiation angle and the irradiation area. At least one of the irradiation distances can be easily adjusted.

(H9) In the gaming machine according to (H2) above,
The control means is characterized in that, in the process of replacing the decorative cover with another decorative cover, the irradiation means changes from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed. A game machine to play.

According to the gaming machine described in (H9), the light emitting region can be suitably changed in the process of replacing the decorative cover with another decorative cover.

(H10) In the gaming machine according to (H9) above,
The control means is an input means for inputting a force generated in the process of exchanging the decorative cover for the other decorative cover, and a state in which the irradiation means can execute the first control based on the input force. A gaming machine including an output means for changing the second control into a state in which it can be executed.

According to the gaming machine according to (H10), the light emitting region can be suitably changed by utilizing the force generated in the process of exchanging the decorative cover with the other decorative cover.

(H11) In the gaming machine according to (H10) above,
The input means is a gaming machine characterized in that the irradiation means is pushed into the separate decorative cover in the process of replacing the decorative cover with the separate decorative cover.

According to the gaming machine according to (H11), the light emitting region can be suitably changed by utilizing the force of the separate decorative cover pushing the irradiation means in the process of replacing the decorative cover with the separate decorative cover.

(H12) In the gaming machine according to (H10) or (H11),
The output means causes the irradiation means to rotate, rotate, tilt, bend, bend, expand and contract, and move at least in the front-back direction and the left-right direction based on the input force. A gaming machine characterized in that the means is changed from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed.

According to the gaming machine described in (H12), at least one of the irradiation angle, the irradiation area, and the irradiation distance can be easily achieved by using the force input in the process of attaching another decorative cover to the front portion instead of the decorative cover. Can be adjusted to.

The configurations described in (H2) to (H12) may be provided in the gaming machines described in (H0) and (H00) described above or (I1) and (J1) described later.

<9th task>
Conventionally, there are pachinko machines and slot machines as typical examples of gaming machines. Some gaming machines of this type include, for example, decorative parts having a light emitting region. (For example, refer to Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-100905 (pages 4 to 8, FIGS. 3 to 8)).
However, in the case of the conventional example having such a configuration, there are the following problems.
That is, in the conventional pachinko machine, for example, there is a problem that it is difficult to appropriately change the light emitting region.
The following invention (I1) has been made in view of such circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing a light emitting region.

(I1) Decorative members arranged on the front side of the main body of the gaming machine,
In a gaming machine provided with an irradiation means for irradiating the decorative member with light.
A driving means capable of shifting a predetermined surface of the decorative member to be emitted by the light emitted from the irradiating means to a first position and a second position.
When the predetermined surface is transferred to the first position by the driving means, the light emitted from the irradiation means emits the predetermined surface located at the first position as the first light emitting region. When the control of 1 is executed and the predetermined surface is transferred to the second position by the driving means, the light emitted from the irradiation means seconds the predetermined surface located at the second position. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a control means for executing a second control for emitting light as a light emitting region of the above.

The gaming machine according to (I1) is provided with a decorative member arranged on the front surface side of the gaming machine main body and an irradiation means for irradiating the decorative member with light. Since the gaming machine includes a driving means capable of shifting a predetermined surface of the decorative member to be emitted by the light emitted from the irradiation means between the first position and the second position, the light emitting portion of the decorative member is provided. It is not uniform, and it is easy to change the light emitting part of the decorative member. When the predetermined surface is transferred to the first position by the driving means, the gaming machine emits light emitted from the irradiation means with the predetermined surface located at the first position as the first light emitting region. When the control is executed and the predetermined surface is transferred to the second position by the driving means, the light emitted from the irradiation means emits the predetermined surface located at the second position as the second light emitting region. Since the control means for executing the control of the above is provided, the light emitting region can be suitably changed by facilitating the transition of the light emitting portion and optimizing the irradiation direction of the light according to the transition of the light emitting portion.

(I2) In the gaming machine according to (I1) above,
The main body of the gaming machine is a main body of a pachinko machine.
The main body of the pachinko machine
The outer frame forming the outer shell of the pachinko machine body and
An inner frame supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame with one side portion of the outer frame as an opening / closing shaft.
A front frame that can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame with one side of the inner frame as an opening / closing shaft is provided.
The inner frame includes a resin base that forms the outer shape thereof, and a game board having a game area in which a game ball attached to the resin base flows down.
The game board visually recognizes the symbol display device having a display screen for displaying the display effect during the variable display of the symbol and the display effect during the specific game state that occurs when the variable display of the symbol has a specific result, and the display screen. With an opening that allows
The front frame includes a transparent member frame portion that surrounds the transparent member that makes the game area and the display screen visible.
A gaming machine characterized in that the decorative member is visible from the front side of the front frame of the pachinko machine main body.

According to the gaming machine described in (I2) above, the decorative member is visible from the front side of the front frame of the pachinko machine main body, so that the light emitting portion on the front side of the front frame of the pachinko machine main body is visible. The light emitting region can be suitably changed by facilitating the transition and optimizing the irradiation direction of the light according to the transition of the light emitting portion.

(I3) In the gaming machine according to (I2) above,
The decorative member is a gaming machine characterized in that the decorative member is attached to the transparent member frame portion of the front frame of the pachinko machine main body.

According to the gaming machine described in (I3) above, since the decorative member is attached to the visual recognition member frame of the front frame of the pachinko machine main body, the transition of the light emitting portion in the visual recognition member frame of the front frame of the pachinko machine main body is caused. By making it easy and optimizing the irradiation direction of light according to the transition of the light emitting portion in the visual recognition member frame, the light emitting region in the visual recognition member frame can be suitably changed.

(I4) In the gaming machine according to (I2) above,
A gaming machine characterized in that the decorative member is attached behind the transparent member of the front frame of the pachinko machine main body and is visible through the transparent member.

According to the gaming machine according to (I4), the decorative member is attached behind the transparent member of the front frame of the pachinko machine main body and is visible through the transparent member. By facilitating the transition of the light emitting part behind the transparent member of the pachinko machine body and optimizing the light irradiation direction according to the transition of the light emitting part behind the transparent member, the light emitting region behind the transparent member can be created. It can be changed suitably.

(I5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (I2) above.
A gaming machine characterized in that the decorative member is arranged on any one of the upper side, the lower side, the left side, and the right side in the gaming area of the gaming board.

According to the gaming machine according to (I5), the light emitting region can be suitably changed at any of the upper, lower, left and right positions in the gaming area of the gaming board.

(I6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (I2) above.
A gaming machine characterized in that the decorative member is arranged on any one of the upper side, the lower side, the left side, and the right side in the opening of the game board.

According to the gaming machine described in (I6), the light emitting region can be suitably changed at any of the upper, lower, left and right positions in the opening of the gaming board.

(I7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (I1) to (I6) above.
The irradiating means is a gaming machine including a light emitting substrate and a posture changing means for changing the posture of the light emitting substrate with respect to the predetermined surface of the decorative member.

According to the gaming machine according to (I7), the irradiation means includes a light emitting substrate and a posture changing means for changing the posture of the light emitting substrate with respect to the predetermined surface of the decorative member. The light emitting region can be suitably changed.

(I8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (I1) to (I7).
The first control is to set the irradiation angle of the light emitted from the irradiation means to the first light emitting region to be the first irradiation angle, or to irradiate the first light emitting region with the light emitted from the irradiation means. The irradiation area of the light emitted from the means is set as the first irradiation area, or the irradiation distance between the predetermined point (for example, the center point) of the first light emitting region and the predetermined point (for example, the center point) of the irradiation means is set. Including at least one of the first irradiation distances,
The second control is a second irradiation angle different from the first irradiation angle, a second irradiation area different from the first irradiation area, or a second irradiation distance different from the first irradiation distance. A gaming machine characterized in that it includes at least one of the irradiation distances of.

According to the gaming machine according to (I8), the light emitting region can be suitably changed by changing at least one of the irradiation angle, the irradiation area, and the irradiation distance in the configuration in which the decorative member operates.

(I9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (I1) to (I8) above.
Equipped with an operation means to receive the operation of the player
The decorative member is a gaming machine characterized in that it operates in response to an operation of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine according to the above (I9), even when the decorative member operates according to the operation of the operating means, the light emitting region can be suitably changed at each position.

(I10) In the gaming machine according to (I9) above,
The decorative member is a gaming machine characterized in that it operates in response to an operation of the operating means during a standby display other than the display of a display effect on the symbol display device.

According to the gaming machine according to (I10), when the machine operates in response to the operation of the operating means during the standby display in the symbol display device, the light emitting region is suitably changed at each position according to the operation. be able to.

(I11) In the gaming machine according to (I9) above,
The decorative member is a gaming machine characterized in that it operates in response to an operation of the operating means while displaying a display effect on the symbol display device.

According to the gaming machine according to (I11), even when the decorative member operates during the display of the display effect on the symbol display device, the light emitting region can be suitably changed at each position according to the operation.

(I12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (I1) to (I11).
The irradiation means is a gaming machine capable of rotating, rotating, tilting, bending, bending, expanding and contracting, and moving including a front-back direction and a left-right direction according to the operation of the decorative member.

(I13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (I1) to (I12) above.
The control means controls the irradiation means from a state in which the first control can be executed in the process of shifting the predetermined surface of the decorative member from the first position to the second position. A gaming machine characterized by changing to a state in which it can execute.

According to the gaming machine according to (I13), the light emitting region can be suitably changed in the process of shifting the predetermined surface of the decorative member from the first position to the second position.

(I14) In the gaming machine according to (I13),
The control means receives an input means for inputting a force generated in the process of shifting the predetermined surface of the decorative member from the first position to the second position, and the irradiation means based on the input force. A gaming machine comprising an output means for changing from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed.

According to the gaming machine according to (I14), the light emitting region is suitably changed by utilizing the force generated in the process of shifting the predetermined surface of the decorative member from the first position to the second position. be able to.

(I15) In the gaming machine according to (I14),
The input means rotates, rotates, tilts, bends, bends, expands and contracts with respect to the irradiation means in the process of shifting the predetermined surface of the decorative member from the first position to the second position. A gaming machine characterized in that it is a means for giving a force for at least one of movement including a front-back direction and a left-right direction.

According to the gaming machine according to (I15), the light emitting region is suitably changed by utilizing the force applied to the irradiation means in the process of shifting the predetermined surface of the decorative member from the first position to the second position. be able to.

(I16) In the gaming machine according to (I14) or (I15).
The output means causes the irradiation means to rotate, rotate, tilt, bend, bend, expand and contract, and move at least in the front-back direction and the left-right direction based on the input force. The game machine is characterized in that the state in which the first control can be executed changes to the state in which the second control can be executed.

According to the gaming machine according to (I16), the irradiation angle, the irradiation area, and the irradiation distance are determined by using the force input in the process of shifting the predetermined surface of the decorative member from the first position to the second position. At least one can be easily adjusted.

The configuration described in (I2) to (I16) may be provided in the gaming machine described in (H0), (H00), (H1) described above or (J1) described later.

<10th task>
Conventionally, there are pachinko machines and slot machines as typical examples of gaming machines. Some gaming machines of this type include, for example, decorative parts having a light emitting region. (For example, refer to Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-100905 (pages 4 to 8, FIGS. 3 to 8)).
However, in the case of the conventional example having such a configuration, there are the following problems.
That is, in the conventional pachinko machine, for example, there is a problem that it is difficult to appropriately change the light emitting region.
The following invention (J1) has been made in view of such circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing a light emitting region.

(J1) Decorative members arranged on the front side of the main body of the gaming machine,
In a gaming machine provided with an irradiation means for irradiating the decorative member with light.
The gaming machine can shift a predetermined surface of the decorative member that receives the light emitted from the irradiation means to a first position and a second position.
A detection means capable of detecting the transition of the predetermined surface of the decorative member, and
When it is detected that the predetermined surface has been transferred to the first position, the light emitted from the irradiation means emits the predetermined surface located at the first position as the first light emitting region. When the predetermined surface is transferred to the second position, the light emitted from the irradiation means emits light with the predetermined surface located at the second position as the second light emitting region. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a control means for executing a second control to be performed.

According to the gaming machine described in (J1), a decorative member arranged on the front surface side of the gaming machine main body and an irradiation means for irradiating the decorative member with light are provided. Since the gaming machine can shift the predetermined surface of the decorative member to be emitted by the light emitted from the irradiating means between the first position and the second position, the position of the predetermined surface of the decorative member is changed. The impression on the front side of the gaming machine can be changed according to the situation. Since the gaming machine includes a detecting means capable of detecting the transition of the predetermined surface of the decorative member, the transition of the predetermined surface of the decorative member can be recognized. When the gaming machine detects that the predetermined surface has changed to the first position, the light emitted from the irradiation means emits the predetermined surface located at the first position as the first light emitting region. When the control is executed and the predetermined surface is transferred to the second position, the light emitted from the irradiation means emits the predetermined surface located at the second position as the second light emitting region. Since the control means to be executed is provided, the light emitting region can be suitably changed by recognizing the transition of the predetermined surface of the decorative member and optimizing the irradiation direction of the light according to the transition of the predetermined surface.

The "detecting means" includes both non-contact type and contact type.

(J2) In the gaming machine described in (J1) above,
The control means is an input means for inputting a force generated in the process of shifting the predetermined surface of the decorative member from the first position to the second position, and the decorative member based on the input force. A contact-type detecting means capable of detecting that the predetermined surface has changed from the first position to the second position, and detecting that the predetermined surface has changed from the first position to the second position. The gaming machine, characterized in that, when the irradiation means is provided, the irradiation means is provided with an output means that changes from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed.

According to the gaming machine described in (J2), the light emitting region can be suitably changed by utilizing the force generated in the process of shifting the predetermined surface of the decorative member from the first position to the second position. ..

(J3) In the gaming machine described in (J2) above,
The input means is a means for receiving a force generated in the process of shifting the predetermined surface of the decorative member from the first position to the second position and pushing the contact type detection means. Gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (J3), the force generated in the process of shifting a predetermined surface of a decorative member from a first position to a second position is received and a force for pushing a contact-type detecting means is used. The light emitting region can be suitably changed.

(J4) In the gaming machines described in (J1) to (J3) above,
A gaming machine characterized in that the decorative member is a transparent resin member and is configured so that the control means is difficult to see.

According to the gaming machine described in (J4), the decorative member is a transparent resin member, but the control means is configured so as to be difficult to see, so that the control means can be inconspicuous. ..

(J5) In the gaming machines described in (J1) to (J4) above,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the control means is arranged so as not to overlap the front surface of the light emitting portion mounting surface of the irradiation means.

In the gaming machine according to (J5), the control means is arranged so as not to overlap the front surface of the light emitting portion mounting surface of the irradiation means, so that the light emitting region is preferably used without blocking the light emitting portion mounting surface. Can be changed.

(J6) In the gaming machine described in (J5) above,
The input means is provided on either the left or right side surface side of the irradiation means when the predetermined surface of the decorative member is transferred upward or downward in a front view of the gaming machine. Gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (J6), the input means is placed on either the left or right side surface side of the irradiation means when the predetermined surface of the decorative member is shifted upward or downward in the front view of the gaming machine. Since it is provided, it is difficult to block the light emitting region that is transferred in the vertical direction, and the light emitting region can be suitably changed.

(J7) In the gaming machine described in (J5) above,
The input means is provided on either the upper or lower side surface side of the irradiation means when the predetermined surface of the decorative member is transferred to the left or right in the front view of the gaming machine. Gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (J7), the input means is placed on either the upper or lower side surface side of the irradiation means when the predetermined surface of the decorative member is shifted to the left or right in the front view of the gaming machine. Since it is provided, it is difficult to block the light emitting region that is transferred in the left-right direction, and the light emitting region can be suitably changed.

(J8) In the gaming machine described in (J5) above,
The control means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is provided on the back side of the irradiation means.

According to the gaming machine described in (J8), since the control means is provided on the back side of the irradiation means, a light emitting area is sufficiently secured on the front side of the control means without blocking the light emitting area to be transferred. In this state, the light emitting region can be suitably changed.

(J9) In the gaming machine described in (J8) above,
The input means is the back surface side of the irradiation means when the predetermined surface of the decorative member is transferred in the upward oblique direction or the downward oblique direction in the front view of the gaming machine, and the predetermined surface is in the upward oblique direction or A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided at a position where the force generated in the process of shifting in the downward diagonal direction can be input.

According to the gaming machine described in (J9), the input means is the back side of the irradiation means when the predetermined surface of the decorative member is transferred in the upward oblique direction or the downward oblique direction in the front view of the gaming machine. Since the predetermined surface is provided at a position where the force generated in the process of shifting in the upward diagonal direction or the downward diagonal direction can be input, it does not interfere with the transfer of the decorative member and emits light without obstructing the transferred light emitting area. The region can be suitably changed.

The configuration described in (J2) to (J9) may be provided in the gaming machine described in (H0), (H00), (H1) or (I1) described above.

<11th task>
Conventionally, there is, for example, a pachinko machine as a typical example of a gaming machine. This type of gaming machine shifts the gaming state to an open / close gaming state in which the specific entry portion is opened / closed, for example, when the result of a lottery based on the detection of the gaming ball in a predetermined entry portion is a specific result. (For example, see Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-239863 (page 10, FIG. 8)).
However, in the case of the conventional example having such a configuration, there are the following problems.
That is, there is a problem that it is difficult to further improve the fun of the game with the conventional pachinko machine.
The following invention (K1) has been made in view of such circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

(K1) A game board having a game area in which a game ball flows down, and
An entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and a ball entry means.
A specific ball entry means that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter, and
A detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the ball entry means,
A lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player occurs based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means.
A variable display control means for displaying the result of the lottery by the lottery means on the display means as a result of the variable display of the symbol that can be visually recognized by the player.
Based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, when the variation display of the symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the specific symbols, the specific ball entry means can enter the game ball. A state transition means for shifting to an open / close game state in which the open / close game is executed a predetermined number of times from the state to the closed state in which the specific ball entry means is difficult to enter the game ball.
When the result of the lottery is the specific result, the specific period control that changes the specific period that can be predetermined in the opening / closing gaming state according to the number of changes of the symbol at the time of the specific result. A gaming machine characterized by having means and.

According to the gaming machine described in (K1), the gaming situation such as the number of fluctuations of the symbol at the time when the specific result is obtained can be suitably reflected in the opening / closing gaming state. As a result, the fun of the game can be improved.

(K2) In the gaming machine according to (K1) above,
The specific period is characterized by at least one of an opening period for notifying the start of the opening / closing game state, an interval period between each opening / closing game, and an ending period for notifying the end of the opening / closing game state. A gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (K2), the gaming situation can be suitably reflected in the opening / closing gaming state in the form of changing the specific period.

(K3) In the gaming machine according to (K1) or (K2) above.
The specific period control means is a gaming machine characterized in that the specific period is changed according to the number of fluctuations from the time when the specific result is obtained immediately before to the time when the specific result is obtained.

According to the gaming machine described in (K3), the situation of how many games are played from the time when the specific result is obtained immediately before to the time when the specific result is obtained is suitably reflected in the opening / closing game state. be able to.

(K4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (K1) to (K3).
The specific period control means is specified in the open / close game state shifted from the high-probability game state in which the lottery result is more likely to be the specific result than the normal game state until the predetermined number of fluctuations is reached. A gaming machine characterized by changing the period.

According to the gaming machine described in (K4), the situation of whether the opening / closing game state is transitioned from the normal gaming state or the opening / closing gaming state is transitioned from the number-cutting high-probability gaming state is suitable for the opening / closing gaming state. Can be reflected in.

(K5) In the gaming machine according to (K4) above,
The specific period control means changes the specific period to a first time shorter than the reference specific period in the first state in which the digested fluctuation number is less than the remaining fluctuation number among the predetermined fluctuation times. A gaming machine characterized by letting you do it.

According to the gaming machine described in (K5), the role of the zone in which the opening / closing game is continuously generated can be further increased, and the situation of the game can be suitably reflected in the opening / closing game state.

(K6) In the gaming machine according to (K5) above,
The variation display control means is a gaming machine characterized in that, in the first state, the variation display time is set to a first variation display time shorter than a reference variation display time.

According to the gaming machine described in (K6), the time required for variable display can be shortened, and the role as a zone in which opening / closing games occur continuously can be further increased.

(K7) In the gaming machine according to (K5) or (K6) above.
The specific period control means is a gaming machine characterized in that, in the first state, the specific period is changed to a second time longer than at least the first time.

According to the gaming machine described in (K7), the balance can be achieved by inserting a long specific period in the first state.

(K8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (K5) to (K7).
The specific period control means changes the specific period to the second time, which is at least longer than the first hour, in the second state in which the number of fluctuations digested out of the predetermined number of times is longer than the remaining number of fluctuations. A gaming machine featuring.

According to the gaming machine described in (K8), a balance can be achieved by inserting a long specific period in the second state (for example, a so-called addictive state).

(K9) In the gaming machine according to (K8) above,
The variation display control means is a gaming machine characterized in that, in the second state, the variation display time is set to a second variation display time that is at least longer than the first variation display time.

According to the gaming machine described in (K9), it is possible to reduce the possibility of easily exiting the high-probability gaming state in the second state (for example, the so-called addictive state).

(K10) In the gaming machine according to (K8) or (K9) above.
The specific period control means is a gaming machine characterized in that, in the second state, the specific period is changed to a time shorter than at least the second time.

According to the gaming machine described in (K10), it is possible to reduce the feeling of extension during the opening / closing gaming state in the second state (for example, the so-called addictive state).

(K11) In the gaming machine according to (K10) above,
The variation display control means is a gaming machine characterized in that, in the second state, the variation display time is set to a variation display time that is at least shorter than the second variation display time.

According to the gaming machine described in (K11), a high-speed digestion zone having a short fluctuation time is provided in the second state (for example, a so-called addictive state), and it is possible to play a game in which the flow from the fluctuation to the opening / closing game is quickly shown. Will be.

<12th task>
Conventionally, there is, for example, a pachinko machine as a typical example of a gaming machine. This type of gaming machine shifts the gaming state to an open / close gaming state in which the specific entry portion is opened / closed, for example, when the result of a lottery based on the detection of the gaming ball in a predetermined entry portion is a specific result. (For example, see Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-239863 (page 10, FIG. 8)).
However, in the case of the conventional example having such a configuration, there are the following problems.
That is, there is a problem that it is difficult to further improve the fun of the game with the conventional pachinko machine.
The following invention (L00) has been made in view of such circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

(L00) A counting means for counting numerical information related to a game,
A display means capable of displaying the number information and
An effect execution means that executes a predetermined effect based on the occurrence of a specific event,
A selection means for selecting a predetermined period in which the predetermined effect is performed based on the occurrence of the specific event is provided.
The length of the predetermined period changes according to the number information, and the length of the period changes.
The predetermined effect is a gaming machine characterized in that the longer the predetermined period is, the more advantageous information is included for the player.

According to the gaming machine described in (L00), since the length of a predetermined effect selected based on the occurrence of a specific event changes according to the numerical information related to the game, the counting of the numerical information displayed on the display means. Depending on the situation, the fun of the game can be improved.

(L01) In the gaming machine described in (L00) above,
The counting means is a gaming machine characterized by counting numerical information about a game displayed on the display means and executed.

According to the gaming machine described in (L01), it is possible to improve the fun of the game according to the counting status of the numerical information regarding the game displayed and executed on the display means.

(L02) In the gaming machine according to (L00) or (L01) above.
The counting means is a gaming machine characterized by counting number information that increases or decreases with the execution of a game displayed on the display means.

According to the gaming machine described in (L02), the fun of the game can be improved according to the counting status of the number information that increases or decreases with the execution of the game displayed on the display means.

(L03) In the gaming machine according to any one of (L00) to (L02).
A game board with a game area where the game ball flows down,
An entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and a ball entry means.
A specific ball entry means that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter, and
A detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the ball entry means,
A lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player occurs based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means is provided.
The display means is a gaming machine capable of displaying the number information together with a predetermined display effect based on a lottery for whether or not to generate the specific gaming state.

According to the gaming machine described in (L03), a game is displayed according to a predetermined display effect displayed on the display means based on a lottery for whether or not to generate a specific gaming state, and a counting status of numerical information. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(L04) In the gaming machine according to any one of (L00) to (L03).
The counting means counts the number of times information about the game in which the lottery for whether or not to generate the specific game state is performed.
The display means is a gaming machine capable of displaying the number of times information together with a predetermined display effect based on a lottery for whether or not to generate the specific gaming state.

According to the gaming machine described in (L04), a predetermined display effect based on a lottery for whether or not to generate a specific gaming state displayed on the display means and a lottery for whether or not to generate a specific gaming state are performed. It is possible to improve the fun of the game according to the counting status of the number of times information about the game in which the game is played.

(L05) In the gaming machine according to (L03) or (L04) above.
The effect executing means is a gaming machine characterized by executing the predetermined effect based on the occurrence of the specific event based on the lottery by the lottery means.

According to the gaming machine described in (L05), it is possible to improve the interest of the game against the occurrence of a specific event based on the lottery by the lottery means.

(L06) In the gaming machine according to (L03) or (L04) above.
The selection means is a gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined period in which the predetermined effect is performed is selected based on the occurrence of the specific event based on the lottery by the lottery means.

According to the gaming machine described in (L06), the interest of the game is determined by which period is selected as the predetermined period in which the predetermined effect is performed based on the occurrence of the specific event based on the lottery by the lottery means. It is possible to improve the sex.

(L07) In the gaming machine according to any one of (L03) to (L06) above.
A variable display control means for displaying the result of the lottery by the lottery means on the display means as a result of a variable display of a symbol that can be visually recognized by the player.
Based on the fact that the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a specific result indicating the occurrence of the specific event, when the variation display of the symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the specific symbols, the specific ball entry means is a game. A state transition means for shifting to an open / close game state in which an open / close game is executed a predetermined number of times from an open state in which a ball can be entered to a closed state in which the specific entry means is difficult to enter a game ball.
When the result of the lottery is the specific result, the predetermined effect of notifying the start of the opening / closing game state is performed at least according to the number of changes of the symbol at the time when the specific result is obtained. A specific period control means for changing a specific period including the opening period which is a period and the ending period which is the predetermined period in which the predetermined effect for notifying the end of the opening / closing game state is performed.
The image display control means for controlling the display of the image corresponding to the specific period associated with the specific period is provided.
The image display control means is a gaming machine characterized in that the advantageous information is displayed while the image corresponding to the specific period is displayed according to the display period of the image corresponding to the specific period.

According to the gaming machine described in (L07), it is possible to improve the fun of the opening / closing gaming state according to the display time of the image corresponding to the specific period.

(L08) In the gaming machine according to (L07) above,
The image display control means is characterized in that the longer the specific period, the longer the display period of the image corresponding to the specific period, and the longer the display period of the specific period compatible image, the more advantageous the advantageous information is displayed. A game machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (L08), it is possible to improve the fun of the opening / closing gaming state according to the length of the display period of the image corresponding to the specific period.

(L09) In the gaming machine according to (L08) above,
The image display control means is characterized in that the longer the opening period is, the longer the display period corresponding to the image is displayed, and the longer the display period of the opening period corresponding image is, the more advantageous the advantageous information is displayed. Machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (L09), it is possible to improve the fun of the opening / closing gaming state according to the length of the display period of the image corresponding to the opening period.

(L10) In the gaming machine according to (L08) above,
The image display control means is characterized in that the longer the ending period, the longer the display period corresponding to the image, and the longer the display period of the ending period corresponding image, the more advantageous the advantageous information is displayed. Machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (L10), it is possible to improve the fun of the opening / closing gaming state according to the length of the display period of the image corresponding to the ending period.

(L11) In the gaming machine according to (L08) above,
The image display control means displays an image corresponding to an opening / ending period having a longer display period as the total time of the ending period and the ending period is longer, and the longer the display period of the image corresponding to the opening / ending period is, the more advantageous. A gaming machine characterized by displaying the advantageous information.

According to the gaming machine described in (L11), it is possible to improve the fun of the opening / closing gaming state according to the length of the display period of the image corresponding to the opening / ending period.

(L12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (L07) to (L11).
The image display control means can display different information different from the advantageous information in the image corresponding to the specific period, and when the different information is displayed, it is difficult to display the advantageous information. Game machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (L12), it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the opening / closing gaming state depending on whether or not information different from the advantageous information is displayed.

(L13) In the gaming machine according to (L12) above,
The image display control means is a gaming machine characterized in that the longer the period in which the other information is displayed, the more difficult it is for the advantageous information to be displayed.

According to the gaming machine described in (L13), it is possible to improve the fun of the opening / closing gaming state according to the length of the period in which the other information is displayed.

(L14) In the gaming machine according to any one of (L07) to (L13).
The specific period control means is a gaming machine characterized in that the specific period is changed according to the type of the symbol and the number of fluctuations at the time when the specific result is obtained.

According to the gaming machine described in (L14), it is possible to improve the fun of the opening / closing gaming state according to the type of the symbol and the number of fluctuations at the time when the specific result is obtained.

(L15) In the gaming machine according to (L14) above,
The specific period control means can change the specific period to the first period when the type of the symbol is the first type, and when the type of the symbol is the second type. A gaming machine characterized in that the specific period can be changed to a second period longer than the first period.

According to the gaming machine described in (L15), it is possible to improve the fun of the opening / closing gaming state according to the length of the specific period that changes depending on the type of the symbol at the time when the specific result is obtained and the number of fluctuations. ..

(L16) In the gaming machine according to (L14) or (L15).
The specific period control means is used in the opening / closing gaming state in which the lottery result is more likely to be the specific result than in the normal gaming state until the predetermined number of fluctuations is reached, and the opening / closing gaming state is shifted from the high-probability gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by changing.

According to the gaming machine described in (L16), it is possible to improve the interest of the opening / closing gaming state when a specific result is obtained in the number-cutting high-probability gaming state.

(L17) In the gaming machine according to (L16) above,
Even if the type of the symbol is the first type, the specific period control means sets the specific period when the number of fluctuations digested out of the predetermined number of times is larger than the remaining number of fluctuations. , A gaming machine characterized in that it is changed for a period longer than the first period.

According to the gaming machine described in (L17), when the digested number of fluctuations out of the predetermined number of fluctuations is larger than the remaining number of fluctuations, the opening / closing gaming state is entertaining according to the remaining number of fluctuations. Can be improved.

(L18) In the gaming machine according to (L16) above,
Even if the type of the symbol is the first type, the specific period control means sets the specific period when the number of fluctuations digested out of the predetermined number of times is larger than the remaining number of fluctuations. , A gaming machine characterized in that it is changed for a period longer than the second period.

According to the gaming machine described in (L18), even when the type of the symbol is not the second type but the first type, the digested number of fluctuations out of the predetermined number of fluctuations is the remaining number of fluctuations. If it is more than that, the fun of the opening / closing game state can be improved according to the remaining number of fluctuations.

(L19) In the gaming machine according to any one of (L07) to (L18).
A setting means capable of stepwisely determining the ease with which the result of the lottery becomes the specific result by a plurality of set values is provided.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the advantageous information is information indicating the set value.

According to the gaming machine described in (L19), it is possible to improve the interest of the opening / closing gaming state depending on whether or not the information indicating the set value is displayed.

(L20) In the gaming machine according to any one of (L07) to (L18).
When the result of the lottery is the specific result, the variable display control means is a high-probability game in which the result of the lottery is more likely to be the specific result in the next gaming state generated after the specific gaming state than in the normal gaming state. It does not notify the player whether or not the state is reached from the variable display to the time when the previous specific result is displayed.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the advantageous information is information indicating whether or not the high probability gaming state is reached in the next gaming state.

According to the gaming machine described in (L20), it is possible to improve the interest of the opening / closing gaming state with respect to whether or not the gaming state becomes a high-probability gaming state in the next gaming state.

<13th task>
Conventionally, there is, for example, a pachinko machine as a typical example of a gaming machine. This type of gaming machine shifts the gaming state to an open / close gaming state in which the specific entry portion is opened / closed, for example, when the result of a lottery based on the detection of the gaming ball in a predetermined entry portion is a specific result. (For example, see Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-239863 (page 10, FIG. 8)).
However, in the case of the conventional example having such a configuration, there are the following problems.
That is, there is a problem that it is difficult to further improve the fun of the game with the conventional pachinko machine.
The invention of the following (M00) has been made in view of such circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.
(M00) A counting means for counting numerical information related to a game,
A display means capable of displaying the number information and
An effect execution means that executes a predetermined effect based on the occurrence of a specific event,
A selection means for selecting a predetermined period in which the predetermined effect is performed based on the occurrence of the specific event, and
The length of the predetermined period varies depending on the number information.
A gaming machine characterized in that the susceptibility to an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to a player differs depending on the length of the predetermined period.

According to the gaming machine according to the above (M00), since the susceptibility to the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state changes according to the length of a predetermined effect selected based on the occurrence of a specific event, it is displayed on the display means. It is possible to improve the fun of the game according to the counting status of the number information.

(M01) In the gaming machine described in (M00) above,
The counting means is a gaming machine characterized by counting numerical information about a game displayed on the display means and executed.

According to the gaming machine described in (M01), the fun of the game can be improved according to the counting status of the numerical information regarding the game displayed and executed on the display means.

(M02) In the gaming machine according to (M00) or (M01) above.
The counting means is a gaming machine characterized by counting number information that increases or decreases with the execution of a game displayed on the display means.

According to the gaming machine described in (M02), the fun of the game can be improved according to the counting status of the number information that increases or decreases with the execution of the game displayed on the display means.

(M03) In the gaming machine according to any one of (M00) to (M02).
A game board with a game area where the game ball flows down,
An entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and a ball entry means.
A specific ball entry means that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter, and
A detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the ball entry means,
A lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not the specific game state occurs based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means is provided.
The counting means is a gaming machine characterized in that it counts information on the number of times of a game in which a lottery for whether or not to generate the specific gaming state is performed.

According to the gaming machine described in (M03), it is possible to improve the interest of the game according to the counting status of the number of times information regarding the game in which the lottery for whether or not to generate the specific gaming state is performed.

(M04) In the gaming machine described in (M03) above,
The effect executing means is a gaming machine characterized by executing the predetermined effect based on the occurrence of the specific event based on the lottery by the lottery means.

According to the gaming machine described in (M04), it is possible to improve the interest of the game against the occurrence of a specific event based on the lottery by the lottery means.

(M05) In the gaming machine according to (M03) or (M4) above.
The selection means is a gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined period in which the predetermined effect is performed is selected based on the occurrence of the specific event based on the lottery by the lottery means.

According to the gaming machine described in (M05), the interest of the game is determined by which period is selected as the predetermined period in which the predetermined effect is performed based on the occurrence of the specific event based on the lottery by the lottery means. It is possible to improve the sex.

(M06) In the gaming machine according to any one of (M03) to (M05).
A variable display control means for displaying the result of the lottery by the lottery means on the display means as a result of a variable display of a symbol that can be visually recognized by the player.
Based on the fact that the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a specific result indicating the occurrence of the specific event, when the variation display of the symbol is stopped and displayed with a combination of the specific symbols, the specific gaming state is described as described above. It is possible to shift to an open / close game state in which the open / close game is executed a predetermined number of times from the open state in which the specific ball entry means can enter the game ball to the closed state in which the specific ball entry means is difficult to enter the game ball. When a game ball that has entered the specific ball entry means enters the specific area during the open / close game state, the result of the lottery is the specific result after the end of the open / close game state, as compared with the normal game state. A state transition means that shifts to a high-probability gaming state that tends to be
When the result of the lottery is the specific result, in advance in the opening / closing game state, which is the predetermined period in which the predetermined effect is performed, at least according to the number of changes of the symbol at the time when the specific result is obtained. A specific period control means that changes a specific period that can be determined,
A specific ball entry opening / closing member that opens / closes a specific ball entry section of the specific ball entry means in the opening / closing game state can be operated in an open state and a closed state in a predetermined specific ball entry section opening / closing pattern. The ball entry part opening / closing control means and
A specific area opening / closing control means capable of operating the specific area opening / closing member that opens / closes the specific area in the opening / closing game state between the open state and the closed state in a predetermined specific area opening / closing pattern is provided.
When the number of fluctuations of the symbol at the time when the specific result is obtained is the first number of fluctuations, the opening timing of the specific ball entry portion opening / closing pattern and the opening timing of the specific area opening / closing pattern are likely to match. It is easy for a game ball that has entered during the opening of the specific entry portion opening / closing member to enter the specific area.
When the number of fluctuations of the symbol at the time when the specific result is obtained is the second number of fluctuations, it is difficult to match the opening timing of the specific ball entry portion opening / closing pattern with the opening timing of the specific region opening / closing pattern. A gaming machine characterized in that it is difficult for a gaming ball that has entered during the opening of the specific entry portion opening / closing member to enter the specific area.

According to the gaming machine described in (M06), the rate of entering the specific area changes according to the number of changes in the symbol at the time when the specific result is obtained, so that the fun of the opening / closing gaming state can be improved. ..

(M07) In the gaming machine according to (M06) above,
When the number of fluctuations of the symbol at the time when the specific result is obtained is the first number of fluctuations, the specific period is different from the specific period of the second number of fluctuations, so that the specific ball entry portion is opened and closed. It is characterized in that the opening timing of the pattern and the opening timing of the specific area opening / closing pattern are easily matched, and the game ball entered during the opening of the specific entry portion opening / closing member is easily entered into the specific area. A gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (M07), it is possible to improve the fun of the opening / closing gaming state by a simple control of changing a specific period that can be predetermined in the opening / closing gaming state.

(M08) In the gaming machine according to (M06) above,
When the result of the lottery is the specific result, the specific period control means starts the opening / closing game state at least according to the type of the symbol and the number of fluctuations of the symbol at the time when the specific result is obtained. A specific period including the opening period, which is the predetermined period in which the predetermined effect is performed, and the interval time between each opening / closing game is changed.
In the first number of fluctuations, the specific period when the type of the symbol is a specific symbol and the number of fluctuations of the first is the second number of fluctuations when the type of the symbol is the specific symbol and the number of fluctuations is the second. By being different from the specific period at the time of, the opening timing of the specific ball entry portion opening / closing pattern and the opening timing of the specific area opening / closing pattern are likely to match, and during the opening of the specific ball entry portion opening / closing member. A gaming machine characterized in that an entered gaming ball can easily enter the specific area.

According to the gaming machine described in (M08), even if the type of the symbol at the time when the specific result is obtained is the same specific symbol, the ball entry rate to the specific area changes according to the number of fluctuations, so that the opening / closing game state It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(M09) In the gaming machine according to any one of (M07) to (M08) above.
When the number of fluctuations of the symbol at the time when the specific result is obtained is the first number of fluctuations, the specific period is shorter than the specific period of the second number of fluctuations, so that the specific ball is entered. The opening timing of the portion opening / closing pattern and the opening timing of the specific area opening / closing pattern are likely to match, and the game ball that has entered during the opening of the specific entry portion opening / closing member is likely to enter the specific area. A gaming machine featuring.

According to the gaming machine described in (M09), the fun of the opening / closing gaming state can be improved by a simple control of shortening a specific period that can be predetermined in the opening / closing gaming state.

(M10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (M06) to (M09) above.
The specific period is an opening period for notifying the start of the opening / closing gaming state.

According to the gaming machine described in (M10), the fun of the opening / closing gaming state can be improved by a simple control of shortening the opening period.

(M11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (M06) to (M09) above.
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific period is an interval period between each opening / closing game.

According to the gaming machine described in (M11), it is possible to improve the interest of the opening / closing gaming state with simple control even during the opening / closing gaming state.

(M12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (M06) to (M10) above.
The first fluctuation number is when the open / close game state shifts from the high-probability game state in which the lottery result is more likely to be the specific result than the normal game state until the predetermined number of fluctuations is reached. , The number of fluctuations digested out of the predetermined number of fluctuations is larger than the remaining number of fluctuations.
The second number of fluctuations is the number of times that the digested number of fluctuations is less than the number of remaining fluctuations among the predetermined number of fluctuations when the opening / closing gaming state shifts from the number-cutting high-probability gaming state. A featured gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (M12) above, in the open / closed gaming state, the rate of entry into a specific area increases as the number of fluctuations digested in the high-probability gaming state is increased (mahar). It can improve the interest.

(M13) In the gaming machine according to any one of (M06) to (M10) above.
The first fluctuation number is when the open / close game state shifts from the high-probability game state in which the lottery result is more likely to be the specific result than the normal game state until the predetermined number of fluctuations is reached. , The number of fluctuations digested out of the predetermined number of fluctuations is less than the remaining number of fluctuations.
The second number of fluctuations is the number of times that the digested number of fluctuations is larger than the number of remaining fluctuations among the predetermined number of fluctuations when the opening / closing gaming state shifts from the number-cutting high-probability gaming state. A featured gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (M13) above, the interest in the open / close gaming state is improved in that the smaller the number of fluctuations digested in the high-probability gaming state, the higher the rate of entering a specific area. Can be made to.

<14th task>
Conventionally, there is, for example, a pachinko machine as a typical example of a gaming machine. This type of gaming machine shifts the gaming state to an open / close gaming state in which the specific entry portion is opened / closed, for example, when the result of a lottery based on the detection of the gaming ball in a predetermined entry portion is a specific result. (For example, see Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-239863 (page 10, FIG. 8)).
However, in the case of the conventional example having such a configuration, there are the following problems.
That is, there is a problem that it is difficult to further improve the fun of the game with the conventional pachinko machine.
The following invention (N00) has been made in view of such circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

(N00) An operating means for receiving an operation of a player related to a game,
A counting means for counting the first numerical information based on the operation in the first aspect of the operating means, and a counting means.
A determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition based on the operation in the second aspect is achieved in a state where the operation in the second aspect is changed when the first number information counts the first predetermined number. A gaming machine characterized in that a specific event that is advantageous to the player occurs when it is determined that the predetermined conditions have been achieved.

According to the gaming machine described in (N00), after the first number information based on the operation in the first aspect counts the first predetermined number, the operation is changed to the operation in the second aspect, and in the second aspect. If a predetermined condition based on the operation of the above is achieved, a specific event advantageous to the player can be obtained, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

(N01) In the gaming machine described in (N00) above,
The specific event is a gaming machine characterized in that it is a suggestion or notification of the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

According to the gaming machine described in (N01), if a predetermined condition based on the operation in the second aspect is achieved, a suggestion or notification of the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state can be obtained, so that the interest of the game can be improved. Can be done.

(N02) In the gaming machine according to (N00) or (N01) above.
The counting means counts the second number information based on the operation of the operating means in the second aspect.
The determination means determines whether or not the predetermined condition based on the operation in the second aspect has been achieved by the time the second number information based on the operation in the second aspect counts the second predetermined number. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine described in (N02), can the predetermined condition based on the operation in the second aspect be achieved by the time the second number information based on the operation in the second aspect counts the second predetermined number? In that respect, it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

(N03) In the gaming machine described in (N02) above,
The first numerical information is numerical information counted based on the operation in the first aspect that can be executed during variable display of the identification information displayed on the display means.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second number information is number information counted based on the operation in the second aspect that can be executed during the variable display of the identification information displayed on the display means.

According to the gaming machine described in (N03), it is possible to improve the fun of the game during the variable display of the identification information.

(N04) In the gaming machine described in (N02) above,
The first numerical information is numerical information displayed on the display means together with a variable display of the identification information displayed on the display means.
The gaming machine characterized in that the second numerical information is numerical information displayed on the display means together with a variable display of the identification information displayed on the display means.

According to the gaming machine described in (N04), it is possible to improve the fun of the game during the variable display of the identification information.

(N05) In the gaming machine according to any one of (N00) to (N04).
A gaming machine comprising a notification means for notifying that the first number information has reached the first predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine described in (N05), it is possible to improve the interest of the game by recognizing the progress of the first number information becoming the first predetermined number.

(N06) In the gaming machine according to any one of (N00) to (N05).
A game board having a game area in which a game ball launched based on the operations in the first aspect and the second aspect flows down.
A first ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area based on the operation in the first aspect,
A second ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area based on the operation in the second aspect,
A specific ball entry means that allows a game ball flowing down the game area to enter, and
A specific area where a game ball that has entered the specific ball entry means can enter, and
A first detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the first ball entry means,
A second detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the second ball entry means, and a second detection means.
A lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player occurs based on the detection of the game ball by the first detection means and the second detection means.
A variable display control means for displaying the result of the lottery by the lottery means on the display means as a result of the variable display of the identification information that can be visually recognized by the player.
Based on the fact that the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a specific result, when the variable display of the identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific combination, the specific ball-entry means can enter a game ball in an open state. To the open / close game state in which the open / close game is executed a predetermined number of times until the closed state in which it is difficult for the specific ball entry means to enter the game ball is performed once, or the specific ball entry means is entered during the open / close game state. When the ball is entered into the specific area, the high-probability gaming state in which the result of the lottery is more likely to be the specific result than in the normal gaming state until a predetermined number of fluctuations is reached after the end of the opening / closing gaming state. And the state transition means to shift to
When the result of the lottery is the specific result, the specific period that can be predetermined in the opening / closing game state is changed at least according to the number of changes of the identification information at the time when the specific result is obtained. Period control means and
A specific ball entry opening / closing member that opens / closes a specific ball entry section of the specific ball entry means in the opening / closing game state can be operated in an open state and a closed state in a predetermined specific ball entry section opening / closing pattern. The ball entry part opening / closing control means and
A specific area opening / closing control means capable of operating the specific area opening / closing member that opens / closes the specific area in the opening / closing game state between the open state and the closed state in a predetermined specific area opening / closing pattern is provided.
The counting means is based on the number of fluctuations of the identification information based on the detection of the game ball by the first detection means as the first number information and the detection of the game ball by the second detection means as the second number information. The total of the number of fluctuations of the identification information is counted as the predetermined number of fluctuations.
In the high-probability gaming state, the determination means performs the first variation display of the identification information based on the detection of the game ball by the first detection means as the first condition, and the second variation. As a condition, when the variation display of the identification information based on the detection of the game ball by the second detection means is performed the second variation number, it is determined that the predetermined variation number has been reached.
When the variation display of the identification information based on the detection of the game ball by the first detection means at the time when the specific result is obtained is within the first variation number, the opening timing of the specific ball entry portion opening / closing pattern It is difficult to match the opening timing of the specific area opening / closing pattern, and it is difficult for the game ball that entered during the opening of the specific entry portion opening / closing member to enter the specific area.
When the variation display of the identification information based on the detection of the gaming ball by the second detection means at the time when the specific result is obtained is within the second variation number, the opening timing of the specific ball entry portion opening / closing pattern A gaming machine characterized in that it is easy to match the opening timing of the specific area opening / closing pattern, and it is easy for a game ball that has entered during the opening of the specific entry portion opening / closing member to enter the specific area.

According to the gaming machine described in (N06), the rate of entering the specific area changes according to the number of fluctuations of the identification information at the time when the specific result is obtained, so that the fun of the opening / closing gaming state is improved. Can be done.

(N07) In the gaming machine according to (N06) above,
The counting means is the second detecting means when the variation display of the identification information based on the detection of the gaming ball by the first detecting means does not give the specific result within the first fluctuation number of times. A gaming machine characterized in that counting until the variation display of the identification information based on the detection of a gaming ball reaches the second variation number is started.

According to the gaming machine described in (N07), even if a specific result is not obtained within the first variation number, it is possible to improve the fun of the opening / closing gaming state until the second variation number is reached.

(N08) In the gaming machine according to (N07) above,
When the variation display of the identification information based on the detection of the game ball by the first detection means does not give the specific result within the first variation number, the detection of the game ball by the second detection means A gaming machine comprising a counting start notification means for notifying that counting is started until the variation display of the identification information based on the second variation count is reached.

According to the gaming machine described in (N08), even if the operation mode changes in the middle, it is possible to improve the fun of the opening / closing gaming state by making the player recognize in advance.

(N09) In the gaming machine according to any one of (N07) or (N08).
When the variation display of the identification information based on the detection of the gaming ball by the first detection means does not give the specific result within the first variation number, the specific ball entry portion opening / closing member is opened. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a ball entry possibility notification means for notifying that the possibility that a ball has entered the specific area is increased.

According to the gaming machine described in (N09), even if the specific result is not obtained within the first number of fluctuations, if the specific result is subsequently obtained within the second number of fluctuations. By giving recognition that the possibility of entering a specific area is increased, it is possible to improve the fun of the opening / closing game state.

(N10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (N07) to (N09).
When the variation display of the identification information based on the detection of the gaming ball by the first detection means does not give the specific result within the first variation number, the gaming ball is directed toward the second ball entry means. A gaming machine characterized by being provided with a launch notification means for notifying the launch.

According to the gaming machine described in (N10), the launching operation can be smoothly changed even if the launching destination changes in the middle, so that the fun of the opening / closing gaming state can be improved.

(N11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (N07) to (N10) above.
The first ball entry means is provided in an area of the game area where a game ball launched by a left-handed strike can enter.
The second ball-entry means is a gaming machine characterized in that a gaming ball launched by right-handed hitting is provided in an area of the gaming area where a gaming ball can be entered.

According to the gaming machine described in (N11), since the firing operation is changed so that the entire gaming area can be used, the interest of the opening / closing gaming state can be improved.

(N12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (N07) to (N11).
The game value given when the variable display of the identification information based on the detection of the game ball by the first detection means has a specific result, and the identification information based on the detection of the game ball by the second detection means. A gaming machine characterized in that the variable display of is different from the gaming value given when a specific result is obtained.

According to the gaming machine described in (N12), the interest in the open / closed gaming state is improved by causing a difference in the gaming value obtained depending on whether or not a specific result is obtained within the first variation number of times. Can be done.

<15th task>
Conventionally, there is, for example, a pachinko machine as a typical example of a gaming machine. This type of gaming machine shifts the gaming state to an open / close gaming state in which the specific entry portion is opened / closed, for example, when the result of a lottery based on the detection of the gaming ball in a predetermined entry portion is a specific result. (For example, see Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-239863 (page 10, FIG. 8)).
However, in the case of the conventional example having such a configuration, there are the following problems.
That is, with a conventional pachinko machine, for example, there is a problem that it is difficult to further improve the interest of the game.
The following invention (O00) has been made in view of such circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

(O00) A game board having a game area in which a game ball flows down, and
A variable ball-entry means having a predetermined opening / closing member and variable between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is allowed to enter and a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is not allowed to enter.
A counting means that counts numerical information about the game,
Based on the number information becoming a predetermined number, a state changing means for changing from a state in which a game ball is difficult to enter into the variable ball entry means to a state in which a game ball is easy to enter into the variable ball entry means. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the gaming machine described in (O00), the ease of entering the variable ball entry means changes according to the counting status of the numerical information related to the game, so that the fun of the game can be improved.

(O01) In the gaming machine described in (O00) above,
The state changing means is a gaming machine characterized in that the game ball is maintained in a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the variable ball entering means until the number information reaches the predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine described in (O01), the ease of entering the variable ball-entry means changes according to the counting situation when the number information related to the game becomes a predetermined number, so that the game is interesting. Can be improved.

(O02) In the gaming machine according to (O00) or (O01) above.
The state changing means is a gaming machine characterized in that after the number information becomes a predetermined number, a state in which a game ball can easily enter the variable ball entering means is maintained for a predetermined period.

According to the gaming machine described in (O02), it becomes easy to enter the variable ball-entry means for a predetermined period when the number information related to the game becomes a predetermined number, so that the fun of the game can be improved. Can be done.

(O03) In the gaming machine according to any one of (O00) to (O02).
The counting means is a gaming machine characterized by counting numerical information regarding a game after the end of an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

According to the gaming machine described in (O03), it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game after the end of the advantageous gaming state which is advantageous for the player.

(O04) In the gaming machine described in (O03) above,
The counting means is a gaming machine characterized by counting numerical information related to a game in a specific period after the end of the advantageous gaming state.

According to the gaming machine described in (O04), it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game in a specific period after the end of the specific gaming state which is advantageous for the player.

(O05) In the gaming machine according to any one of (O02) to (O04).
The state changing means is characterized in that, after maintaining a state in which a game ball can easily enter the variable ball entry means for a predetermined period of time, the state changing means returns to a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means. A game machine to play.

According to the gaming machine described in (O05), it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game for a predetermined period until the gaming ball returns to a state in which it is difficult for the gaming ball to enter the variable ball entering means.

(O06) In the gaming machine according to any one of (O00) to (O05).
A ball entry section where a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
A detection unit that detects a game ball that has entered the ball entry unit,
A lottery unit for performing a lottery as to whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player occurs based on the detection of the game ball by the detection unit is provided.
The counting means is a gaming machine characterized in that it counts information on the number of times of a game in which a lottery for whether or not to generate the specific gaming state is performed.

According to the gaming machine described in (O06), it is possible to improve the interest of the game according to the counting status of the number of times information regarding the game in which the lottery for whether or not to generate the specific gaming state is performed.

(O07) In the gaming machine according to (O06) above,
A ball entry means as the entry portion capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and a ball entry means.
Opening and closing means for entering the ball, which opens and closes between an open state in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a closed state in which the ball cannot enter.
A first specific ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
A second specific ball entry means as the variable ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area, and
A first detection means as the detection unit for detecting a game ball that has entered the ball entry means,
A second detection means as the detection unit for detecting a game ball that has entered the opening / closing ball entry means,
A lottery means as the lottery unit that draws a lottery as to whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player occurs based on the detection of the game ball by the first detection means and the second detection means.
A variable display control means for displaying the result of the lottery by the lottery means on the display means as a result of the variable display of the identification information that can be visually recognized by the player.
Based on the fact that the result of the lottery based on the detection of the game ball by the first detection means or the second detection means is the first specific result (for example, a big hit), the variable display of the identification information is the first specific combination (for example, For example, when the game is stopped and displayed (for example, the jackpot is aligned), the period from the open state in which the first specific ball entry means can enter the game ball to the closed state in which the first specific ball entry means is difficult to enter the game ball is 1 The opening / closing game to be performed is shifted to the first opening / closing game state in which the opening / closing game is executed the first number of times, and after the end of the first opening / closing game state, the result of the lottery is more likely to be the first specific result than in the normal game state. At least in a supported state in which the opening / closing ball entering means is likely to be opened more frequently than in the normal gaming state, and the opening / closing ball entering means is in the open state for a longer time than in the normal gaming state, or in a non-supported state in which the opening / closing ball entering means is not in the supported state. The first state transition means for transitioning to one of the high-probability gaming states,
Based on the fact that the result of the lottery based on the detection of the game ball by the first detection means or the second detection means is the second specific result (for example, a small hit), the variation display of the identification information is the second specific combination. When the stop display is displayed (for example, small hits are aligned), from the open state in which the second specific ball entry means can enter the game ball to the closed state in which the second specific ball entry means is difficult to enter the game ball. A second state transition means for shifting the opening / closing game to a second opening / closing game state in which the opening / closing game is executed a second number of times less than the first number of times.
The state changing means is
When the number of fluctuations of the identification information at the time of the second specific result counted by the counting means is within the period of the first fluctuation number, the game ball is in the open state of the two specific ball entry means. Makes it difficult for the ball to enter
When the number of fluctuations of the symbol at the time of the second specific result counted by the counting means is within the period of the second number of fluctuations, the gaming ball is in the open state of the second specific ball-entry means. A gaming machine characterized by making it easy for players to enter the ball.

According to the gaming machine described in (O07), the ease of entering the second specific ball entry means changes according to the number of changes in the identification information at the time when the lottery result becomes the second specific result. , The fun of the second opening / closing game state can be improved.

(O08) In the gaming machine according to (O07) above,
When the result of the lottery is the second specific result, the specification that can be predetermined in the second opening / closing game state is at least according to the number of fluctuations of the identification information at the time when the second specific result is obtained. Equipped with a specific period control means that changes the period,
The state changing means is
When the number of fluctuations of the identification information at the time when the second specific result is obtained, which is counted by the counting means, is within the period of the first number of fluctuations, the specific period is set as the first specific period. , The state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter while the above-mentioned 2 specific entry means is open.
When the number of fluctuations of the identification information at the time of the second specific result counted by the counting means is within the period of the second number of fluctuations, the specific period is longer than the first specific period. A gaming machine characterized in that the second specific period makes it easy for a game ball to enter while the second specific entry means is open.

According to the gaming machine described in (O08), the ease of entering the second specific ball entry means changes according to the number of changes in the identification information at the time when the lottery result becomes the second specific result. , The fun of the second opening / closing game state can be improved.

(O09) In the gaming machine according to any one of (O00) to (O08) above.
When the first specific result occurs, the state change function maintains a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means until the number information reaches a predetermined number, and the second specific result is obtained. When it occurs, the gaming machine is characterized in that it maintains a state in which it is difficult for the gaming ball to enter the variable ball entering means even after the number information reaches a predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine described in (O09), it is easy to enter the variable ball entry means according to the type of the specific result and the counting situation triggered by the number information related to the game becoming a predetermined number. As the game changes, it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

For example, when a specific result occurs during the value-added game state, numerical information regarding the game in the value-added game state is specified without clearly indicating to the player whether it is the first specific result or the second specific result. By performing a common display effect until the number is reached, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the game ball will change to a state in which it is easy to enter the variable ball entry means.

(O10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (O02) to (O08).
The state change function maintains a state in which a game ball can easily enter the variable ball entry means for the predetermined period, and then when a third specific result occurs as the specific result, the game is played in the variable ball entry means. A gaming machine characterized by returning the ball to a state where it is difficult to enter.

According to the gaming machine described in (O10), it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game for a predetermined period until the gaming ball returns to a state in which it is difficult for the gaming ball to enter the variable ball entering means.

(O11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (O00) to (O10) above.
The state change function is a state in which a game ball easily enters the variable ball entry means and a game ball enters the variable ball entry means according to the numerical information about the game counted in the value-added game state. A gaming machine characterized by switching between difficult states.

According to the gaming machine described in (O11) above, the gaming value based on the entry into the variable ball entry means can be imparted in a well-balanced manner according to the numerical information regarding the games counted in the value-added gaming state. , It is possible to improve the fun of the game in the value-added game state.

(O12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (O00) to (O10) above.
The state change function is a gaming machine characterized in that a state in which a gaming ball is easily entered into the variable ball entering means is gradually switched according to numerical information regarding the game counted in the value-added gaming state.

According to the gaming machine described in (O12) above, the gaming value given based on the entry into the variable ball entry means is gradually increased or decreased according to the numerical information regarding the games counted in the value-added gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the fun of the game in the value-added game state.

<16th task>
Conventionally, as a gaming machine of this type, for example, when the operation of the operation means is performed in a specific mode within the valid period in which the operation of the operation means such as the operation button or the operation lever is valid, the specific operation correspondence effect is produced. , There is a gaming machine that is executed during a predetermined display effect (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-112124 (pages 39-40, FIG. 20)).
However, in the case of the conventional example having such a configuration, there are the following problems.
That is, there is a problem that it is not possible to suitably improve the interest of the production corresponding to a specific operation.
The inventions according to the following (P1-0), (P2-0), and (P4-0) have been made in view of such circumstances, and can suitably improve the interest of the specific operation-compatible staging. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine.
The inventions according to the following (P1-0) (P2-0) (P4-0) have the following configurations in order to achieve such an object.

(P1-0) An operating means that receives an operation by a player,
The main control means that performs the main control related to the game,
A gaming machine provided with an effect executing means for causing the display means to execute a predetermined display effect based on the result of determination by the main control means.
The effect executing means is
When the operation of the operation means is performed in a specific mode within the valid period in which the operation of the operation means is valid, the specific operation corresponding effect can be executed during the predetermined display effect.
It is characterized in that the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect is continued even if it is determined that there is no operation in the specific mode within the period in which the presence or absence of the operation in the specific mode of the operation means is determined. A game machine to play.

According to the gaming machine described in (P1-0), it is determined whether or not there is an operation in the specific mode even if the operation in the specific mode of the operating means is interrupted after the specific operation corresponding effect is started. If the operation in the specific mode is resumed within the period, the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect is continued. Therefore, the time until the operation of the operation means is restarted from the beginning and the specific operation corresponding effect is in the state before the interruption. You don't have to wait. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the production corresponding to the specific operation.

(P1-1) In the gaming machine described in (P1-0) above,
The effect executing means is
An operation detecting means capable of detecting an operation of the operating means by a player at predetermined intervals within the valid period is provided.
When the operation of the operating means is performed in a specific mode, thereafter, at a determination timing provided at a specific interval longer than the predetermined interval, based on the presence or absence of detection of the operation of the operating means by the player. , A gaming machine characterized in that it is determined whether or not to continue executing the specific operation corresponding effect.

According to the gaming machine described in (P1-1), even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted after the specific operation corresponding effect is started, the operation of the operating means by the player is restarted by the determination timing. If this is done, the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect is continued, so that it is not necessary to restart the operation of the operation means from the beginning and wait for the time until the specific operation corresponding effect is in the state before the interruption. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the production corresponding to the specific operation.

(P1-2) In the gaming machine described in (P1-1) above,
The effect executing means is based on the fact that the player detects the operation of the operation means at the determination timing after the operation of the operation means is performed in the specific mode, and the specific operation is performed even after the determination timing. A gaming machine characterized by continuing to execute corresponding effects.

According to the gaming machine described in (P1-2), even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted after the specific operation corresponding effect is started, the operation of the operating means by the player is restarted by the determination timing. If this is done, the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect is continued even after this determination timing, so that it is not necessary to restart the operation of the operation means from the beginning and wait for the time until the specific operation corresponding effect is in the state before the interruption. .. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the production corresponding to the specific operation.

(P1-3) In the gaming machine according to (P1-1) or (P1-2) above.
The effect executing means has the specific operation at the determination timing based on the fact that the player does not detect the operation of the operation means at the determination timing after the operation of the operation means is performed in the specific mode. A gaming machine characterized by ending the corresponding production.

According to the gaming machine described in (P1-3), after the specific operation corresponding effect is started, the detection of the player's operation is interrupted, and then the operation of the operating means by the player is restarted by the determination timing. If not, the effect corresponding to the specific operation ends at this determination timing, so that it is easy to reduce neglect of the operation. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the production corresponding to the specific operation.

(P1-4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (P1-1) to (P1-3) above.
After the operation of the operation means is performed in a specific mode, the effect executing means executes the specific operation corresponding effect until the determination timing arrives when the detection of the operation is lost at a timing other than the determination timing. A gaming machine characterized by continuing.

According to the gaming machine described in (P1-4), even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted after the specific operation corresponding effect is started, the specific operation corresponding effect is enjoyed until the determination timing arrives. be able to. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the production corresponding to the specific operation.

(P1-5) In the gaming machine described in (P1-4) above,
After the operation of the operation means is performed in a specific mode, the effect executing means executes the specific operation corresponding effect until the determination timing arrives when the operation is not detected at any time other than the determination timing. A gaming machine characterized in that the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect is further continued based on the detection of the operation of the operating means by the player at the determination timing.

According to the gaming machine described in (P1-5), even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted after the specific operation corresponding effect is started, the specific operation corresponding effect is enjoyed until the determination timing arrives. If you can resume the operation, you can enjoy the production corresponding to the specific operation. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the production corresponding to the specific operation.

(P1-6) In the gaming machine according to (P1-4) or (P1-5) above.
After the operation of the operation means is performed in a specific mode, the effect executing means executes the specific operation corresponding effect until the determination timing arrives when the operation is not detected at any time other than the determination timing. A gaming machine characterized in that the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect is terminated based on the fact that the operation of the operating means is not detected by the player at the determination timing.

According to the gaming machine described in (P1-6), even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted after the specific operation corresponding effect is started, the specific operation corresponding effect is enjoyed until the determination timing arrives. However, if the operation is neglected, it is not possible to enjoy the production corresponding to the specific operation any more. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the production corresponding to the specific operation.

(P1-7) In the gaming machine described in (P1-4) above,
After the operation of the operation means is performed in a specific mode, the effect executing means executes the specific operation corresponding effect until the determination timing arrives when the operation is not detected at any time other than the determination timing. The lottery is performed based on the detection of the operation of the operation means by the player at the determination timing, and when the result of the lottery is successful, the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect is further continued. A gaming machine featuring.

According to the gaming machine described in (P1-7) above, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted after the specific operation corresponding effect is started, the specific operation corresponding effect is enjoyed until the determination timing arrives. If you can resume the operation and win the lottery, you can further enjoy the production corresponding to the specific operation. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the production corresponding to the specific operation.

(P1-8) In the gaming machine described in (P1-7) above,
After the operation of the operation means is performed in a specific mode, the effect executing means executes the specific operation corresponding effect until the determination timing arrives when the operation is not detected at any time other than the determination timing. Continuing, the lottery is performed based on the detection of the operation of the operation means by the player at the determination timing, and when the result of the lottery is out of order, the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect is terminated. A gaming machine featuring.

According to the gaming machine described in (P1-8), even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted after the specific operation corresponding effect is started, the specific operation corresponding effect is enjoyed until the determination timing arrives. If the operation is restarted and the lottery is won, the specific operation-compatible effect can be further enjoyed, but if the selection is lost, the specific operation-compatible effect cannot be enjoyed any more. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the production corresponding to the specific operation.

(P2-0) An operating means that receives an operation by a player,
The main control means that performs the main control related to the game,
A gaming machine provided with an effect executing means for causing the display means to execute a predetermined display effect based on the result of determination by the main control means.
The effect executing means is
When the operation of the operation means is performed in a specific mode within the valid period in which the operation of the operation means is valid, the specific operation corresponding effect is executed during the predetermined display effect.
It is characterized in that the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect is continued even when an operation different from the operation in the specific mode is performed within the period in which the presence or absence of the operation in the specific mode of the operation means is determined. A gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (P2-0), after the specific operation corresponding effect is started, the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect is continued even if the operation different from the operation in the specific mode is performed. Therefore, it is not necessary to restart the operation of the operation means from the beginning even if the operation is different from the operation in the specific mode. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the production corresponding to the specific operation.

(P2-00) An operating means for receiving an operation by a player,
The main control means that performs the main control related to the game,
A gaming machine provided with an effect executing means for causing the display means to execute a predetermined display effect based on the result of determination by the main control means.
The effect executing means is
When the operation of the operation means is performed in a specific mode within the valid period in which the operation of the operation means is valid, the specific operation corresponding effect is executed during the predetermined display effect.
If an operation different from the operation in the specific mode is performed within the period in which the presence or absence of the operation in the specific mode of the operation means is determined, the operation corresponding to the specific operation is continuously executed. A gaming machine characterized by performing a production different from the production corresponding to a specific operation.

According to the gaming machine described in (P2-00), after the specific operation corresponding effect is started, the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect is continued even if the operation different from the operation in the specific mode is performed. In the state, an effect different from the effect corresponding to the specific operation is executed, so that it becomes easy to recognize that it is not necessary to redo the operation of the operation means from the beginning even if the operation different from the operation in the specific mode is performed. .. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the production corresponding to the specific operation.

(P2-000) An operating means that receives an operation by a player,
The main control means that performs the main control related to the game,
A gaming machine provided with an effect executing means for causing the display means to execute a predetermined display effect based on the result of determination by the main control means.
The effect executing means is
When the operation of the operation means is performed in a specific mode within the valid period in which the operation of the operation means is valid, the specific operation corresponding effect is executed during the predetermined display effect.
Even if an operation different from the operation in the specific mode is performed within the period in which the presence or absence of the operation in the specific mode of the operation means is determined, the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect is continued. hand,
The results of the different operations are shown during the execution of one of the predetermined display effects.
The result of the different operation shown during the execution of one of the predetermined display effects is also shown during the execution of the next predetermined display effect or the subsequent execution of the predetermined display effect. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine described in (P2-000), the result of different operations performed during the execution of one predetermined display effect is the result of the subsequent predetermined display effect even during the execution of the predetermined display effect. It is also shown during the execution of the display effect of. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the production corresponding to the specific operation through different operations.

(P2-0A) In the gaming machine described in (P2-0) above,
The effect executing means is
The results of the different operations are shown during the execution of one of the predetermined display effects.
The result of the different operation shown during the execution of one of the predetermined display effects is also shown during the execution of the next predetermined display effect or the subsequent execution of the predetermined display effect. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine described in (P2-0A), the result of a different operation performed during the execution of one predetermined display effect is a predetermined value thereafter even during the execution of one predetermined display effect. It is also shown during the execution of the display effect of. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the production corresponding to the specific operation through different operations.

(P2-0B) In the gaming machine described in (P2-0) above,
The effect executing means is
The display mode of the specific operation corresponding effect is changed according to a predetermined condition obtained as a result of the determination.
The specific operation-compatible effect is determined by the difference in the display mode of the specific operation-compatible effect when an operation different from the specific mode is performed after the operation of the operation means is performed in the specific mode. A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined conditions obtained as a result are suggested.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine described in (P2-0B) above, the interest of the specific operation-compatible staging is suitably improved by the difference in the display mode of the specific operation-compatible staging according to the predetermined conditions obtained as a result of the determination. Can be done. In addition, it is interesting that the suggestion of a predetermined condition obtained as a result of the determination is given by performing an operation different from the operation of the specific mode during the specific operation corresponding effect. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the production corresponding to the specific operation.

(P2-1) In the gaming machine described in (P2-0B) above,
The effect executing means is a gaming machine characterized in that the display mode of the specific operation corresponding effect is changed according to a predetermined condition obtained as a result of the determination.

According to the gaming machine described in (P2-1) above, the interest of the specific operation-compatible staging is suitably improved by the difference in the display mode of the specific operation-compatible staging according to the predetermined conditions obtained as a result of the determination. Can be done.

(P2-2) In the gaming machine described in (P2-1) above,
The specific operation-compatible effect is determined by the difference in the display mode of the specific operation-compatible effect when an operation different from the specific mode is performed after the operation of the operation means is performed in the specific mode. A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined conditions obtained as a result are suggested.

According to the gaming machine described in (P2-2), it is interesting that during the specific operation corresponding effect, an operation different from the operation of the specific mode is performed and a suggestion of a predetermined condition obtained as a result of the determination is given. Occurs.

(P2-3) In the gaming machine according to (P2-0) or (P2-1) above.
The specific operation corresponding effect is characterized in that the display mode is different when the player does not detect the operation of the operation means at the determination timing after the operation of the operation means is performed in the specific mode. A gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (P2-3), when the operation of the operating means is canceled after the specific operation corresponding effect is started, the specific operation corresponding effect is produced depending on the difference in the display mode after the release. It is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

(P2-4) In the gaming machine according to (P2-0) or (P2-3) above.
In the specific operation correspondence effect, after the operation of the operation means is performed in the specific mode, when the player does not detect the operation of the operation means at the determination timing, the display mode is changed. A gaming machine characterized by being different.

According to the gaming machine described in (P2-4), when the operation of the operating means is canceled after the specific operation corresponding effect is started, the display mode is changed depending on the difference in the display mode after the cancellation. It is possible to suitably improve the interest of the production corresponding to the specific operation.

(P2-5) In the gaming machine according to (P2-0) or (P2-3) above.
The specific operation corresponding effect is a case where the player does not detect the operation of the operation means at the determination timing after the operation of the operation means is performed in the specific mode, and the game is performed after the determination timing. A gaming machine characterized in that the way in which the display mode is changed is different when the operation of the operating means is detected by a person.

According to the gaming machine described in (P2-5) above, when the operation of the operating means is canceled after the specific operation corresponding effect is started, but then the operation is restarted, the display mode changes. Depending on the method, the fun of the production corresponding to the specific operation can be suitably improved.

(P2-6) In the gaming machine according to (P2-0) or (P2-3) above.
The specific operation corresponding effect is a case where the player does not detect the operation of the operation means at the determination timing after the operation of the operation means is performed in the specific mode, and the game is performed after the determination timing. A gaming machine characterized in that the presence or absence of execution of specific notification is different when the operation of the operation means is detected by a person.

According to the gaming machine described in (P2-6) above, when the operation of the operating means is canceled after the specific operation corresponding effect is started, but then the operation is restarted, the specific notification is executed. Depending on the presence or absence, the fun of the production corresponding to the specific operation can be suitably improved.

(P2-7) In the gaming machine described in (P2-6) above,
The specific notification is a gaming machine characterized in that it is a notification of whether or not the specific operation corresponding effect is restarted.

According to the gaming machine described in (P2-7) above, when the operation of the operating means is canceled after the specific operation corresponding effect is started, but then the operation is restarted, the specific operation corresponding effect is performed. By notifying the presence or absence of resumption, it is possible to suitably improve the fun of the production corresponding to a specific operation.

(P2-8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (P2-0) or (P2-1) to (P2-7) above.
The predetermined condition is a gaming machine characterized in that the result of the determination is an expectation degree of a specific result.

According to the gaming machine described in (P2-8) above, the degree of expectation that the judgment result will be a specific result is suggested by the difference in the display mode of the specific operation corresponding effect. It can be suitably improved.

(P2-9) In the gaming machine described in (P2-8) above,
The predetermined condition is a gaming machine characterized in that it is a change pattern of a display mode of the specific operation corresponding effect determined according to the degree of expectation.

According to the gaming machine described in (P2-9) above, the difference in the change pattern of the display mode of the specific operation-compatible effect suggests the degree of expectation that the determination result will be the specific result. It is possible to suitably improve the interest.

(P3-1) In the gaming machine described in (P1-1) above,
The effect executing means is characterized in that when the operation of the operation means is not detected during the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect, the specified operation corresponding effect is executed for a predetermined period without ending the specific operation corresponding effect. A game machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (P3-1), even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted during the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect after the operation of the operating means is performed in the specific mode, the specific operation is performed. Since the predetermined effect is executed for a predetermined period without ending the corresponding effect, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the specific operation-compatible effect as compared with the case where the effect is ended when the detection of the operation is interrupted. ..

(P3-2) In the gaming machine described in (P3-1) above,
The predetermined effect is a gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined operation is an effect of continuing the specific operation corresponding effect for the predetermined period.

According to the gaming machine described in (P3-2) above, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted during the execution of the specific operation-corresponding effect after the operation of the operating means is performed in a specific mode, a predetermined period of time is provided. , Since the production corresponding to the specific operation is pending, there is a unity of the production before and after the detection of the operation is interrupted. Can be suitably improved.

(P3-3) In the gaming machine described in (P3-2) above,
The predetermined effect is a gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined effect is an effect that continuously changes the display mode of the specific operation corresponding effect for the predetermined period.

According to the gaming machine described in (P3-3), even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted during the execution of the specific operation-corresponding effect after the operation of the operating means is performed in a specific mode, a predetermined period of time is provided. Since the change in the display mode is continued, there is a continuity of the change in the display mode before and after the operation detection is interrupted. It is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

(P4-0) An operating means that receives an operation by a player,
The main control means that performs the main control related to the game,
A gaming machine provided with an effect executing means for causing the display means to execute a predetermined display effect based on the result of determination by the main control means.
The effect executing means is
When the operation of the operation means is performed in a specific mode within the valid period in which the operation of the operation means is valid, the specific operation corresponding effect is executed during the predetermined display effect.
The specific operation-corresponding effect is performed during the specific operation-corresponding effect when an operation different from the specific operation is performed after the operation of the operation means is performed in the specific mode. A gaming machine characterized in that the result of the determination can be suggested by an aspect of another effect different from that of the above and an aspect of the specific operation corresponding effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine described in (P4-0), during the specific operation corresponding effect, an operation different from the operation of the specific mode is performed, and the mode of the different effect different from the specific operation corresponding effect and the specific operation corresponding effect are performed. It is interesting that the suggestion of the result of the judgment is given depending on the aspect. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the production corresponding to the specific operation.

(P4-0) An operating means for receiving an operation by a player,
The main control means that performs the main control related to the game,
A gaming machine provided with an effect executing means for causing the display means to execute a predetermined display effect based on the result of determination by the main control means.
The effect executing means is
When the operation of the operation means is performed in a specific mode within the valid period in which the operation of the operation means is valid, the specific operation corresponding effect is executed during the predetermined display effect, and the effect is described according to the mode of the effect. The result of the judgment is to execute a specific suggestion that can be suggested.
The specific operation-corresponding effect is performed during the specific operation-corresponding effect when an operation different from the specific operation is performed after the operation of the operation means is performed in the specific mode. A gaming machine characterized in that the specific suggestion can be executed even by a mode of different production different from that of the above.

According to the gaming machine described in (P4-0) above, not only when the operation of the specific mode is performed during the specific operation corresponding effect, but also when the operation different from the operation of the specific mode is performed, the specific operation corresponding effect is produced. It is interesting that the suggestion (specific suggestion) of the result of the same determination as when the operation of the specific mode is given is given by the mode of another effect different from the above. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the production corresponding to the specific operation.

(P4-1) In the gaming machine described in (P3-1) above,
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined effect is a different effect different from the specific operation corresponding effect, which is executed for the predetermined period.

According to the gaming machine described in (P4-1), even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted during the execution of the specific operation-corresponding effect after the operation of the operating means is performed in the specific mode, the predetermined period Since an effect different from the specific operation-compatible effect is executed, the effect of the specific operation-compatible effect is different from that of the specific operation-compatible effect, compared to the case where the effect is terminated when the operation detection is interrupted. It can be suitably improved.

(P4-2) In the gaming machine according to (4-0) or (P4-1) above.
The other effect is a game machine that is executed for the predetermined period and is an effect that suggests or notifies the player that the operation of the operation means has disappeared.

According to the gaming machine described in (P4-2) above, when the detection of the player's operation is interrupted during the execution of the specific operation-corresponding effect after the operation of the operating means is performed in a specific mode, a predetermined period of time. Since it is possible to notify the player that the operation needs to be restarted by another effect, the interest of the specific operation-compatible effect is preferably improved as compared with the case where the effect is terminated when the operation detection is interrupted. Can be made to.

(P4-3) In the gaming machine according to (4-0) or (P4-1) above.
The effect executing means is a gaming machine characterized by executing the predetermined effect for the predetermined period until the determination timing arrives.

According to the gaming machine described in (P4-3), even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted during the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect after the operation of the operating means is performed in the specific mode, the determination timing is determined. Since the predetermined effect is executed for a predetermined period until the arrival of the effect, the interest of the specific operation-compatible effect can be preferably improved as compared with the case where the effect is terminated when the detection of the operation is interrupted.

(P4-4) In the gaming machine described in (P4-3) above,
The effect executing means indicates or notifies the player that the operation of the operation means has disappeared at the determination timing after executing the predetermined effect for the predetermined period until the determination timing arrives. A gaming machine featuring.

According to the gaming machine described in (P4-4), even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted during the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect after the operation of the operating means is performed in the specific mode, the determination timing After the predetermined effect is executed for a predetermined period until the arrival of the player, it is possible to notify the player that the operation needs to be restarted at the determination timing, so that the effect ends when the detection of the operation is interrupted. It is possible to preferably improve the interest of the production corresponding to a specific operation as compared with the case of doing so.

(P4-5) In the gaming machine described in (P4-3) above,
The effect executing means executes the predetermined effect for the predetermined period until the determination timing arrives, and then executes the effect of suggesting or notifying the end of the specific operation corresponding effect at the determination timing. A featured gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (P4-5), even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted during the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect after the operation of the operating means is performed in the specific mode, the determination timing After the predetermined effect is executed for a predetermined period until the arrival of the player, the player can be notified of the end of the effect at the determination timing. It is possible to suitably improve the interest of the production corresponding to the specific operation.

(P5-0) In the gaming machine according to any one of (P1-0) to (P4-5) above.
The effect executing means is
With the effect continuation lottery means for drawing a lottery as to whether or not to continue the operation-corresponding effect within the valid period in which the operation of the operation means is valid and within the period in which the operation of the operation means is performed in a specific mode. Equipped with
When the operation of the operating means is performed in a specific mode, it is determined that the player is operating the operating means at a determination timing provided at each specific interval longer than the predetermined interval. In this case, when the lottery result of the effect continuation lottery is the result of continuing the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect, the specific operation corresponding effect is continued to be executed after the next specific interval. Gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (P5-0), since the operation is detected at the determination timing and the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect is continued based on the lottery result of the effect continuation lottery, the operation is performed. If the detection of the specific operation is continued, the interest of the specific operation corresponding effect can be preferably improved as compared with the case where the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect is continued.

(P5-1) In the gaming machine described in (P1-1) above,
The effect executing means draws a lottery as to whether or not to continue the operation-corresponding effect within a valid period in which the operation of the operation means is valid and within a period in which the operation of the operation means is performed in a specific mode. The effect continuous lottery means is provided, and when it is determined that the player is operating the operation means at the determination timing, the lottery result of the effect continuation lottery continues the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect. A gaming machine characterized in that the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect is continued at the next specific interval when the result is the result.

According to the gaming machine described in (P5-1) above, since the operation is detected at the determination timing and the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect is continued based on the lottery result of the effect continuation lottery, the operation is performed. If the detection of the specific operation is continued, the interest of the specific operation corresponding effect can be preferably improved as compared with the case where the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect is continued.

(P5-2) In the gaming machine according to (P5-0) or (P5-1) above.
The effect continuation lottery means is a gaming machine characterized in that, at the determination timing, whether or not to continue the operation-corresponding effect at the next specific interval is drawn.

According to the gaming machine described in (P5-2) above, since the continuous production lottery is performed at the determination timing, the lottery opportunity increases compared to the case where the production for specific operation is decided by the lottery at the start of the production. It is possible to suitably improve the interest of the production.

(P5-3) In the gaming machine according to (P5-0) or (P5-1) above.
The effect continuous lottery means is a gaming machine characterized in that a lottery is performed at intervals shorter than the specific interval to determine whether or not to continue the operation-corresponding effect at the next specific interval.

According to the gaming machine described in (P5-3), since the continuous production lottery is performed at intervals shorter than the specific interval, the chances of lottery are increased as compared with the case where the lottery is performed at the determination timing. It is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

(P5-4) In the gaming machine according to (P5-0) or (P5-1) above.
The effect executing means is a lottery result of the effect continuation lottery when the player does not detect the operation of the operation means within the valid period after the operation of the operation means is performed in a specific mode. A gaming machine characterized in that the operation-corresponding effect is continued even after the operation of the operation means is no longer detected.

According to the gaming machine described in (P5-4), when the detection of the player's operation is interrupted after the specific operation corresponding effect is started, the specific operation corresponding effect is produced according to the lottery result of the effect continuous lottery. Since it is determined whether or not to continue the execution of the above, the variation of the effect when the detection of the player's operation is interrupted is widened, so that the fun of the effect corresponding to the specific operation can be suitably improved.

(P6-00) The main control means that performs the main control related to the game,
A gaming machine provided with an effect executing means for causing the display means to execute a predetermined display effect based on the result of determination by the main control means.
The effect executing means is
It is intended to cause the display means to display predetermined information during the execution of the predetermined display effect.
When the player's operation is performed in a specific mode within the valid period in which the player's operation is valid, the specific operation corresponding effect is executed during the predetermined display effect, and the presence or absence of the operation in the specific mode is performed. If an operation different from the operation in the specific mode is performed within the period in which is determined, the result of the operation different from the operation in the specific mode is continued while the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect is continued. A gaming machine characterized by reflecting.

According to the gaming machine described in (P6-00), after the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect is started, the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect continues even if the operation different from the operation in the specific mode is performed. Since the result of the operation different from the operation in the specific mode is reflected in the state of being performed, it is not necessary to restart the operation of the operation means from the beginning even if the operation different from the operation in the specific mode is performed. , It can be recognized without discomfort in the production corresponding to the specific operation. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the production corresponding to the specific operation.

(P6-0) The main control means that performs the main control related to the game,
A gaming machine provided with an effect executing means for causing the display means to execute a predetermined display effect based on the result of determination by the main control means.
The effect executing means is
It is intended to cause the display means to display predetermined information during the execution of the predetermined display effect.
When the player's operation is performed in a specific mode within the valid period in which the player's operation is valid, the specific operation corresponding effect is executed during the predetermined display effect, and the presence or absence of the operation in the specific mode is performed. If an operation different from the operation in the specific mode is performed within the period in which is determined, the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect is continued.
The predetermined information is displayed in a mode in which the presence or absence of the operation in the specific mode can be recognized during the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect, and when an operation different from the operation in the specific mode is performed, the predetermined information is displayed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is displayed in a mode that can be recognized as being operated in the specific mode.

According to the gaming machine described in (P6-0), after the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect is started, the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect continues even if the operation different from the operation in the specific mode is performed. Therefore, it is not necessary to restart the operation of the operation means from the beginning even if the operation is different from the operation in the specific mode. Further, the predetermined information displayed on the display means during the execution of the predetermined display effect is displayed in a mode in which the presence or absence of the operation in the specific mode can be recognized during the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect. You can easily check whether or not you can perform the operation with. Further, the predetermined information displayed on the display means during the execution of the predetermined display effect can be recognized as being operated in the specific mode when the operation is different from the operation in the specific mode. Since it is displayed in a mode, it is possible to visually recognize that it is not necessary to restart the operation of the operating means from the beginning. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the production corresponding to the specific operation.

(P6-1) In the gaming machine described in (P6-0) above,
The predetermined information is different from the first information displayed in a mode in which the presence or absence of the operation in the specific mode can be recognized during the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect, and the operation in the specific mode is performed. In this case, the gaming machine is characterized in that it is the second information displayed in a mode that can be recognized that the operation in the specific mode is performed.

According to the gaming machine described in (P6-1), the first information is displayed in a mode in which the presence or absence of an operation in a specific mode can be recognized during the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not the operation can be performed. Further, when an operation different from the operation in the specific mode is performed, the second information is displayed in a mode in which it can be recognized that the operation in the specific mode is performed, so that the operation of the operation means is restarted from the beginning. It is possible to visually recognize that there is no need.

(P6-2) In the gaming machine described in (P6-1) above,
The first information is the first operation information displayed in a mode imitating the operation means so that the presence or absence of the operation in the specific mode can be recognized during the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect.
The second information is displayed in a mode imitating an operation means so that when an operation different from the operation in the specific mode is performed, it can be recognized that the operation in the specific mode is performed. 2 A gaming machine characterized by being operation information.

According to the gaming machine described in (P6-2), the first information is displayed in a mode imitating an operation means so that the presence or absence of an operation in a specific mode can be recognized during the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect. Therefore, it is possible to intuitively recognize whether or not the operation is performed in a specific mode. Further, when an operation different from the operation in the specific mode is performed, the second information is displayed in a mode imitating the operation means so that the operation in the specific mode can be recognized. It is possible to intuitively recognize that there is no need to redo the operation of the operating means.

(P6-3) In the gaming machine described in (P6-1) above,
The first information is the first specific operation correspondence information which is the object of the specific operation correspondence effect, which is displayed in a mode in which the presence or absence of the operation in the specific aspect can be recognized during the execution of the specific operation correspondence effect. can be,
The second information is displayed in a mode in which it can be recognized that the operation in the specific mode is performed when an operation different from the operation in the specific mode is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is information corresponding to the second specific operation.

According to the gaming machine described in (P6-3), the first specific operation correspondence, which is the object of the specific operation correspondence effect, in a manner in which the presence or absence of the operation in the specific mode can be recognized during the execution of the specific operation correspondence effect. Since the information is displayed, it is possible to intuitively recognize whether or not the operation is performed in a specific mode while enjoying the purpose of the effect corresponding to the specific operation. In addition, when an operation different from the operation in the specific mode is performed, the second specific operation support information which is the purpose of the specific operation support effect is displayed in a mode in which it can be recognized that the operation in the specific mode is performed. Therefore, while enjoying the purpose of the production corresponding to a specific operation, it is possible to intuitively recognize that it is not necessary to restart the operation of the operation means from the beginning.

(P7-0) An operating means that receives an operation by a player,
The main control means that performs the main control related to the game,
A gaming machine provided with an effect executing means for causing the display means to execute a predetermined display effect based on the result of determination by the main control means.
The effect executing means is
When the operation of the operation means is performed in a specific mode within the valid period in which the operation of the operation means is valid, the specific operation corresponding effect is executed during the predetermined display effect.
If an operation different from the operation in the specific mode is performed within the period in which the presence or absence of the operation in the specific mode of the operation means is determined, the operation corresponding to the specific operation is continuously executed. It is a production that is different from the production corresponding to a specific operation.
A gaming machine characterized in that the different effect can be continued even after the end of the predetermined display effect that includes the specific operation corresponding effect.

According to the gaming machine described in (P7-0), after the specific operation corresponding effect is started, the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect is continued even if the operation different from the operation in the specific mode is performed. In the state, an effect different from the effect corresponding to the specific operation is executed, so that it becomes easy to recognize that it is not necessary to redo the operation of the operation means from the beginning even if the operation different from the operation in the specific mode is performed. .. Since different effects can be continued even after the end of the predetermined display effect that includes the specific operation-compatible effect, the different effects that occurred during the specific operation-compatible effect were included in the specified operation-compatible effect. It can be entertained for a long time even after the display production of. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the production corresponding to the specific operation.

(P7-1) In the gaming machine according to any one of (P2-0) to (P6-3) or (P7-0).
The gaming machine characterized in that the different effect is terminated when an operation for ending the different effect is performed.

According to the gaming machine described in (P7-1), the different effects are ended when the operation for ending the different effects is performed, so that the different effects are ended when the different effects are executed. It is possible to recognize that an operation is necessary. It should be noted that the different effects are the effects performed as a result of different operations in the above-mentioned (P2-000).

(P7-2) In the gaming machine according to (P7-1) or (P7-0) above.
A gaming machine characterized in that the different effect can be continued even after the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect is completed when the operation for ending the different effect is not performed.

According to the gaming machine described in (P7-2), the different effect can be continued even after the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect is completed if the operation for ending the different effect is not performed. Therefore, if a different effect is executed even after the effect corresponding to the specific operation is completed, it is possible to recognize that an operation for ending the different effect is necessary.

(P7-3) In the gaming machine according to any one of (P2-0) to (P6-3) or (P7-0).
A gaming machine characterized in that the different effects can be continuously executed a plurality of times during the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect.

According to the gaming machine described in (P7-3), different effects can be continuously executed a plurality of times during the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect, so that the different effects can be enjoyed for a long time during the specific operation corresponding effect. You can do it.

(P7-4) In the gaming machine according to the above (P2-0) to (P6-3) or (P7-0).
The gaming machine, characterized in that the different effect is continued during the predetermined display effect that includes the specific operation corresponding effect.

According to the gaming machine described in (P7-4), since it is continued during the predetermined display effect including the specific operation corresponding effect, the predetermined display effect returned after the end of the specific operation corresponding effect is completed. You can enjoy different productions for a long time.

(P7-5) In the gaming machines described in (P2-0) to (P6-3) above.
A gaming machine characterized in that the different effect can be continued even after the end of the predetermined display effect that includes the specific operation corresponding effect.

According to the gaming machine described in (P7-5), different effects can be continued even after the end of the predetermined display effect that includes the specific operation-compatible effect, so that the different effects occur during the specific operation-compatible effect. It is possible to enjoy the different effects for a long time even after the predetermined display effect, which includes the specific operation-compatible effect, is completed.

(P7-6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (P2-0) to (P6-3) or (P7-0).
The different effect is a gaming machine characterized in that the effect can be ended when the specific operation corresponding effect is completed.

According to the gaming machine described in (P7-6), different effects can be ended when the specific operation-compatible effect is completed, so that different effects may be executed only during the specific operation-compatible effect. can.

(P7-7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (P2-0) to (P6-3) or (P7-0).
The different effect is a gaming machine characterized in that it can be ended when the predetermined display effect is completed.

According to the gaming machine described in (P7-7), different effects can be ended when a predetermined display effect is completed, so that different effects may be executed only during the predetermined display effect. can.

(P7-8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (P2-0) to (P6-3) or (P7-0).
The different effect is characterized in that, when the different operation is performed within the period in which the specific operation corresponding effect is executed again, the different effect can be continued in a state of inheriting the previously executed different effect. Gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (P7-8), the different effects inherit the previously executed different effects when different operations are performed within the period in which the specific operation corresponding effect is executed again. Since it can be continued with, it is possible to take over and entertain the different productions that were performed earlier.

(P7-9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (P2-0) to (P6-3) or (P7-0).
The gaming machine characterized in that the different effect can be continued in the predetermined display effect to be executed next after the end of the predetermined display effect executed first.

According to the gaming machine described in (P7-9), different effects can be continued in the next predetermined display effect after the end of the previously executed predetermined display effect. It is possible to take over and entertain the different effects that were executed during the predetermined display effect of.

(P7-10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (P2-0) to (P6-3) or (P7-0).
The different effect is a game characterized in that it can be continued in the specific operation corresponding effect to be executed next after the end of the specific operation corresponding effect previously executed in the predetermined display effect. Machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (P7-10), the different effects are in one predetermined display effect, in the specific operation corresponding effect to be executed next after the end of the previously executed specific operation corresponding effect. Since it is possible to continue, it is possible to take over and entertain the different effects that were executed during the previous specific operation corresponding effect in the next specific operation corresponding effect in one predetermined display effect.

(P7-11) In the gaming machine according to any one of (P2-0) to (P6-3) or (P7-0).
The different effect is a gaming machine characterized in that when the timing at which the different operation is executed is the final stage of the specific operation corresponding effect, the different effect can be continued even after the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect is completed.

According to the gaming machine described in (P7-11), different effects can be continued even after the execution of the specific operation-compatible effect is completed when the timing at which the different operations are executed is the final stage of the specific operation-compatible effect. Therefore, when different operations are performed at a late timing, it is possible to enjoy different effects by using the period after the specific operation corresponding effect.

(P7-12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (P2-0) to (P6-3) or (P7-0).
The gaming machine is characterized in that, when the timing at which the different operation is executed is the final stage of the predetermined display effect, the different effect can be continued even after the execution of the predetermined display effect is completed.

According to the gaming machine described in (P7-12), different effects can be continued even after the execution of the predetermined display effect is completed when the timing at which the different operations are executed is the final stage of the predetermined display effect. Therefore, when different operations are performed at a late timing, it is possible to enjoy different effects by using the period after the predetermined display effect.

(P8-0) An operating means that receives an operation by a player,
The main control means that performs the main control related to the game,
A gaming machine provided with an effect executing means for causing the display means to execute a predetermined display effect based on the result of determination by the main control means.
The effect executing means is
When the operation of the operation means is performed in a specific mode within the valid period in which the operation of the operation means is valid, the specific operation corresponding effect is executed during the predetermined display effect.
If an operation different from the operation in the specific mode is performed within the period in which the presence or absence of the operation in the specific mode of the operation means is determined, the operation corresponding to the specific operation is continuously executed. It is a production that is different from the production corresponding to a specific operation.
The different effect is a game machine characterized by an effect using a numerical value that changes based on the different operation.

According to the gaming machine described in (P8-0), after the specific operation corresponding effect is started, the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect is continued even if the operation different from the operation in the specific mode is performed. In the state, an effect different from the effect corresponding to the specific operation is executed, so that it becomes easy to recognize that it is not necessary to redo the operation of the operation means from the beginning even if the operation different from the operation in the specific mode is performed. .. Since the different effects are effects using numerical values that change based on different operations, it is recognized that an operation different from the specific mode is performed by showing the numerical changes even though the different operations are performed. Can be made easier. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the production corresponding to the specific operation.

(P8-1) In the gaming machine according to any one of (P2-0) to (P6-3) or (P7-0), (P8-0).
The different effect is a gaming machine characterized by displaying specific visual information that visually indicates that the different operations have been performed.

According to the gaming machine described in (P8-1), the different effects are the display of specific visual information that visually indicates that different operations have been performed. By visually showing how the operation-corresponding effect is being executed, it is possible to make it easier to visually recognize that an operation different from the specific mode is being performed.

(P8-2) In the gaming machine according to any one of (P2-0) to (P6-3) or (P7-0), (P8-0).
The different effect is a gaming machine characterized in that it is an output of specific auditory information that aurally indicates that the different operations have been performed.

According to the gaming machine described in (P8-2) above, the different effects are the output of specific auditory information that audibly indicates that different operations have been performed, and therefore the specific effects are specified even though the different operations have been performed. By aurally showing how the operation-corresponding effect is being executed, it is possible to make it easier to aurally recognize that an operation different from the specific mode is being performed.

(P8-3) In the gaming machine according to any one of (P2-0) to (P6-3) or (P7-0).
The different effect is a game machine characterized by an effect using a numerical value that changes based on the different operation.

According to the gaming machine described in (P8-3), the different effects are effects using numerical values that change based on different operations. Therefore, by showing the numerical changes even though the different operations are performed. , It is possible to easily recognize that an operation different from the specific mode is being performed. It should be noted that this effect may be an effect using information indicating changes based on different operations, such as an indicator that changes based on different operations.

(P8-4) In the gaming machine according to (P8-0) or (P8-3) above.
When one of the different effects is executed and then another of the different effects is executed, the numerical value changed based on the different operation of one is used, and the numerical value changed based on the different operation of the other is used. A gaming machine characterized by the fact that the production is performed using it.

According to the gaming machine described in (P8-4) above, when one different effect is executed and then another different effect is executed, the numerical value changed based on one different operation is used. Since the effect using the numerical value that changes based on another different operation is performed, the operation different from the specific mode is continuously performed by continuously changing the numerical value even though the different operation is performed. It is possible to make it easier to recognize that there is.

(P8-5) In the gaming machine according to (P8-0) or (P8-3) above.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the specific operation corresponding effect after the different effect is executed, the specific operation corresponding effect is continued by using a numerical value changed based on the different operation.

According to the gaming machine described in (P8-5), in the specific operation corresponding effect after different effects are executed, the specific operation corresponding effect is continued using the numerical values changed based on the different operations. Even if different operations are not performed in the specific response effect after the different effects are executed, it is possible to easily recognize that an operation different from the specific mode has already been performed.

(P8-6) In the gaming machine according to (P8-0) or (P8-3) above.
After the different effect is executed in one of the predetermined display effects, the specific operation-corresponding effect is continued using the numerical values changed based on the different operations in another predetermined display effect. A game machine to play.

According to the gaming machine described in (P8-6), after different effects are executed in one predetermined display effect, it is specified by using numerical values changed based on the different operations in another predetermined display effect. Since the operation-compatible effect is continued, it is easy to recognize that an operation different from the specific mode has already been performed even if a different operation is not performed in a predetermined display effect after the different effect is executed. Can be done.

(P8-7) In the gaming machine described in (P8-6) above,
When different effects are executed in the other predetermined display effect, the gaming machine is characterized in that the numerical values are changed by using the numerical values changed based on the different operations in the one predetermined display effect. ..

According to the gaming machine described in (P8-7), when different effects are executed in another predetermined display effect, numerical values changed based on different operations in one predetermined display effect are used. Therefore, when different effects are performed in another predetermined display effect, it is possible to easily recognize that an operation different from the specific mode has already been performed.

(P9-0) An operating means that receives an operation by a player,
The main control means that performs the main control related to the game,
A gaming machine provided with an effect executing means for causing the display means to execute a predetermined display effect based on the result of determination by the main control means.
The effect executing means is
When the operation of the operation means is performed in a specific mode within the valid period in which the operation of the operation means is valid, the specific operation corresponding effect is executed during the predetermined display effect.
If an operation different from the operation in the specific mode is performed within the period in which the presence or absence of the operation in the specific mode of the operation means is determined, the operation corresponding to the specific operation is continuously executed. It is a production that is different from the production corresponding to a specific operation.
The different effect is a gaming machine characterized in that it can be executed across the predetermined display effect in which the different effect is executed and the next predetermined display effect.

According to the gaming machine described in (P9-0), after the specific operation corresponding effect is started, the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect is continued even if the operation different from the operation in the specific mode is performed. In the state, an effect different from the effect corresponding to the specific operation is executed, so that it becomes easy to recognize that it is not necessary to redo the operation of the operation means from the beginning even if the operation different from the operation in the specific mode is performed. .. Since the different effects can be executed across a predetermined display effect in which different effects are executed and the next predetermined display effect, an operation different from the specific mode can be performed across the predetermined possession effects. It is possible to make it easier to recognize what is being done. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the production corresponding to the specific operation.

(P9-1) In the gaming machine according to any one of (P2-0) to (P6-3) or (P7-0), (P8-0).
The different effect is a gaming machine characterized in that it can be executed across the predetermined display effect in which the different effect is executed and the next predetermined display effect.

According to the gaming machine described in (P9-1), the different effects can be executed across one predetermined display effect in which the different effects are executed and the next predetermined display effect. , It is possible to easily recognize that an operation different from the specific mode is performed across a predetermined possession effect.

(P9-2) In the gaming machine according to any one of (P2-0) to (P6-3) or (P7-0), (P8-0), (P9-0).
The different effect is a gaming machine characterized in that the specific operation-corresponding effect in which the different effect is executed and the specific operation-corresponding effect to be executed next are executed.

According to the gaming machine described in (P9-2), the different effects are specified because they are executed across the specific operation-compatible effect in which the different effects are executed and the specific operation-compatible effect to be executed next. It is possible to easily recognize that an operation different from the specific mode is performed from the operation corresponding effect to the next specific operation corresponding effect.

(P9-3) In the gaming machine according to any one of (P2-0) to (P6-3) or (P7-0), (P8-0), (P9-0).
The different effect is executed straddling the specific operation corresponding effect in one predetermined display effect in which the different effect is executed and the specific operation corresponding effect in another predetermined display effect to be executed next. A gaming machine characterized by being able to run.

According to the gaming machine described in (P9-3), the different effects are the specific operation-corresponding effect in one predetermined display effect in which the different effects are executed, and another predetermined display effect to be executed next. Since it is executed across the specific operation-compatible effect, it is easy to recognize from the specific operation-compatible effect that an operation different from the specific mode is performed across the specific operation-compatible effect in the next predetermined display effect. Can be done.

(P10-0) An operating means that receives an operation by a player,
The main control means that performs the main control related to the game,
A gaming machine provided with an effect executing means for causing the display means to execute a predetermined display effect based on the result of determination by the main control means.
The effect executing means is
When the operation of the operation means is performed in a specific mode within the valid period in which the operation of the operation means is valid, the specific operation corresponding effect is executed during the predetermined display effect.
If an operation different from the operation in the specific mode is performed within the period in which the presence or absence of the operation in the specific mode of the operation means is determined, the operation corresponding to the specific operation is continuously executed. It is a production that is different from the production corresponding to a specific operation.
In the different effect, when the different operation is performed while the operation in the specific mode is being executed, the different operation is performed in a mode that is easier for the player to recognize than the effect corresponding to the specific operation being executed. A gaming machine characterized by notifying that it has been damaged.

According to the gaming machine described in (P10-0), after the specific operation corresponding effect is started, the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect is continued even if the operation different from the operation in the specific mode is performed. In the state, an effect different from the effect corresponding to the specific operation is executed, so that it becomes easy to recognize that it is not necessary to redo the operation of the operation means from the beginning even if the operation different from the operation in the specific mode is performed. .. The different effects notify that when different operations are performed while the operations in the specific mode are being performed, the different operations are performed in a manner that is easier for the player to recognize than the performance corresponding to the specific operation being executed. Therefore, it is possible to clearly recognize that a different operation has been performed. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the production corresponding to the specific operation.

(P10-1) In the gaming machine according to any one of (P2-0) to (P6-3) or (P7-0), (P8-0), (P9-0), (P10-0). ,
In the different effect, when the different operation is performed while the operation in the specific mode is being executed, the different operation is performed at a volume higher than the volume output during the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect. A gaming machine characterized by notifying that it has been damaged.

In the gaming machine according to (P10-1), the different effect is from the volume output during the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect when a different operation is performed while the operation in the specific mode is being executed. Since it notifies that different operations have been performed at a loud volume, it is possible to clearly recognize that different operations have been performed.

(P10-2) In the gaming machine according to any one of (P2-0) to (P6-3) or (P7-0), (P8-0), (P9-0), (P10-0). ,
The different effect is in the display area on the front side of the display area where the image of the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect is displayed when the different operation is performed while the operation in the specific mode is being executed. A gaming machine characterized by notifying that a different operation has been performed.

In the gaming machine described in (P10-2), the different effects are displayed in which an image of the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect is displayed when different operations are performed while the operation in the specific mode is being executed. Since it is notified that a different operation has been performed in the display area on the front side of the area, it is possible to visually and clearly recognize that the different operation has been performed.

(P10-3) In the gaming machine according to any one of (P2-0) to (P6-3) or (P7-0), (P8-0), (P9-0), (P10-0). ,
The different effect is one said predetermined display effect and the next said predetermined display when the different operation is performed beyond one said predetermined display effect while the operation in the specific embodiment is being executed. A gaming machine characterized in that it notifies that the above-mentioned different operations have been performed across the production.

In the gaming machine according to (P10-3), the different effect is one predetermined display when the different operation is performed beyond one predetermined display effect while the operation in the specific mode is being executed. Since it is notified that a different operation has been performed across the effect and the next predetermined display effect, it is possible to clearly recognize even if a different operation is performed beyond one predetermined display effect.

(P10-4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (P2-0) to (P6-3) or (P7-0), (P8-0), (P9-0), (P10-0). ,
The different effect is a gaming machine characterized in that when a predetermined condition that is satisfied by the continuation of the operation in the specific embodiment is satisfied, the player notifies that the different operation has been performed.

In the gaming machine described in (P10-4), the different effects are specified because they notify that a different operation has been performed when a predetermined condition that is satisfied by the continuation of the operation in the specific mode is satisfied. When the operation in the embodiment is continuously performed, it is possible to clearly recognize that the operation different from this is performed.

<17th task>
Conventionally, as this type of gaming machine, for example, when an operation of pressing an operation button or an operation of pulling an operation lever is performed during an operation valid period, a predetermined numerical change effect that changes numerical information according to the operation is performed. There is a gaming machine that is executed during the display effect (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-116229 (pages 99-100, FIG. 83)).
However, in the case of the conventional example having such a configuration, there are the following problems.
That is, in this type of gaming machine, there is a problem that the fun of the display effect accompanied by the numerical change effect cannot be further improved.
The invention according to the following (Q0) has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the fun of a display effect accompanied by a numerical change effect.
The invention according to the following (Q0) has the following configuration in order to achieve such an object.

(Q0) The operating means that receives the operation by the player,
The main control means that performs the main control related to the game,
A gaming machine provided with an effect executing means for causing the display means to execute a predetermined display effect based on the result of determination by the main control means.
The effect executing means is
A numerical information display effect executing means for executing a numerical information display effect for displaying numerical information during the predetermined display effect based on the operation of the operation means within a valid period during which the operation of the operation means is valid. ,
The numerical information display effect executing means is characterized in that when a predetermined numerical information is displayed in the numerical information display effect, a specific change effect that changes the predetermined numerical information into different specific information is executed. Game machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (Q0), it is possible to improve the fun of the display effect accompanied by the numerical change effect.

(Q1) In the gaming machine described in (Q0) above,
The game characterized in that the numerical information display effect executing means executes the specific change effect so that the numerical information displayed as a result of the numerical information display effect does not become the specific suggestion information suggesting the specific information. Machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (Q1) above, misunderstandings about the result of the display effect can be reduced, and the reliability of the display effect can be improved, so that the fun of the display effect accompanied by the numerical change effect can be improved. be able to.

(Q2) In the gaming machine described in (Q1) above,
The specific change effect is specified when the numerical information displayed as a result of the numerical information display effect becomes the specific suggestive information as a result of increasing or decreasing the numerical information based on the operation of the operating means. A gaming machine characterized in that the suggestion information is changed into non-specific information that does not suggest the specific information.

According to the gaming machine described in (Q2) above, the reliability of the display effect can be improved.

(Q3) In the gaming machine described in (Q1) above,
The specific change effect is specified when the numerical information displayed as a result of the numerical information display effect becomes the specific suggestive information as a result of increasing or decreasing the numerical information based on the operation of the operating means. A gaming machine characterized in that non-specific information that does not suggest the specific information is added to the suggestion information.

According to the gaming machine described in (Q3) above, the reliability of the display effect can be improved.

(Q4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (Q1) to (Q3) above.
The numerical information display effect is a numerical change effect that increases or decreases the numerical information displayed during the predetermined display effect within the valid period in which the operation of the operating means is valid, based on the operation of the operating means. A gaming machine characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine described in (Q4) above, it is possible to improve the reliability of the display effect accompanied by the numerical change effect.

(Q5) In the gaming machine described in (Q4) above,
The numerical value change effect is a gaming machine characterized in that the numerical value is increased or decreased according to the number of operations of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine according to the above (Q5), it is possible to improve the reliability of the display effect accompanied by the numerical change effect that changes the numerical information according to the number of operations of the operating means.

<18th task>
Conventionally, as this type of gaming machine, for example, there is a gaming machine that executes an effect of changing predetermined information during a display effect (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-116229 (pages 99-100, FIG. 83)).
However, in the case of the conventional example having such a configuration, there are the following problems.
That is, in this type of gaming machine, the change in the predetermined information is not correctly displayed, and the reliability of the display effect including the change in the predetermined information may not be improved.
The invention according to the following (R0) has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the reliability of a display effect including a change in predetermined information. ..
The invention according to the following (R0) has the following configuration in order to achieve such an object.

(R0) An operating means for receiving an operation by a player,
The main control means that performs the main control related to the game,
A display control means that outputs a display command for displaying a display effect including predetermined information on the display means, and a display control means.
Sub-control that outputs an instruction command instructing the display control means to change the predetermined information from one information to another based on the result of the determination by the main control means or based on the operation of the operation means. It is a gaming machine equipped with means and
An error determining means for determining whether or not an error has occurred in which the other information instructed by the instruction command and the predetermined information displayed by the display command do not match.
A gaming machine characterized by comprising an error handling means for performing a predetermined error handling process corresponding to the error when the error has occurred.

According to the gaming machine described in (R0), when a predetermined information is instructed to be changed from one information to another based on the result of determination by the main control means or the operation of the operation means, the instruction is given. When another information and the predetermined information displayed by the display control means do not match, the error handling process corresponding to the error is performed, so that it is possible to reduce the deterioration of the player's feelings due to the error and to determine the predetermined information. It is possible to improve the fun of display production including changes in information.

(R1) In the gaming machine according to (R0) above,
A gaming machine comprising an error notification means for notifying the occurrence of the error.

According to the gaming machine described in (R1), the occurrence of the error is notified, so that the reliability of the effect of changing the predetermined information is improved, and therefore the fun of the display effect including the change of the predetermined information is improved. Can be made to.

(R2) In the gaming machine described in (R1) above,
The display control means includes means for outputting a completion command indicating that the change of the predetermined information has been executed to the sub control means when the change of the predetermined information is executed.
The sub-control means includes the error determining means for determining whether or not an error in which the other information instructed by the instruction command and the predetermined information indicated by the completion command do not match has occurred. A game machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (R2) above, when the display control means cannot execute the change of the predetermined information even though the sub control means has instructed the change of another information. Since the occurrence of an error is notified, the reliability of the effect of changing the predetermined information is improved, so that the interest of the display effect including the change of the predetermined information can be improved.

(R3) In the gaming machine according to (R1) or (R2) above.
The predetermined information is game display information that changes based on the result of determination by the main control means.

According to the game machine described in (R3) above, when the display control means cannot execute the change of the game display information even though the sub control means has instructed the change of the game display information. Since the occurrence of the error is notified, the reliability of the effect of changing the game display information is improved, so that the interest of the display effect including the change of the game display information can be improved.

(R4) In the gaming machine described in (R3) above,
The game display information is game numerical information that changes based on the result of determination by the main control means.

According to the gaming machine described in (R4) above, when the sub-control means has instructed the change of the game numerical information, but the display control means has not been able to execute the change of the game numerical information. Since the occurrence of the error is notified, the reliability of the effect of changing the game numerical information is improved, so that the fun of the display effect including the change of the game numerical information can be improved.

The game numerical information is, for example, the remaining number of fluctuations and the number of digested fluctuations in the probabilistic state or the time saving state.

(R5) In the gaming machine according to (R1) or (R2) above.
The gaming machine, characterized in that the predetermined information is operation display information that changes based on the operation of the operation means.

According to the gaming machine described in (R5) above, when the display control means cannot execute the change of the operation display information even though the sub control means has instructed the change of the operation display information. Since the occurrence of the error is notified, the reliability of the effect of changing the operation display information is improved, so that the interest of the display effect including the change of the operation display information can be improved.

(R6) In the gaming machine according to (R5) above,
The gaming machine, characterized in that the operation display information is operation numerical information that changes based on the operation of the operation means.

According to the gaming machine described in (R6), when the display control means cannot execute the change of the operation numerical information even though the sub control means instructs the change of the operation numerical information. Since the occurrence of the error is notified, the reliability of the effect of changing the operation numerical information is improved, so that the fun of the display effect including the change of the operation numerical information can be improved.

(R7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (R1) to (R6).
The error notification means is a gaming machine characterized in that the error is displayed as a display information error image during a display effect.

According to the gaming machine described in (R7), since the error is displayed as a display information error image during the display effect, it is possible to make it easier to notice the occurrence of the error.

The pachinko machine of the first embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 4 is a right side view of the pachinko machine 10, and is a view showing a state in which the illumination cover is attached in the AA cross section of FIG. FIG. 5 is a left side view of the pachinko machine 10, and is a view showing a state in which the illumination cover is attached in a cross section of BB in FIG. FIG. 6 is a plan view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 7 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. 9A and 9B are explanatory views in which FIG. 9A shows the display content of the third symbol display device 42, and FIG. 9B shows a hold display.

Unless otherwise specified in the following embodiments, the directions of up / down / left / right and front / back (or back / front) will be described with reference to a state in which the game board is viewed from the front, that is, a front view of the game board.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and is fixed to a game island of a game hall, and one side portion of the outer frame 11. An inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 with (for example, the left side portion in the front view) as the opening / closing shaft J1, and one side portion (for example, the left side portion in the front view) of the inner frame 12 is the opening / closing shaft J2. It is provided with a front frame set 14 that can be freely opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12.

The outer frame 11 is formed of a wooden plate material in a rectangular shape as a whole when viewed from the front, and each plate material is assembled by a detachable fastener such as a machine screw. In the present embodiment, for example, the outer dimension of the outer frame 11 in the vertical direction is 809 mm (inner dimension 771 mm), and the outer dimension in the left-right direction is 518 mm (inner dimension 480 mm). The outer frame 11 may be made of a light metal such as resin or aluminum.

The inner frame 12 is roughly divided into a resin base 12a (see FIG. 2) as a main member forming its outer shape, and a game board 30 (see FIG. 7) attached to the resin base 12a. Further, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the inner frame 12 includes a front frame set 14 that can be opened on the front side of the resin base 12a.

Specifically, the resin base 12a has a substantially rectangular outer shape in a front view, and has an opening having a substantially central portion as the center of the opening (the same size as the game area 30a (see FIG. 7) described later). It is a plate-shaped member in which an opening) is formed.

The front frame set 14 is attached to the inner frame 12 so as to be openable / closable with the opening / closing shaft J2 in the vertical direction as the axis on the left side of the front view. Specifically, the front frame set 14 is rotatable forward with the left side as the opening / closing base end side and the right side as the opening / closing tip side in front view.

The game board 30 (see FIG. 7) is detachably attached from the back surface side of the resin base 12a so that the game area 30a is located at the opening of the resin base 12a.

Here, the front frame set 14 will be described in a little more detail.

As shown in FIG. 1, the front frame set 14 is attached to the inner frame 12 so as to be openable and closable. It is said that it can be opened to the front side with the heart in mind.

As shown in FIG. 1, the front frame set 14 has a lower plate portion 13 located at the lowermost portion, an upper plate portion 21 located above the lower plate portion 13, and the upper plate portion when viewed from the front. It is roughly classified into a glass frame portion 23 located above the 21.

The front frame set 14 is configured by attaching the lower plate portion 13, the upper plate portion 21, and the glass frame portion 23 to each of the front side portions of the base plate body 14a, which is a resin molded part of the front frame set 14. ing.

As shown in FIG. 1, the lower plate portion 13 is a component in which a component forming the lower plate 15 and a component surrounding the component are integrated, and is located at the lowermost portion of the front frame set 14. , Is fixed to the lowest part of the base plate 14a in front view by fasteners such as screws. The lower plate portion 13 is provided with a lower plate 15 and a ball pulling lever 17 on the front surface side thereof.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the lower plate 15 as a ball tray is provided from the left end when the width of the front frame set 14 is substantially divided into three equal parts to a portion extending from the left end to "2/3", and is a discharge port. The game balls discharged from 16 can be stored in the lower plate 15. The ball pulling lever 17 is for pulling out (discharging) the game ball in the lower plate 15, and by moving the ball pulling lever 17 to the left side in FIG. 1, a predetermined position on the bottom surface of the lower plate 15 ( For example, a substantially central portion) is opened, and the game ball stored in the lower plate 15 can be pulled out downward through the opening portion on the bottom surface of the lower plate 15.

The game ball launching handle 18 is arranged so as to project to the right side of the lower plate 15 and to the front side. In response to the operation of the game ball launch handle 18 by the player, the game ball is driven toward the game board 30 (see FIG. 7) by the launcher 229 (see FIGS. 3 and 8). Since the game ball launch handle 18 can be operated by the player, it may be adopted as another operation in another embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 1, the sound output units 24 are provided at two upper left and right positions in the front view of the front frame set 14, and output sounds from speakers provided inside or at the back of the front frame set 14. It is formed of a plurality of output ports for the purpose of. In FIG. 1, only a part of this output port is shown, and the whole figure is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1, the upper plate portion 21 is a component in which a component forming the upper plate 19 and a component surrounding the component are integrated, and is a lower portion of the front frame set 14 (the above-mentioned lower plate 15). It is fixed to the lower part of the base plate 14a in front view by fasteners such as screws so as to be located at the upper position), and is provided with an upper plate 19 as a tray for a game ball. Here, the upper plate 19 is a ball tray for temporarily storing the game balls and guiding them toward the launching device 229 while arranging them in a row.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the upper dish portion 21 is provided with various operation buttons operated by the player on the upper surface portion thereof. As these operation buttons, a frame button 80 composed of a plurality of push buttons is provided at a position close to the ball storage space of the upper plate 19 on the upper surface portion of the upper plate portion 21. The frame button 80 includes a decision button 81, a left selection button 82 arranged on both the left and right sides of the decision button 81, and a right selection button 83. In addition to the push button type, for example, a lever type, a touch sensor type, or the like may be used. As another operation in the embodiment described later, the operation of the left selection button 82 and the right selection button 83 may be adopted.

As shown in FIG. 1, the glass frame portion 23 includes a window portion 101 formed on the upper side of the upper plate portion 21, and various illuminated portions provided around the window portion 101.

That is, as shown in FIG. 1, the front frame set 14 has most of the game area 30a (see FIG. 7) of the game board 30 external to the central portion of the glass frame portion 23 located above the upper plate portion 21. A window portion 101 having a substantially vertically elongated elliptical shape is formed so that the window portion 101 can be visually recognized from the above. Specifically, the window portion 101 has a substantially vertically elongated elliptical shape and has a hollow center (opening 101a), and a glass unit (not shown) is omitted so that the opening 101a is covered with a glass plate 137 having a substantially vertically elongated elliptical shape or the like. Is attached to the back side of the front frame set 14. The glass unit 140 has a double glass structure in which two glass plates 137 are arranged close to each other in the front-rear direction. The substantially central portion of the window portion 101 may be linear, and the glass plate 137 may also be adapted to the shape. Further, the glass plate 137 is not limited to glass, and any material thereof may be used as long as it is a transparent plate having a predetermined strength.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the glass frame portion 23 has various illuminated portions 300 (first illuminated portion 301, second illuminated portion 302, and third illuminated portion 303) around the window portion 101. I have. That is, as shown in FIG. 1, the front frame set 14 has a first illuminated portion 301 (left illuminated portion) having an LED or the like built in the left portion around the window portion 101 when viewed from the front. The second illuminated part 302 (right side illuminated part) having an LED or the like built in the right part around the window part 101, and the third illuminated part 303 having an LED or the like built in the upper part around the window part 101. (Upper illumination part) is provided. These illuminated parts play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by controlling the change of the light emitting mode such as lighting and blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach.

In the pachinko machine 10, the first illumination unit 301, the second illumination unit 302, and the third illumination unit 303 function as jackpot lamps, and by turning on and blinking at the time of jackpot, the jackpot is in progress. Notify. In addition, the first illumination unit 301 and the second illumination unit 302 of the pachinko machine 10 are provided with a prize ball lamp 105 that lights up while paying out the prize ball, and an error indicator lamp 106 that lights up when a predetermined error occurs. ing.

Further, a small window 107 made of transparent resin is provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 101 at a position diagonally lower to the right so that a part of the inner frame 12 surface, the game board 30 surface, and the like can be visually recognized. Since the predetermined portion of the small window 107 is flat, the certificate stamp or the like attached to the lower right corner of the game board 30 can be suitably read by the machine from the flat portion of the small window 107.

Further, a ball lending operation unit 120 is arranged at the lower right of the window unit 101, and the ball lending operation unit 120 is provided with a ball lending button 121 and a return button 122. When the ball lending operation unit 120 is operated with bills, cards (for example, prepaid cards), etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending operation unit 120 is operated in response to the operation. Gaming balls will be rented. The ball lending button 121 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 19 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. The ball lending operation unit 120 may be further provided with a frequency display unit (not shown). This frequency display unit (not shown) displays the balance information of the card or the like. A pachinko machine, a so-called cash machine, in which a game ball is directly lent to an upper plate from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit does not require a ball lending operation unit 120. Therefore, a decorative sticker or the like is attached to the installation portion of the ball rental operation unit 120. As a result, it is possible to standardize the ball lending operation unit between the pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine.

Next, the configuration of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. As shown in FIG. 7, the game board 30 is provided with a game board 30b which is made of square wooden (for example, plywood) in a front view and has a shape such that both corners on the left side are removed, and a peripheral portion thereof (described later). The outer portions of the rails 51 and 52) are attached in contact with the back side of the resin base 12a of the inner frame 12. The game area 30a, which is a substantially central portion on the front side of the game board 30, is formed on the front surface of the base plate body (not shown) of the front frame set 14 through the glass plate 137 of the window portion 101 shown in FIG. It is visible from the front outside of the frame set 14.

Further, the game board 30 includes a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, a starting winning device 33a for special drawing 1, a starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2, a starting opening 34 for ordinary symbols, and a variable display device unit 35. There is. These are arranged in each through hole formed by router processing in the game board 30, and are attached from the front side of the game board 30 by wood screws or the like.

The start winning device 33a for the special figure 1 is a so-called navel type start opening (start chucker) having no electric accessory for opening and closing the entrance for the game ball. The start winning device 33b for the special figure 2 is a so-called electric chew type start opening (start chucker) having an electric accessory that opens and closes the entrance for the game ball. The normal symbol start port 34 is a start port (through chucker) that opens the electric accessory of the special figure 2 start winning device 33b a predetermined number of times due to the fact that the game ball passes through the gate (through gate). The variable winning device 32 is a winning device having an electric accessory (door member) that opens and closes the large winning opening based on the lottery results of the special drawing 1 starting winning device 33a and the special drawing 2 starting winning device 33b. The opening and closing of the electric accessory is not limited to the rotating type shown in the figure, and may be a type that linearly advances and retreats back and forth or left and right.

The start winning device 33a for the special figure 1 enters the game ball that has flowed down the left game area 30al provided on the left side of the variable display device unit 35 and has dropped from directly above by rolling the stage portion 47B. It is a ball-capable starting port. Above the start winning device 33a for the special figure 1, a stage portion 47B is provided to swing (reciprocate) the game ball flowing down the left game area 30al in the horizontal direction. A game ball or the like that has fallen from a position directly above the start winning device 33a for special drawing 1 of the stage portion 47B enters the starting winning device 33a for special drawing 1.

The start winning device 33b for special drawing 2 is a start port provided at a position where a game ball can enter in the right game area 30ar provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 35. A start port (through gate) 34 for a normal symbol is provided above the start winning device 33b for the special figure 2. When the result of the lottery of the normal symbol based on the detection of passage to the start port 34 for the normal symbol is a hit, the electric accessory of the start winning device 33b for the special figure 2 is released, and the game ball can be entered. ing.

The right game area 30ar may be configured to allow a part of the game balls launched in the right game area 30ar to pass through the normal symbol start port 34, or may be launched in the right game area 30ar. It may be configured so that all the played game balls are passed through the starting port 34 for a normal symbol.

The variable winning device 32 is provided on the diagonally lower left side of the starting winning device 33b for the special figure 2, and only the game ball flowing down the right game area 30ar can be entered. That is, the game ball launched by the right-handed operation can enter the variable winning device 32 if the variable winning device 32 is in the open state.

The general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the starting winning device 33a for special figure 1, the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2, and the starting opening 34 for ordinary symbols are not shown. The detection switch is provided, and the ball entering the special figure 1 start winning device 33a, the special drawing 2 starting winning device 33b, and the normal symbol starting port 34 is individually detected by each detection switch.

Further, a ball entering the general winning opening 31, the starting winning device 33a for the special figure 1, and the starting winning device 33b for the special drawing 2 is detected by the detection switch (the winning opening switch (not shown)), and the entry into the variable winning device 32. Each ball is detected by a detection switch (count switch (not shown)), and a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the upper plate 19 (or lower plate 15) based on the output of the detection switch.

For example, in the case of entering a ball into the start winning device 33a for special drawing 1 and the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2, three prize balls are paid out. Further, in the case of entering the general winning opening 31 and the variable winning device 32, 10 prize balls are paid out. The number of these prize balls is arbitrary and may be various.

The game ball passes through the normal symbol start port 34, and the passage is detected by the detection switch (passage detection switch (not shown)), but even if the ball enters the normal symbol start port 34, the game ball Is not paid out.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 7, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36, and a game ball that has not entered various winning devices or the like is passed through the out port 36 to a ball discharge path (not shown). You will be guided to the direction. A large number of nails 39 are planted on the game board 30 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball. In addition to this, various members (accessories) such as a wind turbine may be arranged.

As shown in FIG. 7, the variable display device unit 35 is triggered by winning a prize in the start winning device 33a for special figure 1 and the start winning device 33b for special figure 2, and the first symbol (for example, a special symbol) as identification information. The first symbol display device 40 for variable display, the second symbol display device 41 for variable display of the second symbol (for example, normal symbol) triggered by the passage of the normal symbol start port 34, and the special symbol 1 start prize. It is provided with a third symbol display device 42 that variablely displays a third symbol (for example, a decorative symbol) by using the device 33a and the start winning device 33b for special figure 2 as a trigger. The third symbol display device 42 may be, for example, a display device dedicated to a display effect, or a light transmissive resin plate such as an acrylic panel capable of displaying an image provided in place of the glass plate 137 or together with the glass plate 137.

As shown in FIG. 7, the first symbol display device 40 is, for example, a segment display (for example, a 7-segment LED display with a decimal point) in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. The part 40a is provided. The first segment display unit 40a emits variable light or the like based on the ball entering the start winning device 33a for special drawing 1 and the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2. Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the first symbol display device 40 includes a hold lamp 40c indicating the number of hold of variable display in the first segment display unit 40a. The hold lamp 40c is also configured to be displayed on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9A, the third symbol display device 42 has the first to fourth hold displays H1 to H4 corresponding to the four hold lamps 40c and the fluctuation pattern currently being executed. The hold display TH corresponding to the above is provided. In FIG. 9A, when the number of holds is 4, the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold display TH is started, and when the number of holds is 4, the symbol change display corresponding to the hold display TH is confirmed to be out of alignment. It indicates the time, or when the number of holdings is 4, when the decorative symbol (third symbol) consisting of the main decorative symbol SZ and the sub-decorative symbol FZ in the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold display TH is displayed in a variable manner. The first to fourth hold displays H1 to H4 and the hold display TH are displayed in colors according to the high possibility of becoming a big hit.

That is, as shown in FIG. 9B, when the jackpots are shown in order from the one with the lowest possibility of being a jackpot, the possibility of being a jackpot is high in the order of white, blue, red, and rainbow. The white hold does not suggest that the variation pattern corresponding to the hold is likely to be a jackpot combination, or suggests that it is unlikely to be a jackpot combination. A blue hold is more likely to be a jackpot for the variation pattern corresponding to the hold than a white hold, but it is likely to be a jackpot compared to a variation pattern corresponding to a red hold. It suggests that it is relatively low. The red color suggests that the variation pattern corresponding to the hold is higher than the variation pattern corresponding to the blue hold. The iridescent hold is most likely to be a jackpot, suggesting that the variation pattern corresponding to the hold is confirmed to be a jackpot combination. Note that FIG. 9A shows that the first to fourth hold indications H1 to H4 and the hold indication TH are white.

The first segment display unit 40a randomly or sequentially changes the light emission of each segment light emitting unit based on the ball entering the start winning device 33a for special figure 1 and the start winning device 33b for special figure 2. A fluctuation display state of the symbol (in this embodiment, a light emission fluctuation mode of each segment light emitting unit) is generated, and when the light emission fluctuation is stopped, whether it is a big hit or a miss is displayed according to the light emission display mode. In addition to whether it is a big hit or a miss, if it is a big hit, the type of the big hit may be displayed. For example, displaying the first symbol (for example, numbers and letters) by light emission means the first jackpot, and displaying the second symbol (for example, numbers and letters) by emitting light means the second big hit, and displaying the third symbol (for example, numbers). When a light emission display of (or letters, etc.) is displayed, it means a third big hit, and when a fourth symbol (for example, a number or a character) is light emission display, it means a miss. Since the light emitting display by the first segment display unit 40a does not know what a general player means even if he / she sees it, whether the player sees it alone is a big hit or a miss. The display is such that it is unknown (or difficult to understand) whether it is a type of jackpot.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the jackpot round based on the jackpot of a specific type is completed, the game ball is in a support state to be supported so that the game ball can easily win the start winning device 33b for the special figure 2. During the support state, the player strikes right in order to make the start winning device 33b for Special Figure 2 win the game ball. When the right-handed game ball passes through the starting port 34 for a normal symbol, the winning / failing lottery by the second symbol and the result display are performed within an extremely short time. When the result of the lottery by the second symbol is a hit, the electric accessory of the start winning device 33b for the special figure 2 is released for a predetermined time. Therefore, it is easy for the game ball that has passed through the normal symbol start opening 34 to enter the special figure 2 start winning device 33b during the time saving state or the probable change state.

As the first symbol display device 40, a single or a plurality of LEDs of a type capable of emitting light of at least two colors may be adopted. Specifically, for example, when two LEDs capable of emitting light in red and blue are adopted as the first symbol display device 40, the first pattern display device 40 is changed by alternately changing the emission color of each LED. A variable display state of the design (emission color mode of each LED) is generated, for example, when both LEDs stop in the red light emitting state, the first big hit is shown, one LED stops in the red light emitting state, and the other LED stops. When it is turned off, it indicates a second jackpot, when both LEDs stop in a blue light emitting state, it indicates a third jackpot, and when both LEDs stop in a different color emitting state, it indicates a disconnection. Further, at least one of the first segment display unit 40a and the holding lamp 40c constituting the first symbol display device 40 is a display device of another type such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. In particular, it may be configured to be displayed on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42. The pattern displayed on the first symbol display device 40 includes a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types. A configuration in which colors are displayed is conceivable.

The second symbol display device 41 has, for example, an "○" display unit 41a for the second symbol, a display unit 41b on which, for example, "x" is drawn for the second symbol, and a holding lamp 41c. Every time the game ball passes through the third start port 34, for example, the display symbol (ordinary symbol) by the display units 41a and 41b fluctuates, and when the variation display stops at a predetermined symbol, the start for special figure 2 on the lower side. The winning device 33b is configured to be in operation (open) for a predetermined time. The number of times the game ball has passed through the third starting port 34 is held up to four times, and the number of times held is lit and displayed by the hold lamp 41c. The display units 41a and 41b have an LED (light emitting diode) inside, and are configured to be variablely displayed by switching the light emission (or lighting of the lamp) of the LED. Further, at least one of the second symbol display device 41 and the hold lamp 41c may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device, and in particular. It may be configured to be displayed on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42.

In the third symbol display device 42, the variation display and the predetermined display (stop display) of the first symbol are displayed on the first symbol display device 40 based on the winning of the start winning device 33a for special figure 1 and the start winning device 33b for special figure 2. ) Is performed, the variation display and the predetermined display (stop display) of the third symbol are performed accordingly. In the third symbol display device 42, not only the display effect triggered by winning the start winning device 33a for the special figure 1 and the start winning device 33b for the special figure 2, but also the specific game that shifts after the big hit is won. Display effects during the state are performed.

The third symbol display device 42 is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display device, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 45 described later. On the third symbol display device 42, for example, as shown in FIG. 9, three decorative symbol rows L, M, and R on the left, middle, and right are displayed. Each decorative symbol row L, M, R is composed of a plurality of decorative symbols, and these decorative symbols are variably displayed on the third symbol display device 42 so as to be scrolled for each decorative symbol row L, M, R. To. In the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 42 (liquid crystal display device) includes, for example, a large liquid crystal display having an size of 11 inches. In the variable display device unit 35, a center frame 47A is arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 42 so as to substantially surround the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 in a front view. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the third symbol display device 42, but other types of image display devices (for example, PDP: plasma display panel, EL: electroluminescence display, organic EL, etc.). May be adopted.

The variable winning device 32 shown in FIG. 7 is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win (or may be in a closed state in which it is difficult to win), and is in an open state in which the game ball is likely to win in the event of a big hit. It is operated repeatedly in the closed state of. The period from which the variable winning device 32 is opened to the closed state is called a round. In the jackpot state, this round game is repeated a predetermined number of times.

In this way, in the jackpot round game, the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly operated in the open state and the normal closed state, and a large number of game balls are entered (winning) in the variable winning device 32, and a large amount of the winning is received. Since the prize ball is paid out, the game is in an advantageous state for the player. However, in the jackpot round game, the period in which the variable winning device 32 is in the open state is extremely short, and it may be difficult for the game ball to win even in the open state, but such a jackpot round game is in the support state after the end. Since the transition is made, it is difficult for the player to reduce the number of balls held, which is an advantageous game state for the player.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of game balls inserted (the number of game balls launched into the game area 30a by the launching device 229) is the number of prize balls paid out (general winning opening 31, variable). The normal game state (game ball consumption state), which is larger than the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of the game ball into the prize device 32, the start prize device 33a for special figure 1, the start prize device 33b for special figure 2, etc. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a jackpot round gaming state and subsequent occurrence) in which the number of prize balls paid out is larger or the same as the number of gaming balls input, or the difference is smaller than that of the normal gaming state. It is possible to change the state to (support state).

More specifically, when the game ball wins the start winning device 33a for the special figure 1 or the start winning device 33b for the special figure 2, the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40 is displayed in accordance with the variation display. 3 The third symbol of the symbol display device 42 is changed and displayed. It should be noted that the variable display based on the winning of the starting winning device 33b for the special figure 2 is preferentially changed over the variable display based on the winning of the starting winning device 33a for the special figure 1, but the starting winning for the special figure 1 is given. It is also possible to change in the order of winning the device 33a and the start winning device 33b for the special figure 2. When it is confirmed that the display of the first segment display unit 40a and the third symbol display device 42 after each change stop is a symbol and a combination indicating a jackpot set in advance, a jackpot round gaming state can be generated. Become.

The variable winning device 32 is configured so that the large winning opening 32a is in a predetermined open state. Specifically, the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 2, 8 or 16 rounds), with the passage of a predetermined time or a predetermined number of winnings in the open state as one round. .. Further, the number of times the game ball has passed through the start winning device 33a for special figure 1 and the start winning device 33b for special drawing 2 is held up to four times, and the number of holding times is held by the holding lamps 40c1, 40c2, 40c3, 40c4 (collectively referred to). In this case, it is called a hold lamp 40c). The hold lamp 40c is turned on in the order of 40c1, 40c2, 40c3, 40c4. The hold lamp 40c may be configured to hold display or the like on a part of the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7, two rails 51 and 52 for guiding the game ball launched from the launching device 229 (see FIG. 3) to the upper part of the game board 30 are attached to the game board 30. The game ball launched by the rotation operation of the game ball launch handle 18 is guided to a predetermined game area 30a through the ball guide passage 49 described later of the two rails 51 and 52. The two rails 51 and 52 are long stainless steel metal strip-shaped members, which are double-mounted on the game board 30 inside and outside. The inner rail 51 is formed in a shape excluding a portion of a substantially vertical ellipse from diagonally upper left to diagonally lower right in the front view of the game board 30. The outer rail 52 is formed so that a part (mainly the left side portion) faces the inner rail 51. In such a case, the guide rail is formed by the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52, and the ball guide passage 49 is formed by the portions where the rails 51 and 52 are parallel to each other at a predetermined interval (the portion on the left side when facing the rail). .. The ball guide passage 49 is formed in a groove shape having a contact surface with the game board 30, that is, a groove shape in which the front side is open.

A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip end portion (upper left portion in FIG. 7) of the inner rail 51. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball once guided from the ball guide passage 49 between the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52 to the upper part of the game board 30 to return to the inside of the ball guide passage 49 again. Further, in a state where the game board 30 is attached to the inner frame 12, the position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the game ball on the outer rail 52 (upper right portion in FIG. 7: portion corresponding to the tip portion of the outer rail 52). Is located with the return rubber 54. Therefore, the game ball launched with a momentum equal to or higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 54 and is repelled. Since the outer rail 52 is made of a long stainless steel metal band, the flight of the game ball can be made smoother, that is, the frictional resistance of the game ball can be reduced. As shown in FIG. 7, from the tip end portion of the outer rail 52 (upper right portion in FIG. 7) to the right end portion (lower right portion in FIG. 7) of the inner rail 51, the game area in the first symbol display device 40. The game area 30a is partitioned by the location of the wall portion 56 on the 30a side and the wall portion 55 (shown by a broken line in FIG. 7) formed on the inner frame 12.

As shown in FIG. 7, the lower right corner of the game board 30 is a space for attaching a seal SL (which may be a plate) such as a certificate stamp (for example, a serial number is written). By attaching a sticker SL such as a certificate stamp to the lower right corner of the game board 30, the game board 30 and the certificate stamp can be given uniqueness.

Next, the game area 30a of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 7, the game area 30a is partitioned into a substantially vertically elongated circular shape by the inner peripheral portions (inner and outer rails) of the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52. In particular, in the present embodiment, the game board 30 is formed. The game area 30a partitioned on the board surface of the player is largely configured.

In the present embodiment, the gaming area 30a is viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, except for the area of the guide rail which is a parallel portion of the inner and outer rails 51 and 52 among the areas surrounded by the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52. It is an area. Therefore, since the guide rail portion is not included in the game area 30a, the limit position on the left side of the game area 30a is specified not by the outer rail 52 but by the inner rail 51. Further, the limit position on the right side of the game area 30a is specified by the wall portion 55 (a part of the inner frame 12). Further, the lower limit position of the game area 30a is specified by the inner rail 51. Further, the upper limit position of the game area 30a is specified by the outer rail 52.

Although disclosure of detailed drawings is omitted, game balls are supplied to the launcher 229 one by one from a ball outlet (a ball outlet leading from the most downstream portion of the upper plate 19) of the front frame set 14 (not shown). ..

Next, the configuration of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. As shown in FIG. 3, in the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally on the back surface (actually, the back surface of the inner frame 12 and the game board 30), and predetermined control boards are stacked back and forth (in fact, the back surface of the game board 30). For example, the payout control board 311a of FIG. 8 to be described later is located on the front side in the rear view, and the power supply control board of the power supply device 313 and the launch control board of the launch control device 312 are located on the back side of the payout control board 311a). Further, a game ball supply device (payout mechanism unit 352) for supplying the game balls, a resin protective cover 353, and the like are attached. In the present embodiment, various control boards are separately mounted on a plurality (three) mounting bases 230 to 232 shown in FIG. 3, and these are used as each control board unit, and each control board unit is individually placed on the inner frame 12 or. It is attached to the back of the game board 30. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, the main control device 261 is mounted on the mounting base 230, the sub control device 262 is mounted on the mounting base 232 and unitized, and the payout control device 311 and the launch control device are respectively. The 312 and the power supply device 313 are mounted on the mounting base 231 to form a unit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, in the payout mechanism unit 352, various parts (tank 355, tank rail 356, case rail 357, payout device 358 and power switch board 382, which will be described later) are reversed L when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10. The unit is arranged in the shape of a rail, and the payout mechanism portion 352 and the protective cover 353 are also integrated as one unit. Since the unit is sometimes referred to as a back pack, the unit is referred to as "back" here. It is called "pack unit 203".

The back pack unit 203 is configured so that it can be attached and detached in units of units without using any tools, and in addition to this, a support shaft portion is provided in a part thereof with respect to the inner frame 12 or the back surface of the game board 30. It has a structure that can be opened and closed. This is also a device for making it possible to easily confirm the hidden configuration or the like even if the back pack unit 203 and other configurations are arranged so as to overlap each other in the front-rear direction.

Further, on the back surface of the game board 30, a prize detection mechanism for detecting the passage of a game ball such as various prize openings is provided. Specifically, a winning opening switch (not shown) is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning opening 31 on the front side of the game board 30, and a count switch (not shown) is provided on the variable winning device 32. The count switch is a switch for counting winning balls. Further, at the positions corresponding to the start winning device 33a for special drawing 1 and the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2, the operation port switch (not shown) for the starting winning device 33a for special drawing 1 and the starting winning device for special drawing 2 are located. An actuating port switch (not shown) (not shown) for 33b is provided, respectively, and each actuating port switch allows the game ball to enter the start winning device 33a for special drawing 1 and the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2. Is detected by. A gate switch is provided at a position corresponding to the normal symbol start port 34, and the gate switch detects the passage of the game ball to the normal symbol start port 34.

The winning opening switch (not shown) of the general winning opening 31 and the gate switch of the starting port 34 for a normal symbol are connected to a board surface connection board (not shown) through electrical wiring (not shown), and the board surface connection board is the main control described later. It is connected to the main control board 261a (see FIG. 8) in the device 261. Further, the count switch of the variable winning device 32 is connected to the large winning opening relay terminal board (not shown), and the large winning opening relay terminal board is also connected to the main control board 261a. On the other hand, the operation port switches of the start winning device 33a for special drawing 1 and the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2 are directly connected to the main control board 261a without going through the relay board.

Although not shown in the illustration, the variable winning device 32 is provided with a large winning opening solenoid for opening the large winning opening 32a, and the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2 is for opening the electric accessory. A working port solenoid is provided.

The detection results detected by the winning detection mechanism are taken into the main control board 261a in the main control device 261 described later, and the payout command (of the game ball) according to the winning situation each time is taken from the main control board 261a. The number of payouts) is transmitted to the payout control board 311a. Then, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out by the output of the payout control board 311a.

As shown in FIG. 3, the main control device 261 is mounted on the lower mounting base 230 in the rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and the sub control device 262 is mounted on the upper mounting base 232 in the rear view of the pachinko machine 10. Has been done. Here, as shown in FIG. 8, the main control device 261 includes a CPU 501 that controls the main control, a ROM 502 that stores a game program, a RAM 503 that stores necessary data according to the progress of the game, and various devices. Main control including input / output port 505 for communication, random number generator used for various lottery (not shown), clock pulse generation circuit used for time counting and synchronization (not shown), etc. A substrate 261a is provided, and the main control substrate 261a is housed in a substrate box 263 (encapsulating means) made of a transparent resin material or the like. The substrate box 263 includes a box base having a substantially rectangular cuboid shape and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are unopenably connected by a sealing unit 261c, whereby the substrate box 263 is sealed.

Further, the sub control device 262 includes, for example, a CPU 551 that controls voice and lamp display and control of the display control device 45 according to an instruction from the main control board 261a in the main control device 261, and other ROM 552, RAM 552, bus line 554, and the like. A sub-control board 262a including an input / output port 555 and the like is provided, and the sub-control board 262a is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material or the like. The power supplied from the power supply board described later is output to the display control device 45 via the sub control device 262.

As shown in FIG. 3, the payout control device 311, the launch control device 312, the power supply device 313, and the card unit connection board 314 are mounted on the mounting base 231. The payout control device 311 includes a CPU that forms the center of control, and a control board that includes other ROMs, RAMs, various ports, and the like. Further, the launch control device 312 includes a launch control board. Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a power supply control board. The payout control board 311a of the payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and rented balls. Further, the launch control board of the launch control device 312 controls the launch device 229 (see FIG. 8) according to the operation of the game ball launch handle 18 by the player, and the power supply board of the power supply device 313 controls various control devices and the like. The required predetermined power supply voltage is generated and output. The launching device 229 of this embodiment employs a solenoid-type launching component that hits a game ball with a launching mallet (not shown) that can move forward and backward according to energization / non-energization of the launching solenoid (not shown). In addition, as other launching devices 229, there are various types such as a mechanical launching component that launches a game ball by hitting it with a launching pestle that operates according to the drive of a launch motor, and an electromagnetic launching component that launches a game ball by generating an electromagnetic field. You may adopt the type of. The card unit connection board 314 is electrically connected to the ball lending operation unit 120 (see FIG. 1) on the front surface of the pachinko machine and a card unit (not shown), and the player takes in the command of the ball lending operation and dispenses it. It is output to. The card unit connection board 314 is not required for a cash machine in which a game ball is directly lent to the upper plate 19 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit.

The payout control device 311 and the launch control device 312, the power supply device 313, and the card unit connection board 314 are each housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material or the like. In particular, in the payout control device 311, as in the main control device 261 described above, the box base and the box cover constituting the substrate box 311b (encapsulating means) are unopenably connected by the sealing unit (sealing means). The board box 311b is sealed.

As shown in FIG. 3, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 311c. For example, when the state return switch 311c is pressed when a payout error such as a ball jam in the payout motor section occurs, the payout motor 358a (see FIG. 8) is slowly rotated in the forward direction to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state). ) Is planned.

Further, the power supply monitoring board 261b is provided with a RAM erasing switch 323. The pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, and can maintain the state at the time of a power failure even in the unlikely event of a power failure, and can return to the state at the time of a power failure when recovering from the power failure (recovery of power). Therefore, if the power is turned off in the normal procedure (for example, when the hall is closed), the state before the power is turned off is stored in memory. Therefore, if you want to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, turn on the power while pressing the RAM erase switch 323. It is decided to put it in.

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 203 integrates a resin-molded protective cover 353 and a game ball payout mechanism portion 352.

The back pack unit 203 is provided with a tank 355 opened upward at the uppermost portion thereof, and the game balls supplied from the island equipment (game island equipment) of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 355. Below the tank 355, for example, a tank rail 356 having two horizontal rows of ball passages and gently sloping downward toward the downstream side is connected, and further, a case rail 357 is vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 356. Are concatenated. A payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and a required number of game balls are appropriately paid out according to a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor 358a. Then, the game ball paid out from the payout device 358 is supplied to the upper plate 19 through a payout passage (not shown) or the like.

Further, the tank rail 356 is provided with a vibrator 360 for adding vibration to the tank rail 356. For example, the vibrator 360 is fastened to and attached to the tank rail 356 with, for example, two screws. Further, the vibrator 360 is not in surface contact with the tank rail 356, but is in contact with the two screw portions, and the vibration generated by the vibrator 360 is more effectively transmitted to the tank rail 356. Therefore, if a ball jam occurs near the tank rail 356, the vibrator 360 is driven to eliminate the ball jam.

A payout relay board (not shown) that relays a signal of a payout command from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358 is installed in the payout mechanism unit 352, and a power switch board 382 for taking in the main power supply from the outside is installed. is set up. For example, an AC 24V main power supply is supplied to the power switch board 382 via a voltage converter, and the power is turned on or off by the switching operation of the power switch 382a.

The payout mechanism portion 352 from the tank 355 to the payout passage (not shown) is all molded of a conductive resin material (for example, a conductive polycarbonate resin) and is grounded (earthed) at a part thereof. .. As a result, the generation of noise due to the charging of the game ball is suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 3, an inner frame open detection switch 388 for detecting that the inner frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11 is provided on the upper right side of the inner frame 12. When the inner frame 12 is opened, it is output from the inner frame open detection switch 388 to the computer in the hall (inside the pachinko shop).

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 261, a payout control device 311, a launch control device 312, a sub control device 262, a display control device 45, a voice output control device 47, a power supply device 313, and the like. .. Hereinafter, these devices will be described in detail individually.

The main control device 261 of the pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The CPU 501 is a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 501, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 502 is executed. A certain RAM 503 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in.

The RAM 503 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 313 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and the RAM 503 temporarily stores various data and the like. It has memory and area.

That is, when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes the normal processing to the end, so that the RAM 503 is used when the power is turned off (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter). It is only necessary to store and retain the contents of the counter buffer and the holding ball storage area, and the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power is turned off when the power is turned on again. Specifically, it is not necessary to provide the RAM 503 with a dedicated backup area for storing values such as registers and I / O for game information during normal processing when the power is turned off. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to input a power failure signal S1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like. Upon occurrence, power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

An input / output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 having the ROM 502 and the RAM 503 built therein via a bus line 504 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 505 includes a RAM erasing switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311, a launch control device 312, a sub control device 262, a first symbol display device 40, a second symbol display device 41, and other switches not shown. Etc. are connected. Further, the main control device 261 has a function of controlling the variation display of the first symbol in the first symbol display device 40 and the variation display of the second symbol in the second symbol display device 41.

Similar to the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 described above, the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 313 and data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. , RAM 513 is provided with a memory and an area for temporarily storing various data and the like.

The RAM 513 stores and holds information on the state at the time of power off so that the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is turned off when the power is turned off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. That is, the storage retention of the RAM 513 is executed when the power is turned off by the steps in the latter half of the NMI interrupt process and the payout control process, and conversely, the restoration of the stored information of the RAM 513 is executed in the power recovery process when the power is turned on. ..

An input / output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 containing the ROM 512 and the RAM 513 via a bus line 514 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 261, a launch control device 312, a payout motor 358a, and the like are connected to the input / output port 515, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 8, the launch control device 312 permits or prohibits the launch of the game ball by the launch device 229, and the launch device 229 is permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the launch control device 312 includes a card unit connection signal S4 from the payout control device 311 (a signal output when the above-mentioned card unit is connected to the pachinko machine 10) and a player. The touch detection signal S5 output when the game ball launch handle 18 is touched, and the launch stop switch 18a for stopping the launch provided on the game ball launch handle 18 are output when the launch stop switch 18a is not operated. The launch permission signal S7 is output to the main control device 261 on condition that all of the launch maintenance signals S6 are input. Further, a volume signal S10 corresponding to the operation amount of the game ball launch handle 18 is input to the launch control device 312 from the game ball launch handle 18, and the launch control device 312 outputs the volume signal S10 to the main control device 261. do.

That is, the firing permission state is in the period when the firing permission signal S7 is ON (high level), and the firing permission state is in the firing permission state during the period when the firing permission signal S7 is OFF (low level). That is, the main control device 261 is on the launch rail and the launch control signal S8 (pulse signal) that controls the launch solenoid (not shown) that launches the game ball during the period when the input launch permission signal S7 is ON. The ball feed control signal S9 (pulse signal) that controls the ball feed solenoid that feeds the game ball is repeatedly output to the launch control device 312 at a predetermined repetition cycle. The amplitude value of the launch control signal S8 (pulse signal) is determined by the main control device 261 based on the volume signal S10. For example, the larger the operation amount of the game ball launch handle 18, the more the launch control signal S8 (pulse signal). ) Increases the amplitude value. The launch control device 312 drives and controls the launch device 229 based on the launch control signal S8 and the ball feed control signal S9, and launches the game ball with an intensity corresponding to the operation amount of the game ball launch handle 18. On the contrary, the main control device 261 does not output the launch control signal S8 and the ball feed control signal S9 to the launch control device 312 during the period when the input launch permission signal S7 is OFF, and the launch device 229 does not output the game ball. Will not be fired.

The display control device 45 controls the variable display of the third symbol (decorative symbol) in the third symbol display device 42. The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a ROM (program ROM) 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, an image controller 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and a bus line 530, 531. And have. The output of the sub control device 262 is connected to the input of the input port 527, and the CPU 521, the ROM 522, the work RAM 523, and the image controller 526 are connected to the output of the input port 527. Further, an output port 529 is connected to the image controller 526 via a bus line 531 and a third symbol display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is connected to the output of the output port 529.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 controls the decorative symbol display in the third symbol display device 42 based on various commands in which various commands from the main control device 261 are edited and transmitted by the sub control device 262. The ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and the work RAM 523 temporarily stores the work data and flags used when the various programs are executed by the CPU 521. It is a memory for.

The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data displayed on the third symbol display device 42, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524, the display contents of the third symbol display device 42 are changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory for storing character data such as decorative symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 42. The image controller 526 adjusts the timings of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, and the output port 529 to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the display data stored in the video RAM 524 from the character ROM 525 at a predetermined timing. It is to be displayed on the symbol display device 42.

The audio output control device 46 controls the output of audio in the sound output unit 24a. The audio output control device 46 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, and the like, and executes a process of controlling the output of normal audio and the output of specific sound according to the display effect of the third symbol display device 42. be. Further, as will be described later, the voice output control device 46 controls to adjust the volume through the operation of the left selection button 82 and the right selection button 83. The ROM stores a program for audio output processing and sound data. The audio output unit 24a includes an amplifier and a speaker for outputting audio.

Further, the power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 for supplying electric power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10. The power supply unit 541 supplies the operation power required for each of the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 541 takes in an AC 24-volt power supply supplied from the outside and generates a + 12V power supply for driving various switches and motors, a + 5V power supply for logic, a backup power supply for RAM backup, and the like. Then, these + 12V power supply, + 5V power supply, and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like. An operating power source (+ 12V power source, + 5V power source, etc.) is supplied to the launch control device 312 via the payout control device 311.

As shown in FIG. 8, the main control device 261 includes a main control board 261a and a power supply monitoring board 261b separate from the main control board 261a in a board box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. .. The power supply monitoring board 261b includes a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors a power failure due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM erase switch 323.

The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal S1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors the voltage of AC 24 volts in the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred when the voltage becomes less than 22 volts, for example, when it exceeds 20 milliseconds. , The power failure signal S1 is output to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. By the output of the power failure signal S1, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the power failure time processing (NMI interrupt processing).

In addition, even after the time when the AC 24 volt monitored by the power supply unit 541 becomes less than 22 volts exceeds 20 milliseconds, the power supply unit 541 has a sufficient time to execute the power failure processing. It is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, at a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure processing.

The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit for taking in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clearing the backup data of the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 according to the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs the RAM erase signal S2 to the main control board 261a. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed (including turning on the power due to the elimination of a power failure), the data of the RAM 503 is cleared in the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 is the main control device. When the initialization command from 261 is received, the data in RAM 513 is cleared.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 9, three decorative symbol rows L, M, and R on the left, middle, and right are set in the third symbol display device 42 (liquid crystal display device), and the decorative symbol rows L, Three decorative symbols, an upper decorative symbol, a middle decorative symbol, and a lower decorative symbol, are displayed in a variable manner for each of M and R. In the present embodiment, the series of symbols is composed of a main decorative symbol SZ with numbers "0" to "9", and a sub-decorative symbol FZ composed of diamond-shaped symbols. The main decorative symbols SZ are displayed in ascending or descending order, and the sub-decorative symbols FZ are arranged between the main decorative symbols SZ to form a series of decorative symbol rows L, M, and R. Then, the main decorative symbol SZ and the sub-decorative symbol FZ are displayed in a variable manner from top to bottom with periodicity.

In such a case, in the left decorative symbol row L, the above series of decorative symbols are displayed in descending order (that is, in the order in which the number of the main decorative symbol SZ decreases), and in the middle decorative symbol row M and the right decorative symbol row R, the same is true. The series of decorative symbols are displayed in ascending order (that is, in order in which the number of the main decorative symbol SZ increases). Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the left decorative symbol row L → the right decorative symbol row R → the middle decorative symbol row M, and at the time of the stop, the five effective lines on the third symbol display device 42, that is, the upper line L1 and the middle line. If the main decorative symbol SZ is a combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main decorative symbols SZ) in any of L2, lower line L3, right-up line L4, and left-up line L5, it is special as a jackpot. The game video is displayed.

The main decorative pattern SZ is composed of a number portion SZa on which numbers are drawn and a decorative portion SZb on which characters such as people and animals are decoratively drawn. For example, the main decorative symbols SZ "1" arranged in the three decorative symbol rows L, M, and R are the same characters ("2" to "1" in the frame surrounding the number part SZa "1" and "1", respectively. It is composed of a decorative portion SZb on which a character different from 9 ”is drawn. The same applies to the main decorative symbols SZ "2" to "9".

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

In the present embodiment, the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 uses a random number related to the operation of the accessory and another random number used for the game to draw a lottery for the first symbol display device 40 (big hit lottery: first). The big hit lottery of symbols) and the setting of symbol display, the lottery of the second symbol display device 41 (the winning lottery of the second symbol), the setting of the symbol display, and the decorative symbol (third symbol) of the third symbol display device 42. A lottery related to variable display and its setting will be performed.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as a random number related to the operation of the accessory, as shown in FIG. 10, a jackpot random number counter C1 used for a jackpot lottery of the first symbol display device 40 and a first random number counter. The jackpot symbol counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot symbol of the symbol display device 40, the initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the second symbol display device 41 used for the winning lottery. The two symbol random number counter C4 and the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 used for setting the initial value of the second symbol random number counter C4 are used.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, as other random numbers used for the game, as shown in FIG. 10, in order to roughly specify the type of the variation pattern when selecting the variation pattern of the decorative symbol of the third symbol display device 42. The stop pattern selection counter C3 used for selecting the stop pattern of, the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 used for selecting the variation pattern of the decorative symbol of the third symbol display device 42, and the outlier symbol of the second symbol display device 41. The second symbol out-of-symbol symbol counter C5 used for selection is used. Each of the above-mentioned counters is composed of a program executed by the CPU 501.

For example, "stop pattern 0" indicates a complete deviation variation pattern group consisting of a plurality of types of complete deviation variation patterns, and "stop pattern 1" is a front-back deviation reach variation pattern group consisting of a plurality of types of anteroposterior reach variation patterns. The "stop pattern 2" indicates a group of reach fluctuation patterns other than the front-back deviation, which consists of a plurality of types of reach fluctuation patterns other than the front-back deviation, and the "stop pattern 3" consists of a plurality of types of jackpot fluctuation patterns. It shows a group of jackpot fluctuation patterns.

For all of these counters C1 to C5, CINI1 to CINI2, CS1 to CS3, "1" is added to the previous value (hereinafter referred to as "update") each time the counter is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it becomes "0". It is a return loop counter. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 shown in FIG. Further, the RAM 503 is provided with a holding ball storage area consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area, second holding area, third holding area, fourth holding area). In each of these areas, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot symbol counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are set according to the winning history of the game ball to the starting winning device 33a for special figure 1 and the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2. Each value such as is stored in chronological order. It should be noted that the winning of the game ball to the starting winning device 33a for special figure 1 and the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2 is also referred to as the establishment of the starting condition. Each value stored in the execution area is also referred to as a variable display for the executed portion, and each value stored in the reserved ball storage area is also referred to as a variable display for the unexecuted portion.

Specifically, if the start condition is satisfied during the period when neither the executed portion nor the unexecuted portion is stored in the execution area and the reserved ball storage area, the execution portion variation display is performed in the execution area. Is stored. If the start condition is satisfied during the period when the variation display of the execution portion is stored in the execution area, the unexecuted portion is in the order of the first hold area, the second hold area, the third hold area, and the fourth hold area. The variable display of is stored. When the variation display of the execution portion is stored in the execution area, the variation non-execution condition for not executing the variation display of the symbol is satisfied with respect to the variation display of the unexecuted portion stored in the hold ball storage area.

The variable display of the unexecuted portion stored in the first hold area, the second hold area, the third hold area, and the fourth hold area is also referred to as the first hold, the second hold, the third hold, and the fourth hold.

Each of the above-mentioned counters will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, "0" to "599", reach the maximum value (that is, "599"), and then return to "0". In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599), is updated once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 26) described later, and is a normal process described later. It is repeatedly updated within the remaining time (see FIG. 19). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 26) described later in this embodiment), and the game ball is a start winning device 33a for special figure 1 and a start winning device for special figure 2. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the 33b is won.

The hit value of the jackpot random number counter C1, that is, the number of random numbers that become jackpots is set in two types, one at low probability and the other at high probability, and the number of random numbers that become jackpot at low probability is two. The value is "150,450", the number of random numbers that are big hits at high probability is 16, and the value is "50 to 57,350 to 357". That is, when the probability is low, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and when the probability is high, the jackpot probability is 16/300. In addition, the high probability time refers to a state in which a jackpot is achieved by a predetermined probability fluctuation symbol and the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as an added value, that is, a so-called "probability change", which is a normal time (low probability time). Refers to the time when it is not in such a probabilistic state. In the high probability time (probability change state), after the end of the probability change jackpot or the latent probability change jackpot (after the big winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 opens for 16 rounds, for example), the next jackpot or a predetermined number of times It will continue until the fluctuation occurs. In this embodiment, the probabilistic state is assumed to be continued until 100 fluctuations are made after the end of the jackpot round.

The jackpot symbol counter C2 is a symbol at the time of a jackpot when the fluctuation of the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40 is stopped (in this embodiment, the final display symbol after the fluctuation display of the first segment display unit 40a). ) Is determined. In this embodiment, the jackpot symbol counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, "0" to "99", reach the maximum value (that is, "9"), and then return to "0". There is. The jackpot symbol counter C2 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 26) described later) in the same manner as in the case of the jackpot random number counter C1 described above, and the game ball is a start winning device 33a for special figure 1. , It is stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the start winning device 33b for the special figure 2 wins a prize.

The jackpot lottery table using the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot symbol counter C2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11A is a special figure 1 jackpot lottery table, and FIG. 11B is a special figure 2 jackpot lottery table.

As shown in (a), in the special figure 1 jackpot lottery table, when the jackpot random number counter C1 is a hit and the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is "0" to "9", the first symbol is displayed. The first segment display unit 40a of the device 40 stops at the third symbol, and the decorative symbols are aligned with the “7” symbol as described later. Next, when the above-mentioned jackpot random number counter C1 is a hit and the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is "10" to "49", the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40 is the second. It stops at a symbol, and the decorative symbols are aligned with odd symbols other than "7" such as "1", "3", "5", and "9". Further, when the above-mentioned jackpot random number counter C1 is a hit and the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is "50" to "99", the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40 is the first symbol. It stops at, and even-numbered symbols such as "2", "4", "6", and "8" are aligned. When the jackpot random number counter C1 is off, the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40 stops at the fourth symbol regardless of the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2, indicating that the decorative symbol is off. It will be a combination.

As shown in (b), in the special figure 2 jackpot lottery table, when the jackpot random number counter C1 is a hit and the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is "0" to "19", the first symbol is displayed. The first segment display unit 40a of the device 40 stops at the third symbol, and the decorative symbols are aligned with the “7” symbol as described later. Next, when the above-mentioned jackpot random number counter C1 is a hit and the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is "20" to "49", the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40 is the second. It stops at a symbol, and the decorative symbols are aligned with odd symbols other than "7" such as "1", "3", "5", and "9". Further, when the above-mentioned jackpot random number counter C1 is a hit and the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is "50" to "99", the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40 is the third symbol. It stops at, and even-numbered symbols such as "2", "4", "6", and "8" are aligned. When the jackpot random number counter C1 is off, the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40 stops at the fourth symbol regardless of the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2, indicating that the decorative symbol is off. It will be a combination.

The relationship between the jackpot symbol and the hit type will be explained. This relationship is common to the special figure 1 big hit lottery table and the special figure 2 big hit lottery table. If the jackpot symbol is a "7" symbol, the hit type is 16 rounds, which is a 16R probability variation jackpot with a probability variation state. If the jackpot symbol is an odd number symbol of "1", "3", "5", "9", the hit type is 8 rounds, which is an 8R probability variation jackpot with a probability variation state. If the jackpot symbol is an even number symbol of "2", "4", "6", "8", the hit type is 8 rounds, which is an 8R normal jackpot with no probable change state.

The relationship between the hit type and the ending time will be explained. The opening time is the time for performing the opening effect from the start of the jackpot game state to the start of the first round. The opening time is set to 10 seconds, which is common to all hit types. The opening time is common to the special figure 1 and special figure 2 big hit lottery tables.

The relationship between the hit type and the ending time will be explained. The ending time is the time for performing the ending effect from the end of the final round to the start of the next gaming state. In the special figure 1 jackpot lottery table, the ending time of the 16R probability variation jackpot is set to 35 seconds, and the ending time of the 8R probability variation jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot is set to 25 seconds. In the special figure 2 jackpot lottery table, the ending time of the 16R probability variation jackpot is set to 30 seconds, and the ending time of the 8R probability variation jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot is set to 20 seconds. The ending time of the special figure 2 jackpot is set to be 5 seconds shorter than the ending time of the special figure 1 jackpot lottery table. As a result, at the end of the jackpot round based on the winning of the starting winning device 33a for special figure 1, more information is shown to the player, and the continuation is based on the winning of the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2. By shortening the ending effect time when two or more big hits occur, the player can feel that the same effect can be understood by producing the same effect once, but by producing the same effect many times. Giving can be reduced.

The relationship between the hit type and the number of games with support status will be explained. The support state means that after the end of the big hit round game, the result of the lottery of the normal symbol is more likely to be a hit so that the game ball can be more easily won in the start winning device 33b for special figure 2 than in the normal game state. , It is a state where the opening time of the electric accessory is lengthened or the number of times of opening is increased. The support state is a game state in which a right-handed strike is performed. In the special figure 1 jackpot lottery table, the support state of 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, and 8R normal jackpot is set to 100 times. In the special figure 2 jackpot lottery table, the support state of the 16R probability variation jackpot and the 8R probability variation jackpot is set to 100 times, but the support state of the 8R normal jackpot is set to 0 times.

Further, the stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, "0" to "238", reach the maximum value (that is, 238), and then return to "0". In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 causes the decorative symbol to reach on the third symbol display device 42, and then the final stop decorative symbol is shifted by one to the front and back of the reach decorative symbol to stop. Similarly, after the reach occurs, the final stop decorative symbol stops at a position other than the front and back of the reach decorative symbol, and the "reach other than the front and rear deviation" and the "complete deviation" where the reach does not occur are drawn. For example, C3 = 0 to 201 corresponds to complete deviation, C3 = 202 to 208 corresponds to front-rear out-of-reach, and C3 = 209 to 238 corresponds to non-front-rear reach. The content of the lottery (reach lottery) of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is whether the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability or a high probability, and the fluctuation time shortening function of the first symbol display device 40 is not activated. It may be set individually depending on whether it is in operation or in operation, how many balls are reserved for operation at the start of fluctuation of the first symbol, and the like. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 26) described later), and the game ball wins the start winning device 33a for special figure 1 and the start winning device 33b for special figure 2. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 at the same timing.

Further, among the three variable type counters CS1 to CS3, the variable type counter CS1 is added one by one in order within the range of, for example, "0 to 198", and after reaching the maximum value (that is, "198"), "0". The variation type counter CS2 is configured to return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "240") by adding 1 in order within the range of "0 to 240", for example. The variable type counter CS3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, "0 to 162", reach the maximum value (that is, "162"), and then return to "0". In the following description, the variation type counter CS1 will be appropriately referred to as a “first variation type counter”, the variation type counter CS2 may be referred to as a “second variation type counter”, and the variation type counter CS3 may be appropriately referred to as a “third variation type counter”. ..

The first variation type counter CS1 determines a rough variation pattern group of decorative symbols such as the reach type of the decorative symbol (third symbol) such as so-called normal reach, super reach, premium reach, etc., and the type of complete deviation. .. Subsequently, one more variation pattern from the variation pattern group thus determined by the first variation type counter CS1 is determined by the second variation type counter CS2.

The variation pattern of the decorative symbol for special figure 1 is determined by using the variation pattern selection table of the main decorative symbol shown in FIG. The same applies to the variation pattern of the decorative pattern for the special figure 2.

It should be noted that the information on the number of games in the examples described later is that of a gaming machine in which points are earned each time a variation pattern of the decorative symbol for special figure 1 and the decorative symbol for special figure 2 is selected. It may be a point to be earned. These points may be counted, and the susceptibility to the advantageous gaming state may differ depending on the total number of points acquired. Specifically, the points acquired for each change of 1 during the variation display effect are counted, the acquired points are displayed on the third symbol display device 42, and the opening effect is performed based on the winning of the jackpot lottery. Is selected, but the length of the opening effect period is set to differ depending on the number of points earned. This is a gaming machine in which, for example, the probability of V-winning probability change in the embodiments described later differs depending on the length of the opening effect period.

That is, when the jackpot symbol counter C2 is any of "0" to "9", the first variation type counter CS1 is "0" to "30", "31" to "140" or "141" to " If it is "198", the super reach group (big hit super reach group) is determined. Specifically, when the first variation type counter CS1 is "0" to "30" and the second variation type counter CS2 is "0" to "120", the jackpot super reach A (variation time: 30 seconds). Is determined, and if the second variation type counter CS2 is "121" to "240", the jackpot super reach B (variation time: 30 seconds) is determined. When the first variable type counter CS1 is "31" to "140" and the second variable type counter CS2 is "0" to "120", the jackpot super reach C (variable time: 60 seconds) is determined, and the first 2 If the fluctuation type counter CS2 is "121" to "240", the jackpot super reach D (variation time: 60 seconds) is determined. When the first variable type counter CS1 is "141" to "198" and the second variable type counter CS2 is "0" to "120", the jackpot super reach E (variable time: 120 seconds) is determined, and the first is 2 If the fluctuation type counter CS2 is "121" to "240", the jackpot super reach F (variation time: 120 seconds) is determined. The jackpot super reach A and C are determined to notify the jackpot suggestion information suggesting the possibility of winning the jackpot by pressing the decision button 81 within a predetermined valid period as a special effect, and the jackpot super reach E is the jackpot. It is decided to notify the suggestion information and to execute the revival effect performed when changing from the temporary stop out of reach to the jackpot combination.

If the jackpot symbol counter C2 is any of "10" to "39" or "40" to "89" and the first variation type counter CS1 is "0" to "65", the normal reach group (big hit normal reach) The group) is determined, and if it is "66" to "132" or "133" to "198", the super reach group (big hit super reach group) is determined. Specifically, when the first variation type counter CS1 is "0" to "65" and the second variation type counter CS2 is "0" to "120", the jackpot normal reach A (variation time: 20 seconds) is If it is determined and the second variation type counter CS2 is "121" to "240", the jackpot normal reach B (variation time: 20 seconds) is determined. When the first variation type counter CS1 is "66" to "132" and the second variation type counter CS2 is "0" to "120", the jackpot super reach A (variation time: 30 seconds) is determined, and the first is 2 If the variable type counter CS2 is "121" to "240", the jackpot super reach B is determined. When the first variation type counter CS1 is "133" to "198" and the second variation type counter CS2 is "0" to "121", the jackpot super reach C (variation time: 60 seconds) is determined, and the first is 2 If the fluctuation type counter CS2 is "121" to "240", the jackpot super reach D (variation time: 60 seconds) is determined. The frequency of occurrence is almost the same for jackpot normal reach A, jackpot super reach A and B, and jackpot normal reach C and D. The jackpot normal reach A and the jackpot super reach A and C are determined to notify the jackpot suggestion information using the decision button 81.

Next, if the stop pattern selection counter C3 is any one of "0" to "201", the complete deviation is determined, and if the stop pattern selection counter C3 is any one of "202" to "208", the front / rear deviation is normal. Either REIT or non-front-rear super reach is determined, and if the stop pattern selection counter C3 is any of "209" to "238", either non-front-rear normal reach or non-front-rear super reach is determined. In this way, when the big hit lottery is missed, it is set so that it is likely to be completely missed.

Next, when the stop pattern selection counter C3 is any one of "0" to "201", the detailed variation pattern type is determined as follows. When the first variation type counter CS1 is "0" to "100", the complete deviation A (variation time: 10 seconds) is determined. When the first variation type counter CS1 is "101" to "150", the complete deviation B (variation time: 15 seconds) is determined. When the first variation type counter CS1 is "151" to "198", the complete deviation C (variation time: 20 seconds) is determined. In addition, even in the case of complete deviation A, B, C, the jackpot suggestion information using the decision button 81 may be notified. Therefore, it is not possible to determine whether the jackpot is a jackpot or a miss, only by the presence or absence of notification of the jackpot suggestion information.

Next, when the stop pattern selection counter C3 is any one of "202" to "208", the detailed variation pattern type is determined as follows. When the first variation type counter CS1 is "0" to "100", the front-rear deviation normal reach A (variation time: 20 seconds) is determined. Further, when the first variation type counter CS1 is "101" to "150", the front-rear deviation super reach A (variation time: 30 seconds) is determined. When the first variation type counter CS1 is "151" to "170", the front-rear deviation super reach C (variation time: 60 seconds) is determined. When the first variation type counter CS1 is "171" to "198", if the variation type counter CS2 is "0" to "199", the front and rear deviation super reach E and F (variation time: 100 seconds) are determined. Will be done. Similarly to the above, the front-back normal reach A and the front-back super reach A and C may or may not notify the jackpot suggestion information. The fluctuation time (100 seconds) of the front-back off super reach E and F corresponds to a pattern that ends with the off result by pretending that there is a revival effect in the jackpot super reach E and F. Therefore, even in the jackpot super reach E and F, it is difficult for the player to discriminate the result of the variable display until the revival effect is performed, except when suggested by the jackpot suggestion information.

Next, when the stop pattern selection counter C3 is any of "209" to "238", and when the first variation type counter CS1 is "0" to "100", it is out of alignment except for front and back, and normal reach A (variation). Time: 20 seconds) is determined, and when the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is "101" to "150", the point that the super reach A (variation time: 30 seconds) is determined is the stop pattern. It is the same as the case where the selection counter C3 is any one of "202" to "208". When the first variation type counter CS1 is "151" to "198", the super reach C (variation time: 60 seconds) is determined except for the front and back. The normal reach A, which is out of front and back, and the super reach A, C, which is out of front and back, may also notify the jackpot suggestion information using the decision button 81, as described above.

The variation type counters CS1 to CS3 are updated once every time the normal processing described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal processing. Then, the buffer values of the variable type counters CS1 to CS3 are acquired at the time of the start winning process.

The size and range of each of the above-mentioned counters are merely examples and can be arbitrarily changed. However, it is desirable that the sizes of the jackpot random number counter C1, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counters CS1 to CS3 are all different prime numbers and are not synchronized in any case.

Next, an example of the variable display effect of the main decorative symbol SZ will be described. FIG. 13 (a) is an example of the variable display effect of the jackpot normal reach A and the off-normal reach A, and FIG. 13 (b) is an example of the variable display effect of the jackpot super reach A and the off-target spar reach A.

First, the jackpot normal reach A and the off normal reach A will be described. In the third symbol display device 42, the main decorative symbol SZ is displayed on the front surface of the normal background (that is, the normal screen 43a is displayed). Based on the occurrence of the start prize, the variable display of the main decorative symbol SZ is started. This fluctuation display is high-speed fluctuation (that is, the screen 43c during high-speed fluctuation is displayed). During high-speed fluctuations, jackpot suggestion information may be notified. Whether or not to perform the notification may be determined by lottery based on the value of the variable type counter CS2. As for the notification of the jackpot suggestion information, first, an image prompting the pressing of the decision button 81 during high-speed fluctuation is displayed, and by pressing the decision button 81 while displaying this image, an image suggesting the possibility of a jackpot result. Is displayed. For example, if the image "Chance!" Is displayed, it suggests that there is a high possibility that the result will be a big hit. As a result, when an image prompting the press of the decision button 81 is displayed during the high-speed fluctuation, the player presses the decision button 81 in order to know whether or not the jackpot result is likely to occur. After the notification image is erased, the main decorative symbols SZ in the right column and the left column are stopped and displayed in the reach combination (that is, the normal reach display screen 43f is displayed), and either the jackpot or the out-of-reach combination is confirmed and displayed. (That is, the all symbol stop screen 43e is displayed).

Instead of the image suggesting the possibility of this jackpot result, the movable accessory may be driven by pressing the decision button 81.

Next, the jackpot super reach A and the missed super reach A will be described. Based on the occurrence of the start prize, the high-speed fluctuation of the main decorative symbol SZ is started. An image prompting the pressing of the decision button 81 is displayed during high-speed fluctuation, and an image suggesting the possibility of a big hit result is displayed by pressing the decision button 81. After the main decorative symbol SZ is stopped and displayed in the reach combination, the symbol indicating the reach combination is changed to the development symbol HZ, and the reach development effect is executed (that is, the development reach display screen 43g is displayed). For example, if the player PY in the reach development effect clears the mission, a big hit result is obtained, and if the player PY fails the mission, the reach is lost. After such an effect, the combination of either the jackpot by the developed symbol HZ or the out-of-reach combination is stopped and displayed, and then confirmed and displayed by the main decorative symbol SZ.

Another example of the variable display effect will be described. FIG. 14A is an example of the variable display effect of the jackpot normal reach C and the off-normal reach C, and FIG. 14B is an example of the variable display effect of the jackpot super reach E and the off-target super reach E.

First, the jackpot super reach C and the missed super reach C will be described. In Super Reach C, the reach development effect is executed for a longer time than in Super Reach A. For example, in Super Reach C, a confrontation effect between the player PY and the enemy character TK in the reach development effect is displayed. Further, in the super reach C, as a part of the button suggestion effect, a selection image for performing a predetermined selection and determination using the decision button 81 and the selection button 82 is displayed. Specifically, at the start of the confrontation effect, the character selection effect using the decision button 81 and the selection button 82 is executed. For example, a plurality of selectable player PYs are displayed, a favorite player PY is selected by the selection button 82, and is determined by the enter button 81. As the enemy character TK displayed after selecting the player PY, an appropriate character is determined according to the possibility (expectation degree) of a big hit result. This suggests whether the player PY is likely to win (whether it is likely to be a big hit result) depending on the relationship between the player PY and the enemy character TK. When the player PY and the enemy character TK are decided, they attack each other. In the case of a jackpot result, an image that convinces the player PY of victory (an image in which the surroundings of the player PY shine) is displayed. If the result is out of reach, an image (an image in which the surroundings of the enemy character TK glows black) that predicts that the player PY will be defeated is displayed. After such an effect, the combination of either the jackpot by the developed symbol HZ or the out-of-reach combination is stopped and displayed, and then confirmed and displayed by the main decorative symbol SZ.

Instead of an image that convinces the player PY of victory, a movable accessory may be driven.

Next, the jackpot super reach E and the missed super reach E will be described. In Super Reach E, the reach development effect is executed for a longer time than in Super Reach A. For example, in Super Reach E, a confrontation effect is also displayed in the reach development effect. In the confrontation effect, the character selection effect is executed. If the result is out of reach, an image is displayed that predicts the defeat of player PY. In the case of a big hit result, an image in which the player PY expects to be defeated is displayed, and then an image prompting the player to press the enter button 81 is displayed. When the enter button 81 is pressed, the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 repeatedly blinks violently with strong light emission (strong light emission blinking screen 43g-1). After the display screen 42a blinks, an image convincing the player PY's victory is displayed, and after the jackpot combination by the development symbol HZ is stopped and displayed, it is confirmed and displayed by the main decorative symbol SZ.

Instead of the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 repeatedly blinking violently with strong light emission, the movable accessory may be driven by pressing the determination button 81.

In this embodiment, the specific effect is performed once in one reach effect, but the specific effect may be continuously executed a plurality of times. For example, during the variable display game of 1, a pseudo continuous effect of performing a pseudo reach-off effect multiple times in a row, or a continuous advance notice effect of continuously performing a notice effect such as suggesting a jackpot expectation degree is executed. May be good. The information on the number of games in the examples described later may be the number of pseudo-reams or the number of consecutive notices. In this case, a function for counting information on the number of pseudo-reams and the number of continuous notices, a third symbol display device 42 capable of displaying information on the number of pseudo-reams and the number of continuous notices, and a determination to execute the pseudo-ream effect and the continuous notice effect. Based on the above, a function to execute a pseudo-continuous effect or a continuous notice effect, and a function to select a period during which the pseudo-continuous effect or the continuous advance notice effect is performed based on the decision to execute the pseudo-continuous effect or the continuous advance notice effect. In preparation, the length of the pseudo-ream effect and the continuous notice effect changes according to the information of the number of pseudo-ream and the number of continuous notices, and the pseudo-ream effect and the continuous notice effect have a long length of the effect period. It may contain information that is advantageous to the player.

Next, the ending effect will be described. FIG. 15 is a table for determining an ending effect pattern.

After the end of the jackpot round game, the third symbol display device 42 gives the player a rest, congratulates the player on reaching the final round, and suggests or informs the player of useful information for the game. , An ending effect that displays an image for notifying various cautions is displayed. In this embodiment, as the ending effect, images combined in a predetermined pattern are displayed. The ending information 44j constituting the ending effect pattern includes, for example, the next game state suggestion information 44w (“one more time” or “chance” in the figure, which suggests that the game shifts to the probabilistic state or the time saving state after the end of the jackpot round game. ”), Manufacturer information 44x (indicated as“ logo ”in the figure) indicating the manufacturer, and card removal forgetting prevention information 44y (“prepaid card” in the figure) that alerts the user to forgetting to remove the prepaid card. (Note) and the immersive prevention information 44z (indicated as "moderately enjoyed" in the figure) that alerts the user that pachinko and pachislot are moderately enjoyable games. The next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, and the insertion prevention information 44z are displayed for 10 seconds each, and the manufacturer information 44x is displayed for 5 seconds.

The ending effect of the 16R probability variation jackpot in Special Figure 1 is a pattern in which the next game state suggestion information 44w, the manufacturer information 44x, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, and the insertion prevention information 44z are displayed in that order in 35 seconds. In the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot shown in FIG. 2, the ending effect is a pattern in which the next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, and the insertion prevention information 44z are displayed in that order in 30 seconds.

The ending effect of the 8R probability variation jackpot in Special Figure 1 is a pattern in which the next game state suggestion information 44w, the manufacturer information 44x, and the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y are displayed in that order in 25 seconds. The ending effect of the 8R probability variation jackpot in Special Figure 2 is a pattern in which the next game state suggestion information 44w and the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y are displayed in that order in 20 seconds. The ending effect of the 8R normal jackpot of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is the same as the ending effect of the 8R probability variation jackpot of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, but the next game state suggestion information 44w is a "chance" (next). It is suggested that the game state becomes a time saving state).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the second symbol random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol of the second symbol display device 41. The second symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of "0" to "250", and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250), the counter returns to "0". The second symbol random number counter C4 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 23) described later), and is acquired when the game ball passes through either the left or right normal symbol start winning device 34. .. The number of random numbers to be won is 149, and the range is "5 to 153".

In particular, when the second symbol random number counter C4 makes one round, the initial value at that time is read as the initial value of the second symbol random number counter CINI2. The initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 is a loop counter similar to the second symbol random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is updated once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 23) described later. , It is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal processing (see FIG. 19) described later. The second symbol random number counter C4 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 23) described later in this embodiment), and the RAM 503 reaches the timing when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start winning device 34. It is stored in the second symbol hold storage area.

That is, the RAM 503 also has a second symbol hold storage area, which is an area different from the hold ball storage area, and has one execution area for the second symbol and four hold areas for the second symbol (second symbol). A second symbol hold storage area (1st to 4th areas for symbol hold) is provided, and each of these areas is set according to the winning history of the game ball to the normal symbol start winning device 34. Each value of the second symbol random number counter C4 is stored in time series.

Further, the second symbol out-of-symbol symbol counter C5 is updated once every time the second symbol control process of the normal process in FIG. 19, which will be described later, is executed once, and the value thereof is the second symbol out-of-symbol symbol of the counter buffer. The second symbol counter C5, which was updated and acquired in the buffer and was updated and acquired in the second symbol out-of-symbol symbol buffer when stored in the second symbol holding ball storage area of the second symbol random number counter C4, is also the second symbol. It is stored in the hold ball storage area. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 10, when the value of the second symbol random number counter C4 is unsuccessful, "x" is drawn based on the value of the second symbol off symbol counter C5 in the second symbol holding ball storage area. The display unit 41b is lit and displayed. It should be noted that the second symbol variation display result may be performed based only on the second symbol random number counter C4 without providing the second symbol off symbol counter C5. That is, if the second symbol random number counter C4 is won, the display unit 41a on which "○" is drawn is lit and displayed, and if it is not selected, the display unit 41b on which "x" is drawn is lit and displayed.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 16 to 27. The processing of the CPU 501 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (at a cycle of 2 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). There is an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting a signal. For convenience of explanation, here, first, a timer interrupt process, a start winning process executed in the timer interrupt process, a look-ahead lottery process executed in the start winning process, and a look-ahead lottery process. NMI interrupt processing will be described, and then the main processing will be described.

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process, and this process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, for example, every 2 msec.

In FIG. 23, first, in step S601, the reading process of various winning switches is executed. That is, the state of various switches (excluding the RAM erasing switch 323) connected to the main control device 261 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

After that, in step S602, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 are updated. Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (“599” in the present embodiment), it is cleared to “0”, and the initial value second symbol random number counter is used. CINI2 is incremented by 1 and cleared to "0" at the time of 1 increment after the counter value reaches the maximum value ("250" in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503 (see FIG. 10).

Further, in the following step S603, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot symbol counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot symbol counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (“599”, “9”, respectively in the present embodiment, respectively. Clear to "0" at the time of 1 increment after reaching "250"). Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503 (see FIG. 10).

After that, in step S604, the start winning process associated with winning the start winning device 33a for the special figure 1 and the start winning device 33b for the special figure 2 is executed. This start winning process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 24, which will be described later.

After that, in step S605, the firing control process is executed. Hereinafter, this launch control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

Specifically, in step S721, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the launch permission signal S7 from the launch control device 312 is ON, as shown in FIG. If the firing permission signal S7 is ON, the process proceeds to step S722, and if it is OFF, this process ends. In step S722, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 outputs the launch control signal S8 and the ball feed control signal S9 to the launch control device 312, controls the launch of the game ball by the launch device 229, and proceeds to step S723. In step S723, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets a launch operation command indicating that the game ball launch operation has been performed. After performing the firing control process in this way, the CPU 501 temporarily ends the timer interrupt process.

The start winning process performed by the main control device 261 will be described with reference to FIG. 24.

In step S701, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the game ball has won the start winning device 33a for special figure 1 and the start winning device 33b for special drawing 2 based on the detection information of the operation port switch. If the prize is won, the process proceeds to step S702, and if not, the present process is terminated.

In step S702, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the number of operation-holding balls N of the first symbol display device 40 is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). If the number of balls on hold for operation N is less than the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S703, otherwise the process ends. In step S703, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 increments the number N of balls on hold for operation by one. In step S704, the main control device 261 converts the operation hold ball number N incremented in step S703 into a hold ball storage area designation command, and outputs the command to the sub control device 262 together with the look-ahead variation pattern designation command described later. Set to.

In step S705, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 acquires a random number related to the winning of the first symbol and the determination of the fluctuation pattern of the third symbol. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot symbol counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 updated in step S603 are set in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 shown in FIG. Store in the first of the empty areas of the first to fourth reserved areas.

In step S706, the main control device 261 executes a look-ahead lottery process that is performed prior to the variation start process shown in FIG. 19 described above.

The look-ahead lottery process will be described with reference to FIG. 25.

In step S711, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 performs a look-ahead lottery for determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area. Specifically, whether or not the result of the look-ahead lottery is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the big hit random number counter C1 and the mode at that time (whether it is a probabilistic state or a normal state). The hit value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is as described above.

In step S712, when the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines that the result of the look-ahead lottery is a jackpot, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is selected. Decide which one to use.

In step S713, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines in advance a fluctuation pattern (big hit effect pattern) at the time of a big hit. Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 confirms the values of the jackpot symbol counter C2 and the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503 in the same order as the fluctuation start processing described above. And determine the fluctuation pattern in advance.

If it is determined in step S711 that the result of the look-ahead lottery is not a big hit, in step S714, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the stop symbol that the result of the look-ahead lottery is stopped and displayed as a symbol.

In step S715, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines in advance a variation pattern (disengagement effect pattern) at the time of disconnection, and sets the deviation variation pattern in the variation pattern designation command. Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 confirms the values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 in that order, and determines the variation pattern. Determine in advance.

In step S716, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines in advance the addition of the effect time, that is, the addition of the effect time of the jackpot variation pattern determined in step S713 or the deviation variation pattern determined in step S715. .. More specifically, based on the value of the variable type counter CS3, the decorative symbol (third symbol) of the intermediate decorative symbol row on the third symbol display device 42 stops slipping, and the effect time is increased (the middle decoration). The variation pattern including the decorative symbol of the symbol row slips and the time until it stops and is displayed) is determined in advance.

In step S717, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 issues a variation pattern specification command corresponding to the jackpot variation pattern determined in advance in step S713, or a variation pattern specification command corresponding to the deviation variation pattern determined in step S505. Set.

In step S718, when the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has passed through steps S712 and S713, the jackpot symbol of the first symbol display device 40 determined in step S712 (“first specific hit symbol”, “second specific hit symbol”). If a decorative symbol designation command corresponding to "specific hit symbol" or "non-specific hit symbol") is set and steps S714 and S715 have been passed, the first symbol display device 40 determined in advance in step S714 is removed. Set the decorative symbol specification command corresponding to the symbol.

In step S719, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the effect time addition designation command corresponding to the effect time addition determined in advance in step S716, and ends this process.

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing, and this processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt, the state of the main control device 261 when the power is turned off is stored in the backup area of the RAM 503.

That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal S1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main control device 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 27. The NMI interrupt process of FIG. 27 is stored in the ROM 502 of the main controller 261. During a predetermined time after the power failure signal S1 is output, power is supplied from the power supply unit 541 so that the processing of the main control device 261 can be executed, and the NMI interrupt processing is executed within this predetermined time.

In the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 27, in step S801, the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area. In this embodiment, the information on the occurrence of power failure is flagged and stored in the backup area.

Next, the main processing performed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 will be described.
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of the main process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261. This main process is started by resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step S101, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes the initial setting process accompanying the power-on. Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Further, in step S102, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 waits for the control device on the sub side (sub control device 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to be in an operable state, for example, for about 1 second, for weight processing. To execute. In the following step S103, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 permits RAM access.

After that, the data backup process is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step S104, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided on the power supply monitoring board 261b is pressed (ON), and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S105, and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S105. If there is, the process proceeds to step S113. In the following step S105, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area of the RAM 503 (whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information flag is set). Further, in step S106, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 calculates the RAM determination value, and in the following step S107, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 matches the RAM determination value with the RAM determination value saved when the power is turned off. Whether or not, that is, the effectiveness of the backup is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. It is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup based on whether or not the keywords written in the predetermined area of the RAM 503 are correctly stored.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on, the process proceeds to the initialization process of the RAM 503 (step S113 or the like). Similarly, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the used RAM area is cleared and the RAM 503 is initialized (step). Move to S113 etc.). That is, in step S113, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 clears the used area of the RAM 503 to "0" and executes the initialization process of the RAM 503.

In the following step S114, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 transmits a payout initialization command. As described above, the payout initialization command is output to the payout control device 311 when the main control device 261 is initialized.

Further, in step S115, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 transmits a command at the time of turning on the power to the sub control board 262a. Since this command at the time of turning on the power includes a command for determining the model of the pachinko machine, the model can be determined based on the command content on the sub side such as the sub control board 262a or the display control device 45. ..

Further, in step S116, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes the initial setting of the CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit). In step S117, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets interrupt permission and shifts to a normal process (see FIG. 17) described later.

On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed, the power is restored on condition that the power cutoff occurrence information is set and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. Execute the process (process when the power is cut off and restored). That is, in step S108, the power cutoff occurrence information is cleared. In step S109, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 transmits a payout return command to the payout control device 311 and instructs the payout control device 311 to start payout control. Although the details will be described later, when the payout control device 311 receives the payout return command from the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 returns and starts the payout control.

In step S110, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 transmits a command for causing the control device on the sub side to be duplicated in the gaming state when the power is turned off, and in step S111, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is CTC (Counter). / Timer Circuit) Initial setting is executed. Further, in step S112, interrupt permission is set, and then the process proceeds to normal processing (see FIG. 17) described later. For example, even if the power is cut off in the middle of the normal processing, the power is turned off after the final step of the normal processing (step of "RAM access prohibited" shown in FIG. 17) is executed, so that the power is turned off after the power is restored. Will be executed from step S201, which is the first step of normal processing.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processes of steps S201 to S207 are executed as periodic processes having a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processes of steps S210 and S211 are executed in the remaining time.

In FIG. 17, first, in step S201, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 performs an external output process of transmitting output data such as a command updated in the previous process to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence / absence of prize detection information is determined, and if there is prize detection information, a prize ball payout command corresponding to the number of acquired game balls is transmitted to the payout control device 311. Further, since the decorative symbol (third symbol) is also variablely displayed by the third symbol display device 42 in conjunction with the first symbol variation display (variation display of the first segment display unit 40a) of the first symbol display device 40. However, when displaying the variation of the first symbol of the first symbol display device 40, a variation pattern designation command, a decorative symbol designation command, a total stop command (confirmation command), and the like are transmitted to the sub control device 262 in the external output processing.

In this pachinko machine 10, at the start of fluctuation of the first symbol, the external output of normal processing is performed in the order of variation pattern specification command → effect command (command for specifying change of variation time, etc.) → decorative symbol specification command. A predetermined number of commands (for example, three) are sent each time a process is performed (that is, three commands are sent every 4 msec), and a total stop command is sent at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses. In addition, after the fluctuation of the first symbol is started, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of each external output processing of the normal processing is performed in the order of the fluctuation pattern designation command → the effect command → the decorative symbol designation command (that is, 3 every 4 msec). The command may be sent one by one, and the all stop command may be sent at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses.

The variation pattern designation command is a command for designating a variation pattern of a decorative symbol (third symbol) that is variablely displayed on the third symbol display device 42. The variation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the sub control device 262, and is transmitted from the sub control device 262 to the display control device 45. The display control device 45 controls the third symbol display device 42 so as to display and execute the variation pattern of the decorative symbol based on the transmitted variation pattern designation command.

The decorative symbol designation command is for designating whether the variable display effect of the decorative symbol (third symbol) on the third symbol display device 42 is the first big hit, the second big hit, the third big hit, or the off. It is a command. The decorative symbol designation command is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the sub control device 262, and is transmitted from the sub control device 262 to the display control device 45. The display control device 45 is a third symbol display device so that the display result of the variation pattern of the decorative symbol becomes the result (first big hit, second big hit, third big hit) according to the transmitted decorative symbol designation command. Display control of 42.

The all stop command is a command for instructing the stop of the variable pattern of the decorative symbol (third symbol) that is variablely displayed on the third symbol display device 42. The all stop command is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the sub control device 262, and is transmitted from the sub control device 262 to the display control device 45. The display control device 45 controls the third symbol display device 42 so as to stop and display the variation pattern of the decorative symbol based on the transmitted all-stop command.

Further, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sends a fluctuation pattern designation command and an effect command (command for designating a change of the fluctuation time, etc.) to the sub control device 262 in the external output process (step S201) of the normal process. May be sent. That is, it is determined which time the fluctuation time addition (addition time due to the above-mentioned sliding effect of the decorative symbol) is set based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS3, and such addition time is appropriately set to the sub control device 262. Directing commands are used to indicate. Therefore, after the variation of the first symbol starts, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of each external output process of the normal process is performed in the order of the variation pattern specification command → the effect command → the decorative symbol specification command (that is, 3 every 4 msec). A command may be sent, and a full stop command may be sent at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses.

Next, in step S202, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes the update of the variation type counters CS1 to CS3. Specifically, the variable type counters CS1 to CS3 are incremented by 1 respectively, and when the counter values reach the maximum value (198, 240, 162 in the present embodiment) and then 1 increment is performed, "0" is obtained. Clear to. Then, the updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area shown in FIG. 10 of the RAM 503.

In the following step S203 of FIG. 17, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 reads the prize ball counting signal, the payout abnormality signal, and the lower plate full tank signal received from the payout control device 311. After that, in step S204, the first symbol variation processing for displaying the variation of the first symbol by the first symbol display device 40 is executed. By this first symbol variation processing, a jackpot determination and a setting of a variation pattern of the first symbol are performed. However, the details of the first symbol variation processing will be described later.

In step S205, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes the next game state setting process for setting the jackpot lottery probability in the next game state after the end of the jackpot game state. The details of the next game state setting process will also be described later.

After that, in step S206, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes a large winning opening opening / closing process for opening or closing the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 in the big hit round gaming state. That is, the large winning opening 32a is opened in each round of the big hit state, and whether the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 32a has elapsed or whether the specified number of game balls have won in the large winning opening 32a for each round. judge. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the opening of the large winning opening 32a in that round is stopped and closed, and if there is a remaining round, the opening of the large winning opening 32a is repeatedly executed for the remaining number of rounds.

In addition, in the embodiment described later, it is provided with a function of counting the number of fluctuations and the number related to other games, and it is difficult to enter the ball until the predetermined count is reached based on the predetermined count. There is a gaming machine that makes it easier to enter a gaming ball. In this type of gaming machine, the target to be counted is a specific advantageous gaming state after the end of the jackpot round game (for example, the number of fluctuations during the probability change state where the support state such as latent probability change is not provided). Regardless of whether or not it is in a specific advantageous gaming state, the number of fluctuations from the end of the jackpot round game to the next jackpot winning may be counted. That is, in this type of gaming machine, the number of hits after the end of the jackpot round game is counted, and when the predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) is reached, until the specified number of times (for example, 901 to 1000 times) is reached, at that time. It may be one that generates a time saving state from the gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state) of. As a result, until the specified number of times is reached, it becomes easy to put the game ball into the electric chew, so that it can function as a relief at the time of hamari.

In addition, the target to be counted is not limited to the number of fluctuations in the latent probability change, and if both the predetermined number of time reduction states and the predetermined number of probability change states are attached as the advantageous gaming state after the end of the jackpot round game, the time reduction state is used. It may count the number of fluctuations in the probabilistic state.

That is, in this type of gaming machine, the gaming ball is often picked up because it is opened to the electric chew frequently and for a long time during the time saving state, and it is difficult for the gaming ball to enter the attacker for a small hit downstream. However, when the number of fluctuations exceeds 100 times, the time saving state is digested, and from 101 times to 200 times, only the probable change state is changed. In the probabilistic state, the electric chew is opened frequently, but since the opening time is normal, the game ball that did not enter the electric chew flows down to the attacker for small hits downstream of it, and is used for small hits. It becomes easy to enter the attacker. As a result, the machine is given a machine to acquire a prize ball in the small hit game state at the timing when the advantageous game state after the end of the big hit round game is switched from the probability change state with the time reduction state to the probability change state without the time reduction state. Can be done.

Further, in step S207, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes the display control of the second symbol by the second symbol display device 41. Briefly, on condition that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol start winning device 34, the second symbol random number counter C4 is acquired each time, and the display units 41a and 41b of the second symbol display device 41 are used. The second symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Then, when the lottery of the second symbol is carried out based on the value of the second symbol random number counter C4 and the winning state of the second symbol is reached, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 receives a start prize for special figure 2 as shown in step S208. The opening process of the start winning device 33b for special figure 2 which opens the device 33b for a predetermined time is performed. Although the explanation is omitted, the second symbol random number counter C4 is also updated by the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 23, like the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot symbol counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3. ing.

In step S208A, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 performs a right-handed error determination process, which will be described later, in order to determine this as an error when right-handed during a normal game, that is, a left-handed game.

Further, in step S209, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area of the RAM 503 (whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information flag is set). If the power-off occurrence information is not set, the process proceeds to step S210, and if the power-off occurrence information is set, the process proceeds to step S213.

After that, in step S210, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous normal process. Then, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process, the initial value random number counter CINI1, the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counters CS1 to CS3 are repeatedly updated (steps S211 and S212). ). That is, in step S211, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 are updated. Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and is cleared to "0" when the counter value is incremented by 1 after reaching the maximum value ("599" in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503. Similarly to this, the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and cleared to "0" when the counter value reaches the maximum value ("250" in this embodiment) and then incremented by 1. do. Then, the update value of the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

Further, in step S212, the variation type counters CS1 to CS3 are updated (similar to step S202). Specifically, the variable type counters CS1 to CS3 are incremented by 1, and the counter values are incremented by 1 after reaching the maximum value (“198”, “240”, “162” in the present embodiment). Clear each to "0". Then, the updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S208 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the initial value random number counter CINI1 (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) and the initial value Value The second symbol random number counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the second symbol random number counter C4) can be updated at random.

Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is set in step S209 and the process proceeds to step S213, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets interrupt prohibition. Subsequently, in step S214, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 transmits a power cutoff notification command indicating that the power supply has been quickly cut off to another control device. Subsequently, in step S215, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 stops the output of the control signal. Subsequently, in step S216, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 calculates the RAM determination value and stores it in the backup area. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Subsequently, in step S217, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 prohibits RAM access. After that, it goes into an infinite loop in case the power is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed.

Next, the first symbol variation process in step S204 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In FIG. 18, in step S401, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the jackpot is currently being hit. The jackpot includes a special game displayed on the third symbol display device 42 at the time of the jackpot and a predetermined time after the end of the special game. In the following step S402, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the variation display of the first symbol is being performed by the first symbol display device 40. Then, if the jackpot is not performed and the fluctuation display of the first symbol is not performed, the process proceeds to step S403, and the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has the number N of operation pending balls of the first symbol display device 40 larger than "0". Determine if not. At this time, if the jackpot is in progress or the number of balls on hold for operation N is "0", this process is terminated as it is.

Further, if it is neither during the big hit nor during the fluctuation display of the first symbol and the number of balls on hold for operation N> 0, the process proceeds to step S404. In step S404, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 subtracts "1" from the number N of balls on hold. In step S405, a process of shifting the data stored in the reserved ball storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the hold ball storage area to the execution area side, and is a process of sequentially shifting the hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area →. The data in each area is shifted such as the hold 1st area, the hold 3rd area → the hold 2nd Uria, the hold 4th area → the hold 3rd area, and so on.

After that, in step S406, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes the fluctuation start process. Here, the fluctuation start process will be described in detail using the flowchart of FIG. 19. In step S501, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is set to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area. Whether it is a big hit or not is determined based on it. Specifically, whether or not it is a jackpot is determined based on the relationship between the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the mode at that time (whether it is a probabilistic state or a normal state), and as described above, at the time of normal low probability. Of the numerical values "0" to "599" of the jackpot random number counter C1, "150,450" is the winning value (2 pieces), and in the high probability, "50,150,350,450" is the winning value (4 pieces). be.

When the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines that the jackpot is a jackpot, in step S502, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, that is, the first symbol display. It is determined whether it is one of the first symbol to the third symbol displayed on the first segment display unit 40a of the apparatus 40. That is, the jackpot corresponding to the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is based on the special figure 1 jackpot lottery table or the special figure 2 jackpot lottery table (see FIG. 11) showing the correspondence between the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 and the symbol. Obtain a symbol (“1st jackpot symbol”, “2nd jackpot symbol” or “3rd jackpot symbol”).

Next, in step S503, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines a fluctuation pattern (big hit effect pattern) at the time of a big hit. Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 does not use the stop pattern selection counter C3, but instead uses the values of the jackpot symbol counter C2 and the values of the variable type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503. Check in order and determine the fluctuation pattern.

That is, based on the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2, the decorative symbol in the third symbol display device 42 is displayed by the "stop pattern 3" of the normal jackpot (non-specific hit), or the third symbol display device 42. It is determined whether or not the decorative pattern is displayed by the "stop pattern 4" of the probabilistic jackpot (specific hit). The type of the "stop pattern 3" or the "stop pattern 4" thus determined is further determined based on the value of the first variable type counter CS1. That is, a rough variation pattern group of decorative symbols such as a reach type of decorative symbols (third symbol) such as normal reach, super reach, premium reach, etc. is determined. Subsequently, one variation pattern is determined based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2 from the variation pattern group of the rough decorative symbols determined in this way. For example, based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2, the elapsed time until the final stop decorative symbol (medium decorative symbol in the present embodiment) stops after the reach occurs is set to a predetermined time, and the finer decorative symbol is set. Determine the variation mode. In the case of a jackpot, the following relationships, that is, the relationship between the numerical value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 and the stop pattern, the relationship between the numerical value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern, and the numerical value of the second variation type counter CS2. The relationship with the stop symbol time is predetermined for each by a table for jackpots and the like.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S501 that it is not a big hit, in step S504, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 uses a fourth symbol to indicate an out-of-order symbol, that is, the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40. Set to the stop symbol to display the stop.

Next, in step S505, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines a variation pattern (disengagement effect pattern) at the time of disconnection, and sets the deviation variation pattern in the variation pattern designation command. Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 confirms the values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 in that order, and determines the variation pattern. decide.

That is, based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, after the reach of the decorative symbol on the third symbol display device 42 is generated, the final stop decorative symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach decorative symbol to stop. "Stop pattern 1", which is "Stop pattern 2" which is "Reach other than front and back" where the final stop decorative symbol stops at a position other than before and after the reach decorative symbol, and "Completely off" where reach does not occur. It is determined which stop pattern is to be used, which is "stop pattern 0". For example, when the determined stop pattern is, for example, "stop pattern 1" which is the front-rear out-of-reach reach, normal reach and super reach from the front-back out-of-reach fluctuation pattern group based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1. For example, a variation pattern in which the reach type of the decorative symbol (third symbol) is specified is determined, and a rough variation pattern group of the decorative symbol is determined. Here, it is assumed that the normal reach is decided. Subsequently, one variation pattern is further determined based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2 from the normal reach variation pattern group of the rough decorative pattern determined in this way. For example, based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2, the elapsed time until the final stop decorative symbol (medium decorative symbol in the present embodiment) stops after the reach occurs is set to a predetermined time, and the finer decorative symbol is set. Determine the variation mode. In the case of deviation, the following relationships, that is, the relationship between the numerical value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the stop pattern, the relationship between the numerical value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern, and the numerical value of the second variation type counter CS2. The relationship between the stop symbol time and the stop symbol time is pre-defined by a table or the like for disengagement.

In the present embodiment, as one of the above-mentioned tables for deviation, for example, at a low probability, in the state of the fluctuation time shortening function of the first symbol display device 40, at the start of fluctuation of the first symbol. Some are adopted when the number of pending operations of the first symbol is "0", and when the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is "0 to 201", it corresponds to no reach (completely off), and " "202-208" corresponds to the front-rear reach, and "209-238" corresponds to the reach other than the front-rear reach.

Subsequently, in step S506, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines the effect time addition, that is, the determination of the addition of the effect time of the jackpot variation pattern determined in step S503 or the deviation variation pattern determined in step S505. conduct. More specifically, based on the value of the variable type counter CS3, the decorative symbol (third symbol) of the intermediate decorative symbol row on the third symbol display device 42 stops slipping, and the effect time is increased (the middle decoration). A variation pattern is determined, including an increase in the time it takes for the decorative symbol in the symbol sequence to slip and appear to stop.

Further, in step S507, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 issues a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the jackpot variation pattern determined in step S503, or a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the deviation variation pattern determined in step S505. Set.

Subsequently, in step S508, when the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has passed through steps S502 and S503, the jackpot symbol of the first symbol display device 40 determined in step S502 (“first specific hit symbol”, When a decorative symbol designation command corresponding to "second specific hit symbol" or "non-specific hit symbol") is set and steps S504 and S505 have been passed, the first symbol display device 40 determined in step S504 Set the decorative symbol specification command corresponding to the out-of-order symbol.

Subsequently, in step S509, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the effect time addition designation command corresponding to the effect time addition determined in step S506.

Returning to the description of FIG. 18, if step S402 is YES, that is, if the variation display of the first symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step S407, and the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the variation time of the first symbol has elapsed. To determine. The fluctuation time of the first symbol is determined based on the fluctuation pattern and the effect time addition determined as described above using FIG. 19, that is, the fluctuation time of the first symbol is determined according to the fluctuation pattern of the first symbol. The fluctuation time of is determined, and when the fluctuation time elapses, step S407 is positively determined. If the fluctuation time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S408, and if the fluctuation time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S409.

Then, in step S408, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 updates the variation display of the first symbol on the first symbol display device 40. That is, the variable display of the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40 is continued, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S409, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 stops the variation display of the first symbol, and sets the stop symbol of the first symbol to the display symbol. That is, when the first jackpot symbol is determined in step S502 of FIG. 19, the first segment display unit 40a is represented by the first symbol after the variation display of the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40. Stop display. When the second jackpot symbol is determined in step S502 of FIG. 19, the first segment display unit 40a is stopped and displayed by the second symbol after the variation display of the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40. do. When the third jackpot symbol is determined in step S502 of FIG. 19, the first segment display unit 40a is stopped and displayed by the third symbol after the variation display of the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40. do. When the symbol is determined to be out of alignment in step S504 of FIG. 19, the first segment display unit 40a is stopped and displayed by the fourth symbol after the variation display of the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40 (. It means off).

Subsequently, in step S410, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets a total stop command for instructing the stop of the variation pattern of the decorative symbol (third symbol) that is variablely displayed on the third symbol display device 42. This process ends.

Next, the next game state setting process in step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S561, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the probability variation jackpot has been achieved based on the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2. If it is a probabilistic jackpot, the process proceeds to step S562, and if not, the process proceeds to step S564.

In addition, if it is a gaming machine that generates a probability change by passing through a specific area (V area) in the big winning opening 32a, the judgment as to whether or not it is a probability change jackpot is whether the game ball has entered the V area. You may judge by whether or not.

In the embodiment described later, the second aspect is when the first counting information based on the operation in the first aspect of the operating means is counted and the first number information counts the first predetermined number. In the state changed to the operation in, it is determined whether or not the predetermined condition based on the operation in the second aspect is achieved, and when the predetermined condition is achieved, the game ball is entered into the V area as a specific event. It caused an event that made it easier to ball. This specific event may suggest that the variable display effect being executed is an effect with a high expectation of a big hit. For example, when the continuous hit count information (first counting information) based on the continuous hitting operation of the decision button 81 is counted and the repeated hit count information counts a predetermined number of times (first predetermined number), the decision button 81 is pressed and held. In the state of being changed to the operation (operation in the second aspect), it is determined whether or not the energy full charge (predetermined condition) based on the long press operation is achieved, and when it is determined that the energy is full. It may be suggested that the production has a high expectation of a big hit. In addition, when it is determined that the predetermined condition of performing a one-shot special move is achieved in a state where the operation is changed to the long press operation of the enter button 81 and the operation is changed to the long press operation of the joystick, for example, the effect with high expectation of big hit is achieved. It may suggest that there is.

In step S562, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 of the special figure 1 and special figure 2 jackpot lottery table shown in FIG. 11 to the value at the time of high probability, and proceeds to step S563. In step S563, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets a high-probability support state transition command and ends this process. As a result, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 refers to the value at the time of high probability as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 at the next jackpot determination.

In step S564, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not a normal jackpot has been achieved based on the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2. If it is a normal jackpot, the process proceeds to step S565, and if not, the process ends.

In step S565, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the special figure 1 and special figure 2 jackpot lottery tables to the value at the time of low probability, and proceeds to step S566. As a result, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 refers to the value at the time of low probability as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 at the next jackpot determination.

In step S566, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the reference destination in step S564 is the special figure 1 jackpot lottery table. If the reference destination is the special figure 1 jackpot lottery table, the process proceeds to step S567, and if not, the process proceeds to step S569. In step S567, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets a low probability support state transition command. The low-probability support state transition command is a command indicating the occurrence of 100 time-saving states after the end of the normal jackpot round game.

In step S568, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the reference destination in step S564 is the special figure 2 jackpot lottery table. If the reference destination is the special figure 2 jackpot lottery table, the process proceeds to step S569, and if not, the present process ends. In step S569, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets a low probability state transition command. The low-probability state transition command is a command indicating that there is no time reduction after the end of the jackpot round, which is usually a jackpot.

Next, the opening / closing process of the large winning opening in step S206 described above will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a large winning opening opening / closing process.

In step S571, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the round start flag is turned on. If the round start flag is on, the process proceeds to step S572, otherwise the process ends. In step S572, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the nth round (or the first round if it is the first). If it is the start timing of the nth round, the process proceeds to step S573, otherwise the process ends.

In step S573, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 opens the large winning opening 32a and proceeds to step S574. Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 turns on the solenoid to open the door of the large winning opening 32a in the variable winning device 32. In step S574, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the nth round. The end timing of each round, that is, the opening time of the big winning opening 32a is predetermined based on the value of the big hit symbol counter C2. When the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is 90 to 99, the opening time of the jackpot 32a is set to a short time so that it is difficult for the game ball to enter. In the case of other values of the jackpot symbol counter C2, a sufficient time is set for the upper limit number of game balls to enter.

If it is the end timing of the nth round in step S574, the process proceeds to step S575, otherwise the process ends. In step S575, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 closes the large winning opening 32a and proceeds to step S576. Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 turns off the solenoid in order to close the door of the large winning opening 32a in the variable winning device 32. The closing time of the large winning opening 32a between each round, that is, the interval time between rounds is predetermined.

In step S576, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not it is the final round. If it is the final round, the process proceeds to step S577, otherwise the process returns to step S572. In step S577, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 turns off the round start flag and ends this process.

Next, the right-handed error determination process in step S208A described above will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a right-handed error determination process.

In step S581, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the gaming state is a low probability (normal) state. In the low probability state, the game is played by left-handed, so right-handed is treated as an error. If it is in a low probability state, the process proceeds to step S582, otherwise the process ends. In step S582, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate (through gate) which is the starting port 34 for the normal symbol. The starting port 34 for a normal symbol is arranged in the right game area 30ar. Since the game ball launched by right-handed hitting passes through the starting port 34 for a normal symbol, it is determined whether or not right-handed hitting is performed depending on whether or not it has passed through the gate. If it has passed through the gate, the process proceeds to step S583, and if not, the process proceeds to step S590, which will be described later.

In step S583, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 adds 1 to the gate passage counter that counts the game balls that have passed through the normal symbol start port 34, and proceeds to step S584. As will be described later, it is determined whether or not the execution condition of the right-handed error notification is satisfied by the numerical value added by the gate passage counter. In step S584, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the right-handed error flag is 1. If the right-handed error flag is not 1, that is, if a right-handed error has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S585, and if the right-handed error flag is 1, that is, if a right-handed error has already occurred, the process proceeds to step S589.

In step S585, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the second game ball has passed through the normal symbol start port 34. It is an execution condition of the right-handed error notification that the second game ball passes through the starting port 34 for the normal symbol. If the second game ball has passed, the process proceeds to step S586, and if not, the process ends. In step S586, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 activates the right-handed error timer and proceeds to step S587.

In step S589, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 ends the activated right-handed error notification timer, newly activates the right-handed error notification timer, and proceeds to step S587. That is, when it is determined in step S584 described above that a right-handed error has already occurred, even if one game ball is detected by the gate passage counter, a new right-handed error notification is executed. To. Therefore, when the player continues to hit right with a low probability, the right-handed error notification is also continuously executed.

In step S587, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the right-handed error flag to 1, and proceeds to step S588. In step S588, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets a right-handed error command and ends this process.

In steps S590 to S593, it is determined whether or not the end condition of the right-handed error notification is successful. That is, in step S590, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the right-handed error flag is 1. If the right-handed error flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S591, otherwise the process ends. In step S591, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the right-handed error notification timer has expired the notification time count. If the notification time count has expired, the process proceeds to step S592, otherwise the process ends.

In step S592, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the right-handed error flag to 0 in order to end the right-handed error notification, and proceeds to step S593. Further, in step S593, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets a right-handed error resolution command and ends this process.

Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the main process of the payout control device 311, and this main process is started by resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step S901, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed. Specifically, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 sets the stack address and the interrupt mode. Further, in step S902, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 permits RAM access, and in step S903, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 sets the external interrupt vector.

After that, in step S904, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 determines whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area of the RAM 513. Further, in step S905, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 calculates the RAM determination value, and in the following step S906, whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved when the power is turned off, that is, the backup is effective. Determine the sex. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of RAM 513. It is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup based on whether or not the keywords written in the predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly stored.

Subsequently, in step S907, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 performs the initial setting of the RAM 513 at the time of power recovery. Specifically, when the main control device 261 is initialized, a payout initialization command is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 is the payout initial from the main control device 261. Upon receiving the conversion command, the RAM 513 is initially set at the time of power recovery in this step S907. That is, the RAM area is initialized, and the control of paying out the game ball is started.

Therefore, when the RAM erasing switch 323 is pressed (ON) when the power is turned on, the main control device 261 is initialized, and the payout initialization command is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311. Therefore, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 performs the initialization process of the RAM 513 based on the payout initialization command from the main control device 261.

Subsequently, in step S908, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 performs the initial setting of the peripheral device of the CPU 511. Specifically, the CPU peripheral device is a timer control device called a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit), and the CTC is set to a predetermined value to generate a timer interrupt every 2 milliseconds (ms).

Subsequently, in step S909, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 sets the interrupt permission and shifts to the payout control process described later.

On the other hand, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set in step S904, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) in step S906, the payout control device 311 also similarly. The CPU 511 clears the entire area of the RAM 513 to "0" (step S910), and performs an initialization process (step S911).

Next, the flow of the payout control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In FIG. 29, in step S1001, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 acquires and stores a command from the main control device 261. Here, as the command to be stored, 15 types of prize ball commands (15 types of prize ball commands for instructing 1 to 15 payouts) and a payout control start to the payout control device 311 are instructed. There are 17 types of commands, including a payout return command for the purpose and a payout initialization command for instructing the payout initialization to the payout control device 311.

In step S1002, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 determines whether or not the payout permission has been received. That is, it is determined whether or not the payout return command or the prize ball command has been received. Further, in step S1003, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 checks the state return switch (not shown) and executes the state return operation when it is determined that the state return operation has started.

After that, in step S1004, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 executes the setting of the lower plate full tank state or the lower plate full tank release state according to the change in the state of the lower plate 15. That is, when the lower plate 15 is full, the lower plate 15 is determined by the detection signal of the lower plate full switch, and when the lower plate is full, the lower plate full state is set and the lower plate is not full. , Execute the setting of the lower plate full tank release state.

Further, in step S1005, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 executes the setting of the state without the tank ball or the state without the tank ball according to the change in the state of the tank ball. That is, the state without a tank ball is determined by the detection signal of the switch without a tank ball, the setting of the state without a tank ball is executed when there is no tank ball, and when the state without a tank ball disappears, the state without a tank ball is released. Perform the settings.

After that, in step S1006, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 determines whether or not there is a state of notifying, and if there is a state of notifying, the 7-segment LED provided in the payout control device 311 notifies.

In steps S1007 to S1009, the prize ball payout process is executed. In this case, if the prize balls cannot be paid out and the total number of prize balls stored in step S1001 is not "0" (both steps S1007 and S1008 are NO), the process proceeds to step S1009 and the prize ball control process (described later). FIG. 30) is started. If the prize balls cannot be paid out or the total number of prize balls is 0 (YES in any of steps S1007 and S1008), the process proceeds to the process of paying out the prize balls.

After that, in steps S1010 to S1012, the ball rental payout process is executed. In this case, if the ball lending cannot be paid out and the ball lending request from the card unit is received (NO in step S1010, YES in S1011), the process proceeds to step S1012 and the ball lending control process (described later). FIG. 31) is started. Further, if the ball lending is not payable or the ball lending request is not received (YES in step S1010 or NO in S1011), the subsequent vibe motor control (step S1013) is executed.

In step S1013, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 executes control (vibe motor control) of the vibrator 360 (see FIG. 3). After that, in step S1014, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 determines whether or not a power failure has occurred. If a power failure occurs, the process proceeds to step S1015, and if not, the process returns to step S1001. In step S1015, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 sets the power-off occurrence information, and in step S1016, the RAM determination value is created. After that, it goes into an infinite loop in case the power is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed.

Here, in the prize ball control process shown in FIG. 30, in step S1101, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the payout of the prize ball. In the following step S1102, it is determined whether or not the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal based on the detection result of the payout rotation sensor. If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is not normal, the process proceeds to step S1103, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the retry process, the payout motor 358a is stopped, and then the process returns to the payout control process of FIG. 29.

If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal, the process proceeds to step S1104, and it is determined from the detection result of the payout count switch whether or not the game ball is normally counted. If the count of the game balls is not normal, the process proceeds to step S1105, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the retry process, the payout motor 358a is stopped, and then the process returns to the payout control process of FIG. 29.

Further, if the count of the game balls is normal, the process proceeds to step S1106, and it is determined whether or not the count number of the game balls by the payout count switch reaches the total number of prize balls and the payout is completed. If the payout is completed, the payout motor 358a is stopped in step S1107, and then the process returns to the payout control process of FIG. 29.

Further, in the ball lending control process shown in FIG. 31, in step S1201, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the payout of the lending ball. In the following step S1202, whether or not the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal is determined based on the detection result of the payout rotation sensor. If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is not normal, the process proceeds to step S1203, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the retry process, the payout motor 358a is stopped, and then the process returns to the payout control process of FIG. 29.

If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal, the process proceeds to step S1204, and whether or not the game ball is normally counted is determined by the detection result of the payout count switch. If the count of the game balls is not normal, the process proceeds to step S1205, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the retry process, the payout motor 358a is stopped, and then the process returns to the payout control process of FIG. 29.

Further, if the count of the game balls is normal, the process proceeds to step S1206, and it is determined whether or not the count number of the game balls by the payout count switch reaches a predetermined number of rented balls (25 pieces) and the payout is completed. If the payout is completed, the payout motor 358a is stopped in step S1207, and then the process returns to the payout control process of FIG. 29.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 311, and the state of the payout control device 311 when the power is turned off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like is stored in the backup area of the RAM 513 due to the NMI interrupt. Similarly, power is supplied from the power supply unit 541 so that the processing of the payout control device 311 can be executed for a predetermined time after the power failure signal S1 is output. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal S1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control during execution. The NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 27 is started. The contents are as described with reference to FIG. 27.

Next, the main process and the normal process of the sub control device 262 will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the main process executed by the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262, and this main process is started by resetting at the time of turning on the power. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal process executed by the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262.

First, in step S2001, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 executes the initial setting process accompanying the power-on. Specifically, port setting (port I / O switching and initial value output), timer setting (1 millisecond interval timer, liquid crystal command strobe output timer), and interrupt setting (subcommand strobe interrupt) are performed. ..

Further, in step S2002, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the power cutoff process is incomplete. Specifically, whether or not the various lamps (annular illumination unit 102, central illumination unit 103, etc.) of the front frame set 14 of the pachinko machine 10 are all turned off and the speaker is in a mute state. Determine. Then, if the power cutoff process is not completed, the process proceeds to step S2004, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2003.

Subsequently, in step S2003, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the RAM of the sub control device 262 is destroyed, and if it is destroyed, the process proceeds to step S2004, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2007. .. In step S2004, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs a RAM area read / write check of the sub control device 262. Then, in step S2005, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the RAM of the sub control device 262 is normal. If the RAM of the sub control device 262 is normal, the process proceeds to step S2006, and if it is abnormal, the process proceeds to step S2012. In step S2006, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 writes the RAM destruction check data for each area of the RAM 553, and sets the RAM destruction check data for determining that the data is destroyed if there is a read abnormality.

Then, in step S2007, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the power is turned on after the power is turned off. If the power is turned on after the power is turned off, the process proceeds to step S2008, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2009.

In step S2008, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 clears the RAM area other than the unprocessed RAM area. Specifically, the unprocessed RAM area is an area for storing information that causes a problem in the system when the data is cleared, and is an area of information that is desired to be retained except when the RAM area is destroyed. For example, a subcommand reception buffer, power-on information, and the like can be mentioned. When the power of the main control device 261 is turned off and the sub control device 262 is reset (when the power cutoff notification command is received from the main control device 261), the RAM area other than the unprocessed RAM area is cleared.

In step S2009, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the interrupt permission. In step S2010, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the initial value of the RAM of the sub control device 262. In step S2011, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the effect initialization flag to "1" and shifts to the normal process shown in FIG. 33.

In step S2012, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 notifies the RAM abnormality and enters an infinite loop. For example, notification such as turning on a predetermined lamp unconditionally can be mentioned.

As shown in FIG. 33, in step S2101, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed from the start of normal processing. If 1 ms or more has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2102, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2110.

In step S2102, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the lamp output process. Specifically, the lamp output is performed according to the variation pattern effect of the decorative symbol (third symbol) on the third symbol display device 42.

In step S2103, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs a power-on notification. Specifically, a power-on command is used to notify for 30 seconds. Specifically, as the power-on notification, the third symbol marking device 42 displays an image notifying the power-on, and the illumination unit 300 lights the lamp in a pattern notifying the power-on.

In step S2104, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs a customer waiting effect. Specifically, the title / still image is switched. That is, a so-called demo screen is displayed.

In step S2105, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the hold quantity display update process of the first symbol change. Specifically, this hold quantity display update process is a process for displaying the hold lamp 40c of the first symbol display device 40 on the third symbol display device 42 as well.

In step S2106, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs frame button input monitoring / effect processing. Specifically, this frame button input monitoring / effect processing is a pachinko machine provided with a frame button that can be pressed by the player (for example, the upper selection button 71, the lower selection button 72, the frame button 80, etc. shown in FIG. 1). This is for producing a machine-specific effect by pressing the frame button on the machine. Therefore, this process is not necessary for pachinko machines that do not have such a frame button.

In step S2107, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the lamp editing process. Specifically, the process of editing the lamp lighting pattern in the illumination unit 300 corresponding to (synchronizing with) the variation pattern production of the decorative symbol in the third symbol display device 42 is performed.

In step S2108, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs sound editing / output processing. Specifically, a process of sounding (synchronizing) a sound corresponding to (synchronizing) the variation pattern effect of the decorative symbol on the third symbol display device 42 (outputting voice, music, sound effect, etc.) is performed.

In step S2109, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the effect execution management process. Specifically, time management or the like for synchronizing the lamp, the sound, and the liquid crystal display (the variation pattern effect of the decorative symbol on the third symbol display device 42) is performed.

When this liquid crystal effect (for example, the reach display effect of the jackpot / off super reach A to E) is synchronized with the effect of operating the movable illuminated portion in the game board 30 described later as a movable accessory, the display variation An accessory operation pattern specification command corresponding to the pattern specification command is set and transmitted to the drive control unit that operates the movable accessory.

In step S2110, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs a process of updating the value of a random number for determining the variation pattern of the decorative symbol to be performed by the third symbol display device 42 and the effect of the voice lamp. Specifically, this random number takes a value of, for example, "0" to "32767", and returns to "0" when the upper limit value "37268" is reached.

In step S2111, when the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 receives a command from the main control device 261, the CPU 551 performs a process corresponding to each command.

Specifically, when the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 receives the fluctuation pattern designation command from the main control device 261, the CPU 551 transmits a display command obtained by converting the fluctuation pattern designation command into a command to the display control device 45. The fluctuation pattern specification command may be output as it is. Further, when the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 receives the decorative symbol designation command from the main control device 261, the CPU 551 transmits a stop display command obtained by converting the decorative symbol designation command into a command to the display control device 45. Further, when a notice command is generated in addition to the stop display command in the command conversion of the decorative symbol designation command, the notice command is also transmitted to the display control device 45. As this notice command, for example, the presence or absence of the appearance of a school of fish as a notice can be mentioned. Further, when the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 receives the total stop command (confirmation command) from the main control device 261, the CPU 551 transmits the total stop command to the display control device 45 as it is.

Further, when the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 receives the fluctuation pattern designation command from the main control device 261, the lamp lighting command obtained by converting the fluctuation pattern designation command into a command is used to control the lighting unit 300. Send to the device. Further, the voice output command obtained by converting the fluctuation pattern designation command into a command is transmitted to the sound output control device 46 that controls the sound output unit 24.

In step S2112, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs a command output process for outputting a command to the display control device 45 or the like. The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 transmits various commands such as the above-mentioned display command and stop display command to the display control device 45.

In step S2113, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the RAM of the sub control device 262 is destroyed. If the RAM is not destroyed, the process returns to step S1401, and if the RAM is destroyed, an infinite loop is entered.

Here, the customer waiting effect processing of step S2104 shown in FIG. 33 by the sub control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a customer waiting effect process by the sub control device 262.

In step S2221, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not 30 seconds or more have passed since the power was turned on. If 30 seconds have elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2222, and if not, this process ends. In step S2222, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets a command for displaying the normal screen in the third symbol display device 42, and proceeds to step S2223. In step S2223, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the normal screen display flag to 1.

In step S2224, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the launch operation command has been received. If it has not been received, the process proceeds to step S2225, and if it has been received, the process proceeds to step S2229.

In step S2225, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the waiting time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the normal screen is displayed. If 60 seconds have elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2226, and if not, this process ends. In step S2226, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets a demo screen display command for displaying the demo screen on the third symbol display device 42, and proceeds to steps S2227 and S2228.

The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the demo screen display flag to 1 in step S2227, sets the normal screen display flag to 0 in step S2228, and ends this process.

In step S2229 described above, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the demo screen display flag is 1. If it is 1, the process proceeds to step S2230, otherwise the process ends. In step S2230, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets a normal screen display command for displaying the normal screen in the third symbol display device 42, and proceeds to steps S2231 and S2232.

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the normal screen display flag to 1 in step S2231 and sets the demo screen display flag to 0 in step S2322 to end this process.

Here, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing of step S2106 shown in FIG. 33 by the sub control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing by the sub control device 262.

As shown in FIG. 35, the sub control device 262 performs frame button input monitoring / effect processing. Specifically, first, in step S2301, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the decision button input monitoring / effect processing. Specifically, when the player is required to operate the decision button 81 to instruct the execution of a predetermined effect on the display screen 42a, the predetermined effect is responded to by the player pressing the decision button 81. It is displayed that the execution is instructed. For example, when the press of the enter button 81 is requested, the image corresponding to the enter button 81 and the character image of "press!" Are displayed.

In step S2302, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs selection button input monitoring / effect processing, and ends this processing. Specifically, when the player is required to operate the selection buttons 82 and 83 to instruct a predetermined selection on the display screen 42a, the player responds to the selection operation of the selection buttons 82 and 83 by the player. Indicates that a given selection is being made. For example, when requesting that the selection buttons 82 and 83 be pressed, an image to be selected (for example, a plurality of character images) that prompts the user to press the selection buttons 82 and 83 and "Please select a character". A character image is displayed.

Next, the details of the above-mentioned decision button input monitoring / effect processing will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the decision button input monitoring / effect processing.

In step S2311, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 monitors the input of the enter button 81. In step S2312, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 proceeds to the determination step of step S2313 or lower when the press of the decision button 81 is detected, and ends the present process otherwise.

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 has a normal screen display flag of 1 (step S2313), a demo screen display flag of 1 (step S2314), and a high-speed fluctuation flag of 1. (Step S2315), whether or not the jackpot opening flag is 1 (step S2316), and whether or not the jackpot ending flag is 1, and if neither is 1, the process proceeds to step S2321.

In step S2321, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the button suggestion effect flag is 1. The button suggestion effect flag is set to 1 during the period in which the image requesting the press of the enter button 81 is displayed in the button suggestion effect, and is set to 0 when the period ends (the request to press the enter button 81 ends). .. If the button suggestion effect flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S2322. If not, this process ends. In step S2322, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines that the decision button 81 has been pressed during the display period of the press request image of the decision button 81, sets a button suggestion effect execution command, and ends this process. ..

Return to step S2313. In the determination step from step S2313 to step S2318, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not it is the timing at which the volume change operation can be executed.

Specifically, in the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262, the normal screen display flag is 1 (the normal screen is being displayed) in step S2313, or the demo screen display flag is 1 (the demo screen is being displayed) in step S2314. ), Or if the high-speed changing flag is 1 (the main decorative symbol SZ is changing at high speed) in step S2315, the process proceeds to step S2320. In step S2320, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets a display specific operation screen display command for displaying the specific operation screen. The specific operation screen is a screen for operating the volume of the sound output from the sound output unit 24.

If the jackpot opening flag is 1 (during the opening effect) in step S2316, the process proceeds to step S2317. In step S2317, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not 5 seconds have passed from the start of the opening effect in order to determine whether or not it is time to display the specific operation screen during the opening effect. .. If 5 seconds have passed, the process proceeds to step S2320, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2318.

If the jackpot ending flag is 1 (during the ending effect) in step S2318, the process proceeds to step S2319. In step S2319, 3 seconds before the end of the ending effect elapses in order to determine whether or not the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 cannot display the specific operation screen (for example, the volume operation screen) during the ending effect. Determine if you did. If 3 seconds have not passed before the end of the ending effect, the process proceeds to step S2320 described above, and the display specific operation screen display command is set. If this is not the case, the process proceeds to step S2321 described above, but since it is determined whether or not to proceed, this process is terminated as it is.

Next, the details of the selection button input monitoring / effect processing described above will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the selection button input monitoring / effect processing.

In step S2331, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 monitors the input of the selection buttons 82 and 83. In step S2332, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the pressing of the selection buttons 82 and 83 is detected. If the press is detected, the process proceeds to step S2333, and if not, the process ends.

In step S2333, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the specific operation screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 42. If it is displayed, the process proceeds to step S2334, otherwise the process proceeds to step S2335. In step S2334, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets a selection operation command that reflects the result of the selection operation on the specific operation screen. Specifically, the volume level is increased or decreased.

In step S2335, it is determined whether or not the button suggestion effect selection screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 42. If it is displayed, the process proceeds to step S2334, and if not, the process ends. In step S2334, similarly to the above, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets a selection operation command that reflects the result of the selection operation on the button suggestion effect operation screen. Specifically, one of the options is selected on the suggestion effect screen in which the options (such as the selection of the player PY described above using FIG. 14) are shown. This is the end of this process.

Next, the sound editing / output management process of step S2108 shown in FIG. 33 by the sub control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the sound editing / output management process by the sub control device 262.

In step S2341, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control device 261. If the command is received, the process proceeds to step S2342, and if not, the process ends. In step S2342, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the received command is a variation pattern command. If it is a variation pattern command, the process proceeds to step S2343, otherwise the process proceeds to step S2347. If the command requires sound editing, it may be a command other than the fluctuation pattern command, for example, an opening command at the start of a jackpot round.

In step S2343, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs an effect sound setting process for setting an effect sound to be output in the variation display effect executed by the variation pattern command, and proceeds to step S2344. The type of effect sound is set by the effect sound setting process. In step S2344, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs a volume change operation reading process for reading the current volume, and proceeds to step S2345. Since the volume of the effect can be changed by the player by operation, the current volume set by the volume change operation is read. In step S2345, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the volume of the effect sound based on the read current volume, and proceeds to step S2346. In step S2346, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the main sound processing for driving the speaker with the set effect sound and volume, and ends this processing.

Steps S2347 to S2352 are processes for setting an effect sound other than the effect sound set based on the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern command or the like. In step S2347, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not a right-handed error command (see step S588 described above) has been received from the main control device 261. If the right-handed error command is received, the process proceeds to step S2348, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2351. In step S2348, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs a right-handed error notification sound setting process for setting a right-handed error notification sound, and proceeds to step S2349. The type of right-handed error notification sound is set by the right-handed error notification sound setting process. The type of right-handed error notification sound is, for example, a message sound such as "Please return to the left." Or "Please return to the left. Left-handed is prohibited." The types of right-handed error notification sounds can be classified according to the number of times a right-handed error command is received.

In step S2349, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 reads the set volume and proceeds to step S2350 in the same manner as in step S2344. Since the volume may be changed after the start of the variable display effect, the set volume at the time of executing the right-handed error notification is read. In step S2350, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets a volume that is, for example, one level higher than the set volume, and proceeds to the sound output process of step S2346 described above. As a result, the right-handed error notification can be performed at a volume louder than the effect sound of the variable display effect executed at the time of the right-handed error notification.

In step S2351, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the right-handed error resolution command has been received. If the right-handed error resolution command (see step S593 described above) has been received, it is determined that the player has stopped right-handed in a low probability state, so the process proceeds to step S2352, otherwise this process is performed. To finish. In step S2352, in order to end the right-handed error notification, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 performs a right-handed error notification sound stop process and ends this process.

Next, the effect execution management process of step S2109 shown in FIG. 33 by the sub control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. 39.

In step S2401, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs a read-ahead variation pattern designation command reception processing. Hereinafter, the processing at the time of receiving the look-ahead fluctuation pattern specification command will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing a read-ahead variation pattern designation command reception processing by the sub-control device 262.

In step S2411, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the read-ahead variation pattern designation command has been received. If the look-ahead variation pattern designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2412, and if not, this process ends.

In step S2412, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the reserved ball storage area designation command has been received. If the hold ball storage area designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2413, and if not, this process ends.

In step S2413, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 stores the read-ahead variation pattern designation command received this time in the hold ball storage area designated by the hold ball storage area designation command. The RAM 553 of the sub control device 262 is provided with a hold ball storage area corresponding to the hold ball storage area (execution area and the first to fourth hold areas) provided in the RAM 503 of the main control device 261. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 stores the received command in any of the first to fourth hold areas designated by the look-ahead variation pattern designation command.

In step S2414, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 refers to the hold display pattern selection table and determines the hold display pattern corresponding to the look-ahead variation pattern designation command received this time. In step S2415, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 converts the determined hold display pattern into a display hold display command, and sends this display hold display command and the above-mentioned hold ball storage area designation command to the display control device 45. Set to output. This is the end of this process.

<Open / close mode (big hit) display setting process>
Returning to the effect management execution process shown in FIG. 39, in step S2402, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the open / close mode (big hit) display setting process. This open / close mode (big hit) display setting process will be described below with reference to FIG. 41.

In step S2431, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 proceeds to step S2432 if it has received the opening command, and proceeds to step S2434 otherwise.

In step S2432, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets a display opening command.

In step S2434, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 proceeds to step S2435 if the ending command has been received, and ends the present process otherwise.

In step S2435, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the display ending command and ends this process.

<Variable display mode setting process>
Returning to the effect management execution process shown in FIG. 39, in step S2403, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the variation display mode setting process. This variation display mode setting process will be described below with reference to FIG. 42.

In step S2471, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 proceeds to step S2472 if it has received the variation pattern designation command, and proceeds to step S2480 if it has not received it.

In step S2472, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 executes a process of shifting the data stored in the reserved ball storage area provided in the RAM 553. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth hold areas of the hold ball storage area toward the execution area side. Specifically, the data in each area such as 1st hold area → execution area, 2nd hold area → 1st hold area, 3rd hold area → 2nd hold urea, 4th hold area → 3rd hold area. Is shifted.

In step S2473, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets a display variation pattern designation command for displaying the decorative symbol variation corresponding to the variation pattern designation command shifted to the execution area of the RAM 553 on the third symbol display device 42. Then, the process proceeds to step S2474. The display variation pattern specification command is, for example, jackpot normal reach A, B, jackpot super reach A to E, front and back out normal reach A, B, front and back out out super reach A to D, out of front and back, normal reach A, B, and out of front and back. This is a display command for executing decorative symbol variation display with variation patterns such as reach A to D and complete deviation A to F.

In step S2474, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command is a command with a button suggestion effect. Specifically, in the variation pattern designation command, the presence / absence of the button suggestion effect is determined by using the value of the variation type counter CS2 and the main decorative symbol variation pattern selection table. If there is a button suggestion effect, the process proceeds to step S2475, and if not, this process ends.

In step S2475, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets a display button suggestion effect designation command for displaying the button suggestion effect on the third symbol display device 42, and proceeds to step S2476. In step S2476, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the button suggestion effect flag to 1.

In step S2477, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the decorative symbol designation command has been received. If the decorative symbol designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2478, and if not, this process ends. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the end timing of the fluctuation time corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern designation command has been reached, instead of determining whether or not the decoration symbol designation command has been received. You may. In this case, when the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 receives the fluctuation pattern designation command, the fluctuation time is read from the command, the fluctuation time is measured by the timer, and the end timing of the fluctuation time is grasped.

In step S2478, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets a stop display command (confirmation command) for stopping (confirming) the variation display of the decorative symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 42, and performs this process. finish.

<Variable display mode setting process>
Returning to the effect management execution process shown in FIG. 39, in step S2404, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the next game state display mode setting process. The next game state display mode setting process will be described below with reference to FIG. 43.

In step S2491, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the high probability / support state transition command has been received. If it has been received, the process proceeds to step S2492, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2493.

In step S2492, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 displays the third symbol display device 42 to explicitly or implicitly notify the player of the transition to the high-probability / support state. Set the migration command and end this process.

In step S2493, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the low probability / support state transition command has been received. If it has been received, the process proceeds to step S2494, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2495.

In step S2494, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 displays the third symbol display device 42 to explicitly or implicitly notify the player of the transition to the low-probability / support state. Set the migration command and end this process.

In step S2495, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the low probability state transition command has been received. If the low-probability state transition command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2494, and if not, this process ends.

In step S2494, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a display low-probability state transition command that displays the third symbol display device 42 to explicitly or implicitly notify the player of the transition to the low-probability state. Then, this process is terminated.

<Right-handed error notification display mode setting process>
Returning to the effect management execution process shown in FIG. 39, in step S2405, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs a right-handed error notification display mode setting process. The right-handed error notification display mode setting process will be described below with reference to FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a right-handed error notification display mode setting process by the sub control device 262.

In step S2501, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not a right-handed error command has been received. If the right-handed error flag is received, the process proceeds to step S2502. If not, the process proceeds to step S2504. In step S2402, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines the display mode of the right-handed error notification, and proceeds to step S2503. That is, the display content and display priority of the right-handed error notification are read. The display content of the right-handed error notification is a message display corresponding to the above-mentioned right-handed error notification sound, for example, "Please return to the left." Or "Please return to the left. Left-handed is prohibited." Is. Since the display priority of the right-handed error notification is set to the highest, the right-handed error notification is displayed in the foreground of the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42.

In step S2503, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets a display right-handed error display command for displaying the right-handed error notification on the third symbol display device 42, and ends this process.

Steps S2504 and S2505 are processes for ending the display of the right-handed error notification. In step S2504, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the right-handed error resolution command has been received. If the right-handed error resolution command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2505, otherwise the process ends. The timing to receive the right-handed error resolution command may be during the fluctuation time of one fluctuation display, but if the player does not stop right-handed within the fluctuation time of one fluctuation display, the next fluctuation display It may span the fluctuation time of. In step S2505, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 stops the right-handed error display and ends this process in order to end the display of the right-handed error notification.

Next, the normal processing of the display control device 45 and the switching processing of the display mode and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a normal process of the display control device. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing a switching process such as a display mode by the display control device.

As shown in FIG. 45, in step S3001, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs a command input process for inputting various commands transmitted from the sub control device 262, and proceeds to step S3002. Examples of these various commands include a display command, a stop display command, a display opening command, a display ending command, a demo start command, a symbol column fluctuation start command, and the like.

In step S3002, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs a display mode switching process (display of symbol sequence variation, jackpot opening, jackpot ending, etc.), and proceeds to step S3003. Here, the switching process of the display mode and the like will be described with reference to FIG. 46.

As shown in FIG. 46, in step S3101, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not a normal screen display command has been received. If the normal screen display command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3102, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3103. The display command is a command transmitted from the sub control device 262, and is a command for permitting the display of the normal screen on the third symbol display device 42 when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on, or after the jackpot round is completed. This is a command for returning the display mode of the third symbol display device 42 to the normal mode for displaying the normal screen.

In step S3102, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays a normal screen on the third symbol display device 42. As shown in FIG. 9, the normal screen is a screen in which the main decorative symbol SZ and the sub-decorative symbol FZ are stopped and displayed in a manner that does not form a jackpot combination on the front side of the normal background image. Normally, the background image is stored in the video RAM 524 of the display control device 45.

In step S3103, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the demo screen display command has been received. If the demo screen display command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3104, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3105. The demo screen display command is a command received from the sub control device 262, and is a command for instructing the player to switch from the normal screen to the demo screen when a predetermined time elapses without firing the game ball. Is.

In step S3104, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays a demo screen on the third symbol display device 42. The demo screen is an image that introduces the method of the game and the features of the game, and is stored in the video RAM 524 of the display control device 45.

In step S3105, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the display variation pattern designation command has been received. If the display variation pattern designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3106, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3107.

In step S3106, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 starts the fluctuation of the main decorative symbol SZ and the sub-decorative symbol FZ of the three decorative symbol rows L, M, and R shown in FIG. 9, and finally stops and displays the variable display. The display control of the third symbol display device 42 is performed so as to perform the above. Specifically, the variable display control of the main decorative symbol SZ and the sub-decorative symbol FZ is a control for executing steps S3003 to S3007, which will be described later. The symbol sequence variation display process executed in step S3106 will be described later.

In step S3107, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the display specific operation screen display command set in step S2320 described above has been received. If the display specific operation screen display command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3108, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3109.

In step S3108, the CPU 521 of the display control device performs a specific operation screen display process described later.

In step S3109, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the display opening command has been received. If the display opening command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3110, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3111.

In step S3110, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 controls the display of the third symbol display device 42 so as to start displaying the jackpot opening image. The jackpot opening image is an image displayed after the decorative symbol variation display is confirmed by the jackpot combination, and is an image that congratulates the jackpot winning. Further, when the display of the jackpot opening is finished, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 continuously starts displaying the jackpot round image. The jackpot round image is an image displayed during the jackpot round, and is, for example, a privilege image that can be seen only during the jackpot round. The jackpot opening image and the jackpot round image are stored in the video RAM 524 of the display control device 45. The jackpot opening round display process executed in step S3110 will be described later.

In step S3111, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the display ending command has been received. If the display ending command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3112, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3113. In step S3112, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 controls the display of the third symbol display device 42 so as to start displaying the jackpot ending image. The jackpot ending image is stored in the video RAM of the display control device 45. The jackpot ending display process executed in step S3112 will be described later.

In step S3113, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the display high probability / support state transition command has been received. If the display high probability / support state transition command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3114, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3115.

In step S3114, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 executes the high-probability / support state transition display process described later.

In step S3115, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the display low probability / support state transition command has been received. If the low-probability display / support state transition command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3116, otherwise the process ends.

In step S3116, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 executes the display low probability / support state transition process described later. This is the end of this process.

Returning to FIG. 45, in step S3003, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines the stop symbol and proceeds to step S3004. Specifically, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines a predetermined stop symbol from the selectable stop symbol group determined by the display variation pattern designation command received from the sub control device 262. If it is a jackpot fluctuation pattern, a predetermined stop symbol is determined from among odd-numbered symbols or even-numbered symbols. If it is an out-of-bounds fluctuation pattern, a predetermined stop symbol is determined from the front-back out-of-bounds symbol, the out-of-front and out-of-bounds symbols, and the complete out-of-bounds symbol.

In step S3004, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines the variation display mode of the decorative symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 42, and proceeds to step S3005.

Specifically, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines the variation display mode of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern designation command received from the sub control device 262. For example, when the command indicates the jackpot normal reach A, the variable display mode corresponding to the jackpot normal reach A is determined. Each of the above-mentioned variable display modes is stored in the program ROM of the display control device 45.

In step S3005, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines an auxiliary effect (display mode of a suggestion image such as a message provided and displayed to the player), and proceeds to step S3006. The suggestion image is an image suggesting that the symbol variation display executed by the third symbol display device 42 may be a jackpot combination.

In step S3006, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 controls the display image of the third symbol display device 42.

Specifically, if the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the symbol variation display image on the third symbol display device 42, the decorative symbol rows L and M according to the variation display mode determined in step S3004. , R, the third symbol display device 42 controls the display so that the symbol variation display of the main decorative symbol SZ and the sub-decorative symbol FZ is finally stopped and displayed according to the stop symbol determined in step S3003. ..

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 also performs display image control for displaying a jackpot round image on the third symbol display device 42. If it is a jackpot round image, an image showing the current number of rounds is displayed together with a privilege image displayed during the jackpot round. Further, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 also performs display image control for displaying the resident image on the third symbol display device 42, if there is a resident image displayed on the third symbol display device 42.

In step S3007, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs the hold display control for executing the hold display in the third symbol display device 42.

Specifically, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 executes a process corresponding to the display hold display command received from the sub control device 262. When the display hold display command received from the sub control device 262, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 reads the hold display execution program corresponding to the hold display pattern indicated by the received display hold display command from the program ROM 552 and executes it. .. In the hold display execution program, the execution pattern of the hold display in the first to fourth hold display areas and the execution pattern of the hold display in the hold display area are predetermined.

Further, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs a process of shifting the hold display displayed in the hold display area each time the execution of the decorative symbol variation display is completed. Specifically, when the execution of the decorative symbol variation display is completed, the hold display in the execution display area is deleted, and the first hold display area → the execution display area, the second hold display area → the first hold display area, and the third hold The hold display is shifted in the order of display area → second hold display area, fourth hold display area → third hold display area. When the number of reserved balls is 0, the reserved ball is displayed in the execution display area.

In step S3008, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 executes a specific operation period notification process for notifying a period during which a specific operation such as volume change can be executed on the third symbol display device 42. The specific operation period notification process will be described later.

In step S3009, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 executes a right-handed notification process for causing the player to execute the right-handed operation on the third symbol display device 42. The right-handed notification process will be described later.

In step S3010, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 executes the next game state proximity status notification process for notifying the third symbol display device 42 that the next game state is approaching. The next game state proximity status notification process will be described later.

In step S3011, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs other processing such as demo display.

In step S3012, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed from the start of normal processing. If 1 ms or more has elapsed, the process returns to step S3001, and if not, the process returns to step S3008.

Next, the symbol sequence variation processing described above in step S3106 will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the symbol sequence variation processing.

In step S3201, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 causes the third symbol display device 42 to display the high-speed fluctuation of the right, middle, and left main decorative symbols Sz for a predetermined time. In step S3202, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the high-speed fluctuation flag indicating that the high-speed fluctuation is in progress to 1. The high-speed fluctuation flag is set in RAM 523.

In step S3203, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the variable display being executed includes reach. Specifically, it is determined based on the received display variation pattern specification command. If there is a reach, the process proceeds to step S3204, and if there is no reach, the process proceeds to step S3211.

In step S3204, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not it is reach timing. If it is reach timing, the process proceeds to step S3205, otherwise the process proceeds to step S3208. In step S3205, the left and right main decorative symbols Sz are stopped at a predetermined reach combination, and the central main decorative symbol Sz is continuously changed. Since the high-speed fluctuation ended at the time of this reach display, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the high-speed fluctuation in-progress flag to 0 in step S3206, and in step S3207, the reach variation indicating that the reach is in progress. Set the medium flag to 1.

In step S3208, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the stop display command has been received. If the stop display command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3209, otherwise the process ends. In step S3209, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 stops the main decorative symbol Sz during the reach variation, and stops the right, middle, and left main decorative symbols Sz in a predetermined combination. If there is no effect to change again at this point, the stop symbol is confirmed. As a result, in step S3210, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the reach changing flag to 0.

In step S3211, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not a stop display command has been received in the non-reach variable display. If the stop display command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3212, otherwise the process ends. In step S3212, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 stops the right, middle, and left main decorative symbols Sz in a predetermined combination. If there is no effect to change again at this point, the stop symbol is confirmed. As a result, in step S3213, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the high-speed fluctuation flag to 0. This is the end of this process.

Next, the specific operation screen display process shown in step S3108 described above will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a specific operation screen display process.

In step S3221, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the specific operation screen on the third symbol display device 42 based on the reception of the display specific operation screen display command in step S3107 described above. The specific operation screen is a screen in which the player operates the selection buttons 82 and 83 to raise or lower the volume.

In step S3222, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the player has received the selection operation command based on pressing the selection buttons 82 and 83. If the selection operation command is received, the process proceeds to step S3223, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3224. In step S3223, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the volume to be changed by the third symbol display device 42 according to which of the selection buttons 82 and 83 is operated.

In step S3224, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not a decision command based on the player pressing the decision button 81 has been received. If the decision command is received, the process proceeds to step S3225, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3226. In step S3225, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 erases the display on the specific operation screen. That is, if the enter button 81 is pressed without pressing the selection buttons 82 and 83 while the specific operation screen is being displayed, the display of the specific operation screen is terminated.

In step S3226, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the display of the specific operation screen. If 30 seconds have passed, the process proceeds to step S3225 and the display of the specific operation screen is terminated. If not, the process proceeds to step S3227.

In step S3227, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not it is 5 seconds before the high-speed fluctuation stop. If it is 5 seconds before the high-speed fluctuation stop, the process proceeds to step S3225, and the display of the specific operation screen is terminated. That is, the display of the specific operation screen is forcibly terminated 5 seconds before the stop of the high-speed fluctuation.

In step S3228, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not it is 3 seconds before the end of the ending effect. If it is before the end 3 of the ending effect, the process proceeds to step S3225, and the display of the specific operation screen is ended. That is, the display of the specific operation screen is forcibly terminated 3 seconds before the end of the ending effect.

Next, the jackpot opening round display process shown in step S3110 described above will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the jackpot opening round display process.

In step S3231, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the jackpot opening image on the third symbol display device 42 based on the reception of the display opening command in step S3109 described above. Subsequently, in step S3232, during the period of this opening effect, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the opening right-handed explanatory information explaining the game method in the next round game on the third symbol display device 42.

Subsequently, in step S3233, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the end timing of the opening effect has arrived. If it is the end timing of the opening effect, the process proceeds to step S3234, otherwise the process ends.

In step S3234, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 ends the display of the opening image and displays the jackpot round image. In step S3235, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the jackpot round image and displays the right-handed round information for notifying the player that the right-handed strike is performed during the jackpot round. The display mode of the right-handed information during this round is displayed in a manner conspicuous to the player on the third symbol display device 42. Here, since it is displayed larger than the right-handed information displayed during the non-round, which will be described later, it is called an enlarged display.

In step S3236, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 has won 10 balls (winning detection) at the large winning opening 32a (the detection switch) during one round, or the opening period of the large winning opening 32a is 30. Determine if seconds have passed. If there is a winning of 10 balls or opening for 30 seconds, the process proceeds to step S3237, and if not, the process returns to step S3234. In step S3237, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the jackpot round is the final round. If it is the final round, the process proceeds to step S3238, otherwise the process returns to step S3234.

In step S3238, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 ends the display of the jackpot round image. Subsequently, in step S3239, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 ends the display (enlarged display) of the right-handed information during the round. This is the end of this process.

Next, the jackpot ending display process shown in step S3112 described above will be described with reference to FIG. 50. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a jackpot ending display process.

In step S3241, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the jackpot ending image on the third symbol display device 42 based on the reception of the display ending command in step S3111 described above. Further, in step S3242, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the jackpot round flag indicating that the jackpot ending effect is being executed to 1.

Further, in step S3243, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the ending specific operation acceptance flag indicating that the specific operation is being accepted during the ending period to 1, and proceeds to step S3244. The specific operation is an operation for changing the volume, which is executed by pressing the enter button 81 during the ending period.

In step S3244, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the high probability / support state transition flag or the low probability / support state transition flag is 1. If the high probability / support state transition flag or the low probability / support state transition flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S3245, otherwise the process proceeds to step S3251.

In step S3245, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 notifies the player that the game method in the high probability / support state, etc., which shifts after the ending effect, is right-handed, and displays the ending right-handed information in the third symbol display device. Display on 42. This ending right-handed information is displayed in a manner that is less noticeable to the player than the right-handed information during the round. For example, the ending right-handed information is displayed in a sufficiently smaller size than the round right-handed information. In addition to displaying the right-handed information during the ending, a countdown display that counts down the ending period is also performed.

In step S3246, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not it is 3 seconds before the end of the ending period. If it is 3 seconds before the end of the ending period, the process proceeds to step S3247, and if not, the present process is terminated.

In step S3247, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 uses the ending right-handed information to display the next game state proximity information to the third symbol display device 42 to notify the player that the next game state is approaching. .. The next game state is a game state that shifts after the end of the ending effect, and here, it is a high probability / support state.

Further, in step S3248, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the ending specific operation acceptance flag indicating that the acceptance of the specific operation during the ending period has been completed in response to the fact that it is 3 seconds before the end of the ending period. Set to 0 and proceed to step S3249.

In step S3249, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the end timing of the ending period has come. When the end timing of the ending period is reached, the process proceeds to step S4250, and if not, the present process is terminated.

In step S4250, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 ends the display of the next game state proximity information using the right-handed information during the ending. At the same time, the countdown display of the ending period ends when the count time expires. In step S4251, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the jackpot ending flag to 0. This is the end of this process.

Next, the high-probability / support state transition display process shown in step S3114 described above will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a high probability / support state transition display process.

In step S3261, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the high probability / support state transition flag is 0 based on the reception of the display high probability / support state transition command in step S3113 described above. do. That is, it is determined whether or not the game state at the time of winning the probability change jackpot was a high probability / support state. If the high probability / support state transition flag is 0 (that is, the probability change jackpot is won in the low probability state), the process proceeds to step S3262, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3263.

In step S3622, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the high probability / support state transition flag to 1. In step S3263, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the jackpot ending flag is 0. If the jackpot ending flag is 0, the process proceeds to step S3264, otherwise the process proceeds to step S3266.

In step S3264, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the background screen at the time of transition to the high probability / support state on the third symbol display device 42. In step S3265, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the right-handed information in the high probability / support state on the third symbol display device 42. The high-probability / support state right-handed information is displayed in a manner that makes it easier for the player to stand out than the ending right-handed information. For example, the high-probability / support state right-handed information is enlarged and displayed from the ending right-handed information.

In step S3226, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the high probability / support state. In this embodiment, the high probability / support state is assumed to end with the number of fluctuations: 100 times. If it is the end timing of the high probability / support state, the process proceeds to step S3267, and if not, the present process is terminated.

In step S3267, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 ends the enlarged display of the right-handed information in the high probability / support state. In step S3268, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the high probability / support state transition flag to 0. This is the end of this process.

Next, the low-probability / support state transition display process shown in step S3116 described above will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a low probability / support state transition display process.

In step S3271, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the high probability / support state transition flag is 1 based on the reception of the low probability / support state transition flag in step S3115 described above. If the high probability / support state transition flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S3272, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3274.

In step S3272, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the high probability / support state transition flag to 0, and proceeds to step S3273. In step S3273, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the low probability / support state transition flag to 1.

In step S3274, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the jackpot ending flag is 0. If the jackpot ending flag is 0, the process proceeds to step S3275, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3276.

In step S3275, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the screen in the low probability / support state on the third symbol display device 42. Further, in step S3276, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the right-handed information in the low probability / support state on the third symbol display device 42. The low-probability / support state right-handed information is displayed in a manner more conspicuous to the player than the ending right-handed information, like the high-probability / support state right-handed information.

In step S3277, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the end timing of the low probability / support state has arrived. If it is the end timing of the low probability / support state, the process proceeds to step S3278, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3279.

In step S3278, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 erases the right-handed information in the low probability / support state from the third symbol display device 42. In step S3279, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the low probability / support state transition flag to 0. This is the end of this process.

Next, the specific operation period notification process shown in step S3008 described above will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a flowchart illustrating the specific operation period notification process.

In step S3301, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not a normal screen display command has been received. If the normal screen display command is received, the process proceeds to step S3302, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3303.

In step S3302, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the information during the specific operation period on the third symbol display device 42. The information during the specific operation period is information for notifying the player that the specific operation using the decision button 81 can be executed. The specific operation is, for example, an operation of pressing the decision button 81 in order to display the operation screen for changing the volume.

In step S3303, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the demo screen display command has been received. If the demo screen display command is received, the process proceeds to step S3302 to display the information during the specific operation period, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3304.

In step S3304, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the display opening command has been received. If the display opening command is received, the process proceeds to step S3305. If not, the process proceeds to step S3306.

In step S3305, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the information display timing during the specific operation period described above has been reached in the jackpot opening effect. The display timing of the information during the specific operation period in the jackpot opening effect is the timing 5 seconds after the start of the jackpot opening effect. If it is the display timing, the process proceeds to step S3302, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3306.

In step S3306, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the display variation pattern designation command has been received. If the display variation pattern designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3307, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3311.

In step S3307, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the high probability / support state transition flag is 1. When the high probability / support state transition flag is 1, since the specific operation such as volume change cannot be performed because the high probability / support state is in progress, this process is terminated, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3308.

In step S3308, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the end-of-term proximity information of the specific operation period on the third symbol display device 42. The end-of-specification proximity information of the specific operation period is information that informs the player that the end timing of the specific operation period is approaching. The specific operation is, for example, an operation for changing the volume.

In step S3309, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the display of the proximity information at the end of the specific operation period. If the end timing is reached, the process proceeds to step S3310, and if not, the present process is terminated.

In step S3310, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 erases the end-of-term proximity information of the specific operation period from the third symbol display device 42, and ends this process.

In step S3311, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the display ending command has been received. If the display ending command is received, the process proceeds to step S3312. If not, the process ends.

In step S3312, the CPU 521 of the table control device 45 determines whether or not the high probability / support state transition flag or the low probability / support state transition flag is 1. That is, it is determined whether or not the gaming state to be transferred next to the ending effect is a high probability / support state or a low probability / support state. If the high probability / support state transition flag or the low probability / support state transition flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S3308, and the end-of-term proximity information of the specific operation period is displayed on the third symbol display device 42. If neither the high probability / support state transition flag nor the low probability / support state is 1 (0), the process proceeds to step S3313.

In step S3313, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 shifts to the normal low probability state after the end of the ending effect, so that the information during the specific operation period is transmitted to the third symbol display device 42 during the ending period as well as during the jackpot round. indicate. This is the end of this process.

Next, the display mode of the third symbol display device 42 during the specific operation period will be described with reference to FIG. 54. 54 (a) to 54 (e) are diagrams illustrating a display mode during a specific operation period in the third symbol display device 42.

While the normal screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 42, the player presses the enter button 81 to perform a specific operation such as changing the volume of the sound output from the sound output unit 24. It is a period. The sound output from the sound output unit 24 is a sound output at the start of the variation display on the third symbol display device 42, such as during the variation display, during the jackpot game state, or during the advantageous gaming state after the end of the jackpot. be.

The third symbol display device 42 is specified to notify the player that a specific operation such as a volume change can be executed during the period when the normal screen 43a is displayed as shown in (a). Information 44a is displayed during the operation period. For example, it is the character information of "volume can be changed" displayed on the upper right of the normal screen 43a of the third symbol display device 42.

Further, the third symbol display device 42 displays the information 44a during the specific operation period even during the period when the demo screen 43b is displayed as shown in (d). The demo screen 43b may be a still image or a moving image.

When the player presses the enter button 81 during the period in which the information 44a during the specific operation period is displayed on the normal screen 43a or the demo screen 43b, the third symbol display device 42 is displayed on the third symbol display device 42 as shown in (b). The specific operation screen 44b for the volume change operation is displayed. The specific operation screen 44b may be displayed in place of the normal screen 43a or the demo screen 43b, or may be displayed so as to be superimposed on a part of the normal screen 43a or the demo screen 43b.

The specific operation screen 44b includes a change information display unit 44c in which information that can be changed by the specific operation is displayed, and an operation method display unit 44d that indicates the method of the specific operation to the player. The change information display unit 44c is a volume display unit that indicates, for example, the current volume and the range in which the volume can be changed in the case of a volume change operation screen. The operation method display unit 44d is a volume change method display unit that illustrates an operation method for changing the volume using, for example, the enter button 81 and the selection buttons 82, 83. In the operation method display unit 44d, as a volume changing method, the volume is determined by pressing the enter button 81, the volume is decreased by pressing the left selection button 82, and the volume is increased by pressing the right selection button 83. Is illustrated.

When the player presses the right selection button 83, the current volume (the volume of the third stage of the five stages) is changed to the next higher volume on the change information display unit 44c as shown in (c). The situation is displayed. When the player presses the left selection button 82, the change information display unit 44c displays how the volume is changed from the current volume to the next lower volume.

When the player presses the decision button 81, the normal screen 43a is displayed on the third symbol display device 42 instead of the specific operation screen 44b as shown in (e).

Next, a display mode during the specific operation period during the high-speed fluctuation of the main decorative symbol Sz will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIGS. 55 (a) to 55 (h) are diagrams illustrating a display mode during a specific operation period during high-speed fluctuation of the main decorative symbol Sz.

As shown in (a), the normal screen 43a is displayed on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42, and the information 44a during the specific operation period indicating "volume can be changed" is displayed on the upper right of the normal screen 43a. There is. When the start condition is satisfied, as shown in (b), the display screen 42a displays the high-speed changing screen 43c instead of the normal screen 43a. At the same time that the normal screen 43a is switched to the high-speed changing screen 43c, the information 44a during the specific operation period is switched to the proximity information 44f at the end of the specific operation period. The end-of-specification proximity information 44e is information that informs the player that the end timing of the specific operation period is approaching. For example, information that suggests that the end timing of the specific operation period is approaching is added to the information 44a during the specific operation period. Specifically, for example, as shown in (b) to (d), the surroundings of the character image of "volume can be changed" blink in different colors at predetermined time intervals, suggesting that the end timing is approaching. do. The blinking display may be displayed at regular time intervals, but may be displayed at shorter intervals as the end timing approaches. As a result, the player can feel that the end timing is approaching, although the specific operation is being performed.

As shown in (e), the end-of-term proximity information 44e of the specific operation period is deleted at a predetermined timing before the high-speed fluctuation ends. That is, the operation of changing the volume (pressing the enter button 81) is possible even during high-speed fluctuation, but must be executed during the period in which the end-of-term proximity information 44e of the specific operation period is displayed at the latest. The timing at which the proximity information 44e at the end of the specific operation period is deleted is the timing immediately before the screen 43c during high-speed fluctuation is switched to the left symbol stop screen 43d (see (e) and (f)). This makes it possible to reliably show the player whether the fluctuation display during high-speed fluctuation is completely out of line or reach.

The left symbol stop screen 43d becomes the all symbol stop screen 43e after a predetermined time. When the stop symbol is completely off on the all symbol stop screen 43e, the all symbol stop screen 43e returns to the normal screen 43a as shown in (i) if there is no hold for the establishment of the start condition as shown in (g). .. As shown in (i), the normal screen 43a is the same as the all symbol stop screen 43e, but the information 44a is displayed again during the specific operation period. On the other hand, even if the stop symbol is completely off on the all symbol stop screen 43e, if the start condition is suspended as shown in (h), the high-speed change is made from the all symbol stop screen 43e as shown in (j). In addition to the middle screen 43c, the end-of-term proximity information 44e of the specific operation period is displayed, and the display mode after (b) described above is repeated.

In this way, the player can recognize to what timing during the high-speed fluctuation the specific operation such as the volume change is possible by looking at the proximity information 44e at the end of the specific operation period.

Next, the display mode during the specific operation period after the reach is established will be described with reference to FIG. 56. 56 (a) to 56 (o) are diagrams for explaining the display mode during the specific operation period after the reach is established.

In the normal reach display screen 43f shown in (a) and the advanced reach display screen 43g shown in (b), the volume cannot be changed during the reach display period, so that the information 44a is hidden during the specific operation period. On the all symbol stop screen 43e shown in (c), it is shown that the result of the reach display is a jackpot combination. Information 44a is hidden during the specific operation period even while the all symbol stop screen 43 is being displayed. After the jackpot combination is confirmed, the all symbol stop screen 43 is switched to the opening screen 43h. After the opening information 44f (for example, character information congratulating the player such as "Congratulations") is displayed on the opening screen 43 to inform the player of the establishment of the big hit shown in (d), the round game shown in (e) is displayed. The opening right-handed explanation information 44g (for example, the character information "Aim at the right" and the right arrow are shown) is displayed, which explains the operation method inside to the player during the opening. Even while the opening screen 43 is being displayed, the information 44a during the specific operation period is not displayed during the periods (d) and (e). This is to ensure that this information is shown to the player.

The information 44a during the specific operation period continues to be displayed from the timing of the end of the display period of the opening right-handed information 44g shown in (e) to the end of the jackpot round state. That is, in the period at the end of the display period of the right-handed information 44g during the opening and the period from the start of the jackpot round state shown in (f) to the end of the jackpot round state shown in (g), the information 44a during the specific operation period. Is displayed.

Specifically, on the round screen 43i shown in (g), the right-handed hit information 44h during the round indicating that the player is right-handed during the jackpot round state and the progress of the jackpot round state are displayed. Information 44a is displayed during the specific operation period together with the round number information 44i shown. The right-handed information 44h during the round is, for example, information indicating that the player is right-handed clearly by a large character or an illustration. The round number information 44i indicates that it is the first round.

Further, on the round screen 43i shown in (h), the information 44a during the specific operation period is displayed together with the right-handed information 44h during the round and the round number information 44i indicating the final round (16th round).

After the end of the final round, the round screen 43i is replaced with the ending screen 43j shown in (i). The ending information 44j indicating that the ending period is set is displayed on the ending screen 43j. Further, on the ending screen 43j, countdown information for counting down the ending time is displayed.

The ending information 44j includes, for example, the ending countdown information 44v shown in (i) to (o), the next game state suggestion information 44w shown in (i), the manufacturer information 44x shown in (j), and (k) ( It is composed of the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y shown in l) and the digging prevention information 44z shown in (m) to (o).

The ending countdown information 44v is a display for counting down the ending time. The ending countdown information 44v is counted down, for example, by 1 second with the passage of time. For example, (i) is displayed as "ending time: 35 seconds after" because it is immediately after the start of the ending period, and (j) is displayed as "ending time: 25 seconds after" because 10 seconds have passed from the start of the ending. In (k), "Ending time: 20 seconds after" is displayed because 15 seconds have passed from the start of the ending, and in (l), "Ending time: 19 seconds after" is displayed because 16 seconds have passed from the start of the ending. , (M) displays "Ending time: 3 seconds after" because 32 seconds have passed from the start of the ending, and (n) displays "Ending time: 2 seconds after" because 33 seconds have passed from the start of the ending. In o), 34 seconds have passed from the start of the ending, so "Ending time: 1 second after" is displayed.

The next game state suggestion information 44w suggests that the game state after the end of the ending period is a probable change state, or suggests that it is a normal state with a support state. Here, it is suggested that the next high probability / support state occurs due to the character information "one more time". Next, when a low probability / support state occurs, the text information "chance!" Is displayed. The next game state suggestion information 44w is displayed for, for example, 10 seconds.

The manufacturer information 44x is, for example, a logo indicating a manufacturer (for example, character information such as "SANYO"). The manufacturer information 44x is displayed, for example, for 5 seconds. The card removal forgetting prevention information 44y is, for example, an illustration showing a prepaid card and a character image such as "Please be careful not to forget to remove the prepaid card". The card removal forgetting prevention information 44y is displayed for, for example, 10 seconds. The immersive prevention information 44z is textual information such as, for example, "Pachinko and pachislot are games that are moderately enjoyed." The squeeze prevention information 44z is displayed for, for example, 10 seconds.

In this way, a series of ending information 44j is displayed on the ending screen 43j for 35 seconds.

On the ending screen 43j, the ending right-handed information 44k, which is displayed in a manner less conspicuous to the player than the round right-handed information 44h, is displayed. For example, the ending right-handed information 44k is displayed in a size sufficiently smaller than the round right-handed information 44h. As a result, the player is illusioned that the right-handed game during the round is over. This makes it easier to prevent the player from hitting right during the ending period.

On the ending screen 43j, the proximity information 44e at the end of the specific operation period is displayed. The specific operation period proximity information 44e is displayed, for example, from the start timing of the ending effect shown in (i) of the ending effect to the end timing of the ending effect shown in (l). If the jackpot that includes the ending period is a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot with a support status, the specific operation cannot be performed during the high-probability or low-probability support status that is transferred after the end of the ending period. For example, when the sound output from the sound output unit 24 in the high-probability or low-probability support state is larger than the previous game state in order to arouse the interest of the player, the ending period is changed. Since it is the last opportunity of, displaying that the end timing of the voice change operation is approaching can help the player to play comfortably.

The next game state proximity information 44l is displayed on the ending screen 43j. The next game state proximity information 44l is information for notifying the player that the timing for shifting to the next game state is approaching. For example, the next game state proximity information 44l is information that blinks and displays the periphery of the right-handed hitting information 44k during the ending. The next game state proximity information 44l is displayed in 3 seconds before the end of the ending period among the display of the squeeze prevention display 44z shown in (m) to (o). As a result, the player can recognize that the right-handed display may be resumed.

Next, the display mode during the specific operation period after the establishment of the reach following FIG. 56 will be described with reference to FIG. 57. 57 (a) to 57 (o) are diagrams for explaining the display mode during the specific operation period after the reach is established following FIG. 56.

As shown in (a), after the ending effect of the probability variation jackpot state is completed, the high probability state screen 43k is displayed on the display screen 42a. The high-probability state screen 43k is the same as the normal screen 43a in that the main decorative symbol Sz is displayed, but the background image is displayed in such a manner that the color and display contents can be clearly distinguished from the normal screen 43a. .. On the high-probability state screen 43k, right-handed information 44m in the high-probability / support state is displayed. The high-probability / support state right-handed information 44m is displayed in a more conspicuous manner (enlarged form) to the player than the ending right-handed information 44k.

Due to the above-mentioned ending right-handed information 44k, next game state proximity information 44l, and ending countdown information 44v, the player mistakenly performs a right-handed operation at an unnecessary timing during the ending production, and the game ball becomes a waste ball. That can be reduced. Further, based on this information, the game ball can be launched at the start timing of the high probability / support state shown in (a).

As shown in (b) to (f), the high-probability / support state right-handed information 44m has a high-probability / support state transition to a high-speed fluctuation screen 43c, a high-probability state reach display screen 43f, and all symbols. It continues to be displayed on the stop screen 43e. The right-handed information 44m in the high probability / support state is hidden in accordance with the opening screen 43h shown in (g). After the opening right-handed explanatory information 44g shown in (j) is displayed, the round right-handed information 44h is displayed.

Here, as shown in (f), the reach fluctuation in the high probability state is determined by the combination indicating the 8R normal jackpot without the support state (0 times) (for example, "666"). Therefore, since the next game state is a low probability state without a support state, the ending right-handed information 44k and the next game state proximity information 44l are not displayed on the ending screen 43l shown in (k) to (m). The ending countdown information 44v is displayed. With this ending countdown information 44v, it is possible to reduce the demerit that the player starts the left-handed game for the next game state during the period of the ending effect. That is, when a left-handed game is performed during the ending production period, the prize ball is paid out by winning the starting prize device 33a for special figure 1, but the ball is also entered into the out opening without winning, so the ball is held. May be reduced. If the end timing of the ending time can be appropriately grasped by the ending countdown information 44v, such a situation can be reduced.

On the ending screen 43l, the next game state proximity information 44l is not displayed, and the information 44a continues to be displayed during the specific operation period.

As shown in (n), when the ending effect is finished, the normal screen 43a, which is a low probability state without a support state, is displayed. The information 44a during the specific operation period continues to be displayed until this timing. As shown in (o), when the normal screen 43a is replaced with the high-speed changing screen 43c, the information 44a during the specific operation period is displayed as the proximity information 44e at the end of the specific operation period when there is a hold. After that, the screen display is the same as that shown in FIGS. 55 (c) and later.

In this way, an appropriate mode is determined depending on whether the gaming state generated after the end of the ending effect is a high probability / support state (similar to the low probability / support state) or a low probability state without a support state. Since the right-handed information and the information 44a during the specific operation period are displayed in, the player can easily understand the timing at which the right-handed operation is necessary and the timing at which the voice can be changed.

Next, a display mode when the decision button 81 is left pressed during the specific operation period during high-speed fluctuation will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIGS. 58 (a) to 58 (g) are diagrams illustrating a display mode when the decision button 81 is left pressed during a specific operation period during high-speed fluctuation.

As shown in (a), while the high-speed fluctuating screen 43c is being displayed, the proximity information 44e at the end of the specific operation period is displayed, and the character image of "volume can be changed" is displayed blinking. When the player presses the decision button 81 at this timing, the specific operation screen 44b is displayed as shown in (b). The high-speed fluctuating screen 43c may be displayed transparently behind the specific operation screen 44b. You can perform specific operations with confidence while confirming that high-speed fluctuations are in progress.

After the display of the specific operation screen 44b, if the player leaves the selection buttons 82 and 83 unoperated as shown in (c) and (d), the specific operation screen 44b is also displayed. The end-of-operation period proximity information 44e is displayed. This makes it possible to suggest to the player that the specific operation period will end unless a specific operation such as changing the volume is performed.

Nevertheless, if the player leaves the selection buttons 82 and 83 unoperated, the specific operation screen 44b is hidden before the left symbol stop screen 43d is displayed as shown in (e). As a result, the player can surely show the all symbol stop screen 43e shown in (f) and the normal reach display screen 43f shown in (g) even when the specific operation screen 44b is left displayed. ..

The specific operation screen 44b may be displayed not only within one variable display period but also over a plurality of continuous variable display periods. The display time of the specific operation screen 44b over a plurality of variable display periods may be set so that the volume can be changed. A plurality of variable displays may be performed until the player operates to determine the end of the display of the specific operation screen 44b. In this case, the specific operation screen 44b may be reduced and displayed so that the result of the variation display can be understood, or the variation display may be reduced and displayed without reducing the specific operation screen 44b.

Next, a display mode when the decision button 81 and the selection buttons 82 and 83 are pressed during the specific operation period during the high-speed fluctuation will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIGS. 59 (a) to 59 (g) are diagrams illustrating a display mode when the decision button 81 and the selection buttons 82 and 83 are pressed during the specific operation period during high-speed fluctuation.

As shown in (a), when the player presses the decision button 81 while the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c is being displayed, the specific operation screen 44b is displayed. As shown in (b), when the selection buttons 82 and 83 are operated while the specific operation screen 44b is being displayed, the volume change is displayed on the change information display unit 43c. When the player presses the decision button 81 in this state, the screen returns to the high-speed changing screen 43c at that timing as shown in (d). As a result, it is possible to sufficiently show the fluctuation display from the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c to the left symbol stop screen 43d shown in (e), the all symbol stop screen 43e shown in (f), or the normal reach screen 43f shown in (g). can.

If a specific operation is performed while the screen 43c during high-speed fluctuation is being displayed, the specific operation may be set so that the specific operation cannot be performed for a period after the specific operation is performed once. This is because the time for high-speed fluctuation is short, so even if the specific operation screen 44b is displayed again, there is a high possibility that sufficient time for executing the specific operation is not left. On the other hand, when the specific operation is performed while the round screen 43i is being displayed, the specific operation screen 44b may be displayed again because there is sufficient time left to perform the specific operation again.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment,
When the gaming state shifts from the jackpot round gaming state to the next high probability / support state or low probability / support state, the start of the next high probability / support state, etc. from the end timing of the round game in the jackpot round gaming state. Until the timing, the display control device 45 executes the jackpot ending effect of displaying the ending screen 43j on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42, and the display control device 45 performs the process of step S3241 in the jackpot ending process.
Ending right-handed information 44k that suggests to the player that the start timing of the game state that requires right-handedness such as the next high probability / support state or low probability / support state has not arrived during the execution of the jackpot ending effect. The display control device 45, which displays the next game state proximity information 44l and the ending countdown information 44v, has a function of performing the processes of steps S3244 to S3251 in the jackpot ending process.

According to such a configuration, when the gaming state shifts from the jackpot round gaming state to the next high probability / support state or low probability / support state, the next round game from the jackpot round gaming state ends. Until the start timing of the high probability, support state, etc., the display control device 45 executes the jackpot ending effect of displaying the ending screen 43j on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 in the process of step S3241 in the jackpot ending process. do. During the execution of the jackpot ending effect, the display control device 45 starts the game state in which the next high probability / support state or low probability / support state is required to be right-handed in the process of step S3247 in the jackpot ending process. Displays the ending right-handed information 44k, the next game state proximity information 44l, and the ending countdown information 44v, which suggests to the player that has not arrived. As a result, the player is in the jackpot round game state at the present time when the jackpot ending effect is being executed, in other words, the present time when the jackpot ending effect is being executed is not yet in the next high probability / support state. Will be easier to recognize. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by misunderstanding that the current time when the jackpot ending effect is being executed is the next high probability / support state. For example, the gaming machine according to (A1) above.

In addition, the jackpot round gaming state is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.
The high probability, support state, etc. are advantageous game states for a player different from the jackpot round game state, and the player obtains an advantageous game value when the player operates the game ball launch handle 18. Is a game state that enables
The ending right-handed information 44k, the next game state proximity information 44l, and the ending countdown information 44v are information suggesting to the player that the start timing such as high probability / support state has not arrived during the execution of the jackpot ending effect. Is.

According to such a configuration, the next high probability / support state, etc. that shifts from the jackpot round gaming state that is advantageous to the player is an advantageous gaming state different from the jackpot round gaming state, and the player plays the game. It is a gaming state in which it is possible to acquire an advantageous gaming value by operating the ball launching handle 18. Therefore, it is easy for the player to operate the game ball launch handle 18 for acquiring an advantageous game value based on the misunderstanding that the current time when the jackpot ending effect is being executed is a high probability, a support state, or the like. Since this operation is performed during the jackpot round gaming state, the player cannot acquire this advantageous gaming value. However, during the execution of the jackpot ending effect, the ending right-handed information 44k, the next game state proximity information 44l, and the ending countdown information 44v suggesting to the player that the start timing such as the high probability / support state has not arrived. Since it is notified, it is difficult to misunderstand that the current time when the jackpot ending effect is being executed is a high probability, a support state, or the like. Further, since it is possible to suppress the operation of the game ball launching handle 18 by misunderstanding that the other advantageous game value can be obtained, it is possible to reduce the waste of the operation. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by misunderstanding that the current time when the jackpot ending effect is being executed is a high probability, a support state, or the like. For example, the gaming machine according to (A2) above.

Further, in the jackpot round gaming state, the result of the jackpot lottery in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 triggered by the entry into the start winning device 33a for special figure 1 or the start winning device 33b for special figure 2 is the jackpot result. Based on the above, it is a gaming state in which a round game is performed a predetermined number of times from the opening state to the closing state of the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32.
The jackpot ending effect is the next high probability, support state, etc. from the timing 3 seconds before the end of the ending period after the time when the jackpot 32a of the variable winning device 32 is closed in the final round of the jackpot round gaming state. It is an effect at the end of the round game state in which a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 until the start timing.

According to such a configuration, the jackpot round gaming state is the result of the jackpot lottery in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 triggered by the entry into the start winning device 33a for special figure 1 or the start winning device 33b for special figure 2. Is a game state in which a round game is performed a predetermined number of times from the opening state to the closing state of the big winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 as one round based on the result of the big hit. The jackpot ending effect is the next high probability, support state, etc. from the timing 3 seconds before the end of the ending period after the time when the jackpot 32a of the variable winning device 32 is closed in the final round of the jackpot round gaming state. It is an effect of displaying a predetermined image on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 until the start timing. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by misunderstanding that the current time when the jackpot ending effect is being executed is the next high probability / support state. For example, the gaming machine according to (A3) above.

Further, it is a ball entry means that changes into an open state in which the game ball is easy to enter and a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter, and the entry is a trigger for a big hit lottery in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261. Starting prize device 33b for
It is provided with a starting port 34 for a normal symbol, which is a means for entering a game ball and the entry of the ball triggers a starting winning device 33b for the special figure 2 to trigger a normal symbol lottery.
In the high probability / support state, etc., the support game state in which the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the entry of the start winning device 33b for special figure 2 is likely to be the winning result for operating the electric accessory of the start winning device 33b for special figure 2. And
The ending right-handed information 44k, the next game state proximity information 44l, and the ending countdown information 44v suggest to the player that the start timing such as high probability / support state has not arrived during the execution of the jackpot ending effect. Is.

According to such a configuration, the start winning device 33b for Special Figure 2 is a ball-entry means that changes between an open state in which the game ball is easy to enter and a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter. It triggers a big hit lottery in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261. The normal symbol start opening 34 is a ball entry means for the game ball to enter, and the entry serves as an opportunity for the normal symbol lottery to operate the electric accessory of the special figure 2 start winning device 33b. The high probability / support state is a support game state in which the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the entry of the starting port 34 for the normal symbol is likely to be the winning result of operating the electric accessory of the starting winning device 33b for the special figure 2. .. The right-handed information 44k during the ending, the next game state proximity information 44l, and the ending countdown information 44v suggest to the player that the start timing such as the high probability / support state has not arrived during the execution of the jackpot ending effect. Is. As a result, the player wants to quickly put the game ball into the starting port 34 for the normal symbol in the high probability / support state, etc., so that the player is executing the jackpot ending effect before shifting to the high probability / support state, etc. It is easy to accidentally fire a game ball. In this regard, by looking at the next game state proximity information 44l, etc. during the execution of the jackpot ending effect, the disadvantage caused by misunderstanding that the current time when the jackpot ending effect is being executed is a high probability, support state, etc. is reduced. can do. For example, the gaming machine according to (A4) above.

Further, the high probability / support state is a gaming state in which the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 will be a jackpot result is higher than that in the normal gaming state.
The ending right-handed information 44k, the next game state proximity information 44l, and the ending countdown information 44v suggest to the player that the start timing of the high probability / support state has not arrived during the execution of the jackpot ending effect. be.

According to such a configuration, the high probability / support state is a gaming state in which the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 becomes a jackpot result is higher than that in the normal gaming state. The next game state proximity information 44l or the like suggests to the player that the start timing of the high probability / support state has not arrived during the execution of the jackpot ending effect. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by misidentifying that the current time when the jackpot ending effect is being executed is a high probability / support state. For example, the gaming machine according to (A5) above.

Further, in the high probability / support state, the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 will be the jackpot result and the probability that the result of the actuation lottery by the actuation lottery means will be a specific result are higher than in the normal gaming state. It is a high-probability game state with higher support,
The ending right-handed information 44k, the next game state proximity information 44l, and the ending countdown information 44v suggest to the player that the start timing of the high probability / support state has not arrived during the execution of the jackpot ending effect. be.

According to such a configuration, in the high probability / support state, the probability that the result of the lottery by the lottery means becomes a specific result and the probability that the result of the ordinary symbol lottery by the starting port 34 for the ordinary symbol becomes the winning result are normal. It is a game state that is higher than the game state of. The next game state proximity information 44l or the like suggests to the player that the start timing of the high probability / support state has not arrived during the execution of the jackpot ending effect. As a result, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by misidentifying that the current time when the jackpot ending effect is being executed is a high probability / support state. For example, the gaming machine according to (A6) above.

Further, in the jackpot ending effect, a plurality of types of images are continuously executed in a predetermined ending effect pattern.
When the result of the jackpot lottery in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is the jackpot result, the ending effect pattern is displayed in a different pattern according to the type of the jackpot result.
In the ending right-handed information 44k, next game state proximity information 44l, and ending countdown information 44v, the start timing of the next high probability, support state, etc. is until the timing when multiple types of images are continuously executed in the ending effect pattern. It suggests to the player that it has not arrived.

According to such a configuration, in the jackpot ending effect, a plurality of types of images are continuously executed in a predetermined ending effect pattern. The ending effect pattern is displayed in a different pattern depending on the type of the jackpot result when the result of the jackpot lottery in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is the jackpot result. Therefore, conventionally, when the player misunderstands that the end timing of the display time of a certain image (for example, an image showing the manufacturer information) in the jackpot ending effect is the end timing of a series of jackpot ending effects. , Misunderstanding that the display time of the image that follows (for example, the image showing the card removal prevention information or the image showing the insertion prevention information) has been shifted to the next high probability / support state, etc. There is a risk of benefiting. However, in the present invention, the next game state proximity information 44l or the like does not reach the start timing of the next high probability / support state or the like until the timing at which a plurality of types of images are continuously executed in the ending effect pattern. To the player. As a result, during the jackpot ending effect, the start timing of the next game state has not arrived due to the next game state proximity information 44l until the timing when a plurality of types of images are continuously executed in a predetermined ending effect pattern. As suggested, the risk of suffering the above-mentioned disadvantages is reduced. For example, the gaming machine according to (A7) above.

Further, immediately after the end of the final round in the jackpot round gaming state, information suggesting to the player that the start timing of the next high probability / support state or the like has not arrived may be displayed. For example, the right-handed information 44h in the round is replaced with the right-handed information 44k in the ending immediately after the end of the final round in the jackpot round state. It is suggested to the player that the start timing of the next high probability, support state, etc. has not arrived during the period when the right-handed information 44k during the ending is displayed.

According to such a configuration, the right-handed information 44k during the ending suggests to the player that the start timing of the next high probability / support state, etc. has not arrived immediately after the end of the final round in the round game state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantages that occur as a result of misidentifying that the player has transitioned to the next high probability / support state immediately after the end of the final round in the round game state. For example, the gaming machine according to (A15) above.

Further, at the same time as the execution of the jackpot ending effect, information suggesting to the player that the start timing of the next high probability / support state or the like has not arrived may be displayed. For example, it is suggested to the player that the right-handed information 44k during the ending does not reach the start timing of the next high probability / support state at the same time as the execution of the jackpot ending effect.

According to such a configuration, the right-handed information 44k during the ending suggests to the player that the start timing of the next high probability, support state, etc. has not arrived at the same time as the execution of the jackpot ending effect. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused as a result of misunderstanding that the game state is shifting to the next game state at the same time as the execution of the jackpot ending effect. For example, the gaming machine according to (A16) above.

Further, the next game state proximity information 44l is obtained during the execution of the jackpot ending effect and after a predetermined time has elapsed from the execution of the jackpot ending effect (at the time of 3 seconds before the end of the ending period. For example, 16R probability variation (special 1) jackpot. In the case of the ending effect, 32 seconds after the start of the ending effect), it is suggested to the player that the start timing of the next high probability, support state, etc. has not arrived.

According to such a configuration, the player is informed that the start timing of the next high probability, support state, etc. has not arrived after a predetermined time has elapsed from the execution of the jackpot ending effect during the execution of the jackpot ending effect. Since it is a suggestion, it is a disadvantage that occurs as a result of misunderstanding that the jackpot ending effect is being executed, but after a predetermined time has passed from the execution of the jackpot ending effect, it has shifted to the next high probability, support state, etc. Can be reduced. For example, the gaming machine according to (A17) above.

Further, as described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment,
A decision button 81 by the player within a predetermined period (for example, a period from the start of the display of the identification information fluctuation display during the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c to 5 seconds before the stop of the high-speed fluctuation, a period up to 3 seconds before the end of the ending period, etc.) When the operation of is performed, at least the specific operation screen 44b for volume control for performing the volume control operation using the enter button 81 is displayed, and the display of the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c during the identification information fluctuation display. If the enter button 81 is operated outside the predetermined period (for example, the reach display period), the specific operation screen 44b for volume control is not displayed, and step S3221 in the specific operation screen display process of the display control device 45. Processing and
A display control device that notifies the player of the end-of-specification period proximity information 44e that suggests to the player that the end timing of the displayable period of the specific operation screen 44b for volume control has not arrived during a predetermined period. It includes the process of step S3308 in the specific operation period notification process of 45.

According to such a configuration, the display control device 45 stops the high-speed fluctuation from the start of the display of the screen 43c during the high-speed fluctuation of the identification information fluctuation display within a predetermined period in the process of step S3221 in the specific operation screen display process. When the player operates the decision button 81 during the period up to 5 seconds before, or the period up to 3 seconds before the end in the ending period, at least the volume adjustment operation using the decision button 81 is performed. When the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume of the button 81 is displayed and the enter button 81 is operated outside the predetermined period (for example, the period after the end of the reach display period or the ending period of 3 seconds). The specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume is not displayed. The display control device 45 informs the player that the end timing of the displayable period of the specific operation screen 44b for volume control has not arrived during the predetermined period in the process of step S3308 in the specific operation period notification process. The player is notified of the suggested end-of-term proximity information 44e of the specific operation period. As a result, the player has not yet reached the end timing of the displayable period of the specific operation screen 44b for volume adjustment at the present time during the identification information fluctuation display, in other words, the current time during the identification information fluctuation display is the volume. It becomes easy to recognize that the specific operation screen 44b for adjustment can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by misunderstanding that the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume can be displayed at the present time. For example, the gaming machine described in (B1) above.

Further, the specific operation period end proximity information 44e includes a specific operation possible period notification image (for example, character information such as "volume can be changed") for notifying that the specific operation screen 44b for volume adjustment is a displayable period. ..

According to such a configuration, the specific operation period end proximity information 44a is a specific operationable period notification image (for example, "volume can be changed") for notifying that the specific operation screen 44b for volume adjustment is a displayable period. Character information) is included. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the predetermined period during the display of the high-speed changing screen 43c during the identification information variation display is the period during which the volume control operation can be performed. For example, the gaming machine described in (B2) above.

Further, the proximity information 44e at the end of the specific operation period is, for example, when the specific operation screen 44b for volume control is displayed within a predetermined period during the display of the high-speed changing screen 43c during the identification information fluctuation display, after that. A non-notification period may be provided in which the proximity information 44e at the end of the specific operation period is not notified.

According to such a configuration, the proximity information 44e at the end of the specific operation period is displayed on the specific operation screen 44b for volume control within a predetermined period during the display of the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c during the identification information fluctuation display. In that case, after that, a non-notification period is provided in which the proximity information 44e at the end of the specific operation period is not notified. As a result, the specific operation screen 44b for volume adjustment is frequently displayed within a predetermined period during the display of the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c during the identification information variation display (that is, the specific operation screen for the player to adjust the volume). By performing an operation to display 44b), it is possible to reduce that the identification information variation display is not sufficiently seen by the player. For example, the gaming machine described in (B4) above.

Further, the end-of-term proximity information 44e of the specific operation period may be continuously notified, for example, when the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume is displayed within the jackpot ending period.

According to such a configuration, the end-of-term proximity information 44e of the specific operation period may be continuously notified, for example, when the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume is displayed within the jackpot ending period. When the jackpot ending period is long, it becomes easy for the player to correct the content even after performing a specific operation for displaying the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume. For example, the gaming machine described in (B5) above.

Further, the end-of-term proximity information 44e of the specific operation period is displayed even during the display of the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume.

According to such a configuration, the end-of-term proximity information 44e of the specific operation period is displayed even during the display of the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume. As a result, the player recognizes the end timing of the displayable period of the specific operation screen 44b even when the specific operation screen 44b is viewed after the player sees the end proximity information 44e of the specific operation period and operates the enter button 81. It becomes easier to do. For example, the gaming machine described in (B6) above.

Further, even while the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume is being displayed, the image being displayed during a predetermined period (for example, the screen during high-speed fluctuation 43c) can be visually recognized.

According to such a configuration, the image being displayed can be visually recognized during a predetermined period even while the specific operation screen 44b for adjusting the volume is being displayed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize what the image being displayed (for example, the high-speed fluctuating screen 43c) will be during the predetermined period even while the specific operation screen 44b is being displayed. For example, the gaming machine described in (B7) above.

Further, the proximity information 44e at the end of the specific operation period can be displayed within the display period of the high-speed changing screen 43c during the identification information fluctuation display period, and the high-speed changing screen 43c is displayed even during the identification information fluctuation display period. After the period has passed, it cannot be displayed.

According to such a configuration, the proximity information 44e at the end of the specific operation period can be displayed within the display period of the high-speed changing screen 43c during the identification information fluctuation display period, and is high-speed even during the identification information fluctuation display period. After the display period of the changing screen 43c has elapsed, the display is disabled. As a result, even during the identification information fluctuation display period, after the high-speed fluctuation period ends, the period is the period that the player wants to see / the player wants to see (variation display result display and reach effect). Is displayed, which can reduce inconvenience. For example, the gaming machine described in (B8) above.

Further, the proximity information 44e at the end of the specific operation period is a case where the jackpot round gaming state shifts to the next high probability / support state, etc., and the specific operation screen 44b cannot be displayed in the next high probability / support state, etc. In this case, it can be displayed during the ending effect in the jackpot round game state.

According to such a configuration, the end-of-term proximity information 44e of the specific operation period is a case where the jackpot round gaming state shifts to the next high probability / support state, etc., and the specific operation is performed in the next high probability / support state, etc. When the screen 44b cannot be displayed, it can be displayed during the ending effect in the jackpot round game state. As a result, it is possible to reduce the inconvenience caused by the inability to adjust the volume after the jackpot round game state shifts to the next high probability / support state. For example, the gaming machine described in (B9) above.

Further, as described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment,
In the jackpot round gaming state, the process of step S3235 in the jackpot opening round display process of the display control device 45, which notifies the player that the game is to be performed by right-handed hitting, and the processing of step S3235.
In the next high probability / support state or low probability / support state that occurs after the end of the jackpot round game state, the height of the display control device 45 that notifies the player that the game is to be played by right-handed. The processing of step S3265 in the probability / support state transition display processing or the processing of step S3276 in the low probability / support state transition display processing,
When shifting from the jackpot round gaming state to the next high probability / support state, etc., from the end timing of the right-handed game in the jackpot round gaming state to the start timing of the next high probability / support state, etc., the third symbol display device 42. The process of step S3241 in the jackpot ending process of the display control device 45 for executing the jackpot ending effect of displaying the ending information 44j on the display screen 42a of the display control device 45 is provided.
In the process of step S3235 in the jackpot opening round display process, the display control device 45 notifies right-handed in the first mode (for example, the enlarged right-handed information 44h in the round) during the right-handed game in the jackpot round game state. In the process of step S3244 in the jackpot ending display process, while the jackpot ending effect is being executed, the right in the second aspect (reduced display middle right-handed information 44k) changed to a mode different from the first aspect. Make a hit notification.

According to such a configuration, the display control device 45 notifies the player that the game is to be played by right-handed in the jackpot round gaming state in the process of step S3235 in the jackpot opening round display process. Notify. The display control device 45 has the next high probability that occurs after the end of the jackpot round gaming state in the process of step S3265 in the high probability / support state transition display process or the process of step S3276 in the low probability / support state transition display process. In the support state or the like, right-handed notification is performed to notify the player that the game is performed by right-handed. When the display control device 45 shifts from the jackpot round gaming state to the next high probability / support state in the process of step S3241 in the jackpot ending process, the display control device 45 is next from the end timing of the right-handed game in the jackpot round gaming state. Until the start timing of the high probability / support state, etc., the jackpot ending effect of displaying the ending information 44j on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 is executed. In the process of step S3235 in the jackpot opening round display process, the display control device 45 performs right-handed notification in the first mode (enlarged display) during the right-handed game in the jackpot round game state, and is a step in the jackpot ending display process. In the process of S3244, while the jackpot ending effect is being executed, the right-handed notification is performed in the second aspect (reduced display) changed to an aspect different from the first aspect. As a result, the player is currently in the jackpot round game state due to the difference in the notification mode between the right-handed notification performed until the jackpot ending effect is executed in the jackpot round game state and the right-handed notification during the execution of the jackpot ending effect. It is easy to notice that the jackpot ending effect is being executed, not the right-handed game, and it is not the execution timing of the right-handed game. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by misunderstanding that the current time during which the jackpot ending effect is being executed is the execution timing of the right-handed game. For example, the gaming machine described in (C1) above.

Further, the jackpot round gaming state is 1 from the opening state to the closing state of the jackpot 32a of the variable winning device 32 based on the result of the jackpot lottery in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 being the jackpot result. It is a round game state in which a round game is performed a predetermined number of times. The next high probability / support state and the like are advantageous gaming states that occur after the end of the jackpot round gaming state, which is advantageous for the player, based on the result of the jackpot lottery being the jackpot result. The jackpot ending effect is executed from the end timing of the final round in the jackpot round gaming state to the start timing of the next high probability / support state when shifting from the jackpot round gaming state to the high probability / support state. be. The display control device 45 performs right-handed notification in the first mode (enlarged round right-handed information 44h) during the jackpot round game, and during execution of the jackpot ending effect, the second mode (reduced display ending). Right-handed information 44k) is used for right-handed notification.

According to such a configuration, in the jackpot round gaming state, the jackpot lottery result in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is the jackpot result, and the jackpot 32a of the variable winning device 32 is opened and then closed. It is a round game state in which a round game is performed a predetermined number of times until the state is set to one round. The next high probability / support state and the like are advantageous gaming states that occur after the end of the jackpot round gaming state, which is advantageous for the player, based on the result of the jackpot lottery being the jackpot result. The jackpot ending effect is executed from the end timing of the final round in the jackpot round gaming state to the start timing of the next high probability / support state when shifting from the jackpot round gaming state to the high probability / support state. be. The display control device 45 performs a right-handed notification in the first mode (enlarged display) during the jackpot round game, and performs a right-handed notification in the second mode (reduced display) during the execution of the jackpot ending effect. As a result, the player is currently executing the jackpot ending effect, not during the jackpot round game, due to the difference in the notification mode between the right-handed notification during the jackpot round game and the right-handed notification during the execution of the jackpot ending effect. , It becomes easy to notice that it is not the execution timing of the right-handed game. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by misidentifying that the current time during which the jackpot ending effect is being executed is the execution timing of the right-handed game in a high probability, support state, or the like. For example, the gaming machine described in (C2) above.

Further, the right-handed notification mode (second mode) in the jackpot ending effect is less noticeable to the player than the right-handed notification mode (first mode) in the jackpot round gaming state. For example, the ending right-handed information 44k is a smaller display mode than the round right-handed information 44h.

According to such a configuration, the right-handed notification mode (second aspect) in the jackpot ending effect is less noticeable to the player than the right-handed notification mode (first aspect) in the jackpot round gaming state. As a result, it becomes difficult to recognize that the execution timing of the right-handed game is during the execution of the jackpot ending effect. The disadvantages caused by misidentification can be reduced. For example, the gaming machine described in (C4) above.

Further, in the process of step S3247 in the jackpot ending display process, the display control device 45 has the second to first aspects in the final stage of the jackpot ending effect (for example, the period from 3 seconds before the end of the ending effect to the end time). Right-handed notification is performed in the third aspect suggesting that the player returns to. For example, the next game state proximity information 44l in which the right-handed information 44j is blinked and displayed during the ending is displayed.

According to such a configuration, the display control device 45 in the process of step S3247 in the jackpot ending display process, at the end of the jackpot ending effect (for example, the period from 3 seconds before the end of the ending effect to the end), Right-handed notification is performed in the third aspect, which suggests returning from the second aspect to the first aspect. As a result, right-handed notification can be quickly resumed at the timing when the jackpot ending effect shifts to the next high probability / support state. For example, the gaming machine described in (C5) above.

The display pattern of the ending information 44j may be further increased as compared with the first embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the display pattern of the ending information 44j is different depending on the type of hit and the type of fluctuation pattern. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61. FIG. 60 (a) is a special figure 1 big hit lottery table of the second embodiment, and FIG. 60 (b) is a special figure 2 big hit lottery table. FIG. 61 is a table for setting an ending effect pattern.

As shown in FIG. 60 (a), in the special figure 1 jackpot lottery table, when the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is "0" to "9", the decorative symbols are aligned with "7", which is a 16R probability variation jackpot. .. When the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is "10" to "39", the decorative symbols are 8R with odd-numbered symbols other than "7" such as "1", "3", "5", and "9". It is a probable change jackpot. When the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is "40" to "89", it is an 8R normal jackpot in which even-numbered symbols such as "2", "4", "6", and "8" are arranged as decorative symbols. When the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is "90" to "99", it is a 2R probability variation jackpot in which the decorative symbols are aligned with "341". The support status is attached 100 times even for the 2R probability change jackpot.

As shown in (b), in the special figure 2 jackpot lottery table, when the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is "0" to "19", the decorative symbols are aligned with "7", which is a 16R probability variation jackpot. When the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is "20" to "49", the decorative symbols are 8R with odd-numbered symbols other than "7" such as "1", "3", "5", and "9". It is a probable change jackpot. When the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is "50" to "89", it is an 8R normal jackpot in which even-numbered symbols such as "2", "4", "6", and "8" are arranged as decorative symbols. When the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is "90" to "99", it is a 2R probability variation jackpot in which the decorative symbols are aligned with "341". The support status is attached 100 times even for the 2R probability change jackpot.

The display control device 45 determines the jackpot type and the variation pattern type based on the display variation pattern designation command and the stop display command received from the sub control device 262. Since the stop display command is a command conversion of the decorative symbol specification command, it includes information for identifying the jackpot type.

As shown in FIG. 61, the ROM 522 of the display control device 45 stores an ending effect pattern setting table in which the jackpot type, the variation pattern type, and the ending effect pattern are associated with each other. The correspondence between the jackpot type, the fluctuation pattern type, and the ending effect pattern will be explained. In the following, the case where the lottery result based on the prize in the start winning device 33a for special figure 1 is a big hit is referred to as "special 1", and the lottery result based on the prize in the start winning device 33b for special figure 2 is a big hit. This case is called "special 2".

When the jackpot type is 16R probability variation (special 1) and the fluctuation pattern type is Super Reach C, D (variation time: 60 seconds), the ending time is predetermined to be 35 seconds, and the ending effect pattern is It is a pattern displayed in the order of the next game state suggestion information 44w, the manufacturer information 44x, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, and the insertion prevention information 44z. This ending effect pattern is the same as the ending effect pattern described in the first embodiment with reference to FIG. 56. This ending effect pattern is the effect pattern most often seen by the player in the case of a 16R probability variation (special 1) jackpot.

The display time of the next game state suggestion information 44w is 10 seconds, the display time of the manufacturer information 44x is 5 seconds, the display time of the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y is 10 seconds, and the immersive prevention information 44z. The display time is 10 seconds. In FIG. 61, the next game state suggestion information 44w is abbreviated as "one more time" from the display content, the manufacturer information 44x is abbreviated as "logo" from the display content, and the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y is abbreviated as "logo" from the display content. It is abbreviated as "prepaid card", and the immersive prevention information 44z is abbreviated as "moderately enjoyed" from the displayed contents.

When the jackpot type is 16R probability variation (special 1) and the fluctuation pattern type is super reach A, B (variation time: 30 seconds), an ending effect pattern different from the above is adopted. That is, the pattern is displayed in the order of the next game state suggestion information 44w, the manufacturer information 44x, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, and the privilege video 44n. The bonus video 44n is a video that cannot be seen during the reach or the jackpot round, and is a video that attracts the interest of the player. Since it is rare that the 16R probability change (special 1) jackpot is achieved in Super Reach A and B, the player's satisfaction can be enhanced by showing the privilege video 44n instead of the immersive prevention information 44z.

When the jackpot type is 16R probability variation (special 1) and the fluctuation pattern type is Super Reach E, F (variation time: 120 seconds), an ending effect pattern different from the above is adopted. That is, the pattern is displayed in the order of the next game state suggestion information 44w, the manufacturer information 44x, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, and the light emission gaze prevention information 44o. The light emission gaze prevention information 44o is, for example, textual information such as "Please be careful not to keep looking at strong light" or an illustration corresponding thereto. If you get a 16-probability change (Special 1) jackpot in Super Reach E and F, the fluctuation time is long, a confrontation video that emits a strong light in the development reach production is displayed, and it is intense at the end of the development reach production. Since the screen (strong light emitting flashing screen 43g-1 described with reference to FIG. 14) is accompanied by a revival effect that causes a heavy burden on the player's eyes, the light emitting gaze prevention information is used instead of the immersive prevention information 44z. By showing 44o, the player stops gazing at the screen during the period when the light emission prevention information 44o is displayed to rest his eyes, or after moving to the next game state, from the screen more than before. It is possible to make it easier to take measures in consideration of the burden on the eyes such as separating the face. In FIG. 61, the light emission gaze prevention information o is abbreviated as "strong light" from the display content.

When the jackpot type is 16R probability variation (special 2) and the fluctuation pattern type is super reach A, B, super reach C, D, super reach E, F, the above-mentioned 16R probability variation (special 1) is used. It is basically the same as the ending effect pattern in the case of Super Reach A, B, Super Reach C, D, Super Reach E, F, except that the manufacturer information 44x is omitted. As a result, even in the case of the special 2 big hit, the player can be shown the ending effect considering the difference in the variation pattern type. Further, by omitting the manufacturer information 44x from the ending effect pattern in the case of the special 2 big hit, it is possible to shorten the time burden given to the player when the big hits such as the special 2 big hit occur continuously. ..

The jackpot type is 8R probability variation (special 1), and the fluctuation pattern types are normal reach A, B (variation time: 20 seconds), super reach A, B (variation time: 30 seconds), super reach C, D (variation time). : 60 seconds), the ending time is predetermined to be 25 seconds, and the ending effect pattern is a pattern displayed in the order of next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, and card removal forgetting prevention information 44y. be.

The jackpot type is 8R probability variation (special 2), and the fluctuation pattern types are normal reach A, B (variation time: 20 seconds), super reach A, B (variation time: 30 seconds), super reach C, D (variation time). : 60 seconds), the ending time is predetermined to be 20 seconds, and the ending effect pattern is a pattern displayed in the order of the next game state suggestion information 44w and the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y.

The jackpot type is 8R normal (special 1), and the fluctuation pattern types are normal reach A, B (variation time: 20 seconds), super reach A, B (variation time: 30 seconds), super reach C, D (variation time). : 60 seconds), the ending time is predetermined to be 25 seconds, and the ending effect pattern is a pattern displayed in the order of next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, and card removal forgetting prevention information 44y. be. In FIG. 61, the next game state suggestion information 44w is a character image of “chance!” Suggesting that the next game state is a low probability (normal) state but the support state is attached 100 times, so that it is a “chance”. Is abbreviated as.

The jackpot type is 8R normal (special 2), and the fluctuation pattern types are normal reach A, B (variation time: 20 seconds), super reach A, B (variation time: 30 seconds), super reach C, D (variation time). : 60 seconds), the ending time is predetermined to be 20 seconds, and the ending effect pattern is a pattern displayed in the order of the next game state suggestion information 44w and the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y. In FIG. 61, the next game state suggestion information 44w is a character image of "See you again!", Which suggests that the next game state is a low probability (normal) state and no support state is attached. Let's meet. "

When the jackpot type is 2R probability variation (special 1), the variation pattern type is a pattern (variation time: 15 seconds) that aligns with "341" without going through the reach, and the ending time is predetermined to be 5 seconds. The ending effect pattern is, for example, a pattern in which only the manufacturer information 44x is displayed. Even if the manufacturer information 44x is displayed after the symbols are aligned in "341", it is difficult for the player to notice that it is a big hit state, so the player shifts to a high probability / support state in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to notice. Can be made to.

When the jackpot type is 2R probability variation (special 2), the fluctuation pattern type is a pattern (variation time: 15 seconds) that aligns with "341" without going through the reach, and the ending time is predetermined to be 5 seconds. The ending effect pattern is a pattern in which only the privilege information 44p is displayed. The privilege information 44p is, for example, a moving image or a still image suggesting the current setting information in the case of a pachinko machine with settings. Regardless of whether or not the player notices the jackpot state, if the current setting information can be known, the high probability and support state after that can be further enjoyed.

Since the 2R probability variation jackpot is a jackpot that shifts to a high probability / support state without clearly indicating the fact to the player, the next game state suggestion information 44w is not set in the ending effect pattern. In addition, the 2R probability variation jackpot is set to a short time so that it is difficult for the game ball to open the big winning opening 32a of each round, so there is no prize ball payout, so the card removal forgetting prevention information 44z is also an ending effect. Not set in the pattern. Further, since the fluctuation time of the 2R probability variation jackpot is short and it is difficult for the player to be absorbed in the game, the insertion prevention information 44z is not set in the ending effect pattern.

As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to show the ending effect that is predicted to be the most appropriate for the player at that time according to the jackpot type and the fluctuation pattern type.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment,
The jackpot ending effect has a plurality of ending effect patterns in which a predetermined image is combined from a plurality of types of images.
The ending effect pattern differs depending on the type of jackpot round game state.

According to such a configuration, the jackpot ending effect has a plurality of ending effect patterns in which a predetermined image is combined from a plurality of types of images, and the ending effect pattern depends on the type of the jackpot round gaming state. By being different, it is possible to show the player a combination of images preferable to the player according to the type of the jackpot round gaming state as a jackpot ending effect. For example, the gaming machine according to (A8) above.

Further, the jackpot ending effect according to the jackpot round gaming state of a predetermined type (for example, 16R probability variation (special 1)) has a predetermined ending effect pattern in which a plurality of types (for example, 4 types) of images are combined in a predetermined combination. death,
The jackpot ending effect according to the jackpot round gaming state of another type (for example, 8R probability variation (special 1)) is different by reducing one or more images among the plurality of types of images included in the predetermined combination pattern. The ending effect pattern is composed.
Further, the jackpot ending effect according to the jackpot round gaming state of another type (for example, 2R probability variation (special 1)) reduces the number of images (for example, 3 types) among the plurality of types of images included in the predetermined combination pattern. As a result, another ending effect pattern is constructed.

According to such a configuration, the jackpot ending effect according to a predetermined type of jackpot round game state has a predetermined combination pattern in which a plurality of types of images are combined in a predetermined combination, and another type of jackpot round game. In the jackpot ending effect according to the state, another combination pattern is configured by reducing one or a plurality of images among the plurality of types of images included in the predetermined combination pattern. As a result, for the gaming machine, the processing load when determining the jackpot ending effect according to the type of the jackpot round gaming state is reduced. Further, since the combination pattern of the jackpot ending effect is determined for each type of the jackpot round gaming state, it becomes easy to provide the player with the jackpot ending effect associated with the type of the jackpot round gaming state. For example, the gaming machine according to (A9) above.

In addition, the jackpot ending effect is one in which a plurality of types of images are continuously executed in a predetermined combination.
When the result of the jackpot lottery by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is the jackpot result, the predetermined combination is displayed in a different combination according to the type of the variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot result.
In the ending right-handed information 44k, next game state proximity information 44l, and ending countdown information 44v, the start timing of the next high probability, support state, etc. is until the timing when a plurality of types of images are continuously executed in a predetermined combination. It suggests to the player that it has not arrived.

According to such a configuration, the jackpot ending effect is continuously executed in a predetermined combination of a plurality of types of images. When the result of the jackpot lottery by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is the jackpot result, the predetermined combination is displayed in a different combination depending on the type of the variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot result. As a result, the same jackpot result as the jackpot result that generates a certain kind of jackpot round game state is obtained, but when the type of variation pattern leading to the jackpot result is different, the same jackpot ending effect is displayed. The disadvantage can be reduced. Further, for the next game state proximity information 44l and the like, the player is informed that the start timing of the next high probability / support state, etc. has not arrived until the timing when a plurality of types of images are continuously executed in a predetermined combination. As suggested, even if the same jackpot result is displayed but a different jackpot ending effect is displayed, the risk of suffering the above-mentioned disadvantage is reduced. For example, the gaming machine according to (A10) above.

Further, the jackpot ending effect has a plurality of ending effect patterns in which a predetermined image is combined from a plurality of types of images.
The ending effect pattern differs depending on the length of time during which the identification information variation display effect based on the variation pattern is performed.
For example, in the case of a 2R probability variable jackpot, which is clearly shorter than other jackpots, the time is shorter than the ending effect of other jackpots because one type of ending effect pattern is used.

According to such a configuration, the jackpot ending effect has a plurality of ending effect patterns in which a predetermined image is combined from a plurality of types of images, and the ending effect pattern is an identification information variation display effect based on the variation pattern. It is possible to show the player a combination of images preferable to the player as a jackpot ending effect according to the length of time for the identification information variation display effect. For example, the gaming machine according to (A11) above.

Further, the jackpot ending effect has a plurality of ending effect patterns in which a predetermined image is combined from a plurality of types of images.
The ending effect pattern differs depending on the degree of expectation that a jackpot result will occur in the identification information variation display effect based on the variation pattern.
For example, in the case of the spar reach E and F having the highest expectation of a big hit, the ending effect pattern including the light emission gaze prevention information 44o is displayed because the fluctuation time is the longest and the screen is accompanied by intense blinking.

According to such a configuration, the jackpot ending effect has a plurality of ending effect patterns in which a predetermined image is combined from a plurality of types of images, and the ending effect pattern is an identification information variation display effect based on the variation pattern. By differently depending on the degree of expectation that the jackpot result will occur, it is possible to show the player a combination of images that is preferable for the player according to the degree of expectation that the jackpot result will occur in the identification information variation display effect as the jackpot ending effect. .. For example, the gaming machine described in (A12) above.

Further, as for the ending effect pattern, whether the result of the big hit lottery by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that triggers the entry into the start winning device 33a for the special figure 1 becomes the big hit result, or the start winning device 33b for the special figure 2 is used. The combination of a plurality of types of images in the jackpot ending effect differs depending on whether the result of the jackpot lottery by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that triggers the entry of the ball is the jackpot result.
For example, the special 1 jackpot ending effect pattern includes the manufacturer information 44x, but the special 2 jackpot ending pattern does not include the manufacturer information 44x. Further, for example, in the case of the 8R normal jackpot, when the ball is entered into the start winning device 33b for the special figure 2, the support state is not attached, so that the content of the next game state suggestion information 44w is added to the start winning device 33a for the special figure 1. It is different from the case where the ball enters the ball.

According to such a configuration, the ending effect pattern is determined by whether the result of the big hit lottery by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that triggers the entry into the start winning device 33a for special figure 1 is the big hit result, or for special figure 2. The combination of a plurality of types of images in the jackpot ending effect differs depending on whether the result of the jackpot lottery by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that triggers the entry into the start winning device 33b is the jackpot result. As a result, it is possible to show the player a combination of images preferable to the player as a jackpot ending effect according to the difference in the trigger of the jackpot lottery. For example, the gaming machine according to (A14) above.

In the gaming machine of the second embodiment, the display pattern of the ending information 44j is different depending on the hit type and the variation pattern type, but the display pattern of the ending information 44j may be different depending on other conditions. Specifically, in this embodiment, the display pattern of the ending information 44j is different depending on the situation until the big hit of this time occurs. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63. FIG. 62 (a) is a special figure 1 big hit lottery table of the third embodiment, and FIG. 62 (b) is a special figure 2 big hit lottery table. FIG. 63 is a table for setting an ending effect pattern.

In this embodiment, different ending effect patterns are set according to the situation until the current jackpot occurs (the jackpot occurrence situation). The jackpot occurrence status is the number of fluctuations from the immediately preceding jackpot to the jackpot, the type of the immediately preceding jackpot, and the like.

The relationship between the hit type and the ending time will be explained. The ending time of the first embodiment was set according to the hit type (difference between the special figure 1 big hit and the special figure 2 big hit and the difference in the number of big hit rounds), but the ending time of this embodiment is the special figure 1. It stays different depending on the difference between the big hit and the special figure 2 big hit. That is, the ending time of the special figure 1 jackpot is 35 seconds for all of the 16R probability variation jackpot, the 8R probability variation jackpot, and the 8R normal jackpot. The ending time of the special figure 2 jackpot is 30 seconds for all of the 16R probability variation jackpot, the 8R probability variation jackpot, and the 8R normal jackpot.

Next, the relationship between the probability change continuation of the hit type and the number of electric support will be described. In Example 1, the probability change continuation and the number of electric support of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 probability change jackpot were 100 times, but in this embodiment, the probability change continuation and the number of electric support of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 probability change jackpot were 100 times. Is different in that it is until the next time.

When the jackpot type is 16R probability variation (special 1) and the number of fluctuations from the previous jackpot to the jackpot is less than 100 times, the ending effect pattern is the next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, forgetting to remove the card. It is a pattern displayed in the order of prevention information 44y and privilege video 44n. It is possible to increase the satisfaction of being a big hit with a small number of fluctuations from the previous big hit.

When the jackpot type is 16R probability variation (special 1) and the number of fluctuations from the previous jackpot to the jackpot is 100 or more and less than 200, the ending effect pattern is the next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, It is a pattern displayed in the order of the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y and the first insertion prevention information 44z1. The first squeeze prevention information 44z1 is the same text information as the squeeze prevention information 44z of the first embodiment, that is, "pachinko and pachislot are moderately enjoyable games".

When the jackpot type is 16R probability variation (special 1) and the number of fluctuations from the previous jackpot to the jackpot is 200 times or more, the ending effect pattern is the next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, forgetting to remove the card. It is a pattern displayed in the order of prevention information 44y and second digging prevention information 44z2. The second squeeze prevention information 44z2 is stronger than the first squeeze prevention information 44z1 and appeals to the player to prevent squeezing. It is an illustration that appeals.

When the jackpot type is 16R probability variation (special 2), the ending effect pattern is the next game status suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, card removal prevention information regardless of whether the previous jackpot is 16R or 8R jackpot. It is a pattern displayed in the order of 44y and the privilege video 44n. The fact that the jackpot is a special figure 2 jackpot means that the jackpot was won during a high probability / support state or a low probability / support state. In other words, there is a possibility that the jackpot was won because the number of fluctuations from the previous jackpot was not so large, and it is possible that the prize ball won in the previous jackpot was not significantly reduced and the jackpot was reached. In addition, it is unlikely that the prize ball won by the jackpot will be lower than the prize ball won by the previous jackpot. Therefore, in this situation, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by increasing the satisfaction of the player by showing the privilege video 44n, rather than appealing to prevent the player from getting stuck.

When the jackpot type is 8R probability variation (special 1), the ending effect pattern is as follows, as in the case of 16R probability variation (special 1) described above, if the number of fluctuations from the previous jackpot to the jackpot is less than 100 times. The game state suggestion information 44w, the manufacturer information 44x, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, and the privilege video 44n are displayed in this order. If the number of fluctuations from the previous jackpot to the jackpot is 100 or more and less than 200, the first immersive prevention information 44z1 is displayed instead of the privilege video 44n as in the case of the above-mentioned 16R probability variation (special 1). .. If the number of fluctuations from the previous jackpot to the jackpot is 200 or more, the second sinking prevention information 44z2 is displayed instead of the first sinking prevention information 44z1 as in the case of the above-mentioned 16R probability variation (special 1). ..

When the jackpot type is 8R probability variation (special 2) and the previous jackpot is 16R probability variation (special 1) (special 2), the ending effect pattern is the next game state suggestion information 44w, card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, privilege. The images are displayed in the order of 44n. Although the prize balls won in the jackpot are lower than the prize balls won in the previous jackpot, the player has still plenty of balls to hold because he has won 16 rounds of prize balls in the previous jackpot. Because there is a possibility.

The jackpot type is 8R probability variation (special 2), but the ending effect pattern when the previous jackpot is 8R probability variation (special 1) (special 2) and 8R normal (special 1) is the next game state suggestion information 44w, The card removal prevention information 44y and the first insertion prevention information 44z1 are displayed in this order. The prize ball won by the jackpot is the same as the prize ball won by the previous jackpot, but since the prize ball for 8 rounds is only won by the previous jackpot, there is no room for the player's ball. Because there is a possibility.

The ending effect pattern when the jackpot type is 8R normal (special 1) is the same as the ending effect pattern when the jackpot type is 8R probability variation (special 1).

When the jackpot type is 8R normal (special 2), the ending effect pattern is that the previous jackpot was 16R probability variation (special 1) (special 2), 8R probability variation (special 1) (special 2), 8R normal (special 1). Even so, the next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, and the second digging prevention information 44z2 are displayed in this order. This is because even if the previous jackpot is any of the above jackpots, it will be returned to the state of low probability and no support after the jackpot, so there is a possibility that the number of balls held will be greatly reduced from now on.

As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to show the ending effect that is predicted to be the most appropriate for the player at that time according to the situation from the previous jackpot to the jackpot.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment,
The jackpot ending effect has a plurality of ending effect patterns in which a predetermined image is combined from a plurality of types of images.
The ending effect pattern differs depending on the number of executions of the identification information variation display effect from the occurrence of the previous jackpot round gaming state to the next occurrence of the jackpot round gaming state.

According to such a configuration, the jackpot ending effect has a plurality of ending effect patterns formed by combining predetermined images from a plurality of types of images, and the ending effect pattern is generated in the previous jackpot round gaming state. The next big hit round game state occurs after the previous big hit round game state occurs because it differs depending on the number of executions of the identification information fluctuation display effect from then to the next big hit round game state. It is possible to show the player a combination of images preferable to the player as a jackpot ending effect according to the number of times the identification information variation display effect is executed. For example, the gaming machine according to (A13) above.

The gaming machine of the first embodiment displays the information 44a as the end-of-specification proximity information 44e by blinking the information 44a during the specific operation period. May be displayed. This will be described with reference to FIG. 64 (a1) to (a3) are diagrams for explaining the display mode of the proximity information at the end of the specific operation period in the fourth embodiment, and (b1) to (b3) are different from (a1) to (a3). It is a figure explaining the display mode of.

Here, it is assumed that this high-speed fluctuation is completely out of alignment and the fluctuation time is 20 seconds. The high-speed fluctuation time is 15 seconds, and only the information 44a during the specific operation period is displayed until the first 5 seconds, and the proximity information 44e at the end of the specific operation period is displayed from the lapse of 5 seconds to 15 seconds. Since the high-speed fluctuation ends after 15 seconds have elapsed, it is assumed that the proximity information 44e at the end of the specific operation period disappears.

As shown in (a1), the high-speed changing screen 43c is displayed on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 from the start of the change to the fifth second. As shown in (a2), as shown in (a2), the information 44a during the specific operation period is blinked and displayed in the upper right corner of the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c when 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fluctuation. Information 44e1 is displayed. At the same time, the second specific operation period end proximity information 44e2 that informs the player that the end timing of the specific operation period is approaching is displayed in a display mode different from that of the first specific operation period end proximity information 44e1.

Specifically, as shown in (a2), on the left side of the proximity information 44e1 at the end of the first specific operation period, for example, the second specification represented by the character information "10 seconds later. Change the volume as soon as possible". The end-of-operation period proximity information 44e2 is displayed. If time information is added, it will be easier for the player to understand. The high-speed fluctuation ends 15 seconds after the fluctuation starts, and as shown in (a3), the left symbol stop screen 43d is displayed, and the first specific operation period end proximity information 44e1 and the second specific operation period end proximity information 44e2 are not. Be displayed.

With such second specific operation period end proximity information 44e2, the player can clearly understand that the end timing of the specific operation period is approaching.

Next, another display mode will be described with reference to (b1) to (b3).

As shown in (b1), on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42, the information 44a during the specific operation period is displayed on the upper right of the high-speed changing screen 43c. The information 44a during the specific operation period is displayed as the third specific operation period end proximity information 44e3, which is displayed faintly with the passage of time as shown in (b2). When the high-speed fluctuation approaches the end, as shown in (b3), the third specific operation period end-end proximity information 44e3 completely disappears on the left symbol stop screen 43d.

With such third specific operation period end proximity information 44e3, the player can intuitively understand that the end timing of the specific operation period is approaching.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the second specific operation period end proximity information 44e2 indicates the remaining time of the displayable period of the specific operation screen 44b for volume control. Includes terminal proximity information 44e2 (for example, a text image such as "10 seconds later. Change volume as soon as possible"). It may be suggested without including the time information, such as "Change the volume as soon as possible".

According to such a configuration, the specific operation period end proximity information 44e indicates (suggests) the remaining time of the displayable period of the specific operation screen 44b for volume control, and the second specific operation period end proximity information 44e2 (for example, "" 10 seconds left. Text images such as "Change volume as soon as possible" and "Change volume as soon as possible") are included. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the remaining time of the period during which the specific operation can be performed in the predetermined period during the identification information variation display. For example, the gaming machine described in (B3) above.

The gaming machine according to the first embodiment displays the next gaming state proximity information 44l by blinking the ending right-handed information 44k at the end of the ending period, but the next gaming state proximity is displayed in another embodiment. Information 44l may be displayed. This will be described with reference to FIG. 65. 65 (a1) to (a3) are diagrams for explaining the display mode of the next game state proximity information 44l in the fifth embodiment, and (b1) to (b3) are different from (a1) to (a3). It is a figure explaining the display mode of.

As shown in (a1), the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 displays the ending screen 43j at the timing when the entanglement prevention information 44z is displayed. Similar to the first embodiment, the ending right-handed information 44k is displayed on the upper left of the ending screen 43j. The right-handed information 44k during the ending is displayed as the first next game state proximity information 44l1 by blinking and displaying as in the first embodiment as shown in (a2).

At this time, on the right side of the first next game state proximity information 44l1, the start timing of the next game state is approaching (in other words, the current game) in a manner different from that of the first next game state proximity information 44l1. The second next game state proximity information 44l2 that informs the player that the end timing of the state is approaching is displayed. Specifically, the second next game state proximity information 44l2 informs that it is not yet time to start right-handed in the next game state (high probability / support state or low probability / support state). It is character information such as "yo".

As shown in (a3), the first next game state proximity information 44l1 and the second next game state proximity information 44l2 are hidden at the timing of switching to the high probability state screen 43k at which the next game state is started. It is said that. On the high-probability state screen 43k, instead of the first next game state proximity information 44l1 and the second next game state proximity information 44l2, the high-probability / support state right-handed information 44m is displayed. ing.

From such a second next game state proximity information 44l2, the player can clearly understand that the start timing of the next game state is approaching.

Next, another display mode will be described with reference to (b1) to (b3).

As shown in (b1), on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42, the ending screen 43j at the timing when the entanglement prevention information 44z is displayed is displayed, and the right-handed information 44k during the ending is displayed. As shown in (b2), the ending right-handed information 44k is displayed blinking and displayed as the first next game state proximity information 44l1. At this time, on the right side of the first next game state proximity information 44l1, the third next game state proximity information 44l3, which is illustration information indicating that the next game state has not yet occurred, is displayed. The third next game state proximity information 44l3 is displayed as right-handed information 44k during the ending (at the timing shown in (b2), it is the first next game state proximity information 44l1). , It is an image showing how the image of the hand is stopped.

When the ending period ends, as shown in (b3), the first next game state proximity information 44l1 and the third next game state proximity information 44l3 are hidden, and the high probability state screen 43k and the high probability support Right-handed information 44m is displayed during the state.

With such a third next game state proximity information 44l3, the player can intuitively understand that the end timing of the ending period is approaching and the start timing of the next game state is approaching.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment,
The right-handed notification mode (second aspect) in the jackpot ending effect is a mode in which it is more difficult for the player to perform a right-handed operation than the right-handed notification mode (first aspect) in the jackpot round gaming state. For example, the second aspect is the ending middle right-handed information 44k indicated by the characters "right-handed" and the right-pointing arrow, and the first aspect is "still!" Displayed near the ending right-handed information 44k. It is the second next game state proximity information 44l2 shown by the character information of the above and the illustration that suppresses right-handed hitting. The text information of "Not yet!" And the illustrations that stop right-handed hitting can discourage the player from right-handed hitting operation.

According to such a configuration, it is more difficult for the player to perform the right-handed operation in the right-handed notification mode (first aspect) in the jackpot ending effect than in the right-handed notification mode (second aspect) in the jackpot round gaming state. It is an aspect. As a result, it becomes difficult to recognize that the execution timing of the right-handed game is during the execution of the jackpot ending effect. The disadvantages caused by misidentification can be reduced. For example, the gaming machine described in (C3) above.

The next game state proximity information 44l may be displayed in a display mode different from that of Examples 1 and 5. Specifically, 44 liters of next game state proximity information having different contents from those of Examples 1 and 5 are displayed. This will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 66 (a) to 66 (e) are diagrams illustrating a display mode of the next game state proximity information 441 of the sixth embodiment.

As shown in (a), on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42, the ending screen 43j at the timing when the entanglement prevention information 44z is displayed is displayed, and the right-handed information 44k during the ending is displayed. Three seconds before the end of the ending period, the right-handed information 44k during the ending is gradually expanded as shown in (b), so that the next game state (a game state requiring right-handed) approaches. It is displayed as the fourth next game state proximity information 44l4 that informs the player that the player is present. At the same time, on the right side of the fourth next game state proximity information 44l4, the fifth next game informs the player that the start timing of the next game state is approaching by counting down the time until the end of the ending period. The state proximity information 44l5 is displayed. In (b), "3" is displayed in the encircled character indicating that it is 3 seconds until the start of the next gaming state.

As shown in (c), when one second has passed from (b), the fourth next game state proximity information 44l4 is expanded beyond the timing of (b). The fifth next game state proximity information 44l5 is displayed as "2" in the encircled character indicating the remaining time of 2 seconds.

As shown in (d), when one second has passed from (c), the fourth next game state proximity information 44l4 is further expanded than the timing of (b). The fifth next game state proximity information 44l5 is displayed as "1" in the encircled character indicating the remaining time of 1 second.

As shown in (e), when the ending period ends and the next high probability / support state is started, the fourth next game state proximity information 44l4 and the fifth next game state proximity information 44l5 are hidden. Then, the right-handed information 44m in the high probability / support state, which is larger than the fourth next game state proximity information 44l4 shown in (d), is displayed.

With the fourth next game state proximity information 44l4 and the fifth next game state proximity information 44l5, the player can know that the end timing of the ending period is approaching and the start timing of the next gaming state is approaching. It can be understood more intuitively.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment,
Further, the display control device 45 hits right in the third aspect suggesting that the second aspect returns to the first aspect in the final stage of the jackpot ending effect (for example, the period from 3 seconds before the end of the ending effect to the end time). Notify. For example, the fourth next game state proximity information 44l4 that gradually enlarges and displays the right-handed information 44j during the ending is displayed. In addition, the fifth next game state proximity information 44l5, which counts down the time from 3 seconds before the end of the ending effect to the end, is displayed.

According to such a configuration, the display control device 45 suggests that the display control device 45 returns from the second aspect to the first aspect in the final stage of the jackpot ending effect (for example, the period from 3 seconds before the end of the ending effect to the end time). Right-handed notification is performed in the third aspect. As a result, right-handed notification can be quickly resumed at the timing when the jackpot ending effect shifts to the next high probability / support state. For example, the gaming machine described in (C5) above.

The next game state proximity information 44l may be displayed in a display mode different from that of Examples 1, 5 and 6. Specifically, in this embodiment, the game ball launched based on the next game state proximity information 441 is the first opening of the electric accessory of the start winning device 33b for Special Figure 2 in the next high probability / support state and the like. The next game state proximity information 44l is continuously displayed until a timing different from that of the first, fifth, and sixth embodiments so that the ball can be entered at the timing. This will be described with reference to FIG. 67. 67 is a diagram for explaining the display mode of the next game state proximity information 441 of the seventh embodiment.

As shown in (a), on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42, the ending screen 43j at the timing when the entanglement prevention information 44z is displayed is displayed, and the right-handed information 44k during the ending is displayed.

Since a large number of game balls pass through the normal symbol start port 34 by right-handed hitting during the jackpot round, in (a), the four hold lamps 41c for holding the fluctuation of the normal symbol in the second symbol display device 41. Indicates that all are on hold. After the end of the ending period, that is, at the same time as the next high probability / support state or low probability / support state occurs, the fluctuation of the normal symbol starts. In the support state, the result of the lottery of ordinary symbols will be the winning result with almost all the probability. When the lottery of the first ordinary symbol is the winning result, the first opening timing of the electric accessory of the special figure 2 start winning device 33b in the next high probability / support state, etc. is the next high probability / support state, etc. It is assumed that it is 5 seconds after the start. The time until the game ball fired by the right-handed operation wins the opening prize device 33b for Special Figure 2 is 4 seconds after the launch.

Here, it is assumed that the display mode of the next game state proximity information 441 is set so that the player strikes right at the same time as the end of the ending period as in Examples 1, 5 and 6. Since the first game ball hit to the right at the end of the ending period passes through the starting port 34 for the normal symbol, the hold of the normal symbol increases. However, this first game ball does not win the special figure 2 start winning device 33b due to the time relationship described above. In this sense, this first game ball is wasted. The wider the time interval in the above-mentioned time relationship, the larger the number of game balls that are wasted.

In this respect, in this embodiment, the display timing of the next game state proximity information 441 is delayed so that the first game ball wins the start winning device 33b for the special figure 2. That is, as shown in (b), the fourth next game state proximity information 44l4 and the fifth next game state proximity information 44l5 start to be displayed from the timing 2 seconds before the end of the ending period. Specifically, the fourth next game state proximity information 44l4 becomes an enlarged image showing the high probability / support state right-handed information 44 m after 3 seconds from the reduced image showing the ending right-handed information 44k. As shown above, it is a display that gradually increases the right-handed information 44k during the ending. At this timing, the ending right-handed information 44k is one-fourth the size of the high-probability / supported right-handed information 44m. The fifth next game state proximity information 44l5 is a display that counts down the remaining time (3 seconds) from this timing to the restart of right-handed hitting in the next high-probability / support state. The fifth next game state proximity information 44l5 is displayed as "3" in the encircled character.

As shown in (c), at the timing 1 second before the end of the ending period, the fourth next game state proximity information 44l4 has a high probability of right-handed information 44k during the ending and 3 minutes of right-handed information 44m during the support state. The display is enlarged to the size of 1. The fifth next game state proximity information 44l5 is displayed as "2" in the enclosing character.

As shown in (d), at the start timing of the next high probability / support state, the fourth next game state proximity information 44l4 changes the ending right-handed information 44k to the high-probability / support state right-handed information 44m 3 The display is enlarged to half the size. The fifth next game state proximity information 44l5 is displayed as "1" in the encircled character.

As shown in (e), at the timing one second after the start of the next high probability / support state, the fourth next game state proximity information 44l4 sets the ending right-handed information 44k to the high probability / support state middle right. The display is enlarged to the same size as the hitting information 44m. That is, instead of the fourth next game state proximity information 44l4, the right-handed information 44m in the high probability / support state is displayed. The fifth next game state proximity information 44l5 erases the encircled characters. That is, the countdown has ended. At this timing, the player starts the right-handed operation.

As shown in (f), the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c is displayed at the timing of 5 seconds after the start of the next high-probability / support state. At this timing, the start winning device 33b for special figure 2 is in an open state based on the winning result of the first ordinary symbol lottery. The game ball launched at the timing of (e) reaches the start winning device 33b for special figure 2 after 4 seconds, that is, 5 seconds after the start of the next high-probability / support state. In this way, after the player interrupts the right-handed strike during the ending period, the game ball first launched by the player is the start winning device 33b for the special figure 2 at the first opening timing of the start winning device 33b for the special figure 2. To win a prize. This makes it possible to prevent the game ball that the player first fires from being wasted.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment,
The display control device 45 indicates that the start timing of the right-handed operation for the next high probability / support state is approaching, and the fifth next game state proximity information 44l5 (for the next high probability / support state, etc.). Countdown information up to the start timing of the right-handed operation) is displayed.

According to such a configuration, the display control device 45 notifies the fifth next game state proximity information 44l5 indicating that the start timing of the right-handed operation for the next high probability / support state is approaching. .. This makes it easier to grasp the start timing of the right-handed operation for the next high probability, support state, and the like. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by not being able to properly grasp the start timing of the right-handed operation for the next high probability, support state, and the like. For example, the gaming machine described in (C7) above.

The display control device 45 has the next high probability from the jackpot ending effect to the next high probability / support state (the period from 2 seconds before the end of the jackpot ending effect to the next high probability / 1 second after the start of the support state). -Displays the fifth next game state proximity information 44l5 (countdown information) indicating that the start timing of the right-handed operation for the support state or the like is approaching.

According to such a configuration, the display control device 45 has a fifth next game state proximity information 44l5 (countdown information) indicating that the start timing of the next high probability / support state is approaching in the jackpot ending effect. Is notified. This makes it easier to grasp the start timing of the right-handed operation for the next gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage caused by not being able to properly grasp the start timing of the right-handed operation for the next high probability, support state, and the like. For example, the gaming machine described in (C8) above.

The next game state proximity information 44l may be displayed at a timing different from that of the seventh embodiment. Specifically, in this embodiment, the game ball launched based on the next game state proximity information 441 before the end of the ending period is the electric motor of the start winning device 33b for special figure 2 in the next high probability / support state and the like. The next game state proximity information 44l is displayed until a timing different from that of the seventh embodiment so that the ball can be entered at the first opening timing of the accessory. This will be described with reference to FIG. 68. 68 is a diagram illustrating the display mode of the next game state proximity information 441 of the eighth embodiment in FIGS. 68A and 68F.

As shown in (a), at the timing 6 seconds before the end of the ending period, the immersive prevention information 44z and the ending right-handed information 44k are displayed on the ending screen 43j.

When the lottery of the first ordinary symbol is the winning result, the first opening timing of the electric accessory of the special figure 2 start winning device 33b in the next high probability / support state is earlier than that of the seventh embodiment, for example. It is assumed that it is 2 seconds after the start of the next high probability / support state. The time until the game ball launched by the right-handed operation wins the opening winning device 33b for the special figure 2 is 4 seconds after the launch, as in the seventh embodiment.

In the present embodiment, the display timing of the next game state proximity information 441 is earlier than that of the seventh embodiment so that the first game ball wins the start winning device 33b for the special figure 2. That is, as shown in (b), the fourth next game state proximity information 44l4 and the fifth next game state proximity information 44l5 start to be displayed from the timing 5 seconds before the end of the ending period. Specifically, the fourth next game state proximity information 44l4 starts to expand the ending right-handed information 44k from this timing. From this timing, the fifth next game state proximity information 44l5 displays "3" in the encircled character as a countdown display.

As shown in (c), at the timing 4 seconds before the end of the ending period, the fourth next game state proximity information 44l4 has a high probability of right-handed information 44k during the ending and 3 minutes of right-handed information 44m during the support state. Expand to the size of 1. The fifth next game state proximity information 44l5 displays "2" as a circled character as a countdown display.

As shown in (d), at the timing 3 seconds before the end of the ending period, the fourth next game state proximity information 44l4 has a high probability of right-handed information 44k during the ending and 3 minutes of right-handed information 44m during the support state. Expand to the size of 2. The fifth next game state proximity information 44l5 displays "1" as a circled character as a countdown display.

As shown in (e), at the timing 2 seconds before the end of the ending period, the fourth next game state proximity information 44l4 has the same size as the ending right-handed information 44k with a high probability and the support state right-handed information 44m. Expand to that extent. That is, the fourth next game state proximity information 44l4 is replaced with the right-handed information 44m in the high probability / support state. The fifth next game state proximity information 44l5 erases the encircled characters as the countdown ends. At this timing, the player starts the right-handed operation.

As shown in (f), the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c is displayed at the timing of 2 seconds after the start of the next high-probability / support state. At this timing, the start winning device 33b for special figure 2 is in an open state based on the winning result of the first ordinary symbol lottery. The game ball launched at the timing of (e) reaches the start winning device 33b for special figure 2 after 4 seconds, that is, 2 seconds after the start of the next high-probability / support state. In this way, after the player interrupts the right-handed strike during the ending period, the game ball first launched by the player is the start winning device 33b for the special figure 2 at the first opening timing of the start winning device 33b for the special figure 2. To win a prize.

As a result, the first opening timing of the electric accessory of the special figure 2 start winning device 33b in the next high probability / support state is earlier than that in the seventh embodiment, for example, from the start of the next high probability / support state. Even at the timing of 2 seconds later, it is possible to prevent the game ball first launched by the player from being wasted.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment,
In the jackpot ending effect (the period from 5 seconds before the end of the jackpot ending effect to 2 seconds before the end), the display control device 45 is approaching the start timing of the right-handed operation for the next high probability, support state, and the like. The fifth next game state proximity information 44l5 (countdown information) indicating that is notified.

According to such a configuration, the display control device 45 hits right for the next high probability, support state, etc. in the jackpot ending effect (the period from 5 seconds before the end of the jackpot ending effect to 2 seconds before the end). The fifth next game state proximity information 44l5 (countdown information) indicating that the start timing of the operation is approaching is notified. As a result, the player can execute the right-handed operation for the next high probability, support state, etc. at an appropriate timing during the jackpot ending effect. For example, the gaming machine described in (C9) above.

This embodiment differs from the previous embodiments in that the sound output during the volume change operation is associated with the display effect. Further, the display mode of the next game state proximity information is also different from the previous embodiments. This point will be described with reference to FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of a specific operation period after the end of the jackpot round game of the ninth embodiment.

The information 44a during the specific operation period is the character information of "volume can be changed" in the first embodiment, and functions as the end-of-specification period proximity information 44e that is displayed blinking when this character information reaches the end of the ending time. In the present embodiment, the information 44a during the specific operation period is the character information of "the volume can be changed by pressing the button during the ending" as shown in (b) to (g). The end-of-term proximity information 44e of the specific operation period is displayed as a seek bar or an indicator image indicating the elapsed time of the ending effect. As a result, when the seek bar or the indicator image approaches the end time, it is possible to intuitively recognize that the end of the specific operation period is approaching (that is, the start timing of the next gaming state is approaching).

Further, in this embodiment, when the player presses any of the frame buttons 80, the ending screen 43j is switched to the specific operation screen 44b. That is, not only the decision button 81 but also the left selection button 82 and the right selection button 83 are pressed to switch to the specific operation screen 44b. That is, unlike the reach display effect and the jackpot round display effect, the operation means such as the frame button 80 is not operated during the ending effect, so that any of the information 44a is displayed during the specific operation period. If the operating means is operated, it is possible to facilitate the volume change operation of the player by making it determine that the volume change operation has been performed. Of course, if the gaming machine has a hand held over a predetermined area of the display screen 42a instead of pressing the frame button 80 during the reach display effect or the jackpot round display effect, the specific operation is performed by holding the hand over the display screen 42a. You may switch to the screen 45b.

When any of the frame buttons 80 is pressed during the ending period from (b) to (g), for example, during the display period of the immersive prevention information 44z shown in (e), as shown in (i), it is specified. Switch to the operation screen 44b. When the enter button 81 is pressed at the time of switching to the specific operation screen 44b, the immersive prevention information 44z "Pachinko and pachislot are games for moderate enjoyment" is output. As shown in (j), when either the left selection button 82 or the right selection button 83 for changing the volume is operated on the specific operation screen 44b, the sound output unit 24 provides "pachinko" as the intrusion prevention information 44z. , Pachislot is a game to enjoy moderately. " This voice is output at the changed volume each time the player presses the left selection button 82 or the right selection button 83 as the volume change operation.

As a result, the player does not know what is displayed as the ending information 44j at that timing because the ending information 44j is hidden behind the specific operation screen 44b after switching to the specific operation screen 44b. However, the volume can be changed while listening to the voice corresponding to the ending information 44j that will be displayed when the volume is changed. Therefore, even if the volume change operation is performed during the ending effect period, the ending information 44j can be transmitted to the player.

If the volume change operation is during the display period of the next game state proximity information 44w, the voice "one more time" is output, and if the display period is the manufacturer information 44x, the voice "SANYO" is output and the card is removed. During the display period of the forgotten prevention information 44y, the voice "Please be careful not to forget to remove the prepaid card" is output.

Further, when the ending information 44j is changed to a different ending information 44j during the volume change (for example, when the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y is changed to the insertion prevention information 44z), the voice corresponding to the changed ending information 44j. (For example, the voice of "Pachinko and pachislot are games for moderate enjoyment" corresponding to the immersive prevention information 44z) is output. As a result, when the volume is changed, the player can change the volume while listening to the voice corresponding to the ending information 44j displayed at the time of the change operation.

If the display effect when the volume is changed is a predetermined unrelated display effect (for example, a variable display effect that displays the high-speed fluctuating screen 43c that cannot be output as audio), a sound not related to the display effect (“Volume 1”). , Volume 2 "and" Pi, Pi "and other sound effects). As a result, when the display effect at the time of changing the volume is a predetermined display effect that cannot be associated, the player is given discomfort or inconvenience by forcibly associating the display effect that is inappropriate for the association. Can be prevented.

It should be noted that, for example, the immersive prevention information 44z may be slightly reflected behind the specific operation screen 44b. This reflection is such that the characters of the immersive prevention information 44z are not recognized. For example, at least a part (for example, the outline of the display information in the case of the immersion prevention information 44z) is superimposed and displayed behind the specific operation screen 44b in a visible manner. Since the ending information 44j can be checked slightly while performing the volume change operation, it is possible to perform the volume change operation with confidence without worrying that the ending display effect may end during the volume change operation. can.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, the third symbol display device 42 capable of displaying the display effect, the sound output unit 24 that outputs the sound according to the display effect, and the operation by the player. The sound output control that can change the volume of the sound output from the sound output unit 24 based on the operation of the enter button 81, the left selection button 82, the right selection button 83, and the frame button 80 that constitute the frame button 80. The voice output control device 46 includes the device 46, and the voice output control device 46 uses the operation sound at the time of changing the volume as a "pachinko" corresponding to the sound related to the ending display effect displayed during the period when the volume can be changed (for example, the immersive prevention information 44z). , Pachislot is a game to enjoy moderately. " As a result, the player can change the volume while listening to the sound related to the ending display effect when the volume is changed, so that the player can improve the fun of the operation of changing the volume. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (D1).

Further, the operation sound is changed from the ending display effect of displaying the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y to the ending display effect of displaying the immersive prevention information 44z when the ending display effect at the time of changing the volume is changed to a different display effect (for example, the ending display effect of displaying the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y). In the case), it is a sound related to the ending display effect after the change (for example, the sound of "Pachinko, Pachislot is a game for moderate enjoyment" corresponding to the immersive prevention information 44z). As a result, when the volume is changed, the player can change the volume while listening to the sound related to the ending display effect displayed at the time of the change operation, so that the optimum volume can be set at the time of the change operation. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (D2).

Further, the operation sound is a display effect that can be associated with a predetermined display effect when the volume is changed (for example, an ending display effect that displays card removal prevention information 44y, entanglement prevention information 44z, etc. that can be output as voice). In this case, the sound is related to the display effect, and the display effect when the volume is changed is a predetermined display effect that cannot be associated (for example, a variable display effect that displays the high-speed changing screen 43c that cannot be output as voice). Is a sound that is not related to the display effect (sounds such as "volume 1, volume 2" and "pi, pi"). As a result, when the display effect at the time of changing the volume is a predetermined display effect that cannot be associated, the player is given discomfort or inconvenience by forcibly associating the display effect that is inappropriate for the association. Can be prevented. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (D3).

Further, the image of the display effect displayed during the volume change operation is such that at least a part (for example, the outline of the display information in the case of the immersive prevention information 44z) can be visually recognized behind the image for the volume change operation. It is displayed superimposed on. As a result, a sufficient area for displaying an image for the volume change operation can be secured, so that the volume change operation becomes easy. Also, while the player is performing the volume change operation, the display effect being displayed can be confirmed by the image displayed superimposed on the back, so the display effect may end during the volume change operation. You can change the volume without worrying about it. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (D6).

In the above-described embodiment, the ending screen 43j (ending information 44j) is not displayed on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 while the specific operation screen 44b is being displayed, but this is displayed in the present embodiment. is doing. This point will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of a specific operation period after the end of the jackpot round game of the tenth embodiment.

70 (a) to 70 (h) are the same as those in FIG. 69, and the common contents refer to the description thereof. The display area of the ending information 44j is wider than that of FIG. 69, and each ending information 44j is displayed in the same display area.

Next, as shown in (i) and (j), when the player presses the frame button 80, the specific operation screen 44b is displayed on the third symbol display device 42. On the specific operation screen 44b, the ending information 44j, the change information display unit 44c, and the operation method display unit 44d are displayed. The ending information 44j is displayed in a part of the display area of the ending information 44j on the ending screen 43j in a smaller size than when the ending screen 43j is displayed. For example, the squeeze prevention information 44z is displayed as the squeeze prevention information reduction display unit 44z3 in which the characters "pachinko and pachislot are moderately enjoyable games" are reduced to a level that the player can recognize. In the display area of the ending information 44j on the ending screen 43j, the reduced ending information 44j, the change information display unit 44c, and the operation method display unit 44d are displayed. In this way, by using the common display area for the ending screen 43j and the specific operation screen 44b, the switching of the display area becomes smooth, and the player can be shown in a cohesive manner.

Further, in accordance with the volume change operation, the voice corresponding to the ending information 44j is output at the changed volume. As a result, when the volume is changed, the player can change the volume while watching the ending information 44j and listening to the voice corresponding to the ending information 44j. In addition, the player is worried that the ending display effect may end during the volume change operation because the ending information 44j being displayed can be confirmed in the reduced image while the volume is being changed. You can change the volume without worrying about it.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, the third symbol display device 42 has an ending display effect (for example, squeeze prevention information reduced display 44z3) and volume information (for example, change information indicating the volume) when the volume is changed. Display unit 44c) and can be displayed. As a result, when the volume is changed, the player can change the volume while watching the ending display effect and listening to the sound related to the ending display effect, so that the player can improve the fun of the operation of changing the volume. can. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (D4).

Further, the image of the ending display effect displayed during the volume change operation (for example, the immersive prevention information reduced display 44z3) is larger than the image of the ending display effect displayed before the volume change operation (for example, the immersive prevention information 44z). This is a reduced image. As a result, the image of the ending display effect is reduced during the volume change operation, so that the volume change operation becomes easier. Also, the player is worried that the ending display effect being displayed may end during the volume change operation because the ending display effect being displayed can be confirmed in the reduced image while the volume is being changed. You can change the volume without worrying about it. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (D5).

In the tenth embodiment, the ending information 44j was reduced and displayed, but in the present embodiment, the ending information 44j is displayed by a different method. This point will be described with reference to FIG. 71. FIG. 71 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of a specific operation period after the end of the jackpot round game of the tenth embodiment.

Since (a) to (h) are the same as those in FIG. 69, the common contents refer to the description thereof. In the ending information 44j, not only the character information but also the illustration information corresponding to the character information is displayed. Therefore, the display area of the ending information 44j is wider than that of FIGS. 69 and 70.

When any of the frame buttons 80 is pressed during the ending period from (b) to (g), for example, during the display period of the immersive prevention information 44z shown in (e), as shown in (i) and (j). The screen switches to the specific operation screen 44b. In the third symbol display device 42, the ending information 44j and the change information display unit 44c are displayed side by side in substantially the same size at the time of volume change operation. That is, the display area of the ending information 44j before the volume change operation is divided into the display area of the ending information 44j after the volume change operation ((for example, the immersive prevention information split display unit 44z4)) and the display area of the change information display unit 44c. It is divided.

Specifically, the display area of the ending information 44j before the volume change operation includes a character information display area 44j1 in which character information is displayed in the upper half and an illustration information display area 44j2 in which illustration information is displayed in the lower half. It is provided. After the volume change operation, the character information display area 44j1 is left as it is, and the illustration information display area 44j2 is switched to the change information display unit 44c. By dividing the display area of the ending information 44j in this way, the display area of the ending information 44j can be continuously used even if the screen is changed. As a result, the switching of the display area becomes smooth, and the eyestrain of the player is reduced.

Operation method The reduced display unit 44d is provided in the display area of the change information display unit 44c. As a result, the player changes the volume while watching the ending information 44j arranged side by side next to the change information display unit 44c and listening to the sound related to the ending display effect at the time of the volume change operation. can.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, the third symbol display device 42 has an ending display effect (for example, digging prevention information split display 44z4) and volume information (for example, change information indicating the volume) when the volume is changed. It can be displayed side by side with the divided display unit 44c1). As a result, when the volume is changed, the player can change the volume while watching the ending display effect arranged next to the change information split display unit 44c1 and listening to the sound related to the ending display effect. It is possible to improve the fun of the operation to be changed. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (D4).

In the above-described embodiment, the volume change operation is executed in the ending effect, but it may be executed in the jackpot round display effect. This point will be described with reference to FIG. 72. FIG. 72 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of a specific operation period during the jackpot round game of Example 12.

In this embodiment, the information 44a during the specific operation period is the character information that "the volume can be changed by pressing and holding for 2 seconds or longer". During the jackpot round display effect, a display effect that requires the operation of the frame button 80 is executed. Therefore, as a method that does not overlap with the operation of the frame button 80, a long press of the frame button 80 for 2 seconds or longer is adopted. When an operating means other than the frame button 80 is used, a different operating method is used.

The operation sound when the volume is changed during the jackpot round display effect is the sound related to the jackpot round display effect displayed during the period when the volume can be changed (for example, the title guessing quiz display effect of the music is executed in the jackpot round display effect). If so, it is said to be the intro sound of the song to be asked or the voice of the chorus). For example, on the round screen 43i, as shown in (a), "Challenge the quiz, a special video can be seen with a correct answer rate of 50% or more" is displayed as the display effect 44h1 during the round. Next, as shown in (b), the quiz information 44h2 during the round is displayed as the display effect 44h1 during the round.

As shown in (b) and (c), the quiz information 44h2 during the round includes question information "1st question, what is the title of this song?" And option information "1. AAA, 2. BBB, 3. CCC ”and the operation information 44h3 during the round indicating the operation method of the frame button 80 in the quiz effect. In the quiz operation information 44h3 during the round, the normal pressing operation (pressing once) of the enter button 81 is the determination of the option, the normal pressing operation of the left selection button 82 is the movement to the bottom of the option, and the right selection button. It shows that the normal pressing operation of 83 is to move to the top of the options.

As shown in (d), when a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds to 20 seconds) has elapsed from the quiz information 44h2 during the round, the quiz answer information 44h4 during the round is displayed. The quiz answer information 44h4 during the round indicates whether the option selected by the player is a correct answer or an incorrect answer. If the answer is incorrect, the cause may be that the volume is low. Therefore, as shown in (e), the volume change suggestion information 44h5 during the round is displayed. The volume change suggestion information 44h5 during the round is character information prompting the volume change operation, for example, "Try the volume change operation". After the volume change suggestion information 44h5 during the round is displayed in a short time of about 3 seconds, the second and subsequent questions are displayed as shown in (f) and (i).

When the frame button 80 is pressed and held for 2 seconds or longer, the screen switches to the specific operation screen 44b. In this embodiment, as shown in (g), the specific operation screen 44b displays the volume change suggestion information 44h5 during the round, the quiz information reduction display unit 44h6, and the operation method display unit 44d indicating the volume operation. When the volume change operation is performed by the left selection button 82 or the right selection button 83, as shown in (h), the intro music or chorus voice corresponding to the quiz question is output at the changed volume.

As a result, the player can change the volume while listening to the sound related to the jackpot round display effect at the time of the volume change operation, so that the player can improve the fun of the operation of changing the volume. In addition, when the jackpot round display effect when the volume is changed changes to a different display effect (for example, after the song given in the first question in the title guessing quiz display effect of the song, the operation sound is changed to the second question). (When changed), it is a sound related to the display effect after the change (for example, the intro sound of the song to be set in the second song or the sound of the chorus). As a result, when the volume is changed, the player can change the volume while listening to the sound related to the jackpot round display effect displayed at the time of the change operation, so that the optimum volume can be set at the time of the change operation.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment, the third symbol display device 42 capable of displaying the jackpot round display effect, the sound output unit 24 for outputting sound in accordance with the jackpot round display effect, and the like. The voice output control device 46 includes a frame button 80 that can be operated by the player, and a voice output control device 46 that can change the volume of the sound output from the sound output unit 24 based on the operation of the frame button 80. Is a sound related to the jackpot round display effect displayed during the period when the volume can be changed (for example, when the title guessing quiz display effect of the song is executed in the jackpot round display effect). , It is possible to use the intro sound of the song to be asked or the voice of the chorus. This allows the player to change the volume while listening to the sound related to the jackpot round display effect when changing the volume. It is possible to improve the fun of the operation of changing the above. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (D1).

In addition, when the jackpot round display effect when the volume is changed changes to a different display effect (for example, after the song given in the first question in the title guessing quiz display effect of the song, the operation sound is changed to the second question). (When changed), it is a sound related to the display effect after the change (for example, the intro sound of the song to be set in the second song or the sound of the chorus). As a result, when the volume is changed, the player can change the volume while listening to the sound related to the jackpot round display effect displayed at the time of the change operation, so that the optimum volume can be set at the time of the change operation. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (D2).

In the above-described embodiment, the volume change operation has been described as an example of the specific operation of the present invention, but the specific operation may be an operation other than the volume change operation, for example, a character selection operation in a confrontation type reach display effect. good. This point will be described with reference to FIG. 73. FIG. 73 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of a specific operation period during the reach display effect of the thirteenth embodiment.

When the display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 42 shifts from a predetermined state to the next state, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 changes from a predetermined timing of the predetermined state to a predetermined timing of the next state. Up to, the transition display effect of displaying a predetermined image on the third symbol display device 42 is executed. Specifically, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 shifts the reach display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 42 from the self-character selectable state of the confrontation type reach development effect to the confrontation execution state of the confrontation type reach development effect. In this case, from the self-character selection start timing of the self-character selection state shown in (a) to the confrontation start timing of the confrontation execution state shown in (d), as shown in (a) to (c), the third symbol display device. The own character selection effect that displays the own character selection effect image on 42 is executed.

In the self-character selection effect, the first player PY1, the second player PY2, and the third player PY3 are displayed as self-characters that can be selected by the player, and each player introduces them in order while issuing a message that appeals their own characteristics. It is a display effect to be performed. Specifically, in the self-character selection effect, first, as shown in (a), the state in which the first player PY1 issues the first player information PYA that "decides flashily" is displayed, and then as shown in (b). The second player PY2 issues the second player information PYB "quietly decides", and finally the third player PY3 "moderately decides" the third player information PYC as shown in (c). The state of emission is displayed.

The first player information PYA suggests to the player that if the first player PY1 is selected, the subsequent reach display effect will be flashy for the effect of light, sound, and movable characters. The second player information PYA indicates to the player that if the second player PY2 is selected, the subsequent reach display effects will be quiet. The third player information PYC indicates to the player that if the third player PY3 is selected, the subsequent reach development display effect is moderately controlled in the balance of these effects.

The first player information PYA to the third player information PYC are displayed in order within the selected time. If the player does not perform the selection operation even after the selection time has elapsed, as shown in (d), the character automatically selected by the lottery inside the gaming machine (for example, the first player PY1) is used. The confrontation reach with the enemy character TK is started.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 notifies the player of unarrival suggestion information suggesting to the player that the start timing of the next state has not arrived during the execution of the transition display effect. Specifically, as shown in (a) to (c), the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 tells the player that the start timing of the confrontation execution state has not arrived during the execution of the display effect at the time of transition. The player is notified of the suggested information 44a during the specific operation period and the proximity information 44e at the end of the specific operation period.

In the information 44a during the specific operation period, for example, the character information "a player can be selected with a button" is displayed, and it is displayed that the own character of the confrontation type reach can be selected by pressing any of the frame buttons 80. The end-of-term proximity information 44e of the specific operation period is displayed as a seek bar or an indicator image indicating the remaining time for accepting the operation of the frame button 80 for the own character selection effect as an effective operation.

When the frame button 80 is effectively operated, the change information display unit 44c is displayed as shown in (e), (f), and (h). The change information display unit 44c displays the first player PY1, the second player PY2, and the third player PY3 that can be selected by the player. The player operates the left selection button 82 and the right selection button 83 to select a desired character. The period during which the selection operation is possible is notified to the player by the above-mentioned end-of-term proximity information 44e of the specific operation period. After selecting the desired character, if the confrontation reach start timing is waited, the confrontation effect is started with the selected character. Alternatively, if the enter button 81 is operated, a waiting image such as "Please wait for a while" is displayed, and then the confrontation effect is started with the selected character.

As a result, the player cannot select the own character at the present time when the own character selection effect is being executed, in other words, the current time when the own character selection effect is being executed is not yet in the next confrontation execution state. Will be easier to recognize. Therefore, there is a disadvantage (for example, unintended) caused by misunderstanding that the current time when the own character selection effect is being executed is the next confrontation execution state (or the start timing of the next confrontation execution state is approaching immediately before). By selecting a character, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage of seeing a reach development effect that is different from the player's preference).

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment, the game state is changed from a predetermined state (a state in which the own character can be selected for the confrontation type reach development effect) to the next state (for example, a confrontation execution of the confrontation type reach development effect). When shifting to the state), the third symbol display device 42 is displayed from the predetermined timing of the own character selection state (self-character selection start timing) to the predetermined timing of the next confrontation execution state (for example, the confrontation start timing). The start timing of the next confrontation execution state is set during the execution function of the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 for executing the transition display effect (self-character selection effect) for displaying the own character selection effect image and the execution of the own character selection effect. With the notification function of the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 that notifies the player of unarrival suggestion information (for example, the end-of-term proximity information 44e indicating the remaining time of the own character selection effect) that suggests to the player that it has not arrived. To prepare. As a result, the player cannot select the own character at the present time when the own character selection effect is being executed, in other words, the current time when the own character selection effect is being executed is not yet in the next confrontation execution state. Will be easier to recognize. Therefore, there is a disadvantage (for example, unintended) caused by misunderstanding that the current time when the own character selection effect is being executed is the next confrontation execution state (or the start timing of the next confrontation execution state is approaching immediately before). By selecting a character, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage of seeing a reach development effect that is different from the player's preference).

In the thirteenth embodiment described above, the player PY displayed in the confrontation type reach display effect has a fixed pattern of the first player PY1, the second player PY2, and the third player PY3, but the player PY is a big hit lottery. It may be changed to a different pattern depending on the result. This point will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of a specific operation period during the reach display effect of the fourteenth embodiment.

When the display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 42 shifts from a predetermined state to the next state, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 changes from a predetermined timing of the predetermined state to a predetermined timing of the next state. Up to, the transition display effect in which a plurality of types of images are continuously displayed in a predetermined combination on the third symbol display device 42 is executed. When the result of the jackpot lottery is the jackpot result, the predetermined combination is displayed in different combinations depending on the type of the jackpot result. If the result is out of order, different combinations are displayed depending on the type of reach display effect that leads to the out-of-order result. That is, the transition display effect of this embodiment is displayed in different combinations depending on the type of jackpot result expected by the player.

For example, in the case of a reach display effect that normally expects a big hit, three player PY1 to player PY3 as in the thirteenth embodiment are continuously displayed, and the first player information PYA to the third player information PYC are continuously displayed. Is displayed. In the case of the reach display effect that expects a probable change jackpot, four players PY1 to player PY4 are continuously displayed, and the first player information PYA to the fourth player information PYD are continuously displayed. In addition, the display mode of a specific player, which is a reach display effect that normally expects a big hit and a reach display effect that expects a probabilistic big hit, may be different.

The end-of-specification proximity information 44e indicates to the player that the start timing of the next confrontation execution state has not arrived until the timing when a plurality of types of images are continuously executed in a predetermined combination. It is an image. The first player information PYA to the fourth player information PYD are sequentially displayed within the selection time indicated by the proximity information 44e at the end of the specific operation period.

As a result, during the self-character selection effect, the start timing of the next confrontation execution state has not arrived due to the end-of-term proximity information 44e of the specific operation period until the timing when a plurality of types of images are continuously executed in a predetermined combination. Is suggested, and the disadvantage caused by misunderstanding that the start timing of the next confrontation execution state (or the start timing of the next confrontation execution state is approaching immediately before) (for example, an unintended character is selected) is selected. As a result, the risk of receiving a reach development effect that is different from the player's preference) is reduced.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 14th embodiment, the self-character selection effect is a plurality of types of images (for example, 1st player PY1 to 4th player PY4, 1st player information PYA to 4th player information PYD). ) Are continuously executed in a predetermined combination, and the predetermined combination is displayed in different combinations depending on the type of jackpot result expected by the player as a result of the jackpot lottery (for example, in the case of a probability variation jackpot). Is displayed from the first player information PYA to the fourth player information PYD, and in the case of a normal jackpot, is displayed from the first player information PYA to the third player information PYC), and the specific operation period end proximity information 44e is a plurality of types of images. Until the timing when the player finishes executing consecutively in a predetermined combination (for example, from the first player information PYA to the fourth player information PYD in the case of a probable change jackpot, until the fourth player information PYD is displayed within the selected time, in the case of a normal jackpot, the first player information PYA Until the third player information PYC is displayed within the selected time), it suggests to the player that the start timing of the next confrontation execution state has not arrived. As a result, during the self-character selection effect, the start timing of the next confrontation execution state has not arrived due to the end-of-term proximity information 44e of the specific operation period until the timing when a plurality of types of images are continuously executed in a predetermined combination. Is suggested, and the disadvantage caused by misunderstanding that the start timing of the next confrontation execution state (or the start timing of the next confrontation execution state is approaching immediately before) (for example, an unintended character is selected) is selected. As a result, the risk of receiving a reach development effect that is different from the player's preference) is reduced. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (A21).

In the above-described embodiment, one pattern is determined for one type of jackpot ending display effect, but in this embodiment, one pattern is displayed for one type of jackpot ending display effect in a shorter time. The difference is that the pattern is determined. This point will be described with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of a specific operation period after the end of the jackpot round game of the fifteenth embodiment.

After the jackpot round gaming state shown in (a) ends, the display control device 45 controls to display the jackpot ending display effect on the third symbol display device 42 in a predetermined pattern. In this embodiment, the jackpot round gaming state shown in (a) is the jackpot round gaming state of the special figure 1 probability variation jackpot (16R), and the jackpot ending display effect is the next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x. , Card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, privilege video 44n is displayed.

In the predetermined pattern, the predetermined display information (for example, the predetermined ending information 44j consisting of the next game state suggestion information 44w, the manufacturer information 44x, and the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y) has a predetermined display time (for example, 25 seconds) and is predetermined. The first pattern displayed in the display mode (display order of next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, card removal forgetting prevention information 44y) and the predetermined ending information 44j are displayed shorter than the predetermined display time. It has a second pattern that is displayed for a time (for example, 10 seconds) and in a display mode different from the predetermined display mode. The first pattern is a pattern displayed in the order as shown in FIG. 69 of the above-mentioned Example 9. The second pattern is the pattern of the jackpot ending display effect shown in (b) and subsequent steps. The details of the second pattern will be described later.

As described above, in this embodiment, the jackpot ending display effect can be executed with various variations in which the display time and the display mode for displaying the predetermined ending information 44j are different. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the jackpot ending display production.

The first pattern and the second pattern are internally selected by the gaming machine by, for example, a lottery (a lottery performed by acquiring a random number based on the reception of a display variation pattern command) by the display control device 45. May be good. With this configuration, different patterns of ending effects can be executed even for the same jackpot type. Further, the player may be able to select whether to execute the jackpot round display effect in the first pattern or the second pattern at the beginning of the jackpot ending display effect. With this configuration, the jackpot ending display effect can be brought closer to the player's taste. Further, the jackpot ending display effect may be executed only by the second pattern. With this configuration, it is possible to show the player a jackpot ending display effect that has never existed before.

The second pattern will be described in a little more detail. The first pattern is a pattern in which the above-mentioned predetermined ending information 44j is displayed in a predetermined order, and the second pattern is a composite state (simultaneously displayed) in which the predetermined ending information 44j displayed in the predetermined order is combined. It is a pattern displayed in the simultaneous display state). Specifically, in the second pattern, the next game state suggestion information 44w, the manufacturer information 44x, and the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, which were sequentially displayed in the first pattern, are simultaneously displayed as shown in (b). It is a pattern.

As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the jackpot ending display effect without impairing the identity of the contents of the jackpot ending display effect between the first pattern and the second pattern.

The length of the entire display period of the jackpot ending display effect executed in the first pattern is the same as the length of the entire display period of the jackpot ending display effect executed in the second pattern. Specifically, in the case of a 16R jackpot, the length of the entire display period is 35 seconds. As a result, in the jackpot ending display effect executed in the second pattern, the bonus image 44n displayed at the end of the jackpot ending display effect is displayed by shortening the display time for displaying the predetermined ending information 44j described above. A new display effect can be executed by using the surplus time generated before displaying.

The new display effect is, for example, the ending quiz display effect 44p1. In the ending quiz display effect 44p1, as shown in (c), the text information "Challenge to the quiz, if you answer correctly, a special video" is displayed. The quiz is displayed as ending quiz information 44p2 as shown in (d) to (f). The operation during the quiz is displayed as the ending quiz operation information 44p3. These are the same as the in-round quiz information 44p2 and the in-round quiz operation information 44p3 shown in FIG. 72 of Example 12.

The answering time of the ending quiz is displayed as the end-of-term proximity information 44e of the specific operation period. If the player does not answer within the answering time, it is considered that the preset option has been selected, and it is judged whether or not the answer is correct. Whether or not the quiz is correct is displayed as ending quiz answer information 44p4 as shown in (g) and (k). If you answer the quiz correctly, the ending quiz correct answer privilege information 44p5 (special live music video) will be displayed as a special privilege as a bonus video 44n, and if the quiz is incorrect, the ending quiz incorrect privilege information 44p7 (as a normal privilege) will be displayed. Normal live music video) is displayed.

If you press and hold any of the frame buttons 80 during the quiz according to the information 44a (“You can change the volume by pressing and holding for 2 seconds or more”) during the specific operation period, as shown in (i) and (j), the ending quiz information 44p2 Is reduced and displayed on the ending quiz information reduced display unit 44p6, and the change information display unit 44c and the operation method display unit 44d are also reduced and displayed so that the volume can be changed while watching the quiz. When the volume is changed during the quiz, the intro and the chorus part of the song to be set are output as in the case of the twelfth embodiment.

In this way, the new display effect that can be displayed by executing the jackpot round display effect of the second pattern can adjust the volume during the quiz, and the bonus video 44n after that depending on the correct or incorrect answer of the quiz. The content of is changed, and the content is related to the subsequent bonus video 44n. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the ending display effect that attracts the player's attention.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifteenth embodiment, the third symbol display device 42 capable of displaying the jackpot ending display effect related to the game and the third symbol display device 42 capable of displaying the jackpot ending display effect in a predetermined pattern. A display control device 45 for controlling display is provided, and a predetermined pattern is a predetermined ending information composed of predetermined display information (for example, next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, and card removal forgetting prevention information 44y). The first pattern in which 44j) is displayed in a predetermined display time (for example, 25 seconds) and in a predetermined display mode (display order of next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, card removal forgetting prevention information 44y). The predetermined ending information 44j has a second pattern in which the display time is shorter than the predetermined display time (for example, 10 seconds) and is displayed in a display mode different from the predetermined display mode. As a result, it is possible to execute the jackpot ending display effect with various variations in which the display time and the display mode for displaying the predetermined ending information 44j are different. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the jackpot ending display production. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (E1).

Further, the first pattern is a pattern in which the above-mentioned predetermined ending information 44j is displayed in a predetermined order, and the second pattern is a composite state in which the predetermined ending information 44j displayed in the predetermined order is combined. It is a pattern displayed in the simultaneous display state) displayed at the same time. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the jackpot ending display effect without impairing the identity of the contents of the jackpot ending display effect between the first pattern and the second pattern. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (E3).

Further, the length of the entire display period of the jackpot ending display effect executed in the first pattern is the same as the length of the entire display period of the jackpot ending display effect executed in the second pattern (for example, 35 seconds). .. As a result, in the jackpot ending display effect executed in the second pattern, the bonus image 44n displayed at the end of the jackpot ending display effect is displayed by shortening the display time for displaying the predetermined ending information 44j described above. A new display effect (ending quiz display effect 44p1) can be executed by using the surplus time generated until the display. This new display effect is such that the volume can be adjusted during the quiz, the content of the subsequent bonus video 44n changes depending on the correct or incorrect answer of the quiz, and the content is related to the subsequent bonus video 44n. This makes it possible to increase the variation of the ending display effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (E4).

Further, the predetermined ending information 44j is the ending effect information after the big hit round game. This makes it possible to increase the variation of the ending effect after the jackpot round game. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (E5).

In the 15th embodiment described above, new ending information (ending quiz display effect 44p1) is displayed before the final ending information (privilege image 44n) to be displayed by executing the jackpot round display effect of the second pattern. However, in this embodiment, the ending information (privilege video 44n) to be displayed at the end is changed to a longer version by executing the jackpot ending display effect of the second pattern. This point will be described with reference to FIG. 76. FIG. 76 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of a specific operation period after the end of the jackpot round game of Example 16.

Specifically, by executing the jackpot ending display effect of the second pattern, predetermined ending information 44j (next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, card removal forgetting prevention information 44y) as shown in (b). ) Is displayed in the composite state for, for example, 10 seconds, and then the privilege video 44n is displayed in the remaining ending time (25 seconds) as shown in (c) to (h). Information 44a is displayed during the specific operation period at the beginning of the privilege video 44n. In the information 44a during the specific operation period, the character information "The volume, the amount of light, and the sound quality can be changed by pressing and holding the music for a long time" is displayed. The information 44a during the specific operation period may be erased after being long-pressed. When the frame button 80 is pressed and held, as shown in (d), the privilege video n is reduced and displayed on the privilege video division display unit 44n1, and which of the volume, the amount of light, the sound quality, and "return" is changed. The change information display unit 44c that can be selected is displayed. When the volume is selected, the volume change information display unit 44c1 that can change the volume is displayed as shown in (e) and (i). When the light amount is selected, the light amount change information display unit 44c2 that can change the light amount is displayed as shown in (f) and (j). When the sound quality is selected, the sound quality change information display unit 44c3 that can change the sound quality is displayed as shown in (g) and (k). After changing the volume, light intensity, and sound quality by operating the left selection button 82 and the right selection button 83, pressing the enter button 81 returns to the change information display unit 44c. When "return" is selected in the change information display unit 44c, the state returns to the state where the privilege video 44n is displayed on the full screen as shown in (h). It should be noted that after returning to the change information display unit 44c and a predetermined second elapses, the privilege video 44n may be set to return to the state of being displayed on the full screen.

In this way, in the jackpot ending display effect executed in the second pattern, the display time for displaying the predetermined ending information 44j is shortened, and the generated surplus time is used to reduce the display time of the privilege video 44n. By making it longer and making it possible to display the change information display unit 44c for changing the volume, light amount, and sound quality during the display time of the privilege video 44n, it is possible to display after ensuring a long period in which the volume etc. can be adjusted. You can increase the variation of the production.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 16th embodiment, the length of the display period of the jackpot ending display effect executed in the first pattern and the display period of the jackpot ending display effect executed in the second pattern It is the same as the length. As a result, in the jackpot ending display effect executed in the second pattern, the display time for displaying predetermined ending information 44j (for example, ending countdown information 44v, next game state suggestion information 44w, card removal forgetting prevention information 44y) is set. By shortening it, the display time of the privilege video 44n can be lengthened by using the surplus time generated, and the change information display unit 44c for changing the volume, the amount of light, and the sound quality can be displayed during the display time of the privilege video 44n. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the display effect while ensuring a long period in which the volume and the like can be adjusted. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (E4).

In Examples 15 and 16 described above, the jackpot ending display effect by the second pattern (composite display) is internally performed by the gaming machine, but in this embodiment, it is based on the operation of the player. The jackpot ending display effect is performed by the second pattern (composite display). This point will be described with reference to FIG. 77. FIG. 77 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of a specific operation period after the end of the jackpot round game of Example 17.

In the jackpot ending display effect shown in (b) to (f), the display control device 45 controls to display an operation request image requesting the player to operate the frame button 80 during the jackpot ending display effect. Specifically, as shown in (b) and (c), the operation request image is the information 44a during the specific operation period to which the character information "volume, light amount, sound quality change acceptance time" is attached. The information 44a during the specific operation period is a seek bar or an indicator image showing an elapsed time (remaining time) of the volume or the like change acceptance time (10 seconds).

The display control device 45 controls to display the operation display effect (volume, light amount, sound quality change display effect) using the frame button 80 during the jackpot ending display effect, triggered by the player's operation on the operation request image. When the player does not operate the frame button 80 with respect to the operation request image, if the special figure 1 probability variation jackpot (16R) by the spar reach C and D, the next game state suggestion information 44w, the manufacturer information 44x, After the display of the card removal prevention information 44y and the insertion prevention information 44z is completed, the next game state is entered.

In the predetermined pattern, when the operation request image is displayed and the player does not perform an operation on the operation request image, the predetermined ending information 44j (for example, the special figure 1 probability variation jackpot (16R) by the spar reach C and D) ), The manufacturer information 44x, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, and the insertion prevention information 44z) are displayed for a predetermined display time (for example, 25 seconds) and in a predetermined display mode (one by one in order). When one pattern and the operation request image are displayed and the player performs an operation on the operation request image, the predetermined ending information 44j has a shorter display time (for example, 5 seconds) than the first pattern and is the first. It has a second pattern in which it is displayed in a display mode different from that of one pattern (all at the same time), and a change display effect such as volume is executed after the display of the predetermined ending information 44j is completed.

As a result, when the frame button 80 is effectively operated for the operation request image, the jackpot ending display effect can be enjoyed by changing the volume and the like without significantly impairing the interest of the jackpot ending display effect. It is possible to improve the interest of the.

The first pattern is a pattern in which predetermined ending information 44j (for example, manufacturer information 44x, card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, insertion prevention information 44z) is displayed in a predetermined order for a predetermined display time (for example, 25 seconds). The second pattern is a pattern in which predetermined ending information 44j displayed in a predetermined order is displayed in combination to shorten a predetermined display time (for example, all at the same time for 5 seconds). be.

Specifically, when the player's operation on the operation request image is performed in the middle of the volume changeable time, as shown in (g), "Wait a moment until the volume change operation" until the end timing of the volume changeable time. The post-specific operation standby information 44a3 indicating the character information "ne" is displayed. The predetermined ending display 44j displayed by the second pattern is displayed after the display of the standby information 44a3 after the specific operation is finished.

As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the change display effect such as the volume without impairing the identity of the contents of the jackpot ending display effect between the first pattern and the second pattern.

Further, the length of the display period of the jackpot ending display effect executed in the first pattern and the length of the display period of the jackpot ending display effect executed in the second pattern are the same time (35 seconds). As a result, in the jackpot ending display effect executed in the second pattern, the surplus time (20 seconds) generated by shortening the display time (5 seconds) for displaying the predetermined ending information 44j is used. Therefore, a period (10 seconds) for displaying the volume change operation effect and a period (10 seconds) for displaying the privilege video 44n can be provided. The period for displaying the volume change operation effect is displayed as the end-of-term proximity information 44e of the specific operation period with the character information "volume, light amount, sound quality changeable time". The end-of-term proximity information 44e of the specific operation period is a seek bar or an indicator image showing an elapsed time (remaining time) of a changeable time (10 seconds) such as volume. In this way, after securing an adjustable period such as the volume, it is possible to increase the variation of the change display effect such as the volume.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 17th embodiment, the third symbol display device 42 that displays the display effect related to the game including the jackpot ending display effect, and the frame that the player can operate according to the display effect. A button 80 and a display control device 45 for controlling display of a display effect including displaying a jackpot ending display effect in a predetermined pattern on the third symbol display device 42 are provided, and the display control device 45 is provided by a player. The operation request execution function that controls the display of the operation request image (information 44a during the specific operation period) that requests the operation of the frame button 80 during the jackpot ending display effect, and the frame triggered by the player's operation on the operation request image. It is equipped with an operation display effect execution function that controls the display of the operation display effect (volume, light amount, sound quality change display effect) using the button 80 during the jackpot ending display effect, and the predetermined pattern is the operation request image. When the player does not perform an operation on the displayed and the operation request image, the predetermined ending information 44j (for example, the manufacturer information 44x, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, the insertion prevention information 44z) is displayed for a predetermined display time. The player displays the first pattern displayed (for example, for 25 seconds) and in a predetermined display mode (one by one in order), the operation request image is displayed, and the information 44a and the operation request image are displayed during the specific operation period. When the operation is performed, the predetermined ending information 44j is displayed in a display time shorter than that of the first pattern (for example, 5 seconds) and in a display mode different from that of the first pattern (all at the same time), and the predetermined ending information is displayed. It has a second pattern in which a change display effect such as volume is executed after the display of 44j is completed. As a result, when the frame button 80 is effectively operated for the operation request image, the jackpot ending display effect can be enjoyed by changing the volume and the like without significantly impairing the interest of the jackpot ending display effect. It is possible to improve the interest of the. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (F1).

Further, the first pattern is a pattern in which predetermined ending information 44j (for example, manufacturer information 44x, card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, insertion prevention information 44z) is displayed in a predetermined order for a predetermined display time (for example, 25 seconds). The second pattern is displayed in a composite state in which the predetermined display time is shortened by displaying the predetermined ending information 44j displayed in the predetermined order in combination (for example, all at the same time for 5 seconds). It is a pattern. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the change display effect such as the volume without impairing the identity of the contents of the jackpot ending display effect between the first pattern and the second pattern. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (F3).

Further, the length of the display period of the jackpot ending display effect executed in the first pattern is the same as the length of the display period of the jackpot ending display effect executed in the second pattern. As a result, in the jackpot ending display effect executed in the second pattern, the display time for displaying the predetermined ending information 44j is shortened, and the surplus time generated is used to adjust the volume and the like. It is possible to increase the variation of the change display effect such as the volume, etc. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (F4).

Further, the predetermined ending information 44j is the ending effect information after the big hit round game. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the change display effect such as the volume performed during the ending effect after the jackpot round game. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (F5).

In the above-mentioned Example 17, the jackpot round display effect by the second pattern is a pattern in which the display time of the predetermined ending information 44j is shortened by simultaneously displaying the predetermined ending information 44j, but in the present embodiment, the display time is shortened. The difference is that the pattern is a pattern that shortens the display time in different display modes. This point will be advanced with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of a specific operation period after the end of the jackpot round game of Example 18.

In the first pattern, as shown in (b) and (c), the predetermined ending information 44j (for example, the manufacturer information 44x, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, the insertion prevention information 44z) has a predetermined display time (for example, 25 seconds). It is a pattern that is displayed in a predetermined order (one by one), and the second pattern is as shown in (f) to (h) when the player performs an operation on the operation request image. In addition, it is a pattern in which predetermined ending information 44j is displayed in a shortened state in which a predetermined display time is shortened while maintaining a predetermined order.

Specifically, in the second pattern, the predetermined ending information 44j has the manufacturer information 44x (1 second), the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y (2 seconds), and the insertion prevention information 44z (2 seconds) in 5 seconds. It is displayed one by one in order.

As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the change display effect such as the volume without impairing the sameness of the content and the presentation of the display effect between the first pattern and the second pattern.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 18th embodiment, in the first pattern, predetermined ending information 44j (for example, manufacturer information 44x, card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, insertion prevention information 44z) is displayed. It is a pattern that is displayed in a predetermined order (one by one) in a predetermined order for a time (for example, 25 seconds), and the second pattern is a shortened state in which the predetermined ending information 44j is kept in the predetermined order and the predetermined display time is shortened. (For example, the manufacturer information 44x, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, and the insertion prevention information 44z are displayed in order in 5 seconds). As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the change display effect such as the volume without impairing the sameness of the content and the presentation of the display effect between the first pattern and the second pattern. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (F2).

In the 17th and 18th embodiments described above, the control by the second pattern has been executed in the jackpot ending display effect, but the control by the second pattern may be executed in another display effect, for example, the reach display effect. This point will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 and 80. FIG. 79 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of a specific operation period during the reach display effect of the nineteenth embodiment. FIG. 80 is a diagram illustrating a display mode different from that of FIG. 79 during a specific operation period during the reach display effect.

First, refer to FIG. 79. The display control device 45 controls to display the display effect including displaying the reach display effect in a predetermined pattern on the third symbol display device 42. As shown in (a), the development reach display screen 43g is displayed on the third symbol display device 42, and a confrontation-type reach development effect in which the own character PY and the enemy character TK confront each other is executed.

In the reach development effect of this embodiment, as shown in (b), a development reach suggestion image 43g2 suggesting that the reach may be a hit is displayed. The development reach suggestion image 43g2 displays a frame in which four characters are hidden, and reveals the characters one by one, for example, at the timing when the last character is revealed (or the timing before that). It is an effect that suggests the possibility of winning in a predetermined manner. In a predetermined mode, for example, a color suggesting a hit is displayed around a character (for example, if the expectation of a hit is low, the same color as other characters, if the expectation of a hit is high, the color is displayed in red, and if the expectation of a hit is high, a rainbow is displayed. It is an aspect of displaying in color). In order to suggest this, the development reach suggestion image 43g2 displays the text information "If the rainbow pattern appears, the victory is rich?". Since the development reach suggestion image 43g2 is an effect of clarifying one character every 2 seconds, the effect time is usually 8 seconds.

The display control device 45 controls to display an operation request image requesting the player to operate the frame button 80 during the reach development effect. The operation request image is the information 44a during the specific operation period displayed at the same time as the display of the development reach suggestion image 43g2. Information 44a during the specific operation period displays text information such as "This effect is 8 seconds. If you want to know quickly, press the button." It is suggested that by operating the frame button 80, the development reach suggestion effect that takes 8 seconds can be shortened and the result can be known. The operation of the frame button 80 has an effective period of 8 seconds when the development reach suggestion image 43g2 changes. The elapsed time of the valid period of the frame button 80 is displayed by displaying the information 44a during the specific operation period and at the same time displaying the proximity information 44e at the end of the specific operation period.

The display control device 45 controls to display an operation display effect (fast-forward display effect) using the frame button 80 during the reach display effect, triggered by the operation of the frame button 80 of the player with respect to the operation request image. As a result, the player can shorten the development reach suggestion effect that takes 8 seconds and know the result.

This development reach suggestion effect is displayed in a predetermined pattern. The predetermined patterns are the first pattern displayed when the operation request image is displayed and the player does not perform an operation on the operation request image, and the operation request image is displayed and the operation request image is displayed. It has a second pattern when the player performs an operation.

The first pattern is a pattern in which predetermined display information is displayed in a predetermined display time and in a predetermined display mode. Specifically, the first pattern is the first development reach suggestion information g2a, the second development reach suggestion information g2b, the third development reach suggestion information g2c, and the fourth development, which are the four characters constituting the development reach suggestion image 43g2. This is a pattern in which reach suggestion information g2d is revealed one by one at 2-second intervals (for a total of 8 seconds).

The second pattern is a fast-forward display effect in which the predetermined display information is displayed in a display mode different from that of the first pattern with a shorter display time than the first pattern, and is an effect after the display of the predetermined display information is completed. This is a pattern in which the result display is displayed. Specifically, in the second pattern, the first development reach suggestion information g2a to the fourth development reach suggestion information g2d, which are the four characters constituting the development reach suggestion image 43g2, are sequentially arranged one by one at 1-second intervals (total). It is displayed (in 4 seconds), and the result display of the fast-forward display effect is displayed at the timing when the display content of the fourth development reach suggestion information g2d is found.

The first pattern and the second pattern will be described in a little more detail.
In the first pattern, it is clarified that the first development reach suggestion information g2a of the first character is "ge" at the timing of the remaining 6 seconds shown in (c), and the timing of the remaining 4 seconds shown in (d). Then, it was clarified that the second development reach suggestion information g2b of the second character was "ki", and at the timing of the remaining 2 seconds shown in (e), the third development reach suggestion information g2c of the third character became "ki". It is a pattern in which it is clarified that it is "a", and at the timing of the remaining 0 seconds shown in (f), it is clarified that the fourth development reach suggestion information g2d of the fourth character is "tsu" and ends. As shown in (f), if the pattern around the fourth development reach suggestion information g2d is rainbow-colored, it is suggested that the reach is highly expected to be a hit.

After the rainbow color appears, as shown in (g), the attack image 43g4 emitted by the own character PY against the enemy character TK is displayed in the rainbow color suggesting victory in the confrontation type reach development production. As shown in (h), the own character PY wins, and the winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the reach development effect. On the other hand, as shown in (i), if the pattern around the fourth development reach suggestion information g2d is the same as that of other characters, it is suggested that the expectation that the reach will be a hit is not so high. In this case, as shown in (j), the attack image 43g4 is displayed in a normal color, and as shown in (k), the own character PY loses to the enemy character TK, and the off-design stops in the reach development effect. It is often displayed.

The second pattern refers to FIG. 80. The second pattern is a pattern in which the suggestion effect of the first pattern is fast-forwarded in 4 seconds. In the specific operation period end proximity information 44e, when the frame button 80 is pressed while the specific operation period end proximity information 44a is displayed, for example, "remaining 8 seconds" indicating the specific operation period end proximity information 44e selects the fast-forward effect. It changes to "3 seconds remaining during fast forward" indicating that it has been done.

The first development reach suggestion information g2a "ge" of the first character is clarified at the timing of the remaining 3 seconds shown in (b), and the second development of the second character is clarified at the timing of the remaining 2 seconds shown in (c). The reach suggestion information g2b "ki" is clarified, and the third development reach suggestion information g2c "a" of the third character is clarified at the timing of the remaining 1 second shown in (d), and the remaining 0 shown in (e). At the timing of seconds, the 4th development reach suggestion information g2d "tsu" of the 4th character is clarified and ends. In the suggestion effect of the second pattern, since the result is displayed earlier than the suggestion effect of the first pattern, a privilege image using this surplus time is inserted in the confrontation type reach development effect after the suggestion effect is completed.

As shown in (f), the privilege image is a defense image 43g5 in which the own character PY defends against an attack emitted by the enemy character TK. When the fourth development reach suggestion information g2d is in rainbow color, the defense image 43g5 is displayed in rainbow color, which suggests that the reach is certain. In this case, the fourth development reach suggestion information g2d is displayed in red, and the defense image 43g5 is displayed in rainbow color for the first time, so that the player's surprise timing is matched with the display timing of this privilege image. May be good. After that, as shown in (g), the attack image 43g4 (rainbow color) is displayed, and as shown in (h), the hit symbol in the reach development effect is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, as shown in (i), if the pattern around the fourth development reach suggestion information g2d is the same as that of other characters, it is suggested that the expectation that the reach will be a hit is not so high. In this case, as shown in (j), the defense image 43g5 is displayed in the normal color also in the privilege image, and as shown in (k), the attack image 43g4 is displayed in the normal color, and in (l). As shown, there are many cases where the own character PY loses to the enemy character TK and the out-of-order symbol is stopped and displayed in the reach development effect.

As a result, the fast-forward display effect can be enjoyed without significantly impairing the interest of the reach display effect depending on whether the frame button 80 is effectively operated for the operation request image or the frame button 80 is not operated. By doing so, it is possible to improve the fun of the reach display effect.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 19th embodiment, the third symbol display device 42 that displays the display effect related to the game including the reach display effect, and the frame button that the player can operate according to the display effect. The display control device 45 includes a display control device 45 for controlling the display of the display effect including displaying the reach display effect in a predetermined pattern on the display means, and the display control device 45 allows the player to operate the frame button 80. The operation request execution function that controls the display of the operation request image (information 44a during the specific operation period) that requests the operation request image during the reach display effect, and the operation display using the frame button 80 triggered by the player's operation on the operation request image. It is equipped with an operation display effect execution function that controls the display of the effect (fast-forward display effect) during the reach display effect, and the operation request image is displayed and the player operates the operation request image in a predetermined pattern. When the above is not performed, the predetermined display information (for example, the development reach suggestion image 43g2) has a predetermined display time (for example, 8 seconds) and the predetermined display mode (for example, the first development reach suggestion information g2a to the fourth development reach suggestion). A predetermined development reach when the first pattern in which the information g2d is displayed one by one at 2-second intervals) and the operation request image are displayed and the player operates on the operation request image. The suggestion image 43g2 has a shorter display time than the first pattern (for example, 4 seconds) and has a display mode different from that of the first pattern (for example, the first development reach suggestion information g2a to the fourth development reach suggestion information g2d are at 1 second intervals. It has a second pattern in which the images are displayed one by one (in order), and the result display of the fast-forward display effect is executed after the display of the predetermined development reach suggestion image 43g2 is completed. As a result, when the frame button 80 is effectively operated for the operation request image, the enjoyment of the reach display effect is improved by entertaining the fast-forward display effect without significantly impairing the interest of the reach display effect. can do. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (F1).

Further, in the first pattern, the predetermined development reach suggestion image 43g2 is displayed in a predetermined order for a predetermined display time (for example, 8 seconds) (for example, the first development reach suggestion information g2a to the fourth development reach suggestion information g2d are every 2 seconds. The second pattern is a pattern in which the predetermined development reach suggestion image 43g2 is displayed in a shortened state (for example, at 1-second intervals for 4 seconds) in which the predetermined display time is shortened while maintaining the predetermined order. It is a pattern to be done. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the fast-forward display effect without impairing the identity of the content and the presentation of the reach display effect between the first pattern and the second pattern. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (F2).

Further, the predetermined development reach suggestion image 43g2 is the suggestion effect information displayed during the reach development effect (from the first development reach suggestion information g2a to the fourth development reach suggestion image g2d). This makes it possible to increase the variation of the fast-forward display effect performed during the suggestion effect displayed during the reach development effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (F6).

In the above-described embodiment, the jackpot ending display effect is not connected to the reach display effect that led to the jackpot ending display effect, but in this embodiment, the reach display effect and the jackpot ending display effect are produced. The points that are related in the content are different. This point will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 to 84.

In FIG. 81, (a) is a special figure 1 big hit lottery table in Example 20, and (b) is a special figure 2 big hit lottery table. FIG. 82 is a table for selecting a special figure 1 main decorative symbol variation pattern according to the twenty embodiment. FIG. 83 is a table for determining the ending effect pattern of the twenty embodiment.

The display control device 45 can control the display of information related to the specific effect executed during the display effect in the ending effect. As a result, the ending effect and the display effect up to the ending effect are related by the specific effect, and the fun of the display effect continues to the ending effect through the specific effect, so that the fun of the ending effect can be improved. ..

The display effect in which the specific effect is executed is a variable display effect of the identification information that makes it possible to identify whether or not the result of the lottery is a specific result, for example, a variable display effect of the main decorative symbol SZ or the developed symbol HZ. This makes it easier to remember the specific effect as well as the variable display effect, so that the fun of the ending effect can be improved.

The display effect in which the specific effect is executed is a reach display effect of the identification information, for example, a reach display effect of the main decorative symbol SZ or the developed symbol HZ. This makes it easier to remember the specific effect as well as the reach display effect, so that the interest of the ending effect can be improved.

The specific effect is a specific suggestion effect that suggests that the possibility of a specific result is higher than that in the case where the specific effect is not executed. The specific suggestion effect is, for example, a confrontation effect between the own character PY and the enemy character TK or a mission clear effect by the own character PY. As a result, the meaning of the suggestion (the appearance rate is lower than normal reach A, B and super reach A, B, and when it appears, it is easier to hit than normal reach A, B and super reach A, B. ) Can be easily remembered by the player who understands the specific suggestion effect, so that the fun of the ending effect can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 81, in the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot, the probability variation continuation and the number of times of support continue until the next jackpot in both the special figure 1 jackpot lottery table and the special figure 2 jackpot lottery table. different. That is, in this embodiment, the probability change continuation and the number of times of support obtained by the 16R probability change jackpot are distinguished so as to be larger than the other probability change jackpots (100 times).

As shown in FIG. 82, in the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot (big hit symbol counter C2 is 0 to 9), the jackpot super reach E (120 seconds) is selected for the special figure 1 main decorative symbol variation pattern selection table. Is set to. The production system of Super Reach E is a battle system. In the case of the 8R probability variation jackpot (big hit symbol counter C2 is 10 to 49), the jackpot super reach C and D are all set to be selected. The production system of Super Reach C and D is a battle system. In the case of 8R normal jackpot (big hit symbol counter C2 is 50 to 99), jackpot normal reach A, B or jackpot super reach A, B is set to be selected. That is, in this embodiment, the reach production that may be a 16R probable jackpot, the reach staging that may be an 8R probable jackpot, or the reach staging that may be an 8R normal jackpot is the reach staging. It is distinguished by type. The same applies to the special figure 2 main decorative pattern variation pattern selection table.

As shown in FIG. 83, the ending effect pattern determination table corresponds to the above-mentioned main decorative symbol variation pattern selection table. The ending effect pattern of the 16R probability change (special 1) is, after the next game state suggestion information 44w, the manufacturer information 44x, and the combined information of the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y and the light emission gaze prevention information 44o are displayed in order. This is a pattern in which EF victory rush rush information 44α1 is displayed as a specific effect. The EF victory rush rush information 44α1 indicates that this jackpot round game state has occurred via Super Reach E and F (defeating the enemy characters TKE and TKF described later), and the probability change continuation and the number of support times will be the next jackpot. This is information that suggests to the player that the rush effect that continues until is started. Similarly, in the 16R probability change (special 2), the next game state suggestion information 44w, the combined information of the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y and the light emission gaze prevention information 44o are displayed in order, and then the EF victory rush inrush information 44α1 is displayed. Will be done. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the relationship between the reach display effect that generated the ending display effect and what kind of advantageous gaming state will occur in the future.

In the ending effect pattern of the 8R probability variation (special 1), the composite information of the next game state suggestion information 44w and the manufacturer information 44x and the manufacturer information 44x are displayed in order, and then the CD rush inrush information 44α2 is displayed. It is a pattern. The CD rush rush information 44α2 indicates that this jackpot round game state was generated via Super Reach C and D (defeating the enemy characters TKC and TKD described later), and that the probability change continuation and the number of support times are 100 times from now on. This is information that suggests to the player that the rush effect will start. Similarly, in the 8R probability change (special 2), after the combined information of the next game state suggestion information 44w and the manufacturer information 44x is displayed, the CD rush inrush information 44α2 is displayed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the relationship between the reach display effect that generated the ending display effect and what kind of advantageous gaming state will occur in the future.

The ending effect pattern of 8R normal (special 1) based on normal reach A and B is a chance after the combined information of the next game state suggestion information 44w and the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y and the manufacturer information 44x are displayed in order. This is a pattern in which the mode entry information 44α3 is displayed. The ending effect pattern of 8R normal (special 1) based on Super Reach A and B is after the combined information of the next game state suggestion information 44w and the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y and the manufacturer information 44x are displayed in order. This is a pattern in which the chance mode entry information 44α3 is displayed. The chance mode entry information 44α3 is information that suggests to the player that the chance production with 100 support times will start from now on. In the ending effect pattern of 8R normal (special 1) based on super reach A and B, mission clear mode entry information indicating that the mission effect in super reach A and B is cleared instead of the chance mode entry information 44α3. May be displayed.

Next, the display mode in the third symbol display device 42 will be described with reference to FIG. 84.
FIG. 84 is a diagram illustrating a display mode from the reach display effect to the jackpot round display effect.

The display control device 45 performs a specific effect during the reach development effect, for example, a confrontation effect between the own character PY and the enemy character TKC in the case of Super Reach C, and a confrontation effect between the own character PY and the enemy character TKD in the case of Super Reach D. , If it is Super Reach E, a confrontation effect between the own character PY and the enemy character TKE is executed, and if it is Super Reach F, a confrontation effect between the own character PY and the enemy character TKF is executed. Here, it is assumed that the jackpot super reach E is determined as the reach development effect, and the effect in which the own character PY wins as a result of the confrontation between the own character PY and the enemy character TKE is executed as the specific effect.

As shown in (a), the display control device 45 controls to display a selection request image that requests the player to make a predetermined selection (selection of the own character PY) during the reach development effect. The own character PY has three types, the first character PY1, the second character PY2, and the third character PY3, as in the thirteenth embodiment described above. The selection request image is information 44a (“You can change the player by pressing and holding”) during the specific operation period. The selection of the own character PY is determined as the first character PY1 without operating the frame button 80 as it is (the first character PY1 remains), or the second character PY2 or the third character PY2 or the third character PY2 is selected by operating the frame button 80. It is a choice to change to the character PY3.

As shown in (b), it is assumed that the first character PY1 is selected as a result of the selection of the own character PY. The confrontation effect between the own character PY and the enemy character TKE is executed when the own character PY requested by the selection request image is selected. As a result, it becomes easier to remember the specific effect as well as the predetermined selection requested by the operation request image, so that the interest of the ending effect can be improved.

As a result of the confrontation effect, as shown in (c), the own character PY (first character PY1) wins the enemy character TKE, and the development symbol HZ is stopped and displayed with the jackpot combination of "777". Then, as shown in (d), after the 16R jackpot round game is completed, the jackpot ending effect is started.

The display control device 45 can control to display information related to the specific effect executed during the reach development effect in the ending effect. The information related to the specific effect is the EF victory rush rush information 44α1 if it is any of the jackpot super reach E and F, and the CD victory rush rush information 44α2 if it is any of the jackpot super reach C and D. As a result, the ending effect and the display effect up to the ending effect are associated with each other by the specific effect, and the fun of the display effect continues to the ending effect through the specific effect, so that the fun of the ending effect can be improved. ..

The jackpot ending effect includes the combined information of the next game state suggestion information 44w shown in (e), the manufacturer information 44x shown in (f), the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y and the light emission gaze prevention information 44o shown in (g). Is displayed in order, and then the EF victory rush rush information 44α1 shown in (h) is displayed. The EF victory rush rush information 44α1 is displayed as character information such as "Rush rush after the own character A defeats the enemy character E!". When the display of the EF victory rush rush information 44α1 is completed as shown in (i), the high probability state screen 43k is displayed as shown in (j), and the high probability / support state continues until the next big hit. After A defeats the enemy character E, it shifts to the "rush" state. The own character A is the first character PY1.

The information related to the specific effect (EF victory rush rush information 44α1) is information indicating the component of the specific effect, for example, "the own character A is the enemy character E" indicating the component of the confrontation effect between the own character PY1 and the enemy character TKE. "Rush rushes after defeating!", But information indicating the player's selected own character "Self-character A rushes after winning!" And information indicating the enemy character selected as the opponent of the own character. It may be "rush after subduing the enemy character E!" Or information indicating that the user has passed through the confrontation reach "rush after breaking through the EF confrontation zone!". Even with these, it becomes easier to remember the display effect by displaying the components of the specific effect, so that the interest of the ending effect can be further improved.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 20th embodiment, the third symbol display device 42 capable of displaying the display effect triggered by the lottery based on the establishment of the start condition and the third symbol display device 42 for displaying the display effect. The display control device 45 includes a display control device 45 that controls the display on the screen, and the display control device 45 has a specific effect execution function that controls the execution of the specific effect during the display effect, and the result of the lottery is a specific result. Based on this, the variable winning device 32 is executed a predetermined number of times from the open state in which the game ball can enter to the closed state in which the game ball cannot enter, and the next game starts from the end of the round game. It is equipped with an ending effect execution function that controls the display of the ending effect that displays predetermined information during the ending period up to the time, and the ending effect execution function is a specific effect executed during the display effect (for example, reach development effect). It is possible to control to display information (EF victory rush rush information 44α1, CD victory rush rush information 44α2) related to (for example, confrontation production between own character PY and specific enemy characters TKC, TKD, TKE, TKF) in the ending effect. Is. As a result, the ending effect and the display effect up to the ending effect are associated with each other by the specific effect, and the fun of the display effect continues to the ending effect through the specific effect, so that the fun of the ending effect can be improved. ..

In addition, the information related to the specific effect is information that points to the component of the specific effect (for example, "the rush rush after the own character A defeats the enemy character E" that points to the component of the confrontation effect between the own character PY and the enemy character TKE. Information such as "!"). This makes it easier to remember the display effect by displaying the components of the specific effect, so that the interest of the ending effect can be further improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (G2).

The display effect in which the specific effect is executed is a variable display effect of the identification information (for example, a variable display effect of the main decorative symbol SZ or the developed symbol HZ) that makes it possible to identify whether or not the result of the lottery is the specific result. This makes it easier to remember the specific effect as well as the variable display effect, so that the fun of the ending effect can be improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (G4).

The display effect in which the specific effect is executed is a reach display effect of the identification information (for example, a reach display effect of the main decorative symbol SZ or the developed symbol HZ). This makes it easier to remember the specific effect as well as the reach display effect, so that the interest of the ending effect can be improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (G5).

Further, the specific effect has a higher possibility of producing a specific result than the case where the specific effect is not executed (for example, the own character PY and the specific enemy characters TKC, TKD, TKE, TKF). Confrontation production). As a result, the player who understands the meaning of the suggestion can easily remember the specific suggestion effect, and thus the interest of the ending effect can be improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (G7).

Further, the display control device 45 makes a predetermined selection for the player during the display effect (whether to select the current state without operating the frame button 80 or to select the changed one by operating the frame button 80). The selection request execution function for controlling the display of the selection request image (information 44a during the specific operation period) is provided, and the specific effect is executed when there is a predetermined selection requested by the selection request image. As a result, it becomes easy to remember the specific effect together with the predetermined selection requested by the operation request image, so that the interest of the ending effect can be improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (G9).

The selection request image is displayed during the variable display effect of the identification information (during the reach development effect by the development symbol HZ) that makes it possible to identify whether or not the result of the lottery is a specific result. As a result, the impression of the specific effect is likely to remain strong along with the variable display effect, and the fun of the ending effect can be improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (G10).

In the above-described 20th embodiment, the display of a specific reach display effect as a specific effect executed during the display effect is reflected in the jackpot ending display effect (playback), but the specific reach display is performed. You may look back on the unexpected production. This point will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 88.

FIG. 85 is a flowchart illustrating an auxiliary effect determination process by the display control device 45 of the twenty-first embodiment. FIG. 86 (a) is a flowchart for explaining the one-shot notification lottery process by the display control device 45, and FIG. 86 (b) is a flowchart for explaining the one-shot notification display process by the display control device 45. FIGS. 87 (a) and 87 (b) are diagrams illustrating an ending effect pattern determination table.

In the present embodiment, the specific effect is a specific notification effect that notifies that the possibility of a specific result is higher than that in the case where the specific effect is not executed. The specific notification effect is, for example, one shot by driving a one-shot notification accessory IP arranged around the third symbol display device 42 to appear on the front surface of the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42. It is an announcement production. As a result, it becomes easier for the player who sees, hears, and experiences the notification to remember the specific notification effect, so that the interest of the ending effect can be improved.

If the specific notification effect is a specific notification effect that notifies that the specific result is more likely to be obtained than the case where the specific effect is not executed, the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 is strongly emitted. It may be a directing. Further, a predetermined symbol formed on the transparent light guide plate arranged on the front surface of the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42, which is normally difficult to see, is emitted by an LED arranged on the side surface of the transparent light guide plate. It may be an effect of displaying as a visible pattern. Further, an effect of making a specific image appear during the reach display effect, or an effect of changing the image displayed during the reach display effect to a specific mode may be used.

The auxiliary staging determination process will be described. As shown in FIG. 85, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs a process of displaying various suggested images in step S3401. The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs the one-shot notification lottery process described later in step S3402, and performs the one-shot notification display process described later in step S3403.

One notification lottery process will be explained. As shown in FIG. 86A, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines in step S3411 whether or not the jackpot variation pattern command has been received. Specifically, if the display jackpot fluctuation pattern designation command is received from the sub control device 262, the process proceeds to step S3412, and if not, the present process ends. In step S3412, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 reads the value of the one-shot notification lottery counter for internally determining whether or not to execute one-shot notification when a big hit result is obtained, and in step S3413. , Judge whether the value is a win for the execution of the one-shot notification effect. If the execution of the one-shot notification effect is won, the process proceeds to step S3414, and the one-shot notification flag is set from 0 to 1. If it is not selected, this process ends with the one notification flag set to 0.

One notification display processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 86B, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines in step S3421 whether or not the one notification flag is 1. If the one notification flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S3422, otherwise the process ends. In step S3422, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not it is set to have one notification. If it is set to have one notification, the process proceeds to step S3423, the one notification effect is executed at a predetermined timing, and after the execution of the one notification effect, the one notification flag is set to 1 in step S3424. Return to 0 to end this process. On the other hand, if the setting is such that there is no one notification, the process proceeds to step S3424, the one notification flag is returned from 1 to 0, and this process ends. The setting with or without one notification may be selected by the player as described later, or may be selected inside the gaming machine. If the player can select, the player's preference for one notification can be reflected. If it can be selected inside the gaming machine, it is disadvantageous for the player to keep watching one announcement (eye strain, indifference to unexpected one announcement), or disadvantage for not keeping watching one announcement (one shot). There is no feeling of excitement due to the notification).

The table for determining the ending effect pattern will be described. 87 (a) is the content corresponding to 16R probability variation (special 1) in the ending effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 61, and FIG. 87 (b) is 8R in the ending effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. This is the content corresponding to the probability change (Special 1). The following explanation also applies to others.

When the jackpot super reach A and B shown in (a) are executed and no one notification is set, the jackpot ending display effect suggests the next game state as in the case shown in FIG. The information 44w, the manufacturer information 44x, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, and the privilege video 44n are displayed in order. When the jackpot super reach A and B are executed and one notification is set, the jackpot ending display effect is the combined information of the light emission gaze prevention information 44o and the one notification effect change suggestion information 44γ. , The combined information of the manufacturer information 44x, the next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, and the privilege video 44n are displayed in order. The one-shot notification effect change suggestion information 44γ is information suggesting a change operation of whether or not to change the setting of presence / absence of the one-shot notification effect. The same applies when the jackpot super reach C to F are executed.

When the jackpot super reach A and B shown in (b) are executed and no one notification is set, the jackpot ending display effect suggests the next game state as in the case shown in FIG. Information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, and card removal forgetting prevention information 44y are displayed in order. When Super Reach A and B are executed and one notification is set, the jackpot ending display effect is the combined information of the light emission gaze prevention information 44o and the one notification effect change suggestion information 44γ. , The combined information of the manufacturer information 44x, the next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, and the privilege video 44n are displayed in order. The same applies when normal reach A and B and jackpot super reach C and D are executed.

Next, the display mode in the third symbol display device 42 will be described with reference to FIG. 88. FIG. 88 is a diagram illustrating a display mode from the reach display effect to the jackpot ending display effect.

As shown in (a), the display control device 45 is a selection that requires the player to make a predetermined selection (selection of presence / absence of one notification effect) during the reach development effect (for example, a mission clear effect based on the super reach A). Controls the display of the requested image. The selection request image is information 44a during the specific operation period (“the presence or absence of a one-shot notification effect can be changed by pressing and holding”). Along with the information 44a during the specific operation period, the proximity information 44e at the end of the specific operation period is displayed, and the time (for example, 10 seconds) in which the presence or absence of the one-shot notification effect can be selected is counted. If 10 seconds have passed without operating the frame button 80, it is determined that there is a one-shot notification effect.

The selection of the presence or absence of the one-shot notification effect is as shown in (b), as described above, whether the selection is determined to have the one-shot notification effect without operating the frame button 80 as it is (with the one-shot notification effect). It is an option to operate the frame button 80 so as to change without a one-shot notification effect. When the frame button 80 is operated, the change information display unit 44c is displayed, and by operating the left selection button 82 or the right selection button 83, it is possible to select no one-shot notification effect. If the enter button 81 is pressed, the selected mode is determined.

As a result of the selection, it is assumed that one notification effect is selected. The mission clear effect is executed when there is a selection of whether or not to perform the one-shot notification effect requested by the selection request image. As a result, it becomes easy to remember the specific effect together with the predetermined selection requested by the operation request image, so that the interest of the ending effect can be improved.

In the middle of the mission clearing effect, as shown in (d), the one-shot notification character IP falls from the upper part of the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42, and is arranged in front of the one-shot notification character IP. A single notification effect is performed in which a large number of LEDs and a light emitting device arranged around the display screen 42a emit light. The one-shot notification effect may output a sound that impresses the one-shot notification in accordance with the light emission. Eventually, the light emission ends, and the one-shot notification accessory IP is stored above the display screen 42a. In the mission clearing effect in which the one-shot notification effect is performed, as shown in (e), the own character PY clears the mission, and the development symbol HZ is stopped and displayed in a hit combination of, for example, "666". Then, as shown in (f), after the 8R jackpot round game is completed, the jackpot ending effect is started.

For the jackpot ending effect, when no one notification is selected, the next game state suggestion information 44w shown in (g), the manufacturer information 44x shown in (h), and the prevention of forgetting to remove the card shown in (i). This is a pattern in which information 44y is displayed. When one notification is selected, the light emission gaze prevention information 44o (text information "Please keep watching the strong light") and the one notification production change suggestion information 44γ ("" If you are tired of your eyes, you can choose without one notification. "), Next game status suggestion information 44w shown in (k), manufacturer information 44x and card removal prevention information 44y shown in (l). Is the pattern that is displayed. In addition, the next game state proximity information 44l6 that displays the remaining time of the jackpot ending effect is also displayed.

As described above, the display control device 45 can control to display the information related to the specific effect (light emission gaze prevention information 44o described above) executed during the reach development effect in the ending effect. The information related to the specific effect is information indicating a component of the specific effect, for example, information indicating "Please be careful to keep watching the strong light" indicating the light emission constituting the one-shot notification effect in the emission gaze prevention information 44o. In addition to this, the information related to the specific effect constitutes a one-shot notification effect when the one-shot notification agent IP capable of emitting light of multiple colors suggests a jackpot confirmation when the specific light is emitted. It may be information that reminds the player of a specific color, such as "What color was the light of the one-shot notification effect?", Which indicates the emission color. This makes it easier to remember the display effect by displaying the components of the specific effect, so that the interest of the ending effect can be further improved.

In addition, the information related to the specific effect is information indicating the influence of the specific effect on the player, for example, the above-mentioned one-shot notification effect change suggestion information 44γ "If you are easily tired of your eyes, you can choose without one-shot notification". be. This suggests to the player that if there is an opportunity to select whether or not to have a one-shot notification effect again for the reach development production from the next time onward, the player should select the one who did not select this time (no one-shot notification) next time. Information to be done. As a result, it is possible to appeal to the player who is affected by the strong light of the eyes by the specific effect to rest his eyes, so that the interest of the ending effect can be further improved.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 21st embodiment, the information related to the specific effect is the information indicating the component of the specific effect (for example, the light emission gaze prevention information 44o "Please be careful to keep watching the strong light". "Strong light"). This makes it easier to remember the display effect by displaying the components of the specific effect, so that the interest of the ending effect can be further improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (G2).

In addition, the information related to the specific effect is information indicating the influence of the specific effect on the player (for example, one-shot notification effect change suggestion information 44γ "If the eyes are easily tired, select B next"). .. As a result, it is possible to appeal to the player who has been influenced by the specific effect, so that the interest of the ending effect can be further improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (G3).

Further, the specific effect is a specific notification effect (one-issue notification effect by the one-issue notification accessory IP) that notifies that the possibility of a specific result is higher than when the specific effect is not executed. As a result, it becomes easier for the player who sees, hears, and experiences the notification to remember the specific notification effect, so that the interest of the ending effect can be improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (G8).

Further, the display control device 45 controls to display a selection request image (change information display unit 44c) that requests the player to make a predetermined selection (selection with or without one notification) during the reach development effect. It has a function, and the specific effect (one-shot notification effect) is executed when there is a predetermined selection requested by the selection request image. As a result, it becomes easy to remember the specific effect together with the predetermined selection requested by the operation request image, so that the interest of the ending effect can be improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (G9).

In the above-mentioned Example 21, it was possible to select whether or not to execute the one-shot notification effect during the reach display effect, but the selection of whether or not to execute the one-shot notification effect is being performed during other display effects. You may. This point will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90. FIG. 89 is a diagram illustrating an ending effect pattern determination table in the 22nd embodiment. FIG. 90 is a diagram illustrating another display mode of the jackpot ending display effect.

That is, the selection request image is displayed at the same time as the information related to the specific effect (for example, the light emission gaze prevention information 44o) during the ending effect. As a result, it becomes possible to reconsider whether or not to make a predetermined selection after seeing the information related to the specific effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the ending effect.

The table for determining the ending effect pattern will be described. (A) is the content corresponding to the 16R probability variation (Special 1) shown in FIG. 87, and (b) is the content corresponding to the 8R probability variation (Special 1) shown in FIG. 87.

When the jackpot super reach A and B shown in (a) are executed and one notification is set, one notification is given to the one notification effect change proposal information 44γ1 to be described later. When the change operation with or without the effect is not performed, the jackpot ending display effect is the combined information of the light emission gaze prevention information 44o and the one-shot notification effect change proposal information 44γ1, the manufacturer information 44x, and the next game state suggestion. The combined information of the information 44w and the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y and the privilege video 44n are displayed in order. When the jackpot super reach A and B are executed and one notification is set, and one notification effect is present or not for the one notification effect change proposal information 44γ1 described later. When the change operation is performed, the jackpot ending display effect includes the combined information of the light emission gaze prevention information 44o and the one-shot notification effect change proposal information 44γ1, and the combined information of the manufacturer information 44x and the next game state suggestion information 44w. , The one-shot notification effect change operation information 44γ2 and the privilege video 44n are displayed in order. The same applies when the jackpot super reach C to F are executed.

The one-shot notification effect change proposal information 44γ1 is information that proposes a change operation for changing the setting of the presence / absence of the one-shot notification effect in this jackpot ending display effect. The one-shot notification effect change operation information 44γ2 is a change operation for changing the presence or absence of the one-shot notification effect when the frame button 80 is operated to change the one-issue notification effect change proposal information 44γ1. Information indicating the content.

When the jackpot super reach A and B shown in (b) are executed, and when one notification is set, one notification effect is provided for the one notification effect change proposal information 44γ1. When the presence / absence change operation is not performed, the jackpot ending display effect is the combined information of the light emission gaze prevention information 44o and the one-shot notification effect change proposal information 44γ1, the manufacturer information 44x, and the next game state suggestion information 44w. And the compound information of the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y are displayed in order. When the jackpot super reach A and B are executed, when one notification is set, and when the change operation is performed for the one notification production change proposal information 44γ1, the jackpot is performed. The ending display effect is a combination of light emission gaze prevention information 44o and one-shot notification effect change proposal information 44γ1, and compound information of manufacturer information 44x, next game state suggestion information 44w, and card removal forgetting prevention information 44y. Notification effect change operation information 44γ2 and the like are displayed in order. The same applies when the jackpot normal reach A and B and the jackpot super reach C and D are executed.

Next, the display mode in the third symbol display device 42 will be described with reference to FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a diagram illustrating a display mode from the reach display effect to the jackpot ending display effect. Since the display mode from the reach display effect to the jackpot round display effect is the same as that in FIG. 88, the start of the jackpot ending display effect will be described.

When one notification is set and one notification is executed during the reach effect leading to this jackpot ending display effect, as shown in (a), the light emission gaze prevention information 44o and one The combined information with the announcement / effect change proposal information 44γ1 is displayed. The one-shot notification effect change proposal information 44γ1 is text information that says, "If you are easily tired of your eyes, press the button and select no one-shot notification" when it is set to have one notification. Further, during the display period of the one-shot notification effect change proposal information 44γ1, the end-of-term proximity information 44e of the specific operation period is displayed, indicating the time for accepting the change operation of the one-shot notification effect. Throughout the display period of the ending display effect, the next game state proximity information 44l6 is displayed, indicating the remaining time of the ending display effect.

If the change operation of pressing the frame button 80 is not performed while the one-shot notification effect change proposal information 44γ1 is being displayed (10 seconds from the start of the ending effect), that is, the player changes the presence or absence of the one-shot notification effect. If not desired, the jackpot ending display effect is a composite information of the manufacturer information 44x (5 seconds) shown in (b), the next game state suggestion information 44w shown in (c), and the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y ( 10 seconds) are displayed in order.

If a change operation is performed while the one-shot notification effect change proposal information 44γ1 is being displayed, that is, if the player wishes to change the presence or absence of the one-shot notification effect, the jackpot ending display effect is shown in (d). As described above, the combined information (5 seconds) of the manufacturer information 44x and the next game state suggestion information 44w is displayed. Further, during the display of this composite information, the post-specific operation standby information 44a3 that informs the player that the player is waiting until the start of the change operation of the one-shot notification effect is displayed. The post-specific operation standby information 44a3 is text information that says, "Wait a moment until the operation for changing the one-shot notification effect."

After displaying the manufacturer information 44x and the next game state suggestion information 44w, as shown in (e), the one-shot notification effect change operation information 44γ2 (10 seconds) that causes the player to perform the one-shot notification effect change operation. Is displayed. The one-shot notification effect change operation information 44γ2 displays a change information display unit 44c that displays the presence / absence of the one-shot notification effect and an operation method display unit 44d that indicates the method of the change operation with / without the one-shot notification effect. .. In addition, the end-of-term proximity information 44e of the specific operation period indicating the remaining time of this change operation is also displayed.

As shown in (f), when the player operates the left selection button 82 or the right selection button 83 to select no one-shot notification effect and presses the enter button 81, one-shot notification is made in the next game state. No production is set.

If one notification is set and one notification is executed during the reach effect leading to this jackpot ending display effect, the one notification effect change proposal information 44γ1 is set in (a). Only is displayed, and the text information "If you want to see the one-shot notification effect this time, press the button and select with one-shot notification" may be displayed. When the player presses the button, the one-shot notification effect change operation information 44γ2 is displayed in the same manner as in (e) to (f). After the change operation is completed, as shown in (g), the remaining ending information 44j is displayed, and the game shifts to the next gaming state. In this way, the player selects with one notification during the ending display effect, so that the one notification effect can be displayed in the next game state. This makes it possible to motivate the player to see the one-shot announcement effect in the ending effect and continue the motivation for the game.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 22nd embodiment, the selection request image (one-shot notification effect change suggestion information 44γ) is displayed during the ending display effect. As a result, the impression of the specific effect (one-shot notification effect) is likely to remain strong along with the ending display effect, and the interest of the ending effect can be improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (G11).

The pachinko machine 10 of the 23rd embodiment is configured so that the third illumination unit (top lamp) 303 can be replaced with another third illumination unit (another top lamp) 604 having a different size and shape. Further, even when the third illumination unit 303 is replaced with another third illumination unit 604, the decoration effect can be optimized. Hereinafter, a specific configuration will be described.

FIG. 91 is a front view of the pachinko machine of the 23rd embodiment in a state where an illumination cover having a size different from that of FIG. 1 is attached. FIG. 92 is a right side view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 91, and is a view showing a state in which illumination covers of different sizes are attached in a CC cross section. FIG. 93 is a left side view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 91, and is a view showing a state in which illumination covers of different sizes are attached in a DD cross section. FIGS. 94 (a) and 94 (b) are diagrams illustrating the adjustment of the light emitting region when the illuminated covers of different sizes are attached.

The third illumination unit 303 has a configuration fixed to the front frame set 14 and a configuration that can be attached to and detached from the front frame set 14.

Specifically, the third illumination unit 303 is configured to be fixed to the front frame set 14, and is a control mechanism that controls the mode of the light irradiation device 607 that irradiates the light and the mode of the light that is emitted from the light irradiation device 607. 608 is provided, and a third illuminated cover 609 that covers the front side of the light irradiation device 607 is provided as a structure that can be attached to and detached from the front frame set 14 side. The third illumination cover 609 can be replaced with another third illumination cover 610 having a different size and shape from the third illumination cover 609.

The third illuminated cover 609 is made of a light-transmitting synthetic resin. The third illuminated cover 609 may be colorless or colored, or may be subjected to a frosted glass-like surface treatment. The third illuminated cover 609 is provided with a diffusing member (diffusing plate) having irregularities for diffusing the light from the light irradiating device 607, and the uneven portion for diffusing the light from the light irradiating device 607 is the third. 3 It is applied to the inner surface of the illuminated cover 609. As a result, the third illumination cover 609 can make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the light irradiation device 607. In addition to the third illuminated cover 609 (that is, the third illuminated portion 303), another third illuminated cover 610, the first illuminated portion 301, and the second illuminated portion 302 are similarly configured.

The third illuminated cover 609 constitutes the cover of the third illuminated portion 303, is attached to a portion sandwiched between the sound output portions 24 of the front frame set 14, and the upper end is inside the upper side of the inner frame 12. It is formed horizontally along the line, and its front end protrudes slightly forward of the sound output unit 24. The third illuminated cover 609 is formed as a first light emitting region 605 in which the left and right side surfaces, the upper surface, the lower surface, and the like emit light with the front surface as the center.

The separate third illuminated cover 610 constitutes the cover of the separate third illuminated portion 604, and is attached to a portion sandwiched between the sound output portions 24 of the front frame set 14, but the upper end is the upper side of the inner frame 12. It is formed above, and the front end protrudes slightly forward from the time when the third illuminated cover 609 is attached. That is, the separate third illuminated cover 610 can be attached to the same position as the third illuminated cover 609, but is formed as a larger illuminated cover than the third illuminated cover 609. The third illuminated cover 610 is formed as a second light emitting region 606 in which the left and right side surfaces, the upper surface, the lower surface and the like are wider than the first light emitting region 605 with the front surface as the center. The second light emitting region 606 of the third illuminated cover 610 changes according to its shape.

The third illuminated cover 610 is attached to a portion sandwiched between the sound output portions 24 of the front frame set 14 by a slide mechanism 602 that slides the third illuminated cover 610 in the front-rear direction. The slide mechanism 602 is composed of slide grooves 603 formed on the upper and lower sides of the inner side surface of the cover of the sound output unit 24.

The slide groove 603 is formed in the front-rear direction so that the third illumination cover 609 and the separate third illumination cover 610 are vertically attached to the front frame set 14, but the third illumination cover 603 is formed. The cover 609 and the separate third illuminated cover 610 may be attached so as to be inserted diagonally downward with respect to the front frame set 14. Further, the slide groove 603 may be one in which the third illuminated cover 609 and the separate third illuminated cover 610 can be attached / detached to / from the front frame set 14 in the vertical direction.

In the control mechanism 608, when the third illumination cover 609 is attached (that is, when the front surface of the third illumination cover 609 is located in the first position), the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 is emitted. The first control for causing the front surface of the third illuminated cover 609 located at the first position to emit light as the first light emitting region 605 is executed. The first control is control of the inclination, position, light emission intensity, light emission area, etc. of the light irradiation device 607 so that the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 preferably emits light in the first light emission region 605. In this embodiment, the first control is an attitude control that maintains or shifts to the vertical attitude of the light irradiation device 607.

The control mechanism 608 was irradiated from the light irradiation device 607 when the separate third illumination cover 610 was attached (that is, when the front surface of the separate third illumination cover 610 was located at the second position). A second control is executed in which the front surface of another third illuminated cover 610 located at the second position is emitted as the second light emitting region 606. The second control is control of the inclination, position, emission intensity, emission area, etc. of the light irradiation device 607 so that the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 preferably emits the second light emitting region 606. In the present embodiment, the second control is an attitude control in which the light irradiation device 607 is maintained or changed to a posture in which the light irradiation device 607 is slightly inclined upward.

As a result, even when the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 emits the first light emitting region 605 (that is, the third illuminated cover 609), the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 is the second light emitting region. Even when the 606 (that is, another third illuminated cover 610) is made to emit light, it can be dealt with by optimizing the irradiation of the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607, so that the light emitting region can be suitably changed. Even when the third illuminated cover 609 arranged on the front frame set 14 of the gaming machine main body is replaced with another third illuminated cover 610, the light emitting region can be suitably changed. Even when the shape of the third illuminated cover 610 is changed from the shape of the third illuminated cover 609 before the change, the light emitting region can be suitably changed.

The control mechanism 608 controls the light irradiation device 607 from the state in which the first control can be executed in the process of attaching another third illumination cover 610 to the front frame set 14 in place of the third illumination cover 609. (Or, the state in which the second control can be executed to the state in which the first control can be executed. The same shall apply hereinafter). Thereby, in the process of replacing the third illuminated cover 609 arranged in the front frame set 14 of the gaming machine main body with another third illuminated cover 610, the light emitting region can be suitably changed.

The third illuminated cover 609 and another third illuminated cover 610 are provided with a locking mechanism 622 that can be locked and replaced with the front frame set 14 without using a tool. The locking mechanism 622 is composed of, for example, a claw portion 623 provided on the front frame set plate 14a and a claw hole portion 624 provided on the third illuminated cover 609 and the separate third illuminated cover 610. Since the claw portion 623 is firmly inserted into the claw hole portion 624 of the locking mechanism 622, the locking mechanism 622 is prevented from being easily removed by a player, a cheating person, or the like during business.

The control mechanism 608 changes the light irradiation device 607 from the state in which the first control can be executed to the state in which the second control can be executed in accordance with the replacement work of the third illumination cover 609 and the separate third illumination cover 610. Change. As a result, the replacement work for appropriately changing the light emitting region can be easily performed.

Next, the first control and the second control performed by the control mechanism 608 will be specifically described.

The light irradiation device 607 includes a light emitting substrate 611 in which the LED 612 is arranged, and a substrate support portion 613 that supports the light emitting substrate 611. The board support portion 613 is rotatably supported by the main body side fixing portion 620 fixed to the front frame set 14.

The light irradiation device 607 is configured so that the light emitting substrate 611 can be tilted by the substrate support portion 613 and the main body side fixing portion 620. The control mechanism 608 changes the light irradiation device 607 from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed by tilting the light emitting substrate 611. Thereby, the irradiation angle can be easily adjusted.

The control mechanism 608 is an input unit 614 for inputting a force generated in the process of attaching another third electric decoration cover 610 to the front frame set 14 in place of the third electric decoration cover 609 in order to configure the light emitting board 611 so as to be tiltable. And an output unit 615 that changes the mode of the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 based on the input force.

The input unit 614 is a mechanism for pushing the light irradiation device 607 into the third illumination cover 610 in the process of attaching the third illumination cover 610 to the front frame set 14 in place of the third illumination cover 609. Specifically, the input unit 614 includes a push-in portion 616 provided in the separate third illuminated cover 610 and a push-in receiving portion 617 provided in the light irradiation device 607.

The push-in portion 616 is a protruding portion arranged on the inner surface of the left end portion in the front view of the separate third illuminated cover 610. The protrusion of the push-in portion 616 is a push-in receiver provided at the upper left end portion of the board support portion 613 in front view before being mounted on the mounting location in the process of mounting the separate third illuminated cover 610 to the front frame set 14. It is formed so as to come into contact with the portion 617 and tilt the substrate support portion 613 toward the back.

The push-in portion 616 is difficult for the player to see due to the uneven portion formed inside the separate third electric decoration cover 610, but in order to make the push-in portion 616 more difficult to see, the separate third electric decoration It may be formed on the side surface of the cover 610. In this case, the push-in receiving portion 617 is also formed on the side surface of the light irradiation device 607.

The push-in portion 616 and the push-in receiving portion 617 may be arranged at different positions of the separate third electric decoration cover 610 and the light irradiation device 607, depending on the difference in the structure to which the separate third electric decoration cover 610 is attached. If the slide groove 603 described above is configured to attach the third illumination cover 609 and the separate third illumination cover 610 so as to be inserted diagonally downward with respect to the front frame set 14, the push-in receiving portion 617 is attached to the light irradiation device 607. Even if the push-in portion 616 is formed at a position (inner surface of another third illuminated cover 610) in which the push-in receiving portion 617 protruding toward the back surface side of the light irradiation device 607 can be pushed. good. As a result, in the mounted state of the third illuminated cover 609, the push-in receiving portion 617 is hidden behind the light irradiation device 607, and in the mounted state of the separate third illuminated cover 310, the push-in portion 616 and the push-in receiving portion 617 are hidden. Since both of them are hidden behind the light irradiation device 607, not only are they not visible to the player, but also the light emitting area of the light irradiation device 607 can be made wider.

The output unit 615 tilts the light emitting substrate 611 by tilting the light irradiation device 607 based on the force input from the input unit 614, so that the light irradiation device 607 can execute the first control. It is a mechanism that changes to a state in which the second control can be executed. Specifically, the output section 615 includes a board support section 613, a main body side fixing section 620, a shaft 618, a coil spring 618 attached to the shaft 618, and a posture control section 621 that regulates the posture of the board support section 613. It is composed of and.

The shaft 618 connects the substrate support portion 613 and the main body side fixing portion 620 so that the substrate support portion 613 can be tilted with respect to the main body side fixing portion 620. The coil spring 619, in a state of being attached to the shaft 618, generates an urging force on the substrate support portion 613 and the main body side fixing portion 620. In the process of attaching the separate third illuminated cover 610, the coil spring 619 increases the urging force as the pushing portion 616 comes into contact with the pushing receiving portion 617 and tilts the substrate support portion 613 toward the back side, and the pushing portion 616 of the pushing portion 616. The urging force becomes the largest at the position where the pushing ends.

The posture control unit 621 is a stopper provided on the substrate support unit 613. The urging force of the coil spring 619 is regulated by the posture regulating portion 621 in a posture in which the substrate support portion 613 is vertical with the third illuminated cover 609 attached.

Thereby, the light emitting region can be suitably changed by utilizing the force generated in the process of attaching the third illumination cover 610 to the front frame set 14 instead of the third illumination cover 609. In the process of attaching the third illumination cover 610 to the front frame set 14 in place of the third illumination cover 609, the force of the third illumination cover 610 pushing the light irradiation device 607 to make the light emitting region suitable. Can be changed. The irradiation angle can be easily adjusted by using the force input in the process of attaching another third illumination cover 610 to the front frame set 14 instead of the third illumination cover 609.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 23rd embodiment, the third illuminated portion 303 (third illuminated cover 609) and the third illuminated portion 303 arranged on the front side of the game machine main body. It is provided with a light irradiation device 607 that irradiates light toward the back surface side of the slingshot. Since the pachinko machine 10 can transfer a predetermined surface (for example, the front surface) of the third illumination unit 303 that receives the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 by the transfer mechanism 602 to a different position, the third electric machine 10 can be used. The impression of the front side of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed according to the change in the position of the predetermined surface of the decorative portion 303. When the predetermined surface is located at the first position, the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 executes the first control to emit the predetermined surface located at the first position as the first light emitting region 605. When the predetermined surface is located at the second position, the control for executing the second control that the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 emits the predetermined surface located at the second position as the second light emitting region 606. Since the mechanism 608 is provided, the light emitting region can be suitably changed by optimizing the irradiation direction of the light according to the transition of the predetermined surface of the third illuminated portion 303. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H1) described above.

Further, the third illumination unit 303 is a replaceable third illumination cover 609 arranged on the front side of the main body of the pachinko machine 10, and the first light emitting region 605 is a predetermined of the third illumination cover 609. The second light emitting region 606 provided on the surface is provided on a predetermined surface of another third illuminated cover 610 to be replaced with the third illuminated cover 609, and is therefore arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 main body. Even when the third illumination cover 609 is replaced with another third illumination cover 610, the light emitting region can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H2) described above.

Further, the light irradiation device 607 is a light emitting substrate 611 mounted on the front frame set 14. As a result, when the third illumination cover 609 arranged on the front frame set 14 of the gaming machine main body is replaced with another third illumination cover 610, the light emitting board 611 is not on the third illumination cover 609 side. Even when the front frame set 14 is provided, the light emitting region can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H3) described above.

Further, in the first control, the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 is set to a right angle (first irradiation angle) of the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 with respect to the first light emitting region 605. The irradiation area of the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 to the first light emitting region 605 is set to the first irradiation area (front surface of the third illuminated cover 609), and the second control is , A second irradiation angle different from the first irradiation angle (inclined from the first irradiation angle) and a second irradiation area different from the first irradiation area (wider than the first irradiation area). The irradiation area of. Thereby, the light emitting region can be suitably changed by changing the irradiation angle and the irradiation area. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H4) described above.

Further, the second light emitting region 606 of the separate third illuminated cover 610 changes according to its shape. As a result, even when the shape of the separate third illuminated cover 610 is changed from the shape of the third illuminated cover 609 before the change, the light emitting region can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H5) described above.

Further, the third illuminated cover 609 and the separate third illuminated cover 610 can be replaced without using a tool. As a result, the replacement work for appropriately changing the light emitting region can be easily performed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H6) described above.

Further, the light irradiation device 607 can be tilted. As a result, the irradiation angle is set regardless of whether the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 emits the first light emitting region 605 or the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 emits the second light emitting region 606. It can be easily adjusted. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H7) described above.

Further, the control mechanism 608 is in a state where the light irradiation device 607 can execute the second control from the state where the first control can be executed in the process of replacing the third illumination cover 609 with another third illumination cover 610. Therefore, the light emitting region can be suitably changed in the process of replacing the third illuminated cover 609 with another third illuminated cover 610. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H9) described above.

Further, the control mechanism 608 uses an input unit 614 for inputting a force generated in the process of exchanging the third illumination cover 609 for another third illumination cover 610, and a light irradiation device 607 based on the input force. Since it is provided with an output unit 615 that changes the state in which the first control can be executed to the state in which the second control can be executed, the force generated in the process of replacing the third electric decoration cover 609 with another third electric decoration cover 610 is generated. It can be utilized to suitably change the light emitting region. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H10) described above.

Further, the input unit 614 is a push-in part 616, a push-in receiving part 617, which pushes the light irradiation device 607 into the separate third electric-decoration cover 610 in the process of replacing the third electric-decoration cover 609 with another third electric-decoration cover 610. Therefore, in the process of replacing the third illumination cover 609 with another third illumination cover 610, the light emitting region is suitably changed by utilizing the force of the third illumination cover 610 pushing the light irradiation device 607. be able to. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H11) described above.

Further, the output unit 615 changes the light irradiation device 607 from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed by tilting the light irradiation device 607 based on the input force. Let me. Thereby, the irradiation angle can be easily adjusted by using the force input in the process of attaching the third illumination cover 610 to the front frame set 14 instead of the third illumination cover 609. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H12) described above.

Further, the main body of the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 forming the outer shell of the main body of the pachinko machine 10 and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame 11 with one side portion of the outer frame 11 as an opening / closing axis. A front frame set 14 that can be freely opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 with one side portion of the inner frame 12 as an opening / closing shaft is provided. The game board 30 is provided with a game board 30 having a game area 30a on which the attached game ball flows down, and the game board 30 occurs during the variation display of the third symbol and when the variation display of the third symbol results in a big hit. The front frame set 14 includes a symbol display device 42 having a display screen 42a for displaying a display effect during a jackpot game state and an opening for making the display screen 42a visible, and the front frame set 14 has a game area 30a and a display screen 42a. A glass frame portion 23 that surrounds the glass plate 137 that is visible is provided, and the third illumination unit 303 is visible from the front side of the front frame set 14 of the pachinko machine 10 main body. This facilitates the transition of the light emitting portion on the front side of the front frame set 14 of the pachinko machine 10 main body, and optimizes the irradiation direction of the light according to the transition of the light emitting portion, thereby appropriately changing the light emitting region. Can be made to. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I2) described above.

Further, since the third illumination unit 303 is attached to the glass frame portion 23 of the front frame of the pachinko machine main body, it is easy to change the light emitting portion in the glass frame portion 23 of the front frame set 14 of the pachinko machine 10 main body. However, by optimizing the irradiation direction of the light according to the transition of the light emitting portion in the glass frame portion 23, the light emitting region in the glass frame portion 23 can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I3) described above.

Further, since the third illumination unit 303 is a transparent resin member and is configured so that the control mechanism 608 is difficult to see, the control mechanism 608 can be made inconspicuous. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J4) described above.

Further, since the control mechanism 608 is arranged so as not to overlap the front surface of the light emitting portion mounting surface of the light irradiation device 607, the light emitting region can be suitably changed without blocking the light emitting portion mounting surface. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J4) described above.

In Example 23 described above, the control mechanism 608 changes the mode of the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 by tilting the light irradiation device 607, but the light irradiation device 607 is fixed and the light irradiation is performed. A configuration that changes the mode of the light emitted from the device 607 may be adopted. Hereinafter, a specific configuration will be described.

FIGS. 95 (a) and 95 (b) are diagrams illustrating the adjustment of the light emitting region in the 24th embodiment.

In this embodiment, the light irradiation device 607 is fixed to the front frame set 14, and the light transmitted from the light irradiation device 607 is transmitted to the first light emitting region 605 or the second light emitting region 606. It is equipped with. The translucent portion 630 includes a translucent plate 631 that transmits light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 and outputs the light to the front side, a translucent plate support portion 632 that supports the translucent plate 631, and Example 23. A similar control mechanism 608 is provided. The light-transmitting plate 631 may be colorless or colored transparent, or may have a property of diffusing light.

The configuration of the translucent plate support portion 332 is the same as the configuration of the substrate support portion 613 that tilts the light emitting substrate 611 of the 23rd embodiment. That is, when the third illuminated cover 609 is attached by the control mechanism 608, the translucent plate support portion 632 transmits the light emitted from the light irradiating device 607 while maintaining the vertical posture, and is the first. The light emitted from the light emitting region 605 is output to the front side where the light emitting region 605 is located. Refracts diagonally upward where is located and transmits light.

Thereby, not only the light irradiation device 607 can be tilted but also the light transmitting portion 630 can be tilted, the irradiation angle can be easily adjusted and the light emitting region can be suitably changed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 24th embodiment, the light irradiation device 607 is fixed to the front frame, and the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 is emitted from the first light emitting region 605 or the second light emitting region. A translucent portion 630 that transmits light is provided in the region 606, and the translucent portion 630 can be tilted. Thereby, the irradiation angle can be easily adjusted not only in the configuration in which the light irradiation device 607 can be tilted but also in the configuration in which the light transmitting portion 630 can be tilted. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H8) described above.

In Examples 23 and 24 described above, the input unit 614 and the output unit 615 of the control mechanism 608 tilt the light emitting board 313 by the force of the pushing unit 616 pushing the light emitting board 313, but the control mechanism 608 The input unit 614 and the output unit 615 may have different configurations. Hereinafter, the configurations different from those of the 23rd and 24th embodiments will be specifically described.

FIG. 96 is a front view of the pachinko machine of the 25th embodiment. FIG. 97 is a left side view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 96, and is a view showing a state in which the illumination cover is attached in an EE cross section. FIG. 98 is a front view of a pachinko machine with different sized illumination covers attached. FIG. 99 is a left side view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 98, and is a view showing a state in which illumination covers of different sizes are attached in an FF cross section. 100 (a) and 100 (b) are diagrams illustrating the adjustment of the light emitting region when the illuminated covers of different sizes are attached. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing a normal process by the sub control device.

The control mechanism 608 is based on the detection of the separate cover detection sensor 641 for detecting that the separate third illuminated cover 610 is attached to the front frame set 14 in place of the third illuminated cover 609, and the detection of the separate cover detection sensor 641. The tilting motor 642 that changes the mode of the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 is provided. Thereby, the light emitting region can be suitably changed by detecting that the third illumination cover 610 is attached to the front frame set 14 instead of the third illumination cover 609.

The separate cover detection sensor 641 is attached to a portion facing the inner surface of the third illuminated cover 609, for example, at the upper left of the main body side fixing portion 620 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The separate cover detection sensor 641 is, for example, a limit switch. The separate cover detection sensor 641 detects that the separate third illuminated cover 610 is not attached because the hinge does not push the contact when the third illuminated cover 609 is attached. When the separate cover detection sensor 641 is replaced with the separate third illuminated cover 610, its hinge is pushed into a part of the separate third illuminated cover 610 (for example, the separate cover detection protrusion 643 described later) to switch the switch. It is pressed and detects that another third illuminated cover 610 is attached.

The separate third illuminated cover 610 is provided with a separate cover detection protrusion 643 at a position corresponding to the separate cover detection sensor 641 on the inner side surface on the right side thereof when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The separate cover detection projection 643 reliably contacts the separate cover detection sensor 641 when the separate third illuminated cover 610 is attached to the front frame set 14. The configuration of the separate cover detection sensor 641 is not limited to the above configuration, and may be, for example, a non-contact sensor.

When the third electric cover 609 is attached in place of the separate third electric cover 610, the separate cover detection sensor 641 has a separate hinge because the hinge is separated from the switch when the separate third electric cover 610 is removed. 3 Detects that the illuminated cover 610 has been removed. Thereby, the light emitting region can be suitably changed by detecting that the third illumination cover 609 is attached to the front frame set 14 instead of the third illumination cover 610.

The separate cover detection sensor 641 and the tilting motor 642 are electrically connected to the sub control device 262. When it is detected by the separate cover detection sensor 641 that the separate third illuminated cover 610 is attached, the sub control device 262 rotates the tilting motor 642 until it reaches a predetermined angle, and the light irradiation device 607 is used. The substrate support portion 613 is tilted so as to change from the vertical posture to the tilted posture. When it is detected by the separate cover detection sensor 641 that the separate third illumination cover 610 has been removed, the sub control device 262 reversely rotates the tilting motor 642 until it reaches a predetermined angle, and the light irradiation device 607. The substrate support portion 613 is erected so as to change from a tilted posture to a vertical posture. The tilting motor 642 may be controlled by detecting the rotation angle by a potentiometer or an encoder, or by applying a pulse voltage corresponding to a predetermined rotation angle by using a stepping motor.

Next, the normal processing performed by the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 will be described as being different from the above-described embodiment. In step S2103A, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 adjusts the light emitting region after notifying the power-on of step S2103. Specifically, when the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 receives the ON signal from the separate cover detection sensor 641 (detection signal that the separate third illuminated cover 610 is attached), the tilting motor 642 is specified. The light emitting region is adjusted by rotating the light irradiation device 607 until it reaches an angle and tilting the substrate support portion 613 so that the light irradiation device 607 changes from the vertical posture to the tilted posture. After adjusting the light emitting area, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the customer waiting effect in step S2104. The steps of power-on notification, light emitting area adjustment, and customer waiting effect may be performed in different orders or at the same time. As a result, when the separate third illuminated cover 610 is attached, it is possible to confirm the change in the light emitting region before the game is started, so that defects during the game are reduced and the light emitting region is preferably set. Can change.

In step S2107, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 edits the lamp lighting pattern corresponding to (synchronized with) the variation pattern effect of the decorative symbol on the third symbol display device 42 of the model. As the lamp lighting pattern, different lighting patterns may be adopted depending on whether the third illumination cover 609 is attached or the third illumination cover 610 is attached. The opportunity for adopting a different lighting pattern is not limited to the replacement of the separate third illumination cover 610, but may be the replacement of the main control device 261 and the sub control device 262 accompanying the installation of the separate third illumination cover 610. .. As a result, when the separate third illumination cover 610 is attached, it is possible to show a lamp lighting pattern different from that when the third illumination cover 609 is attached.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 25th embodiment, the third illuminated portion 303 (third illuminated cover 609) arranged on the front side of the main body of the pachinko machine 10 and the third illuminated portion. The light irradiation device 607 that irradiates the 303 with light is provided. The pachinko machine 10 can transfer a predetermined surface of the third illumination unit 303 to emit light by the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 to the first position and the second position by the transfer mechanism 602. Therefore, the impression of the front side of the gaming machine can be changed according to the change in the position of the predetermined surface of the third illumination unit 303. Since the pachinko machine 10 includes a separate cover detection sensor 614 capable of detecting the transition of the predetermined surface of the third illumination unit 303, the transition of the predetermined surface of the third illumination unit 303 can be recognized. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the predetermined surface has changed to the first position, the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 emits light with the predetermined surface located at the first position as the first light emitting region 605. When the predetermined surface is transferred to the second position by executing the first control for causing the light to be emitted, the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 emits light with the predetermined surface located at the second position as the second light emitting region. Since the control mechanism 608 for executing the second control for causing the light to be generated is provided, the light emitting region is recognized by recognizing the transition of the predetermined surface of the third illumination unit 303 and optimizing the irradiation direction of the light according to the transition of the predetermined surface. Can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J1) described above.

Further, the control mechanism 608 is based on the input unit 614 in which the force generated in the process of shifting the predetermined surface of the third illumination unit 303 from the first position to the second position is input and the input force. 3 A contact-type separate cover detection sensor 641 capable of detecting that the predetermined surface of the illumination unit 303 has changed from the first position to the second position, and the predetermined surface from the first position to the second position. When it is detected that the transition has been detected, the light irradiation device 607 is provided with an output unit 615 that changes from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed. The light emitting region can be suitably changed by utilizing the force generated in the process of shifting the predetermined surface from the first position to the second position. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J2) described above.

Further, the input unit 614 receives the force generated in the process of shifting the predetermined surface of the third illumination unit 303 from the first position to the second position, and pushes the contact type separate cover detection sensor 641 into the separate cover detection. Since it is a projection 643, the force generated in the process of shifting the predetermined surface of the third illumination unit 303 from the first position to the second position is received and the force of pushing the contact type separate cover detection sensor 614 is used. Therefore, the light emitting region can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J3) described above.

Further, since the third illumination unit 303 is a transparent resin member and is configured so that the control mechanism 608 is difficult to see, the control mechanism 608 can be made inconspicuous. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J4) described above.

Further, since the control mechanism 608 is arranged so as not to overlap the front surface of the light emitting portion mounting surface of the light irradiation device 607, the light emitting region can be suitably changed without blocking the light emitting portion mounting surface. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J5) described above.

Further, since the control mechanism 608 is provided on the back surface side of the light irradiation device 607, the light emitting region is sufficiently secured on the front surface side of the control mechanism 608 without blocking the light emitting region to be transferred. Can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J8) described above.

In Examples 23 to 25 described above, when the illuminated cover is replaced with an illuminated cover of a different size, the angle of the light emitting substrate 613 or the translucent plate 631 is adjusted. May adjust different elements. The configuration different from the above-described embodiment will be specifically described below.

FIG. 102 is a front view of the pachinko machine of the 26th embodiment. FIG. 103 is a left side view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 102, and is a view showing a state in which an illumination cover is attached in a GG cross section. FIG. 104 is a front view of a pachinko machine with an illuminated cover having a different light emitting region attached. FIG. 105 is a left side view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 104, and is a view showing a state in which illumination covers of different sizes are attached in an HH cross section. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing a normal process by the sub control device.

The third illumination cover 650 according to Examples 23 to 25 includes a second emission region 606A having the same width and height as the first emission region 605 of the third illumination cover 609. However, the second light emitting region 606A of the third illumination cover 650 of the present embodiment is a partial light emitting region 651 in which a part of the light is emitted in the region corresponding to the first light emitting region 605. It is provided with a non-light emitting region 652 in which the remaining portion does not emit light. For example, the partially light emitting region 651 is formed of a light-transmitting resin, while the non-light emitting region 652 is formed of a light-shielding resin. As a result, the separate third illuminated cover 650 is, for example, decorated to illuminate the partial light emitting area 651 that imaged the treasure in the center of the non-light emitting area 652 that imaged the sea, or in the center of the non-light emitting area 652 that imaged the night sky. It is possible to realize a decoration that illuminates the partial light emitting area 651 that imaged the moon.

The control mechanism 608 includes a separate cover detection sensor 641 and a mechanism for changing the irradiation area of the light irradiation device 607 based on the detection of the separate cover detection sensor 641. When the third illumination cover 609 is attached, the light irradiation device 607 causes the entire region of the light emitting substrate 611 corresponding to the first light emitting region 605 to emit light. Further, when the separate third illumination cover 650 is attached, the control mechanism 608 causes the region corresponding to only the partial emission region 651 of the light emitting substrate 611 to emit light as the second emission region 606A.

As a result, even when the irradiation area is changed by detecting whether or not another third illumination cover 650 is attached to the front frame set 14 instead of the third illumination cover 609, the light emitting region can be suitably changed. can. The target to be changed is not limited to the irradiation area, but may be emission intensity and emission color. By the difference in the illumination effect between the third illumination cover 609 and the separate third illumination cover 650, it is possible to express the difference in the type of the gaming machine such as the high or low of the jackpot probability and the presence or absence of the setting. ..

Next, in the normal processing performed by the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 has a light emitting region / non-light emitting area corresponding to the attachment of the separate third illumination cover 650, as in FIG. 101 described above. The light emitting area is adjusted (step S2103B). For example, when the detection signal received from the separate cover detection sensor 641 is an OFF signal, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines that the third illumination cover 609 is attached, so that the first light emitting region 605 All the LEDs 612 of the light emitting board 611 corresponding to the above are set as light emitting targets. Further, when the detection signal received from the separate cover detection sensor 641 is an ON signal, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines that the separate third illuminated cover 650 is attached, so that the second light emitting region The LED 612 in the central portion of the light emitting substrate 611 corresponding to the 606A is set as the light emitting target. The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 causes the LED 612 to be set to emit light in a predetermined pattern when the power is turned on. As a result, when the separate third illuminated cover 650 is attached, the lighting status of the light emitting area / non-light emitting area corresponding to the attachment of the separate third illuminated cover 650 is displayed before the game is started. Since it can be confirmed, the light emitting region can be preferably changed.

Further, in step S2107, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 corresponds to (synchronizes) the variation pattern effect, and performs a process of editing the lamp lighting pattern according to the attachment of the separate third illumination cover 610. .. For example, when the detection signal received from the separate cover detection sensor 641 is an OFF signal, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines that the third illumination cover 609 is attached, so that the first light emitting region 605 The lamp lighting pattern when all the LEDs 612 of the light emitting board 611 corresponding to the above are set as light emitting targets is edited. Further, when the detection signal received from the separate cover detection sensor 641 is an ON signal, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines that the separate third illuminated cover 650 is attached, so that the second light emitting region The lamp lighting pattern when the LED 612 in the central portion of the light emitting board 611 corresponding to the 606A is set as the light emitting target is edited. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 causes the LED 612 to be set to emit light in the edited lamp lighting pattern in response to the variation pattern effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress wasteful power consumption due to continuous light emission to unnecessary parts even after the separate third illumination cover 650 is attached.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 26th embodiment, the control mechanism 608 detects that another third electric decoration cover 610 is attached to the front frame set 14 instead of the third electric decoration cover 609. It is provided with a separate cover detection sensor 641 and means for changing the irradiation area, light emission intensity, and light emission color of the light irradiation device 607 based on the detection of the separate cover detection sensor 641. As a result, even when the irradiation area, the emission intensity, and the emission color are changed by detecting whether or not another third illumination cover 650 is attached to the front frame set 14 instead of the third illumination cover 609, the emission region can be changed. It can be changed suitably.

In the above-mentioned Examples 23 to 26, the illuminated portion (third illuminated portion 303) for controlling the mode of light is provided in the glass frame portion 23, but in this embodiment, the light It is different from the above-mentioned Examples 23 to 26 in that the illuminated portion for which the aspect is controlled is arranged on the game board 30. The pachinko machine 10 of the 27th embodiment includes, for example, a movable illumination unit 703 as an illumination unit arranged on the game board 30. The movable illumination unit 703 is configured so that when the movable illumination unit 703 operates, the decoration effect at the position before and after the operation can be optimized. Hereinafter, a specific configuration will be described.

FIG. 107 is a front view of the game board of the 27th embodiment. FIG. 108 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line II of the game board shown in FIG. 107, showing the adjustment of the light emitting region of the movable illuminated portion. FIG. 109 is a front view of the game board in a state where the movable illuminated portion is projected. FIG. 110 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line JJ of the game board shown in FIG. 109, showing the adjustment of the light emitting region of the movable illuminated portion.

The movable illumination unit 703 includes a configuration that passively moves in the center frame 47A and a configuration that actively moves in the center frame 47A.

Specifically, the movable illumination unit 703 includes a light irradiation device 707 that irradiates light and a control mechanism 708 that controls the mode of light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 as a configuration that moves passively. As a configuration that actively moves, a movable illumination unit cover 709 that covers the front side of the movable illumination unit 703 and a drive mechanism 710 that operates the movable illumination unit cover 709 are provided.

The movable illuminated portion cover 709 is made of a light-transmitting resin. In the figure, the movable illuminated portion cover 709 has a flat plate shape, but it may be a three-dimensional model imitating a predetermined person, animal, or tool. The movable illuminated portion cover 709 receives light from the back surface side and emits light so as to emphasize the person, animal, or tool on the front surface side.

The movable illuminated portion cover 709 is made of a light-transmitting synthetic resin. The movable illuminated portion cover 709 may be colorless or colored, or may be subjected to a frosted glass-like surface treatment. The movable illuminated portion cover 709 is provided with a diffusing member (diffusing plate) having irregularities for diffusing the light from the light irradiating device 707 located behind, or for diffusing the light from the light irradiating device 707. The uneven portion is provided on the inner surface of the movable illuminated portion cover 709. As a result, the movable illuminated portion cover 709 can make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the light irradiation device 707.

The drive mechanism 710 is a transition mechanism that shifts a predetermined surface (for example, the front surface) of the movable illuminated portion cover 709 that emits light by the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707. Specifically, the drive mechanism 710 may be a solenoid as long as it is a mechanism for operating the front surface of the movable illuminated portion cover 709 in a linear direction, or a mechanism for converting the rotational motion of the motor into a linear motion using a ball screw. It may be present or it may be another mechanism.

The front surface of the movable illuminated portion cover 709 is located at a position behind, for example, the right edge of the opening of the center frame 47A (that is, the first position) when the drive mechanism 710 is not operating in the front view of the gaming machine. When the drive mechanism 710 is operated, it is operated at a portion exposed from the right edge portion of the opening of the center frame 47A (that is, a second position). The right edge of the opening of the center frame 47A is also made of a transparent resin like the movable illuminated portion 703. The shape of the right edge portion of the opening of the center frame 47A and the movable illumination portion cover 709 may be unified to form one illumination accessory. For example, such an illumination accessory is hidden behind the right edge of the center frame 47A when it is not operating, but is operated so as to appear while being strongly emitted from behind the right edge of the center frame 47A when operating. May be. As a result, the movable illumination unit 703 can be shown as a light emitting decoration having a different impression depending on the intensity of light emission between when it is not operating and when it is operating.

In the above configuration, the front surface of the movable illuminated portion cover 709 (or the right side of the movable illuminated portion cover 709 and the opening of the center frame 47A) located behind the right edge portion (first position) of the opening of the center frame 47A. The edge portion) is defined as the first light emitting region 705, and the front surface of the movable illuminated portion cover 709 located at the portion exposed from the right edge portion (second position) of the opening of the center frame 47A is the second light emitting portion. Area 706.

The right edge of the opening of the center frame 47A may be formed of a resin having no light transmission. In this case, the movable illumination portion cover 709 may be operated so as to be located at a position that is invisible or difficult to see from the player when not operating, and located at a position that is easily visible to the player during operation. Also with this, the movable illumination unit 703 can show different light emission decorations depending on whether or not light emission is different between the non-operating state and the operating state.

In the control mechanism 708, when the front surface of the movable illumination unit 703 is transferred to the first position by the drive mechanism 710, the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 is located in the first position. When the front surface of the movable illumination unit 703 is moved to the second position by the drive mechanism 710, the light irradiation device 707 is used to irradiate the light. A second control is executed in which the front surface of the movable illumination unit 703 located at the second position is made to emit light as the second light emitting region 706.

As a result, whether the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 emits the first light emitting region 705 or the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 emits the second light emitting region 706, the light emitting portion of the light emitting portion. The light emitting region can be suitably changed by facilitating the transition and optimizing the irradiation direction of the light according to the transition of the light emitting portion.

Next, the control of the mode of light performed by the control mechanism 708 will be specifically described.

The light irradiation device 707 includes a light emitting substrate 711 in which the LED 712 is arranged, and a substrate support portion 713 that supports the light emitting substrate 711. The substrate support portion 713 supports the light emitting substrate 711 so as to be rotatable while one end thereof is fixed to the center frame 47A.

The light irradiation device 707 is configured so that the light emitting substrate 711 can be rotated by the substrate support portion 713. The control mechanism 708 controls the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 from the first aspect to the second aspect by rotating the light emitting substrate 711. Thereby, the irradiation angle can be easily adjusted.

In the control mechanism 708, the movable illumination portion 703 is exposed from the rear side (first position) of the right edge portion of the opening of the center frame 47A, and the movable illumination portion 703 is exposed from the right edge portion of the opening of the center frame 47A. The light irradiation device 707 is changed from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed by the operation of moving to the moved portion (second position). As a result, the light emitting region can be suitably changed by the operation of moving the movable illumination unit 703 to the second position.

The control mechanism 708 changes the mode of the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 based on the input unit 714 for inputting the force generated by the movement of the movable lighting unit 703 to the second position and the input force. It is provided with an output unit 715 to be operated. As a result, the light emitting region can be suitably changed by utilizing the force generated by the operation of the movable illumination unit 703 to move to the second position.

The input unit 714 pushes the light irradiation device 707 from the first rotation position to the second rotation position (that is, rotation) into the movable illumination unit cover 709 by the operation of moving the movable illumination unit 703 to the second position. It is a mechanism. Specifically, the input unit 714 includes a push-in portion 716 provided in the movable illuminated portion cover 709 and a push-in receiving portion 717 provided in the light irradiation device 707.

The push-in portion 716 is a portion that is arranged on the upper surface of the movable illuminated portion cover 709 and protrudes toward the back surface side of the movable illuminated portion cover 709. In the process of moving the movable illuminated portion cover 709 to the second position, the push-in portion 716 comes into contact with the push-in receiving portion 717 arranged on the upper surface of the substrate support portion 713, and the substrate support portion 713 makes a second rotation. It is formed so as to rotate so as to face a position. For example, the push-in receiving portion 717 is provided with a rotating body (roller), and the push-in portion 716 is provided with an inclined surface that rolls the rotating body in accordance with the rotation of the substrate support portion 713. As a result, the movable illumination unit cover 709 pushes the light irradiation device 707 (that is, rotates it to the second rotation position) by the operation of moving the movable illumination unit 703 to the second position, and emits light. The region can be suitably changed.

The output unit 715 rotates the light emitting substrate 711 by rotating the light irradiation device 707 based on the force input from the input unit 714, and changes the mode of the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707. It is a mechanism to make it. Specifically, the output unit 715 is composed of a substrate support portion 713, a shaft 718, a coil spring 719 attached to the shaft 718, and a posture regulation unit 721 that regulates the posture of the substrate support portion 713. As a result, the irradiation angle can be easily adjusted by utilizing the force generated by the movement of the movable illumination unit 703 to the second position.

The input unit 714 (push-in portion 716 and push-in receiving portion 717) are arranged on the upper surfaces of the movable illuminated portion cover 709 and the board support portion 713, respectively, and the output portion 715 is around the shaft 718 of the board support portion 713. Since none of them overlaps the front surface of the light emitting unit mounting surface of the light irradiation device 707, the light emitting region can be suitably changed without blocking the light emitting unit mounting surface.

The shaft 718 connects the substrate support portion 713 and the center frame 47A so that the substrate support portion 713 can rotate. The coil spring 719 is attached to the shaft 718 to generate an urging force on the substrate support portion 713. The coil spring 719 rotates so that the push-in portion 716 contacts the push-in receiving portion 717 and the substrate support portion 713 faces the second rotation position in the process of moving the movable illumination part cover 709 to the second position. As a result, the urging force is increased, and the urging force becomes the largest at the position where the pushing of the pushing portion 716 is completed. When the movable illuminated portion cover 709 returns from the second position to the first position, the substrate support portion 713 returns from the second rotation position to the original first rotation position by this urging force.

The posture control unit 721 is a stopper provided on the substrate support unit 713. The urging force of the coil spring 719 is such that the movable illumination portion 703 is located on the back surface of the right edge portion of the opening of the center frame 47A, and the attitude regulating portion 721 causes the substrate support portion 713 to be in front of the movable illumination portion 703. It is regulated by facing each other.

As a result, the light emitting region can be suitably changed by utilizing the force generated by the operation of the movable illumination unit 703 to move to the second position. The light emitting region can be suitably changed by utilizing the force of the movable illumination unit cover 709 pushing the light irradiation device 707 by the operation of moving the movable illumination unit 703 to the second position. The irradiation angle can be easily adjusted by utilizing the force generated by the movement of the movable illumination unit 703 to the second position.

Next, the drive of the movable illumination unit 703 will be described. The movable illumination unit 703 can be driven by pressing the frame button 80 (for example, the decision button 81) in response to the operation request image for requesting the operation of the frame button 80 displayed on the third symbol display device 42. .. The display timing of the operation request image is, for example, during the customer waiting effect (standby display) in the third symbol display device 42. The display content of the operation request image is, for example, an image such as "Make character A stand out? (To make it stand out, press the frame button.)". Here, the character A is a decoration indicating the character applied to the movable illumination unit 703. When the frame button 80 is pressed with respect to the operation request image, the movable illumination unit 703 imitating the character A starts from an inconspicuous position (first position) on the back side of the right edge portion of the opening of the center frame 47A. It is transferred from the right edge of the opening of the center frame 47A to an exposed and conspicuous position (second position).

As a result, the irradiation area can be suitably changed in response to the transition of the movable illumination unit 703 based on the operation of the player, so that the decoration on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 main body can be made according to the player's preference. It will be easier.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 27th embodiment, light is irradiated toward the movable illumination unit 703 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 main body and the back surface side of the movable illumination unit 703. The light irradiation device 707 is provided. Since the pachinko machine 10 can shift the front surface of the movable illumination unit 703 that receives the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 to a different position, the pachinko machine 10 responds to the change in the position of the front surface of the movable illumination unit 703. The impression on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed. When the front surface of the movable illumination unit 703 is located at the first position, the front surface of the movable illumination unit 703 where the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 is located at the first position is designated as the first light emitting region 705. When the first control for emitting light is executed and the front surface of the movable illumination unit 703 is located at the second position, the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 is located at the second position. Since it is provided with a control mechanism 708 that executes a second control to emit light with the front surface of the light emitting region 706 as a second light emitting region 706, the light emission direction is optimized according to the transition of the front surface of the movable illumination unit 703 to emit light. The region can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H1) described above.

Further, as described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 27th embodiment, the movable illumination unit 703 and the movable illumination unit 703 disposed on the front side of the main body of the pachinko machine 10 are irradiated with light. The device 707 and the like are provided. Since the pachinko machine 10 includes a drive mechanism 710 capable of shifting a predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703 that emits light by the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 to a first position and a second position. The light emitting points of the movable illumination unit 703 are not uniform, and the predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703 can be easily changed. When the predetermined surface is transferred to the first position by the drive mechanism 710, the pachinko machine 10 uses the predetermined surface where the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 is located at the first position as the first light emitting region 705. When the first control for emitting light is executed and the predetermined surface is transferred to the second position by the drive mechanism 710, the predetermined surface where the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 is located at the second position is second. Since the control mechanism 708 that executes the second control of emitting light as the light emitting region 706 of the above is provided, the transition of the light emitting portion is facilitated, and the irradiation direction of the light is optimized according to the transition of the light emitting portion to emit light. The region can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I1) described above.

Further, the main body of the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 forming the outer shell of the main body of the pachinko machine 10 and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame 11 with one side portion of the outer frame 11 as an opening / closing axis. A front frame set 14 that can be freely opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 with one side portion of the inner frame 12 as an opening / closing shaft is provided. The game board 30 includes a game board 30 having a game area 30a on which the attached game ball flows down, and the game board 30 is a big hit game that occurs during the variable display of the third symbol and when the variable display of the third symbol results in a big hit. The front frame set 14 includes a third symbol display device 42 having a display screen 42a on which a display effect in the state is displayed and an opening that makes the display screen 42a visible, and the front frame set 14 has a gaming area 30a when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. The movable lighting unit 703 is provided with a glass frame portion 23 to which a glass plate 137 that makes the display screen 42a visible is attached to the back side, and the movable lighting unit 703 is made visible from the front side of the front frame set 14 of the pachinko machine 10 main body. It is a thing. This facilitates the transition of the light emitting portion on the front side of the front frame set 14 of the pachinko machine 10 main body, and optimizes the irradiation direction of the light according to the transition of the light emitting portion, thereby appropriately changing the light emitting region. Can be made to. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I2) described above.

Further, since the movable illumination unit 703 is attached behind the glass plate 137 of the front frame set 14 of the pachinko machine 10 main body and can be visually recognized via the glass plate 137, the glass plate 137 of the pachinko machine 10 main body is visible. By facilitating the transition of the light emitting part behind the glass plate 137 and optimizing the irradiation direction of the light according to the transition of the light emitting part behind the glass plate 137, the light emitting region behind the glass plate 137 is suitably changed. be able to. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I4) described above.

Further, since the movable illumination unit 703 is arranged on the right side in the game area 30a of the game board 30, the light emitting region can be suitably changed also on the right side in the game area 30a of the game board 30. .. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I5) described above.

Further, since the movable illumination unit 703 is arranged on the right side in the opening of the game board 30, the light emitting region can be suitably changed even on the right side in the opening of the game board 30. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I6) described above.

Further, since the light irradiation device 707 includes a light emitting substrate 711 and a drive mechanism 710 that changes the posture of the light emitting substrate 711 with respect to a predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703, the light emitting region is suitably changed at each position. be able to. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I7) described above.

Further, the first control is to set the irradiation angle of the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 to the first light emitting region 705 to the first irradiation angle, and the second control is the second light emitting region. The irradiation angle of the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 to the 706 is set to a second irradiation angle different from the first irradiation angle. As a result, the light emitting region can be suitably changed by changing the irradiation angle in the configuration in which the movable illumination unit 703 operates. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I8) described above.

Further, since the movable illumination unit 703 is provided with the frame button 80 (for example, the decision button 81) that receives the operation of the player and operates in response to the operation of the frame button 80, the movable illumination unit 703 operates the frame button 80. Even when operating according to the above, the light emitting region can be suitably changed at each position. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I9) described above.

Further, since the movable illumination unit 703 operates in response to the operation of the frame button 80 during the display of the display effect on the third symbol display device 42, the movable illumination unit 703 operates the display effect on the third symbol display device 42. Even when the operation is performed during the display of, the light emitting region can be suitably changed at each position according to the operation. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I11) described above.

Further, since the light irradiation device 707 rotates according to the operation of the movable lighting unit 703, the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 corresponds to the operation of the movable lighting unit 703 in the first light emitting region 705. The irradiation angle can be easily adjusted by rotating the light irradiation device 707, regardless of whether the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 emits light in the second light emitting region. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I12) described above.

Further, the control mechanism 708 controls the light irradiation device 707 from a state in which the first control can be executed in the process of shifting the predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703 from the first position to the second position. Therefore, the light emitting region can be suitably changed in the process of changing the predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703 from the first position to the second position. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I13) described above.

Further, the control mechanism 708 emits light based on the input unit 714 for inputting the force generated in the process of shifting the predetermined surface of the movable lighting unit 703 from the first position to the second position, and the input force. Since the device 707 includes an output unit 715 that changes from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed, a predetermined surface of the movable lighting unit 703 is positioned from the first position to the second position. The light emitting region can be suitably changed by utilizing the force generated in the process of shifting to. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I14) described above.

Further, the input unit 714 is a pushing unit 716 that gives a force for rotating the light irradiation device 707 in the process of shifting the predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703 from the first position to the second position. Since it is the push-in receiving portion 717, the light emitting region is suitably used by utilizing the force applied to the light irradiation device 707 in the process of shifting the predetermined surface of the movable illumination portion 703 from the first position to the second position. Can be changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I15) described above.

Further, the output unit 715 rotates the light irradiation device 707 based on the input force to change the light irradiation device 707 from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed. Since it changes, the irradiation angle can be easily adjusted by using the force input in the process of changing the predetermined surface of the movable lighting unit 703 from the first position to the second position. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I16) described above.

Further, since the movable illumination unit 703 is a transparent resin member and is configured so that the control mechanism 708 is difficult to see, the movable illumination unit 703 is a transparent resin member. Since the control mechanism 708 is configured so as to be difficult to see, the control mechanism 708 can be made inconspicuous. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J4) described above.

Further, since the control mechanism 708 is arranged so as not to overlap the front surface of the light emitting portion mounting surface of the light irradiation device 707, the light emitting region can be suitably changed without blocking the light emitting portion mounting surface. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J5) described above.

Further, since the input unit 714 is provided on the upper side surface (upper surface) side of the light irradiation device 707 when the predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703 is transferred to the left direction or the right direction in the front view of the game machine. , It is difficult to block the light emitting region that is transferred in the left-right direction, and the light emitting region can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J7) described above.

In the above-mentioned Example 27, the control mechanism 708 changes the mode of the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 by tilting the light irradiation device 707. However, as in the 24th embodiment, the light irradiation device 707 is changed. A configuration may be adopted in which the mode of the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 is changed while the light irradiation device 707 is fixed.

FIG. 111 is a diagram showing adjustment of the light emitting region of the movable illuminated portion of the twenty-eighth embodiment.

In this embodiment, the light irradiation device 707 is fixed to the front side of the variable display device unit 35 attached to the back surface of the game board 30 on the back surface side of the center frame 47A, and the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 is first. The light emitting region 705 or the second light emitting region 706 is provided with a light transmitting unit 730 that transmits light. The translucent portion 730 includes a translucent plate 731 that transmits the light emitted from the light irradiating device 707 and outputs the light to the front side, a translucent plate support portion 732 that supports the translucent plate 731, and the 27th embodiment. A similar control mechanism 708 is provided.

The configuration of the translucent plate support portion 432 is the same as the configuration of the substrate support portion 713 that tilts the light emitting substrate 711 of the 23rd embodiment. That is, when the movable illuminated portion cover 709 is located at the first position by the control mechanism 708, the translucent plate support portion 732 keeps the light in a posture corresponding to the back surface of the right side surface of the opening of the center frame 47A. The light emitted from the irradiation device 707 is transmitted and output to the front side where the first light emitting region 705 is located, but when the movable illuminated portion cover 709 is moved to the second position, the opening of the center frame 47A is opened. The light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 is refracted and transmitted in the oblique direction in which the second light emitting region 706 is located, in a posture facing the exposed portion from the right side surface.

As a result, not only the light irradiation device 707 can be rotated, but also the light transmitting portion 730 can be rotated, the irradiation angle can be easily adjusted and the light emitting region can be appropriately changed. can.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 28th embodiment, the light irradiation device 707 is fixed to the variable display device unit 35, and the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 is emitted from the first light emitting region 705 or the first light emitting region 705. A translucent portion 730 that transmits light is provided in the light emitting region 706 of 2, and the translucent portion 730 is rotatable. Thereby, the irradiation angle can be easily adjusted not only in the configuration in which the light irradiation device 707 is rotatable but also in the configuration in which the light transmitting portion 730 is rotatable. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H8) described above.

In Examples 27 and 28 described above, the input unit 714 and the output unit 715 of the control mechanism 708 rotate the light irradiation device 707 by the force of the pushing unit 716 pushing the light irradiation device 707. The input unit 714 and the output unit 715 of the mechanism 708 may have different configurations. Hereinafter, a specific configuration will be described.

FIG. 112 is a front view of the game board of the 29th embodiment. FIG. 113 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line KK of the game board shown in FIG. 112, showing the adjustment of the light emitting region of the movable illuminated portion. FIG. 114 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line KK of the game board shown in FIG. 112, showing the adjustment of the light emitting region in a state where the movable illuminated portion is projected.

In the control mechanism 708, the movable lighting portion 703 is exposed from the rear side portion (first position) of the right edge portion of the opening of the center frame 47A, and the movable lighting portion 703 is exposed from the right edge portion of the opening of the center frame 47A. A displacement detection sensor 741 that detects the movement to the specified location (second position) and a rotation motor 742 that changes the mode of the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 based on the detection of the displacement detection sensor 741. Be prepared. Thereby, the light emitting region can be suitably changed by detecting that the movable illumination unit 703 has moved from the first position to the second position.

The displacement detection sensor 741 is attached to the upper side of the back surface of the right edge portion of the opening of the center frame 47A in the front view of the gaming machine. The displacement detection sensor 741 is, for example, a limit switch. In the displacement detection sensor 741, when the movable illumination unit 703 (movable illumination unit cover 709) is located at the first position, the hinge is not pushed in (the switch is not pressed). It is detected that the movable illumination unit 703 has not moved to the second position. In the displacement detection sensor 741, when the movable illumination unit 703 moves to the second position, the hinge is pushed into the movable illumination unit 703 and the switch is pressed in the process, so that the movable illumination unit 703 becomes the second position. Detects that it has moved to a position. The configuration of the displacement detection sensor 741 is not limited to the above configuration, and may be, for example, a non-contact sensor.

When the movable illumination unit 703 moves from the second position to the first position, the displacement detection sensor 741 moves the movable illumination unit 703 because the hinge is separated from the switch in the process of returning the movable illumination unit 703 to the first position. It is detected that the decoration portion 703 has moved to the first position. Thereby, the light emitting region can be suitably changed by detecting that the movable illumination unit 703 has moved from the second position to the first position.

The displacement detection sensor 741 and the rotation motor 742 are electrically connected to the sub control device 262. When the displacement detection sensor 741 detects that the movable illumination unit 703 has moved from the first position to the second position, the sub-control device 262 rotates the rotation motor 742 until it reaches a predetermined angle. The substrate support portion 713 is rotated so that the light irradiation device 707 changes from a posture facing the front of the first position to a posture facing the second position. When the displacement detection sensor 741 detects that the movable illumination unit 703 has moved from the second position to the first position, the sub-control device 262 reversely rotates the rotation motor 742 until the rotation motor 742 reaches a predetermined angle. Then, the substrate support portion 713 is rotated in the reverse direction so that the light irradiation device 707 changes from the posture facing the second position to the posture facing the front of the first position. The rotation motor 742 may be controlled by detecting the rotation angle by a potentiometer or an encoder, or by applying a pulse voltage corresponding to a predetermined rotation angle by using a stepping motor.

The hinge of the movable illuminated portion cover 709 and the transition detection sensor 741 in contact with the cover 709 corresponds to the input portion 714 in the above-described embodiment. Further, the rotation motor 742 corresponds to the output unit 715 in the above-described embodiment.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 29th embodiment, the movable lighting unit 703 (for example, the movable lighting unit 703) arranged on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 main body and the movable lighting unit 703 It is equipped with a light irradiation device 707 that irradiates light. Since the pachinko machine 10 can shift the predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703 that emits light by the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 to the first position and the second position, the movable illumination unit 10 can be used. The impression of the front side of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed according to the change in the position of the predetermined surface of the portion 703. Since the pachinko machine 10 includes a displacement detection sensor 741 capable of detecting the displacement of the predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703, the displacement of the predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703 can be recognized. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the predetermined surface has changed to the first position, the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 emits light with the predetermined surface located at the first position as the first light emitting region 705. When the predetermined surface is transferred to the second position by executing the first control for causing the light to be generated, the predetermined surface where the light emitted from the light irradiation device 707 is located at the second position is set as the second light emitting region 706. Since the control mechanism 708 that executes the second control for emitting light is provided, the light emitting region is recognized by recognizing the transition of the predetermined surface of the movable lighting unit 703 and optimizing the irradiation direction of the light according to the transition of the predetermined surface. Can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J1) described above.

Further, the control mechanism 708 is based on the input unit 714 to which the force generated in the process of shifting the predetermined surface of the movable lighting unit 703 from the first position to the second position is input and the input force. The contact-type displacement detection sensor 741 that can detect that the predetermined surface of the decorative portion 703 has changed from the first position to the second position, and the fact that the predetermined surface has changed from the first position to the second position. When detected, the light irradiation device 707 includes an output unit 715 that changes from a state in which the first control can be executed to a state in which the second control can be executed, so that a predetermined surface of the movable lighting unit 703 is the first. The light emitting region can be suitably changed by utilizing the force generated in the process of shifting from the first position to the second position. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J2) described above.

Further, the input unit 714 receives the force generated in the process of shifting the predetermined surface of the movable lighting unit 703 from the first position to the second position, and pushes the contact-type displacement detection sensor 741 into the movable lighting unit cover. 709, Since it is a hinge of the displacement detection sensor 741, a force that accepts the force generated in the process of shifting the predetermined surface of the movable illumination unit 703 from the first position to the second position and pushes the contact type displacement detection sensor 741. Can be used to suitably change the light emitting region. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J3) described above.

In Examples 27 to 29 described above, the output 715 of the control mechanism 708 adjusts the irradiation angle of the light irradiation device 707, but adjusts different elements related to the irradiation of the light irradiation device 707. You may. This will be described in detail below.

FIG. 115 is a front view of the game board of the thirtieth embodiment. FIG. 116 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LL of the game board shown in FIG. 115, showing the adjustment of the light emitting region of the movable illuminated portion. FIG. 117 is a front view of the game board in a state where the movable illuminated portion is projected. FIG. 118 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line MM of the game board shown in FIG. 117, showing the adjustment of the light emitting region of the movable illuminated portion.

The movable illumination unit 750 of this embodiment is a light guide plate processed so as to emit light of a predetermined pattern or character on a transparent resin acrylic panel, and the light guide plate light emitting unit 753 is provided on the side surface of the light guide plate. There is. The light emitting region of the movable illumination unit 750 includes a partial light emitting region 751 in which a part thereof emits light and a non-light emitting region 752 in which the remaining portion does not emit light. The light emitting area of the movable illumination unit 750 is divided into, for example, six parts, each of which is configured to emit light (“ge”, “ki”, “a”, “tsu”, “i”, “!”). ing. The light guide plate light emitting unit 753 is also divided into six parts according to this, and is controlled so that a part thereof is made to emit light as a partial light emitting part 754 and the remaining part is not made to emit light as a non-light emitting part 755. ..

The control mechanism 708 includes a displacement detection sensor 741 and a mechanism for changing the irradiation area of the light irradiation device 707 based on the detection of the displacement detection sensor 741. Specifically, in the control mechanism 708, when the displacement detection sensor 741 detects that the movable illumination unit 750 is located at the first position, the light guide plate light emitting unit 753 does not emit all six characters. The non-light emitting unit 755 is used.

Further, when the displacement detection sensor 741 detects that the movable illumination unit 750 is located at the second position of the control mechanism 708, the light guide plate light emitting unit 753 has four characters according to the operation of the player. ("A" "tsu" "i" "!"), The part corresponding to 5 characters ("ge" "ki" "a" "tsu" "!") Is made to emit light as a partial light emitting part 754, and the light emitting part Characters other than the non-light emitting unit 755 are used.

Thereby, even when the irradiation area is changed by detecting whether or not the movable illumination unit 750 has moved to the second position, the light emitting region can be suitably changed. The target to be changed is not limited to the irradiation area, but may be emission intensity and emission color. By such a difference in the illumination effect between the first position and the second position, it is possible to express the difference in the degree of expectation of the result of the jackpot lottery.

Next, the drive of the movable illumination unit 703 will be described. The movable illumination unit 703 presses the frame button 80 (for example, the decision button 81, the left selection button 82, the right selection button 83) in response to the operation request image for requesting the operation of the frame button 80 displayed on the third symbol display device 42. It can be driven by pressing it. The display timing of the operation request image is, for example, in the display effect related to the variable display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 42. The display content of the operation request image is an image having an option to promote the prediction of the result of the variable display such as "Is this reach hot or hot?" During the predetermined reach effect. In addition to this, there may be an option that asks the player's preference, such as "Is your favorite character A or B?". When the player presses the right selection button 83 to select "Gekiatsu" and presses the enter button 81 to determine the operation request image, the movable illumination unit 750 is second from the first position. When it is detected that the movable illumination unit 750 is located in the second position, the light guide plate light emitting unit 753 has five characters ("ge", "ki", "a", "tsu". The portion corresponding to "!") Is made to emit light as the partial light emitting portion 754, and the characters other than the light emitting portion are referred to as the non-light emitting portion 755. Further, when the player presses the left selection button 82 to select "hot" with respect to the operation request image and presses the decision button 81 to make a decision, the movable illumination unit 750 is the first from the first position. When the position is changed to 2 and it is detected that the movable illumination unit 750 is located at the 2nd position, the light guide plate light emitting unit 753 has 4 characters (“a”, “tsu”, “i”, “i”, “ A portion corresponding to (! ") Is emitted as a partial light emitting portion 754, and characters other than the light emitting portion are designated as a non-light emitting portion 755.

As a result, the irradiation area can be suitably changed in response to the transition of the movable illumination unit 703 based on the operation of the player, so that the decoration on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 main body can be made according to the player's preference. It will be easier.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 30th embodiment, the control mechanism 708 is a displacement detection sensor 741 for detecting that the movable illumination unit 750 has moved to the second position, and a displacement detection sensor 741. It is provided with a mechanism for changing the irradiation area of the light irradiation device 707 based on the detection. Thereby, even when the irradiation area is changed by detecting whether or not the movable illumination unit 750 has moved to the second position, the light emitting region can be suitably changed.

In Examples 23 to 26 described above, the third illumination unit 303 and the separate third illumination unit 604 were configured to be attached and detached in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10, but in the diagonal direction of the pachinko machine 10. It may be configured to be attached to and detached from. Hereinafter, it will be described with reference to FIG. 119.

FIGS. 119 (a) and 119 (b) are diagrams illustrating the mounting directions of the illuminated cover 609 and the separate illuminated cover 610 of the thirty-one embodiment.

The illuminating cover 609 and the illuminating cover 610 of this embodiment have substantially the same shape as the illuminating cover 609 and the illuminating cover 610 of Examples 23 to 26 in the front view of the pachinko machine 10. The illumination cover 609 and the separate illumination cover 610 of this embodiment are different from the illumination cover 609 and the separate illumination cover 610 of Examples 23 to 26 in the attachment / detachment structure.

The third illuminated portion 603 and the separate third illuminated portion 604 are attached by a slide mechanism 602 that slides the third illuminated cover 609 and the separate third illuminated cover 610 in an oblique direction. The slide mechanism 602 is formed in a slide groove 603 formed on the main body side of the pachinko machine 10 and inclined upward toward the front of the pachinko machine 10, and a third electric decoration cover 609 and another third electric decoration cover 610. It is composed of a portion that fits into the slide groove 603. In the figure, the shape of each part constituting the slide mechanism 602 is omitted.

The electric decoration cover 609 and the separate electric decoration cover 610 of this embodiment also have a different structure of the control mechanism 608 from the electric decoration cover 609 and the separate electric decoration cover 610 of Examples 23 to 26. That is, the point that the input portion 614 is composed of the push-in portion 616 and the push-in receiving portion 617 is the same, but the mounting location and shape of the push-in portion 616 and the push-in receiving portion 617 are different.

The protrusion of the push-in portion 616 is arranged on the inner surface of the upper surface inclined in the diagonal direction on the tip side in the insertion direction of the separate illuminated cover 610. The shape of the protrusion of the push-in portion 616 may be a small piece or a flat plate extending laterally of the pachinko machine 10. The point that the push-in receiving portion 617 extends from the back surface of the light irradiation device 607 to the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is largely different from that of the 23rd to 26th embodiments. Since the shape of the push-in receiving portion 617 may correspond to the shape of the push-in portion 616, it may be in the shape of a rod or in the shape of a flat plate.

When the third illumination portion 303 is attached to the glass frame portion 23, the peripheral wall portion of the opening of the third illumination cover 609 is guided by the slide mechanism 602 formed in the diagonal direction, and is between the sound output portions 24. It is attached to. Since the push-in portion 616 is not formed on the third illuminated cover 609, the first light emitting region 605 is formed while the light irradiation device 607 is in a vertical posture. When the separate third illuminated portion 604 is attached to the glass frame portion 23, the base portion is guided to the periphery of the opening side of the separate third illuminated cover 610 by a slide mechanism 602 formed in an oblique direction, and the sound output portion is provided. It is mounted between 24. Since the push-in portion 616 is formed in the third illuminated cover 610, the light-irradiation device 607 is tilted toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 by coming into contact with the push-in receiving portion 617 on the back surface of the light irradiation device 607. Therefore, the second light emitting region 606 is formed above the first light emitting region 605.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment 31, light is directed toward the third illuminated portion 303 arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 main body and the back surface side of the third illuminated portion 303. It is provided with a light irradiation device 607 for irradiating the light. Since the pachinko machine 10 can shift the front surface of the third illumination unit 303 that receives the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 to a different position, the position of the front surface of the third illumination unit 303 is changed. The impression on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 can be different depending on the situation. When the front surface of the third illumination unit 303 is located at the first position, the front surface of the third illumination unit 303 where the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 is located at the first position is the first light emitting region. When the first control for emitting light as 605 is executed and the front surface of the third illumination unit 303 is located at the second position, the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 is located at the second position. Since the control mechanism 608 for executing the second control for causing the front surface of the illumination unit 303 to emit light as the second light emitting region 606 is provided, the irradiation direction of the light is optimized according to the transition of the front surface of the third illumination unit 303. By doing so, the light emitting region can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H1) described above.

Further, since the input unit 614 is provided on either the left or right side surface side of the light irradiation device 607 when the front surface of the third illumination unit 303 is displaced in the vertical direction in the front view of the pachinko machine 10, the input unit 614 is provided up and down. It is difficult to block the light emitting region that is changed in the direction, and the light emitting region can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J6) described above.

Further, the input unit 614 is the back side of the light irradiation device 607 and is the third side when the front surface of the third illumination unit 303 is transferred in an oblique direction in which the front surface of the third illumination unit 303 is inclined upward and inclined toward the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10. Since the front surface of the illuminated portion 303 is provided at a position where the force generated in the process of shifting in the oblique direction can be input, it does not interfere with the transition of the third illuminated portion 303 and blocks the transferred light emitting area. However, the light emitting region can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J9) described above.

In Examples 23 to 26 described above, the light emitting region is changed by using the force generated in the process of exchanging the third illumination unit 303 for another third illumination unit 604. The light emitting region of the third illumination unit 303 may be changed while the decoration unit 303 remains. Hereinafter, it will be described with reference to FIG. 120.

FIGS. 120A and 120B are diagrams illustrating before and after the change in the light emitting region of the illuminated cover 609 of Example 32. The front view of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is the same as that of FIG. 1, so FIG. 1 is referred to. In this embodiment, the third illuminated portion 303 in FIG. 1 corresponds to the third illuminated cover 609 before the change of the movable illuminated portion 305 shown in FIG. 120 (a), and the third illuminated portion 303 in FIG. In this embodiment, the illuminated portion 604 corresponds to the third illuminated cover 609 after the change of the movable illuminated portion 305 shown in FIG. 120 (b).

The third illumination unit 303 of this embodiment has substantially the same shape as the third illumination unit 303 of Examples 23 to 26 in the front view of the pachinko machine 10, but the third illumination unit 303 of this embodiment has the same shape. The 23rd to the Examples are in that the section 303 is configured as a movable lighting section 305 capable of operating a part of the lighting without requiring replacement with another third lighting section 604. It is different from the third illumination unit 303 of 26.

In the third illuminated portion 303 (movable illuminated portion 305), the third illuminated cover 609 is divided into a tip portion 658 and a base end portion 659, and the tip portion 658 projects diagonally from the base end portion 659. It also has a sliding drive mechanism 660 that is retracted. As the slide mechanism, as in the 31st embodiment, the slide groove 603 is formed in the base end portion 659 of the third illuminated cover 609, and the slide groove 603 is inclined upward toward the front of the pachinko machine 10. A portion that fits into the slide groove 603 is formed in the tip portion 658 of the third illumination cover 609, and the tip portion 658 of the third illumination portion 303 is formed in the base end portion 659 of the third illumination portion 303. Is attached.

As the drive mechanism 660, a rack 661 is formed at the tip end portion 658 of the third illuminated cover 609, and a pinion (circular gear) 662 is formed at the base end portion 659 of the third illuminated cover 609. A motor 663 fixed at a predetermined position of the base end portion 659 is connected to the pinion 662. By driving the motor 663, the tip portion 658 of the third illuminated cover 609 is configured to protrude and retract. The position when the tip portion 658 of the third illuminated cover 609 protrudes to the uppermost position is set as the second position, and the position when the tip portion 658 of the third illuminated cover 609 protrudes to the lowermost side is set as the second position. It is the first position.

The structure of the control mechanism 608 of the illuminated cover 609 of this embodiment is also different from that of the illuminated cover 609 and the separate illuminated cover 610 of Examples 23 to 26. That is, the point that the input unit 614 is composed of the push-in portion 616 and the push-in receiving part 617 is the same, but the structures of the push-in part 616 and the push-in receiving part 617 are different.

The push-in portion 616 has a protrusion (shaft) 664 protruding from the inner surface of the tip portion 658 of the third illuminated cover 609 (the inner surface of the left side surface when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10), and the shaft 664 is rotatable to one end side. It is composed of a fitted slide member (slider) 665. A long hole 666 is formed on the other end side of the slider 665, and a protrusion (axis) 667 protruding from the left side surface of the light irradiation device 607 is slidably connected to the long hole 666. The push-in receiving portion 617 corresponds to a shaft 667 protruding from the left side surface of the light irradiation device 607.

When the tip portion 658 of the third illuminated cover 609 is projected to the second position, the motor 663 is oriented in a predetermined direction (for example, if the motor 663 is connected coaxially with the pinion 662, it is counterclockwise on the paper). When rotated, the slider 665 pushes the light irradiation device 607 as the tip portion 658 of the third illumination cover 609 rises to the second position, and the light irradiation device 607 tilts to the rear side of the pachinko machine 10. A second light emitting region 606 is formed on the front surface of the tip end portion 658 and the base end portion 659. When retracting the tip portion 658 of the third illuminated cover 609 to the first position, the motor 663 is rotated in the opposite direction (for example, clockwise on the paper surface), and the tip portion 659 of the third illuminated cover 609 is rotated. Along with the descent to the first position, the slider 665 lifted the light illuminating device 607, and the light irradiating device 607 was erected on the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and the front surface of the tip portion 658 (which overlapped on the front side). A first light emitting region 605 is formed on the front surface of the base end portion 659).

The control mechanism 608 includes a displacement detection sensor 668 that detects that the tip portion 658 of the third illuminated cover 609 has moved from the first position to the second position. The displacement detection sensor 668 may be a limit switch that detects that the tip portion 658 is located at the first position or the second position, or when the tip portion 658 is located at the first position or the second position. It may be a potentiometer or an encoder that detects the rotation angle of the motor 663. As a result, the light emitting region is determined by detecting that the tip portion 658 of the third illuminated cover 609 has moved from the first position to the second position and from the second position to the first position. It can be changed suitably.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 32nd embodiment, the third illuminated portion 303 (divided into a tip portion 658 and a base end portion 659) arranged on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 main body. It includes a drive-type movable illumination unit 305) and a light irradiation device 607 that irradiates the third illumination unit 303 with light. The pachinko machine 10 is a drive mechanism capable of shifting the front surface of the tip portion 658 of the third illumination unit 303 to emit light by the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 to the first position and the second position. Since the 660 is provided, the light emitting portion of the third illuminated portion 303 is not uniform, and the light emitting portion of the third illuminated portion 303 can be easily changed. When the front surface of the tip portion 658 is transferred to the first position by the drive mechanism 660, the gaming machine first uses the front surface of the tip portion 658 where the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 is located at the first position. When the first control for emitting light as the light emitting region 605 of the above is executed and the front surface of the tip portion 658 is transferred to the second position by the drive mechanism 660, the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 is in the second position. Since the control mechanism 608 for executing the second control of emitting light with the front surface of the tip portion 658 and the base end portion 659 located in the second light emitting region 606 is provided, the transition of the light emitting point is facilitated, and the light emitting point of the light emitting point is provided. By optimizing the irradiation direction of light according to the transition, the light emitting region can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (I1) described above.

Further, as described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 32nd embodiment, the third illuminated portion 303 (tip portion 658 and base end portion 659) arranged on the front surface side of the pachinko machine 10 main body is composed. It is provided with a split drive type movable illumination unit 305) and a light irradiation device 607 that irradiates the third illumination unit 303 with light. Since the pachinko machine 10 can shift the front surface of the tip portion 658 of the third illumination unit 303 to emit light by the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 to the first position and the second position. The impression of the front side of the gaming machine can be changed according to the change in the position of the front surface of the tip portion 658 of the third illumination unit 303. Since the pachinko machine 10 includes a displacement detection sensor 668 capable of detecting the displacement of the front surface of the tip portion 658 of the third illumination unit 303, the pachinko machine 10 recognizes the displacement of the front surface of the tip portion 658 of the third illumination unit 303. can. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the front surface of the tip portion 658 has moved to the first position, the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 first sets the front surface of the tip portion 658 located at the first position. When the first control for emitting light as the light emitting region 605 of the above is executed and the front surface of the tip portion 658 is transferred to the second position, the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 is the tip located at the second position. Since the control mechanism 608 for executing the second control of causing the front surface of the portion 658 and the base end portion 659 to emit light as the second light emitting region 606 is provided, the transition of the front surface of the tip portion 658 of the third illumination unit 303 is recognized. By optimizing the irradiation direction of light according to the transition of the front surface of the tip portion 658, the light emitting region can be suitably changed. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (J1) described above.

In Examples 23 to 26 described above, the light emitting region was changed in the process of exchanging the third illumination unit 303 for another third illumination unit 604, but the third illumination unit 303 or another third illumination unit 303 or another. 3 The light emitting region may be changed without replacing the illumination unit 604. Hereinafter, it will be described with reference to FIG. 121. In the following, another third illumination unit 604 will be described as an example.

FIGS. 121 (a) and 121 (b) are diagrams illustrating before and after the change in the light emitting region of the third illuminated cover 610 according to the 33rd embodiment.

The separate third lighting cover 610 has the same shape as the separate lighting cover 610 of Examples 23 to 26, but on the front surface of the separate third lighting cover 610 that receives the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607. It is different from the separate illuminated cover 610 of Examples 23 to 26 in that the light emitting region on the front surface of the separate third illuminated cover 610 can be changed by changing the predetermined region (light receiving region). There is.

The structure of the control mechanism 608 of the third illuminated cover 610 is different from that of the third illuminated cover 610 of the 23rd to 26th embodiments. Specifically, the structures of the push-in portion 616 and the push-in receiving portion 617 are different, and in particular, the push-in portion 616 can adjust the push-in amount.

The protrusion 616a of the push-in portion 616 is divided into a tip portion 671 and a base end portion 672, and the base end portion 672 can move in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10 along the inner surface of the separate third illuminated cover 610. It is attached to. The tip portion 671 is configured to be slidable in the vertical direction from the base end portion 672. Specifically, the base end portion 672 of the push-in portion 616 is attached to the front-rear slide rail 673 formed on the inner side surface of the separate third illuminated cover 610, and is configured to be slidable in the front-rear direction. Further, the tip portion 671 of the push-in portion 616 is attached to the vertical slide rail 674 formed on the outer surface of the base end portion 672, and is configured to be slidable in the vertical direction. As a result, the protrusion 616a of the push-in portion 616 can change (adjust) its protrusion amount (height) and its position in the front-rear direction by an operator such as a hole before attaching the separate third illumination cover 610.

The push-in portion 617 is also formed so that the push-in portion 616 can be pushed in a wider range than in the 23rd embodiment according to the protrusion amount of the protrusion 616a of the changeable push-in portion 616 and the position in the front-rear direction. ing. As a result, as the protrusion amount of the protrusion 616a of the push-in portion 616 is increased and the position in the front-rear direction is adjusted to the rear side, the tilt angle of the light irradiation device 607 becomes larger and the position of the second light emitting region 606 becomes higher. It is configured to be.

As a result, when using the separate third illuminated cover 610, if it is desired to emit light mainly at a higher portion on the front side of the separate third illuminated cover 610 in a certain hole, the separate third illuminated cover 610 is used. By increasing the amount of protrusion of the push-in portion 616 or adjusting the position in the front-rear direction to the rear side, the tilt angle of the light irradiation device 607 is increased and the position of the second light emitting region 606 is raised. Therefore, it is possible to meet the detailed requests of each hall.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 33rd embodiment, the third illuminated portion 604 arranged on the front side of the main body of the pachinko machine 10 and the back side of the third illuminated portion 604 are directed toward the back side. It is equipped with a light irradiation device 607 that irradiates light. Since the pachinko machine 10 can shift a predetermined area (light receiving area) of the third illumination unit 604 that receives the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 to a different position, the third illumination unit 10 can be changed to a different position. The impression of the front side of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed according to the change in the position of the predetermined area of the 604. When the predetermined region is located at the first position, the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 executes the first control to emit the predetermined region located at the first position as the first light emitting region 605. When the predetermined region is located at the second position, the control for executing the second control that the light emitted from the light irradiation device 607 emits the predetermined region located at the second position as the second light emitting region 606. Since the mechanism 608 is provided, the light emitting region can be suitably changed by optimizing the irradiation direction of the light according to the transition of the predetermined region (light receiving region) of the third illumination unit 604. This is also an example of the gaming machine described in (H00) described above.

In the above-described embodiment, the opening time, interval time, and ending time (hereinafter, these are collectively referred to as jackpot time) that can be predetermined to constitute a specific gaming state (for example, jackpot gaming state) are hit types. Although it was decided by, it may be decided in consideration of the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the jackpot. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ending time is different between the case of the special figure 1 big hit and the case of the special figure 2 big hit even if the hit type is the same, but in this embodiment, if the hit type is the same. , The ending time is the same time.

Hereinafter, the basic features of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 125. Since the configuration of the game board 30 and the control related to the game are the same as those in the above-described embodiment, those are also referred to.

FIG. 122 is a special figure 1 jackpot lottery table of the thirty-fourth embodiment. FIG. 123 is a special figure 2 jackpot lottery table. FIG. 124 is a special figure 1 jackpot ending effect table. FIG. 125 is a special figure 2 jackpot ending effect table.

In this embodiment, when the result of the lottery is a big hit result, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 can be predetermined in the big hit round gaming state according to the number of changes in the symbol at the time when the big hit result is obtained. It has a function to change the jackpot time (opening / ending time setting processing function described later). The jackpot time is at least one of an opening time for notifying the start of the jackpot round gaming state, an interval time between each jackpot round game, and an ending time for notifying the end of the jackpot round gaming state. As a result, the game situation such as the number of fluctuations of the symbol at the time when the big hit result is obtained can be suitably reflected in the big hit round game state. In addition, the game situation can be suitably reflected in the jackpot round gaming state in the form of changing the jackpot time.

Further, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 changes the jackpot time according to the number of fluctuations from the time when the jackpot result is obtained immediately before to the time when the jackpot result is obtained. Further, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has a higher probability game state or a normal game state in which the lottery result is more likely to be a big hit result than the normal game state until the predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) is reached. The jackpot time is changed in the jackpot round game state in which the state in which the fluctuation time until the result of the lottery is clearly shown is short until the predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) is reached from the number-cutting time reduction state. That is, the immediately preceding jackpot result is a jackpot with 100 probable change continuations and support states, and the number of fluctuations from the time when the immediately preceding jackpot result is obtained to the time when the jackpot result is obtained is 1 to 100 times. The number of fluctuations. As a result, the situation of how many games are played from the time when the previous big hit result is obtained to the time when the big hit result is obtained can be suitably reflected in the big hit round game state. In addition, the situation of whether the jackpot round gaming state is a transition from the normal gaming state, the jackpot round gaming state transitioned from the number-cutting high-probability gaming state or the number-cutting time-shortening state is suitably reflected in the jackpot round gaming state. be able to.

The CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines the jackpot time by referring to the special figure 1 jackpot lottery table or the special figure 2 jackpot lottery table stored in the ROM 502. Similar to the above-described embodiment, the special figure 1 big hit lottery table is used for the lottery based on the ball entry detection by the special figure 1 start winning device 33a, and the special figure 2 big hit lottery table is for special figure 2. It is used for a lottery based on the ball entry detection by the start winning device 33b.

In the special figure 1 jackpot lottery table, as shown in FIG. 122, in the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot, the opening time is 10 seconds, the interval time is 3 seconds, and the ending time is set to 35 seconds. In the case of the 8R probability variation jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot, the opening time is 10 seconds, the interval time is 3 seconds, and the ending time is set to 25 seconds. In the special figure 1 jackpot lottery table, the jackpot time is determined according to the jackpot type.

In the special figure 1 jackpot ending effect table, as shown in FIG. 124, in the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot, the ending time is 35 seconds, the next game state suggestion information 44w (10 seconds), and the manufacturer information 44x ( 5 seconds), card removal forgetting prevention information 44y (10 seconds), and digging prevention information 44z (10 seconds) are displayed. In the case of the 8R probability variation jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot, the ending time is 25 seconds, the next game state suggestion information 44w (10 seconds), the manufacturer information 44x (5 seconds), and the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y (10 seconds). Seconds) and are displayed.

Further, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has a number of fluctuations digested less than or equal to the remaining number of fluctuations among a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) in the high probability game state of cutting the number of times or the time saving state of cutting the number of times. It is provided with a function (opening / ending time setting processing function) capable of changing the jackpot time to the first time shorter than the reference jackpot time in one state (for example, 1 to 50 times). As the reference jackpot time, for example, the opening time of the 8R probability variation jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot of FIG. 1 is 10 seconds, the interval time is 3 seconds, and the ending time is 25 seconds. In this embodiment, the first time is set to such a length that the player can recognize that the first time is sufficiently shorter than the jackpot time as a reference. As a result, the role as a zone in which the jackpot round gaming state is continuously generated can be further increased, and the game situation can be suitably reflected in the jackpot round gaming state.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 123, the special figure 2 jackpot lottery table has the first half 1 to 50 out of 100 fluctuations from the time when the previous jackpot result is obtained to the time when the jackpot result is obtained. The times (the period of the first state described above) are configured so that the jackpot time can be easily set to a very short time (the first time described above). That is, if the 16R probability variation jackpot, the 8R probability variation jackpot, and the 8R normal jackpot are won in the first half of 100 fluctuations, the opening time is 3 seconds and the interval time is 1 Seconds and ending time are set to 5 seconds. As a result, the first round starts in a very short time from the time when the jackpot winning result is confirmed, the interval time between each round is also very short, and the high probability game state is very short after the end of the final round. Since the normal game is started, the next big hit winning result can be obtained in a short time. That is, the first half 1 to 50 times out of the 100 fluctuations in which the special figure 2 big hit lottery table is used can be made to function as a so-called immediate zone.

Further, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the fluctuation display time to the first fluctuation display time (for example, 5 seconds) shorter than the reference fluctuation display time in the first state (for example, 1 to 50 times). (1st symbol variation processing function) is provided. As the reference fluctuation display, for example, the fluctuation time of the jackpot super reach A and B is 20 seconds. In this embodiment, the first variable display time is set to such a length that the player can recognize that the variable display time is sufficiently shorter than the reference variable display time. As a result, the time required for the variable display can be shortened, and the role as an immediate zone in which the jackpot game state is continuously generated can be further increased.

The CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the first variation display time by referring to the special figure 2 main decorative symbol variation pattern selection table (not shown) stored in the ROM 502. Specifically, in the special figure 2 main decorative symbol variation pattern selection table, when the 16R probability variation jackpot, the 8R probability variation jackpot, and the 8R normal jackpot are won, the number of fluctuations is 1 to 30 times and 36 to 50 times. If either is the case, a short-variable variation pattern corresponding to the first variation display time (for example, 5 seconds) is selected regardless of the values of the variation type counters C1 and C2. In this way, by providing an immediate zone with a short fluctuation time and a short jackpot time, it is possible to increase the expectation that jackpot winnings will occur continuously in a short period of time.

The first fluctuation display time is not limited to a specific time such as 5 seconds, but is relatively short such as 5 seconds, 10 seconds, and 15 seconds according to the values of the fluctuation type counters C1 and C2. It may be the time of choice. In the variation pattern of the short variation, the stop display may be performed by the jackpot combination via the reach combination of the main decorative symbol Sz, or the stop display may be performed by the jackpot combination without passing through this reach combination.

Further, in the opening / ending time setting processing function described later, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the jackpot time in the first state (for example, 1 to 50 times) at least for the first time (for example, opening time is 3 seconds, ending). It has a function capable of changing to a second time (for example, an opening time of 10 seconds and an ending time of either 20 seconds or 30 seconds) longer than the time of 5 seconds. This makes it possible to balance by inserting a longer jackpot time in the first state.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 123, the special figure 2 jackpot lottery table has, for example, 31 to 35 times out of the first half 1 to 50 times of the number of fluctuations of 100 times in the high probability game state of cutting the number of times or the time saving state of cutting the number of times. If you win the 16R probability variation jackpot, the opening time is set to 10 seconds, the interval time is set to 3 seconds, and the ending time is set to 30 seconds. If you win either the 8R probability variation jackpot or the 8R normal jackpot, the opening time is set. The time is set to 10 seconds, the interval time is set to 3 seconds, and the ending time is set to 20 seconds. As a result, even when the first half 1 to 50 times out of 100 fluctuations are made to function as an immediate zone, it is possible to prevent the jackpot winning result from being generated too much and balance the balance.

Further, in the special figure 2 main decorative symbol variation pattern selection table, when the 16R probability variation jackpot, the 8R probability variation jackpot, and the 8R normal jackpot are won, and the number of fluctuations is any of 31 to 35 times, Depending on the values of the fluctuation type counters C1 and C2, a time longer than the first fluctuation display time, for example, jackpot normal reach A, B (20 seconds), jackpot super reach A, B (30 seconds), jackpot super reach C, D A variation pattern corresponding to either (60 seconds) or jackpot super reach E or F (120) seconds is selected. As a result, a balance can be achieved by providing a zone with a long fluctuation time and a long jackpot time in the immediate zone.

Further, in the opening / ending time setting processing function described later, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is in a second state (for example, 51) in which the number of fluctuations digested out of a predetermined number of games (for example, 100 times) is longer than the remaining number of fluctuations. In (~ 100 times), the jackpot time is set to be longer than the first time (for example, opening time is 3 seconds and ending time is 5 seconds) in the second time (for example, opening time is 10 seconds and ending time is 20 seconds or 30 seconds). Change to either). As a result, a balance can be achieved by inserting a longer jackpot time in the second state (for example, a so-called addictive state).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 123, in the special figure 2 big hit lottery table, in principle, the latter half 51 to 100 times out of the 100 fluctuation times in the high probability game state of cutting the number of times or the time saving state of cutting the number of times. , The jackpot time is set longer than 1 to 50 times in the first half. Specifically, if you win the 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, and 8R normal jackpot in the latter half of 100 times, 51-80 times and 86-100 times, the opening time is 10 seconds and the interval time is It is set to 2 seconds and an ending time of 20 seconds or 30 seconds (20 seconds for 8R probability variation and 8R normal jackpot, 30 seconds for 16R probability variation jackpot). This makes it possible to balance with the immediate zone in the first half.

Further, in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, in the first symbol variation processing function, the remaining number of fluctuations is the number of fluctuations digested out of the predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) in the high probability game state of cutting the number of times or the time saving state of cutting the number of times. In more than a second state (eg 51-100 times), the variation display time is at least longer than the first variation display time (eg 10 seconds) second variation display time (eg 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 120 seconds). It has a function that can be easily set to. Specifically, the special figure 2 main decorative symbol variation pattern selection table is a case where the 16R probability variation jackpot, the 8R probability variation jackpot, and the 8R normal jackpot are won, and the number of fluctuations is 51 to 80 times and 86 to 100 times. In the case of either of them, the jackpot normal reach A, B (20 seconds), the jackpot, according to the value of the fluctuation type counter C2, as in the special figure 1 main decorative symbol fluctuation pattern selection table shown in FIG. A variation pattern corresponding to any of Super Reach A, B (30 seconds), Jackpot Super Reach C, D (60 seconds), and Jackpot Super Reach E, F (120) seconds is selected. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility of easily exiting the high-probability gaming state in the second state (for example, the so-called addictive state).

Further, in the opening / ending time setting processing function described later, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the jackpot time in the second state (for example, 51 to 100 times) at least for the second time (for example, opening time of 10 seconds, ending). The time is changed to a time shorter than (either 20 seconds or 30 seconds) (for example, opening time 3 seconds, ending time 5 seconds). As a result, it is possible to reduce the feeling of extension during the jackpot round gaming state in the second state (for example, the so-called addictive state).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 123, the special figure 2 jackpot lottery table won the 16R probability variation jackpot, the 8R probability variation jackpot, and the 8R normal jackpot in the latter half 81 to 85 of the 100 fluctuations. In this case, the opening time is set to 3 seconds, the interval time is set to 1 second, and the ending time is set to 5 seconds. As a result, it is possible to prevent the jackpot round gaming state from becoming monotonous in the start (opening) period, the interval period, and the end (ending) period in the latter half of the fluctuation number of 100 times.

Further, in the first symbol variation processing function, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the variation display time to at least the second variation display time (for example, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 120) in the second state (for example, 51 to 100 times). It has a function that can be set to a variable display time (for example, 5 seconds) shorter than (seconds). Specifically, the table for selecting the main decorative symbol variation pattern in Special Figure 2 is a case where any of 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, and 8R normal jackpot occurs, and the number of fluctuations is any one of 81 to 85 times. In the case of, a short fluctuation fluctuation pattern corresponding to a fluctuation display time (for example, 5 seconds) shorter than the second fluctuation display time is selected regardless of the values of the fluctuation type counters C1 and C2. As a result, a high-speed digestion zone having a short fluctuation time is provided in the second state (for example, a so-called addictive state), and it is possible to play a game in which the flow from the fluctuation to the opening / closing game can be quickly shown.

As shown in FIG. 125, the special figure 2 jackpot ending effect table has 16R probability variation jackpot and 8R probability variation jackpot in the first half of 100 fluctuations, 1 to 30 times, 36 to 50 times, and 81 to 85 times. , 8R If you win the normal jackpot, the ending effect pattern is the next game state suggestion information 44w (5 seconds), manufacturer information 44x (5 seconds), and card removal prevention information set for a short time. One of 44y (5 seconds) and the intrusion prevention information 44z (5 seconds) is set. In this embodiment, the next game state suggestion information 44w is set. The time for displaying the information is set to 5 seconds corresponding to the ending time. When the 16R probability variation jackpot is won among 31 to 35 times, 51 to 80 times, and 86 to 100 times, the ending effect pattern is the next game state suggestion information 44w and the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y. Insertion prevention information 44z is set. If the 8R probability variation jackpot or the 8R normal jackpot is won among 31 to 35 times, 51 to 80 times, and 86 to 100 times, the ending effect pattern is the next game state suggestion information 44w and prevention of forgetting to remove the card. Information 44y is set.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 126 to 128, the points that the control process of this embodiment differs from that of the above-described embodiment will be described. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing a normal process by the main control device 261. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing an opening / ending time determination process by the main control device 261. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing a large winning opening opening / closing process by the main control device 261.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 126, the opening / ending time setting process (step S205A) is added to the normal process by the main control device 261 and the large winning opening opening / closing process (step S206A). It is different from the above-mentioned embodiment.

The opening / ending time setting process will be described with reference to the figure.

In step S4001, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not it is the 16R probability variation jackpot of FIG. If it is the 16R probability variation jackpot of the special figure 1, the process proceeds to step S4002, and if not, the process proceeds to step S4003. In step S4002, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the opening time to 10 seconds, the interval time to 2 seconds, and the ending time to 30 seconds.

In step S4003, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not it is the 8R probability variation or the 8R normal jackpot in FIG. If it is the 8R probability change or the 8R normal jackpot of the special figure 1, the process proceeds to step S4004, and if not, the process proceeds to step S4005. In step S4004, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the opening time to 10 seconds, the interval time to 2 seconds, and the ending time to 20 seconds.

In step S4007, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not it is the 16R probability variation jackpot shown in FIG. If it is the 16R probability variation jackpot of the special figure 2, the process proceeds to step S4008, and if not, the process proceeds to step S4013. In step S4008, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 stores in the storage area n of the RAM 503 the count value of the number of games at the time of winning the big hit (the number of games at the time of winning the big hit in the high probability game state of cutting the number of times or the short time state of cutting the number of times). Then, the process proceeds to step S4009. In step S4009, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the count value of the number of games played in the storage area n is 1 to 30 times, 36 to 50 times, and 81 to 85 times. If it is 1 to 30 times, 36 to 50 times, and 81 to 85 times, the process proceeds to step S4010, and if not, the process proceeds to step S4011. In step S4010, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the opening time to 3 seconds, the interval time to 1 second, and the ending time to 5 seconds. As a result, in 1 to 50 times of the high probability game state of cutting the number of times or in the short time state of cutting the number of times, the jackpot time is short and a more speedy immediate continuous zone can be realized, and in 51 to 100 times, the jackpot round game state is extended. Can be reduced.

In step S4011, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the count value of the number of games in the storage area n is 31 to 35 times, 51 to 80 times, and 86 to 100 times. If it is 31 to 35 times, 51 to 80 times, or 86 to 100 times, the process proceeds to step S4012, and if not, the present process is terminated. In step S4012, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the opening time to 10 seconds, the interval time to 2 seconds, and the ending time to 30 seconds. In this way, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of too many big hits in a short period of time in the 1 to 50 times of the high probability game state of cutting the number of times or the short time of the number of times cutting, and in the 51 to 100 times, the big hit from the addicted state. It is possible to let the player who has finished the round game state take a breath.

In step S4013, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not it is an 8R probability variation jackpot or an 8R normal jackpot in FIG. If it is the 8R probability variation jackpot of the special figure 2, the process proceeds to step S4014, and if not, the process proceeds to step S4019. In step S4014, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 stores in the storage area n of the RAM 503 the count value of the number of games of the big hit winner (the number of games of the big hit winner in the high probability game state of cutting the number of times or the time saving state of cutting the number of times). Then, the process proceeds to step S4015. In step S4015, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the count value of the number of games played in the storage area n is 1 to 30 times, 36 to 50 times, and 81 to 85 times. If it is 1 to 30 times, 36 to 50 times, and 81 to 85 times, the process proceeds to step S4016, and if not, the process proceeds to step S4017. In step S4016, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the opening time to 3 seconds, the interval time to 1 second, and the ending time to 5 seconds. As a result, in 1 to 50 times of the high probability game state of cutting the number of times or in the short time state of cutting the number of times, the jackpot time is short and a more speedy immediate continuous zone can be realized, and in 51 to 100 times, the jackpot round game state is extended. Can be reduced.

In step S4017, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the count value of the number of games at the time of reading is 31 to 35 times, 51 to 80 times, and 86 to 100 times. If it is 31 to 35 times, 51 to 80 times, or 86 to 100 times, the process proceeds to step S4018, and if not, the present process is terminated. In step S4018, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the opening time to 10 seconds, the interval time to 2 seconds, and the ending time to 20 seconds. In this way, it is possible to reduce the continuous occurrence of big hit winnings in a short period of time in the 1 to 50 times of the high-probability game state of cutting the number of times or the short-time state of cutting the number of times, and in the 51 to 100 times, the high-probability gaming state or It is possible to reduce the tendency to easily get out of the time saving state.

The large winning opening opening / closing process of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 128.

In step S4101, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the round start flag is turned on. If the round start flag is on, the process proceeds to step S4102, otherwise the process ends. The round start flag is, for example, the timing when the result of the lottery in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is a big hit and the game shifts to the big hit round game (for example, in step S407 described above in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261). After the fluctuation time of the first symbol has elapsed, the stop symbol of the first symbol is set as the display symbol in step S409, and the timing in which the all stop command for instructing the stop of the variation pattern of the decorative symbol is set in step S410 is set. ) Indicates the start of the jackpot round game state by rising from 0 to 1.

In step S4102, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 reads out the opening time determined by using the special figure 1 big hit lottery table or the special figure 2 big hit lottery table, and proceeds to step S4103. In step S4103, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 starts measuring the opening time determined by using the timer function, and proceeds to step S4104. In step S4104, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not it is the timing to end the measurement of the opening time, that is, the start timing of the nth round (the first round if it is the first). If it is the start timing of the nth round, the process proceeds to step S4105, and if not, the present process ends.

In step S4104, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 opens the large winning opening 32a and proceeds to step S4106. In step S4106, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the nth round. The end timing of each round is determined by the elapse of the maximum opening time (for example, 30 seconds) of the large winning opening 32a or the arrival of the maximum number of winnings (for example, 10 balls) by the winning detection switch in the large winning opening 32a.

If it is the end timing of the nth round in step S4106, the process proceeds to step S4107, otherwise the process ends. In step S4107, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 closes the large winning opening 32a and proceeds to step S4108. In step S4108, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not it is the final round. If it is the final round, the process proceeds to step S4111, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4109.

In step S4109, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 reads out the interval time determined by using the special figure 1 big hit lottery table or the special figure 2 big hit lottery table, and proceeds to step S4110. In step S4110, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 starts measuring the opening time determined by using the timer function, and returns to step S4104. In step S4104, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not it is the timing to end the measurement of the interval time, that is, the start timing of the nth round (n is an integer excluding 1). Step S4105 (opening the big winning opening) to step S4108 (closing the big winning opening) are as described above.

In step S4111, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 reads out the ending time determined by using the special figure 1 big hit lottery table or the special figure 2 big hit lottery table, and proceeds to step S4112. In step S4112, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 starts measuring the ending time determined by using the timer function, and proceeds to step S4113. In step S4113, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the ending time has elapsed. If the ending time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S4114, otherwise the process ends. In step S4114, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 turns off the round start flag and ends the opening / closing of the big winning opening.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 34th embodiment, the game board 30 having the game area 30a through which the game ball flows down and the start for Special Figure 1 in which the game ball flowing down the game area 30a can enter. The winning device 33a, the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2, the variable winning device 32 capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area 30a, the starting winning device 33a for special drawing 1, and the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2. The operation port switch for the start winning device 33a for special figure 1, the operation port switch for the start winning device 33b for special figure 2, and the operation port for the start winning device 33a for special figure 1 to detect the game ball that has entered the ball. Based on the detection of the game ball by the switch and the operation port switch for the start winning device 33b for the special figure 2, the lottery of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that draws a lottery as to whether or not a jackpot game state advantageous to the player occurs. The function and the result of the lottery by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 are displayed on the third symbol display device 42 as a result of the variation display of the symbol that can be visually recognized by the player. Fluctuation processing, variation display mode setting processing of CPU 262 of sub control device 262, symbol sequence variation display processing function (variation display control function) of CPU 551 of display control device 42, and lottery result of main control device 261 are jackpot results. Based on the above, when the variable display of the symbol is stopped and displayed in a big hit combination, from the open state where the variable winning device 32 can enter the game ball to the closed state where the variable winning device 32 is difficult to enter the game ball. When the jackpot opening / closing processing function (state transition function) of the CPU 501 of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the result of the lottery are the jackpot results. In addition, the opening / ending of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that changes the jackpot time such as the opening time / ending time that can be predetermined in the jackpot round gaming state according to the number of fluctuations of the symbol at the time of the jackpot result. It has a time setting processing function (specific period control function). As a result, the game situation such as the number of fluctuations of the symbol at the time when the big hit result is obtained can be suitably reflected in the big hit round game state. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (K1), for example.

Further, the jackpot time is at least one of an opening time for notifying the start of the jackpot round gaming state, an interval time between each jackpot round game, and an ending time for notifying the end of the jackpot round gaming state. As a result, the game situation can be suitably reflected in the jackpot round gaming state in the form of changing the jackpot time. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (K2), for example.

Further, the opening / ending time setting processing function (opening / closing game time control function) of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is a jackpot according to the number of fluctuations from the time when the previous jackpot result is obtained to the time when the jackpot result is obtained. Change the time. As a result, the situation of how many games are played from the time when the previous big hit result is obtained to the time when the big hit result is obtained can be suitably reflected in the big hit round game state. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (K3), for example.

Further, in the opening / ending time setting processing function (opening / closing game time control function) of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, the state in which the lottery result is more likely to be a big hit result than in the normal game state is a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times). The jackpot time is changed in the jackpot round gaming state that has transitioned from the high-probability gaming state that continues until it becomes. As a result, it is possible to suitably reflect the situation of whether the jackpot round gaming state is a transition from the normal gaming state or the jackpot round gaming state transitioned from the number-cut high-probability gaming state to the jackpot round gaming state. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (K4), for example. In addition, as a state in which the result of the lottery is more likely to be a big hit result than in the normal game state, the state where the result of the lottery is more likely to be the big hit result than in the normal game state is described next by taking the high probability game state of cutting the number of times as an example. It may be a high-probability gaming state that continues until a jackpot result is obtained, a time-saving state that facilitates a lottery as to whether or not a jackpot gaming state occurs, or a state in which these are combined.

Further, in the opening / ending time setting processing function (opening / closing game time control function) of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, whether the number of fluctuations digested out of the predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100) is less than the remaining number of fluctuations. Alternatively, in the same first state (for example, 1 to 50 times), the jackpot time is set to the first time (for example, opening time) shorter than the reference jackpot time (for example, opening time is 10 seconds, ending time is 20 seconds, 30 seconds). Is changed to 3 seconds and the ending time is 5 seconds). As a result, the role as a zone in which the jackpot round gaming state is continuously generated can be further increased, and the game situation can be suitably reflected in the jackpot round gaming state. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (K5), for example.

Further, the first symbol variation processing function (variation display control function) of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 uses the variation display time as a reference variation display time (for example, 20 seconds) in the first state (for example, 1 to 50 times). , 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 100 seconds, 120 seconds) is set to the first variation display time (for example, 10 seconds). As a result, the time required for the variable display can be shortened, and the role as a zone in which the jackpot game state continuously occurs can be further increased. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (K6), for example.

Further, the opening / ending time setting processing function (opening / closing game time control function) of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the jackpot time to at least the first hour (for example, opening time) in the first state (for example, 1 to 50 times). Change to a second time (for example, opening time 10 seconds, ending time 40 seconds, 45 seconds, 50 seconds, 55 seconds) longer than 3 seconds, ending time 5 seconds). This makes it possible to balance by inserting a longer jackpot time in the first state. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (K7), for example.

Further, in the opening / ending time setting processing function (opening / closing game time control function) of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, the number of fluctuations digested out of a predetermined number of games (for example, 100 times) is longer than the remaining number of fluctuations. In the state (for example, 51 to 100 times), the jackpot time is set to be longer than the first time (for example, opening time is 3 seconds and ending time is 5 seconds) for the second time (for example, opening time is 10 seconds and ending time is 20). Change to either seconds or 30 seconds). This makes it possible to balance by inserting a longer jackpot time in the second state (for example, the so-called addictive state). This is an example of the gaming machine described in (K8), for example.

Further, the first symbol variation processing function (variation display control function) of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the variation display time to at least the first variation display time (for example, 10 seconds) in the second state (for example, 51 to 100 times). ) Is set to a second variation display time (for example, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 120 seconds). As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility of easily exiting the high-probability gaming state in the second state (for example, the so-called addictive state). This is an example of the gaming machine described in (K9), for example.

Further, the opening / ending time setting processing function (opening / closing game time control function) of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the jackpot time to at least the second time (for example, opening time) in the second state (for example, 51 to 100 times). The time is changed to a shorter time (for example, opening time 5 seconds, ending time 10 seconds) than 10 seconds, ending time 20 seconds, or 30 seconds). As a result, it is possible to reduce the feeling of extension during the jackpot round gaming state in the second state (for example, the so-called addictive state). This is an example of the gaming machine described in (K10), for example.

Further, the first symbol variation processing function (variation display control function) of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the variation display time to at least the second variation display time (for example, 30 seconds) in the second state (for example, 51 to 100 times). , 60 seconds, 120 seconds) is set to a shorter variable display time (for example, 20 seconds). As a result, a high-speed digestion zone having a short fluctuation time is provided in the second state (for example, a so-called addictive state), and it is possible to play a game in which the flow from the fluctuation to the opening / closing game can be quickly shown. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (K11), for example.

In the above-described embodiment, the ending effect is limited to displaying predetermined information within a predetermined ending time, but the ending effect may be a game-like effect. Hereinafter, it will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 to 134. In addition, the same configuration as the above-mentioned Examples is also referred to there.

FIG. 129 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 of Example 35. FIG. 130 is a special figure 1 jackpot lottery table. FIG. 131 is a special figure 2 jackpot lottery table. FIG. 132 is a special figure 2 jackpot ending effect table. FIG. 133 is a special figure 2 jackpot ending effect table following FIG. 132. FIG. 134 is a special figure 2 jackpot ending effect table following FIG. 133.

Similar to the 34th embodiment, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 of this embodiment has at least a big hit when the result of the lottery in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is a big hit result as an opening / ending time setting processing function. It has a function to change the jackpot time according to the number of fluctuations of the symbol at the time of the result.

Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has an opening / ending time setting processing function as a type of symbol at the time when a jackpot result is obtained (a type such as whether the jackpot symbol is an odd number symbol other than 7 or 7 or an even symbol). It has a function of changing the jackpot time according to the number of fluctuations (type of whether it is the first half (1 to 50 times) or the second half (51 to 100 times)). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the jackpot round game state according to the type of the symbol and the number of fluctuations at the time when the jackpot result is obtained.

Further, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has a jackpot time (for example, as an opening / ending time setting processing function) when the symbol type is the first type (for example, an odd symbol or an even symbol excluding 7 in Special Figure 2). It is possible to change the ending time) to the first time (for example, 20 seconds with the number of fluctuations of 51 to 60 times in the latter half), and the type of the symbol is the second type (for example, "7" in the special figure 2). ), It is possible to change the jackpot time (for example, the ending time) to the second time (for example, 30 seconds with the number of fluctuations of 51 to 60 times in the latter half) longer than the first time. As a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the jackpot round game state according to the length of the jackpot time that changes depending on the type of symbol at the time of the jackpot result and the number of fluctuations.

Further, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has an opening / ending time setting processing function (opening / closing game time control function) in which the symbol type is the first type (for example, an odd symbol or an even symbol excluding 7 in special figure 2). Even in the case of, if the number of fluctuations digested out of the predetermined number of fluctuations is larger than the remaining number of fluctuations (for example, 61 to 70 times, 71 to 80 times, 81 to 100 times), the jackpot time (for example) For example, the ending time) is longer than the first time (for example, 20 seconds for 51 to 60 times) (for example, 25 seconds for 61 to 70 times, 30 seconds for 71 to 80 times, and 35 seconds for 81 to 100 times). ). As a result, when the number of fluctuations digested out of the predetermined number of fluctuations is larger than the remaining number of fluctuations, the interest of the jackpot round gaming state can be improved according to the remaining number of fluctuations.

Further, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has an opening / ending time setting processing function (opening / closing game time control function) in which the symbol type is the first type (for example, an odd symbol or an even symbol excluding 7 in special figure 2). Even in the case where the number of fluctuations digested out of the predetermined number of fluctuations is larger than the remaining number of fluctuations (for example, 81 to 100 times), the jackpot time (for example, the ending time) is set to the second time (for example). For example, the time is changed to a longer time (for example, 35 seconds for 81 to 100 times) than (30 seconds for 71 to 80 times in the latter half). As a result, even if the type of the symbol is not the second type (the first type), if the number of fluctuations digested out of the predetermined number of fluctuations is larger than the remaining number of fluctuations, the number of fluctuations is the same. Depending on the number of remaining fluctuations, it is possible to improve the fun of the jackpot round game state.

Further, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 of the present embodiment has a function of controlling the display of the jackpot time corresponding image (the ending time corresponding image described later, the setting guessing effect image) associated with the jackpot time (big hit ending display processing). Function). The jackpot ending display processing function of the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays advantageous information advantageous to the player while displaying the jackpot time-compatible image according to the display time of the ending time-corresponding image. As a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the jackpot round game state according to the display time of the jackpot time corresponding image. Hereinafter, these configurations will be described.

The jackpot ending display processing function (image display control function) of the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays a setting suggestion effect image having a longer display time as the ending time is longer, and the longer the display time of the setting suggestion effect image is, the more advantageous it is. Display information. As a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the jackpot round game state according to the length of the display time of the jackpot time corresponding image.

In this embodiment, as the jackpot time-corresponding image associated with the jackpot time, the jackpot time, that is, the ending time-corresponding image associated with the ending time among the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time that can be predetermined. Will be described as an example. In addition, setting information will be described as an example as advantageous information that is advantageous for the player displayed while displaying the image corresponding to the jackpot time.

The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is a pachinko machine with a setting function. As shown in FIG. 129, the main control device 261 of the pachinko machine 10 has a setting ON / OFF switch 264 for switching ON / OFF of setting change, and a setting change operation by an operator when the setting ON / OFF switch is ON. It includes a setting change switch 265 that receives the setting, and a setting reset switch 266 that resets the current setting when the setting ON / OFF switch is turned on. The setting ON / OFF switch 264 is a switch for switching ON / OFF by inserting a key and rotating the switch. The setting change switch 265 is a push button switch. Each time the operator presses the setting change switch 265, the setting is incremented by one step.

The special figure 1 big hit lottery table and the special figure 2 big hit lottery table of this embodiment are provided with six stages of settings 1 to 6. As shown in FIG. 130, in the special figure 1 jackpot lottery table, in the normal (low probability) gaming state, the jackpot probability is set to 1/320 in setting 1, and the jackpot probability is set to 1/310 in setting 2. In setting 3, the jackpot probability is set to 1/300, in setting 4, the jackpot probability is set to 1/290, in setting 5, the jackpot probability is set to 1/280, and in setting 6, the jackpot probability is set to 1/280. The probability is set to 1/270. In the high probability gaming state, setting 1 has the jackpot probability set to 1/45, setting 2 has the jackpot probability set to 1/40, and setting 3 has the jackpot probability set to 1/35. The jackpot probability is set to 1/30, the jackpot probability is set to 1/25 in the setting 5, and the jackpot probability is set to 1/20 in the setting 6.

The jackpot time of the special figure 1 jackpot lottery table is the same as the jackpot time of the special figure 1 jackpot lottery table as in the above-described embodiment 34. That is, in the case of 16R probability variation jackpot, the opening time (10 seconds), interval time (3 seconds), and ending time (35 seconds), and in the case of 8R probability variation jackpot and 8R normal jackpot, the opening time (10 seconds), The interval time (3 seconds) and the ending time (25 seconds).

As shown in FIG. 131, the special figure 2 jackpot lottery table of this embodiment has 1 to 50 fluctuations in the first half of 100 times from the time when the previous jackpot result is obtained to the time when the jackpot result is obtained. Is set to a very short time (opening time 3 seconds, interval time 1 second, ending time 5 seconds) regardless of the jackpot type, as in Example 34. The latter half 51 to 100 times out of 100 fluctuations are set so that the jackpot time becomes longer as the number of fluctuations increases.

When the 16R probability variation jackpot in Special Figure 2 is won, the latter 51 to 60 times of the 100 fluctuations are set to the opening time of 10 seconds, the interval time of 2 seconds, and the ending time of 30 seconds, and 61 to 70 times are the opening. The time is set to 15 seconds, the interval time is 3 seconds, and the ending time is 35 seconds. 71 to 80 times are set to the opening time of 20 seconds, the interval time is set to 4 seconds, and the ending time is set to 40 seconds. It is set to seconds, an interval time of 5 seconds, and an ending time of 45 seconds. In this way, when the 16R probability variation jackpot in Special Figure 2 is won, the number of fluctuations increases, such as 61 to 70 times, 71 to 80 times, and 81 to 100 times, based on the jackpot time of 51 to 60 times. Correspondingly, the jackpot time is gradually increased.

When the 8R probability variation jackpot and 8R normal jackpot in Special Figure 2 are won, the latter 51 to 60 times of the 100 fluctuations are set to an opening time of 10 seconds, an interval time of 2 seconds, and an ending time of 20 seconds, 61 to 70. The times are set to an opening time of 15 seconds, an interval time of 3 seconds, and an ending time of 25 seconds, and 71 to 80 times are set to an opening time of 20 seconds, an interval time of 4 seconds, and an ending time of 30 seconds. , The opening time is set to 25 seconds, the interval time is set to 5 seconds, and the ending time is set to 35 seconds. In this way, when the 8R probability variation jackpot in Special Figure 2 is won, the number of fluctuations increases, such as 61 to 70 times, 71 to 80 times, and 81 to 100 times, based on the jackpot time of 51 to 60 times. Correspondingly, the jackpot time is gradually increased.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 has a function of displaying a jackpot time-corresponding image having a longer display time as the jackpot time is longer, and displaying advantageous advantageous information as the jackpot time-corresponding image is longer. As a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the jackpot round game state according to the length of the display time of the jackpot time corresponding image. Specifically, as an image corresponding to the jackpot time, an image corresponding to the ending time will be described as an example.

Specifically, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines the ending time corresponding image corresponding to the ending effect pattern with reference to the special figure 2 jackpot ending effect table stored in the ROM 522. The special figure 2 jackpot ending effect table is set so that the longer the ending time, the longer the ending time corresponding to the ending time-corresponding image is determined. Further, the ending time corresponding image having a long display time includes a setting suggestion effect image having a long display time. In the setting suggestion effect image, the longer the display time of the setting suggestion effect image is, the more advantageous information is easily displayed. As described above, the ending time is set so that the larger the number of fluctuations, the longer the ending time. That is, the ending time-corresponding image is set so that advantageous information is more easily displayed as the number of fluctuations increases.

Advantageous information is information that seeing it leads to a game benefit for the player. For example, the advantageous information is the setting information indicating how many settings are in the pachinko machine 10 with settings, and the probabilistic variation indicating whether the probabilistic variation is normal or not when it is not specified whether the probabilistic variation is present at the time of winning the jackpot. Information. If the set value is high, the setting information is a game benefit in that more game value may be obtained. Further, when the set value is low, the setting information is advantageous in terms of the possibility that the loss of the game value can be reduced. That is, the setting information is valuable as advantageous information in that it is possible to know how many setting values there are.

As will be described later, the ending time corresponding image is a series of images in which the setting suggestion effect image and the privilege video 44n are displayed after the next game state suggestion information 44w and the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y are displayed. As will be described later, the setting suggestion effect image is set with the setting effect suggestion information 44r1 suggesting the start of the setting effect, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 suggesting the setting 6, and the setting 5 suggestion information 44r3 suggesting the setting 5. It is a series of images in which the setting 4 suggestion information 44r4 suggesting the setting 4, the setting 3 suggestion information 44r5 suggesting the setting 3, and the setting 2 suggestion information 44r6 suggesting the setting 2 are displayed in order. The setting suggestion effect image starts from the setting effect suggestion information 44r1, and the suggestion information of which setting is displayed differs depending on the ending effect pattern. Further, the privilege video 44n is a series of images in which the first privilege video 44n1, the second privilege video 44n2, the third privilege video 44n3, and the fourth privilege video 44n4 are displayed in order, and the first privilege video is Starting from 44n1, which privilege video is displayed depends on the ending effect pattern. The manufacturer information 44x, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, each suggestion information, and each privilege video are all configured as moving images for 5 seconds.

With reference to FIGS. 132 and 133, advantageous information is displayed as the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the jackpot increases with respect to the special figure 2 jackpot ending effect table A (16R probability variation jackpot in special figure 2). I will explain the points that are easier to do.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the 16R probability variation jackpot is 1 to 50 times, the ending time is 5 seconds, and regardless of the set value of 1 to 6, the next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, card An ending effect pattern composed of any one of the pull-out prevention information 44y and the digging prevention information 44z is set. Here, the next game state suggestion information 44w is set. In this way, if the number of fluctuations is 1 to 50 and the 16R probability variation jackpot is won, the setting information is suggested because the player is in the middle of the immediate zone and the player does not have to worry about the set value. do not have.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the 16R probability variation jackpot is 51 to 60 times, the ending time is 30 seconds, and if the set value is 6, the next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, and the setting effect. The ending effect pattern A1 composed of the suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, the first privilege video 44n1, and the second privilege video 44n2 is set. If the set value is 5, the next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, the setting effect suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, the setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, and the first privilege The ending effect pattern A2 composed of the video 44n1 is set. If the set values are 1 to 4, the next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, the setting effect suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, and the setting 5 suggestion information 44r3 are set. 4 The ending effect pattern A3 composed of the suggestion information 44r4 is set. The ending effect pattern A1 is actually advantageous information in the case of the setting 6. The ending effect pattern A2 is actually advantageous information in the case of setting 5. The ending effect pattern A3 is actually advantageous information in the case of the setting 4.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the 16R probability change jackpot is 61 to 70 times, the ending time is 35 seconds, and if the set value is 6, the next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, and the setting effect. The ending effect pattern A4 composed of the suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, the first privilege video 44n1, the second privilege video 44n2, and the third privilege video 44n3 is set. If the set value is 5, the next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, the setting effect suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, the setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, and the first privilege The ending effect pattern A5 composed of the image 44n1 and the second privilege image 44n2 is set. If the set value is 4, the next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, the setting effect suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, the setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, and the setting 4 suggestion. The ending effect pattern A6 composed of the information 44r4 and the first privilege video 44n1 is set. If the set values are 1 to 3, the next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, the setting effect suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, and the setting 5 suggestion information 44r3 are set. The ending effect pattern A7 composed of the 4 suggestion information 44r4 and the setting 3 suggestion information 44r5 is set. The ending effect pattern A4 is actually advantageous information in the case of the setting 6. The ending effect pattern A5 is advantageous information when the setting 5 is actually set. The ending effect pattern A6 is actually advantageous information in the case of the setting 4. The ending effect pattern A7 is actually advantageous information in the case of setting 3.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the 16R probability change jackpot is 71 to 80 times, the ending time is 40 seconds, and if the set value is 6, the next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, and the setting effect. The ending effect pattern A8 including the suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, the first privilege video 44n1, the second privilege video 44n2, the third privilege video 44n3, and the privilege video 4 is set. If the set value is 5, the next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, the setting effect suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, the setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, and the first privilege video 44n1. And the ending effect pattern A9 composed of the second privilege image 44n2 and the third privilege image 44n3 are set. If the set value is 4, the next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, the setting effect suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, the setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, and the setting 4 suggestion. The ending effect pattern A10 composed of the information 44r4, the first privilege image 44n1 and the second privilege image 44n2 is set. If the set value is 3, the next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, the setting effect suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, the setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, and the setting 4 suggestion. The ending effect pattern A11 composed of the information 44r4, the setting 3 suggestion information 44r5, and the first privilege video 44n1 is set. If the set value is 1 or 2, the next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, the setting effect suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, and the setting 5 suggestion information 44r3 are set. An ending effect pattern A12 composed of 4 suggestion information 44r4, setting 3 suggestion information 44r5, and setting 2 suggestion information 44r6 is set. The ending effect pattern A8 is actually advantageous information in the case of the setting 6. The ending effect pattern A9 is actually advantageous information in the case of the setting 5. The ending effect pattern A10 is actually advantageous information in the case of setting 4. The ending effect pattern A11 is actually advantageous information in the case of setting 3. The ending effect pattern A12 is actually advantageous information in the case of setting 2.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the 16R probability change jackpot is 81 to 100 times, the ending time is 45 seconds, and if the set value is 6, the next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, and the setting effect. It is composed of the suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, the first privilege video 44n1, the second privilege video 44n2, the third privilege video 44n3, the fourth privilege video 44n4, and the fifth privilege video 44n5. The ending effect pattern A13 is set. If the set value is 5, the next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, the setting effect suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, the setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, and the first privilege An ending effect pattern A14 composed of the image 44n1, the second privilege image 44n2, the third privilege image 44n3, and the fourth privilege image 44n4 is set. If the set value is 4, the next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, the setting effect suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, the setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, and the setting 4 suggestion. The ending effect pattern A15 composed of the information 44r4, the first privilege image 44n1, the second privilege image 44n2, and the third privilege image 44n3 is set. If the set value is 3, the next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, the setting effect suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, the setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, and the setting 4 suggestion. The ending effect pattern A16 composed of the information 44r4, the setting 3 suggestion information 44r5, the first privilege image 44n1, and the second privilege image 44n2 is set. If the set value is 2, the next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, the setting effect suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, the setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, and the setting 4 suggestion The ending effect pattern A17 composed of the information 44r4, the setting 3 suggestion information 44r5, the setting 2 suggestion information 44r6, and the first privilege video 44n1 is set. If the set value is 1, the next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, the setting effect suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, the setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, and the setting 4 suggestion. The ending effect pattern A18 composed of the information 44r4, the setting 3 suggestion information 44r5, the setting 2 suggestion information 44r6, and the setting 1 suggestion information 44r7 is set. The ending effect pattern A13 is actually advantageous information in the case of the setting 6. The ending effect pattern A14 is actually advantageous information in the case of setting 5. The ending effect pattern A15 is actually advantageous information in the case of setting 4. The ending effect pattern A16 is actually advantageous information in the case of setting 3. The ending effect pattern A17 is actually advantageous information in the case of setting 2. The ending effect pattern A18 is advantageous information when the setting 1 is actually set.

As described above, the ending effect pattern A1 to the ending effect pattern A18 are set so that advantageous advantageous information is easily displayed as the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the jackpot increases. As the advantageous information, not only the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 to the setting 1 suggestion information 44r7 but also the first privilege video 44n1 to the sixth privilege video 44n6 may be used. For example, in the case of the ending effect pattern A1, by displaying auxiliary information (see FIG. 135 (j)) such as "Did you understand the setting now?" In the first first privilege video 44n1, suggesting the setting 6 immediately before. It can be suggested that the information 44r2 is correct information. Further, for example, in the case of the ending effect pattern A15, the setting 4 displayed at the end of the setting suggestion image is displayed by displaying auxiliary information such as "Did you understand the setting now?" In the final third privilege video 44n3. It can be suggested that the suggestion information 44r4 is correct information.

In the following, with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136, a display mode of the ending effect when the 16R probability variation jackpot of Special FIG. 2 is won will be described. FIG. 135 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of the ending effect. FIG. 136 is a diagram illustrating another display mode of the ending effect.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the 16R probability variation jackpot is 51 to 60 times and the ending time corresponding image (30 seconds) is the ending effect pattern A1, the third symbol display device 42 indicates (a) the next game state. Information 44w → (b) Card removal forgetting prevention information 44y → (c) Setting effect suggestion information 44r1 (For example, character information “How many settings are there ...”. The same applies hereinafter.) → (d) Setting 6 Suggestion information 44r2 (For example, the character information "setting 6 !?". The same shall apply hereinafter.) → (j) The first privilege image 44n1 → (k) The second privilege image 44n2 is displayed in this order. After that, the screen returns to the normal screen showing the jackpot combination at the time of the jackpot winning shown in (o), and the variable display of the symbol is restarted. The same applies to (o) in the display mode of other ending effect patterns. Further, in the case of the ending effect pattern A2, the third symbol display device 42 has (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal forgetting prevention information 44y → (c) setting effect suggestion information 44r1 → (d). ) Setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 → (e) Setting 5 suggestion information 44r3 (for example, character information such as “not setting 5 !?”. The same shall apply hereinafter.) → (j) The first privilege video 44n1 is displayed in this order. Further, in the case of the ending effect pattern A3, the third symbol display device 42 has (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal forgetting prevention information 44y → (c) setting effect suggestion information 44r1 → (d). ) Setting 6 Suggested information 44r2 → (e) Setting 5 Suggested information 44r3 → (f) Setting 4 Suggested information 44r4 (for example, character information such as “not setting 4 !?”. The same shall apply hereinafter).

As a result, when the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the 16R probability variation jackpot in Special Figure 2 is 61 to 70 times, if the ending effect pattern A1, the player receives a suggestion that the pachinko machine 10 may be set to 6. Therefore, it is useful information for the player who actually plays the game in the setting 6, and if the ending effect pattern A2, the player receives a suggestion that the pachinko machine 10 may be the setting 5, so that the pachinko machine 10 may actually be set 5. It will be useful information for the player who plays the game in the setting 5, and if the ending effect pattern A3, the player receives a suggestion that this pachinko machine 10 may be the setting 4, so the actual setting 4 is used. It is also useful information for the players who play the game.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the 16R probability variation jackpot is 61 to 70 and the ending time corresponding image (35 seconds) is the ending effect pattern A4, the third symbol display device 42 indicates (a) the next game state. Information 44w → (b) Card removal prevention information 44y → (c) Setting effect suggestion information 44r1 → (d) Setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 → (j) First privilege video 44n1, (k) Second privilege video 44n2 → ( l) The third privilege video 44n3 is displayed in this order. Further, in the case of the ending effect pattern A5, the third symbol display device 42 has (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal forgetting prevention information 44y → (c) setting effect suggestion information 44r1 → (d). ) Setting 6 Suggested information 44r2 → (e) Setting 5 Suggested information 44r3 → (j) First privilege video 44n1 → (k) Second privilege video 44n2 is displayed in this order. Further, in the case of the ending effect pattern A6, the third symbol display device 42 has (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal forgetting prevention information 44y → (c) setting effect suggestion information 44r1 → (d). ) Setting 6 Suggested information 44r2 → (e) Setting 5 Suggested information 44r3 → (f) Setting 4 Suggested information 44r4 → (j) The first privilege video 44n1 is displayed in this order. Further, in the case of the ending effect pattern A7, the third symbol display device 42 has (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal forgetting prevention information 44y → (c) setting effect suggestion information 44r1 → (d). ) Setting 6 Suggested information 44r2 → (e) Setting 5 Suggested information 44r3 → (f) Setting 4 Suggested information 44r4 → (g) Setting 3 Suggested information 44r5.

As a result, when the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the special figure 2 jackpot is 61 to 70 times, if the ending effect pattern A4, the player is suggested that this pachinko machine 10 may be set 6, so that it is actually It is useful information for the player who plays the game in setting 6, and if the ending effect pattern A5, the player receives a suggestion that this pachinko machine 10 may be setting 5, so actually setting 5 is used. It will be useful information for the player who plays the game, and if the ending effect pattern A6, the player receives a suggestion that the pachinko machine 10 may be the setting 4, so the player actually plays the game with the setting 4. It will be useful information for the player, and if the ending effect pattern A7, the player will be suggested that this pachinko machine 10 may be the setting 3, so that the player who actually plays the game with the setting 3 Is also useful and advantageous information. As a result, the player is more likely to obtain useful advantageous information than in the case where the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the special figure 2 jackpot is 51 to 60 times.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the jackpot is 71 to 80 times and the ending time corresponding image (40 seconds) is the ending effect pattern A8, the third symbol display device 42 displays (a) next game state suggestion information 44w. → (b) Card removal forgetting prevention information 44y → (c) Setting effect suggestion information 44r1 → (d) Setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 → (j) First privilege video 44n1 → (k) Second privilege video 44n2 → (l) The third privilege image 44n3 → (m) is displayed in the order of the fourth privilege image 44n4. Further, in the case of the ending effect pattern A9, the third symbol display device 42 has (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal forgetting prevention information 44y → (c) setting effect suggestion information 44r1 → (d). ) Setting 6 Suggested information 44r2 → (e) Setting 5 Suggested information 44r3 → (j) First privilege video 44n1 → (k) Second privilege video 44n2 → (l) Third privilege video 44n3. Further, in the case of the ending effect pattern A10, the third symbol display device 42 has (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal forgetting prevention information 44y → (c) setting effect suggestion information 44r1 → (d). ) Setting 6 Suggested information 44r2 → (e) Setting 5 Suggested information 44r3 → (f) Setting 4 Suggested information 44r4 → (j) First privilege video 44n1 → (k) Second bonus video 44n2. Further, in the case of the ending effect pattern A11, the third symbol display device 42 has (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal forgetting prevention information 44y → (c) setting effect suggestion information 44r1 → (d). ) Setting 6 Suggested information 44r2 → (e) Setting 5 Suggested information 44r3 → (f) Setting 4 Suggested information 44r4 → (g) Setting 3 Suggested information 44r5 (For example, the character information "Not setting 3 !?" Same.) → (j) The first privilege video 44n1 is displayed in this order. Further, in the case of the ending effect pattern A12, the third symbol display device 42 has (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal forgetting prevention information 44y → (c) setting effect suggestion information 44r1 → (d). ) Setting 6 Suggested information 44r2 → (e) Setting 5 Suggested information 44r3 → (f) Setting 4 Suggested information 44r4 → (g) Setting 3 Suggested information 44r5 → (h) Setting 2 Suggested information 44r6 (For example, "Not" 2 !? ”character information. The same applies below.) Is displayed in this order.

As a result, when the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the special figure 2 jackpot is 71 to 80 times, if the ending effect pattern A8, the player receives a suggestion that this pachinko machine 10 may be set 6, so that it is actually It is useful information for the player who plays the game in setting 6, and if the ending effect pattern A9, the player receives a suggestion that this pachinko machine 10 may be setting 5, so actually setting 5 is used. It will be useful information for the player who plays the game, and if the ending effect pattern A10, the player receives a suggestion that this pachinko machine 10 may be the setting 4, so the player actually plays the game with the setting 4. It will be useful information for the player, and if the ending effect pattern A11, the player will be suggested that this pachinko machine 10 may be set 3, so that the player who actually plays the game with the setting 3 Is also useful information, and if the ending effect pattern A12, the player is suggested that this pachinko machine 10 may be set 2, so it is also useful for the player who actually plays the game with setting 2. It will be advantageous information. As a result, the player is more likely to obtain useful advantageous information than in the case where the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the special figure 2 jackpot is 61 to 70 times.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the jackpot is 81 to 100 and the ending time corresponding image (45 seconds) is the ending effect pattern A13, the third symbol display device 42 is equipped with (a) next game state suggestion information 44w. → (b) Card removal forgetting prevention information 44y → (c) Setting effect suggestion information 44r1 → (d) Setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 → (j) First privilege video 44n1 → (k) Second privilege video 44n2 → (l) The third privilege image 44n3 → (m) the fourth privilege image 44n4 → (m) the fifth privilege image 44n5 is displayed in this order. Further, in the case of the ending effect pattern A14, the third symbol display device 42 has (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal forgetting prevention information 44y → (c) setting effect suggestion information 44r1 → (d). ) Setting 6 Suggested information 44r2 → (e) Setting 5 Suggested information 44r3 → (j) 1st bonus video 44n1 → (k) 2nd bonus video 44n2 → (l) 3rd bonus video 44n3 → (m) 4th bonus video It is displayed in the order of 44n4. Further, in the case of the ending effect pattern A15, the third symbol display device 42 has (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal forgetting prevention information 44y → (c) setting effect suggestion information 44r1 → (d). ) Setting 6 Suggested information 44r2 → (e) Setting 5 Suggested information 44r3 → (f) Setting 4 Suggested information 44r4 → (j) 1st privilege video 44n1 → (k) 2nd bonus video 44n2 → (l) 3rd bonus video It is displayed in the order of 44n3. Further, in the case of the ending effect pattern A16, the third symbol display device 42 has (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal forgetting prevention information 44y → (c) setting effect suggestion information 44r1 → (d). ) Setting 6 Suggested information 44r2 → (e) Setting 5 Suggested information 44r3 → (f) Setting 4 Suggested information 44r4 → (g) Setting 3 Suggested information 44r5 → (j) First privilege video 44n1 → (k) Second bonus video It is displayed in the order of 44n2. Further, in the case of the ending effect pattern A17, the third symbol display device 42 has (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal forgetting prevention information 44y → (c) setting effect suggestion information 44r1 → (d). ) Setting 6 Suggested information 44r2 → (e) Setting 5 Suggested information 44r3 → (f) Setting 4 Suggested information 44r4 → (g) Setting 3 Suggested information 44r5 → (h) Setting 2 Suggested information 44r6 → (j) First privilege video It is displayed in the order of 44n1. Further, in the case of the ending effect pattern A18, the third symbol display device 42 has (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal forgetting prevention information 44y → (c) setting effect suggestion information 44r1 → (d). ) Setting 6 Suggested information 44r2 → (e) Setting 5 Suggested information 44r3 → (f) Setting 4 Suggested information 44r4 → (g) Setting 3 Suggested information 44r5 → (h) Setting 2 Suggested information 44r6 → (i) Setting 1 Suggested information It is displayed in the order of 44r7 (for example, the character information "not setting 1 !?". The same applies hereinafter).

As a result, when the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the special figure 2 jackpot is 81 to 100 times, if the ending effect pattern A13, the player receives a suggestion that this pachinko machine 10 may be set 6, so that it is actually It is useful information for the player who plays the game in setting 6, and if the ending effect pattern A14, the player receives a suggestion that this pachinko machine 10 may be setting 5, so actually setting 5 is used. It will be useful information for the player who plays the game, and if the ending effect pattern A15, the player receives a suggestion that the pachinko machine 10 may be the setting 4, so the player actually plays the game with the setting 4. It will be useful information for the player, and if the ending effect pattern A16, the player will be suggested that the pachinko machine 10 may be set 3, so that the player who actually plays the game with the setting 3 will be asked. Is also useful information, and if the ending effect pattern A17, the player is suggested that this pachinko machine 10 may be set 2, so it is also useful for the player who actually plays the game with setting 2. It is advantageous information, and if it is the ending effect pattern A18, the player receives a suggestion that this pachinko machine 10 may be set 1, so that it is also useful information for the player who actually plays the game with setting 1. Become. As a result, the player is more likely to obtain useful advantageous information than in the case where the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the special figure 2 jackpot is 71 to 80 times.

As described above, the ending effect patterns A1 to the ending effect pattern A18 have a display mode in which advantageous advantageous information is easily displayed as the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the 16R probability variation jackpot in Special Figure 2 increases.

With reference to FIG. 134, with respect to the special figure 2 jackpot ending effect table B (8R probability variation jackpot in special figure 2), advantageous information becomes easier to be displayed as the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the jackpot increases. Explain the points.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the jackpot is 1 to 50, it is an immediate zone as in the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot, so for example, the next game state suggestion information 44w is set.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the jackpot is 51 to 60 times, the ending time is 20 seconds, and regardless of the set value of 1 to 6, the next game state suggestion information 44w and the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y are used. , The ending effect pattern B1 composed of the setting effect suggestion information 44r1 and the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 is set. The ending effect pattern B1 is actually advantageous information in the case of the setting 6.

If the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the jackpot is 61 to 70, the ending time is 25 seconds, and if the set value is 6, the next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, and the setting effect suggestion information The ending effect pattern B2 composed of 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, and the first privilege image 44n1 is set. If the set value is 1 to 5, it is composed of the next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, the setting effect suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, and the setting 5 suggestion information 44r3. The ending effect pattern B3 to be performed is set. The ending effect pattern B2 is actually advantageous information in the case of the setting 6. The ending effect pattern B3 is actually advantageous information in the case of the setting 5.

If the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the jackpot is 71 to 80, the ending time is 30 seconds, and if the set value is 6, the next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, and the setting effect suggestion information An ending effect pattern B4 composed of 44r1, setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, a first privilege image 44n1, and a second privilege image 44n2 is set. If the set value is 5, the next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, the setting effect suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, the setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, and the first privilege The ending effect pattern B5 composed of the video 44n1 is set. If the set values are 1 to 5, the next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, the setting effect suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, and the setting 5 suggestion information 44r3 are set. 4 The ending effect pattern B6 composed of the suggestion information 44r4 is set. The ending effect pattern B4 becomes advantageous information when the probability variation jackpot is actually set at setting 6. The ending effect pattern B5 is advantageous information when the setting 5 is actually set. The ending effect pattern B6 is actually advantageous information in the case of the setting 4.

If the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the jackpot is 81 to 100, the ending time is 35 seconds, and if the set value is 6, the next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, and the setting effect suggestion information An ending effect pattern B7 composed of 44r1, setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, a first privilege image 44n1, a second privilege image 44n2, and a third privilege image 44n3 is set. If the set value is 5, the next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, the setting effect suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, the setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, and the first privilege The ending effect pattern B8 composed of the image 44n1 and the second privilege image 44n2 is set. If the set value is 4, the next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, the setting effect suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, the setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, and the setting 4 suggestion. The ending effect pattern B9 composed of the information 44r4 and the first privilege video 44n1 is set. If the set values are 1 to 3, the next game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, the setting effect suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, and the setting 5 suggestion information 44r3 are set. The ending effect pattern B10 composed of the 4 suggestion information 44r4 and the setting 3 suggestion information 44r5 is set. The ending effect pattern B7 is advantageous information when the probability variation jackpot is actually set at setting 6. The ending effect pattern B8 is actually advantageous information in the case of the setting 5. The ending effect pattern B9 is actually advantageous information in the case of the setting 4. The ending effect pattern B10 is actually advantageous information in the case of setting 3.

In the ending effect pattern at the time of winning the 8R normal jackpot, the next game state suggestion information 44w is not the character information of "one more time" indicating that the next game state is a high probability state, but the next game state is a low probability state. It is the same as the ending effect pattern at the time of winning the 8R probability variation jackpot, except that it is the character information of "chance" indicating that it is (a low probability game state with 100 support states).

As described above, the ending effect pattern B1 to the ending effect pattern B10 are set so that advantageous advantageous information is easily displayed as the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the 8R probability variation jackpot increases. Comparing the number of fluctuations for each type of hit at the time of winning the big hit, the ending effect pattern A1 to the ending effect pattern A18 (16R probability variation ending effect at the time of winning the big hit) are the ending effect pattern B1 to the ending effect pattern B10 (8R). It is set so that advantageous advantageous information is more easily displayed than the ending effect at the time of winning the probable change jackpot.

In the following, with reference to FIG. 136, a display mode of the ending effect corresponding to the ending effect pattern B1 to the ending effect pattern B10 will be described when the 8R probability variation jackpot of the special figure 2 is won.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the jackpot is 51 to 60 times and the ending time corresponding image (20 seconds) is the ending effect pattern B1, the third symbol display device 42 is equipped with (a) next game state suggestion information 44w. → (b) Card removal forgetting prevention information 44y → (c) Setting effect suggestion information 44r1 → (d) Setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 is displayed in this order. As a result, when the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the special figure 2 jackpot is 51 to 60 times, if the ending effect pattern B1, the player receives a suggestion that this pachinko machine 10 may be set 6, so that it is actually This is useful information for the player who plays the game in setting 6.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the jackpot is 61 to 70 and the ending time corresponding image (25 seconds) is the ending effect pattern B2, the third symbol display device 42 is equipped with (a) next game state suggestion information 44w. → (b) Card removal forgetting prevention information 44y → (c) Setting effect suggestion information 44r1 → (d) Setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 → (h) First privilege video 44n1 is displayed in this order. Further, in the case of the ending effect pattern B3, the third symbol display device 42 has (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal forgetting prevention information 44y → (c) setting effect suggestion information 44r1 → (d). ) Setting 6 Suggestion information 44r2 → (e) Setting 5 Suggestion information 44r3 is displayed in this order.

As a result, when the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the special figure 2 jackpot is 61 to 70 times, if the ending effect pattern B2, the player receives a suggestion that this pachinko machine 10 may be set 6, so that it is actually It is useful information for the player who plays the game in setting 6, and if the ending effect pattern B3, the player receives a suggestion that this pachinko machine 10 may be setting 5, so actually setting 5 is used. It is useful information for the player who plays the game. As a result, the player is more likely to obtain useful advantageous information than in the case where the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the special figure 2 jackpot is 51 to 60 times.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the jackpot is 71 to 80 times and the ending time corresponding image (30 seconds) is the ending effect pattern B4, the third symbol display device 42 may display (a) next game state suggestion information 44w. → (b) Card removal forgetting prevention information 44y → (c) Setting effect suggestion information 44r1 → (d) Setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 → (h) First privilege video 44n1 → (i) Second privilege video 44n2 To. Further, in the case of the ending effect pattern B5, the third symbol display device 42 has (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal forgetting prevention information 44y → (c) setting effect suggestion information 44r1 → (d). ) Setting 6 Suggested information 44r2 → (e) Setting 5 Suggested information 44r3 → (h) The first privilege video 44n1 is displayed in this order. Further, in the case of the ending effect pattern B6, the third symbol display device 42 has (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal forgetting prevention information 44y → (c) setting effect suggestion information 44r1 → (d). ) Setting 6 Suggested information 44r2 → (e) Setting 5 Suggested information 44r3 → (f) Setting 4 Suggested information 44r4 are displayed in this order.

As a result, when the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the special figure 2 jackpot is 71 to 80 times, if the ending effect pattern B4, the player receives a suggestion that this pachinko machine 10 may be set 6, so that it is actually It is useful information for the player who plays the game in setting 6, and if the ending effect pattern B5, the player receives a suggestion that this pachinko machine 10 may be setting 5, so actually setting 5 is used. It is useful information for the player who plays the game, and if the ending effect pattern B6, the player receives a suggestion that the pachinko machine 10 may be the setting 4, so the game that actually plays the game with the setting 4 It will be useful and advantageous information for people. As a result, the player is more likely to obtain useful advantageous information than in the case where the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the special figure 2 jackpot is 61 to 70 times.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the jackpot is 81 to 100 and the ending time corresponding image (35 seconds) is the ending effect pattern B7, the third symbol display device 42 displays (a) next game state suggestion information 44w. → (b) Card removal forgetting prevention information 44y → (c) Setting effect suggestion information 44r1 → (d) Setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 → (h) First privilege video 44n1 → (i) Second privilege video 44n2 → (j) The third privilege video 44n3 is displayed in this order. Further, in the case of the ending effect pattern B8, the third symbol display device 42 has (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal forgetting prevention information 44y → (c) setting effect suggestion information 44r1 → (d). ) Setting 6 Suggested information 44r2 → (e) Setting 5 Suggested information 44r3 → (h) First privilege video 44n1 → (i) Second privilege video 44n2 is displayed in this order. Further, in the case of the ending effect pattern B9, the third symbol display device 42 has (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal forgetting prevention information 44y → (c) setting effect suggestion information 44r1 → (d). ) Setting 6 Suggested information 44r2 → (e) Setting 5 Suggested information 44r3 → (f) Setting 4 Suggested information 44r4 → (h) The first privilege video 44n1 is displayed in this order. Further, in the case of the ending effect pattern B10, the third symbol display device 42 has (a) next game state suggestion information 44w → (b) card removal forgetting prevention information 44y → (c) setting effect suggestion information 44r1 → (d). ) Setting 6 Suggested information 44r2 → (e) Setting 5 Suggested information 44r3 → (f) Setting 4 Suggested information 44r4 → (g) Setting 3 Suggested information 44r5.

As a result, when the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the special figure 2 jackpot is 81 to 100 times, if the ending effect pattern B7, the player receives a suggestion that this pachinko machine 10 may be set 6, so that it is actually It is useful information for the player who plays the game in setting 6, and if the ending effect pattern B8, the player receives a suggestion that this pachinko machine 10 may be setting 5, so actually setting 5 is used. It is useful information for the player who plays the game, and if the ending effect pattern B9, the player receives a suggestion that the pachinko machine 10 may be the setting 4, so the game that actually plays the game with the setting 4 It is useful information for the player, and if the ending effect pattern B10, the player receives a suggestion that the pachinko machine 10 may be the setting 3, so that it is useful for the player who actually plays the game with the setting 3. It will be advantageous information. As a result, the player is more likely to obtain useful advantageous information than in the case where the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the special figure 2 jackpot is 71 to 80 times.

As described above, the ending effect pattern B1 to the ending effect pattern B10 have a display mode in which advantageous advantageous information is easily displayed as the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the special 2 big hit increases. Comparing the number of fluctuations for each, the ending effect pattern A1 to the ending effect pattern A18 (ending effect at the time of winning the 16R probability variation jackpot) is the ending effect pattern B1 to the ending effect pattern B10 (ending effect at the time of winning the 8R probability variation jackpot). It is easier to display advantageous information.

As the advantageous information, not only the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 to the setting 3 suggestion information 44r5 but also the first privilege video 44n1 to the third privilege video 44n3 may be used. For example, in the case of the ending effect pattern B1, by displaying auxiliary information (see FIG. 136 (h)) such as "Did you understand the setting now?" In the first first privilege video 44n1, suggesting the setting 6 immediately before. It can be suggested that the information 44r2 is correct information. Further, for example, in the case of the ending effect pattern B8, the setting 5 displayed at the end of the setting suggestion image is displayed by displaying auxiliary information such as "Did you understand the setting now?" In the final second privilege video 44n2. It can be suggested that the suggestion information 44r3 is correct information.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 35th embodiment,
The counting function in the opening / ending time setting process of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that counts the number of fluctuations (number information related to the game) during the support game, and
A third symbol display device 42 capable of displaying the number of fluctuations during the support game, and
Ending effect execution that measures the ending time in the big winning opening opening / closing process of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that executes the jackpot ending effect (predetermined effect) based on the occurrence of the jackpot winning (occurrence of a specific event) during the support game. Function and
It is equipped with an ending time selection function in the opening / ending time setting process of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that selects the ending period in which the jackpot ending effect is performed based on the occurrence of the jackpot winning during the support game.
The length of the ending period changes according to the number of fluctuations during the support game,
The jackpot ending effect contains information that is more advantageous to the player as the length of the ending period is longer. As a result, the length of the jackpot ending effect selected based on the occurrence of the jackpot winning during the support game changes according to the number information related to the game. It is possible to improve the sex. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (L00), for example.

Further, the counting function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 counts numerical information related to the variable game displayed and executed on the third symbol display device 42. As a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game according to the counting status of the numerical information regarding the variable game displayed and executed on the third symbol display device 42. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (L01), for example.

Further, the counting function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 counts the number information that increases or decreases with the execution of the variable game displayed on the third symbol display device 42. As a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game according to the counting status of the number information that increases or decreases with the execution of the game displayed on the third symbol display device 42. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (L02), for example.

Further, the game board 30 having the game area 30a through which the game ball flows down, the start winning device 33b for Special Figure 2 in which the game ball flowing down the game area 30a can enter during the support state, and the game area 30a flow down. It is advantageous for the player based on the variable winning device 32 capable of entering the game ball, the detection switch for detecting the game ball entered in the start winning device 33b for special figure 2, and the detection of the game ball with the detection switch. The third symbol display device 42 includes a lottery function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that draws whether or not a big hit game state is generated, and the third symbol display device 42 is a predetermined lot based on a lottery whether or not to generate a big hit game state. Numerical information can be displayed along with the display effect. As a result, the entertainment of the game is improved according to the predetermined display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 42 based on the lottery for whether or not to generate the jackpot game state and the counting status of the number information. be able to. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (L03), for example.

Further, the counting function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 counts the number of times information regarding the variable game in which the lottery for whether or not to generate the big hit game state is performed, and the third symbol display device 42 generates the big hit game state. It is possible to display the number of times information together with a predetermined display effect based on a lottery of whether or not. As a result, the present invention relates to a predetermined display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 42 based on a lottery for whether or not to generate a jackpot game state, and a variable game in which a lottery for whether or not to generate a jackpot game state is performed. It is possible to improve the fun of the game according to the counting status of the number of times information. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (L04), for example.

Further, the ending effect execution function by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes the ending effect based on the occurrence of the jackpot winning during the support game based on the lottery by the lottery function. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game against the occurrence of a big hit winning during the support game based on the lottery by the lottery function. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (L05), for example.

Further, the ending time selection function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 selects an ending period in which the ending effect is performed based on the occurrence of the jackpot winning during the support game based on the lottery by the lottery function. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game depending on which period is selected as the ending period in which the ending effect is performed, based on the occurrence of the jackpot winning during the support game based on the lottery by the lottery function. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (L06), for example.

Further, when the result of the lottery in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is a big hit result, the big hit time (opening time, interval time, ending time) is at least according to the number of fluctuations of the symbol at the time when the big hit result is obtained. The opening / ending time setting processing function (opening / closing game time control function) of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the display control device that controls the display of the ending time corresponding image associated with the jackpot time (for example, the ending time). The jackpot ending display processing function (image display control function) of the CPU 521 of the 45 CPU 521 is provided, and the jackpot ending display processing function of the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the ending time compatible image according to the display time of the ending time compatible image. Advantageous information for the player (for example, setting information in a pachinko machine with settings) is displayed therein. As a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the jackpot round game state according to the display time of the jackpot time corresponding image. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (L07), for example.

Further, the jackpot ending display processing function (image display control function) of the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays a setting suggestion effect image having a longer display time as the ending time is longer, and the longer the display time of the setting suggestion effect image is, the more advantageous. Display various setting information. As a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the jackpot round game state according to the length of the display time of the jackpot time corresponding image. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (L06) (L10), for example.

Further, the opening / ending time setting processing function (opening / closing game time control function) of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is an odd numbered symbol other than 7 or 7 for the type of symbol at the time when the jackpot result is obtained. The jackpot time is changed according to the type (type such as whether it is an even numbered symbol) and the number of fluctuations (type such as whether it is the first half (1 to 50 times) or the second half (51 to 100 times)). As a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the jackpot round game state according to the type of the symbol and the number of fluctuations at the time when the jackpot result is obtained. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (L14), for example.

Further, in the opening / ending time setting processing function (opening / closing game time control function) of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, the symbol type is the first type (for example, an odd symbol or an even symbol excluding 7 in special figure 2). In some cases, the jackpot time (for example, the ending time) can be changed to the first time (for example, 20 seconds with the number of fluctuations of 51 to 60 times in the latter half), and the type of the symbol is the second type (for example). When it is "7" in the special figure 2), the jackpot time (for example, the ending time) can be changed to the second time (for example, 30 seconds with the number of fluctuations of 51 to 60 times in the latter half) longer than the first time. It is possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the jackpot round game state according to the length of the jackpot time that changes depending on the type of symbol at the time of the jackpot result and the number of fluctuations. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (L15), for example.

Further, in the opening / ending time setting processing function (opening / closing game time control function) of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, the state in which the lottery result is more likely to be a big hit result than in the normal game state is a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times). The jackpot time (for example, the ending time) is changed in the jackpot round gaming state transitioned from the number-cutting high-probability gaming state that continues until it becomes. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the jackpot round gaming state when the jackpot result is won in the multiple-cut high-probability gaming state. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (L16), for example.

Further, in the opening / ending time setting processing function (opening / closing game time control function) of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, the type of the symbol is the first type (for example, an odd symbol or an even symbol excluding 7 in the special figure 2). Even in a certain case, if the number of fluctuations digested out of the predetermined number of fluctuations is larger than the remaining number of fluctuations (for example, 61 to 70 times, 71 to 80 times, 81 to 100 times), the jackpot time (for example) For example, the ending time) is longer than the first time (for example, 20 seconds for 51 to 60 times) (for example, 25 seconds for 61 to 70 times, 30 seconds for 71 to 80 times, and 35 seconds for 81 to 100 times). ). As a result, when the number of fluctuations digested out of the predetermined number of fluctuations is larger than the remaining number of fluctuations, the interest of the jackpot round gaming state can be improved according to the remaining number of fluctuations. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (L17), for example.

Further, in the opening / ending time setting processing function (opening / closing game time control function) of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, the symbol type is the first type (for example, an odd symbol or an even symbol excluding 7 in special figure 2). Even in a certain case, if the number of fluctuations digested out of the predetermined number of fluctuations is larger than the remaining number of fluctuations (for example, 81 to 100 times), the jackpot time (for example, ending time) is set to the second time (for example, for example). It is changed to a longer time (for example, 35 seconds for 81 to 100 times) than 30 seconds for the number of fluctuations of 51 to 60 times in the latter half. As a result, even if the type of the symbol is not the second type but the first type, if the digested number of fluctuations is larger than the remaining number of fluctuations among the predetermined number of fluctuations, the remaining number of fluctuations remains. Depending on the number of fluctuations, it is possible to improve the fun of the jackpot round game state. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (L18), for example.

Further, it is provided with a setting change switch capable of stepwise determining the ease with which the result of the lottery becomes a big hit result by a plurality of set values, and the advantageous information is the setting information indicating the set value. As a result, depending on whether or not the setting information is displayed, it is possible to improve the fun of the jackpot round game state. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (L19), for example.

In the above-mentioned Example 35, only the setting suggestion image suggesting the setting information is included in the ending effect (ending time corresponding image), but in this embodiment, when the probability change jackpot or the normal jackpot is not specified at the time of winning the jackpot. It is different in that it includes a probability change suggestion image suggesting whether it is a probability change jackpot or a normal jackpot. Hereinafter, this point will be described with reference to FIGS. 137 and 138. FIG. 137 is a special drawing 2 jackpot ending effect table of the 36th embodiment. FIG. 138 is a special figure 2 jackpot ending effect table following FIG. 137.

In the special figure 2 big hit lottery table, when the hit type is 8R probability variable big hit and 8R normal big hit, the third symbol is an odd number symbol ("1" "3" "5" "9") excluding 7. It is selected from even-numbered symbols ("2", "4", "6", "8"). As a result, when the jackpot symbols are odd-numbered symbols or even-numbered symbols other than 7, it is difficult for the player to understand whether the jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot at the time of winning the jackpot. When the third symbol is "7", it is clearly shown that it is a probability variation jackpot because it is only a 16R probability variation jackpot. In the following, the 8R probable jackpot that does not specify whether it is a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot in this embodiment is referred to as an "unspecified 8R probabilistic jackpot", and the 8R normal jackpot that does not clearly indicate whether it is a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot is "unspecified 8R normal". Call it a "big hit".

As shown in FIG. 137, when the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the unspecified 8R probability variation jackpot is 1 to 50 times, unlike the above-mentioned Example 35, the manufacturer information 44x is set instead of the next game state suggestion information 44w. To. This is the same for the following ending effect patterns C1 to C10.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the unspecified 8R probability variation jackpot is 51 to 60 times, the ending time is 20 seconds, and when the set value is 1 to 6, the setting suggestion effect image is included as in the ending effect pattern B1. However, the ending effect pattern C1 that does not include the probabilistic effect suggestion image is set.

If the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the unspecified 8R probability variation jackpot is 61 to 70 times, the ending time is 25 seconds, and if the set value is 6, the manufacturer information 44x and the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y are set. The ending effect pattern C2 is composed of the effect suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, and the probabilistic effect suggestion information 44s1 that suggests or informs whether the jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot. Set. In the ending effect pattern C2, the player cannot understand whether the jackpot is probable or normal. The ending effect pattern C2 does not include advantageous information regarding whether this is a probabilistic jackpot or a normal jackpot. When the set value is 1 to 5, the ending effect pattern C3 including the setting suggestion effect image but not including the probabilistic effect suggestion image is set as in the ending effect pattern B3.

If the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the unspecified 8R probability variation jackpot is 71 to 80 times, the ending time is 30 seconds, and if the set value is 6, the manufacturer information 44x and the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y are set. The ending effect pattern C4 composed of the effect suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, the probability change effect suggestion information 44s1, and the probability change suggestion information 44s2 suggesting or notifying that the jackpot is a probability change jackpot is set. .. If the set value is 5, the game state suggestion information 44w, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, the setting effect suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, the setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, and the probability variation effect suggestion information. The ending effect pattern C5 composed of 44s1 is set. If the set values are 1 to 4, the ending effect pattern C6 is set, which includes the setting suggestion effect image but does not include the probabilistic effect suggestion image, as in the ending effect pattern B6. The ending effect pattern C4 becomes advantageous information when the jackpot is actually a probability variation jackpot.

If the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the jackpot is 81 to 100, the ending time is 35 seconds, and if the set value is 6, the manufacturer information 44x, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, and the setting effect suggestion information 44r1. , Setting 6 The ending effect pattern C7 composed of the suggestion information 44r2, the probability variation effect suggestion information 44s1, the probability variation suggestion information 44s2, and the first privilege image 44n1 is set. If the set value is 5, the manufacturer information 44x, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, the setting effect suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, the setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, and the probability variation effect suggestion information 44s1 And the ending effect pattern C8 composed of the probability change suggestion information 44s2 are set. If the set value is 4, the manufacturer information 44x, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, the setting effect suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, the setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, and the setting 4 suggestion information 44r4. And the ending effect pattern C9 composed of the probability variation effect suggestion information 44s1 are set. If the set values are 1 to 3, the ending effect pattern C10 is set, which includes the setting suggestion effect image but does not include the probabilistic effect suggestion image, as in the ending effect pattern B10. The ending effect patterns C7 and C8 are advantageous information when the jackpot is actually a probability variation jackpot.

As described above, the ending effect pattern C1 to the ending effect pattern C10 include not only the setting suggestion information but also the probability change suggestion information as advantageous information, and it is advantageous as the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the unspecified 8R probability change jackpot increases. It is set so that advantageous information (probability change suggestion information 44s2) can be easily selected.

As shown in FIG. 138, when the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the unspecified 8R normal jackpot is 1 to 50, the manufacturer information 44x is set as in the ending effect pattern at the time of winning the unspecified 8R probability variable jackpot. ..

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the unspecified 8R normal jackpot is 51 to 60 times, the ending time is 20 seconds, and when the set value is 1 to 6, the ending is the same ending effect pattern as the ending effect pattern C1. The effect pattern D1 is set.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the unspecified 8R normal jackpot is 61 to 70 times, the ending time is 25 seconds, and if the set value is 6, the same ending effect pattern D2 as the ending effect pattern C2 is set. When the set value is 1 to 5, the same ending effect pattern D3 as the ending effect pattern C3 is set.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the unspecified 8R probability variation jackpot is 71 to 80 times, the ending time is 30 seconds, and if the set value is 6, the same ending effect pattern D4 as the ending effect pattern C4 is set. If the set value is 5, the same ending effect pattern D5 as the ending effect pattern C5 is set. If the set value is 1 to 4, the same ending effect pattern D6 as the ending effect pattern C6 is set. In the ending effect pattern C4, the information is advantageous when the jackpot is actually a probability variation jackpot, but in the ending effect pattern D4, the jackpot is actually a normal jackpot, so it is not advantageous information.

If the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the jackpot is 81 to 100, the ending time is 35 seconds, and if the set value is 6, the manufacturer information 44x, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, and the setting effect suggestion information 44r1. , Setting 6 Suggestion information 44r2, probability variation effect suggestion information 44s1, probability variation suggestion information 44s2, and normal suggestion information 44s3 suggesting or notifying that the jackpot is a normal jackpot are set. To. If the set value is 5, the same ending effect pattern D8 as the ending effect pattern C8 is set. If the set value is 4, the same ending effect pattern D9 as the ending effect pattern C9 is set. If the set values are 1 to 3, the same ending effect pattern D10 as the ending effect pattern C10 is set. The ending effect pattern D7 becomes advantageous information when the jackpot is actually a probability variation jackpot.

As described above, the ending effect pattern D1 to the ending effect pattern D10 include not only the setting suggestion information but also the probability change suggestion information and the normal suggestion information as advantageous information, and the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the unspecified 8R probability change jackpot is large. It is set so that advantageous advantageous information (usually suggestive information 44s3) can be easily selected.

Hereinafter, the display mode of the ending effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 and 140. FIG. 139 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of the ending effect. FIG. 140 is a diagram illustrating another display mode of the ending effect.

First, with reference to FIG. 139, a display mode of the ending effect corresponding to the ending effect patterns C1 to C10 will be described when the 8R probability variation jackpot of the unspecified special figure 2 is won.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the unspecified probability change jackpot is 51 to 60 times and the ending time corresponding image (20 seconds) is the ending effect pattern C1, the third symbol display device 42 indicates (a) the manufacturer. Information 44x → (b) Card removal forgetting prevention information 44y → (c) Setting effect suggestion information 44r1 → (d) Setting 6 Suggestion information 44r2 is displayed in this order. In this way, when the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the unspecified probabilistic jackpot is 51 to 60 times, the ending effect pattern C1 is beneficial to the player regarding whether the probabilistic jackpot or the normal jackpot is actually a probabilistic jackpot. There is no favorable information.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the unspecified probability change jackpot is 61 to 70 times and the ending time corresponding image (25 seconds) is the ending effect pattern C2, the third symbol display device 42 indicates (a) the manufacturer. Information 44x → (b) Card removal forgetting prevention information 44y → (c) Setting effect suggestion information 44r1 → (d) Setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 → (h) Probability change effect suggestion information 44s1 (For example, whether the jackpot is a probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot) It is displayed in the order of "probability, normal kana ...", which suggests that an effect of suggesting or notifying is performed. Further, in the case of the ending effect pattern C3, the third symbol display device 42 is set to (a) manufacturer information 44x → (b) card removal forgetting prevention information 44y → (c) setting effect suggestion information 44r1 → (d). 6 Suggestion information 44r2 → (e) Setting 5 Suggestion information 44r3 is displayed in this order. In this way, even when the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the unspecified probability change jackpot is 61 to 70 times, in the ending effect patterns C2 and C3, the player regarding whether the probability variation jackpot or the normal jackpot is actually a probability variation jackpot. There is no useful information in.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the unspecified probability change jackpot is 71 to 80 times and the ending time corresponding image (30 seconds) is the ending effect pattern C4, the third symbol display device 42 indicates (a) the manufacturer. Information 44x → (b) Card removal forgetting prevention information 44y → (c) Setting effect suggestion information 44r1 → (d) Setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 → (h) Probability change effect suggestion information 44s1 → (i) Probability change suggestion information 44s2 (for example, the relevant It is displayed in the order of "probability change !?") that suggests or notifies that the jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot. Further, in the case of the ending effect pattern C5, (a) manufacturer information 44x → (b) card removal forgetting prevention information 44y → (c) setting effect suggestion information 44r1 → (d) setting on the third symbol display device 42. 6 Suggested information 44r2 → (e) Setting 5 Suggested information 44r3 → (h) Probability variation effect Suggested information 44s1 is displayed in this order. Further, in the case of the ending effect pattern C6, the third symbol display device 42 is set to (a) manufacturer information 44x → (b) card removal forgetting prevention information 44y → (c) setting effect suggestion information 44r1 → (d). 6 Suggested information 44r2 → (e) Setting 5 Suggested information 44r3 → (f) Setting 4 Suggested information 44r4 are displayed in this order.

As a result, when the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the special figure 2 big hit, which is not specified, is 71 to 80 times, in the ending effect pattern C4, the probability change suggestion information 44s2 suggests that the jackpot is a probability change jackpot. It will be useful information for the player regarding the probability change jackpot. In the ending effect patterns C5 and C6, even if the probabilistic jackpot is actually a probabilistic jackpot, there is no useful information for the player regarding whether the probabilistic jackpot or the normal jackpot.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the unspecified probability change jackpot is 81 to 100 times and the ending time corresponding image (35 seconds) is the ending effect pattern C7, the third symbol display device 42 indicates (a) the manufacturer. Information 44x → (b) Card removal prevention information 44y → (c) Setting effect suggestion information 44r1 → (d) Setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 → (h) Probability change effect suggestion information 44s1 → (i) Probability change suggestion information 44s2 → (j) ) The first privilege video 44n1 is displayed in this order. Further, in the case of the ending effect pattern C8, (a) manufacturer information 44x → (b) card removal forgetting prevention information 44y → (c) setting effect suggestion information 44r1 → (d) setting on the third symbol display device 42. 6 Suggestion information 44r2 → (e) Setting 5 Suggestion information 44r3 → (h) Probability change effect suggestion information 44s1 → (i) Probability change suggestion information 44s2 are displayed in this order. Further, in the case of the ending effect pattern C9, the third symbol display device 42 is set to (a) manufacturer information 44x → (b) card removal forgetting prevention information 44y → (c) setting effect suggestion information 44r1 → (d). 6 Suggestion information 44r2 → (e) Setting 5 Suggestion information 44r3 → (f) Setting 4 Suggestion information 44r4 → (h) Probability change effect suggestion information 44s1 is displayed in this order. Further, in the case of the ending effect pattern C10, the third symbol display device 42 is set to (a) manufacturer information 44x → (b) card removal forgetting prevention information 44y → (c) setting effect suggestion information 44r1 → (d). 6 Suggested information 44r2 → (e) Setting 5 Suggested information 44r3 → (f) Setting 4 Suggested information 44r4 → (g) Setting 3 Suggested information 44r5 are displayed in this order.

As a result, when the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the probabilistic jackpot in the unspecified special figure 2 is 81 to 100, if the ending effect patterns C7 and C8, the jackpot is a probabilistic jackpot according to the probabilistic suggestion information 44s2. Is suggested, which is useful information for the player regarding the probability change jackpot. In the ending effect patterns C9 and C10, even if the probabilistic jackpot is actually a probabilistic jackpot, there is no useful information for the player regarding whether the probabilistic jackpot or the normal jackpot.

Next, with reference to FIG. 140, a display mode of the ending effect corresponding to the ending effect patterns D1 to D10 will be described when the 8R normal jackpot of the unspecified special figure 2 is won.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the unspecified normal jackpot is 51 to 60 times and the ending time corresponding image (20 seconds) is the ending effect pattern D1, it is displayed in the same display order as the ending effect pattern C1 and is actually normal. Even if it is a jackpot, there is usually no useful information for the player regarding the jackpot.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the unspecified normal jackpot is 61 to 70 and the ending time corresponding image (25 seconds) is the ending effect pattern D2, the images are displayed in the same display order as the ending effect pattern C2. In the case of the ending effect pattern D3, it is displayed in the same display order as the ending effect pattern C3. Even if the ending effect patterns D2 and D3 are actually normal jackpots, there is no useful information for the player regarding the normal jackpot.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the unspecified normal jackpot is 71 to 80 times and the ending time corresponding image (30 seconds) is the ending effect pattern D4, the third symbol display device 42 has the ending effect pattern C4. It is displayed in the same display order. In the case of the ending effect pattern D5, the third symbol display device 42 displays the ending effect pattern D5 in the same display order as the ending effect pattern C5. In the case of the ending effect pattern D6, the third symbol display device 42 displays the ending effect pattern D6 in the same display order as the ending effect pattern C6. Even if the ending effect patterns D4 to D5 are actually normal jackpots, there is no useful information for the player regarding the normal jackpots.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the unspecified normal jackpot is 81 to 100 and the ending time corresponding image (35 seconds) is the ending effect pattern D7, the third symbol display device 42 indicates (a) the manufacturer. Information 44x → (b) Card removal forgetting prevention information 44y → (c) Setting effect suggestion information 44r1 → (d) Setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 → (h) Probability change effect suggestion information 44s1 → (i) Probability change suggestion information 44s2 → (j) ) The normal suggestion information 44s3 (for example, character information such as "not normal !?") that suggests or informs that the jackpot is a probable change is displayed in this order. Further, in the case of the ending effect pattern D8, the third symbol display device 42 displays the ending effect pattern D8 in the same display order as the ending effect pattern C8. In the case of the ending effect pattern D9, the third symbol display device 42 displays the ending effect pattern D9 in the same display order as the ending effect pattern C9. In the case of the ending effect pattern D10, the third symbol display device 42 displays the ending effect pattern D10 in the same display order as the ending effect pattern C10.

As a result, when the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the normal jackpot in the unspecified special figure 2 is 81 to 100 times, if the ending effect pattern D7, the normal suggestion information 44s3 suggests that the jackpot is a normal jackpot. Therefore, it is usually useful information for the player regarding the jackpot. In the ending effect patterns D8 to D10, even if the normal jackpot is actually a normal jackpot, there is no useful information for the player regarding the normal jackpot.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 36th embodiment, the lottery results are obtained for the first symbol variation processing function of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the variation display mode setting processing function of the CPU 262 of the sub control device 262. In the case of a jackpot result, whether or not the lottery result is in a high-probability gaming state in which the lottery result is more likely to be a jackpot result than in the normal gaming state in the next gaming state that occurs after the jackpot round gaming state is determined from the variable display. The advantageous information is not notified to the player until the display time, and the advantageous information may be information indicating whether or not the high probability gaming state is reached in the next gaming state (probability change suggestion information 44s2, normal suggestion information 44s3). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the jackpot round gaming state with respect to whether or not the next gaming state will be a high-probability gaming state. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (L20), for example.

In the above-described embodiment, the display images constituting the ending effect pattern corresponding to one hit type exclude the setting suggestion effect image whose display mode changes according to the number of fluctuations and the display image constituting the probability change suggestion effect image. , Although it was displayed in one display mode, there may be a plurality of display modes. Hereinafter, it will be described with reference to FIG. 141. FIG. 141 is a special drawing 2 jackpot ending effect table of the thirty-seventh embodiment.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 has, as the above-mentioned jackpot ending display processing function (image display control function), another information (for example, the next game included in the ending information 44j) different from the setting suggestion information and the probability change suggestion information in the ending time corresponding image. The state suggestion information 44w, the manufacturer information 44x, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, etc. can be displayed, and when a specific ending information (for example, the manufacturer information 44x) is displayed, the setting suggestion information or the probability change suggestion is displayed. Information can be difficult to display. Thereby, depending on whether or not a specific ending information (for example, manufacturer information 44x) is displayed, it is possible to improve the fun of the jackpot round gaming state.

Specifically, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the setting suggestion information and the probability change suggestion information as the ending information 44j is displayed for a longer time as the jackpot ending display processing function (image display control function) described above. I try to make it difficult. As a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the jackpot round game state according to the length of time that the ending information 44j is displayed.

More specifically, for example, the ending effect pattern corresponding to the above-mentioned unspecified 8R probability variable jackpot and unspecified 8R normal jackpot is set after the manufacturer information 44x and the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y are displayed. Although it was a pattern in which the suggestion effect image was displayed, in this embodiment, the manufacturer information 44x is omitted, and only the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y is displayed, and then the setting suggestion effect image is displayed. There is. That is, even in the ending effect pattern corresponding to one hit type, one information (for example, manufacturer information 44x) is displayed and one information (for example, manufacturer information 44x) is not displayed. be.

In this embodiment, the 8R probability variation jackpot of the unspecified special figure 2 has a value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 of 20 to 34 among the values of the jackpot symbol counter C2 (20 to 49) and a jackpot symbol counter C2. It is divided into those having a value of 35 to 49. The former ending effect pattern (where the value of C2 is 20 to 34) corresponds to the special figure 2 jackpot ending effect table C1 to C10 of Example 36 shown in FIG. 137. The details of the ending effect patterns E1 to E14 of the latter (values of C2 are 35 to 49) will be described below.

When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning is 1 to 50 times, the number of fluctuations at the time of winning is not the manufacturer information 44x, but the card is removed, unlike the ending effect pattern C1 described above. Forget-me-not information 44y is set. This is the same for the following ending effect patterns E1 to E14.

Unspecified 8R probability variation jackpot (value of jackpot symbol counter C2 is 35 to 49) If the number of fluctuations at the time of winning is 51 to 60, the ending time is 20 seconds, and if the set value is 6, forget to remove the card. The ending effect pattern E1 composed of the prevention information 44y, the setting effect suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, and the probability variation effect suggestion information 44s1 is set. If the set values are 1 to 5, the ending effect pattern E2 composed of the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, the setting effect suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, and the setting 5 suggestion information 44r3 is set. Will be done. The ending effect pattern E1 becomes advantageous information when the setting 6 is actually set. The ending effect pattern E2 becomes advantageous information when the setting 5 is actually set.

As described above, even if the 8R probability variation jackpot is not specified, when the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is 20 to 34 (the above-mentioned ending effect pattern C1), the manufacturer information 44x and the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y Since was set, the setting effect suggestion information 44r1 and the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 were only set in the remaining time, but when the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 was 35 to 49 (ending). In the effect patterns E1 and E2), since the manufacturer information 44x is omitted and only the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y is set, the setting suggestion effect image and the probability change suggestion effect longer than the ending effect pattern C1 in the remaining time. Images can be displayed. That is, even when the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the unspecified 8R probability variation jackpot is 51 to 60, when the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is 20 to 34 (ending effect pattern C1), it is set as advantageous information. 6 Suggestion information 44r2 was only obtained, but when the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is 35 to 49 (ending effect patterns E1 and E2), it is set as advantageous information. 6 Suggestion information 44r2 or Setting 5 Suggestion information 44r3. It is easy to obtain advantageous information.

Unspecified 8R probability variation jackpot (value of jackpot symbol counter C2 is 35 to 49) If the number of fluctuations at the time of winning is 61 to 70, the ending time is 25 seconds, and if the set value is 6, forget to remove the card. An ending effect pattern E3 composed of prevention information 44y, setting effect suggestion information 44r1, setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, probability variation effect suggestion information 44s1, and probability variation suggestion information 44s2 is set. If the set value is 5, the ending effect pattern is composed of the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, the setting effect suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, the setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, and the probability variation effect suggestion information 44s1. E4 is set. If the set value is 1 to 4, the ending is composed of the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, the setting effect suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, the setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, and the setting 4 suggestion information 44r4. The effect pattern E5 is set. The ending effect pattern E3 becomes advantageous information when the probability variation jackpot is actually set at setting 6. The ending effect pattern E4 becomes advantageous information when the setting 5 is actually set. The ending effect pattern E5 is advantageous information when the setting 4 is actually set.

That is, even when the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the unspecified 8R probability variation jackpot is 61 to 70, when the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is 20 to 34 (ending effect patterns C2 and C3), advantageous information As setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 or setting 5 suggestion information 44r3 was only obtained, but when the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is 35 to 49 (ending effect pattern E3 to E5), setting 6 suggestion as advantageous information. Information 44r2 and probability variation suggestion information 44s2, setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, or setting 4 suggestion information 44r4 can be obtained, and it is easy to obtain advantageous information.

Unspecified 8R probability variation jackpot (value of jackpot symbol counter C2 is 35 to 49) If the number of fluctuations at the time of winning is 71 to 80, the ending time is 30 seconds, and if the set value is 6, forget to remove the card. The ending effect pattern E6 composed of the prevention information 44y, the setting effect suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, the probability change effect suggestion information 44s1, the probability change suggestion information 44s2, and the first privilege image 44n1 is set. .. If the set value is 5, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, the setting effect suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, the setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, the probability change effect suggestion information 44s1, and the probability change suggestion information 44s2. The ending effect pattern E7 composed of and is set. If the set value is 4, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, the setting effect suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, the setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, the setting 4 suggestion information 44r4, and the probabilistic effect suggestion information The ending effect pattern E8 composed of 44s1 is set. If the set values are 1 to 3, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, the setting effect suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, the setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, the setting 4 suggestion information 44r4, and the setting 3 The ending effect pattern E9 composed of the suggestion information 44r5 is set. The ending effect pattern E6 becomes advantageous information when the probability variation jackpot is actually set in the setting 6. The ending effect pattern E7 becomes advantageous information when the probability variation jackpot is actually set at setting 5. The ending effect pattern E8 is advantageous information when the setting 4 is actually set. The ending effect pattern E9 becomes advantageous information when the setting 3 is actually set.

That is, even if the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the unspecified 8R probability variation jackpot is 71 to 80, when the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is 20 to 34 (ending effect patterns C4 to C5), advantageous information As setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 and probability change suggestion information 44s2, setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, or setting 4 suggestion information 44r4 was only obtained, but when the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is 35 to 49 (ending effect). In the patterns E6 to E9), setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 and probability change suggestion information 44s2, setting 5 suggestion information 44r3 and probability change suggestion information 44s2, setting 4 suggestion information 44r4, or setting 3 suggestion information 44r5 can be obtained as advantageous information. It is easy to obtain advantageous information.

Unspecified 8R probability variation jackpot (value of jackpot symbol counter C2 is 35 to 49) If the number of fluctuations at the time of winning is 81 to 100, the ending time is 35 seconds, and if the set value is 6, forget to remove the card. An ending composed of prevention information 44y, setting effect suggestion information 44r1, setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, probability change effect suggestion information 44s1, probability change suggestion information 44s2, first privilege image 44n1, and second privilege image 44n2. The effect pattern E10 is set. If the set value is 5, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, the setting effect suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, the setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, the probability change effect suggestion information 44s1, and the probability change suggestion information 44s2. And the ending effect pattern E11 composed of the first privilege video 44n1 are set. If the set value is 4, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, the setting effect suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, the setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, the setting 4 suggestion information 44r4, and the probabilistic effect suggestion information The ending effect pattern E12 composed of 44s1 and the probability change suggestion information 44s2 is set. If the set value is 3, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, the setting effect suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, the setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, the setting 4 suggestion information 44r4, and the setting 3 suggestion information The ending effect pattern E13 composed of 44r5 and the probability variation effect suggestion information 44s1 is set. If the set values are 1 to 2, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, the setting effect suggestion information 44r1, the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2, the setting 5 suggestion information 44r3, the setting 4 suggestion information 44r4, and the setting 3 The ending effect pattern E14 composed of the suggestion information 44r5 and the setting 2 suggestion information 44r6 is set. The ending effect pattern E10 becomes advantageous information when the probability variation jackpot is actually set at setting 6. The ending effect pattern E11 becomes advantageous information when the probability variation jackpot is actually set at setting 5. The ending effect pattern E12 becomes advantageous information when the probability variation jackpot is actually set in the setting 4. The ending effect pattern E13 is advantageous information when the setting 3 is actually set. The ending effect pattern E14 is advantageous information when the setting 3 is actually set.

That is, even if the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the unspecified 8R probability variation jackpot is 81 to 100, when the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is 20 to 34 (ending effect pattern C7 to C10), advantageous information As setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 and probability change suggestion information 44s2, setting 5 suggestion information 44r3 and probability change suggestion information 44s2, setting 4 suggestion information 44r4, or setting 3 suggestion information 44r5, but the jackpot symbol counter C2 When the value of is 35 to 49 (ending effect patterns E10 to E14), the setting 6 suggestion information 44r2 and the probability change suggestion information 44s2, the setting 5 suggestion information 44r3 and the probability change suggestion information 44s2, or the setting 4 suggestion information are advantageous information. It is possible to obtain 44r4 and probability variation suggestion information 44s2, setting 3 suggestion information 44r5, or setting 2 suggestion information 44r6, and it is easy to obtain advantageous information.

In this way, when the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the unspecified 8R probability variation jackpot is 81 to 100 and the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is 35 to 49 (ending effect patterns E1 to E14), the ending By omitting some of the information (omitting the manufacturer information 44x and displaying only the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y), the display time of the setting suggestion effect image and the probability change suggestion effect image is lengthened. , It is easier to obtain advantageous information than when the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is 20 to 34 (ending effect patterns C1 to C10). That is, the ease of obtaining advantageous information differs depending on whether the ending time-corresponding image starts from the manufacturer information 44x or the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y. It is possible to be interested in whether the information 44x or the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y starts.

Similarly, in the case of an unspecified 8R normal jackpot, advantageous information (setting suggestion information) is obtained depending on whether the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is 20 to 34 or the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is 35 to 49. , Usually suggestive information) can be obtained differently.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 37th embodiment, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 is different from the setting suggestion information in the setting suggestion effect image as the jackpot ending display processing function (image display control function). Information (for example, next game state suggestion information 44w included in the ending information 44j, manufacturer information 44x, card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, etc.) can be displayed. For example, when the manufacturer information 44x is displayed, setting suggestion is made. Information is difficult to display. Thereby, depending on whether or not the manufacturer information 44x is displayed, it is possible to improve the fun of the jackpot round gaming state. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (L12), for example.

Further, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 is less likely to display the setting suggestion information as the ending information 44j is displayed for a longer time as the jackpot ending display processing function (image display control function). As a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the jackpot round game state according to the length of time that the ending information 44j is displayed. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (L13), for example.

In the above-described embodiment, the display content (easiness of obtaining advantageous information) of the jackpot time corresponding image is displayed by differentizing the jackpot time such as the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time according to the number of fluctuations at the time of jackpot winning. Although it was different, the ball entry rate to the V region 32b may be different by making the jackpot time different according to the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the jackpot. Hereinafter, this point will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 144. FIG. 142 is a special figure 1 jackpot lottery table of the 38th embodiment. FIG. 143 is a special figure 2 jackpot lottery table. FIG. 144 is a time chart of the opening timing of the large winning opening opening / closing member and the V region opening / closing member.

Inside the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 of this embodiment, there are a region where the game ball can roll, an discharge port for discharging the game ball rolling in the area to the outside, and a large winning opening 32a. A V region 32b through which a game ball that has entered at a specific timing can pass among the game balls that have entered is provided. A large winning opening count switch is provided at the discharge port, and a V winning detection switch is provided at the V region 32b. The V region 32b is not limited to the above configuration, and is provided to the second variable winning device among the first variable winning device and the second variable winning device provided on the game board 30. There may be. In this case, the first variable winning device functions as an opening / closing member that opens / closes in each round in the jackpot round gaming state.

When the result of the lottery based on the ball entering the special figure 1 start winning device 33a or the special figure 2 starting winning device 33b is a big hit result, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is shifted to the big hit round gaming state and is a big hit. When a gaming ball that has entered the variable winning device 32 during the round gaming state enters the V region 32b, after the end of the jackpot round gaming state, for example, a high-probability gaming state or 100 with a support state of 100 fluctuations. It is configured as a so-called one-kind-two-kind mixed type gaming machine that shifts to a low-probability gaming state with a support state of one time.

Specifically, in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, the variation display of the symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the jackpot symbols based on the result of the lottery by the lottery function of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261. In this case, a jackpot round game state in which a jackpot round game is executed a predetermined number of times from an open state in which the variable winning device 32 can enter a game ball to a closed state in which the variable winning device 32 is difficult to enter a game ball. When a game ball that has entered the variable winning device 32 enters the V region 32b during the jackpot round gaming state, a lottery is performed for a predetermined period from the normal gaming state after the end of the jackpot round gaming state. It is equipped with a next game state setting processing function and a big winning opening opening / closing processing function (state transition function) for shifting to a high-probability gaming state in which the result of is likely to be a big hit result.

As shown in FIG. 142, the winning type in the special drawing 1 big hit lottery table stored in the ROM 502 of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is 16R, which is different from the 16R probability variation, 8R probability variation, and 8R normal in the above-described embodiments. (V probability), 8R (V probability), 8R Normal. Specifically, when the jackpot symbol is "7", it is easy to win a prize in the V region 32b (as will be described later, it is easy to win a V prize because the opening time is short. The same applies hereinafter), so the hit type is 16R (V probability). ). Even when the jackpot symbol is an odd number symbol other than "7", it is easy to win a prize in the V area 32b, so the hit type is set to 8R (V probability). When the jackpot symbol is an even number symbol, it is difficult to win a prize in the V region 32b (it is difficult to win a V prize because the opening time is long as described later. The same applies hereinafter), so the hit type is usually 8R. Further, in 16R (V probability), the opening time is set to 3 seconds, the interval time is set to 2 seconds, and the ending time is set to 35 seconds. In 8R (V probability), the opening time is set to 3 seconds, the interval time is set to 2 seconds, and the ending time is set to 25 seconds. 8R Normally, the opening time is set to 6 seconds, the interval time is set to 2 seconds, and the ending time is set to 25 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 143, the winning types in the special figure 2 big hit lottery table stored in the ROM 502 of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 are 16R (V probability), 8R (V probability), and 8R normal. , It depends on the number of fluctuations at the time of big hit. That is, the winning type in the special figure 2 jackpot lottery table is set to 16R (V probability) because it is easy to win the V region 32b if the number of fluctuations at the time of the jackpot is 1 to 50 when the jackpot symbol is "7". There is. If the number of fluctuations at the time of the jackpot is 51 to 100, it is difficult to win the V region 32b, so 16R is normal. In the case of odd-numbered symbols other than "7", if the number of fluctuations at the time of the jackpot is 1 to 50, it is easy to win the V region 32b, so it is set to 8R (V probability), but the fluctuation at the time of the jackpot If the number of times is 51 to 100, it is difficult to win the V region 32b, so 8R is normal. Further, when the jackpot symbol is an even number symbol, it is difficult to win the V region 32b regardless of the number of fluctuations at the time of the jackpot being 1 to 100 times, so 8R is normal. In 16R (V probability), the opening time is set to 3 seconds, the interval time is set to 2 seconds, and the ending time is set to 5 seconds. In 16R (normal), the opening time is 6 seconds, the interval time is 2 seconds, and the ending time is set. The time is set to 30 seconds to 45 seconds depending on the number of fluctuations. In 8R (V probability), the opening time is set to 3 seconds, the interval time is set to 2 seconds, and the ending time is set to 5 seconds. In 8R (normal), the opening time is 6 seconds, the interval time is 2 seconds, and the ending time is set to 5 seconds. It is set to 5 seconds, 20 seconds to 35 seconds depending on the number of fluctuations.

Further, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 opens and closes the large winning opening opening / closing member 32a1 that opens / closes the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 in the above-mentioned jackpot round gaming state in a predetermined large winning opening opening / closing pattern. In addition to the large winning opening opening / closing processing function (large winning opening opening / closing control function) that operates according to the state, the V area opening / closing member 32b1 that opens / closes the V area 32b in the big hit round gaming state is opened with a predetermined V area opening / closing pattern. It is equipped with a V-region open / close processing function (specific region open / close control function) that can be operated in a state and a closed state.

Further, the big winning opening opening / closing pattern and the V area opening / closing pattern have the following related surnames according to the number of time fluctuations resulting in the big hit. That is, when the number of fluctuations of the symbol at the time of the jackpot result (for example, the special figure 2 jackpot result) is the first number of fluctuations (for example, 1 to 50 rotations out of 100 rotations), the opening / closing pattern of the big winning opening is opened. The timing and the opening timing of the V region opening / closing pattern are easy to match, and the game ball that entered while the large winning opening opening / closing member 32a1 is open is easy to enter the V region 32b, and the big hit result (for example, the special figure 2 big hit result). ) Is the second number of fluctuations (for example, 51 to 100 rotations out of 100 rotations), the opening timing of the large winning opening opening / closing pattern and the opening timing of the V region opening / closing pattern. It is difficult for the game ball to enter the V region 32b while the large winning opening opening / closing member 32a1 is open. As a result, the rate of entering the V region 32b changes according to the number of changes in the symbol at the time when the jackpot result is obtained, so that the interest of the jackpot round game state can be improved.

The large winning opening opening / closing pattern and the V region opening / closing pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 144.

The horizontal axis of FIG. 144 indicates the elapsed time from the start time of the jackpot round gaming state. The start time of the jackpot round game state is the start time of the opening time. (A) shows the opening / closing timing of the large winning opening opening / closing member 32a1 in the V probability jackpot. That is, if the jackpot symbols are odd-numbered symbols other than "7" and "7" in Special Figure 1, or if the odd-numbered symbols are aligned except for "7" and "7" in Special Figure 2, the jackpot result is obtained. This is the opening / closing timing of the large winning opening opening / closing member 32a1 when the number of fluctuations at the time point is 1 to 50 rotations. (B) shows the opening / closing timing of the big winning opening opening / closing member 32a1 in the normal jackpot. That is, when the jackpot symbol is an odd numbered symbol excluding "7" and "7" of special figure 2 and the number of fluctuations at the time when the jackpot result is obtained is 51 to 100 rotations, special figure 1 and special figure. This is the opening / closing timing of the large winning opening opening / closing member 32a1 when the even-numbered symbols of 2 are aligned. (C) shows the opening / closing timing of the V region opening / closing member 32b1 in the probabilistic jackpot and the normal jackpot. The V-region opening / closing member 32b1 operates at the opening / closing timing shown in (c) regardless of whether the opening / closing timing of the large winning opening opening / closing member 32a is either (a) or (b).

At the opening / closing timing of the big winning opening opening / closing member 32a1 in the V probability big hit shown in (a), the big winning opening opening / closing member 32a1 has a big winning opening for 1 second after the opening time of 3 seconds has elapsed from the start of the big hit round gaming state. The opening / closing member 32a1 opens and then closes for 2 seconds. This is the first round. Since the opening time of this first round is a very short time of 1 second, it is practically difficult to put the game ball into the large winning opening 32a.

The large winning opening opening / closing member 32a1 is opened 6 seconds after the start, and then for a maximum of 30 seconds (in this embodiment, assuming that the game ball is normally fired, 10 seconds (until 16 seconds after the start). )) Continue to open and close for 2 seconds 16 seconds after the start. This is the second round. This second round ends if 10 game balls can be won in the large winning opening 32a within the maximum opening time. The time until the player can win 10 game balls in the large winning opening 32a depends on the operation mode of the player and the performance of the game ball launcher, but at least 10 from the start of the second round. It takes about a second.

At the opening / closing timing of the V region opening / closing member 32b1 shown in (c), the V region opening / closing member 32b1 continues to close until 6 seconds after the start of the jackpot, opens for 2 seconds 6 seconds after the start of the jackpot, and then continues to close. .. That is, the opening timing of the large winning opening opening / closing member 32a1 in the V probability jackpot shown in (a) is the V shown in (c) in 2 seconds from 7 seconds to 9 seconds after the start of the opening time of the second loud. It coincides with the opening timing of the region opening / closing member 32b1. As a result, if the game ball is continuously fired from the start of the jackpot round game state, the game ball can be won in the V region 32b at the timing of the first half of the second round.

At the opening / closing timing of the big winning opening opening / closing member 32a1 in the normal big hit shown in (b), the big winning opening opening / closing member 32a1 opens / closes the big winning opening for 1 second after the opening time of 6 seconds has elapsed from the start of the big hit round gaming state. The member 32a1 opens and then closes for 2 seconds. This is the first round. Next, the large winning opening opening / closing member 32a1 is opened 9 seconds after the start, then continues to be opened for a maximum of 10 seconds (until 19 seconds after the start), and is closed for a maximum of 19 seconds after the start for 2 seconds. This is the second round. The opening / closing timing of the V region opening / closing member 32b1 shown in (c) is the same opening / closing timing as described above. That is, the opening timing of the large winning opening opening / closing member 32a1 in the V probability jackpot shown in (a) does not coincide with the opening timing of the V region opening / closing member 32b1 shown in (c). As a result, even if the game ball is continuously fired from the start of the jackpot round game state, the game ball cannot be won in the V region 32b.

As a result, if the jackpot symbols are odd-numbered symbols other than "7" and "7" in Special Figure 1, or if the odd-numbered symbols are aligned except for "7" and "7" in Special Figure 2, and the jackpot result is obtained. When the number of fluctuations at the time of the change is 1 to 50 rotations, the big winning opening opening / closing member 32a1 is being opened (for example, 1 second to 3 seconds after the start of the second round, that is, the start of the big hit round gaming state. In the period from 7 seconds to 9 seconds later), it becomes easy to win the game ball in the V region 32b. In addition, if the jackpot symbols are odd-numbered symbols other than "7" and "7" in special figure 2 and the number of fluctuations at the time when the jackpot result is obtained is 51 to 100 rotations, special figure 1 and special figure. When the even-numbered symbols of 2 are aligned, it becomes difficult to win the game ball in the V region 32b while the large winning opening opening / closing member 32a1 is open.

Next, the control process of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 145 and 146. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing a normal process by the main control device 261. FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the V winning area opening / closing process by the main control device 261.

As shown in FIG. 145, in the normal process of this embodiment, in addition to the opening / ending time setting process of step S205A described above, the V region opening / closing process is performed in step S206A.

In the V region opening / closing process shown in FIG. 146, in step S4201, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the round start flag is turned on. If the round start flag is turned on, the process proceeds to step S4202, otherwise the process ends.

In step S4202, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 reads the opening start time of the V region opening / closing member 42b1 and proceeds to step S4203. As described above, the opening start time of the V region opening / closing member 42b1 is 6 seconds after the start of the jackpot round gaming state. In step S4203, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 starts measuring the opening start time of the V region opening / closing member 42b1 by the timer, and proceeds to step S4204.

In step S4204, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the opening timing of the V region opening / closing member 42b1 has been reached. If it is the opening timing of the V region opening / closing member 42b1, the process proceeds to step S4205, otherwise the process ends. In step S4205, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 supplies electric power to the drive mechanism that drives the V region opening / closing member 42b1 (for example, excites the solenoid) to open the V region 42b. The opening time of the V region 42b is measured by the timer described above.

In step S4206, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the closing timing of the V region opening / closing member 42b1 has been reached. If it is the closing timing of the V region opening / closing member 42b1, the process proceeds to step S4207, and if not, the present process is terminated. In step S4207, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 stops the supply of electric power to the drive mechanism described above, and closes the V region 42b. This ends this process.

In this embodiment, the winning period of the V region 42b is provided during the first round (for example, the second round described above) in which the game ball can be substantially entered into the large winning opening 42a. However, it may be provided during a round after the first round in which the game ball can be substantially inserted into the large winning opening 42a. In this case, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines in step S4201 whether or not the round start flag (flag indicating the start of the jackpot round gaming state) is on, but instead determines each round (for example, the second round). It may be determined whether or not the flag indicating the start of the subsequent predetermined round) is on.

Further, in this embodiment, the winning period of the V region 42b is provided during the opening time of the large winning opening 32a, but the V region 42b is provided in a variable winning device different from the variable winning device 32. May be provided during at least a part of the winning period of the V region 42b during the closing time of the large winning opening 32a (that is, during the interval time).

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 38th embodiment, the counting function in the opening / ending time setting process of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 for counting the number of fluctuations (number information related to the game) during the support state is used. A third symbol display device 42 capable of displaying the number of fluctuations during the support state, and a CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that executes an opening effect (predetermined effect) based on a jackpot winning (occurrence of a specific event) during the support state. Opening time measurement function (effect execution function) in the big winning opening opening / closing process, and opening / ending time setting process of CPU501 of the main control device 261 that selects the opening period in which the big hit opening effect is performed based on the big hit winning in the support state. The length of the selection function and the opening period differs depending on the number of fluctuations during the support state, and the probability of V winning probability change (advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player) is likely to occur according to the length of the opening period. Is different. As a result, the likelihood of V winning probability change changes according to the length of the jackpot opening effect selected based on the jackpot winning in the support state, so depending on the counting status of the number of fluctuations in the support state, It is possible to improve the fun of the game. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (M00), for example.

Further, the counting function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 counts the number of fluctuations related to the variable game in the support state displayed and executed on the third symbol display device 42. As a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game according to the counting status of the number of fluctuations related to the variable game in the support state displayed and executed on the third symbol display device 42. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (M01), for example.

Further, the counting function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 counts the number of fluctuations that increase or decrease with the execution of the variable game in the support state displayed on the third symbol display device 42. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game according to the counting status of the number of fluctuations that increases or decreases with the execution of the variable game displayed in the support state displayed on the third symbol display device 42. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (M02), for example.

Further, the game board 30 having the game area 30a through which the game ball flows down, the start winning device 33b for Special Figure 2 in which the game ball flowing down the game area 30a can enter during the support state, and the game area 30a flow down. A jackpot game state is generated based on the variable winning device 32 that allows the game ball to enter, the detection switch that detects the game ball that has entered the start winning device 33b for special figure 2, and the detection of the game ball by the detection switch. The main control device 261 has a lottery function in the CPU 501 that performs a lottery, and the counting function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 performs a lottery as to whether or not to generate a jackpot game state during the support game. Count the number of times information about the variable game to be played. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game according to the counting status of the fluctuation number information regarding the variable game in the support state in which the lottery for whether or not to generate the big hit game state is performed. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (M03), for example.

Further, the opening time measurement function (effect execution function) in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 performs an opening effect based on the occurrence of a jackpot winning in the support state based on the lottery by the lottery function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261. Run. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game against the big hit winning in the support state based on the lottery by the lottery function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (M04), for example.

Further, the selection function in the opening / ending time setting process of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 performs an opening effect based on the jackpot winning in the supported state based on the lottery by the lottery function of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261. Select the opening period. As a result, based on the fact that the jackpot winning in the support state based on the lottery by the lottery function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has occurred, the interest of the game depends on which period is selected as the opening period in which the opening effect is performed. Can be improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (M05), for example.

In addition to the configuration of the above-described embodiment, the V region 32b in which the game ball entered in the variable winning device 32 can enter and the result of the lottery by the lottery function of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 are the above-mentioned specific events. Based on the jackpot result indicating the occurrence, when the variable display of the symbol is stopped and displayed by the combination of the jackpot symbols, the variable winning device 32 is the game ball from the open state where the game ball can be entered. The game ball that enters the variable winning device 32 during the jackpot round game state, or shifts to the jackpot round game state in which the jackpot round game is executed a predetermined number of times until the closed state where it is difficult to enter the ball is in the V region 32b. After the end of the jackpot round gaming state, the next game of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that shifts to a high-probability gaming state in which the result of the lottery is more likely to be a jackpot result than the normal gaming state for a predetermined period. When the result of the lottery is a big hit result, at least according to the number of changes of the symbol at the time when the big hit result is obtained, the big hit round game state. Opening / ending time setting processing function (specific period control function) that changes the jackpot specific period (for example, opening time / ending time) that can be predetermined in the jackpot round game state, and the jackpot 32a of the variable winning device 32 in the jackpot round gaming state. The next game state setting processing function and the large winning opening of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 capable of operating the large winning opening opening / closing member 32a1 in the open state and the closed state in a predetermined large winning opening opening / closing pattern. The opening / closing processing function (large winning opening opening / closing control function) and the V area opening / closing member 32b1 that opens / closes the V area 32b in the jackpot round game state can be operated in the open state and the closed state in a predetermined V area opening / closing pattern. It is equipped with a V area open / close processing function (specific area open / close control function) of the CPU 501 of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 capable of being possible, and the number of fluctuations of the symbol at the time when the jackpot result (for example, the special figure 2 jackpot result) is the first number of fluctuations. In the case of (for example, 1 to 50 rotations out of 100 rotations), the opening timing of the large winning opening opening / closing pattern and the opening timing of the V region opening / closing pattern are likely to match, and the large winning opening opening / closing member 32a1 is opened. The ball is easy to enter the V region 32b, and the number of fluctuations of the symbol at the time when the jackpot result (for example, the special figure 2 jackpot result) is the second number of fluctuations (for example, 51 to 100 times out of 100 rotations). In the case of (turning), it is difficult to match the opening timing of the large winning opening opening / closing pattern with the opening timing of the V area opening / closing pattern, and the game ball entered during the opening of the large winning opening opening / closing member 32a1 is in the V region 32b. It is difficult to enter the ball. As a result, the rate of entering the V region 32b changes according to the number of changes in the symbol at the time when the jackpot result is obtained, so that the interest of the jackpot round game state can be improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (M06), for example.

Further, when the number of fluctuations of the symbol at the time of the jackpot result (for example, the special figure 2 jackpot result) is the first number of fluctuations (for example, 1 to 50 rotations out of 100 rotations), the jackpot specific period is the second. By different from the jackpot specific period (for example, opening time) in the number of fluctuations (for example, 51 to 100 rotations out of 100 rotations), the opening timing of the big winning opening opening / closing pattern and the opening timing of the V region opening / closing pattern are likely to match. Therefore, the game ball that has entered while the large winning opening opening / closing member 32a1 is open can easily enter the V region 32b. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the jackpot round gaming state by a simple control of differentiating the jackpot specific period that can be predetermined in the jackpot round gaming state. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (M07), for example.

Further, the opening / ending time setting processing function (specific period control function) of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 became at least a big hit result when the result of the lottery was a big hit result (for example, a special figure 2 big hit result). The type of symbol at the time (for example, whether it is an odd symbol including 7 or an even symbol) and the number of fluctuations of the symbol (for example, 1 to 50 rotations in the first half of 100 rotations, or 51 to 100 rotations in the latter half). Depending on (whether there is), the jackpot specific period including the opening time for notifying the start of the jackpot round game state and the interval time between each jackpot round game is changed, and the type of the symbol is specified in the first number of fluctuations. The jackpot specific period (for example, opening time) when the symbol (for example, an odd number including 7) and the first number of fluctuations (for example, 1 to 50 rotations in the first half of 100 rotations) is the specific symbol type. The opening timing of the big winning opening opening / closing pattern and the V region are different from the jackpot specific period (for example, the opening time) when the number of fluctuations is the second (for example, 51 to 100 rotations in the latter half of 100 rotations). It becomes easy to match the opening timing of the opening / closing pattern, and it becomes easy for the game ball that entered during the opening of the large winning opening opening / closing member 32a1 to enter the V region 32b. As a result, even if the type of the symbol at the time of the jackpot result is the same specific symbol, the ball entry rate into the V region 32b changes according to the number of fluctuations, so that the interest of the jackpot round game state can be improved. can. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (M08), for example.

If the number of fluctuations of the symbol at the time of the jackpot result (for example, the special figure 2 jackpot result) is the first number of fluctuations (for example, 1 to 50 rotations in the first half of 100 rotations), the jackpot specific period (for example). By making the opening time) shorter than the jackpot specific period in the second fluctuation number (for example, 51 to 100 rotations in the latter half of 100 rotations), the opening timing of the big winning opening opening / closing pattern and the opening of the V region opening / closing pattern It becomes easier to match the timing, and it becomes easier for the game ball that entered during the opening of the large winning opening opening / closing member 32a1 to enter the V region 32b. As a result, the hobby of the jackpot round gaming state can be improved by a simple control of shortening the jackpot specific period that can be predetermined in the jackpot round gaming state. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (M09), for example.

Further, the jackpot specific period is an opening time for notifying the start of the jackpot round gaming state. As a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the jackpot round game state by a simple control of shortening the opening time. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (M10), for example.

Further, as for the first number of fluctuations, the jackpot round gaming state shifts from the high-probability gaming state in which the lottery result is more likely to be a specific result than the normal gaming state until the predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) is reached. In the case of When the jackpot round gaming state shifts from the gaming state, the number of fluctuations digested out of the predetermined number of fluctuations is larger than the remaining number of fluctuations (for example, 51 to 100 rotations in the latter half of 100 rotations). As a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the jackpot round game state in that the smaller the number of fluctuations digested in the high-probability game state, the higher the ball entry rate into the V region 32b. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (M13), for example.

The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is the same as the above-mentioned Example 38, which is a one-kind and two-kind mixed type pachinko machine 10, but in the above-mentioned Example 38, the jackpot winning considered for changing the jackpot time is taken into consideration. The number of fluctuations of time is counted separately by the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the start winning device 33a for special figure 1 and the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the starting winning device 33b for special figure 2. However, in this embodiment, the number of fluctuations at the time of the big hit is the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the start winning device 33a for the special figure 1 and the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the starting winning device 33b for the special figure 2. The point of counting as a total with and is different. Hereinafter, this point will be described with reference to FIGS. 147 to 148.

FIG. 147 is a special figure 1 jackpot lottery table of the 39th embodiment, (a) shows a table referred to in a normal gaming state, and (b) shows a table referred to in a low probability support gaming state. FIG. 148 is a special figure 2 jackpot lottery table referred to in the low probability support gaming state. FIG. 149 is a special figure 2 jackpot lottery table referred to in a high-probability gaming state. FIG. 150 is a time chart of the opening timing of the large winning opening opening / closing member and the V region opening / closing member. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing an opening / ending time determination process by the main control device 261. FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing an opening / ending time determination process following FIG. 151. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing an opening / ending time determination process following FIG. 152.

The CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has the above-mentioned opening / ending time setting processing function (opening / closing game time control function), and when the result of the lottery is a big hit result, at least the number of fluctuations of the symbol at the time when the big hit result is obtained. It has a function to change the jackpot time that can be predetermined in the jackpot round game state according to the above.

The CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has, in this opening / ending time setting processing function, the number of fluctuations of the symbol based on the detection of the game ball by the operation port switch for the special figure 1 start winning device 33a, and the special figure 2 start winning device. It is provided with a function (variation number counting function (counting function)) of counting the total of the number of fluctuations of the symbol based on the detection of the game ball by the operation port switch for 33b as a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times). The CPU 501 of the main control device 261 uses this fluctuation number counting function (counting function) to change the symbol based on the detection of the game ball by the operation port switch for the special figure 1 start winning device 33a in the high probability gaming state. The display is performed the first variation number (for example, 10 times), and the variation display of the symbol based on the detection of the game ball by the operation port switch for the special figure 2 start winning device 33b is the second variation number (for example, 90 times). When it is performed (times), it is determined that the predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) has been reached.

In addition, the large winning opening opening / closing pattern and the V area opening / closing pattern are the number of fluctuations displayed based on the ball entering the special figure 1 starting winning device 33a at the time of a big hit and the ball entering the special figure 2 starting winning device 33b. It has the following related surnames according to the number of variable displays based on.

That is, when the variation display of the symbol based on the detection of the game ball by the operation port switch for the special figure 1 start winning device 33a at the time when the big hit result is obtained is within the first variation number (for example, 10 times), It is difficult for the opening timing of the large winning opening opening / closing pattern to match the opening timing of the V area opening / closing pattern, and it is difficult for the game ball that entered during the opening of the large winning opening opening / closing member 42a1 to enter the V region 32b. .. In addition, the change display of the symbol based on the detection of the game ball by the operation port switch for the special figure 2 start winning device 33b at the time when the big hit result is obtained is the second number of changes (for example, 1 if counted only by special figure 2). ~ 90 times. If it is within 11 to 100 times if the total count is with the special figure 1, the opening timing of the big winning opening opening / closing pattern and the opening timing of the V area opening / closing pattern are likely to match, and it is large. It makes it easier for a game ball that has entered while the winning opening opening / closing member 42a1 is open to enter the V region 32b. As a result, the ball entry rate to the V region 32b changes according to the number of changes in the symbol based on the ball entry to the special figure 1 start winning device 33a and the special figure 2 start winning device 33b at the time when the big hit result is obtained. It is possible to improve the fun of the high-probability gaming state or the support state.

Further, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has a fluctuation number counting function (counting function) in the opening / ending time setting process, in which the symbol changes based on the detection of the game ball by the operation port switch for the special figure 1 start winning device 33a. When the display does not result in a big hit within the first variation number (for example, 10 times), the variation display of the symbol based on the detection of the game ball by the operation port switch for the special figure 2 start winning device 33b is the second. Counting is started until the number of fluctuations (for example, 90 times) is reached. As a result, even if the fluctuation display based on the ball entering the special figure 1 start winning device 33a reaches the first number of fluctuations, the V region is corresponding to the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the special figure 2 starting winning device 33b. Since the ball entry rate to 32b changes, it is possible to improve the fun of the high-probability gaming state or the support state.

Further, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has a special game value and a special game value given when the change display of the symbol based on the detection of the game ball by the operation port switch for the special figure 1 start winning device 33a results in a big hit result. FIG. 2 The game value given when the variable display of the symbol based on the detection of the game ball by the operation port switch for the start winning device 33b is set to be different from the game value given when the big hit result is obtained. Specifically, the game value given when the special figure 1 start winning device 33a enters the ball does not include the probability change (V probability) jackpot, but the special figure 2 start winning device 33b triggers the ball. The game value given to is included in the probability variation (V probability) jackpot. As a result, the switching from the aim of entering the special figure 1 start winning device 33a to the aim of entering the special figure 2 starting winning device 33b causes superiority or inferiority in the game value that can be given as a result of the subsequent lottery. It is possible to improve the fun of the stochastic game state or the support state.

As shown in FIG. 147 (a), the special figure 1 big hit lottery table (low probability normal game state) is a normal big hit regardless of the type of the big hit symbol. When the jackpot symbol is "7", it is difficult to win a prize in the V region 32b, so the hit type is usually 16R. Even when the jackpot symbol is an odd number symbol other than "7", it is difficult to win the V area 32b, so the hit type is usually 8R. Even if the jackpot symbol is an even number symbol, it is difficult to win a prize in the V region 32b, so the hit type is usually 8R. However, in any of the jackpot types, when the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the special figure 1 start winning device 33a reaches 10 times while the support state is 100 times, the right of probability change is acquired as described above. different. 16R Normally, the opening time is set to 6 seconds, the interval time is set to 2 seconds, and the ending time is set to 35 seconds. 8R Normally, the opening time is set to 6 seconds, the interval time is set to 2 seconds, and the ending time is set to 25 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 147 (b), the special figure 1 big hit lottery table (low probability support game state) is also a normal big hit regardless of the type of the big hit symbol. When the jackpot symbol is "7", it is difficult to win a prize in the V region 32b, so 16R is normal. Even if the jackpot symbol is an odd number symbol other than "7", it is difficult to win the V area 32b, so 8R is normal. Even if the jackpot symbol is an even number symbol, it is difficult to win a prize in the V region 32b, so 8R is normal. In addition, in any of the jackpot types, when the number of fluctuations based on the entry into the start winning device 33a for Special Figure 1 reaches 10 times during the support state of 100 times, the right of probability change is acquired. The opening time is 6 seconds for both 16R and 8R, but the interval time and ending time differ depending on the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the jackpot. That is, 16 Normally, if the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the special figure 1 start winning device 33a at the time of the big hit is 1 to 10 times, the interval time is 2 seconds because it is in the period of the immediate continuous zone. The ending time is set to 5 seconds, but if the number of fluctuations is 11 or more, the interval time is 2 seconds and the ending time is set because it is originally a period for aiming to enter the starting winning device 33b for special figure 2. It is set to 35 seconds. 8R Normally, if the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the special figure 1 start winning device 33a at the time of the big hit is 1 to 10 times, the interval time is 2 seconds and the ending time is 2 seconds because it is in the immediate zone. However, if the number of fluctuations is 11 or more, the interval time is 2 seconds and the ending time is 25 seconds because it is originally a period for aiming to enter the start winning device 33b for special figure 2. It is supposed to be.

As shown in FIG. 148, the special figure 2 big hit lottery table (low probability support game state) has different hit types depending on the number of fluctuations at the time of big hit. When the jackpot symbol is "7", if the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the special figure 1 start winning device 33a reaches 10 at the time of the jackpot, it is easy to win the V region 32b, so the hit type is selected. Although it is set to 16R (V probability), if the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the start winning device 33a for Special Figure 1 does not reach 10 times at the time of the big hit, it is difficult to win the V area 32b, so the winning type is 16R. It is normal. Even if the jackpot symbol is an odd number symbol other than "7", if the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the special figure 1 start winning device 33a reaches 10 times at the time of the jackpot, it is easy to win the V region 32b. , The hit type is 8R (V probability), but if the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the start winning device 33a for special figure 1 does not reach 10 times at the time of the big hit, it is difficult to win the V region 32b. The hit type is 8R normal. Even if the jackpot symbol is an even number symbol, if the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the special figure 1 start winning device 33a reaches 10 times at the time of the jackpot, it is easy to win the V region 32b, so the hit type is 8R. Although it is set to (V probability), if the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the start winning device 33a for Special Figure 1 has not reached 10 times at the time of the big hit, it is difficult to win the V area 32b, so the hit type is usually 8R. It is supposed to be.

In addition, in the special figure 2 jackpot lottery table (low probability support game state), the opening time is set to 3 seconds for 16R (V probability) and 8R (V probability), and the opening time is set for 16R normal and 8R normal. Although it is set to 6 seconds, the interval time and ending time differ depending on the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the jackpot. That is, when the jackpot symbol is "7", the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the special figure 1 start winning device 33a at the time of the jackpot has reached 10 times, and the start for the special figure 2 at the time of the jackpot has been reached. If the number of fluctuations based on the entry into the winning device 33b is 1 to 40 times, the interval time is set to 2 seconds and the ending time is set to 5 seconds because it is in the immediate zone, but the special feature at the time of the big hit. If the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the start winning device 33b for FIG. 2 is 41 to 90 times, the interval time is set to 2 seconds and the ending time is set to 30 seconds because it is outside the period of the immediate continuous zone. Also. Even if the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the start winning device 33a for Special Figure 1 does not reach 10 at the time of the big hit, the interval time is set to 2 seconds and the ending time is set to 30 seconds. When the jackpot symbols are odd-numbered symbols and even-numbered symbols other than "7", the number of fluctuations based on the entry into the start winning device 33a for special figure 1 has reached 10 times at the time of the jackpot, and at the time of the jackpot. If the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the start winning device 33b for special figure 2 is 1 to 40 times, the interval time is set to 2 seconds and the ending time is set to 5 seconds because it is in the immediate zone. If the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the special figure 2 start winning device 33b at the time of the big hit is 41 to 90 times, the interval time is 2 seconds and the ending time is 20 seconds because it is outside the period of the immediate zone. It is supposed to be. Further, even when the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the start winning device 33a for Special Figure 1 has not reached 10 times at the time of the big hit, the interval time is set to 2 seconds and the ending time is set to 20 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 149, the special figure 2 jackpot lottery table (high probability gaming state) has different winning types depending on the type of jackpot symbol. When the jackpot symbol is "7", it is easy to win a prize in the V region 32b, so the hit type is set to 16R (V probability). When the jackpot symbol is an odd number symbol other than "7", it is easy to win a prize in the V area 32b, so the hit type is set to 8R (V probability). When the jackpot symbol is an even number symbol, it is difficult to win a prize in the V area 32b, so the hit type is usually 8R.

In addition, in the special figure 2 jackpot lottery table (high probability gaming state), the opening time is set to 3 seconds for 16R (V probability) and 8R (V probability), and the opening time is normally set to 6 seconds for 8R. However, the ending time differs depending on the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the jackpot. That is, when the jackpot symbol is "7", if the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the special figure 2 start winning device 33b at the time of the jackpot is 1 to 50 times, it is during the period of the immediate continuous zone. , The interval time is 2 seconds and the ending time is 5 seconds, but if the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the special figure 2 start winning device 33b at the time of the big hit is 51 to 100 times, the period of the immediate zone. Since it is outside, the interval time is 2 seconds and the ending time is 30 seconds. In the case of odd-numbered symbols and even-numbered symbols other than "7", if the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the special figure 2 start winning device 33b at the time of the jackpot is 1 to 50 times, the period of the immediate zone. Since the interval time is 2 seconds and the ending time is 5 seconds, if the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the special figure 2 start winning device 33b at the time of the big hit is 51 to 100 times, it is immediate. Since it is outside the continuous zone period, the interval time is 2 seconds and the ending time is 20 seconds.

The large winning opening opening / closing pattern and the V region opening / closing pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 150. The large winning opening opening / closing pattern and the V area opening / closing pattern of this embodiment are basically the same as the large winning opening opening / closing pattern and the V area opening / closing pattern shown in FIG. 144. The difference is the condition of the big winning opening opening / closing pattern of the V probability big hit and the condition of the big winning opening opening / closing pattern of the normal big hit. This point will be described below.

The opening / closing pattern of the big winning opening opening / closing member 32a1 in the V probability big hit shown in (a) is for special figure 1 when the big hit symbol is the symbol of special figure 2 in the low probability support state and the big hit result is obtained. If the number of fluctuations based on the entry into the start winning device 33a has reached 10 times, or if the game is in a high-probability gaming state, the jackpot symbols are odd-numbered symbols excluding "7" and "7" in Special Figure 2. Set in some cases. The opening / closing pattern of the jackpot opening / closing member 32a1 in the normal jackpot shown in (b) is the symbol of the special figure 2 when the jackpot symbol is the symbol of the special figure 1 or when the low probability support state is in effect, and the jackpot result. When the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the start winning device 33a for special figure 1 is 1 to 9 rotations, or if the game is in a high-probability game state, the jackpot symbols are even-numbered symbols in special figure 2. Set in some cases. (C) is an opening / closing pattern of the V region opening / closing member 32b1 in the V probability jackpot and the normal jackpot.

Similar to FIG. 144 described above, 7 seconds after the start of the jackpot round gaming state (that is, the start of the opening time) in the opening / closing pattern of the jackpot opening / closing member 32a1 in the V probability jackpot shown in (a) (this is the second round). 2 seconds from 9 seconds after the start (which corresponds to 3 seconds after the start of the second round) coincides with the opening timing of the V region opening / closing member 32b1 shown in (c). It is a possible period. In the opening / closing pattern of the large winning opening opening / closing member 32a1 in the normal jackpot shown in (b), there is no period corresponding to the opening timing of the V region opening / closing member 32b1 shown in (c).

In this way, during the low-probability support gaming state, the number of fluctuations based on the entry into the start winning device 33a for special figure 1 has reached 10 times when the big hit result is obtained even if the special figure 2 is a big hit. Only in the case, it is possible to easily win a game ball in the V region 32b, and even if it is a special figure 2 big hit, it is based on the ball entering the special figure 1 start winning device 33a when the big hit result is obtained. When the number of fluctuations has not reached 10 times, it is possible to make it difficult to easily win a prize in the V region 32b.

The opening / ending time setting process of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 to 153.

As shown in FIG. 151, in step S4300, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the jackpot result is due to the special figure 1. If it is a special figure 1 jackpot, the process proceeds to step S4301, otherwise (that is, if it is a special figure 2 jackpot), the process proceeds to step S4401 shown in FIG. 152.

In step S4301, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the time when the special figure 1 jackpot result is obtained is the low probability support gaming state. Whether or not the time when the jackpot result is obtained is the low probability support game state is determined by, for example, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 setting the low probability support state transition command in step S567 of the next game state setting process shown in FIG. At the same time, by setting the low probability support game status flag, it can be judged by the presence or absence of the flag. If it is not in the low-probability support gaming state (that is, in the low-probability normal gaming state), the process proceeds to step S4302 in order to refer to the special figure 1 jackpot lottery table (low-probability normal gaming state) shown in FIG. 147 (a). .. In the case of the low probability support game state, the process proceeds to step S4310 in order to refer to the special figure 1 jackpot lottery table (low probability support game state) shown in FIG. 147 (b).

In step S4302, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the first symbol is the third big hit (16R). If it is the third big hit, the process proceeds to step S4303, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4305. In step S4303, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the opening time to 6 seconds, the interval time to 2 seconds, and the ending time to 35 seconds in order to set the big winning opening opening / closing pattern of the 16R normal jackpot in the normal gaming state. do.

In step S4305, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the first symbol is the second jackpot (8R). If it is the second big hit, the process proceeds to step S4306, and if not, the process proceeds to step S4307. In step S4306, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the opening time to 6 seconds, the interval time to 2 seconds, and the ending time to 25 seconds in order to set the big winning opening opening / closing pattern of the 8R normal jackpot in the normal gaming state. do.

In step S4307, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the first symbol is the first jackpot (8R). If it is the first big hit, the process proceeds to step S4308, otherwise the process ends. In step S4308, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the opening time to 6 seconds, the interval time to 2 seconds, and the ending time to 25 seconds in order to set the big winning opening opening / closing pattern of the 8R normal jackpot in the normal gaming state. do.

When it is determined in step S4301 that the time when the special figure 1 jackpot result is obtained is the low probability support gaming state, in step S4310, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is stored in the storage area n1 provided in the RAM 503. , The number of fluctuations based on the entry into the start winning device 33a for special figure 1 at the time when the jackpot result is obtained during the low probability support gaming state is read, and the process proceeds to step S4311. In step S4311, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 proceeds to step S4312 if n1 is 10 times or less, and proceeds to step S4313 if n1 is not 10 or less (that is, 11 or more). In step S4312, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is in the immediate zone period when the jackpot result is obtained, but is in the period in which the right of probability change described later is not acquired, so that the third jackpot (16R) is performed. , The opening time is set to 6 seconds, the interval time is set to 2 seconds, and the ending time is set to 5 seconds regardless of whether the second jackpot (8R) or the first jackpot (8R) is used.

In step S4313, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not it is the third big hit (16R). If it is the third big hit, the process proceeds to step S4314, and if not, the process proceeds to step S4315. In step S4314, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has acquired the right of probability change described later, but it is not the result of the variation display based on the ball entering the start winning device 33b for special figure 2 which should be originally aimed at, so the opening time. Is set to 6 seconds, the interval time is set to 2 seconds, and the ending time is set to 35 seconds. In step S4315, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not it is the second jackpot (8R) or the first jackpot (8R). If it is the second big hit or the first big hit, the process proceeds to step S4316, otherwise the process ends. In step S4316, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has acquired the right of probability change described later, but it is not the result of the variation display based on the ball entering the start winning device 33b for special figure 2 which should be originally aimed at, so the opening time. Is set to 6 seconds, the interval time is set to 2 seconds, and the ending time is set to 25 seconds.

When it is determined in step S4300 described above that the jackpot result is not due to the special figure 1 (that is, due to the special figure 2), as shown in FIG. 152, in step S4401, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is specified. FIG. 2 It is determined whether or not the time when the big hit result is obtained is the low probability support gaming state. If it is in the low probability support gaming state, the process proceeds to step S4402, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4420 shown in FIG. 153.

In step S4402, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has a start prize for special figure 1 in the storage area n1 provided in the RAM 503 from the start of the low probability support gaming state to the present time (the time when the special figure 2 big hit result is obtained). The number of fluctuations based on the entry into the device 33a is read, the number of fluctuations based on the entry into the start winning device 33b for special figure 2 at the time when the jackpot result is obtained is read into the storage area n2, and the process proceeds to step S4403.

In step S4403, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the first symbol is the third big hit (16R). If it is the third big hit (16R), the process proceeds to step S4404, and if not, the process proceeds to step S4409. In step S4404, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not n1 is 10 rotations or more. If n1 is 10 rotations or more, the right of probabilistic change described later is acquired. Therefore, the process proceeds to step S4405, and if not (that is, if n1 is less than 10 rotations), the right of probabilistic change described later is acquired. Since it has not been completed, the process proceeds to step S4408.

In step S4405, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not n2 is 1 to 40 times. If n2 is 1 to 40 times, the process proceeds to step S4406, otherwise (that is, if n2 is 41 to 90 times), the process proceeds to step S4407. In step S4406, since the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is an immediate zone and has acquired the right of probability change described later, the opening time is set to 3 seconds, the interval time is set to 2 seconds, and the ending time is set to 5 seconds. .. In step S4407, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has passed the immediate connection zone, but since it has acquired the right of probability change described later, the opening time is 3 seconds, the interval time is 2 seconds, and the ending time is 30 seconds. Set to. In step S4408, since the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has not acquired the right of probability change described later, the opening time is set to 6 seconds, the interval time is set to 2 seconds, and the ending time is set to 30 seconds.

In step S4409, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the first symbol is the second jackpot (8R) or the first jackpot (8R). If it is the second big hit or the first big hit, the process proceeds to step S4410, otherwise the process ends. In step S4410, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not n1 is 10 rotations or more. If n1 is 10 rotations or more, the process proceeds to step S4411, otherwise (that is, if it is less than 10 rotations), the process proceeds to step S4414.

In step S4411, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not n2 is 1 to 40 rotations. If n2 is 1 to 40 rotations, the process proceeds to step S4412, otherwise (that is, if n2 is 41 to 90 rotations), the process proceeds to step S4413. In step S4412, since it is an immediate zone and the right of probability change described later is acquired, the opening time is set to 3 seconds, the interval time is set to 2 seconds, and the ending time is set to 5 seconds. In step S4413, although the player has passed through the immediate zone, the opening time is set to 3 seconds, the interval time is set to 2 seconds, and the ending time is set to 20 seconds because the right of probability change described later is acquired. In step S4414, since the right of probability change described later is not acquired, the opening time is set to 6 seconds, the interval time is set to 2 seconds, and the ending time is set to 30 seconds.

When it is determined in step S4401 that the time when the special figure 2 big hit result is not in the low probability support gaming state, as shown in FIG. 153, in step S4420, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is the special feature. FIG. 2 It is determined whether or not the time when the big hit result is obtained is a high-probability gaming state. If it is in a high-probability gaming state, the process proceeds to step S4421, otherwise the process ends. In step S4421, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 reads into the storage area n2 provided in the RAM 503 the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the start winning device 33b for special figure 2 at the time when the jackpot result is obtained, and steps. Proceed to S4422.

In step S422, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the first symbol is the third big hit (16R). If it is the third big hit, the process proceeds to step S4423, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4426. In step S4423, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not n2 is 1 to 50 rotations. If n2 is 1 to 50 rotations, the process proceeds to step S4424, and if not, the process proceeds to step S4425.

In step S4424, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the opening time to 3 seconds, the interval time to 2 seconds, and the ending time to 5 seconds because the V probability jackpot of 16R is confirmed in the immediate zone. In step S4425, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has passed through the immediate zone, but since the V probability jackpot of 16R has been confirmed, the opening time is set to 3 seconds, the interval time is set to 2 seconds, and the ending time is set to 30 seconds. Set.

In step S4426, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the first symbol is the second jackpot (8R). If it is the second big hit, the process proceeds to step S4427, and if not, the process proceeds to step S4430. In step S4427, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not n2 is 1 to 50 times. If n2 is 1 to 50 rotations, the process proceeds to step S4428, and if not (that is, n2 is 51 rotations or more), the process proceeds to step S4429.

In step S4428, since the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is in the immediate zone and the V probability jackpot of 8R is confirmed, the opening time is set to 3 seconds, the interval time is set to 2 seconds, and the ending time is set to 5 seconds. do. In step S4429, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has passed through the immediate zone, but since the V probability jackpot of 8R has been confirmed, the opening time is 3 seconds, the interval time is 2 seconds, and the ending time is 20 seconds. Set to.

In step S4430, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the first symbol is the first jackpot (8R). If it is the first big hit, the process proceeds to step S4432, otherwise the process ends. In step S4432, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not n2 is 1 to 50 rotations. If n2 is 1 to 50 rotations, the process proceeds to step S4433, and if not, the process proceeds to step S4434 (if it is 51 rotations or more).

In step S4433, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is in the immediate zone, but since the 8R normal jackpot is confirmed, the opening time is set to 6 seconds, the interval time is set to 2 seconds, and the ending time is set to 5 seconds. do. In step S4434, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has passed through the immediate zone, and the 8R normal jackpot has been confirmed. Therefore, the opening time is set to 6 seconds, the interval time is set to 2 seconds, and the ending time is set to 20 seconds. Set. This is the end of this process.

Next, the display mode on the third symbol display device 42 including the game of acquiring the right of probability change in the high probability game state or the low probability support game state after the jackpot round game state of this embodiment is shown in FIGS. It will be described with reference to 158. FIG. 154 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of the effect performed during the big hit round game to the value-added game. FIG. 155 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of an effect performed during the value-added game from the jackpot round game following FIG. 154. FIG. 156 is a diagram illustrating another display mode of the effect performed during the big hit round game to the value-added game. FIG. 157 is a diagram illustrating a display mode different from that of FIG. 156, which is an effect performed during the big hit round game to the value-added game. FIG. 158 is a diagram illustrating a display mode different from FIGS. 156 and 157 of the effect performed during the big hit round game to the value-added game.

As will be described later, in the CPU 551 of the display control device 45, the variation display of the symbol based on the detection of the game ball by the operation port switch for the special figure 1 start winning device 33a is the first variation number (for example, 100 variation times). Of these, if a big hit result is not obtained within the 10 times of the 1st to 10th fluctuations in the special figure 1), the game ball is detected by the operation port switch for the special figure 2 start winning device 33b. Notifies that counting is started until the fluctuation display of the symbol based on is the second number of fluctuations (for example, the 11th to 100th, which is 90 times in the special figure 2 out of 100 fluctuations). The second fluctuation number counting start notification function is provided. Specifically, the support state fluctuation number information 44m2, which will be described later, the support state left-handed information 44m1 displayed up to the 10th rotation, and the support state right-handed information 44m displayed from the 11th rotation are displayed. Corresponds to the function. Further, specifically, it corresponds to a function of displaying the probabilistic right acquisition game execution information 44m3, the probabilistic right acquisition information 44m4, and the right-handed explanatory information 44m5 during the support state, which will be described later. As a result, it is possible to know the change from the aim of entering the special figure 1 start winning device 33a to the aim of entering the special figure 2 starting winning device 33b, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the high-probability gaming state or the support state. can.

Further, as will be described later, in the CPU 551 of the display control device 45, the variation display of the symbol based on the detection of the game ball by the operation port switch for the special figure 1 start winning device 33a is the first variation number, for example, 100 variation. If the big hit result is not obtained within the fluctuations of the 1st to 10th times, which is 10 times in the special figure 1, the game ball entered during the opening of the big winning opening opening / closing member 32a1 is in the V region. It is equipped with a probabilistic right acquisition notification function for notifying that the possibility of entering the ball 32b is increased. Specifically, it is a function of displaying the probabilistic right acquisition game execution information 44m3 and the probabilistic right acquisition information 44m4, which will be described later. As a result, it is found that the possibility of entering the V region 32b is increased, so that the interest in the high-probability gaming state or the support state can be improved.

Further, in the CPU 551 of the display control device 45, the variation display of the symbol based on the detection of the game ball by the operation port switch for the special figure 1 start winning device 33a is the jackpot result within the first variation number (for example, 10 times). If it does not, it is provided with a right-handed notification function that notifies the special figure 2 start winning device 33b to launch a game ball. Specifically, it is a function to display the right-handed explanatory information 44m5 in the support state, which will be described later. As a result, it is possible to know the change from left-handed to right-handed, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the high-probability gaming state or the support state.

In the all symbol stop screen 43e shown in FIG. 154 (a), "2" is displayed in the jackpot combination of the special figure 1 in the normal gaming state. "2" is a symbol whose hit type corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot of Special Figure 1. On the opening screen 43h shown in (b), the opening information 44f (for example, character information such as "Congratulations") is displayed. After that, on the opening screen 43h shown in (c), 44 g of right-handed explanatory information during the opening (for example, the character information "Aim at the right" and the right arrow are shown) are displayed. After that, on the round screen 43i shown in (d), the right-handed information 44h during the round (for example, the character information "right-handed!" And the right arrow are shown) and the round number information 44i indicating the start of the first round (for example, "" The text information "1st round") is displayed. After that, on the round screen 43i shown in (e), right-handed information 44h during the round and round number information indicating the start of the second round (for example, character information "2nd round") are displayed. Since the hit type when the big hit result of the special figure 1 is obtained in the normal game state is the normal big hit, the winning of the V region 32b does not occur. After that, on the round screen 43i shown in (f), right-handed information 44h during the round and round number information indicating the start of the third round (for example, character information "3rd round") are displayed. After that, on the round screen 43i shown in (g), right-handed information 44h during the round and round number information indicating the start of the final eighth round (for example, character information "8th round") are displayed.

After that, on the ending screen 43j shown in (h), the ending right-handed information 44k and the next game state suggestion information 44w (for example, in the case of an 8R normal jackpot, character information of "chance!") Are displayed. After that, on the ending screen 43j shown in (i), the probability change right acquisition suggesting or notifying that the game for acquiring the probability change right is started during the 100 times low probability support state after the end of the ending effect. Game information 44w1 (for example, text information "Turn special figure 1 10 times to get the right of probability change") and left-handed during the game to acquire the right of probability change after the ending production is over. Left-handed explanatory information 44w2 (for example, the text information "Aim at the special 1 starting port with left-handed" and the left-pointing arrow is shown) is displayed to suggest or notify the player of what to do. As a result, the player can know in advance that the game for acquiring the right of probability change is started after the end of the ending effect during the execution of the ending effect, and the player can know in advance that the game is started at the end of the ending effect. You can switch to left-handed.

After that, in the low-probability support gaming state, which is the next gaming state, the high-speed changing screen 43c (low-probability support state middle screen 43k) shown in (j) suggests or notifies the left-handed player during the support state. Middle left-handed information 44m1 (for example, character information of "left-handed" and left-pointing arrow are shown) and support state middle fluctuation number information 44m2 (for example, "1st rotation") for notifying the number of fluctuations during the support state (1 to 100 rotations). (Or "1/100 rotation". The same shall apply hereinafter) and the probabilistic right acquisition game is being executed, which suggests or informs that a game for acquiring the probabilistic right is being performed during the support state. Information 44m3 (for example, "during a probable change right challenge") is displayed. As a result, the player can know that he / she is in the support game state but needs to make a left-handed strike, and the period during which he / she is making a left-handed strike during the support game state is for acquiring the right of probability change. It is possible to recognize that it is a game period.

After that, on the all symbol stop screen 43e shown in (k), it is displayed that the fluctuation display of the first rotation in the support state is an off result, and on the high-speed fluctuation screen 43c shown in (l), the support state is in progress. It is displayed that the third variation display is being executed. (K) The screen shown in (l) also displays support state left-handed information 44m1, support state fluctuation frequency information 44m2, and probabilistic right acquisition game execution information 44m3.

After that, on the high-speed changing screen 43c at the 10th rotation in the support state shown in FIG. Probabilistic right acquisition information 44m4 (for example, "Congratulations! GET the probabilistic right!"), Which indicates that the probabilistic right has been acquired when the number of rotations reaches 10, and after that, right-handed special figure 2 Support status to suggest or notify to perform a right-handed operation aiming at the start winning device 33b Right-handed explanation information 44m5 (for example, text information "Aim at the special 2 starting port with right-handed") is displayed. .. If you display the text information "Aim at the special 2 start opening with right-handed hit", you can suggest to the game ball that you can get a probability change if you win the big hit in special figure 2, but right-handed explanation information during the support state The 44m5 may further add text information such as "If you win the jackpot in Special Figure 2, you can get the probability change" that directly informs the flow of the game after that. As a result, the player can know that if he / she acquires the right of probability change, he / she can acquire the probability change by the big hit of the following special figure 2.

After that, on the 10th rotation all symbol stop screen 43e in the support state shown in (n), in addition to the left-handed information 44m1 in the support state and the fluctuation number information 44m2 in the support state, it is shown that the right of probability change has been acquired. Information 44m6 (for example, "Probability change right GET in progress!") Is displayed. After that, on the 11th rotation high-speed changing screen 43c (low-probability support state middle screen 43k) in the support state shown in (o), the support state change frequency information 44m2 and the probability change right acquisition information 44m6 are displayed. At the same time, the left-handed information 44m in the support state, which was displayed up to the 10th rotation, is changed to the right-handed information 44m in the support state. As a result, the player can easily know that the firing operation of the game ball changes from the fluctuation after acquiring the right of probability change. In addition, since it is shown that the "right of probability change" has been acquired, it is possible to know that the probability change can be acquired if the jackpot is won in the running support state.

After that, on the all symbol stop screen 43e of the 21st rotation in the low probability support state shown in (p), the jackpot combination of the special figure 2 of "7" is stopped and displayed. The jackpot combination of the special figure 2 of "7" in the low probability support state differs depending on the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 at the time of the jackpot. That is, if the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 at the time of the jackpot is at least 10 times, that is, if the right of probability change is acquired, the V probability jackpot of 16R is obtained, but the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 at the time of the jackpot is If is less than 10 times, that is, if the right of probability change is not acquired, it is a normal jackpot of 16R. In this embodiment, since the right of probability change is acquired, it is a V probability jackpot of 16R.

After that, on the opening screen 43h shown in (q), the opening information 44f (for example, character information such as "Congratulations") is displayed. After that, on the opening screen 43h shown in (r), in addition to the right-handed explanatory information 44 g during the opening (for example, the character information "Aim at the right" and the right arrow are shown), a V prize can be obtained to obtain a probability change. 44g1 of V-winning explanation information (for example, "Get the probability change by V-winning") is displayed. After that, on the round screen 43i shown in (s), the right-handed information 44h during the round (for example, the character information "right-handed!" And the right arrow are shown) and the round number information 44i indicating the start of the first round (for example, "" The text information "1st round") is displayed. After that, on the round screen 43i shown in (t), right-handed information 44h during the round and round number information indicating the start of the second round (for example, character information "2nd round") are displayed.

Since the hit type when the right of probability change is acquired in the low probability support state and the jackpot result of "7" in Special Figure 2 is obtained is the V probability jackpot, the V area 32b during the opening period of the second round. Will be awarded. That is, on the round screen 43i shown in (t), a prize is generated in the V region 32b together with the right-handed information 44h during the round and the round number information (for example, the character information "2nd round"), and the next game state is probabilistically changed. The V winning probability change acquisition information 44i1 (for example, character information such as "V winning! Probability change GET!") Is displayed, which suggests or notifies that (high probability gaming state) is reached. After that, on the round screen 43i shown in (u), right-handed information 44h during the round and round number information (for example, character information "16th round") indicating that the round is the final round are displayed.

After that, on the ending screen 43j shown in (v), the next game state suggestion information 44w (for example, character information of "one more time!", Which suggests that a high-probability game state occurs after the end of the jackpot round game) is displayed. It is displayed. After that, after the end of the jackpot round game (that is, after the end of the ending effect), the high probability state screen 43k is displayed as shown in (w), the high probability / support state right-handed information 44 m, and the high speed according to the special figure 2. The changing screen 43c is displayed.

In this way, if the special figure 1 jackpot result is obtained in the normal gaming state, the V prize does not occur during the special figure 1 jackpot round gaming state, but the low probability support state of 100 times after the end of the jackpot round gaming state. If you can get the right of probability change by turning Special Figure 1 10 times, if you get a special Figure 2 big hit result in the subsequent variable times of Special Figure 2, you will get a V prize during the special figure 2 big hit round game state. It can be acquired and the next game state can be set to a high-probability game state.

With reference to FIG. 156, a display mode when a V-probability jackpot occurs during the high-probability gaming state after FIG. 155 (w) will be described.

On the high-probability state screen 43k shown in (a), a big hit combination screen (all symbols stop screen 43e) of "3" is displayed as a V-probability big hit during the high-probability gaming state. After that, on the opening screen 43h shown in (b), the opening information 44f (for example, character information such as "Congratulations") is displayed. After that, on the opening screen 43h shown in (c), V winning explanatory information 44g1 is displayed together with the opening right-handed explanatory information 44g.

After that, on the round screen 43i shown in (d), right-handed information 44h during the round and round number information 44i (for example, character information "1st round") indicating the start of the first round are displayed. In the high-probability gaming state, when the odd-numbered symbols other than "7" and "7" are used and the special figure 2 jackpot result is obtained, the hit type is V probability jackpot, so that a prize is generated in the V region 32b. That is, on the round screen 43i shown in (e), the V winning probability variation acquisition information 44i1 is provided together with the right-handed information 44h during the round, the round number information 44i indicating the start of the second round (for example, the character information "2nd round"). It is displayed.

After that, on the round screen 43i shown in (f), right-handed information 44h during the round and round number information indicating the start of the final eighth round (for example, character information "8th round") are displayed. After that, on the ending screen 43j shown in (g), the next game state suggestion information 44w (for example, character information of "one more time!", Which suggests that a high-probability game state occurs after the end of the jackpot round game) is displayed. It is displayed. After that, after the end of the jackpot round game (that is, after the end of the ending effect), the high probability state screen 43k is displayed as shown in (h), the high probability / support state right-handed information 44 m, and the high speed according to the special figure 2. The changing screen 43c is displayed.

With reference to FIG. 157, a display mode when a normal jackpot occurs during the high-probability gaming state after FIG. 155 (w) will be described.

On the high-probability state screen 43k shown in (a), a big hit combination of “2” (all symbols stop screen 43e) is displayed as a normal big hit during the high-probability gaming state. After that, on the opening screen 43h shown in (b), the opening information 44f (for example, character information such as "Congratulations") is displayed. After that, on the opening screen 43h shown in (c), the right-handed explanatory information 44g during the opening is displayed, but unlike FIG. 156 (c), the V winning explanatory information 44g1 is not displayed.

After that, on the round screen 43i shown in (d), right-handed information 44h during the round and round number information 44i (for example, character information "1st round") indicating the start of the first round are displayed. In the high-probability gaming state, when the special figure 2 jackpot result is obtained with an even numbered symbol, the hit type is usually a jackpot, so that the winning of the V region 32b does not occur. After that, on the round screen 43i shown in (e), right-handed information 44h during the round and round number information indicating the start of the final eighth round (for example, character information "8th round") are displayed.

After that, on the ending screen 43j shown in (f), the ending right-handed information 44k and the next game state suggestion information 44w (for example, in the case of an 8R normal jackpot, the character information of "chance!") Is displayed. After that, on the ending screen 43j shown in (g), the probability change right acquisition game information 44w1 (for example, the character information "Turn the special figure 1 10 times to get the probability change right") and the left-handed explanation information 44w2. (For example, the text information "Aim at the special 1 start port by hitting left" and the left-pointing arrow are shown) are displayed.

After that, in the low-probability support gaming state, which is the next game state, in the high-speed changing screen 43c (low-probability support state middle screen 43k) shown in (h), the support state middle left-handed information 44m1 (for example, the character "left-handed"). Information and left-pointing arrow illustration), information on the number of fluctuations during the support state 44m2 (for example, character information "1st turn"), and information on the execution of the probabilistic right acquisition game 44m3 (for example, "probability change right challenge") are displayed. Has been done.

After that, on the high-speed fluctuating screen 43c of the 10th rotation in the support state shown in (i), the probability change right acquisition information 44m4 (for example, the character information "Congratulations! Explanatory information 44m5 (for example, character information "Aim at the special 2 starting port by hitting right") is displayed. After that, on the high-speed changing screen 43c at the 11th rotation during the support state shown in (j), the probability change right acquisition information 44m6 (for example, the character information "Probability change right GET in progress!") And the change number information during the support state are displayed. 44m2 (for example, the character information of "11th rotation") and the right-handed information 44m in the support state (for example, the character information of "right-handed" and the right-pointing arrow are shown) are displayed. If the special figure 2 jackpot result is obtained again after acquiring the right of probability change in this low probability support gaming state, the V region 32b is entered during the jackpot round gaming state as shown in FIGS. 155 (p) to 155 (w). Based on the winning of, the next game state becomes a high probability game state.

In this way, if a special figure 2 jackpot result is obtained with an odd numbered symbol other than "7" or "7" in the high probability gaming state, a V prize will occur during the special figure 2 jackpot round gaming state, so the probability is high. The game state is continued. If a special figure 2 jackpot result is obtained with an even numbered symbol in the high probability gaming state, the V prize is not generated during the special figure 2 jackpot round gaming state, so the game is returned from the high probability gaming state to the low probability support gaming state. If the right of probability change is acquired again in the low probability support gaming state, and then the special figure 2 jackpot result is obtained, the high probability gaming state can be acquired again.

With reference to FIG. 158, a display mode when the acquired probabilistic right is extinguished will be described.

On the screen 43c during high-speed fluctuation at the 10th rotation during the low-probability support state shown in (a), the probability change right acquisition information 44m4 (for example, the character information "Congratulations! Explanatory information 44m5 (for example, text information "Aim at the special 2 starting port by hitting right") is displayed.

After that, on the 10th rotation stop screen 43e shown in (b), the probability change right acquisition information 44m6 (for example, the character information "Probability change right GET in progress!") And the change count information during the support state. 44m2 (for example, the character information of the "10th rotation") and the right-handed information 44m in the support state (for example, the character information of "right-handed" and the right-pointing arrow are shown) are displayed. After that, on the high-speed changing screen 43c (low-probability support state screen 43k) shown in (c), the probability change right acquisition information 44m6 and the support state change frequency information 44m2 (for example, the character information of the "11th rotation") are displayed. , Right-handed information 44m is displayed during the support status. After that, on the 11th rotation all symbol stop screen 43e in the low probability support state shown in (d), the probability change right acquisition information 44m6, the support state change frequency information 44m2, and the support state right-handed information 44m are displayed. The out-of-order symbol is stopped and displayed.

After that, on the high-speed changing screen 43c (low-probability support state screen 43k) shown in (e), the probability change right acquisition information 44m6 and the support state change frequency information 44m2 (for example, the character information of the "100th rotation") are displayed. , Right-handed information 44m is displayed during the support status. After that, on the all symbol stop screen 43e at the 100th rotation in the low probability support state shown in (f), the probability change right acquisition information 44m6, the support state change frequency information 44m2, and the support state right-handed information 44m are displayed. The out-of-order symbol is stopped and displayed. Since the right of probability change is extinguished by the end of the fluctuation display at the 100th rotation, the screen 43k in the low probability support state is switched to the normal screen 43a. Along with this change, the probability change right acquisition game end information 44m7 (for example, the text information of "probability change right, extinction!") Suggesting or notifying that the game for acquiring the probability change right shown in (g) has ended). Or, the left-handed information 44m8 (for example, the character information of "Aim at the special 1 start port by left-handed") is displayed after the end of the support state to notify the player to perform the left-handed hit after the end of the support state. As a result, the player can easily proceed with the game even in the game in which the striking method changes according to the number of fluctuations.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 39th embodiment, the game ball launch handle 18 that receives the operation of the player related to the game and the left-handed operation of the game ball launch handle 18 (operation in the first aspect). Based on the counting function in the opening / ending time setting process of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that counts the number of fluctuations (first number information) of the special figure 1, the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 is, for example, 10 times (first predetermined number). The main control device that determines whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot winning (predetermined condition) based on the right-handed operation has been achieved in the state of being changed to the right-handed operation (operation in the second mode) when counting. It is equipped with a determination function in the opening / ending time setting process of the CPU 501 of the 261 and, when it is determined that the special figure 2 big hit winning has been achieved, a V winning probability change (a specific event advantageous to the player) occurs. As a result, after the number of fluctuations (first number information) of the special figure 1 based on the left-handed operation (operation in the first aspect) is counted, for example, 10 times (first predetermined number), the right-handed operation (second aspect). By changing to (operation in) and achieving the special figure 2 jackpot winning (predetermined condition) based on the right-handed operation, a specific event advantageous to the player (for example, V winning probability change) will occur, so the interest of the game It is possible to improve the sex. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (N00), for example.

Further, the above-mentioned specific event is a suggestion or notification of the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state (for example, V winning probability change) which is advantageous for the player. As a result, if the special figure 2 jackpot winning (predetermined condition) based on the right-handed operation (operation in the second mode) is achieved, the suggestion or notification of the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state can be obtained, so that the interest of the game is improved. Can be made to. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (N01), for example.

Further, the counting function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 counts the number of fluctuations (second number information) in FIG. 2 based on the right-handed operation (operation in the second aspect) of the game ball launching handle 18. The determination function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is to win the special figure 2 jackpot based on the right-handed operation until the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 based on the right-handed operation counts, for example, 100 times (second predetermined number). It is determined whether or not the predetermined condition) has been achieved. As a result, the special feature based on the right-handed operation is obtained until the number of fluctuations (second number information) in FIG. 2 based on the right-handed operation (operation in the second aspect) counts, for example, 100 times (second predetermined number). FIG. 2 It is possible to improve the interest of the game in terms of whether or not the big hit winning (predetermined condition) can be achieved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (N02), for example.

Further, the number of fluctuations (first number information) of the special figure 1 is based on the left-handed operation (operation in the first aspect) that can be executed during the fluctuation display of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 42. The number information to be counted, and the number of fluctuations in the special figure 2 (second number information) is a right-handed operation (second mode) that can be executed during the variation display of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 42. It is the numerical information counted based on the operation in. As a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game during the variable display of the identification information. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (N03), for example.

Further, the number of fluctuations (first number information) of the special figure 1 is number information displayed on the third symbol display device 42 together with the variation display of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 42, and is a special figure. The number of fluctuations (second number information) of 2 is number information displayed on the third symbol display device 42 together with the variation display of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 42. As a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game during the variable display of the identification information. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (N04), for example.

Further, it is determined that the number of fluctuations (first number information) of the special figure 1 is, for example, 10 times (first predetermined number). It is equipped with a notification function that notifies by the character information). By recognizing the progress of the first number information becoming the first predetermined number, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (N05), for example.

Further, the game board 30 having the game area 30a into which the game ball launched based on the left-handed operation and the right-handed operation (operations in the first and second aspects) flows down, and the game area 30a based on the left-handed operation. A start prize device 33a (first ball entry means) for special figure 1 in which a flowing game ball can enter, and a start prize for special figure 2 in which a game ball flowing down in the game area 30a based on a right-handed operation can enter. The number of changes in the design based on the detection of the game ball by the device 33b (second ball entry means) and the operation port switch for the special figure 1 start winning device 33a, and the operation port switch for the special figure 2 start winning device 33b. The number of fluctuations counting function (counting function) in the opening / ending time setting process of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that counts the total of the number of fluctuations of the symbol based on the detection of the game ball as a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times). The fluctuation number counting function (counting function) in the opening / ending time setting process of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is a game ball with a working port switch for the special figure 1 start winning device 33a in a high probability gaming state. The variation display of the symbol based on the detection of is performed the first variation number (for example, 10 times), and the variation display of the symbol based on the detection of the game ball by the operation port switch for the special figure 2 start winning device 33b is the second. When the number of fluctuations of 2 (for example, 90 times) is performed, it is determined that the predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) has been reached, and the operation port switch for the special figure 1 start winning device 33a at the time when a big hit result is obtained. When the fluctuation display of the symbol based on the detection of the game ball in is within the first number of fluctuations (for example, 10 times), the opening timing of the large winning opening opening / closing pattern and the opening timing of the V region opening / closing pattern match. Difficult, it is difficult for a game ball that entered while the large winning opening opening / closing member 42a1 is open to enter the V region 32b, and when a big hit result is obtained, the game ball at the operating port switch for the special drawing 2 starting winning device 33b When the fluctuation display of the symbol based on the detection of is within the second number of fluctuations (for example, 1 to 90 times), the opening timing of the large winning opening opening / closing pattern and the opening timing of the V region opening / closing pattern are likely to match. It makes it easier for a game ball that has entered while the large winning opening opening / closing member 42a1 is open to enter the V region 32b. As a result, the ball entry rate to the V region 32b changes according to the number of changes in the symbol based on the ball entry to the special figure 1 start winning device 33a and the special figure 2 start winning device 33b at the time when the big hit result is obtained. It is possible to improve the fun of the high-probability gaming state or the support state. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (N06), for example.

The variation count function (counting function) in the opening / ending time setting process of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is the first to display the variation of the symbol based on the detection of the game ball by the operation port switch for the special start winning device 33a. When the big hit result is not obtained within the number of fluctuations of 1 (for example, 10 times), the fluctuation display of the symbol based on the detection of the game ball by the operation port switch for the special figure 2 start winning device 33b is the second number of fluctuations (for example). For example, 90 times) is started. As a result, even if the fluctuation display based on the ball entering the special figure 1 start winning device 33a reaches the first number of fluctuations, the V region is corresponding to the number of fluctuations based on the ball entering the special figure 2 starting winning device 33b. Since the ball entry rate to 32b changes, it is possible to improve the fun of the high-probability gaming state or the support state. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (N07), for example.

Further, when the variation display of the symbol based on the detection of the game ball by the operation port switch for the special figure 1 start winning device 33a does not result in a big hit result within the first variation number (for example, 10 times), the special figure 2 Display control device 45 for notifying that counting until the number of fluctuations of the symbol based on the detection of the game ball by the operation port switch for the start winning device 33b reaches the second number of fluctuations (for example, 90 times) is started. The CPU 551 is provided with a second variation count start notification function (notification function) for high-probability / support state transition processing. As a result, it is possible to know the change from the aim of entering the special figure 1 start winning device 33a to the aim of entering the special figure 2 starting winning device 33b, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the high-probability gaming state or the support state. can. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (N08), for example.

In addition, when the variation display of the symbol based on the detection of the game ball by the actuation switch for the special figure 1 start winning device 33a does not result in a jackpot within the first variation number (for example, 10 times), a big prize is won. The "right of probability change" of the high probability / support state transition process of the CPU 551 of the display control device 45 for notifying that the game ball that has entered while the mouth opening / closing member 32a1 is open is more likely to enter the V region 32b. It has an acquisition notification function (notification function). As a result, it is found that the possibility of entering the V region 32b is increased, so that the interest in the high-probability gaming state or the support state can be improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (N09), for example.

Further, when the variation display of the symbol based on the detection of the game ball by the operation port switch for the special figure 1 start winning device 33a does not result in a big hit result within the first variation number (for example, 10 times), the special figure 2 It is provided with a right-handed notification function (notification function) for high-probability / support state transition processing of the CPU 551 of the display control device 45 that notifies the start winning device 33b to launch a game ball. As a result, the switching from the left-handed to the right-handed can be known, so that the high-probability gaming state or the support state can be improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (N10), for example.

Further, the special figure 1 start winning device 33a is provided in the area of the game area 30a where the game ball launched by left-handed can enter, and the special figure 2 start winning device 33b is in the game area 30a. A game ball fired by hitting right is provided in the area where the ball can enter. As a result, the gaming area 30a is widely used during the high-probability gaming state or the support state, so that the interest of the high-probability gaming state or the support state can be improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (N11), for example.

In addition, the game value given when the change display of the symbol based on the detection of the game ball by the operation port switch for the special figure 1 start winning device 33a is a big hit result, and the game value for the special figure 2 starting winning device 33b. It is different from the game value given when the variable display of the symbol based on the detection of the game ball by the operation port switch is a big hit result. As a result, the switching from the aim of entering the special figure 1 start winning device 33a to the aim of entering the special figure 2 starting winning device 33b causes superiority or inferiority in the game value that can be given as a result of the subsequent lottery. It is possible to improve the fun of the stochastic game state or the support state. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (N12), for example.

In the present embodiment, the small hit game state is different in that the small hit game state in which the game ball is difficult to enter is switched to the small hit game state in which the game ball is easy to enter. Hereinafter, this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 159 to 165.

FIG. 159 is a front view of the game board 30 of the 40th embodiment. FIG. 160 is a lottery table per special figure 1. FIG. 161 is a lottery table for the special figure 2. FIG. 162 is a table for selecting a special figure 2 main decorative symbol variation pattern. FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing a large winning opening opening / closing process by the main control device 261. FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing a small hit opening interval time setting process by the main control device 261. FIG. 165 is a time chart of the opening timing of the large winning opening opening / closing member and the second special drawing 1 starting winning device.

As shown in FIG. 159, in the game board 30 of the present embodiment, the right game area 30ar provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 35 is close to the variable display device unit 35 by a flow path forming member such as a nail. It is divided into 1 right side game area 30ar1 and a second right side game area 30ar2 far from the variable display device unit 35. The second right-side game area 30ar2 is an area in which the game ball launched by a predetermined operation (for example, an operation of rotating the game ball launch handle 18 to the maximum rotation position on the right side) can flow down. The first right-side game area 30ar1 is an area in which a game ball launched by a weaker operation than the above-mentioned predetermined operation (for example, an operation of rotating to a position before reaching the above-mentioned maximum rotation position) can flow down.

The game board 30 of the present embodiment includes two large winning openings, that is, a first large winning opening 32x of the first variable winning device 32X and a second large winning opening 32y of the second variable winning device 32Y, which will be described later. There is. The first large winning opening 32x is provided downstream of the second right side gaming area 30ar2. The first big winning opening 32x includes the first big winning opening opening / closing member 32x1, and the first big winning opening opening / closing member 32x1 is opened / closed in the big hit round gaming state. When the first big winning opening 32x is closed, the game ball that did not enter the first big winning opening 32x may enter another winning opening on the downstream side, or may enter the out opening 36. It may be discharged.

The second large winning opening 32y is provided further downstream than the first large winning opening 32x. The second big winning opening 32y includes the second big winning opening opening / closing member 32y1, and the second big winning opening opening / closing member 32y1 is opened / closed in the small hit game state. Inside the second large winning opening 32y, a region where the game ball can roll and a discharge port for discharging the game ball that rolls in the region to the outside are provided. A large winning opening count switch is provided at the discharge port.

The small hit game state is, for example, a game state in which the second big winning opening 32y is opened until the maximum opening time is 10 seconds or 10 game balls enter the second big winning opening 32y. When it is detected that a game ball has entered the second prize opening 32y, 15 prize balls are paid out for the detection of one ball entering. That is, in this embodiment, a maximum of 150 prize balls are expected in one opening in the small hit game state. As will be described later, the small hit game state is likely to occur at least 50 times in a row unless a big hit is won in the middle, so theoretically, 150 balls x 50 prize balls are expected. The maximum opening time of the second prize opening 32y can be shorter than that of the present embodiment. In that case, it is possible to reduce the number of prize balls.

The game board 30 of this embodiment includes two start winning devices 33a for special figure 1, one start winning device 33b for special figure 2, and one starting port 34 for ordinary symbols. The first start winning device 33a1 for special drawing 1 and the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2 are so-called navel-type starting ports having no opening / closing member. The first starting prize device 33a1 for special drawing 1 is the same as the starting winning device 33a for special drawing 1 of the above-described embodiment. The second special drawing 1 start winning device 33a2 is a so-called electric chew type start port having an opening / closing member. In this embodiment, the door member 32a2-1 that is taken in and out perpendicularly to the board surface of the game board 30 opens and closes the entrance, and in the closed state, the game ball rolls on the door member 32a2-1 and downstream. This is a type of starting port that allows the game ball to flow down to the side and, in the open state, guides the game ball that has flowed into the lower part of the door member 32a2-1 to the passage portion provided with the starting port sensor. It should be noted that the number of start winning devices 33a for special figure 1 may be one. In this case, a similar electric chew type start winning device 33b for special drawing 2 may be provided instead of the above-mentioned second starting winning device 33a2 for special drawing 1.

The game ball flowing down the first right side game area 30ar1 is branched left and right in the flow path by a flow path forming member such as a nail or a windmill near the exit thereof. The game ball that has flowed down to the right side enters the start winning device 33a2 for special figure 2. The game ball that has flowed down to the left side can enter the start winning device 33b for the second special figure 1. That is, the game ball that has flowed down to the left side enters the starting opening if the second special figure 1 starting winning device 33b is open, and does not enter the starting opening if it is closed. It flows further downstream. The game ball that has flowed downstream from the start winning device 33a2 for the second special figure 1 in the closed state can enter the second large winning opening 32y. That is, the game ball that has flowed downstream from the start winning device 33a2 for the special figure 2 in the closed state enters the game ball if the second large winning opening 32y is in the open state (small hit game state), and the second large winning prize is won. If the mouth 32y is in the closed state, the ball is discharged to the out mouth 36 without entering the ball. A flow path is configured so that the game ball flowing downstream from the second large winning opening 32y does not enter the starting winning device 33a for the first special figure 1.

A start port 34 for a normal symbol is provided in the middle of the first right side game area 30ar1. The starting port 34 for a normal symbol is configured so that a game ball flowing down the first right side game area 30ar1 always passes through. In the high-probability gaming state with the support state, the result of the lottery based on the winning ball of the starting port 34 for the normal symbol is frequently won, so that the starting winning device 33a2 for the second special figure 1 is used for a long time (for example, 10). Seconds) Frequently open. The second large winning opening 32y may be opened due to a small hit winning result of a lottery based on a ball entering the start winning device 33b for special figure 2, but the start for special figure 1 When the winning device 33a2 is in the open state, the game ball enters the starting opening, so that the winning device 33a2 does not enter the second major winning opening 32y. That is, in the support game state, it is set so that the number of prize balls is less likely to increase than the number of shot balls.

The CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is second in the high-probability gaming state (high-probability gaming state in the non-supported state) because the result of the lottery based on the entry of the starting port 34 for the normal symbol is frequently won. The start winning device 33a2 for special figure 1 is often opened, but since the opening time is shorter than that during the support state, the ball is entered into the second starting winning device 33a2 for special figure 1. The missing game ball will enter the second big winning opening 32y, which is open due to a small hit. That is, when the variation display of the symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit combination based on the result of the lottery based on the detection of the game ball by the operation port switch for the special figure 2 start winning device 33b is the small hit result. , The large winning opening opening / closing processing function (second state transition function) that shifts to the small hit game state in which the second variable winning device 32Y executes the small hit game a second number of times (for example, once) less than the first number of times. To prepare for.

Further, when the lottery result is a small hit result, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is in a small hit game state at least according to the number of changes in the symbol at the time when the small hit result is obtained. It is provided with a small hit opening / interval time setting processing function (specific time control function) that changes a small hit specific period (for example, opening time, interval time) that can be predetermined in the above.

Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 changes in numerical information related to the game (for example, a change after the end of the big hit round game accompanied by a high-probability game state in an unsupported state) in the small hit opening interval time setting process described later. In the counting function for counting the number of times), the small hit opening interval time setting process, and the second big winning opening opening / closing process for the small hit, which will be described later, the number information becomes a predetermined number (for example, the number of fluctuations is 51). Based on this, it is provided with a state change function of changing from a state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second variable winning device 32Y to a state in which a game ball is easy to enter in the second variable winning device 32Y. As a result, the ease of entering the second variable winning device 32Y can be changed according to the counting status of the numerical information related to the game. Here, the state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable winning device 32Y is the period during which the second variable winning device 32Y, which can be predetermined in the small hit game state, is in the closed state (the above-mentioned small). By lengthening the hit specific period), it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable winning device 32Y. The state in which a game ball is easily entered into the second variable winning device 32Y is a state in which the second variable winning device 32Y is closed (the above-mentioned small hit specific period) to shorten the second variable winning device 32Y. It is in a state where a game ball can easily enter the device 32Y.

Further, the state change function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 maintains a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable winning device 32Y until the number information reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1 to 50 times). is doing. As a result, the ease of entering the second variable winning device 32Y can be changed according to the counting situation when the number information related to the game becomes a predetermined number. As an example of the predetermined number of numerical information related to the game, the number of fluctuations is 51, and the number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit round game such as 100th and 200th may be large.

Further, the state change function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has a second variable winning device 32Y for a predetermined period (for example, a period in which the number of fluctuations is from 51 to 100) after the number information becomes a predetermined number. Maintain a state in which the game ball is easy to enter. As a result, it is possible to easily enter the second variable winning device 32Y for a predetermined period when the number information regarding the game becomes a predetermined number. As a predetermined period after the number information becomes a predetermined number, the period in which the number of fluctuations is from 51 to 100 is an example, and even if it is an unspecified period such as until the next big hit is generated. good.

Further, the counting function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is a number information (for example, the number of fluctuations) regarding the game after the end of the advantageous game state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot round game with a high probability game state in an unsupported state). ) Is counted. The game after the end of the advantageous gaming state, which is advantageous for the player, is the start winning for the second special figure 1 after the end of the game in which the game ball is launched into the second right game area 30ar2 aiming at the first variable winning device 32X. It is also a game in which a game ball is launched into the first right game area 30ar1 aiming at the device 33a2, the start winning device 33b for special figure 2, and the start port 34 for a normal symbol. As a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game after the end of the advantageous gaming state which is advantageous for the player.

Further, the counting function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 counts numerical information related to the game in a specific period (for example, a period in which the number of fluctuations is 1 to 100 times) after the end of the advantageous gaming state. As a specific period after the end of the advantageous gaming state, the period in which the number of fluctuations is 1 to 100 is an example, and the conditions such as the period until the next big hit is won are specified, but the number of fluctuations varies. It may be for a certain period. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in a specific period after the end of the specific game state which is advantageous for the player.

Further, the state change function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 maintains a state in which the game ball can easily enter the second variable winning device 32Y for the above-mentioned predetermined period, and then the game ball enters the second variable winning device 32Y. Returns to a state where it is difficult for the ball to enter. As a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game for a predetermined period until the game ball returns to a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable winning device 32Y.

Further, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is a specific game advantageous to the player based on the detection of the game ball by the detection switches of the start winning device 33a2 for the second special figure 1 and the start winning device 33b for the special figure 2. The CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is provided with a big hit / small hit lottery function for drawing whether or not a state (for example, a big hit game state or a small hit game state) occurs, and the counting function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is provided. Counts the number of times information (for example, the number of fluctuations) related to the game in which the lottery for whether or not to generate the specific game state is performed. The game in which the lottery for whether or not to generate the specific game state is performed is a variable display game of the identification information. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game according to the counting status of the number of times information regarding the game in which the lottery for whether or not to generate the specific game state is performed.

Further, in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, the variation display of the identification information is the first specific combination based on the fact that the result of the lottery based on the detection of the game ball by each detection switch is the first specific result (for example, a big hit). When stopped and displayed (for example, a big hit), the first variable winning device 32X goes from the open state where the game ball can be entered to the closed state where the first variable winning device 32X is difficult to enter the game ball once. The opening / closing game is shifted to the first opening / closing game state (for example, the jackpot round game state) in which the opening / closing game is executed the first number of times (for example, 8R, 16R). Is likely to be the first specific result, the second special figure 1 start winning device 33a2 is likely to be opened more frequently than the normal gaming state, and the second special drawing 1 starting winning device 33a2 is in the normal gaming state. The next game state setting process is provided with a first state transition function for shifting to a high-probability gaming state that is at least one of a supported state that is open for a longer time and a non-supported state that is not supported. Then, in addition to this, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 displays the identification information in a variable manner based on the fact that the result of the lottery based on the detection of the game ball by each detection switch is the second specific result (for example, a small hit). Is stopped and displayed in the second specific combination (for example, small hits), the second variable winning device 32Y enters the game ball from the open state in which the second variable winning device 32Y can enter the game ball. A second state transition function for shifting to a second open / close game state (for example, a small hit game) in which an open / close game in which a difficult closed state is executed once is executed a second number of times (2R) less than the first number of times. It is prepared in the next game state setting process.

In the state change function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, the number of changes in the identification information at the time when the second specific result counted by the counting function is within the period of the first number of changes (for example, 1 to 50 times). If this is the case, the game ball is difficult to enter while the second variable winning device 32Y is open, and the identification at the time when the second specific result is counted by the counting function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is identified. When the number of fluctuations of the information is within the period of the second number of fluctuations (for example, 51 to 100 times), the game ball is easily entered while the second variable winning device 32Y is open. As a result, the ease of entering the second variable winning device 32Y changes according to the number of changes in the identification information at the time when the result of the lottery becomes the second specific result. Can be improved.

Further, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines the number of changes in the identification information at least when the result of the lottery is the second specific result in the small hit opening interval time setting process. Correspondingly, it is provided with a specific period control function that changes a specific period (for example, opening time, interval time, ending time) that can be predetermined in the second opening / closing game state. The specific period control function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is specified when the number of fluctuations of the identification information at the time when the second specific result counted by the counting function is within the period of the first fluctuation number. By setting the period to the first specific period (for example, opening time 6 seconds, interval time 4 seconds, ending time 2 seconds), it is difficult for the game ball to enter while the second variable winning device 32Y is open. When the number of fluctuations of the identification information at the time when the second specific result is counted by the counting function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is within the period of the second number of fluctuations, the specific period is the first specific period. By setting a second specific period (for example, opening time 1 second, interval time 1 second, ending time 1 second) shorter than that, it is easy for the game ball to enter while the second variable winning device 32Y is open. do. As a result, the ease of entering the second variable winning device 32Y changes according to the number of changes in the identification information at the time when the result of the lottery becomes the second specific result. Can be improved.

Hereinafter, the configuration of this embodiment will be described in detail.

In the special figure 1 jackpot lottery table shown in FIG. 160, there is a case where the ball is entered into the above-mentioned first special figure 1 start winning device 33a1 and a case where the second special drawing 1 starting winning device 33a2 is entered. It is used when there is a ball. That is, the special figure 1 jackpot lottery table is used in a normal (low probability) gaming state and a support gaming state (low probability and high probability).

Specifically, the winning types of the special figure 1 big hit lottery table of this embodiment are 16R probability variation, 8R probability variation, and 8R normal. If the 16R probability change is won, the opening time is set to 5 seconds, the interval time is set to 1 second, and the ending time is set to 35 seconds for the first big winning opening 32x. When the 8R probability variation and the 8R normal are won, the opening time is set to 5 seconds, the interval time is set to 1 second, and the ending time is set to 25 seconds. In addition, if the 8R probability change is won, it will be a high-probability gaming state with 100 support states. In the case of a high-probability gaming state with a support state, the lottery time of the normal symbol based on the detection of entering (passing) the ball into the starting port 34 for the normal symbol becomes shorter than usual, and it becomes easier to win than usual. The opening time of the start winning device 33a2 for the second special figure 1 based on the winning is longer than usual (for example, 10 seconds). If you win the 16R probability change, you will be in a high-probability game state without a support state, and the small hit rush game state where you can easily win the second big winning opening 32y, which will be described later, will be attached until the next big hit. ..

The special figure 2 big hit lottery table shown in FIG. 161 is used when there is a ball entering the above-mentioned special figure 2 start winning device 33b. The start winning device 33b for the special figure 2 can enter a ball in a high-probability gaming state with or without a support state. That is, the special figure 2 jackpot lottery table is used in a high-probability gaming state without a support state and a high-probability gaming state with a support state.

Specifically, the winning types of the special figure 2 big hit lottery table of this embodiment are 16R probability variation, 8R probability variation, 8R normal, and small hit. When the 16R probability change is won and the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the big hit is 1 to 50 times, it is in the above-mentioned immediate zone, so the opening time of the first big winning opening 32x is 5 seconds. , The interval time is set to 1 second and the ending time is set to 5 seconds. When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the big hit is 51 to 100 times, the opening time is 10 seconds, the interval time is 2 seconds, and the ending time of the first big winning opening 32x is because the above-mentioned immediate continuous zone is exited. Is set to 30 seconds. Similarly, in the case of winning 8R probability variation or 8R normal, when the number of fluctuations at the time of the jackpot winning is 1 to 50, it is in the above-mentioned immediate zone, so the first big winning opening 32x is , The opening time is set to 5 seconds, the interval time is set to 1 second, and the ending time is set to 5 seconds. When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the big hit is 51 to 100 times, the opening time is 10 seconds, the interval time is 2 seconds, and the ending time of the first big winning opening 32x is because the above-mentioned immediate continuous zone is exited. Is set to 20 seconds.

The small hit winning corresponds to, for example, 0 to 139, 160 to 439, 460 to 579 of the big hit symbol counters C1 (0 to 599). That is, small hits are won at a rate of about 9/10. If you win a small hit, the method of setting the big hit time is different from the above. That is, when the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the small hit is 1 to 50 times, the second large winning opening 32y during the period of the small hit gaming state is made so that the game ball is difficult to enter into the second large winning opening 32y. The closed period is set to be long, the opening time is set to 6 seconds, and the interval time is set to 4 seconds. The small hit game state is set in a game in which the second big winning opening 32y is opened twice (two rounds), for example, as will be described later. The number of rounds may be one round, three rounds or more, and the like. The ending time is set to 2 seconds. In addition, when the number of fluctuations at the time of winning a small hit is 51 to 100 times, in order to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second large winning opening 32y, the second large winning opening during the period of the small hit gaming state. The period during which the 32y is closed is set to be short, the opening time is set to 1 second, and the interval time is set to 1 second. The ending time is set to 1 second.

As shown in FIG. 162, the table for selecting the main decorative symbol variation pattern of the special figure 2 has a very long variation time with respect to the variation display based on the ball entering the start winning device 33b for the special figure 2 in the normal gaming state. (For example, an ultra-long fluctuation pattern such as 600 seconds) is set. That is, the start winning device 33b for special figure 2 is a so-called heso-type start opening, and the variation display of special 1 based on the entry into the first start winning device 33a1 for special figure 1 and the start prize for special figure 2 are displayed. Since the variation display of the special 2 based on the entry into the device 33b can be changed at the same time, the variation display of the special 2 is set so as to be difficult to be frequently performed in the normal gaming state. In the high-probability gaming state, when the number of fluctuations is 1 to 50, the fluctuation time is set to an extremely short time (for example, a short fluctuation pattern such as 5 seconds) in order to form the above-mentioned immediate continuous zone. There is. If the number of fluctuations is 51 to 100 (after the 51st if there is no support state), it means that the player has passed the immediate zone, and the fluctuation time is long as in the case of Special Figure 1 (for example, in the case of a big hit). Long fluctuation patterns such as 30 seconds, 60 seconds, and 120 seconds, and long fluctuation patterns such as 30 seconds, 60 seconds, and 100 seconds in the case of deviation) are adopted.

The CPU 501 of the main control device 261 employs a control process for realizing a small hit game. That is, in the large winning opening opening / closing process shown in FIG. 163, in step S4115, when the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines in S4101 that the round start flag is not on, the small hit game start flag is on. Judge whether or not. If the result of the lottery based on the entry into the start winning device 33b for the special figure 2 described above is a small hit winning, the small hit game start flag is turned on, so the process proceeds to step S4116 or later. In step S4116 and step S4117, the opening time of the small hit game is read out and measured. In steps S4118 to S4124, the second big winning opening 32y in the small hit game is opened and closed. In this embodiment, the small hit game has two rounds, the first round has an opening time of 1 second, the second round has an opening time of 10 seconds, or until 10 balls are detected in the second big winning opening 32y. There is. In step S4125 and step S4126, the ending time of the small hit game is read and measured. When the ending time has elapsed, the small hit game start flag is lowered to end the small hit game (steps S4127, 4128).

Further, as shown in FIG. 164, the small hit opening interval time setting process performed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is the same as the above-mentioned jackpot opening interval time setting process (see FIG. 127). ..

That is, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines in step S4201 whether or not a small hit has been won. If the small hit is won, the process proceeds to step S4202, and if not, the process ends. In step S4202, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 reads out the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the small hit (the number of fluctuations from the end of the immediately preceding jackpot round game). In step S4203, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the number of fluctuations is 1 to 50 times. If the number of fluctuations is 1 to 50, the process proceeds to step S4204, and if not (that is, the number of fluctuations is 51 to 100), the process proceeds to step S4205.

In step S4204, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has an opening time of 6 seconds, an interval time of 4 seconds, and an ending in order to lengthen the period in which the second special winning opening 32y is closed during the small hit game state. Set the time to 2 seconds and end this process. In step S4205, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the opening time to 1 second, the interval time to 1 second, and the ending in order to shorten the period in which the second big winning opening 32y is closed during the small hit gaming state. Set the time to 1 second and end this process. The small hit opening time, interval time, and ending time set in this way are read out and set in the large winning opening opening / closing process in the small hit gaming state described above.

With reference to FIG. 165, the opening / closing pattern of the second special winning opening 32y and the opening / closing timing of the second special drawing 1 start winning device 33a2 of the electric chew type will be described.

(A) shows the opening / closing timing of the second special winning opening opening / closing member 32y1 in the second special winning opening 32y. That is, at the opening / closing timing of the second large winning opening 32y when the result of the variation display of the special figure 2 is a small hit winning and the number of times of the variation display at the time of the small hit winning is 51 to 100 times. be. (B) shows the opening and closing of the second large winning opening 32y when the result of the variable display of the special figure 2 is a small hit winning and the number of variable displays at the time of the small hit winning is 1 to 50 times. It's timing. (C) shows the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing member 33a2-1 of the start winning device 33a2 for the second special figure 1 at the time of winning a small hit.

When the number of fluctuations displayed at the time of winning the small hit shown in (a) is 51 to 100 times, the opening / closing timing of the second large winning opening 32y is the opening period (closed) from the start of the small hit gaming state to 1 second. 1R (open state) from start 1 second to start 2 seconds, interval period (closed state) from start 2 seconds to start 3 seconds, and 2R from start 3 seconds to start 13 seconds. (Open state), and the ending time (closed state) is from 13 seconds to 14 seconds. That is, in the period of the small hit game state (14 seconds), the period of the open state is 11 seconds and the period of the closed state is 3 seconds.

When the number of fluctuations displayed at the time of winning the small hit shown in (b) is 1 to 50 times, the opening / closing timing of the second large winning opening 32y is the opening period (closed) from the start of the small hit gaming state to 6 seconds. The state), 1R (open state) from the start 6 seconds to the start 7 seconds, the interval period (closed state) from the start 7 seconds to 11 seconds, and 2R (start 21 seconds) from the start 11 seconds to the start 21 seconds. It is an open state), and the ending time (closed state) is from the start 21 seconds to the start 23 seconds. That is, out of the period of the small hit game state (23 seconds), the period of the open state is 11 seconds, which is the same as that of (a), but the period of the closed state is 12 seconds, which is longer than that of (a).

In the high-probability gaming state in the non-supported state, the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing member 33a2-1 of the start winning device 33a2 for the second special figure 1 shown in (c) is a game ball in which the normal symbol start opening 34 is continuously used. When fired so that it passes through, the operation of opening for 2 seconds and closing for 2 seconds shall be repeated. It is assumed that the above-mentioned operation is repeated from 2 seconds after the start of the small hit game state. Then, the opening / closing timing of the opening / closing member 33a2-1 of the start winning device 33a2 for the second special figure 1 is in the open state from the start 2 seconds to the start 4 seconds of the small hit game state during the period during the small hit game state. The start 4 seconds to the start 6 seconds is the closed state, the start 6 seconds to the start 8 seconds is the open state, the start 8 seconds to the start 10 seconds is the closed state, and the start 10 seconds is the start. 12 seconds is open, 12 seconds to 14 seconds is closed, 14 seconds to 16 seconds is open, and 16 seconds to 18 seconds is closed. The start 18 seconds to 20 seconds is the open state, and the start 20 seconds to the start 22 seconds is the closed state.

At the opening timing of the second big winning opening opening / closing member 32y1 when the number of fluctuations at the time of the small hit winning shown in (a) is 50th to 100th, the small hit gaming state starts during the opening time of the second big winning opening 32y. 1 second from 1 second to 2 seconds, 2 seconds from 4 seconds to 6 seconds after the start, 2 seconds from 8 seconds to 10 seconds after the start, and 13 seconds to 14 seconds after the start The opening / closing member 33a2-1 of the start winning device 33a2 for the second special figure 1 is closed for a total of 6 seconds including 1 second, so that the game ball flows down to the 2nd big winning opening 32y and is the 2nd big. This is the period during which the ball can be entered into the winning opening 32y. That is, when the number of fluctuations shown in (a) is the 50th to the 100th, 6 seconds (about 40% of the period) of the period of the small hit game state (14 seconds) enters the second big winning opening 32y. It is a period during which the ball is possible.

At the opening timing of the second big winning opening opening / closing member 32y1 when the number of fluctuations at the time of the small hit winning shown in (b) is the first to the 50th, the small hit gaming state starts during the opening time of the second big winning opening 32y. The second feature is a total of 5 seconds, 2 seconds from 12 seconds to 14 seconds, 2 seconds from 16 seconds to 18 seconds after the start, and 1 second from 20 seconds to 21 seconds after the start. When the opening / closing member 33a2-1 of the start winning device 33a2 for FIG. 1 is closed, the game ball flows down to the second large winning opening 32y and can enter the second large winning opening 32y. That is, when the number of fluctuations shown in (b) is the first to the 50th, 5 seconds (about 20% of the period) of the period of the small hit game state (23 seconds) enters the second big winning opening 32y. Only during the period when the ball is possible.

In this way, in the high-probability gaming state where the support state is not attached, the game ball is placed in the second large winning opening 32y during the period when the number of fluctuations is 1 to 50 times as compared with the period when the number of fluctuations is 51 to 100 times. Although it is a period in which it is difficult to enter a ball, the period in which the number of fluctuations is 51 to 100 is a period in which it is easier to insert a game ball into the second major winning opening 32y as compared with the period in which the number of fluctuations is 1 to 50. can do. As a result, if a jackpot with a high-probability gaming state in an unsupported state is won, the game ball will be placed in the second big winning opening 32y even if the small hit is won until the predetermined number of fluctuations is reached after the jackpot round ends. It gives the player the impression that it is a small hit game state that is difficult to win, but if the small hit is won for a predetermined period after the predetermined number of fluctuations, it is easy to make the second big winning opening 32y win the game ball. It is possible to give the player the impression that the game has changed to a small hit game state. As a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game in the high-probability game state of the unsupported state after the end of the jackpot round.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 40th embodiment, the game board 30 has a game area 30a through which the game ball flows down, and the second large winning opening opening / closing member 32y1 is provided and flows down the game area 30a. A second variable winning device 32Y that changes between an open state in which a game ball is inserted and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area 30a is not entered, and numerical information related to the game (for example, a high-probability game state in an unsupported state). The counting function in the small hit opening interval time setting process of the CPU 501 of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that counts the number of fluctuations since the end of the jackpot round game accompanied by the number information, and the number information is a predetermined number (for example, the number of fluctuations is the 51st). Based on the above, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that changes from a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable winning device 32Y to a state in which the game ball is easy to enter in the second variable winning device 32Y. It is equipped with a hit opening interval time setting process and a state change function in the second big winning opening opening / closing process for small hits. As a result, the ease of entering the second variable winning device 32Y changes according to the counting status of the numerical information related to the game, so that the fun of the game can be improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (O00), for example.

Further, the state change function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 maintains a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable winning device 32Y until the number information reaches a predetermined number. As a result, the ease of entering the second variable winning device 32Y changes according to the counting situation when the number information related to the game becomes a predetermined number, so that the fun of the game can be improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (O01), for example.

Further, the state change function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has a second variable winning device 32Y for a predetermined period (for example, a period in which the number of fluctuations is from 51 to 100) after the number information becomes a predetermined number. Maintain a state in which the game ball is easy to enter. As a result, it becomes easy to enter the second variable winning device 32Y for a predetermined period when the number information related to the game becomes a predetermined number, so that the fun of the game can be improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (O02), for example.

Further, the counting function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is a number information (for example, the number of fluctuations) regarding the game after the end of the advantageous game state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot round game with a high probability game state in an unsupported state). ) Is counted. As a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game after the end of the advantageous gaming state which is advantageous for the player. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (O03), for example.

Further, the counting function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 counts numerical information related to the game in a specific period (for example, a period in which the number of fluctuations is 1 to 100 times) after the end of the advantageous gaming state. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in a specific period after the end of the specific game state which is advantageous for the player. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (O04), for example.

Further, the state change function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 maintains a state in which the game ball can easily enter the second variable winning device 32Y for the above-mentioned predetermined period, and then the game ball enters the second variable winning device 32Y. Returns to a state where it is difficult for the ball to enter. As a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game for a predetermined period until the game ball returns to a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable winning device 32Y. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (O05), for example.

Further, a second special figure 1 start winning device 33a2 and a special drawing 2 starting winning device 33b, and a second special drawing 1 starting winning device 33a2, which can enter a game ball flowing down the game area 30a, are available. Based on each detection switch that detects the game ball that has entered the start winning device 33b for FIG. 2 and the detection of the game ball by each detection switch, a specific game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state, a small hit game). A big hit / small hit lottery function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that draws whether or not a state) occurs, and the counting function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 generates a specific gaming state. The number of times information (for example, the number of fluctuations) related to the game in which the lottery is performed is counted. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game according to the counting status of the number of times information regarding the game in which the lottery for whether or not to generate the specific game state is performed. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (O06), for example.

Further, a start winning device 33b for special figure 2 as the ball entry portion where a game ball flowing down the game area 30a can enter, and a start winning device 33b.
A second starting prize device 33a2 for Special Figure 1 as the ball-entry portion that opens and closes between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area 30a can enter and a closed state in which the ball cannot enter.
The first variable winning device 32X capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area 30a, and
A second variable winning device 32Y capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area 30a, and
A detection switch that detects a game ball that has entered the start winning device 33b for special figure 2 and
A detection switch that detects a game ball that has entered the start winning device 33a2 for the second special figure 1 and
Based on the detection of the game ball by each detection switch, the jackpot / small hit lottery function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that draws a lottery as to whether or not a specific gaming state advantageous to the player occurs, and
A display control device 45 for displaying the result of the big hit / small hit lottery in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 on the third symbol display device 42 as a result of the variable display of the identification information recognizable by the player's vision.
Based on the fact that the result of the lottery based on the detection of the game ball by each detection switch is the first specific result (for example, big hit), the variable display of the identification information is stopped and displayed in the first specific combination (for example, big hit match). In this case, the first number of open / close games (from the open state in which the first variable winning device 32X can enter the game ball to the closed state in which the first variable winning device 32X is difficult to enter the game ball) is performed once. For example, 8R, 16R) is shifted to the first open / close game state (for example, the jackpot round game state) to be executed, and after the end of the first open / close game state, the lottery result is more likely to be the first specific result than the normal game state, and the second The support state in which the start winning device 33a2 for the special figure 1 is likely to be opened more frequently than in the normal gaming state, and the start winning device 33a2 for the second special figure 1 is in the open state for a longer time than in the normal gaming state. Alternatively, the first state transition function in the next game state setting process in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that shifts to a high-probability gaming state that is at least one of the non-supported states that do not become the supported state, and
Based on the fact that the result of the lottery based on the detection of the game ball by each detection switch is the second specific result (for example, small hit), the variable display of the identification information is stopped and displayed in the second specific combination (for example, small hit matching). In this case, the first opening / closing game is performed once from the open state in which the second variable winning device 32Y can enter the game ball to the closed state in which the second variable winning device 32Y is difficult to enter the game ball. It is provided with a second state transition function in the next game state setting process in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 to shift to the second open / close game state (for example, a small hit game) to be executed a second number of times (2R) less than the number of times of. ,
The state change function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is
When the number of fluctuations of the identification information at the time of the second specific result counted by the counting function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is within the period of the first number of fluctuations (for example, 1 to 50 times), the first 2 While the variable winning device 32Y is open, it is difficult for the game ball to enter.
When the number of fluctuations of the identification information at the time when the second specific result is counted by the counting function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is within the period of the second number of fluctuations (for example, 51 to 100 times), the second is 2 The game ball is easily entered while the variable winning device 32Y is open.
As a result, the ease of entering the second variable winning device 32Y changes according to the number of changes in the identification information at the time when the result of the lottery becomes the second specific result. Can be improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (O07), for example.

Further, when the result of the lottery is the second specific result, a specific period that can be predetermined in the second opening / closing game state (at least according to the number of changes in the identification information at the time when the second specific result is obtained) ( For example, it is equipped with a specific period control function in the small hit opening interval time setting process of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that changes (opening time, interval time, ending time).
The specific period control function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is
When the number of fluctuations of the identification information at the time when the second specific result is counted by the counting function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is within the period of the first fluctuation number, the specific period is the first specific period. By setting (for example, opening time 6 seconds, interval time 4 seconds, ending time 2 seconds), it is difficult for the game ball to enter while the second variable winning device 32Y is open.
The number of fluctuations of the identification information at the time when the second specific result is counted by the counting function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is the second number of fluctuations (for example, opening time 3 seconds, interval time 2 seconds, ending time 2 seconds). ), By setting the specific period to the second specific period, which is shorter than the first specific period, it is easy for the game ball to enter while the second variable winning device 32Y is open. do.
As a result, the ease of entering the second variable winning device 32Y changes according to the number of changes in the identification information at the time when the result of the lottery becomes the second specific result. Can be improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (O08), for example.

In the above-mentioned Example 40, the game of switching from the small hit game state in which the game ball is difficult to enter to the small hit game state in which the game ball is easy to enter has been described, but in this embodiment, not only the above game but also the game The difference is that there is a game in which the small hit game state in which the game ball is difficult to enter continues without switching from the small hit game state in which the ball is difficult to enter to the small hit game state in which the game ball is easy to enter. Further, the configuration of the game board 30 and the opening / closing time of the small hit game state are also different. Hereinafter, this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 166 to 171. The same reference numerals will be given to the configurations common to those of the 40th embodiment described above.

FIG. 166 is a front view of the game board 30 of the 41st embodiment. FIG. 167 is a lottery table for each special figure 1. FIG. 168 is a lottery table for the special figure 2. FIG. 169 is a table for setting a specific period for small hits that occurs during the value-added game after hitting the special figure 2. FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing a small hit opening interval time setting process by the main control device 261. FIG. 171 is a time chart of the opening timing of the large winning opening opening / closing member.

As shown in FIG. 166, the game board 30 of this embodiment is provided with one right side game area 30ar on the right side of the variable display device unit 35. The right game area 30ar is an area in which a game ball launched by a predetermined operation (for example, an operation of rotating the game ball launch handle 18 to a maximum rotation position on the right side or a position in front of the maximum rotation position) can flow down.

The game board 30 of this embodiment includes two large winning openings, that is, a first large winning opening 32x of the first variable winning device 32X and a second large winning opening 32y of the second variable winning device 32Y, which will be described later. ing. The first big winning opening 32x is arranged further downstream of the second big winning opening 32y provided downstream of the right game area 30ar. Specifically, the game ball that has flowed down toward the second big winning opening 32y in the closed state does not enter the second big winning opening 32y, but is a nail placed directly under the second big winning opening 32y. The flow direction can be changed by a game member such as, etc., and it is configured to face the first large winning opening 32x.

The game board 30 of the present embodiment includes a start winning device 33a for special drawing 1, a starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2, and a starting opening 34 for ordinary symbols. The start winning device 33a for the special figure 1 is a so-called navel type start port. The start winning device 33b for special figure 2 is a so-called electric chew type start opening, and the door member 32y1 that is taken in and out perpendicularly to the board surface of the game board 30 opens and closes the entry opening, and the door member is in the closed state. This is a type of starting port in which a game ball rolls on the 32y1 and flows down to the downstream side, and in the open state, the game ball flowing under the door member 32y1 is guided to a passage portion provided with a starting port sensor.

The game ball that has flowed down the right game area 30ar enters the starting opening if the starting winning device 33b for Special Figure 2 is open, and if it is closed, it does not enter the starting opening and is further downstream. Flow down to. The game ball that has flowed downstream from the start winning device 33b for the special figure 2 in the closed state enters the second large winning opening 32y if it is in the open state (small hit game state), and enters the second large winning opening 32y. If is in the closed state, it does not enter the ball and flows further downstream. A game ball that has flowed downstream from the second big winning opening 32y in the closed state enters the game ball if the first big winning opening 32x is in the open state (big hit game state), and the first big winning opening 32x is in the closed state. If so, do not enter the ball and flow further downstream. A flow path is configured so that the game ball flowing downstream from the first large winning opening 32x does not enter the starting winning device 33a for the special figure 1.

A starting port 34 for a normal symbol is provided in the middle of the right game area 30ar. The starting port 34 for a normal symbol is configured so that a game ball flowing down the right game area 30ar always passes through. In the high-probability gaming state, the frequency of the start winning device 33b for the special figure 2 being opened increases because the result of the lottery based on the entry of the starting port 34 for the normal symbol is frequently won. The game ball that has flowed down toward the special figure 2 start winning device 33b while the special figure 2 start winning device 33b is in the open state does not enter the second large winning opening 32y, but the special figure 2 start winning device 33b. The game ball that has flowed down toward the special figure 2 start winning device 33b while the winning device 33b is closed can enter the second large winning opening 32y according to the opening / closing status of the second large winning opening 32y. It is set to be. That is, in the high-probability gaming state, the game ball that has flowed down toward the start winning device 33b for special figure 2 while the start winning device 33b for special figure 2 is in the closed state is the second large open due to a small hit. It is possible to enter the winning opening 32y.

The CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is based on the fact that the result of the lottery based on the detection of the game ball by the operation port switch for the special figure 2 start winning device 33b is the small hit result, and the variation display of the symbol is a small hit combination. When the stop display is displayed, the second variable winning device 32Y is provided with a large winning opening opening / closing processing function (second state transition function) for shifting to a small hit game state in which the small hit game is executed. Further, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has a special figure 2 from the time when the special big hit result is generated to the time when the small hit result is obtained when the lottery result is the small hit result in the high probability gaming state. It is provided with a small hit opening / ending time setting processing function (specific time control function) that changes a small hit specific period (opening time, ending time) that can be predetermined in the small hit game state according to the number of fluctuations.

Hereinafter, the configuration of this embodiment will be described in detail.

As shown in FIG. 167, the winning types of the special drawing 1 big hit lottery table are 16R probability variation, 8R probability variation, and 8R normal as in the above-described 40th embodiment. The opening time, interval time, and ending time are the same as those in Example 40 described above. However, unlike the above-mentioned Example 40, when the 8R probability variation or the 16R probability variation is won, the support state is not attached, the high probability game state is reached until the next big hit occurs, and when the 8R normal is won, the support state is not attached. ..

As shown in FIG. 168, the winning types of the special figure 2 big hit lottery table are 16R probability variation (third jackpot) with a small hit rush state described later and 8R probability variation (fourth jackpot) with a small hit rush state described later. , 8R probability variation (second big hit) without small hit rush state, which will be described later, 8R normal (first big hit). In addition, in the special figure 2 big hit lottery, small hits also occur. The opening time and ending time of the small hit will be described later. If you win the 8R probability change or 16R probability change, the support state will not be attached, and you will be in the high probability game state until the next big hit occurs, and if you win the 8R normal, the support state will not be attached.

With reference to FIG. 169, an opening time and an ending time, which are specific periods when a small hit is won during a high-probability gaming state after the special figure 2 big hit (second, third, and fourth big hits), will be described. The small hit game state is a game state in which the second large winning opening 32y is opened once, and if one game ball enters during the opening time, it is closed at that time. Further, it is assumed that the period of the small hit game state from the opening to the ending is set to 2.0 seconds.

As shown in (a), when the 16R probability variation jackpot (3rd jackpot) in Special Figure 2 or the 8R probability variation jackpot (4th jackpot) in Special Figure 2 is performed, during the high probability gaming state after this jackpot round game. In the case of winning a small hit, if the number of fluctuations at the time of winning a small hit is 1 to 100, the opening time is set to 0.9 seconds and the ending time is set to 0.9 seconds, so the opening time is 0. It will be .2 seconds, which is a non-small hit rush state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the second large winning opening 32y. When the number of fluctuations at the time of winning a small hit is 101 times or more, the opening time is set to 0.2 seconds and the ending time is set to 0.2 seconds, so the opening time is 1.6 seconds, which is the first. It becomes a small hit rush state in which it is easy to put a game ball into the two major winning openings 32y.

As shown in (b), in the case of the 8R probability variation jackpot (second jackpot) shown in Special Figure 2, if a small hit is won during the high-probability gaming state after this jackpot round game, the change at the time of winning the small hit. When the number of times is 1 to 100, the opening time is set to 0.9 seconds and the ending time is set to 0.9 seconds, so that the opening time is 0.2 seconds and the non-small hit rush state is reached. Also, when the number of fluctuations at the time of winning a small hit is 101 times or more, the opening time is set to 0.9 seconds and the ending time is set to 0.9 seconds, as in the case of 1 to 100 times, so it is open. The time will be 0.2 seconds, and it will be in a non-small hit rush state.

With reference to FIG. 170, the small hit opening interval time setting process performed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 of this embodiment will be described. Differences from those described with reference to FIG. 164 of Example 40 described above will be described.

That is, after the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is determined in step S4201 to win the small hit, in step S4201A, whether or not the type of the special figure 2 big hit is the third or fourth big hit. To judge. If the type of the special figure 2 jackpot is the third or fourth jackpot, the process proceeds to step S4202, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4201B. In step S4201B, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the type of the special figure 2 jackpot is the second jackpot. If the type of the special figure 2 jackpot is the second jackpot, the process proceeds to step S4206, otherwise (that is, if the type of the special figure 2 jackpot is the first jackpot), the player falls into the normal gaming state, and in the normal gaming state. Since no small hit occurs, this process ends.

In step S4202, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 reads out the number of fluctuations at the time of winning the small hit (the number of fluctuations from the end of the immediately preceding jackpot round game). In step S4203A, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the number of fluctuations is 1 to 100 times. If the number of fluctuations is 1 to 100, the process proceeds to step S4204, and if not (that is, the number of fluctuations is 101 or later), the process proceeds to step S4205.

In step S4204, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has a second big winning opening 32y in the period of the small hit gaming state that occurs from 1 to 100 times when the type of the special figure 2 big hit is the 3rd and 4th big hits. In order to lengthen the closed period (make it difficult to increase the number of prize balls in the small hit state), set the opening time to 0.9 seconds and the ending time to 0.9 seconds, and end this process. In step S4205, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 closes the second big winning opening 32y in the period of the small hit gaming state that occurs after 101 times when the type of the special figure 2 big hit is the third and fourth big hits. In order to shorten the period of the state (make it easier to increase the number of prize balls in the small hit state), the opening time is set to 0.2 seconds and the ending time is set to 0.2 seconds, and this process is terminated.

In step S4206, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has a second big winning opening in the period of the small hit gaming state when the type of the special figure 2 big hit is the second big hit (from 1 to 100 times to the 101st and subsequent times). In order to lengthen the closed period of 32y (make it difficult to increase the number of prize balls in the small hit state), the opening time is set to 0.9 seconds and the ending time is set to 0.9 seconds to end this process.

As a result, when the type of the special figure 2 big hit is the 3rd and 4th big hits, the number of fluctuations at the time of the small hit winning is changed when the small hit is won during the high probability gaming state after the 3rd and 4th big hits. From 1 to 100 times, it is difficult to increase the prize balls by small hits, but after the number of fluctuations at the time of winning small hits is 101 times, it is possible to easily increase the prize balls by small hits. In addition, when the type of the special figure 2 big hit is the second big hit, if the small hit is won during the high probability gaming state after the second big hit, the number of fluctuations at the time of the small hit is 1 to 100 times. However, even after the 101st time, it is possible to make it difficult for the prize balls to increase due to small hits.

The opening / closing pattern of the large winning opening 32y of the second large winning opening 32y will be described with reference to FIG. 171.

As shown in (a), the opening / closing pattern of the second big winning opening 32y during the small hit rush state is the opening period (closed state) from the start of the small hit game state to 0.2 seconds, and the start is 0. The open state is from 2 seconds to the start 1.8 seconds, and the ending time (closed state) is from the start 1.8 seconds to the start 2.0 seconds. That is, in the opening / closing pattern of the second big winning opening 32y in the small hit rush state, the open state period is 1.6 seconds in the small hit gaming state period (2.0 seconds), and the closed state period. Is 0.4 seconds, so it is easy to insert a game ball into the second big winning opening 32y.

As shown in (b), the opening / closing pattern of the second big winning opening 32y in the non-small hit rush state is the opening period (closed state) from the start of the small hit game state to 0.9 seconds, and the start is 0. The open state is from 9.9 seconds to the start 1.1 seconds, and the ending time (closed state) is from the start 1.1 seconds to the start 2.0 seconds. That is, the opening / closing pattern of the second big winning opening 32y in the non-small hit rush state is 0.2 seconds in the open state of the small hit gaming state period (2.0 seconds), and is in the closed state. Since the period is 1.8 seconds, it is difficult to insert a game ball into the second major winning opening 32y.

The opening / closing pattern of the start winning device 33b for special figure 2 is the same as in the case of the above-described 40, when the game ball is continuously fired through the normal symbol start opening 34 even during the small hit game state. In addition, the opening and closing operation (for example, the operation of opening for 2 seconds and closing for 2 seconds) is repeated, but as described above, since the opening time of the second big winning opening 32y is long during the small hit rush state, the game of one ball Although the ball can be entered, it is often impossible to enter the game ball into the second large winning opening 32y because the opening time of the second large winning opening 32y during the non-small hit rush state is very short.

In this way, in the high-probability gaming state, in the small hit game state that occurs from 1 to 100 times after the end of the special figure 2 big hit round, the special figure 2 big hit type is either the 2nd big hit or the 3rd or 4th big hit. Even if there is, it becomes a addictive state where it is difficult to put a game ball into the second big winning opening 32y, and in the small hit game state that occurs after 101 times after the end of the special figure 2 big hit round, the special figure 2 big hit type is the second. If it is a big hit, it will continue to be addicted, but if the special figure 2 big hit type is the 3rd or 4th big hit, the more addicted it is, the more prize balls can be increased.

In addition, in the result display (confirmed symbol) of the special figure 2 jackpot, if it is not possible to determine whether the special figure 2 jackpot type is the second jackpot or the third or fourth jackpot, after the special figure 2 jackpot round is completed. Even if it is found that is in a high-probability gaming state, whether or not it is a small hit gaming state in which it is easy to insert a game ball into the second big winning opening 32y until 101 times or later after the end of the special figure 2 jackpot round. It is possible to give a feeling of expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the small hit game state (small hit rush state) in which it is easy to enter the game ball 101 times or later after the end of the special figure 2 big hit round.

A display mode up to the small hit rush state and the small hit rush state will be described with reference to FIG. 172. FIG. 172 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of the effect performed during the big hit round game to the value-added game.

As shown in (a), the third symbol display device 42 displays the all symbol stop screen 43e on which the jackpot combination is confirmed and displayed. As this jackpot combination, for example, the jackpot combination of "3" is displayed, but it corresponds to the 8R probability variable jackpot with a small hit rush. That is, it is up to the player to decide whether the jackpot combination displayed on the third symbol display device 42 corresponds to the 8R / 16R probability variation with the small hit rush, the 8R probability variation without the small hit rush, or the 8R normal. Is not specified.

After that, the opening screen 43h (not shown) is displayed on the third symbol display device 42, and the round screen 43i shown in (b) is displayed. On the round screen 43i, right-handed information 44h during the round, round number information 44i, and probability variation zone transition suggestion information 44i1 suggesting whether or not to transition to the high probability gaming state (probability variation zone) after the end of the jackpot round game are displayed. It is displayed. In the round number information 44i, for example, "1R" indicating the first round is displayed. The probabilistic zone transition suggestion information 44i1 is, for example, information displayed in a production in which a player PY, which is an image showing an own character, and an enemy character TK, which is an image showing an enemy character, confront each other. It is displayed as text information such as "Final zone entry confirmed!". The probability change zone transition suggestion information 44i1 suggests that 8R probability change or 16R probability change occurs.

As shown in (c), when the round number information 44i indicates "8R", the probability variation zone transition suggestion information 44i is such that if the player PY wins in the confrontation between the player PY and the enemy character TK, the player PY wins. It is displayed as text information "Final Thorn rush confirmed!" Along with an image showing that it has been done. From this, it can be suggested that the jackpot that triggered this jackpot round game is an 8R probability variable jackpot.

As shown in (d), the high-probability game state screen 43k is displayed on the third symbol display device 42 after the jackpot round game is completed. On the high-probability gaming state screen 43k, right-handed information 44m during the high-probability gaming state, fluctuation frequency information 44m2 during the high-probability gaming state, and probability variation zone transition suggestion information 44i1 are displayed. The probability change zone transition suggestion information 44i1 is displayed as character information such as "Enter the final zone!" When entering the high probability gaming state. Further, on the high-probability gaming state screen 43k, the character information "first rotation" is displayed as the high-probability gaming state change frequency information 44m. Further, the third symbol display device 42 displays a high-speed fluctuating screen 43c indicating that the fluctuating is in progress.

As shown in (d), the third symbol display device 42 displays an all-symbol stop screen 43e indicating that the result of the first variation display during the high-probability gaming state is out of order. After this, the deviation continues from the second rotation to the 99th rotation. As shown in (e), the third symbol display device 42 displays a high-speed fluctuating screen 43c indicating that the fluctuation display at the 100th rotation is performed. As shown in (f), the third symbol display device 42 displays a development reach display screen 43g indicating that the variation display at the 100th rotation has entered the reach development effect.

As shown in (g), on the development reach display screen 43g, along with the final confrontation effect in which the player PY and the enemy character TK confront each other, the small hit rush transition suggestion information suggesting whether or not to shift to the small hit rush state is displayed. 44m10 is displayed. The small hit rush transition suggestion information 44m10 is displayed as, for example, character information such as "final confrontation! Enter the power-up zone even in a draw!". That is, if the result of the 100th variation display is off, it is suggested that the result of the final confrontation is a draw in terms of the production, and the player enters the small hit rush state.

As shown in (h), when the result of the reach development effect of the variation display at the 100th rotation is out of order, the third symbol display device 42 displays the result of the reach out of reach of the reach development effect and shifts to the small hit rush. Suggestion information 44m10 is displayed. The small hit rush transition suggestion information 44m10 is displayed as, for example, character information such as "draw!". Further, as shown in (i), the third symbol display device 42 has. When the result of the 100th variation display is confirmed as out of reach, the confirmed display of out of reach and the small hit rush transition suggestion information 44m10 are displayed. The small hit rush transition suggestion information 44m10 is displayed as text information such as "The game goes to the next stage!".

As shown in (j), after the 100th rotation variation display is completed on the third symbol display device 42, the small hit rush transition information 44m10 is displayed on the third symbol display device 42, which is a high-probability state screen. 43k (small hit rush zone screen 43k1) is displayed. The small hit rush transition suggestion information 44m10 is displayed as, for example, character information such as "power-up zone entry". The small hit rush zone screen 43k1 is a screen shown in a display mode different from that of the high-probability state screens 43k from (d) to (i). From these, it is suggested that from the 101st rotation onward, the game shifts to the small hit rush state in the high probability gaming state.

As shown in (k), the third symbol display device 42 displays a high-speed changing screen 43c showing the 101st change display in the small hit rush state. As shown in (l), the third symbol display device 42 has a small hit stop screen 43e1 indicating that the result of the 101st variation display is a small hit result, and a second big prize in the small hit game state. Small hit winning suggestion information 44m11 suggesting that there is a winning in the mouth 32y is displayed.

On the small hit stop screen 43e1, for example, decorative symbols SZ (for example, "7" and "3") are displayed in the left column and the right column, and the small hit symbol KZ (for example, "small hit") indicating the small hit winning is displayed in the center column. Design) is displayed. This makes it easier for the player to understand the small hit winning. The small hit prize suggestion information 44m11 is displayed as, for example, text information such as "power up!". This makes it easy for the player to understand that the prize ball is generated in the small hit game state.

After this, the small hit rush state continues until the next big hit winning result occurs. If the next big hit winning result is the 3rd or 4th big hit, the small hit rush state will occur again after the 101st rotation after the end of the big hit round game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 173, a display mode different from that of FIG. 172 up to the small hit rush state and the small hit rush state will be described. FIG. 173 is a diagram illustrating another display mode of the effect performed during the big hit round game to the value-added game.

As shown in (a), the third symbol display device 42 displays the all symbol stop screen 43e on which the jackpot combination is confirmed and displayed. For this jackpot combination, for example, the jackpot combination of "3" is displayed, but unlike the above description of FIG. 172, it corresponds to the 8R probability variable jackpot without the small hit rush.

Therefore, as shown in (b) and (c), the point at which the player PY wins in the confrontation production during the jackpot round, and as shown in (d) to (g), the 100th variable display of the final zone. The point that the final confrontation effect is performed in the reach development effect is the same as the explanation of FIG. 172 described above, but the point that the enemy character TK wins in the final effect is different.

That is, as shown in (h), when the result of the reach development effect of the variation display at the 100th rotation is different from the third symbol display device 42, the third symbol display device 42 has the reach development effect. The result display of the reach loss and the small hit rush transition suggestion information 44m10 are displayed. The small hit rush transition suggestion information 44m10 is displayed as text information of "Sorry!" Along with an image showing that the player PY has lost to the enemy character TK, and it is suggested that the small hit rush transition not shift to the small hit rush zone.

As shown in (i), the third symbol display device 42. When the result of the 100th variation display is confirmed as out of reach, the confirmation display of out of reach and the small hit rush transition suggestion information 44m10 are displayed. The small hit rush transition suggestion information 44m10 is displayed as text information such as "Sorry! Prepare for the next!". This suggests that the high-probability gaming state will continue, although the small hit rush state will not be entered.

As shown in (j), after the 100th rotation variation display is completed on the third symbol display device 42, the small hit rush transition suggestion information 44m10 is displayed on the third symbol display device 42 in a high probability state. The screen 43k is displayed. The small hit rush transition suggestion information 44m10 is displayed as text information such as "entering the re-challenge zone". This suggests that from the 101st rotation onward, the small hit rush state has not been entered, but the high-probability gaming state continues. As shown in (k), the third symbol display device 42 does not shift to the small hit rush state, but the variable display is performed on the high probability state screen 43k.

In this way, at the time of displaying the lottery result of the special figure 2 big hit, the player does not clearly distinguish between the 8R and 16R probability variation with the small hit rush and the 8R probability variation without the small hit rush, and after the jackpot round ends. By performing a common display effect until the number of fluctuations during a high-probability emergency state reaches 100, there is no difference in the number of big hit rounds. Up to 100 times, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the game ball changes to a state in which it is easy to enter the second variable winning device 32Y (small hit rush state).

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment 41, the game board 30 has a game area 30a through which the game ball flows down, and the second large winning opening opening / closing member 32y1 is provided and flows down the game area 30a. A second variable winning device 32Y that changes between an open state in which a game ball is inserted and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area 30a is not entered, and numerical information related to the game (for example, a high-probability game state in an unsupported state). The counting function in the small hit opening interval time setting process of the CPU 501 of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that counts the number of fluctuations since the end of the jackpot round game accompanied by the number information, and the number information is a predetermined number (for example, the number of fluctuations is the 101st). Based on the above, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that changes from a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable winning device 32Y to a state in which the game ball is easy to enter in the second variable winning device 32Y. It is equipped with a hit opening interval time setting process and a state change function in the second big winning opening opening / closing process for small hits. As a result, the ease of entering the second variable winning device 32Y changes according to the counting status of the numerical information related to the game, so that the fun of the game can be improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (O00) described above, for example.

Further, when the first specific result (for example, 8R, 16R probability variation big hit with a small hit rush) occurs, the state change function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is the second until the number information becomes a predetermined number. If the variable winning device 32Y maintains a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter, and a second specific result (for example, an 8R probability variable big hit without a small hit rush) occurs, even after the number information reaches a predetermined number, The state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable winning device 32Y is maintained. As a result, the ease of entering the second variable winning device 32Y changes according to the type of the specific result and the counting situation when the number information related to the game becomes a predetermined number. Can be improved. For example, by performing a common display effect until the number information reaches a predetermined number without clearly indicating to the player whether it is the first specific result or the second specific result, the second variable winning device 32Y has a game ball. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the ball will change to a state in which it is easy to enter the ball. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (O09) described above, for example.

Further, in the state change function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, a game ball is inserted into the second variable winning device 32Y for a predetermined period (for example, a period until the next big hit occurs) after the number information becomes a predetermined number. Maintain a state where it is easy to ball. As a result, it becomes easy to enter the second variable winning device 32Y for a predetermined period when the number information related to the game becomes a predetermined number, so that the fun of the game can be improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (O02) described above, for example.

Further, the counting function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 counts numerical information (for example, the number of fluctuations) regarding the game after the end of the advantageous gaming state (for example, a jackpot round game with a high probability gaming state) that is advantageous to the player. .. As a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game after the end of the advantageous gaming state which is advantageous for the player. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (O03), for example.

Further, the counting function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 counts numerical information related to the game in a specific period (for example, a period in which the number of fluctuations is 1 to 100 times) after the end of the advantageous gaming state. Thereby, it is possible to improve the interest of the game in a specific period after the end of the specific game state which is advantageous for the player. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (O04) described above, for example.

Further, the state change function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 maintains a state in which a game ball can easily enter the second variable winning device 32Y for the above-mentioned predetermined period, and then a third specific result is generated as a specific result. If this is the case (for example, when the next normal jackpot is won), the game ball is returned to a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable winning device 32Y. As a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game for a predetermined period until the game ball returns to a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable winning device 32Y. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (O10) described above, for example.

In the above-mentioned Example 41, even in a state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable winning device 32Y, a certain amount of the game ball is entered, but the second variable winning device 32Y is used. When it is difficult for the game ball to enter, the state in which the game ball hardly enters may be used.

Further, as the specific period that can be predetermined in the small hit game state, the opening time and the interval time have been described as an example, but the open time in the small hit game state may be used. In this case, when it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable winning device 32Y, the opening time of the second variable winning device 32Y is short (for example, about 0.2 seconds), and it is difficult for the game ball to enter. The state in which the game ball can easily enter the second variable winning device 32Y may be such that the opening time of the second variable winning device 32Y is long (for example, about 2.0 seconds).

In Example 41 described above, after the end of the 16R probability variation (third jackpot) and 8R probability variation (fourth jackpot) jackpot round games of Special Figure 2, 1 to 100 times are set as non-small hit rush states, and 101 times or later. Was set as a small hit rush state, but a configuration may be made in which a small hit rush state and a non-small hit rush state are alternately generated according to the number of fluctuations. Hereinafter, it will be described with reference to FIGS. 174 and 175. FIG. 174 is a table for setting a specific period for small hits that occurs during the value-added game after hitting the special figure 2 of the embodiment 42. FIG. 175 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of the effect performed during the big hit round game to the value-added game.

The setting of the specific period (opening time, ending time) for the small hit that occurs during the value-added game after hitting the special figure 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 174.

As shown in (a), when the jackpot type in Special Figure 2 is 16R probability variation (3rd jackpot) and 8R probability variation (4th jackpot), the non-small hit rush state is 1 to 1 after the end of the jackpot round game. It occurs 100 times, 201 to 300 times (hereinafter, every 100 times), and the small hit rush state occurs 101 to 200 times, 301 to 400 times (hereinafter, every 100 times) after the end of the big hit round game. .. As shown in (b), when the jackpot type in Special Figure 2 is 8R probability variation (second jackpot), the non-small hit rush state continues from the first time onward, as in Example 41.

Next, with reference to FIG. 175, a display mode of the effect performed during the big hit round game to the value-added game will be described.

(A) to (d) correspond to (i) to (l) of FIGS. 172 of the above-mentioned Example 41, and are the 100th fluctuations in the high-probability gaming state after the end of the jackpot round game of the special figure 2. It is shown that when the big hit result is not obtained, the small hit rush zone 43k1 shifts. As shown in (e), when the 200th fluctuation also results in a small hit in the small hit rush zone 43k1, the screen returns to the high probability state screen 43k (probability variation zone) as shown in (f). On the high-probability state screen 43k, the character information "final zone re-entry!" Is displayed as the probabilistic zone transition suggestion information 44i1, suggesting that the probabilistic zone has shifted to the probabilistic zone again. As shown in (g) to (j), when the fluctuation of 300 times is deviated in the probability variation zone (for example, the development reach is deviated), as shown in (k), the small hit rush zone 43k1 is relocated. do. In the small hit rush zone 43k1, the character information "Power-up zone re-entry!" Is displayed as the small hit rush transition suggestion information 44m10, suggesting that the small hit rush zone has been re-entered, as shown in (l). In addition, it will be in a small hit rush state from 301 to 400 times.

In this way, after the big hit round game with the 3rd and 4th big hits in Special Figure 2 is completed, every 100 times during the high-probability game state, the small hit rush state and the non-small hit rush state are switched, so that the addictive state is reached. You can get a good balance of prize balls in. As a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game in the high-probability game state.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment 42, the state change function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is numerical information regarding the game counted in the value-added game state (for example, the high probability game state). Depending on the number of fluctuations), a state in which the game ball is easy to enter the second variable winning device 32Y (for example, a small hit rush state) and a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable winning device 32Y (for example, non-balls). Switch between (small hit rush state) and. As a result, the game value based on the ball entering the second variable winning device 32Y can be given in a well-balanced manner according to the numerical information about the game counted in the value-added game state. It is possible to improve the interest. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (O11) described above, for example.

Since the number of fluctuations and the opening / closing time of the small hit rush state are examples, a larger number of fluctuations / opening / closing time and a smaller number of fluctuations / opening / closing time may be used.

In the above-mentioned Examples 41 and 42, there was only one type of small hit rush state, the opening time was 0.2 seconds, the ending time was 0.2 seconds, and the opening time was 1.6 seconds. There may be types. Hereinafter, it will be described with reference to FIGS. 176 and 177. FIG. 176 is a table for setting a specific period for small hits that occurs during the value-added game after hitting the special figure 2 of the embodiment 43. FIG. 177 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of the effect performed during the big hit round game to the value-added game.

The setting of the specific period (opening time, ending time) for the small hit that occurs during the value-added game after hitting the special figure 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 176.

As shown in (a), in the first small hit rush state in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second big winning opening 32y than in the non-small hit rush state, the opening time is 0.3 seconds and the ending time is 0. The opening time is set to 3 seconds and 1.4 seconds. In the second small hit rush state, where it is easier to put a game ball into the second big winning opening 32y than in the first small hit rush state, the opening time is 0.2 seconds, the ending time is 0.2 seconds, and the opening time is 1. It is set to .6 seconds. In the third small hit rush state, where it is easier to put a game ball into the second big winning opening 32y than in the second small hit rush state, the opening time is 0.1 seconds, the ending time is 0.1 seconds, and the opening time is 1. It is set to 0.8 seconds.

When the jackpot type in Special Figure 2 is 16R probability variation (3rd jackpot) and 8R probability variation (4th jackpot), the non-small hit rush state occurs 1 to 100 times after the end of the jackpot round game, and the first The small hit rush state occurs 101 to 200 times after the end of the big hit round game, the second small hit rush state occurs 201 to 300 times after the end of the big hit round game, and the third small hit rush state occurs. Occurs 301 to 400 times after the end of the jackpot round game. As shown in (b), when the jackpot type in Special Figure 2 is 8R probability variation (second jackpot), the non-small hit rush state continues from the first time onward, as in Example 41.

Next, with reference to FIG. 177, a display mode of the effect performed during the big hit round game to the value-added game will be described.

(A) to (e) correspond to (a) to (e) of FIG. 175 of the above-mentioned Example 42, and are the 100th fluctuations in the high-probability gaming state after the end of the jackpot round game of Special Figure 2. It is shown that when the big hit result is not obtained, the first small hit rush zone 43k1 is transferred. As shown in (e), when the 200th fluctuation also results in a small hit in the first small hit rush zone 43k1, the transition to the second small hit rush zone 43k2 is performed as shown in (f). In the second small hit rush zone 43k2, the character information "Entering the second power-up zone!" Is displayed as the small hit rush transition suggestion information 44m10, suggesting that the transition to the next level small hit rush zone has occurred. There is. As shown in (g) to (i), when a small hit result is obtained in the second small hit rush state of 201 to 300 times, the transition to the third small hit rush zone 43k3 is performed as shown in (j). do. In the 3rd small hit rush zone 43k3, the character information "Enter the 3rd power-up zone!" Is displayed as the small hit rush transition suggestion information 44m10, suggesting that the player has moved to the next level small hit rush zone. As shown in (k) to (l), the third small hit rush state is reached from 301 to 400 times.

In this way, after the end of the big hit round game with the 3rd and 4th big hits in Special Figure 2, every time you get hooked 100 times during the high probability game state, you will enter the 2nd big winning opening 32y in the small hit rush state. As the ease increases, the prize balls can be increased step by step according to the addictive state. As a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game in the high-probability game state.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 43rd embodiment, the state change function in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is numerical information regarding the game counted in the value-added game state (for example, the high probability game state). Depending on (for example, the number of fluctuations), the state in which the game ball is easy to enter the second variable winning device 32Y (for example, the small hit rush state) is gradually switched. As a result, the game value given based on the ball entering the second variable winning device 32Y can be gradually increased or decreased according to the numerical information about the game counted in the value-added game state, so that the value-added game state can be increased or decreased. It is possible to improve the fun of the game in. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (O12) described above, for example.

In this embodiment, the opening time and ending time in the small hit rush state are gradually reduced according to the number of addictions to gradually increase the opening time, but in the non-small hit rush state, conversely, The opening time may be gradually reduced by gradually increasing the opening time and ending time according to the number of addictions.

The pachinko machine 10 of the 44th embodiment executes an effect corresponding to the long-pressing operation when, for example, the decision button 81 of the frame buttons 80 is long-pressed. The pachinko machine 10 of the 44th embodiment will be described first from the control system.

The operation means for performing the long press operation is not limited to the operation means for pressing the button such as the enter button 81, but may be an operation means for tilting the lever such as the operation lever, or an operation means such as a touch panel. It may be an operation means such as holding a hand to operate. Instead of the long press operation, the continuous hitting operation may be performed in which the enter button 81 is repeatedly hit. Further, by performing a long press operation, a display means such as the third symbol display device 42 may perform an operation for executing automatic continuous hitting in which display information indicating repeated hits is displayed.

FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the determination button input monitoring / effect processing by the sub-control device of the 44th embodiment. FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing a variation display mode setting process by the sub control device. FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing a button long press effect setting process by the sub control device 262. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing a button long press effect display process by the display control device 45.

The CPU 501 of the main control device 261 performs main control regarding the game. The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 has an effect execution function of causing the third symbol display device 42 to execute a predetermined display effect based on the result of the jackpot determination by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 (variable display mode setting function shown in FIG. 179). To be equipped. By this effect execution function, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 has a predetermined period (for example, long press start) in which the operation of the decision button 81 is enabled in a specific mode (for example, a long press mode) within the valid period in which the operation of the decision button 81 is valid. When it is performed (from 3 seconds), a long press response effect is executed during a predetermined display effect.

The long-press compatible effect is, for example, the result of the long-press charge effect in which the value of the charge counter increases according to the time (maximum 3 seconds) when the player operates the decision button 81 in the long-press mode, and the long-press charge effect. It is a long-press charge attack effect composed of a charge attack effect in which the own character attacks an enemy character based on the power acquired as.

As this effect execution function, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 also determines that there is no operation in the long press mode within the period in which it is determined whether or not there is an operation in the long press mode of the decision button 81. Continue to execute the long press charge effect. Specifically, for example, the operation detection function shown below (the determination button detection function of step S2312 shown in FIG. 178, the determination function of the button long press effect flag in step S4501, and the determination function of the validity period of step S4502). , The operation continuation determination function (the checkpoint passage determination function of step S4509 shown in FIG. 178) is provided.

That is, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 can detect the operation of the determination button 81 by the player at predetermined time intervals (for example, 0.01 second intervals) within the valid period by this operation detection function. Further, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262, when the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in a long-pressed mode by this operation continuation determination function, thereafter, at specific time intervals (for example, 0) longer than the 0.01 second interval. At the determination timing provided every 30 seconds), it is determined whether or not the operation of the long press mode is continued based on the presence or absence of detection of the operation of the determination button 81 by the player.

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 is provided with an effect execution function composed of each of the above-mentioned functions. Control execution.

As a result, even if the operation of the decision button 81 in the long press mode is interrupted after the long press charge effect is started, the operation in the long press mode is performed within the period in which the presence or absence of the operation in the long press mode is determined. If is restarted, the execution of the long press charge effect will continue, so it is possible to eliminate the need to wait for the time until the long press charge effect is in the state before the interruption by restarting the operation of the enter button 81 from the beginning. can. For example, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted by the time when a predetermined period (specific time interval) elapses after the operation of the enter button 81 is performed in the long press mode, the player will perform the operation by the next determination timing. When the operation of the enter button 81 is resumed, it is determined that the operation of the long press mode is continued. Therefore, it is necessary to wait for the time until the operation of the enter button 81 reaches the predetermined period in the long press mode from the beginning. do not have. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the fun of the long press response effect.

The function for controlling the execution of the above-mentioned long press corresponding effect will be described.

As shown in FIG. 178, in the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262, the operation of the enter button was detected in step S2312, but the normal screen display, the demo screen display, the high-speed fluctuation, the opening effect, the ending effect, and the button suggestion effect were performed. If neither timing is available, the process proceeds to step S4501. If the operation of the enter button is not detected in step S2312, the process proceeds to step S4512.

In step S4501, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the button long press effect flag is 1. If the button long press effect is 1, the process proceeds to step S4502, and if not, this process ends. In step S4502, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the long press operation of the decision button 81 for executing the button long press effect is within the valid period. The valid period is a period during which it is determined whether or not the decision button 81 is operated in the long-press mode (for example, the maximum execution time (6.00 seconds) from the start of the long-press charge effect to the long-press charge effect). Of the period up to), it is an effective period for the start of the long press effect (for example, the period from the start of the long press charge effect to 4.00 seconds) determined in consideration of the effect time. If it is within the valid period described later, the process proceeds to step S4503, and if not, the present process is terminated.

In step S4503, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the long press flag is 0. If the long press flag is 0, that is, at the start time of the long press operation, the process proceeds to step S4504, and if not, that is, if the long press operation is being executed, the process proceeds to step S4507.

In step S4504, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 activates the long press timer for the long press effect, and proceeds to step S4505. In step S4505, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the pressing detection of the decision button 81 has continued for 0.10 seconds. If it continues for 0.10 seconds, it is determined that the long press operation has been established, and the process proceeds to step S4506. If not, the long press operation has not yet been performed, and this process ends.

In step S4506, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the long press flag to 1, and proceeds to step S4507. In step S4507, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the long press timer has counted 0.03 n seconds (n is an integer from 1 to 100). If the long press timer counts 0.03 n seconds, the process proceeds to step S4508. If not, the process ends.

In step S4508, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 increments the long press charge counter by +1 each time the long press timer counts 0.03 n seconds, and proceeds to step S4509. Since the long press charge effect is performed for 3.00 seconds, the value of the charge counter increases from 1 to 100.

In step S4509, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the count time of the long press timer is 0.3 n seconds (n = an integer from 1 to 10). If the long press timer counts 0.3 n seconds, the process proceeds to step S4510, and if not, this process ends.

In step S4510, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 increments the checkpoint passage counter by +1 each time the long press timer counts 0.3 n seconds, and ends this process. 0.3n seconds is a checkpoint for a long press charge effect. Since the long press charge effect is performed for 3.00 seconds, there are 10 checkpoints from 1 to 10.

When the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines in step S4503 described above that the long press flag is not 0, that is, when it is determined that the enter button 81 is already being operated in the long press mode, steps S4504 to step. S4506 is skipped, and steps 4507 to S4510 described above are executed. As described above, by repeating the above-mentioned process every time the press of the decision button 81 is detected during the operation in the long press mode, it is determined that the operation in the long press mode is continued.

In step S4512, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the button long press effect flag is 1 when it is determined in step S2312 described above that the press of the decision button 81 is not detected. If the button long press effect flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S4513, and if not, this process ends. In step S4513, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the long press flag is 1. If the long press flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S4514, and if not, this process ends. That is, in steps S4512 and S4513, it is detected whether or not the operation of the decision button 81 in the long-pressed mode is interrupted during the execution of the button long-pressed effect.

In step S4514, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 reads out the value of the checkpoint passage counter in step S4510 described above, and proceeds to step S4515. In step S4515, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the no detection continues until the time when the next checkpoint elapses. In other words, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines in step S4515 whether or not the restart condition that the operation is restarted by the next checkpoint is satisfied. The time point at which the next checkpoint has elapsed is determined by whether or not the long press timer has counted 0.3n + 0.3 [seconds] (where n is the value of the checkpoint passing counter read in step S4510 described above). To. If no detection continues until the time when the next checkpoint elapses, the process proceeds to step S4516. If not, the present process is terminated, and the determination as to whether or not the operation of the enter button 81 is detected is repeated. That is, in step S4514 and step S4515, when the operation of the decision button 81 is interrupted in the long press mode during the execution of the long press corresponding effect, the operation of the decision button 81 is interrupted during the long press corresponding effect. Detects whether or not the next checkpoint is crossed. If the interruption of the operation of the enter button 81 during the long press response effect does not exceed the next checkpoint, this process is repeated, so the operation of the enter button 81 may be rediscovered before the next checkpoint is exceeded. If so, the long press response production will continue.

If no detection continues until the next checkpoint elapses, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 changes the long press flag to 0 in step S4516 and returns the long press timer to 0 in step S4517. Then, in step S4518, the long press charge counter is returned to 0, and in step S4519, the checkpoint passage counter is returned to 0, and the long press charge effect is completed. This ends this process. That is, in steps S4516 to S4519, when the operation of the decision button 81 in the long press mode is interrupted during the execution of the long press response effect, the operation of the decision button 81 is interrupted during the long press response effect. If exceeds the next checkpoint, the long press response effect ends at that point.

In this way, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted after the long press response effect is started, if the player's operation of the decision button 81 is resumed by the determination timing, the long press response effect (long press response effect). Since the execution of the push charge effect and the long press charge attack effect performed as a result of the long press charge effect) is continued, it is possible to eliminate the need to wait for the time until the operation of the enter button 81 becomes the long press mode from the beginning. can. Further, particularly regarding the long press charge effect, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted after the long press corresponding effect is started, the player determines by the judgment timing regardless of the length of the interrupted time. If the operation of the decision button 81 is resumed, the execution of the long press charge effect is continued even after this determination timing, so that it is not necessary to wait for the time until the operation of the decision button 81 becomes the long press mode from the beginning. Can be done. Further, if the operation of the determination button 81 by the player is not restarted by the determination timing after the detection of the player's operation is interrupted after the long press response effect is started, the long press response effect is performed at this determination timing. Is finished (the long-press charge effect is finished, and the long-press charge attack effect that is performed as a result of the long-press charge effect is not performed), so that it is easy to reduce neglect of the operation.

Next, the variation display mode setting process of the above-described embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 179. The same process as the variable display mode setting process shown in FIG. 42 will be omitted.

In step S2474A, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the command with the button long press effect is received when the variation pattern designation command is received in the above-mentioned step S2471. If a command with long press of the button is received, the process proceeds to step S2474B, and if not, this process ends.

In step S2474B, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the button long press effect flag to 1, and proceeds to step S2474C. In step S2474C, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 executes the button long press effect setting process described below.

Next, the button long press effect setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 180.

In step S4601, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not it is the advance notice start timing for notifying the start of the long press corresponding effect. If it is the advance notice start timing, the process proceeds to step S4602, otherwise the process ends. In step S4602, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets a long press notice display command, and proceeds to step S4603. In step S4603, it is determined whether or not the advance notice time has ended. If the advance notice time is over, the process proceeds to step S4604, and if not, the present process is terminated. In step S4604, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets a long press effect start command and ends this process.

In step S4605, when it is determined in step S4601 that the advance notice start timing is not reached, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not it is within the valid time for detecting the decision button 81. If it is within the valid time, the process proceeds to step S4606, otherwise the process ends. In step S4606, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 reads the value of the long press flag and proceeds to step S4607. In step S4607, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the long press flag is 1. If the long press flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S4608, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4622.

In step S4608, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the immediately preceding long press flag is 0. If the last-minute long-press flag is 0, it is determined that the operation is started in the long-press mode, and the process proceeds to step S4609. In step S4609, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets a long press charge start command, and proceeds to step S4610.

In step S4610, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the long press charge counter has been incremented by 1. If the long press charge counter is incremented by 1, the process proceeds to step S4611, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4612. In step S4611, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the long press charge + 1 command, and proceeds to step S4612.

In step S4612, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the long press charge time has ended. If the long press charge time is completed, the process proceeds to step S4613, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4615. In step S4613, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the charge is 91 to 100%. If the charge is 91 to 100%, the process proceeds to step S4614, and if not, the process proceeds to step S4615. In step S4614, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the charge command A and proceeds to step S4618. This charge command A is a command for displaying the charge attack image 45d-A, which will be described later as "mystery A attack".

In step S4615, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the charge is 50 to 90%. If the charge is 50 to 90 percent, the process proceeds to step S4616, otherwise (that is, if the charge is 1 to 49 percent), the process proceeds to step S4617. In step S4616, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the charge command B and proceeds to step S4618. The charge command B is a command for displaying the charge attack image 45db called "true B attack" described later. In step S4617, the charge is less than 50, so the charge command C is set and the process proceeds to step S4618. The charge command C is a command for displaying the charge attack image 45d-C, which will be described later as "Haste C attack".

In step S4618, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the long press charge effect time has ended. If the long press charge effect time has ended, the process proceeds to step S4619A, and if not, the present process ends. In step S4619, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the long press effect end command and proceeds to step S4620.

In step S4620, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 returns the button long press effect flag to 0, and proceeds to step S4621. In step S4621, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 returns the long press flag, the long press timer, the long press charge counter, and the checkpoint passage counter to 0, and ends this process.

In step S4622, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the immediately preceding long press flag is 1 when it is determined in step S4607 described above that the long press flag is not 1. If the last-minute long-press flag is 1, that is, if the operation in the long-press mode is interrupted, the process proceeds to step S4623, and if not, this process ends.

In step S4623, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not there is a remaining time in which the long press charge effect can be redone. If there is no time left to redo, the process proceeds to step S4612. If there is remaining time that can be redone, the process proceeds to step S4624. In step S4624, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets a redo command for redoing the long press charge effect, and proceeds to step S4621. In step S4621, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 returns each of the above-mentioned flags to 0 in response to the interruption of the operation in the long press mode, and ends this process.

Next, the button long press effect display process performed by the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 will be described with reference to FIG. 181.

In step S4701, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the long press advance notice display command in step S4602 described above has been received. If the long press notice display command has been received, the process proceeds to step S4702, and if not, the process proceeds to step S4706. In step S4702, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs display control for displaying a long press advance notice image on the third symbol display device 42, and proceeds to step S4703.

In step S4703, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the long press advance notice time has ended. If the long press notice time has ended, the process proceeds to step S4704, and if not, the present process ends. In step S4704, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 erases the long press advance notice image from the third symbol display device 42, and proceeds to step S4705. In step S4705, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs display control for displaying the long-pressed effect image on the third symbol display device 42, and ends this process.

In step S4706, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the long press charge start command has been received. If the long press charge start command has been received, the process proceeds to step S4707, and if not, the process proceeds to step S4725. In step S4707, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs display control for displaying the long-pressed charge image on the third symbol display device 42, and proceeds to step S4708. For example, information such as "charge 0%" is displayed until the operation in the long press mode is started.

In step S4708, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the long press charge + 1 command has been received. If the long press charge + 1 command has been received, the process proceeds to step S4709, otherwise the process ends. In step S4709, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the long press charge + 1 command image, updates the displayed long press charge value, and proceeds to step S4710. At this time, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 adds 1 to the display value stored in the memory as the current value of the long press charge, and updates the stored display value. For example, "charge 1%", "charge 2%" ... "charge 10%" is updated.

In step S4710, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the long press charge time has ended. If the long press charge time ends, the process proceeds to step S4711, otherwise the process ends. In step S4711, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs display control to display the long-pressed charge end image on the third symbol display device 42, and proceeds to step S4712.

In step S4712, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the charge command A has been received. If the charge command A is received, the process proceeds to step S4714, and if not, the process proceeds to step S4716. In step S4714, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs display control to display the charge attack image 45d-A (charge attack image A in the figure) referred to as "mystery A attack" on the third symbol display device 42, and steps are taken. Proceed to S4723.

In step S4716, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the charge command B has been received. If the charge command B has been received, the process proceeds to step S4718, and if not, the process proceeds to step S4720. In step S4718, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs display control to display the charge attack image 45d-B (charge attack image B in the figure) referred to as "true B attack" on the third symbol display device 42, and steps are taken. Proceed to S4723.

In step S4720, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the charge command C has been received. If the charge command C has been received, the process proceeds to step S4721, otherwise the process ends. In step S4721, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs display control to display the charge attack image 45d-C (charge attack image C in the figure) referred to as "quick attack C attack" on the third symbol display device 42, and steps are taken. Proceed to S4723.

In step S4723, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the long press effect time has ended. If the long press effect time is finished, the process proceeds to step S4724, and if not, the present process is finished. In step S4724, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 erases the image corresponding to the long press charge and ends this process.

Next, the timing of the above-mentioned long press response effect will be described.

FIG. 182 is a time chart showing a long press corresponding effect when a long press operation is performed. FIG. 183 is a time chart showing a long press corresponding effect when a long press operation is performed in a mode different from that of FIG. 182. FIG. 184 is a time chart showing a long press corresponding effect when a long press operation is performed in a mode different from that of FIGS. 182 and 183.

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 is based on the above-mentioned effect execution function that the player detects the operation of the decision button 81 at the determination timing after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in the long press mode. , Continue to execute the long press charge effect.

With reference to FIG. 182, a long press corresponding effect when a long press operation is performed will be described.

The detection timing shown in (a) is the detection timing of the enter button 81. For example, the timing at which the press of the enter button 81 can be detected is set every 0.01 seconds. Since the detection timing may be a time shorter than the checkpoint interval (every 0.3 seconds), it may be, for example, every 0.1 seconds or every interrupt number corresponding thereto.

The effective timing shown in (b) is set as an effective period during which the press operation of the enter button 81 can be detected when the long press charge effect is executed for a maximum of 6.00 seconds. Here, among the effective timings, the period from the start of the long press charge effect to 4.00 seconds after the start is shown. The period from the start of the long-pressed charge effect to the maximum execution time of the long-pressed charge effect (6.00 seconds described above) is a period in which it is determined whether or not the decision button 81 is operated in the long-pressed mode. If the enter button 81 is pressed for the first time after 4.00 seconds have passed from the start of the long press charge effect, the operation is determined to be invalid in order to secure the effect time, so that the long press charge is not executed. ..

The operation timing shown in (c) indicates the timing at which the player operates the decision button 81 in a long-pressed manner. In FIG. 182, the player starts the operation of the long-pressed button 81 in the long-pressed mode 0.90 seconds after the start of the long-pressed charge effect, and after the long-pressed mode determination time (0.10 seconds) elapses, The operation in the long press mode is continued for 3.00 seconds from 1.00 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect. That is, during the long-press charge effect, the operations in the long-press mode are continuously executed.

The long press timer shown in (d) measures the time during which the detection of the decision button 81 is turned on based on the player pressing the decision button 81. In this figure, after the enter button 81 is pressed 0.90 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect, the timing at which the long press charge effect ends (start of the long press charge effect 4.00) as shown in (c). It continues to be measured until (seconds later).

The long press checkpoint shown in (e) indicates a time point at which it is determined whether or not the player is operating the decision button 81 in the long press mode. Specifically, a checkpoint is provided every 0.30 seconds after the determination time (0.10 seconds) of the long press mode has elapsed. At the pressing timing shown in this figure, the first checkpoint arrives 1.30 seconds after the start of the long pressing charge effect. The second checkpoint arrives 1.60 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect. The third checkpoint arrives 1.90 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect. The fourth checkpoint arrives 2.20 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect. The fifth checkpoint arrives 2.50 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect. The sixth checkpoint arrives 2.80 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect. The 7th checkpoint arrives 3.10 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect. The eighth checkpoint arrives 3.40 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect. The 9th checkpoint arrives 3.70 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect. The 10th checkpoint arrives 4.00 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect. When the 10th checkpoint arrives, the long press charge effect ends.

The long press flag shown in (f) is a signal indicating that the player is operating the decision button 81 in the long press mode. Specifically, from the time when it is determined that the operation is in the long press mode to the end of the operation in the long press mode (in this figure, until the time when the long press charge effect ends), the rise (“1”) is started. Shows.

The long-pressed charge image shown in (g) is a display effect image displayed while the player is operating the decision button 81 in the long-pressed mode. Specifically, an image showing 0% of charge is displayed during the period from the start of the long-press charge effect to the time when the long-press mode is determined. After the determination of the long press mode, the long press charge image is displayed so that the long press charge increases by 1% every time the operation in the long press mode continues for 0.03 seconds. That is, every time the operation in the long press mode continues for 0.30 seconds, the long press charge image is displayed so that the long press charge increases by 10%.

At the pressing timing shown in this figure, if the pressing is detected 1.30 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect (first checkpoint), an image showing 10% is displayed. If the press is detected 1.60 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect (second checkpoint), an image showing 20% is displayed. If the press is detected 1.90 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect (third checkpoint), an image showing 30% is displayed. If the press is detected 2.20 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect (fourth checkpoint), an image showing 40% is displayed. If the press is detected 2.50 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect (fifth checkpoint), an image showing 50% is displayed. 2.80 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect, if the press is detected at the sixth checkpoint, an image showing 60% is displayed. If the press is detected 3.10 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect (7th checkpoint), an image showing 70% is displayed. If the press is detected 3.40 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect (8th checkpoint), an image showing 80% is displayed. If the press is detected 3.70 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect (9th checkpoint), an image showing 90% is displayed. If the press is detected 4.00 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect (10th checkpoint), an image showing 100% is displayed.

Based on the result of this long press charge effect, the long press charge attack effect is executed. The long-press charge attack effect is based on the player operating the enter button 81 for a predetermined period (for example, 3.00 seconds) in which the long-press charge effect is executed in the long-press mode, in accordance with the end of the long-press charge effect. It is an effect of displaying any of the charge attack images 45d-A, 45d-B, and 45d-C in the display effect to be executed.

For example, since the charge attack image 45d-A is delivered in a state of waiting until the power is charged by 91 to 100%, an image imitating the shape of a punch is displayed under the name of "mystery A attack". The charge attack image 45d-B is in a state where the power is charged by 50 to 90%, that is, it is delivered in a shorter time than the charge attack image 45d-A, so it is called "true B attack" and imitates the shape of a punch. Is displayed. The charge attack image 45d-C is in a state where the power is charged by 1 to 49%, that is, it is delivered in a shorter time than the charge attack image 45d-B, so it is called "Haste C attack" and imitates the shape of a punch. Is displayed.

With reference to FIG. 183, a long press charge effect when a long press operation different from that of FIG. 182 is performed will be described. The start timing of the operation in the long press mode of the decision button 81 is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 183. Hereinafter, the points different from the long press charge effect shown in FIG. 182 will be described.

As the operation timing shown in (c), an example in which the operation in the long press mode of the determination button 81 is interrupted after the start of the long press charge effect will be described. When the operation of the long press mode of the enter button 81 is interrupted, the enter button 81 may be released shorter than the detection timing or the enter button 81 may be released longer than the detection timing as an operation different from the long press mode. be. Here, it is temporarily interrupted 2.30 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect, and then restarted 2.45 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect. That is, for 1.15 seconds from 2.30 seconds after the start of the long-press charge effect to 2.45 seconds, the non-operation period is longer than the detection timing at which the operation in the long-press mode of the enter button 81 is interrupted. , A non-operation period shorter than the above-mentioned detection timing may be used. This non-operation period is located from the 4th checkpoint that arrives at the start of the long press charge effect 2.20 to the 5th checkpoint that arrives 2.50 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect. .. That is, the interruption of the operation in this long press mode starts after the fourth checkpoint and ends before the fifth checkpoint arrives. That is, this non-operation period is located between each checkpoint, that is, within the period in which the effect can be continued by restarting the operation.

In the long press timer shown in (d), the time is measured even during the period in which the operation in this long press mode is interrupted.

In the long press checkpoint shown in (e), the above-mentioned no-operation period starts after the fourth checkpoint and ends before the fifth checkpoint arrives, so that the check shown in FIG. 182 (e) is performed. Similar to the point, it is determined that the operation in the long press mode continues during this non-operation period. Similarly, the long press flag shown in (f) also indicates "1" in this non-operation period.

In the long press charge image shown in (g), since the above-mentioned no-operation period starts after the fourth checkpoint and ends before the fifth checkpoint arrives, the length shown in FIG. 182 (g) is shown. Similar to the push charge image, an image in which the long press charge increases is displayed during this non-operation period.

In this way, after the operation of the enter button 81 is performed in the long press mode, when the operation is not detected except at the checkpoint (judgment timing), the long press response effect is executed until the determination timing arrives. Continue, and based on the fact that the player has detected the operation of the decision button 81 at the checkpoint, the execution of the long press response effect is further continued. As a result, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted after the long press response effect is started, the long press response effect can be enjoyed until the next checkpoint arrives, and if the operation is resumed, the operation can be resumed. You can also enjoy the long press response.

FIG. 184 will be used to describe a long press charge effect when a long press operation different from that of FIGS. 182 and 183 is performed. Hereinafter, the points different from the long press charge effect shown in FIGS. 182 and 183 will be described.

In this description, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 operates the decision button 81 by the player at a predetermined determination timing after the decision button 81 is operated in a long-pressed manner as the effect execution function described above. If the player does not detect the operation of the decision button 81 after the detection, and the player does not rediscover the operation of the decision button 81 by the next determination timing, the length is long. Ends the execution of the push charge effect.

The operation timing shown in (c) is temporarily interrupted 2.30 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect, and then restarted 2.60 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect. That is, the operation of the long press mode of the decision button 81 is interrupted for 0.30 seconds from 2.30 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect to 2.60 seconds later.

In the long press timer shown in (d), the time is measured even during the period in which the operation in this long press mode is interrupted.

The long press checkpoint shown in (e) arrives 2.50 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect (fifth checkpoint) during the non-operation period shown in (c). Therefore, at the fifth checkpoint, it is determined that there is no operation in the long press mode of the enter button 81. As a result, the long press charge effect ends. As shown in (c), when the operation is restarted after that, the long press charge effect may be restarted from the beginning if the long press charge effect can be executed in the remaining time.

For example, based on the fact that it is determined that there is an operation in the long press mode from the start of the long press charge effect 2.60 seconds to 0.10 seconds, the long press charge effect starts from 2.70 seconds to 5.70 seconds. If the operation in the mode is continued, the operation in the long press mode for 3.00 seconds can be achieved.

The long press flag shown in (f) is based on the fact that it is determined that there is no operation in the long press mode of the enter button 81 2.50 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect (fifth checkpoint). Go down (become "0"). If the long-press charge effect is restarted, when the operation in the long-press mode is restarted, the long-press charge effect starts again from 2.70 seconds after the start (it becomes "1"). The long-press flag is raised again and continues until 5.70 seconds after the start of the long-press charge effect.

The long-press charge image shown in (g) is 0.03 seconds after the long-press charge image showing 49% charge is displayed 2.47 seconds after the start of the long-press charge effect, that is, the start of the long-press charge effect 2 After 50 seconds (fifth checkpoint), it returns to 0%. After that, when the operation in the long press mode is restarted, the rise of the long press charge image is restarted from 2.70 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect.

In this way, after the operation of the enter button 81 is performed in the long press mode, when the operation is not detected except at the checkpoint (judgment timing), the long press response effect is executed until the determination timing arrives. Then, based on the fact that the player does not detect the operation of the decision button 81 at the checkpoint, the execution of the long press response effect ends. As a result, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted after the long press response effect is started, the long press response effect can be enjoyed until the determination timing arrives, but if the operation is neglected, it will be further. It is possible to prevent people from enjoying the effect of long-pressing.

Next, the display mode of the long press correspondence effect will be described with reference to FIG. 185. FIG. 185 is a diagram showing a display mode of a long press corresponding effect when a long press operation is performed.

The long-press compatible effect is a reach display effect as shown in (a), for example, during execution of the variable display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 42, and is a display of the reach development effect as shown in (b). Will be executed during. The reach development effect is, for example, a confrontation effect between the own character and the enemy character, which suggests that it is a super reach. In this confrontation effect, the long-press response effect is a long-press charge effect that accumulates power for the attack according to the operation time in the long-press mode of the enter button 81 when the own character attacks the enemy character. As a result of the long-press charge effect, it is a long-press charge attack effect that attacks based on the accumulated power.

Before executing the long-press compatible effect, the third symbol display device 42 is executed with a notice effect for notifying the start of the long-press compatible effect as shown in (c). For example, a long-press notice image 45a for notifying the operation in the long-press mode of the enter button 81, such as "press and hold the button to charge and save the enemy!", Is displayed on the third symbol display device 42. To. The display time of the long press notice image 45a is, for example, about 2 seconds.

When the display of the long-press notice image 45a is completed, the third symbol display device 42 has the long-press request image 45b that requests the operation of the decision button 81 in the long-press mode as shown in (d), and the charge is 0. A long press charge image 45c indicating that it is a percentage is displayed. The long press request image 45b is, for example, an image including the design information of the enter button 81 and the character information of "long press!". Here, the long-pressed charge image 45c indicates that the operation in the long-pressed mode of the enter button 81 is not executed, or the enter button 81 is pressed but the long-pressed mode is not reached. It is the character information. The start timing of the long press corresponding effect is the start timing of the long press charge effect, and is the display timing of the long press request image 45b and the long press charge image 45c.

When the operation in the long press mode of the enter button 81 is not executed, the long press request image 45b and the long press charge image 45c are displayed until 3 seconds after the start of display (that is, the start of the long press charge effect). If the operation in the long press mode of the decision button 81 is not executed within this period, the long press charge effect ends.

When it is determined that the operation of the enter button 81 is an operation in the long press mode, after the determination, as shown in (e) to (g), depending on the time for which the operation in the long press mode continues. An image is displayed in which the charge of the attack power increases. (E) is an image 0.03 seconds after the timing (1.00 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect) determined to be the operation in the long press mode, and is a long press charge of 1%. Image 45c is displayed. (F) is an image 1.50 seconds after the timing determined to be the operation in the long press mode (2.50 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect), and is a long press charge of 50%. Image 45c is displayed. (G) is an image 3.00 seconds after the timing determined to be the operation in the long press mode (4.00 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect), and is a long press charge of 100%. Image 45c is displayed. The long press request image 45b is also displayed during the period in which the long press charge image 45c is displayed.

When the long-press charge image 45c reaches 100% charge, as shown in (h), the operation in the long-press mode is executed for 91 to 100% of the specified time, and the "mystery A attack" is performed. The charge attack image 45d-A referred to as is displayed. In "Mystery A Attack", the result of the variable display may be a big hit or it may be off. When the result of the variable display becomes a big hit, it is displayed that the victory of the own character shown in (i) is rich in the subsequent reach development effect, and as shown in (j), the self in the reach development effect. The victory of the character, that is, the jackpot combination of the developed symbols is displayed, and as shown in (k), the normal screen is returned and the jackpot combination of the decorative symbols is displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 186, a display mode of the long press correspondence effect different from that of FIG. 185 will be described. FIG. 186 is a diagram showing a display mode of a long press corresponding effect when a long press operation different from that of FIG. 185 is performed.

In the above description using FIG. 185, the long press response effect when the player continuously executes the operation in the long press mode of the decision button 81 has been described, but here, the player has the decision button. The effect corresponding to the long press when the operation in the long press mode of 81 is interrupted and restarted will be described. Here, the description will be given from the start of the long press charge effect.

At the start of the long-press charge effect, the long-press request image 45b and the long-press charge image 45c shown in (a) are displayed on the third symbol display device 42. When it is determined that the operation of the determination button 81 by the player is an operation in the long press mode, the charge of the long press charge image 45c increases as shown in (b). The long-press charge image 45c becomes the charge 42% shown in (c) 2.26 seconds after the start of the long-press charge effect. 0.03 seconds later (that is, 2.29 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect), the charge becomes 43% as shown in (d).

Here, the player performs an operation different from the long press mode at the timing when the long press charge image 45c shown in (d) displays the charge 43% (2.30 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect). The operation in the long press mode is interrupted by releasing the hand from the enter button 81. During this interruption, the long press charge image 45c rises to a charge of 44% 2.32 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect, and rises to 45% after the start of the long press charge effect 2.35 seconds, and is long. 2. 38 seconds after the start of the push charge effect, the charge rises to 46%, and 2.41 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect, the charge rises to 47% as shown in (e), and the long press charge effect starts. After 44 seconds, the charge increases to 48% as shown in (f).

By pressing the enter button 81 again at the timing when the long-press charge image 45c shown in (f) displays the charge 48% (2.45 seconds after the start of the long-press charge effect), the long-press mode is used. The operation is resumed. After resuming, the long-press charge image 45c rises to 49% of the charge 2.47 seconds after the start of the long-press charge effect, and reaches 50% of the charge shown in (g) 2.50 seconds after the start of the long-press charge effect. Rise. After that, by continuing the operation in the long press mode, the long press charge image 45c reaches 100% of the charge shown in (h) after 4.00 seconds from the start of the long press charge effect. When the long-press charge image 45c reaches 100% charge, the charge attack image 45d-A called "mystery A attack" shown in (i) is displayed. When the result of the variable display becomes a big hit, in the subsequent reach development production, it is displayed that the victory of the own character is rich as shown in (j), and the reach development is shown as shown in (k). The victory of the own character in the effect, that is, the jackpot combination of the developed symbols is displayed, and as shown in (l), the normal screen is returned and the jackpot combination of the decorative symbols is displayed.

In this way, when the detection of the operation of the enter button 81 is lost during the execution of the long press charge effect, the operation of the enter button 81 is not detected for a predetermined period (after the operation of the enter button 81 is no longer detected) without ending the long press charge effect. The period until the checkpoint arrives, or the period from when the operation of the enter button 81 disappears until the operation is restarted before the next checkpoint arrives), the predetermined effect (for example, long press charge effect) ) Is executed, so that it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the long-pressed effect as compared with the case where the effect is terminated when the detection of the operation is interrupted.

Further, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted during the execution of the long press corresponding effect after the operation of the enter button 81 is performed in the long press mode, the long press charge effect is continued for a predetermined period. It is possible to have the unity of the production before and after the operation detection is interrupted. Further, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted during the execution of the long press response effect after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in the long press mode, the operation of the decision button 81 is not detected for a predetermined period. Since the change in the display mode of the long press charge effect that was being executed at the time of determination is continued, it is suitably informed that it is necessary to continue the operation in the long press mode in order to continue the change in the display mode. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 187, a display mode of a long press corresponding effect different from that of FIGS. 185 and 186 will be described. FIG. 187 is a diagram showing a display mode of a long press corresponding effect when a long press operation different from that of FIGS. 185 and 186 is performed.

Here, a display mode will be described when the player interrupts the operation of the long-pressed button 81 in the long-pressed mode, the long-pressed charge effect ends, and the long-pressed charge effect is newly executed from the time when the long-pressed charge effect is restarted. .. Here, too, the description will be given from the start of the long-press charge effect.

At the start time, the long press request image 45b and the long press charge image 45c shown in (a) are displayed on the third symbol display device 42. When it is determined that the operation of the determination button 81 by the player is an operation in the long press mode, the charge of the long press charge image 45c increases as shown in (b). The long-press charge image 45c becomes the charge 42% shown in (c) 2.26 seconds after the start of the long-press charge effect. 0.03 seconds later (that is, 2.29 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect), the charge becomes 43% as shown in (d).

At the timing when the long-pressed charge image 45c shown in (d) displays the charge 43% (2.30 seconds after the start of the long-pressed charge effect), the player decides the button 81 as an operation different from the long-pressed mode. Release your hand from and interrupt the operation in the long press mode. During this interruption, the long press charge image 45c rises to a charge of 44% 2.32 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect, and rises to 45% after the start of the long press charge effect 2.35 seconds, and is long. 2.38 seconds after the start of the push charge effect, the charge rises to 46%, and 2.41 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect, the charge rises to 47% as shown in (e), and the long press charge shown in (f). The charge rises to 48% 2.44 seconds after the start of the production.

Here, the player presses the enter button 81 during the period in which the long-pressed charge image 45c displays the charge of 48% (the period from 2.44 seconds after the start of the long-pressed charge effect to 2.47 seconds after the start of the long-pressed charge effect). Not pressed again. The charge increases to 49% as shown in (g) 2.47 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect without the player restarting the pressing of the decision button 81. After that, the next fifth checkpoint arrives 2.50 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect without the player restarting pressing the decision button 81. At the fifth checkpoint, it is determined that there is no operation in the long press mode of the player, so that the long press charge image 45c is displayed as an image showing 0% charge, as shown in (h). The long-press charge effect ends at this point, but the long-press request image 45b continues to be displayed because it can be redone in the remaining time.

When the player resumes the operation in the long-press mode of the enter button 81 2.60 seconds after the start of the long-press charge effect, the long-press charge effect is newly restarted 2.70 seconds after the start of the long-press charge effect. Is done. The long-press charge image 45c rises to 1% of the charge shown in (i) 2.73 seconds after the start of the long-press charge effect, and continues to increase thereafter, and 3.90 seconds after the start of the long-press charge effect. The charge increases to 40% shown in (j), and reaches 100% of the charge shown in (k) 5.70 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect. When the long-press charge image 45c reaches 100% charge, the charge attack image 45d-A called "mystery A attack" shown in (l) is displayed.

After that, when the result of the variable display becomes a big hit, as in the above, the appearance that the victory of the own character is rich is displayed in the subsequent reach development effect, and the victory of the own character in the reach development effect, that is, the development. The jackpot combination of symbols is displayed, and the screen returns to the normal screen to display the jackpot combination of decorative symbols.

The long-press charge effect may be terminated at the end of the long-press charge effect, or if it is possible to redo the long-press charge effect in the remaining time, the long-press charge effect can be performed by resuming the operation in the long-press mode. You may start over.

In this way, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted after the long-press charge effect is started, the long-press charge effect can be enjoyed until the next checkpoint arrives, and the operation can be resumed. If you do, you can enjoy the effect of long press. Further, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted after the long-press charge effect is started, the long-press charge effect can be enjoyed until the next checkpoint arrives, but if the operation is neglected, It is possible to prevent the user from enjoying the long press charge effect any longer. As a result, the fun of the long-press charge effect can be suitably improved.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 44th embodiment, the frame button 80 (for example, the decision button 81) that receives the operation by the player, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that performs the main control regarding the game, and the main control. Based on the result of the jackpot determination by the CPU 501 of the device 261, the third symbol display device 42 is provided with an effect execution function by the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 to execute a predetermined display effect (for example, a variable display effect), and the above-mentioned effect is provided. The execution function is a long press response effect (for example, a long press response effect) during a predetermined display effect when the enter button 81 is operated in a specific mode (for example, a long press mode) within the valid period during which the operation of the enter button 81 is valid. For example, a long-press charge effect or a long-press charge attack effect performed as a result is executed, and a period during which it is determined whether or not there is an operation in the long-press mode of the enter button 81 (for example, a long-press charge effect). Even if it is determined that there is no operation in the long press mode within the period from the start to the maximum execution time of the long press charge effect of 6.00 seconds, the execution of the long press corresponding effect is continued. The predetermined display effect is not limited to the variable display effect, and may be another display effect such as a jackpot round effect. The operation in the specific mode is not limited to the long-pressing mode of the button, and may be a long-lasting lever, repeated pressing of the button, or the like.

As a result, even if the operation of the decision button 81 in the long press mode is interrupted after the long press response effect is started, the operation in the long press mode is performed within the period in which the presence or absence of the operation in the long press mode is determined. If is restarted, the execution of the long press corresponding effect is continued, so that it is not necessary to restart the operation of the enter button 81 from the beginning and wait for the time until the long press corresponding effect is in the state before the interruption. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the fun of the long press response effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P1-0) above, for example.

The above-mentioned effect execution function includes an operation detection function by the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 capable of detecting the operation of the decision button 81 by the player at predetermined intervals (for example, 0.01 second intervals) within the valid period, and the decision button 81. When the operation of Based on the presence / absence of detection of the operation, it is determined whether or not to continue the execution of the effect corresponding to the long press. As a result, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted after the long press response effect is started, if the player's operation of the decision button 81 is resumed by the determination timing, the long press response effect is executed. Since it is continued, it is not necessary to restart the operation of the enter button 81 from the beginning and wait for the time until the long press response effect is in the state before the interruption. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the fun of the long press response effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P1-1) above, for example.

The above-mentioned effect execution function is based on the fact that the player detects the operation of the determination button 81 at the determination timing after the operation of the determination button 81 is performed in the long-press mode, and the determination button 81 is also long-pressed after the determination timing. Continue to execute the corresponding production. As a result, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted after the long press response effect is started, if the operation of the decision button 81 by the player is resumed by the determination timing, the long press is continued after this determination timing. Since the execution of the corresponding effect is continued, it is not necessary to restart the operation of the enter button 81 from the beginning and wait for the time until the long press corresponding effect becomes the long press mode. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the fun of the long press response effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P1-2) above, for example.

In the above-mentioned effect execution function, after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in the long press mode, the player presses and holds the decision button 81 at the determination timing based on the fact that the player does not detect the operation of the determination button 81. End the corresponding production. As a result, if the operation of the decision button 81 by the player is not restarted by the determination timing after the detection of the player's operation is interrupted after the long press response effect is started, the long press response is supported at this determination timing. Since the production is completed, it is easy to reduce neglect of operation. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the fun of the long press response effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P1-3) above, for example.

The above-mentioned effect execution function continues to execute the effect corresponding to long press until the determination timing is reached when the operation of the enter button 81 is performed in the long press mode and the operation is not detected except for the determination timing. do. As a result, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted after the long press response effect is started, the long press response effect can be enjoyed until the determination timing arrives. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the fun of the long press response effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P1-4) above, for example.

The above-mentioned effect execution function continues to execute the effect corresponding to long press until the determination timing is reached when the operation of the enter button 81 is performed in the long press mode and the operation is not detected except for the determination timing. Then, based on the detection of the operation of the decision button 81 by the player at the determination timing, the execution of the long press response effect is further continued. As a result, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted after the long press response effect is started, the long press response effect can be enjoyed until the determination timing arrives, and if the operation is restarted, it will be longer. You can enjoy the push-compatible production. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the fun of the long press response effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P1-5) above, for example.

The above-mentioned effect execution function continues to execute the effect corresponding to long press until the determination timing is reached when the operation of the enter button 81 is performed in the long press mode and the operation is not detected except for the determination timing. Then, based on the fact that the player does not detect the operation of the decision button 81 at the determination timing, the execution of the long press response effect ends. As a result, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted after the long press response effect is started, the long press response effect can be enjoyed until the determination timing arrives, but if the operation is neglected, it will be further. You can't enjoy the long press response. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the fun of the long press response effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P1-6) above, for example.

Further, in the above-mentioned effect execution function, an operation of releasing the hand from the decision button 81 is performed as an operation different from the operation in the long press mode within the period in which the presence or absence of the operation in the long press mode of the decision button 81 is determined. Even if it is pressed, the execution of the long press color change effect is continued. As a result, even if the operation of releasing the enter button 81 is performed as an operation different from the operation in the long press mode after the long press corresponding effect is started, the long press compatible effect is continued to be executed. It is not necessary to restart the operation of the operation means from the beginning even if the operation is different from the operation in the long press mode. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the fun of the long press response effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P2-0) above, for example.

The above-mentioned effect execution function does not end the long-press compatible effect when the operation of the enter button 81 is no longer detected during the execution of the long-press compatible effect, until a predetermined period (for example, the next checkpoint arrives). Period), a predetermined effect (for example, a long press response effect) is executed. As a result, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted during the execution of the long press response effect after the operation of the enter button 81 is performed in the long press mode, the long press response effect is not terminated and the predetermined period is reached. Since the predetermined effect is executed, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the effect corresponding to the long press, as compared with the case where the effect is terminated when the detection of the operation is interrupted. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P3-1) above, for example.

The above-mentioned predetermined effect is an effect of continuing a specific operation corresponding effect (for example, a long press corresponding effect) for a predetermined period. As a result, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted during the execution of the long press response effect after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in the long press mode, the long press response effect is pending for a predetermined period. Since the effect is integrated before and after the operation detection is interrupted, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the specific operation-compatible effect as compared with the case where the effect is terminated when the operation detection is interrupted. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P3-2) above, for example.

The above-mentioned effect execution function executes a predetermined effect for a predetermined period until the determination timing arrives. As a result, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted during the execution of the long press response effect after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in the long press mode, the predetermined effect is performed for a predetermined period until the determination timing arrives. Is executed, so that it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the effect corresponding to the specific operation, as compared with the case where the effect is terminated when the detection of the operation is interrupted. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P4-3) above, for example.

The above-mentioned effect execution function is for suggesting or notifying the player that the operation of the decision button 81 has disappeared at the determination timing after executing the predetermined effect for a predetermined period until the determination timing arrives. May be good. With this configuration, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted during the execution of the long press response effect after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in the long press mode, a predetermined time until the determination timing arrives. Since it is possible to notify the player that the operation needs to be restarted at the determination timing after the predetermined effect is executed for a period of time, it is longer than the case where the effect is terminated when the detection of the operation is interrupted. It is possible to suitably improve the fun of the push-corresponding production. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P4-4) above, for example.

Further, the above-mentioned continuous effect is an effect of continuing the change in the display mode of the long-press corresponding effect that was executed at the time when it was determined that the operation of the decision button 81 was not detected for the above-mentioned predetermined period. As a result, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted during the execution of the long press response effect after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in the long press mode, the operation of the decision button 81 is not detected for a predetermined period. Since the change in the display mode of the long press corresponding effect that was being executed at the time of determination is continued, it is preferable that the operation in the long press mode must be continued in order to continue the change in the display mode. I can tell you. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P3-3) above, for example.

In the above-mentioned effect execution function, after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in the long press mode, when the operation is not detected except for the determination timing, the effect corresponding to the long press is executed until the determination timing arrives. Is continued, a lottery is performed based on the detection of the operation of the decision button 81 by the player at the determination timing, and if the result of the lottery is successful, the execution of the long press response effect is further continued. You may. With this configuration, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted after the specific operation response effect is started, the long press response effect can be enjoyed until the determination timing arrives, and the operation is restarted. If you win the lottery, you can enjoy the production for specific operations. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the production corresponding to the specific operation. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P1-7) above, for example.

Further, in the above-mentioned effect execution function, after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in the long press mode, when the operation is not detected except for the determination timing, the long press corresponding effect is executed until the determination timing arrives. Is continued, a lottery is performed based on the detection of the operation of the decision button 81 by the player at the determination timing, and if the result of the lottery is wrong, the execution of the long press response effect is terminated. You may. With this configuration, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted after the long press response effect is started, the long press response effect can be enjoyed until the determination timing arrives, and the operation is restarted. If you win the lottery, you can enjoy the long press response effect, but if you lose the lottery, you cannot enjoy the long press response effect any more. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the fun of the long press response effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P1-8) above, for example.

In the 44th embodiment, the long-press charge effect was continued when the hand was released from the decision button 81 during the long-press as an operation different from the long-press mode during the long-press charge effect. May perform different effects. The display mode of the long press charge effect of this embodiment will be described.

In this embodiment, when the operation of the decision button 81 is no longer detected during the execution of the long press charge effect, the predetermined effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 42 for a predetermined period. This predetermined effect is different from the long-press charge effect, which is executed for a predetermined non-operation period. This predetermined effect is also an effect indicating that the long press charge effect has not ended. Specifically, this predetermined effect is an effect that suggests or notifies the player that the operation of the determination button 81 has disappeared or that the operation needs to be restarted for the above-mentioned predetermined period.

FIG. 188 will be used to describe a predetermined effect displayed when the operation of the decision button 81 is no longer detected. FIG. 188 is a diagram showing a display mode of a long press corresponding effect when the long press operation of the 45th embodiment is performed. Here, the long press corresponding effect described in the above-described 44 will be referred to, and the description will be made from the start time of the long press charge effect. However, after the player interrupts the operation of the decision button 81, the operation is restarted. A case where the speed is slower than that of Example 44 will be described.

At the start time, the long press request image 45b and the long press charge image 45c shown in (a) are displayed on the third symbol display device 42. When it is determined that the operation of the determination button 81 by the player is an operation in the long press mode, the charge of the long press charge image 45c increases as shown in (b). The long-press charge image 45c becomes the charge 42% shown in (c) 2.26 seconds after the start of the long-press charge effect. 0.03 seconds later (that is, 2.29 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect), the charge becomes 43% as shown in (d).

Here, the player performs an operation different from the long press mode at the timing when the long press charge image 45c shown in (d) displays the charge 43% (2.30 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect). The operation in the long press mode is interrupted by releasing the hand from the enter button 81. During this interruption, the long press charge image 45c rises to 44% charge 2.32 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect. At this time, the third symbol display device 42 displays a predetermined image different from the images constituting the long press charge effect such as the long press advance notice image 45a and the long press request image 45b. Specifically, this predetermined image is, for example, a long press release notification image 45e composed of character information such as "I can't press and hold!". That is, the display of the long press release notification image 45e notifies the player that the operation of the decision button 81 has been stopped, and as a result, it can be shown that the long press charge effect has not been completed.

Even after this, the long press release notification image 45e continues to be displayed while the enter button 81 is not operated, and 2.35 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect, the charge rises to 45% and the long press charge effect starts 2 After 38 seconds, the charge increased to 46%, and after 2.41 seconds, the charge increased to 47% shown in (e), and the long-press charge effect shown in (f) started 2.44. After a second, the charge will rise to 48 percent.

Here, the player presses the enter button 81 during the period in which the long-pressed charge image 45c displays the charge of 48% (the period from 2.44 seconds after the start of the long-pressed charge effect to 2.47 seconds after the start of the long-pressed charge effect). Not pressed again. The charge increases to 49% as shown in (g) 2.47 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect without the player restarting the pressing of the decision button 81. After that, the next fifth checkpoint arrives 2.50 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect without the player restarting pressing the decision button 81. At the fifth checkpoint, it is determined that there is no operation in the long press mode of the player, so that the long press charge image 45c is displayed as an image showing 0% charge, as shown in (h).

Here, since the operation of the enter button 81 could not be restarted only by showing the long press release notification image 45e, the long press charge image 45c and the long press charge image 45c are long at the timing when the long press charge image 45c becomes 0% charge. Instead of the push release notification image 45e, the self-character PY shown in (i) is made to say a line consisting of the character image "You can't attack if you don't have enough power! Press and hold!" (Re). The operation reminder image 45e1) is displayed. The display of the re-operation reminder image 45e1 is not a production that simply explains the operation as in the long-press release notification image 45e that has been displayed so far, but the decision button 81 is used in view of the future story development of the reach development production. Since it is an effect of notifying the player that the operation needs to be restarted, it is possible to enhance the interest in restarting the operation of the decision button 81.

The re-operation reminder image 45e1 not only issues the line "You can't attack if you don't have enough power! Press and hold!" In a single shot, but also follows this line, "Lend your power. You may issue another line such as "Please!". As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest in resuming the operation of the decision button 81 with various lines during the period until the operation of the decision button 81 is resumed.

With this re-operation reminder image 45e1, the player finally resumes the operation in the long-press mode of the enter button 81 4.60 seconds after the start of the long-press charge effect, and 4.70 seconds after the start of the long-press charge effect. Press and hold from to The charge production will be redone. The long-press charge image 45c rises to 1% of the charge shown in (j) 4.73 seconds after the start of the long-press charge effect. At this time, the long press release notification image 45e is erased. After that, it continues to rise, and after 5.90 seconds from the start of the long press charge effect, it rises to 40% of the charge shown in (k), but with the arrival of 6.00 seconds from the start of the effect, it ends at 40% of the charge. Since the long-press charge image 45c is in the range of 1 to 49% of the charge, the charge attack image 45d-C referred to as "Haste C attack" shown in (l) is displayed.

If the result of the variable display is a big hit, in the subsequent reach development effect, the victory of the own character in the reach development effect, that is, the jackpot combination of the development symbol is displayed, and the screen returns to the normal screen to display the jackpot combination of the decorative symbol. Will be done. If the result of the variable display is off, in the subsequent reach development effect, the victory of the enemy character in the reach development effect, that is, the reach out-of-reach combination of the development symbol is displayed, and the screen returns to the normal screen to display the reach-out combination of the decorative symbol. Is displayed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 45th embodiment, the above-mentioned effect execution function has no detection of the operation of the decision button 81 during the execution of the long press corresponding effect (for example, the long press charge effect). In addition, a predetermined effect (for example, a long press release notification image 45e or a re-operation reminder image 45e1) is executed for a predetermined period without ending the long press charge effect. This predetermined effect is different from the long-press charge effect (effect of displaying the long-press charge image 45c and the long-press release notification image 45e), which is executed for a predetermined period. As a result, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted during the execution of the long-press charge effect after the operation of the enter button 81 is performed in the long-press mode, the effect different from the long-press charge effect is produced for a predetermined period. Since it is executed, the effect different from the long-press charge effect can preferably improve the interest of the long-press charge effect as compared with the case where the effect ends when the detection of the operation is interrupted. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P4-1) above, for example.

The above-mentioned separate effect is an effect (for example, a long press release notification image 45e or a re-operation reminder image 45e1) that suggests or notifies the player that the operation of the decision button 81 has disappeared, which is executed for a predetermined period. As a result, after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in the long press mode, if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted during the execution of the long press charge effect, it is necessary to restart the operation for a predetermined period by another effect. Since it is possible to notify the player that there is, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the long-press charge effect as compared with the case where the effect is terminated when the detection of the operation is interrupted. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P4-2) above, for example.

The above-mentioned effect execution function is a specific operation during a predetermined display effect (during variable display) when the enter button 81 is operated in a long-pressed manner within the valid period during which the operation of the enter button 81 is valid. A corresponding effect (for example, a long press charge effect) is executed, and an operation different from the operation in the long press mode is performed within the period in which the presence or absence of the operation in the long press mode of the enter button 81 is determined. In this case, while the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect is continued, an effect different from the specific operation corresponding effect (for example, display of the long press release notification image 45e or the re-operation prompting image 45e1) is executed. As a result, even if an operation different from the operation in the specific mode is performed after the specific operation corresponding effect is started, the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect is continued and the effect different from the specific operation corresponding effect is executed. Therefore, it becomes easy to recognize that it is not necessary to redo the operation of the operation means from the beginning even if the operation different from the operation in the specific mode is performed. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the production corresponding to the specific operation. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P2-00) above, for example.

The effect executed when the decision button 81 is released as an operation different from the long press mode during the long press charge effect may be an effect different from that of the 45th embodiment.

In the present embodiment, the effect executed when the decision button 81 is released as an operation different from the long press mode during the long press charge effect is the third symbol display device 42 in which the long press charge effect is displayed. It is a darkening effect that darkens the display screen 42a of. By executing such a darkening effect for a predetermined period, it is possible to indicate or notify the end of the long press charge effect. In this embodiment, unlike the above-mentioned Examples 44 and 45, once the long-press charge effect is completed, the long-press charge effect is not restarted.

The display mode of the long press correspondence effect of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 189. FIG. 189 is a diagram showing a display mode of a long press corresponding effect when the long press operation of the 46th embodiment is performed. Here, the long press corresponding effect described in the above-described 45 will be referred to and described from the start time of the long press charge effect. However, in this embodiment, after the player interrupts the operation of the decision button 81, , The configuration will be described as a configuration in which the operation cannot be restarted.

At the start time, the long press request image 45b and the long press charge image 45c shown in (a) are displayed on the third symbol display device 42. When it is determined that the operation of the determination button 81 by the player is an operation in the long press mode, the charge of the long press charge image 45c increases as shown in (b). The long-press charge image 45c becomes the charge 42% shown in (c) 2.26 seconds after the start of the long-press charge effect. 0.03 seconds later (that is, 2.29 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect), the charge becomes 43% as shown in (d).

Here, the player performs an operation different from the long press mode at the timing when the long press charge image 45c shown in (d) displays the charge 43% (2.30 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect). The operation in the long press mode is interrupted by releasing the hand from the enter button 81. During this interruption, the long press charge image 45c rises to 44% charge 2.32 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect. At this time, the third symbol display device 42 has a predetermined image different from the image constituting the long press charge effect such as the long press advance notice image 45a and the long press request image 45b (for example, "You cannot press and hold! The long press release notification image 45e) is displayed.

Even after this, the long press release notification image 45e continues to be displayed while the enter button 81 is not operated, and 2.35 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect, the charge rises to 45% and the long press charge effect starts 2 After 38 seconds, the charge increased to 46%, and after 2.41 seconds, the charge increased to 47% shown in (e), and the long-press charge effect shown in (f) started 2.44. After a second, the charge will rise to 48 percent.

Here, the player presses the enter button 81 during the period in which the long-pressed charge image 45c displays the charge of 48% (the period from 2.44 seconds after the start of the long-pressed charge effect to 2.47 seconds after the start of the long-pressed charge effect). Not pressed again. The charge increases to 49% as shown in (g) 2.47 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect without the player restarting the pressing of the decision button 81. After that, the next fifth checkpoint arrives 2.50 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect without the player restarting pressing the decision button 81. If it is determined at the fifth checkpoint that there is no operation in the player's long press mode, the long press charge effect ends with a charge of 49%.

Here, in the third symbol display device 42, in order to end the long press charge effect, the long press request image 46b, the long press charge image 45c, and the long press release notification image 45e are erased to darken the screen. The effect to be displayed is performed. By displaying the blackout image 45e2, the player can clearly understand that the long press charge effect that has been executed so far has been completed. After the blackout image 45e2 is displayed, a character image (end of long press) such as "Charge effect ends! You cannot press and hold anymore!" Indicates that the operation in the long press mode of the enter button 81 shown in (l) is not necessary. The broadcast image 45e3) is displayed. By displaying the long press end notification image 45e3, even for the player who does not notice the end of the long press charge effect in the blackout image 45e2, the long press charge effect that has been executed so far ends, and the long press operation is no longer valid. It is possible to make the player clearly understand that it has become.

Since the long-press charge effect was completed with a charge of 49%, the long-press charge image 45c is within the range of the charge of 1 to 49%. Is displayed. In addition, instead of displaying the charge attack image 45d-C, the long press charge effect may be completely completed by displaying the darkening image 45e2 and the long press end notification image 45e3.

If the result of the variable display is off, in the subsequent reach development production, as shown in (j), the attack of the own character is displayed as if it is not so strong, and then the enemy character counterattacks. Then, as shown in (k), the victory of the enemy character in the reach development effect, that is, the out-of-reach combination of the development symbols is displayed, and as shown in (l), the normal screen is returned to the out-of-reach combination of the decorative symbols. Is displayed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 46th embodiment, the above-mentioned effect execution function executes a predetermined effect (for example, display of the long press release notification image 45e) for a predetermined period until the determination timing arrives. After that, at the determination timing, an effect of suggesting or notifying the end of the long press charge effect (for example, display of the darkening image 45e2 or the long press end notification image 45e3) is executed. As a result, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted during the execution of the long press charge effect after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in the long press mode, the predetermined effect is performed for a predetermined period until the determination timing arrives. Since it is possible to notify the player of the end of the effect at the determination timing after the execution of, the interest of the long press charge effect is more preferable than the case where the effect is ended when the detection of the operation is interrupted. Can be improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P4-5) above, for example.

In the present embodiment, the effect of suggesting or notifying the end of the long press charge effect is the effect of displaying the darkening image 45e2 and the long press end notification image 45e3, but either the darkening image 45e2 or the long press end notification image 45e3. It may be an effect of displaying only.

In the above-mentioned Examples 45 and 46, the long press release notification image 45e was only displayed within one variable display period, but as an operation different from the long press mode, a hand is pressed from the enter button 81. The separated periods may be displayable over a plurality of variable display periods. This point will be described below.

As the above-mentioned effect execution function, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 is, for example, an operation of releasing the hand from the decision button 81 as an operation different from the long press mode during the execution of the long press corresponding effect (for example, the long press charge effect). The result (for example, the display of the long press release notification image 45e) is shown during the execution of one predetermined display effect (for example, the variable display effect), and the result of a different operation shown during the execution of one predetermined display effect is shown. , Is also shown during the execution of the next predetermined display effect, or during the execution of the subsequent predetermined display effect.

In this configuration, the results of different operations performed during the execution of one predetermined display effect are shown both during the execution of one predetermined display effect and during the subsequent execution of the predetermined display effect. Is done. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the fun of the long-pressing response effect through the operation of releasing the hand from the determination button 81 as an operation different from the long-pressing mode.

In this case, in addition to the character information "I can't press and hold!", The long press release notification image 45e displays the time when the hand is released from the enter button 81 as an operation different from the long press mode. You may. That is, the sub control device 262 may be provided with a counter that counts the time when the hand is released from the decision button 81 as an operation different from the long press mode.

Further, in this case, when the total time when the hand is released from the decision button 81 exceeds a specific time as an operation different from the long press mode, it is displayed on the third symbol display device 42. It may reflect the change in the state of. As an operation different from the long press mode, the count may be returned to 0 when the time when the hand is released from the decision button 81 exceeds a certain time during one long press corresponding effect. By doing so, in each of the long press corresponding effects of the plurality of variable display effects, the player is made to repeat the operation of releasing the hand from the decision button 81 as an operation different from the long press mode for an appropriate time. It is possible to make it difficult to get bored with the long press response.

The change in the state of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 42 changes according to the jackpot expectation, for example, when the total time when the hand is released from the enter button 81 exceeds a specific time. It is to make a big change in the production. For example, if the effect that changes according to the jackpot expectation is a hold display, when the total time when the enter button 81 is released exceeds a specific time, the jackpot expectation is set to a high hold display. Display popular characters nearby, and display less popular characters nearby for hold display with low jackpot expectations. If the total time that the hand is released from the enter button 81 does not exceed a specific time, the hold change is displayed only in the color of the hold display without displaying such a character in the hold display. .. As a result, when the total time when the hand is released from the enter button 81 exceeds a specific time, the total time when the hand is released from the enter button 81 is held more than before the specific time is exceeded. The jackpot expectation indicated by the change can be easily understood.

The change in the state of the effect is not limited to the effect (visual information) displayed on the third symbol display device 42, but may be the sound (auditory information) output from the sound output unit 24. For example, when the total time when the hand is released from the enter button 81 exceeds a specific time, the volume of the notification sound for indicating that the jackpot expectation is high is set, and the hand is released from the enter button 81. Make the total time spent larger than before the specific time was exceeded. On the contrary, before the total time when the hand is released from the enter button 81 exceeds a specific time, the volume is set to a low volume that is difficult to hear. As a result, when the total time when the hand is released from the decision button 81 exceeds a specific time, the degree of expectation of a big hit can be easily understood by the volume of the notification sound.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 47th embodiment, the above-mentioned effect execution function is an operation of releasing the hand from the decision button 81 as an operation different from the long press mode during the execution of the long press corresponding effect. The result (for example, the display of the long press release notification image 45e) is shown during the execution of one predetermined display effect (for example, the variable display effect), and the result of a different operation shown during the execution of one predetermined display effect is shown. , Is also shown during the execution of the next predetermined display effect, or during the execution of the subsequent predetermined display effect. That is, the results of different operations performed during the execution of one predetermined display effect are shown both during the execution of one predetermined display effect and during the subsequent execution of the predetermined display effect. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the fun of the long-pressing response effect through the operation of releasing the hand from the determination button 81 as an operation different from the long-pressing mode. This is an example of the gaming machine according to (P2-0A) or (P2-000) described above, for example.

Further, the above-mentioned effect execution function changes the state of the effect executed during the execution of the predetermined display effect according to the result of different operations shown during the execution of the predetermined display effect. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the long-pressing response effect through the operation of releasing the hand from the decision button 81 as an operation different from the long-pressing mode.

Further, the above-mentioned effect execution function is during a predetermined display effect (during variable display) when the enter button 81 is operated in a long-pressed manner within the valid period during which the operation of the enter button 81 is valid. An operation corresponding to a specific operation (for example, a long press charge effect) is executed, and an operation different from the operation in the long press mode is performed within the period in which the presence or absence of the operation in the long press mode of the enter button 81 is determined. If so, the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect is continued, and the effect different from the specific operation corresponding effect (for example, the display of the long press release notification image 45e) is executed. As a result, even if an operation different from the operation in the specific mode is performed after the specific operation corresponding effect is started, the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect is continued and another effect is executed. It becomes easy to recognize that it is not necessary to redo the operation of the operation means from the beginning even if the operation different from the operation of is performed. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the production corresponding to the specific operation. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P2-00) above, for example.

The result of the operation of releasing the hand from the decision button 81 as an operation different from the long press mode may be other than the display of the long press release notification image 45e.

That is, the above-mentioned effect execution function is, for example, the result of an operation of releasing the hand from the decision button 81 as an operation different from the long press mode (for example, a hand described later) during the execution of the long press corresponding effect (for example, the long press charge effect). The display of the release effect image 45j) is shown during the execution of one predetermined display effect (for example, a variable display effect), and the result of a different operation shown during the execution of one predetermined display effect is the next predetermined. It is also indicated during the execution of the display effect of the above, or during the execution of the predetermined display effect after that.

In this configuration as well, the result of different operations performed during the execution of one predetermined display effect may be during the execution of one predetermined display effect or during the subsequent execution of the predetermined display effect. Shown. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the fun of the long-pressing response effect through the operation of releasing the hand from the determination button 81 as an operation different from the long-pressing mode.

In the following, as a result of the operation of releasing the hand from the decision button 81 as an operation different from the long press mode, the hand release effect in which the hand release effect image 45j is displayed is executed, and as a result of this release effect, the hold display pattern is displayed. A configuration for executing the switching effect will be described.

First, a control system for executing the hand-release effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 190 and 191. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing a determination button input monitoring / effect processing by the sub control device 262 of the 48th embodiment. FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing a variation display mode setting process by the sub control device 262.

As shown in FIG. 190, in the decision button input monitoring / effect process of the present embodiment, when the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 presses the decision button 81 for the first time within the valid period in the long press charge effect (step S4502: YES, step S4503: in the case of YES), in step S4505A, it is determined whether or not the press detection of the enter button 81 continues for, for example, 2.0 seconds. In the long press determination period of this embodiment, the maximum execution period of the long press charge effect is set to 12 seconds, and the detection valid period of the enter button 81 is set to 8 seconds. It is set longer than the long press determination period (0.1 seconds) of 46. If the press detection of the enter button continues for 2.0 seconds, it is determined that the operation in the long press mode has been performed (step S4506: YES), and the process proceeds to step S4506B.

In step S4506B, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the release timer, which will be described later, is running. The hand release timer is activated when the player releases the hand from the decision button 81 different from the long press mode during the execution of the long press charge effect, and the hand is released from the decision button 81 different from the long press mode. It counts the time when the release operation is performed. If the release timer is running, the decision button 81 is pressed during the execution of the release effect, it is determined that the release effect has been completed, and the process proceeds to step S4506C and step S4506D. In step S4506C, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the release flag, which will be described later, to 0, sets a release release command to notify the display control device 45 that the release operation has been released, and sets the release release command in step S4506D. Then, the release timer, which will be described later, is set to 0, and the release effect ends.

If it is determined in step S4506B that the release timer has not been activated, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines that the long press charge effect is normally executed, and proceeds to step S4507B. In step S4507B, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the count value of the long press timer has counted 0.06 n seconds (n is an integer from 1 to 100). If the long press timer counts 0.06 n seconds, the process proceeds to step S4508B, otherwise the process ends. In step S4508B, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 increments the long press charge counter every time 0.06 n seconds are counted, and proceeds to step S4509B. In step S4509B, if the long press timer counts 0.6 n seconds, the process proceeds to step S4510B, otherwise the process ends. In step S4510B, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 increments the checkpoint passage counter every time 0.6 n seconds are counted, and ends this process.

When the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines that the press of the enter button 81 has not been detected during the execution of the long press charge effect (step S2312: NO, step S4512: YES, step S4513: YES), the step. After reading the value of the checkpoint passing counter (the number of passed checkpoints) in S4514, it is determined in step S4514A whether or not the hand-release effect continuous flag described later is 0. If the hand-release effect continuous flag is 0, it is determined that the operation of releasing the hand from the decision button 81 different from the long-press mode is performed for the first time during the execution of the long-press charge effect, and steps S4514B, step S4514C, and step S4514D Proceed to. If the release effect continuous flag is not 0 (that is, if it is 1), the operation of releasing the hand from the decision button 81, which is different from the long press mode, is already performed during the execution of the long press charge effect, and the release effect is performed. It is determined that the execution has been performed, and the process proceeds to step S4514E.

In step S4514B, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 activates the hand release timer and counts the time during which the operation of releasing the hand from the decision button 81, which is different from the long press mode, is performed. In step S451C, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the release flag to 1 and sets a release start command to indicate to the display control device 45 that the release effect is being executed. In step S4514D, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the release effect continuation flag to 1, indicating that the release effect has already been executed, and proceeds to step S4514F.

In step S4514E, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 reads out the count value of the release point counter, which will be described later, when the release effect has already been executed, and indicates that the release operation is continued. Set the release command to indicate to step S4514F.

In step S4514F, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the count value of the release timer has counted 0.06 n seconds (n is an integer from 1 to 100). If the release timer counts 0.06 n seconds, the process proceeds to step S4514G, otherwise the process ends.

In step S4514G, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 increments the release point counter by +1 every time 0.06 n seconds are counted, and releases the hand to indicate to the display control device 45 that the release points have been added by 1. Set the point + 1 command and proceed to step S4515C. In step S4515C, whether or not the no-detection time limit has elapsed since the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 was operated to release the decision button 81, which is different from the long-press mode (for example, no press of the decision button 81 is detected). It is determined whether or not the time has passed from the time of detection to passing three checkpoints in this embodiment). When the time limit has elapsed, steps S4516A and S4516B are performed in order to perform a process of ending the long-press charge effect and the release effect.

In step S4516A, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the long press related flags such as the long press flag, the long press timer, the long press charge counter, and the checkpoint passing counter to 0 in order to end the long press charge effect. .. In step S4516B, in order to end the release effect, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 is related to release such as a release timer, a release flag, a release point counter, a release effect ongoing counter, and a release effect continuation counter. Set the flag etc. to 0 and let go of the hand fails

In order to indicate to the display control device 45 that the process has ended, a release failure command is set, and this process ends.

As shown in FIG. 191, in the variation display mode setting process of this embodiment, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 receives from the main control device 261 as described with reference to FIG. 179 in the above-mentioned embodiment 47. When the variable pattern specification command does not include the command with the button suggestion effect (step S2474: NO) and does not include the command with the button long press effect (step S2474A: NO), in step S2474G, the hand is used. It is determined whether or not the release effect continuous flag is set to 1. If the release effect continuous flag is set to 1, if the release effect continuation flag is set to 1, the release effect is executed in the immediately preceding fluctuation display or the previous variation display. After determining, the process proceeds to step S2474H.

In step S2474H, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the button long press effect flag to 1, and in the next variation display or the next variation display of the variation display in which the release effect continuation flag is set to 1. Also, the long-press charge effect is executed, the release effect can be executed again in the long-press charge effect, and the process proceeds to step S2474I. In addition, even though the command with the button long press effect is not included, the variable pattern command that can be specified is used in order to execute the effect corresponding to the long press based on the fact that the release effect ongoing flag is 1. It is advisable to prepare a plurality of types of long-pressing effects for the corresponding time length in advance. In step S2474I, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 executes the button long press effect setting process (FIG. 180) in the same manner as in step S2474C described above.

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 receives the decorative symbol designation command (step S2477), sets the stop display command (step S2478), and then in step S2478A, whether or not the release effect continuous flag is 1. To judge. If the hand-release effect continuous flag is 1, it is determined that the hand-release effect has been executed, and the process proceeds to step S2478B. If not, it is determined that the release effect has not been executed, that is, the long press charge effect has not been executed, and this process is terminated.

In step S2478B, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 executes the release effect in the variation display of a predetermined number of times including the next variation display (for example, three times including the variation display in which the release effect continuation flag is set to 1). Then, the hand-release effect continuation counter is incremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step S2478C. In step S2478C, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the count value of the hand-release effect continuation counter is 3. If the count value of the hand-release effect continuation counter is 3, it is determined that the hand-release effect has been executed in the required number of fluctuation displays, and the process proceeds to step S2478D and step S2478E. If this is not the case, it is determined that the release effect has not been executed in the required number of fluctuation displays, and this process is terminated.

In step S2478D, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the release effect continuation counter to 0, and ends a series of release effects. In step S2478E, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the release effect establishment flag to 1 in order to switch the pending change pattern executed as a result of the series of release effects, and ends this process.

Next, a switching effect of the hold display pattern executed as a result of the hand-release effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 and 193. FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing a read-ahead variation pattern designation command reception processing by the sub control device 262. FIG. 193 (a) is a diagram for explaining the hold display pattern A, and FIG. 193 (b) is a diagram for explaining the hold display pattern B.

As shown in FIG. 192, in the read-ahead variation pattern designation command reception processing of this embodiment, the hold display pattern executed as a result of the above-mentioned series of hand-release effects is switched. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 issues a look-ahead variation pattern command (step S2411) and a hold ball storage area designation command (step S2412) from the main control device 261. Received and stores the look-ahead variation pattern specification command in the designated area (step S2413). After that, the pattern of the hold change in the look-ahead effect is normally set to the hold display pattern A, and when the above-mentioned series of release effects is established, it is set to the hold display pattern B.

That is, in step S2414A, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the table for determining the hold display pattern is set in the normal hold display table A. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 proceeds to step S2414B if the hold display table A is set, sets the hold change pattern in the look-ahead effect to the hold display pattern A, and proceeds to step S2414C otherwise. In step S2424C, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the table for determining the hold display pattern is set in the hold display table B as a result of the series of release effects. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 proceeds to step S2414D if the hold display table B is set, sets the hold change pattern in the look-ahead effect to the hold display pattern B, and proceeds to step S2414F otherwise.

In step S2414F, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the above-mentioned hand-release effect establishment flag is 1. If the release effect establishment flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S2414G, and if not, the present process is terminated. In step S2414G, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 is used to reflect the result of a series of hand-release effects.
The setting of the current hold display table is cleared, and the process proceeds to step S2414H. In step S2414H, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the total value of the release point counter exceeds 60 points as a result of the series of release effects. If the total value of the release point counter is less than 60 points, the process proceeds to step S2414I, and if it exceeds 60 points, the process proceeds to step S2414J.

In step S2414I, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the hold display table A in response to the fact that the release point is less than 60 points as a result of the series of release effects, and sets the hold display pattern to the hold display pattern. Decide on A. In step S2414J, the hold display table B is set in response to the fact that the release point is 60 points or more, and the hold display pattern is determined to be the hold display pattern B. After that, in step S2414K, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 has finished reflecting the result of the series of release effects, so the release point counter is returned to 0 and the release effect establishment flag is returned to 0. Then, the process proceeds to step S2415. In step S2415, a display hold display command is set, and this process ends.

As shown in FIG. 193 (a), when the hold display pattern A is set, the hold display changes to either white or blue only. That is, the white hold does not suggest that the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the hold may be a jackpot combination, or is unlikely to be a jackpot combination, as described with reference to FIG. It suggests that. The blue hold indicates that the variation pattern corresponding to the hold is more likely to be a jackpot than the variation pattern corresponding to the white hold. In this way, when the result of the series of release effects is not good (less than 60 points), in the hold display pattern A, the player is likely to have a jackpot combination of the fluctuation patterns corresponding to the hold. I can't judge whether it is low or low.

As shown in FIG. 193 (b), when the hold display pattern B is set, the hold display changes to any of white, blue, red, and rainbow colors. That is, the white hold does not suggest that the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the hold may be a jackpot combination, or suggests that it is unlikely to be a jackpot combination. A blue hold is more likely to be a jackpot for the variation pattern corresponding to the hold than a white hold, but it is likely to be a jackpot compared to a variation pattern corresponding to a red hold. It suggests that it is relatively low. The red color suggests that the variation pattern corresponding to the hold is higher than the variation pattern corresponding to the blue hold. The iridescent hold is most likely to be a jackpot, suggesting that the variation pattern corresponding to the hold is confirmed to be a jackpot combination. In this way, if the result of the series of hand-release effects is good (60 points or more), in the hold display pattern B, is there a high possibility that the player will have a jackpot combination of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the hold? It becomes easier to judge whether it is low.

Next, the hand-release effect display process by the display control device 42 will be described with reference to FIG. 194. FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing a hand-release effect display process by the display control device 42. Further, the description of the hand-release effect in the determination button input monitoring process shown in FIG. 190 described above will also be referred to as appropriate.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs a hand-release effect display process as one of the normal processes.

Specifically, in step S2511, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the release start command has been received from the sub control device 262 in step S4514 described above. If the release start command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2512, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2515. In step S2512, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the hand-release effect image 45j, and proceeds to step S2513. In this step S2512, since the start of the hand-release effect is displayed, the hand-release effect image 45j is displayed with the total hand-release point as 0 point.

In step S2513, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the release point +1 command has been received from the sub control device 262 in step S4514G described above. If the release point + 1 command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2514, and if not, this process ends. In step S2514, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 executes a display that increases the number of points displayed as the total number of release points by one.

In step S2515, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the continuation start command has been received from the sub control device 262 in step S4514E described above. If the hand-release continuation start command has been received, the hand-release effect is resumed, so the process proceeds to step S2515A. In step S2515A, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 reads out the value of the total release points, and proceeds to step S2512 described above. In step S2512, the hand-release effect image 45j is displayed using the value of the total hand-release points read out. As a result, even when the second and subsequent hand-release operations are performed, the previously performed hand-release effect can be continued. If the hand-release continuation start command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S2516.

In step S2516, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the release command has been received from the sub control device 262 in step S4506C described above. When the release release command is received, the enter button 81 can be pressed before passing through the third checkpoint in the release effect, so the process proceeds to step S2517, and if not, the process proceeds to step S2522.

In step S2517, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the total number of hand-release point counters is 60 points or more. If it is less than 60 points, the process proceeds to step S2518 in order to continue the release effect. In step S2518, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the hand-release effect continuous image 45k described later, and proceeds to step S2519. In step S2519, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 ends the display of the release effect image 45j in a state of holding (storing) the numerical value of the total release points, and ends this process.

If the total number of the release point counters is 60 points or more in step S2517 described above, the release effect is successful (the privilege of improving the pending change can be obtained from the next time), so the process proceeds to step S2520. In step S2520, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the hand-release effect completion image 45l, which will be described later, and proceeds to step S2521. In step S2521, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 ends with the result that the hand-release effect is successful, so that the display of the hand-release effect image 45k ends and the present process ends.

In step S2522, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the failure command has been received from the sub control device 262 in step S4516B described above. When the release failure command is received, the release effect has passed the third checkpoint while the hand is released from the enter button 81, and the release effect is completed. Therefore, the process proceeds to step S2523. If not, this process ends. In step S2523, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the hand-release effect failure image 45m described later, and proceeds to step S2523. In step S2523, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 ends as a result of the hand-release effect failure, so that the display of the hand-release effect image 45k ends and the present process ends.

Next, the long-press charge effect including the hand-release effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 195 to 198. FIG. 195 is a time chart showing a long press response effect when the first release operation is performed. FIG. 196 is a time chart showing a long press response effect when the next release operation is performed. FIG. 197 is a time chart showing a long press response effect when the final hand release operation is performed. FIG. 198 is a time chart showing a long press response effect when the hand release operation is too long in FIG. 197.

First, an outline of the hand-release effect performed by this long-press charge effect will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 195 to 197, which will be described later, the hand-release effect performed as a result of the operation of releasing the hand from the decision button 81 as an operation different from the long-press mode is an operation for ending the hand-release effect (for example, the decision button 81). It ends when the operation in the long press mode) is performed. As a result, when the hand-release effect is executed, it is possible to recognize that the operation to end the hand-release effect is necessary.

Further, as a result of the operation of releasing the hand from the decision button 81 as an operation different from the long press mode, the long press corresponding effect (for example, the long press charge effect) is completed as shown in FIG. 198 to be described later. In some cases, it can be terminated. As a result, it is possible to execute the hand-release effect only during the effect corresponding to the long press.

Further, as shown in FIG. 196 or FIG. 197, which will be described later, the hand-release effect performed as a result of the operation of releasing the hand from the decision button 81 as an operation different from the long-press mode is a long-press compatible effect (for example, a long-press charge effect). ) Is executed, and if the operation of releasing the hand from the decision button 81 is performed as an operation different from the long press mode, the operation can be continued in a state of inheriting the previously executed release effect. As a result, it is possible to take over and entertain the previously executed release effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 195 or FIG. 196, which will be described later, the hand-release effect performed as a result of the operation of releasing the hand from the decision button 81 as an operation different from the long-press mode is a predetermined display effect (for example,) executed earlier. After the end of the variable display effect related to the variable display A described later, it is possible to continue in a predetermined display effect (for example, the variable display effect related to the variable display B described later) to be executed next. As a result, the hand-release effect that was executed during the previous predetermined display effect can be taken over and enjoyed during the next predetermined display effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 195 or FIG. 197, which will be described later, the hand-release effect performed as a result of the operation of releasing the hand from the decision button 81 as an operation different from the long-press mode is executed first in one predetermined display effect. After the end of the long-press corresponding effect (for example, the long-press charge effect executed in the above-mentioned variation display A), the long-press corresponding effect (for example, the long-press charge effect executed in the above-mentioned variation display B) is executed next. ), It is possible to continue. As a result, in one predetermined display effect, the hand-release effect that was executed during the previous long-press compatible effect can be taken over and enjoyed during the next long-press compatible effect.

Next, a specific example of the hand-release effect executed by this long-press charge effect will be described with reference to the above drawings.

As shown in FIG. 195 (a), in the first release operation different from the long press mode, the variable display A including the long press charge effect is executed. The detection timing of the decision button 81 is the same as that of FIG. 182 of Example 47 described above, for example, every 0.01 seconds. The effective timing (that is, the effective period of the detection button 81) is set to, for example, a maximum of 8 seconds as described above. At the operation timing shown in (b), the enter button 81 is pressed immediately after the start of the long press charge effect, and is long for 1.20 seconds from 4.60 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect to 5.80 seconds after the start. It indicates that the operation of releasing the hand from the decision button 81, which is different from the pressing mode, has been performed.

The checkpoint shown in (c) is set for a longer time, for example, every 0.60 seconds, as the long press charge effect becomes longer than that of the 47th embodiment. In this embodiment, the period until the checkpoint is passed three times is set as the production continuation period. Therefore, during the execution of the long-press charge effect, after the player releases the decision button 81, which is different from the long-press mode, until the checkpoint is passed three times (that is, within 1.80 seconds at the maximum). If the enter button 81 is pressed again, the long press charge effect is continued. In the operation timing example shown in (b) above, during the execution of the long press charge effect, the enter button is pressed again 1.20 seconds after the operation of releasing the hand from the enter button 81, which is different from the long press mode. Since it is, the long press charge production is continued after that. Therefore, the long press flag shown in (d) continues to indicate 1. The long press charge image shown in (e) is set to increase by 1 every 0.06 seconds.

The long-press hand release timer shown in (f) counts the time during which the player releases the hand from the determination button 81, which is different from the long-press mode, during the long-press charge effect. In the operation timing example shown in (b) above, 1.20 seconds from the start 4.60 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect to 5.80 seconds after the start are counted.

In the long press count image shown in (g), the number of points increases according to the time during which the player releases the decision button 81, which is different from the long press mode, during the long press charge effect. This is an image displayed during the execution of the production. The long press count image is set to increase by 1 every 0.06 seconds. When the operation of releasing the hand from the determination button 81, which is different from the long press mode, is performed in the long press count image beyond the above-mentioned effect continuation period, the portion exceeding the effect continuation period is not counted. In the operation timing example shown in (b) above, the hand-release count image is incremented by 1 point from 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and is counted until it reaches 20 points 5.80 seconds after the start. .. If the hand-release operation different from the long-press mode is performed within the period during which the effect can be continued, the long-press charge effect including the hand-release effect is continued even in the next variable display.

As shown in FIG. 196 (a), the next release operation is executed on the variable display B including the long press charge effect, which is executed next to the variable display A. At the operation timing shown in (b), during the execution of the long-press charge effect, the decision button 81 different from the long-press mode is used for 1.50 seconds from 4.50 seconds after the start of the long-press charge effect to 6.00 seconds after the start of the long-press charge effect. The release operation is being performed. This 1.50 second hand-release operation is within the effect continuation period (maximum 1.80 seconds). The hand-release timer shown in (f) counts this 1.50 seconds. The release effect performed on the variation display B is displayed as a continuation of the release effect executed on the variation display A described above. The hand-release image shown in (g) starts counting from 20 points at the end of the hand-release effect of the variable display A, increases by 1 point to 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, and starts at 6.00. It counts until it reaches 45 points after a second. Since the hand-release operation was performed within the effect continuation period in the variable display B, the long-press charge effect including the hand-release effect is continued in the next variable display C as well.

As shown in FIG. 197 (a), the next (last) release operation is executed on the variation display C including the long press charge effect, which is executed next to the variation display B. At the operation timing shown in (b), during the execution of the long-press charge effect, the decision button 81 different from the long-press mode is used for 1.60 seconds after the start of the long-press charge effect 4.60 seconds and 5.80 seconds after the start. The release operation is being performed. This 1.20 second hand-release operation is within the effect continuation period (maximum 1.80 seconds). The hand-release timer shown in (f) counts this 1.20 seconds. The release effect performed on the variation display C is displayed as a continuation of the release effect executed on the variation display B described above. The release image shown in (g) starts counting from 45 points at the end of the release effect of the variation display B, increases by 1 point to 46, 47, 48, 49, 50, and starts 5.80. It counts until it reaches 65 points after a second. The series of release effects is the last of the release effects executed in the variable display C. As a result of the series of release effects, the total number of release points shown in the release images is 60 points or more, so it is determined that the release effects have been successful. As a result, the above-mentioned hold display pattern B is set.

As shown in FIG. 198, when the hand-release operation is performed beyond the effect continuation period, the result is that the hand-release effect and the long-press charge effect are terminated. Here, the hand-release effect performed in the variation display C shown in FIG. 197 described above will be described as an example, but the same applies to the hand-release effect performed in FIGS. 195 and 196. In the operation timing shown in (b), even if 1.60 seconds from the start 4.60 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect to 6.20 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect is exceeded during the execution of the long press charge effect (start 6.26 seconds). (Until later), the hand-release operation of releasing the decision button 81 is being executed. Due to the release operation for more than 1.60 seconds, the third checkpoint (6.20 seconds after the start) from the start of the release operation, which is the period during which the effect can be continued, has been exceeded. The release effect ends when the release operation reaches the third checkpoint, 6.20 seconds after the start. Therefore, the release image shown in (g) ends when 71 points reaching the start 6.20 seconds are displayed, but the series of release effects is unsuccessful. As a result, the above-mentioned hold display pattern A is set.

Next, the display mode of the long-press charge effect including the hand-release effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 199 to 202. FIG. 199 is a diagram showing a display mode of a long press response effect when the first hand release operation is performed. FIG. 200 is a diagram showing a display mode of a long press response effect when the next hand release operation is performed. FIG. 201 is a time chart showing a display mode of a long press response effect when the final hand release operation is performed. FIG. 202 is a diagram showing a display mode of a long press response effect when the hand release operation is too long in FIG. 201. The display mode shown in FIG. 199 corresponds to the time chart shown in FIG. 195, the display mode shown in FIG. 200 corresponds to the time chart shown in FIG. 196, and the display mode shown in FIG. 201 is shown in FIG. 197. Corresponding to the time chart, the display mode shown in FIG. 202 corresponds to the time chart shown in FIG. 198.

First, an outline of the display mode of the hand-release effect executed by this long-press charge effect will be described.

The hand-release effect performed as a result of the operation of releasing the hand from the enter button 81 as an operation different from the long-press mode is the specific visual information (for example, the hand-release effect image 45j) that visually indicates that the hand-release operation has been performed. It is a display. As a result, the operation different from the specific mode is performed by visually showing how the long press corresponding effect (for example, the long press charge effect) is being executed even though the hand release operation is performed. Can be visually recognized.

Further, the different release effect performed as a result of the operation of releasing the hand from the decision button 81 as an operation different from the long press mode uses a numerical value that changes based on an operation different from the operation in the long press mode of the decision button 81. This is an effect (for example, an effect of changing the number of seconds required for the release time or the total number of points required for the total number of release points in the release effect image 45j). As a result, it is possible to easily recognize that an operation different from the long press mode is being performed by showing a numerical change even though the hand release operation is performed.

Further, after one of the above-mentioned release effects (for example, the release effect performed on the above-mentioned variation display A) is executed, another release effect (for example, the release effect performed on the above-mentioned variation display B) is performed. Is executed, an effect using a numerical value that changes based on another hand release operation is performed using a numerical value that changes based on one hand release operation (for example, a hand release effect on the variable display B). Starts with the total number of release points obtained in the release effect on the variable display A). As a result, it is possible to easily recognize that the operation different from the long press mode is continuously performed by continuously changing the numerical value even though the hand release operation is performed.

Next, a specific example of the display mode of the hand-release effect executed by the long-press charge effect will be described with reference to the above drawings.

As shown in FIG. 199 (a), the variable display A including the long press charge effect is started on the third symbol display device 42. As shown in (b), for example, during the reach display, the third symbol display device 42 displays information for notifying the start of the long-press charge effect including the hand-release effect as the long-press advance notice image 45a. The notice information is, for example, textual information such as "Press and hold the button to save the charge and hit the target! (If you release your hand while pressing and holding ...!? (Maybe there is something good))". (C) As shown in (d) and (e), the player operates the decision button 81 in the long-press mode to execute the long-press charge effect. The time point shown in (e) is 4.52 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect, and the long press charge image 45c indicates that the charge is 42%. The time point shown in (f) is 4.58 seconds after the start. By displaying the information "(maybe you should release your hand during the long press)" on the long press notice image 45a described above, the player can be made to try the release operation during the long press charge effect. ..

The time point shown in (g) is 4.60 seconds after the start, and is the timing at which the player releases the decision button 81, which is different from the long press mode. The long press charge image 45c shows that the same charge as in (f) is 43%. At this time, the third symbol display device 42 displays the long-press request image 45b, the long-press charge image 45c, and the hand-release effect image 45j as the player releases the hand. The hand-release effect image 45j includes information displaying the time when the player releases the hand from the determination button 81, which is different from the long-press mode (for example, character information of "hand-release time 0 seconds") and the player. Information for displaying the points acquired by the release operation (for example, character information of "total 0 points for release points") is displayed. The "hand-release time" and the "hand-release point" shown in the hand-release effect image 45j increase according to the time when the player executes the hand-release operation.

The time point shown in (h) is 5.72 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect. The long press charge image 45c shows that the charge is 62%. In addition, the hand-release operation continues, and the hand-release effect image 45j displays "hand-release time 1.12 seconds" and "hand-release point 18 points". The time point shown in (i) is 5.78 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect. The long press charge image 45c shows that the charge is 63%. In the hand-release effect image 45j, "hand-release time 1.18 seconds" and "hand-release point 19 points" are displayed. The time point shown in (j) is 5.80 seconds after the start of the long-press charge effect, and is the timing at which the player performs a hand-release operation different from the long-press mode. At this time, the long press charge image 45c shows that the charge is 63%. In the hand-release effect image 45j, "hand-release time 1.20 seconds" and "hand-release point 20 points" are displayed.

The time point shown in (k) is 5.84 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect, and the long press charge image 45c indicates that the charge is 64%. In the hand-release effect image 45j, the player completes the hand-release operation different from the long-press mode within the period during which the effect can be continued (from the start of the long-press charge effect to 6.20 seconds). The staging continuation image 45k is displayed. In the hand-release effect continuation image 45k, for example, the text information "The release effect continues! It was a good reaction!" Is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, from 2 to 2) in order to show that the hand-release effect is continued even in the next variable display. 3 seconds) is displayed. After that, if the long-press charge effect is continued and the operation in the long-press mode is continued from the start to 8.00 seconds later, the long-press charge image 45c becomes 100%. In (l), the result of the variation display A is displayed, and it is shown that the result of the deviation is "7", "2", and "7". This completes the variation display A including the first release operation.

As shown in FIG. 200A, the third symbol display device 42 has started the variation display B, which is the variation display following the variation display A and includes the long press charge effect. As shown in (b), the long press advance notice image 45a is displayed on the third symbol display device 42, for example, during the reach display. (C) As shown in (d) and (e), the long press charge effect is executed by the player operating the decision button 81 in the long press mode, and the time point shown in (e) is the long press charge. It is 4.46 seconds after the start of the effect, and the long press charge image 45c indicates that the charge is 41%.

The time point shown in (f) is 4.50 seconds after the start, and is the timing when the player executes the hand-release operation of releasing the hand from the determination button 81, which is different from the long-press mode. At this time, the long press charge image 45c shows that the charge is 41%. Further, in the release effect image 45j, for example, "release point total 20 points" is displayed as information for displaying "hand release time 0 seconds" and the accumulation of release points acquired in the previous release effect. Has been done. The time point shown in (g) is 4.52 seconds after the start. The long press charge image 45c shows that the charge is 42 percent. At this time, the release effect image 45j is displayed as "hand release time 0.02 seconds" and is displayed as "total release points 20 points" as in (f).

The time point shown in (h) is 5.90 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect, and the long press charge image 45c indicates that the charge is 65%. In addition, the hand-release operation continues, and the hand-release effect image 45j displays "hand-release time 1.40 seconds" and "hand-release point total 43 points". The time point shown in (i) is about 5.96 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect. The long press charge image 45c shows that the charge is 66%. In the hand-release effect image 45j, "hand-release time 1.46 seconds" and "hand-release point 44 points" are displayed.

The time point shown in (j) is 6.00 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect, and is the timing when the player presses the decision button 81 again. The long press charge image 45c shows that the charge is 66%. In the hand-release effect image 45j, "hand-release time 1.50 seconds" and "hand-release point 45 points" are displayed. The time point shown in (k) is 6.02 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect. At this time, in response to the fact that the player has completed the hand-release operation within the period in which the effect can be continued (from the start of the long-press charge effect to 6.20 seconds), the third symbol display device 42 receives the hand-release effect image. Instead of 45j, the hand-release effect continuation image 45k is displayed, indicating that the hand-release effect is continued. In (l), the result of the variation display B is displayed, and here, it is shown that the reach of the deviation results “6”, “3”, and “6” is out of reach. This completes the variation display B including the second release operation.

As shown in FIG. 201 (a), the third symbol display device 42 has started the variation display C, which is the variation display following the variation display B and includes the long press charge effect. As shown in (b), the long press advance notice image 45a is displayed on the third symbol display device 42, for example, during the reach display. (C) As shown in (d) and (e), the player operates the decision button 81 in the long-press mode to execute the long-press charge effect. The time point shown in (e) is 4.52 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect. The long press charge image 45c shows that the charge is 42 percent. The time point shown in (f) is 4.58 seconds after the start. The long press charge image 45c shows that the charge is 43 percent.

The time point shown in (g) is 4.60 seconds after the start, and is the timing at which the player performs an operation of releasing the hand from the determination button 81, which is different from the long press mode. The long press charge image 45c shows that the same charge as in (f) is 43%. At this time, the release effect image 45j is, for example, "total release points 45" as information for displaying the "release time 0 seconds" and the accumulation of the release points acquired in the release effect of the previous variation display B. "Point" is displayed.

The time point shown in (h) is 5.72 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect, and the long press charge image 45c indicates that the charge is 62%. In addition, the hand-release operation continues, and the hand-release effect image 45j displays "hand-release time 1.12 seconds" and "hand-release point total 63 points". The time point shown in (i) is 5.78 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect. The long press charge image 45c shows that the charge is 63%. In the hand-release effect image 45j, "hand-release time 1.18 seconds" and "hand-release point 64 points" are displayed.

The time point shown in (j) is 5.80 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect, and is the timing when the player presses the decision button 81 again. The long press charge image 45c shows that the charge is 63%. In the hand-release effect image 45j, "hand-release time 1.20 seconds" and "hand-release point 65 points" are displayed. The time point shown in (k) is 5.84 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect. The long press charge image 45c shows that the charge is 64%. In addition, instead of the hand-release effect image 45j, the player completes the hand-release operation within the period during which the effect can be continued (from the start of the long-press charge effect to 6.20 seconds), and a series of hand-release effects are produced. A release effect completion image 45l indicating that the above is completed is displayed. In the hand-release effect completed image 45l, since the result of the hand-release effect was 60 points or more, for example, in order to show that the hold change is improved in the next variation display, for example, "Hand-release effect success! The text information "I'll get better!" Is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 seconds). In (l), the result of the variation display C is displayed, and here, it is shown that the reach of the deviation results “5”, “4”, and “5” is out of reach. This completes the variable display C including the final release effect.

As shown in FIG. 202, when the hand-release operation is performed beyond the effect continuation period, the display mode is such that the hand-release effect and the long-press charge effect are terminated. Here, the hand-release effect performed in the variation display C shown in FIG. 201 will be described as an example, but the same applies to the hand-release effect performed in FIGS. 199 and 200. (A) to (g) are the same as in FIG. 201, but after (g), the player's hand release operation continues until the time point shown in (h) and (i). The time point shown in (h) is 6.14 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect. At this time, the long press charge image 45c shows that the charge is 69%. In the hand-release effect image 45j, "hand-release time 1.54 seconds" and "hand-release point 70 points" are displayed.

The time point shown in (i) is 6.20 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect. At this time, the long press charge image 45c shows that the charge is 70%. In the hand-release effect image 45j, "hand-release time 1.60 seconds" and "hand-release point 71 points" are displayed. This time point is the time when the third checkpoint is passed from the start of the player's hand release operation. Therefore, at the time shown in (j), the hand-release effect failure image 45m indicating that the hand-release effect has ended in failure is displayed. The hand-release effect failure image 45m is displayed as text information such as "Hand-release effect failure! Hand-release effect is too much!", Which indicates that the hand-release effect has ended in failure. Further, in the long-press charge image 45c, the charge is displayed as 0% in order to show that the long-press charge effect also returns to the drawing as a result of the hand-release effect failure. In (l), the result of the variation display C is displayed, and here, it is shown that the reach of the deviation results “5”, “4”, and “5” is out of reach. This completes the variable display C including the final release effect.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 48th embodiment, in the above-mentioned effect execution function, the operation of the determination button 81 is performed in a long-pressed manner within the valid period during which the operation of the determination button 81 is valid. In this case, a specific operation corresponding effect (for example, a long press charge effect) is executed during a predetermined display effect (during variable display), and it is determined whether or not there is an operation in the long press mode of the enter button 81. If an operation different from the operation in the long press mode is performed within the period, the effect different from the specific operation corresponding effect (for example, the display of the hand-release effect image 45j) is performed while the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect is continued. To execute. As a result, even if an operation different from the operation in the specific mode is performed after the specific operation corresponding effect is started, another effect is executed while the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect is continued. It becomes easy to recognize that it is not necessary to redo the operation of the operation means from the beginning even if the operation different from the operation of is performed. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the production corresponding to the specific operation. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P2-00) above, for example.

Further, the above-mentioned effect execution function can display the result of an operation of releasing the hand from the decision button 81 (for example, display of the hand-release effect image 45j) as an operation different from the long-press mode during the execution of the long-press compatible effect. The result of a different operation shown during the execution of a predetermined display effect (for example, a variable display effect) and shown during the execution of one predetermined display effect is displayed during the execution of the next predetermined display effect, or more. It is also shown during the execution of the predetermined display effect later. That is, the results of different operations performed during the execution of one predetermined display effect are shown both during the execution of one predetermined display effect and during the subsequent execution of the predetermined display effect. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the fun of the long-pressing response effect through the operation of releasing the hand from the determination button 81 as an operation different from the long-pressing mode. This is an example of the gaming machine according to (P2-0A) or (P2-000) described above, for example.

Further, a different effect (for example, a hand release effect) performed as a result of an operation (for example, a hand release operation) different from the operation in the long press mode of the decision button 81 described above is an operation for ending the different effect (for example, the decision button 81). It ends when the operation in the long press mode) is performed. This makes it possible to recognize that when the above-mentioned different effects are executed, it is necessary to perform an operation to end the different effects. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P7-1) described above, for example.

Further, a different effect (for example, a hand-release effect) performed as a result of an operation different from the operation in the long-press mode of the decision button 81 described above is a specific operation-compatible effect (for example, a long-press charge effect). When it is finished, it can be finished. As a result, it is possible to execute the above-mentioned different effects only during the effects corresponding to the specific operation. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P7-6) described above, for example.

Further, a different effect (for example, a hand-release effect) performed as a result of an operation different from the operation in the long-press mode of the decision button 81 described above (for example, a hand-release operation) is again a specific operation-compatible effect (for example, a long-press charge effect). If the above-mentioned different operations are performed within the period in which is executed, it is possible to continue in a state of inheriting the previously executed different effects. As a result, it is possible to take over and entertain the different effects that were previously executed. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P7-8) described above, for example.

Further, a different effect (for example, a hand-release effect) performed as a result of an operation different from the operation in the long-pressed mode of the decision button 81 described above (for example, a hand-release operation) is a predetermined display effect (for example, the above-mentioned above-mentioned) executed earlier. After the end of the variable display effect related to the variable display A, the predetermined display effect (for example, the variable display effect related to the above-mentioned variable display B) to be executed next can be continued. As a result, it is possible to take over and entertain the different effects that were executed during the previous predetermined display effect during the next predetermined display effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P7-9) described above, for example.

Further, a different effect (for example, a hand-release effect) performed as a result of an operation different from the operation in the long-pressed mode of the decision button 81 described above (for example, a hand-release operation) is executed first in one predetermined display effect. After the end of the specific operation corresponding effect (for example, the long press charge effect executed in the above-mentioned variation display A), the specific operation corresponding effect (for example, the long press charge effect executed in the above-mentioned variation display B) is executed next. In, it is possible to continue. Thereby, in one predetermined display effect, the different effect executed during the previous specific operation corresponding effect can be taken over and enjoyed during the next specific operation corresponding effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P7-10) described above, for example.

Further, a different effect (for example, a hand-release effect) performed as a result of an operation different from the operation in the long-pressed mode of the decision button 81 described above (for example, a hand-release operation) visually indicates that a different operation was performed. It is a display of specific visual information (for example, a hand-released effect image 45j). As a result, by visually showing how the specific operation corresponding effect is being executed despite the different operations described above, it is visually recognized that the operation different from the specific mode is being performed. It can be made easier. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P8-1) described above, for example.

Further, a different effect (for example, a hand release effect) performed as a result of an operation different from the operation in the long press mode of the decision button 81 described above is different from the operation in the long press mode of the decision button 81. This is an effect using numerical values that change based on different operations (for example, an effect of changing the number of seconds required for the release time or the total number of points required for the total release points in the release effect image 45j). As a result, it is possible to easily recognize that an operation different from the specific mode is performed by showing a numerical change even though a different operation is performed. It should be noted that this effect may be an effect using information indicating changes based on different operations, such as an indicator that changes based on different operations. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P8-0) or (P8-3) described above, for example.

Further, after the above-mentioned one different effect (for example, a different effect performed as a result of an operation different from the operation in the long-press mode of the decision button 81 in the long-press charge effect on the variable display A described above) is executed, One different when another different effect (for example, a different effect performed as a result of an operation different from the operation in the long press mode of the enter button 81 in the long press charge effect on the variable display B described above) is executed. Using the numerical value changed based on the operation, the effect using the numerical value changed based on the different operation is performed (for example, the different effect on the variable display B is acquired in the different effect on the variable display A). Starting from the total number of release points). As a result, it is possible to easily recognize that the operation different from the specific mode is continuously performed by continuously changing the numerical value even though the different operation is performed. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P8-4) described above, for example.

Further, the above-mentioned effect execution function is an effect executed during the execution of the predetermined display effect according to the result of a different operation shown during the execution of the predetermined display effect (for example, the display of the hand-release effect image 45j). (For example, the pending change pattern) is changed. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the long-pressing response effect through the operation of releasing the hand from the decision button 81 as an operation different from the long-pressing mode.

In the above-described 48, the hand-release effect (for example, display of the hand-release effect image 45j) executed when a hand-release operation different from the operation in the long-press mode is performed is the end of one long-press charge effect. Although the display is terminated each time, the display may be continued even after the long press charge effect is completed. This point will be described in detail below.

First, an outline of the features of this embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, the hand-release effect performed as a result of the hand-release operation different from the operation in the long-press mode of the enter button 81 is a specific operation-compatible effect (for example, long-press) as shown in FIGS. 205 and 208 described later. It is characterized in that it can be continued even after the end of the predetermined display effect (for example, even in the variable display C after the end of the variable display B) that includes the charge effect). As a result, the hand-release effect generated during the specific operation-compatible effect can be enjoyed for a long time even after the end of the predetermined display effect that includes the specific operation-compatible effect.

In particular, the hand-release effect performed as a result of the hand-release operation different from the operation in the long-press mode of the enter button 81 is the final stage of the display effect (for example, variable display effect) in which the timing at which the above-mentioned hand-release operation is executed is predetermined. In this case, for example, as shown in FIGS. 205 and 208, it is possible to continue even after the execution of the predetermined display effect is completed (for example, after the end of the variation display B and the variation display C). As a result, when the hand-release operation is performed at a late timing, the hand-release effect can be enjoyed by using the period after the predetermined display effect.

Next, an outline of different effect contents performed as a result of an operation different from the operation in the long press mode of the decision button 81 will be described. In the specific operation corresponding effect (long press charge effect described later) after the hand release effect performed as a result of the hand release operation different from the operation in the long press mode of the enter button 81 is executed, FIGS. 205 and 208 described later. As shown in the above, the specific operation-corresponding effect is continued using the numerical value changed based on the hand-release operation. As a result, even if the hand-release operation is not performed in the specific response effect after the hand-release effect is executed, it is possible to easily recognize that the hand-release operation different from the specific mode has already been performed.

Next, an outline of each different effect performed as a result of an operation different from the operation in the long press mode of the decision button 81 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 205 and 208 described later, the release effect performed as a result of the release operation different from the operation in the long press mode of the enter button 81 is one predetermined display in which the release effect is executed. The effect (variation display B described later) and the next predetermined display effect (variation display C described later) are executed. As a result, it is possible to easily recognize that a hand-release operation different from the specific mode is performed across a predetermined possession effect.

Hereinafter, the release effect will be described in detail.

The hand-release effect display process by the display control device 45 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 203. FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing a hand-release effect display process by the display control device 45 of the 49th embodiment. Since the hand-release effect display process of this embodiment is basically the same as the hand-release effect display process shown in FIG. 194, a difference from this will be described.

In step S2519 of the above-described embodiment 48, when the release release command is received and the total release points are less than 60, the release effect image 45j is displayed while holding the total value of the release points. However, in step S2519A of this embodiment, the display of the hand-released effect image 45j is continued without being terminated.

In step S2512 of the above-mentioned Example 48, when the hand-release continuation start command is received, the numerical value of the total hand-release points is read, and the hand-release effect image 45j is displayed using the read numerical value. In the example, since the display of the hand-release effect image 45j is continued without ending, when the hand-release continuation start command is received, the hand-release effect is continued as it is, so that the process proceeds to step S2515.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 204 to 206, a specific example of the hand-release effect executed by the long-press charge effect will be described with reference to the above drawings. FIG. 204 is a time chart showing a long press response effect when the first release operation is performed. FIG. 205 is a time chart showing a long press response effect when the next release operation is performed. FIG. 206 is a time chart showing a long press response effect when the final hand release operation is performed.

As shown in FIG. 204 (a), the first release operation different from the long press mode is executed on the variable display A including the long press charge effect. The detection timing of the enter button 81 is, for example, every 0.01 seconds. The effective timing (that is, the effective period of the detection button 81) is set to, for example, a maximum of 8 seconds as described above. The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display A and the fluctuation displays B and C, which will be described later, is also set to 8 seconds, but the fluctuation time may be longer than this. As will be described later, the variable display A to C are assumed to be executed continuously because the hold for executing each of them has already been accumulated and the results of the respective variable displays are all out of order.

At the operation timing shown in (b), it is determined that the decision button 81 is pressed 1.00 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect, and that the operation in the long press mode is established 2.00 seconds later. From the decision button 81, which is different from the long press mode, for 3.00 seconds from 7.00 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect to 10.00 seconds after the start (that is, 2.00 seconds after the start of the next variation display B). It indicates that the operation to release the hand has been performed. By accumulating up to 200% of the long-press charge effect, a video with a variable display effect as a privilege will be given from the next time. That is, the player executes the operation in the long press mode across the variable display, and enjoys the additional game in which the long press charge is accumulated up to 200%.

The checkpoint shown in (c) is set every 0.60 seconds, for example, as in the case of the 48th embodiment. Further, as in the case of the 48th embodiment, the period until the checkpoint is passed three times is set as the production continuation period. In the operation timing example shown in (b) above, during the execution of the long press charge effect, the operation of releasing the hand from the decision button 81, which is different from the long press mode, is performed until 3.00 seconds later. Since it is continuing, an example is shown in which the long press charge effect is not continued. Therefore, the long press flag shown in (d) changes to 0 after 8.60 seconds after the start of the variation display A passing through the third checkpoint (that is, 0.60 seconds after the start of the variation display B).

The long-pressed charge image shown in (e) is set to increase by 1 every 0.06 seconds, as in the case of the 48th embodiment. It increases to 110 points by 8.60 seconds after the start of the variation display A (that is, 0.60 seconds after the start of the variation display B), but is returned to 0 points at this timing.

The long-press hand release timer shown in (f) counts the time during which the player releases the hand from the determination button 81, which is different from the long-press mode, during the long-press charge effect. In the operation timing example shown in (b) above, 1.60 seconds from the start of the variation display A 7.00 seconds to the start 8.60 seconds (that is, 0.60 seconds after the start of the variation display B) are set. I'm counting.

The hand-release count image shown in (g) is counted from 7.00 seconds after the start of the variation display A to 8.60 seconds after the start (that is, 0.60 seconds after the start of the variation display B) until it reaches 26 points. However, it is returned to 0 point at the 26th point. Therefore, in the next variable display B, a long-press charge effect including a hand-release effect is newly executed.

As shown in FIG. 205 (a), the variation display B starts 8.00 seconds after the start of the variation display A shown in FIG. 204 (a) and ends 16.00 seconds after the start of the variation display A. do. The next release operation is executed at the timing in the variation display B and the timing straddling the variation display B and the next variation display C. In the operation timing shown in (b), during the execution of the long press charge effect on the variation display B, first, the variation display A starts 12.80 seconds after the start (that is, 4.80 seconds after the start of the variation display B) 14. For 1.60 seconds until 40 seconds later (that is, 6.40 seconds after the start of the variation display B), the release operation of releasing the hand from the decision button 81, which is different from the long press mode, is executed. Next, 1.20 from 15.50 seconds after the start of the variation display A (that is, 7.50 seconds after the start of the variation display B) to 16.70 seconds after the start (that is, 0.70 seconds after the start of the variation display C). For a second, the release operation of releasing the hand from the decision button 81, which is different from the long press mode, is executed.

The hand-release timer shown in (f) counts 1.60 seconds and 1.20 seconds. The release effect executed across the variation display B and the variation display C described above is displayed as a continuation of the release effect executed during the variation display B. The release image shown in (g) counts 26 points at the end of the release effect executed during the variation display B, and ends the release effect executed across the variation display B and the variation display C. At that point, 47 points are counted. That is, the release effect executed during the variation display B is continued to the release effect started during the same variation display B. Further, the release effect started during the variation display B is continued in the variation display C as well.

As shown in FIG. 206 (a), the next (last) release operation is executed after the variable display B from the end of the variable display C including the long press charge effect to the end of the long press charge effect. It is executed across. In the operation timing shown in (b), during the execution of the long press charge effect, 22.50 seconds after the start of the variation display A (that is, 6.50 seconds after the start of the variation display C) and 24.00 seconds after the start (that is, the variation). For 1.50 seconds (after 8.00 seconds after the start of display C), a release operation of releasing the hand from the decision button 81, which is different from the long press mode, is executed. The hand-release timer shown in (f) counts this 1.50 seconds. The release effect executed on the variation display C is displayed as a continuation of the release effect executed from the variation display B to the variation display C described above. The hand-released image shown in (g) reaches 56 points at the end of the long-press charge effect (when 200 long-press charge points are accumulated), and is counted until it reaches 73 points at the end of the variable display C. ..

The series of release effects is the last of the release effects executed in the variable display C. As a result of the series of release effects, the total number of release points shown in the release images is 60 points or more, so it is determined that the release effects have been successful. As a result, the hold display pattern B is set, in which the hold change is improved from the next time described above.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 207 to 209, a specific example of the display mode of the hand-release effect executed by the long-press charge effect will be described with reference to the above drawings. FIG. 207 is a diagram showing a display mode of a long press response effect when the first hand release operation is performed. FIG. 208 is a diagram showing a display mode of a long press response effect when the next hand release operation is performed. FIG. 209 is a diagram showing a display mode of a long press response effect when the final hand release operation is performed.

As shown in FIG. 207 (a), the variable display A including the long press charge effect is started on the third symbol display device 42. As shown in (b), the long press advance notice image 45a is displayed on the third symbol display device 42, for example, during the reach display. The long-press notice image 45a is, for example, text information such as "Accumulate 200% of the charge and shift to the special mode! (At a release point of 60 or more ...!? (Maybe there is something good))". The special mode here is a state in which the charge is accumulated up to 200% (that is, the long-press charge effect is continued across a plurality of variable displays), and is given as a privilege. It is a privilege that the image is selected. (C) As shown in (d) and (e), when the player operates the decision button 81 in the long-press mode, the long-press charge is accumulated up to 82%. It is assumed that the player releases the hand at the end of the long press charge effect, which is the time when the long press charge is accumulated up to 83% after 7.00 seconds from the start shown in (f).

The time point shown in (g) is the timing immediately after the hand release operation shown in (f). At this time, the hand-released effect image 45j is displayed on the third symbol display device 42. In the hand-release effect image 45j, for example, the character information "hand-release time 0 seconds" and the character information "total release points 0 points" are displayed.

The time point shown in (h) is 7.40 seconds after the start of the variation display A. The long press charge image 45c shows that the charge is 90%. In addition, the hand-release operation continues, and the hand-release effect image 45j displays "hand-release time 0.40 seconds" and "hand-release point 6 points". The time point shown in (i) is 8.00 seconds after the start of the variation display A, that is, the timing at which the variation display A ends. The long press charge image 45c shows that the charge is 100%. In the hand-release effect image 45j, "hand-release time 1.00 seconds" and "hand-release point 16 points" are displayed, but as shown in (j) immediately after that, the reach loss result as a result of the variation display A ( "7", "4", "7") are displayed. The hand-release effect of this embodiment is continued over the variable display when the hand-release operation is continued and the third checkpoint is not passed from the start of the hand-release operation. Therefore, as shown in (j), the hand-released effect image 45j is displayed even at the display timing of the reach loss result.

The time point shown in (k) is 8.50 seconds after the start of the variation display A (that is, 0.50 seconds after the start of the variation display B). Since the hand-release effect is continued from the end of the variation display A shown in (j), the long-press charge image 45c shows that the charge is 108%. In the hand-release effect image 45j, "hand-release time 1.50 seconds" and "hand-release point 25 points" are displayed. The time point shown in (l) is 8.60 seconds after the start of the variation display A (that is, 1.60 seconds after the start of the variation display B). The long-press charge image 45c shows that the charge is 110%, but since this point is the time when the third checkpoint is passed from the start of the release operation, it is returned to 0% immediately after this. .. The hand-release effect image 45j is also displayed as "hand-release time 1.60 seconds" and "hand-release point 26 points", but immediately after this, it is returned to 0 seconds and 0 points. In addition, a 45m image of the hand-release effect failure is displayed, indicating that the hand-release effect has ended in failure.

The time point shown in FIG. 208 (a) is 9.0 seconds after the start of the variation display A (that is, 1.00 seconds after the start of the variation display B). The variation display B is being executed. Since the long-press charge effect and the hand-release effect ended in failure, the long-press charge image 45c shows that the charge is 0%, but the hand-release effect image 45j is not displayed. The time point shown in (b) is 9.5 seconds after the start of the variation display A (that is, 1.50 seconds after the start of the variation display B). On the third symbol display device 42, for example, during the reach display, the long press advance notice image 45a is displayed as in FIG. 207 (b).

It is assumed that the player resumes the operation in the long press mode of the decision button 81 from the time point 10.00 seconds after the start of the variation display A (that is, 2.00 seconds after the start of the variation display B). As shown in (c), at the time point 12.80 seconds after the start of the variation display A (that is, 4.80 seconds after the start of the variation display B), the long-pressed charge image 45c has a charge of 30%. It is displayed that there is. From this point on, it is assumed that the player again performs a hand-release operation in which the player releases his / her hand from the determination button 81, which is different from the long-press mode. Then, the hand-release effect image 45j is displayed, and 0.06 seconds later, as shown in (d), the long-press charge image 45c displays that the charge is 31%, and the hand-release effect image is displayed. On 45j, "hand release time 0.06 seconds" and "hand release point 1 point" are displayed, and the hand release effect is newly started.

The time point shown in (e) is 14.40 seconds after the start of the variation display A (that is, 6.40 seconds after the start of the variation display B). The long-pressed charge image 45c shows that the charge is 56%, and the hand-release effect image 45j displays "hand-release time 1.60 seconds" and "hand-release point 26 points". Immediately after this, at the time shown in (f), the player resumes the operation in the long press mode of the decision button 81. Since this point is before passing the third checkpoint, the long press charge effect is continued. Further, the hand-release effect continuation image 45k is displayed, and it is shown that the hand-release effect is also continued in a state of holding this numerical value.

The time point shown in (g) is 15.50 seconds after the start of the variation display A (that is, 7.50 seconds after the start of the variation display B). From this point on, the player will perform the release operation again. The long press charge image 45c shows that the charge is 75 percent. In the hand-release effect image 45j, "hand-release time 0.00 seconds" and "hand-release point 26 points" are displayed. Immediately after this, at the time point shown in (h), the long press charge image 45c indicates that the charge is 76%. In the hand-release effect image 45j, "hand-release time 0.06 seconds" and "hand-release point 27 points" are displayed. That is, in the release effect image 45j, it is shown that the number of points obtained in the first release effect is further increased.

The time point shown in (i) is 16.00 seconds after the start of the variation display A (that is, 8.00 seconds after the start of the variation display B). This time point is the end timing of the variation display B. The third symbol display device 42 displays the reach loss result (“6”, “3”, “6”) as a result of the variation display B, but the long press charge effect and the hand release effect are continued. The long-pressed charge image 45c shows that the charge is 83%, and the hand-release effect image 45j displays "hand-release time 0.50 seconds" and "hand-release point 35 points".

The time point shown in (j) is 16.70 seconds after the start of the variation display A (that is, 0.70 seconds after the start of the variation display C). The long-pressed charge image 45c shows that the charge is 95%, and the hand-release effect image 45j displays "hand-release time 1.20 seconds" and "hand-release point 47 points". That is, the release effect is executed straddling the variable display B and the variable display C. In other words, the hand-release effect is executed straddling the long-press charge effect of the variable display B and the long-press charge effect of the variable display C. At this point, the player resumes the operation in the long press mode of the decision button 81 again. Since this point is the timing before passing the third checkpoint, the long-press charge effect is continued, and the hand-release effect is also continued.

The time point shown in (k) is immediately after the time point shown in (j). The long-press charge image 45c displays that the charge is 96%, and the release effect image 45j displays the same "release time 1.20 seconds" and "release point 47 points" as in (j). Has been done. Further, the hand-release effect continuation image 45k is displayed, and it is shown that the hand-release effect is also continued in a state of holding this numerical value. The time point shown in (l) is 17.60 seconds after the start of the variation display A (that is, 1.60 seconds after the start of the variation display C). The long-press charge image 45c displays that the charge is 100%, and the release effect image 45j displays the same "release time 0.00 seconds" and "release point 47 points" as in (j). Has been done. At this point, the long press notice image 45a is displayed as in the above-mentioned (b).

The time point shown in FIG. 209 (a) is 20.00 seconds after the start of the variation display A (that is, the time point 4.00 seconds after the start of the variation display C). The long-pressed charge image 45c shows that the charge is 150%, and the hand-release effect image 45j displays "hand-release time 0.00 seconds" and "hand-release point 47 points".

The time point shown in (b) is 22.50 seconds after the start of the variation display A (that is, the time point 6.50 seconds after the start of the variation display C). The long-pressed charge image 45c shows that the charge is 191%, and the hand-release effect image 45j displays "hand-release time 0.00 seconds" and "hand-release point 47 points". From this point, the player shall resume the release operation in order to reach the release point of 60 points. The time point shown in (c) is the time point immediately after (b). The long-pressed charge image 45c shows that the charge is 192%, and the hand-release effect image 45j displays "hand-release time 0.06 seconds" and "hand-release point 48 points".

The time point shown in (c) is 23.00 seconds after the start of the variation display A (that is, 7.00 seconds after the start of the variation display C). The long-pressed charge image 45c shows that the charge is 200%, and the hand-release effect image 45j displays "hand-release time 0.50 seconds" and "hand-release point 56 points". At this point, the long press charge ends because it has reached 200% of the target number. The time point shown in (d) is the time point immediately after (c). Character information such as "From the next time to the special mode!" Is displayed on the long-press charge image 45c, and "hand release time 0.56 seconds" and "hand release point 57 points" are displayed on the hand release effect image 45j. Has been done.

The time point shown in (e) is between 23.20 seconds and 23.30 seconds after the start of the variation display A (that is, between 7.20 seconds and 7.30 seconds after the start of the variation display C). Is. Since the long press charge effect is over, the long press charge image 45c is not displayed, but the hand release effect image 45j displays "hand release time 0.74 seconds" and "hand release point 60 points". .. In other words, the release points have reached the target number of 60 points. Here, in the hand-release effect, the pressing of the decision button 81 must be restarted from the start of the hand-release operation to the time when the third checkpoint is passed. Here, even if the decision button 81 is released until the end timing of the variation display C, the third checkpoint is not passed. Therefore, the hand-release effect here continues even after the end of the long-press charge effect, but ends when the variable display C ends.

The time point shown in (f) is 24.00 seconds after the start of the variation display A (that is, 8.00 seconds after the start of the variation display C). That is, it is the end timing of the variation display C. In the hand-release effect image 45j, "hand-release time 1.50 seconds" and "hand-release point 73 points" are displayed. Further, the third symbol display device 42 displays that the result of the variation display C is the result of out of reach (“3”, “4”, “3”). The time point shown in (g) is the time point immediately after this. That is, while the result of the variation display C is displayed, the hand-release effect completion image 45l is displayed, and "Hand-release effect success! The pending change will be improved from the next time!" Is displayed. This completes the hand-release effect that is performed across the variable display.

In addition, in order to show an example in which the hand-release effect is performed across the variable display, the variable display A and B show the off-the-shelf result. For example, if the result of the variable display A is a big hit result, the hand-release effect is It shall be returned to 0.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 49th embodiment, a different effect performed as a result of an operation different from the operation in the long press mode of the decision button 81 described above is performed by an operation of ending the different effect. If not, as shown in FIGS. 206 and 209, for example, the operation is continued even after the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect (for example, the long press charge effect) is completed. As a result, it is possible to recognize that an operation for ending a different effect is necessary when a different effect is executed even after the effect corresponding to the specific operation is completed. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P7-2) described above, for example.

The long-press charge effect shown in FIGS. 206 and 209 spans a plurality of variable display effects, but the same applies to the long-press charge effect performed within the variable display effect of 1. That is, when the long-press charge effect is set to end before the end of the variable display, the release effect performed at the end of the long-press charge effect ends the variable display after the end of the long-press charge effect. Until then, it will be possible to continue.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 205 and 208, the different effects performed as a result of an operation different from the operation in the long press mode of the decision button 81 described above are the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect (for example, the long press charge effect). It is possible to do it multiple times. That is, if an operation different from the operation in the long press mode of the enter button 81 is performed a plurality of times during the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect, the above-mentioned different effect may be continuously executed each time. good. As a result, it is possible to enjoy different effects for a long time during the effects corresponding to specific operations. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P7-3) described above, for example.

Further, the different effect performed as a result of an operation different from the operation in the long press mode of the decision button 81 described above includes a specific operation corresponding effect (for example, a long press charge effect) as shown in FIGS. 206 and 209. It is continued during the predetermined display effect (for example, variable display performance) that has been set. As a result, it is possible to enjoy different effects for a long time even in the predetermined display effect returned after the end of the specific operation corresponding effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P7-4) described above, for example.

Further, the different effect performed as a result of an operation different from the operation in the long press mode of the decision button 81 described above includes a specific operation corresponding effect (for example, a long press charge effect) as shown in FIGS. 205 and 208, for example. It is possible to continue even after the end of the predetermined display effect (for example, in the variable display C after the end of the variable display B). As a result, different effects generated during the specific operation-compatible effect can be enjoyed for a long time even after the end of the predetermined display effect that includes the specific operation-compatible effect. This is an example of the gaming machine according to (P7-0) or (P7-5) described above, for example.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 206 and 209, for the different effects performed as a result of an operation different from the operation in the long press mode of the decision button 81 described above, a predetermined display effect (for example, a variable display effect) has been completed. In some cases, it can be terminated. This makes it possible to execute the above-mentioned different effects only during a predetermined display effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P7-7) described above, for example.

Further, in the different effects performed as a result of an operation different from the operation in the long press mode of the decision button 81 described above, the timing at which the above different operations are executed is the final stage of the specific operation corresponding effect (for example, the long press charge effect). In some cases, for example, as shown in FIGS. 206 and 209, it is possible to continue even after the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect is completed. As a result, when the above-mentioned different operations are performed at a late timing, it is possible to enjoy the different effects by using the period after the specific operation corresponding effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P7-11) described above, for example.

Further, in the different effect performed as a result of the operation different from the operation in the long press mode of the decision button 81 described above, the timing at which the above-mentioned different operation is executed is the final stage of the predetermined display effect (for example, the variable display effect). In this case, for example, as shown in FIGS. 205 and 208, it is possible to continue even after the execution of the predetermined display effect is completed (for example, after the end of the variation display B and the variation display C). As a result, when different operations are performed at late timings, it is possible to enjoy different effects by using the period after the predetermined display effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P7-12) described above, for example.

Further, in a specific operation corresponding effect (for example, a long press charge effect) after a different effect performed as a result of an operation different from the operation in the long press mode of the decision button 81 described above is executed, for example, FIGS. 205 and 208. As shown, the specific operation correspondence effect is continued using the numerical values changed based on different operations. As a result, it is possible to easily recognize that an operation different from the specific mode has already been performed even if a different operation is not performed in the specific corresponding effect after the different effect is executed. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P8-5) described above, for example.

Further, after a different effect performed as a result of an operation different from the operation in the above-mentioned long press mode of the determination button 81 is executed in the above-mentioned one predetermined display effect (for example, variable display B), another predetermined display is performed. In the effect (for example, variable display C), the specific operation-corresponding effect is continued using the numerical values changed based on the different operations (see, for example, FIGS. 205 and 208). This makes it easy to recognize that an operation different from the specific mode has already been performed even if a different operation is not performed in the predetermined display effect after the different effect is executed. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P8-6) described above, for example.

Further, when a different effect performed as a result of an operation different from the operation in the long press mode of the determination button 81 described above is executed in another predetermined display effect (for example, variable display C) described above, one predetermined display is performed. In the staging (for example, variation display B), the numerical value is changed by using the numerical value changed based on different operations (see, for example, FIGS. 205 and 208). Thereby, when different effects are performed in another predetermined display effect, it is possible to easily recognize that an operation different from the specific mode has already been performed. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P8-7) described above, for example.

Further, different effects performed as a result of an operation different from the operation in the long press mode of the decision button 81 described above are, for example, as shown in FIGS. 205 and 208, one predetermined display effect in which the different effects are executed. (For example, variable display B) and the next predetermined display effect (for example, variable display C) can be executed. This makes it easier to recognize that an operation different from the specific mode is performed across a predetermined possession effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P9-0) (P9-1) described above, for example.

Further, different effects performed as a result of an operation different from the operation in the long-pressed mode of the decision button 81 described above include, for example, as shown in FIGS. 205 and 208, a specific operation-corresponding effect (for example,) in which the different effects are executed. It is executed straddling the long-pressed charge effect that is executed first on the variable display B and the specific operation corresponding effect (for example, the long-pressed charge effect that is executed later on the variable display B). As a result, it is possible to easily recognize that an operation different from the specific mode is performed from the specific operation corresponding effect to the next specific operation corresponding effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P9-2) described above, for example.

Further, different effects performed as a result of an operation different from the operation in the long press mode of the decision button 81 described above are, for example, as shown in FIGS. 205 and 208, one predetermined display effect in which the different effects are executed. Specific operation corresponding effect (for example, long press charge effect executed in variable display B) and specific operation corresponding effect (for example, long press charge effect executed in variable display C) in another predetermined display effect executed next. ) And is executed. As a result, it is possible to easily recognize that an operation different from the specific mode is performed from the specific operation corresponding effect to the specific operation corresponding effect in the next predetermined display effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P9-3) described above, for example.

In Examples 48 and 49 described above, different effects executed when an operation different from the operation in the long-press mode is performed, for example, the hand-release effect image 45j is the long-press request image 45b or the long-press charge. The information of "hand release time" and "hand release point total" was only displayed in the state of being lined up with the image 45c, but even if the display method is changed or the notification is made in a mode different from the display. I do not care. This point will be described in detail below.

First, the hand-release effect display process by the display control device 45 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 210. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing a hand-release effect display process by the display control device 45 of the 50th embodiment. Since FIG. 210 is basically the same as the hand-release effect display process shown in FIG. 194 of Example 48 and FIG. 203 of Example 49, a portion different from this will be described.

In the display process of the hand-release effect image 45j shown in step S2512 of Examples 48 and 49, the hand-release effect image 45j is displayed with the same display priority as the other long-press request image 45b and long-press charge image 45c. Was there. Although such a display method has the advantage that each image can be displayed evenly, it is particularly important for the player that the hand-release operation is performed during the long-press charge effect and the hand-release effect is executed. Not enough to get the attention of. Therefore, in this embodiment, the hand release operation is performed by setting the display priority of the hand release effect image 45j higher than the display priority of the other long press request image 45b and the long press charge image 45c. It is possible to draw the player's attention especially that the release effect is being executed.

Specifically, in step S2512A of the present embodiment, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the hand-release effect image 45j in front of the long-press request image 45b, the long-press charge image 45c, and the like. Therefore, the hand-release effect image 45j is set to have a higher display priority than the long-press request image 45b and the long-press charge image 45c. Not limited to this, if the normal screen 43a or the high-speed changing screen 43c is being displayed, the display priority is set higher than these and the display is set to be displayed in front of the decorative symbol SZ. May be good.

Further, in step S2518A, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the hand-release effect continuous image 45k in front of the long-press request image 45b, the long-press charge image 45c, and the like. Therefore, the hand-release effect continuous image 45k is set to have a higher display priority than the long-press request image 45b, the long-press charge image 45c, and the like. Not limited to this, it may be set so that it is displayed in front of the hand-released effect image 45j.

Further, in step S2520A, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the hand-release effect completion image 45l in front of the long-press request image 45b, the long-press charge image 45c, and the like. Therefore, the hand-release effect completed image 45l is set to have a higher display priority than the long-press request image 45b, the long-press charge image 45c, and the like. Not limited to this, it may be set so that it is displayed in front of the hand-released effect image 45j.

Further, in step S2523A, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the hand-release effect failure image 45m in front of the long-press request image 45b, the long-press charge image 45c, and the like. Therefore, the hand-release effect failure image 45m is set to have a higher display priority than the long-press request image 45b, the long-press charge image 45, and the like c. Not limited to this, it may be set so that it is displayed in front of the hand-released effect image 45j.

Next, the long press effect sound setting process by the sub control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. 211. FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing a long press effect sound setting process by the sub control device 262. It should be noted that the flow of the long press effect and the hand release effect in the decision button input monitoring process shown in FIG. 190 of the 48th embodiment will be described as appropriate.

The long press effect sound setting process is executed as one of the normal processes of the sub control device 262.

In step S2361, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the button long press effect flag shown in step S4506 described above is 1. If the button long press effect flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S2362, otherwise the process proceeds to step S2366. In step S2362, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs a long press charge sound setting process for setting a long press charge effect sound, and proceeds to step S2363. The long-press charge effect sound is, for example, a song different from the effect sound of the variable display effect, and a song having an up tempo rather than the variable display effect is used. You can also change the song on the variable displays A to C where the long press charge effect is executed. For example, the tempo of the song increases in the order of variable display A → variable display B → variable display C.

In step S2363, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 reads the set volume and proceeds to step S2364. When the volume of the effect sound is changed by the operation of the player, the volume of the long-press charge effect sound can be adjusted accordingly. In step S2364, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the volume based on the read volume, and proceeds to step S2365. In step S2365, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 drives the speaker with the set effect sound and volume, and outputs a long-press charge effect sound.

In step S2366, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the release flag shown in step S3514C described above is 1. If the release flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S2376, otherwise the process proceeds to step S2370. In step S2637, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the release effect sound setting process, and proceeds to step S2368. The hand-release effect sound is preferably a sound different from the long-press charge effect sound. For example, if the long-press charge effect sound is a musical piece, the release effect sound is a different sound such as a sound such as "hands are separated" or a bell sound. The hand-release effect sound may be different for each of the variable displays A to C. For example, the release effect sound on the variable display A is one type of sound (one person's voice or one bell sound), and the release effect sound on the variable display B is two types of sounds (two people). (Sound of three people or sound of two bells), and the release effect sound on the variable display C can be three types of sounds (sound of three people or sound of three bells). As a result, it is possible to realize a sound effect that gives a sense of expectation as the target value of the release effect is approached.

In step S2368, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs a set volume reading process for reading the set volume, and proceeds to step S2369. Since the volume of the effect sound may have been changed by the player's volume change operation, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 reads the current volume of the effect sound before setting the volume of the release effect. I'm out.

In step S2369, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the volume of the hand-release effect sound to be, for example, +1 higher than the volume of the long-press charge effect sound, and outputs the sound in step S2365 described above. Further, instead of increasing the volume of the hand-release effect sound, the volume of the long-press charge effect sound may be lowered during the execution of the hand-release effect. In this way, by making the volume of the hand-release effect sound louder than the volume of the long-press charge effect sound, it is audible that the hand-release effect is being executed even while the long-press charge effect is being executed. It is also easy to recognize.

In step S2370, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the release flag is 0. If the release flag is 0, the decision button 81 is pressed during the release effect, so the process proceeds to step S2371, otherwise the process ends. In step S2371, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 stops the output of the hand-release effect sound, and ends this process.

Next, a display mode of the long press corresponding effect in which such a hand-release effect is performed will be described with reference to FIGS. 212 to 214.

FIG. 212 is a diagram showing a display mode of a long press response effect when the first hand release operation is performed. FIG. 213 is a diagram showing a display mode of a long press response effect when the next hand release operation is performed. FIG. 214 is a diagram showing a display mode of a long press response effect when the final hand release operation is performed.

In FIG. 212, as shown in FIGS. Since the display priority is higher than that of, the hand-release effect image 45j appears to be displayed on the front side of the long-press request image 45b and the long-press charge image 45c. Therefore, it is easy to recognize that the hand release operation different from the long press mode is performed during the execution of the long press charge effect.

Before it is determined that the operation in the long press mode shown in FIGS. 212 (b) and 212 has been performed (that is, before the long press flag is set to 1), the operation is different from the long press mode of the enter button 81. Even if the hand-release operation is performed, the hand-release effect image 45j is not displayed, and the hand-release effect sound is not output.

In the variable display A, as shown in (l), the hand-release effect ends in failure, and at that point, the display of the hand-release effect image 45j ends. Even if the release effect ends in failure, the release effect image 45j may be continuously displayed with the release time of 0 seconds and the total release points of 0 points. By displaying in this way, it can be suggested that there is a possibility that the next release effect will still be performed.

Further, different effect sounds are output from the sound output unit 24 during the variable display effect, the long press charge effect, and the hand release effect. During the variable display effect shown in (a), the music set based on the variable pattern command is output, and during the long press charge effect shown in (b) to (f), the tempo is faster than during the variable display effect. Music is output, and during the release production shown in (g) to (j), a production sound different from these songs is produced at a louder volume than these songs (for example, a voice saying "hands are away" or Bell sound) is being output. At the time of displaying the result of the hand-release effect shown in (l), a different effect sound such as a voice saying "You have released your hand too much" may be output along with the result of failure. When the release effect ends in failure, the music during the long press charge effect or the music during the variable display effect is output as the effect sound again.

In FIG. 213, as shown in FIGS. The display priority of the release effect image 45j is higher than the display priority of the long press request image 45b and the long press charge image 45c. Therefore, even when the variation display B is extended to the variation display C, the hand-release effect image 45j appears to be displayed on the front side of the long press request image 45b and the long press charge image 45c.

Further, from the sound output unit 24, as shown in (i) and (j), when the hand-release effect is continued from the variation display B to the variation display C, the same as the display of the hand-release effect image 45j. , The output of the release effect sound is continued at a louder volume than during the variable display effect or the long press charge effect. Therefore, even when the variable display B is changed to the variable display C, it is possible to easily recognize that the hand-release effect continues.

In FIG. 214, as shown in (f) to (g), even when the hand-release effect is continued even after the long-press charge effect is completed, the display priority of the hand-release effect image 45j is the long-press request image. The state of 45b, which is higher than the display priority of the long-pressed charge image 45c, continues. Further, as shown in (f) to (j), the sound output unit 24 continues to output the hand-released effect sound at a louder volume than during the variable display effect or the long-press charge effect. Therefore, if the hand-release operation continues even after the long-press charge effect is completed, this can be easily recognized visually or audibly.

In the above description, both the display of the hand-release effect image 45j and the output of the hand-release effect sound are simultaneously executed in the hand-release effect, but a configuration in which only the output of the hand-release effect sound is executed may be used. In that case, it is advisable to inform the total number of points to be released and the time to release by voice. The number of points and the time may be notified according to the count, or the number of points and the time with a good delimiter may be notified.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 50th embodiment, different effects performed as a result of an operation different from the operation in the long press mode of the determination button 81 described above are shown in FIGS. 212 to 214, for example. In addition, when a different operation is performed while the operation in the specific mode is being executed, it is notified that the different operation has been performed in a mode that is easier for the player to recognize than the effect corresponding to the specific operation being executed. , It is possible to clearly recognize that a different operation has been performed. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the production corresponding to the specific operation. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P10-0) described above, for example.

Further, different effects performed as a result of an operation different from the operation in the long press mode of the decision button 81 described above may be performed while the operation in the specific mode is being executed, for example, as shown in FIGS. 212 to 214. When is performed, it is notified that this different operation has been performed at a volume higher than the volume output during the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect. As a result, it is possible to aurally and clearly recognize that an operation different from the operation in the long press mode of the decision button 81 has been performed. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P10-1) described above, for example.

Further, different effects performed as a result of an operation different from the operation in the long press mode of the decision button 81 described above are different during the operation in the specific mode, for example, as shown in FIGS. 212 to 214. When an operation is performed, it is notified that the above-mentioned different operation has been performed in the display area on the front side of the display area where the image during execution of the specific operation corresponding effect is displayed. As a result, it is possible to visually and clearly recognize that an operation different from the operation in the long press mode of the decision button 81 has been performed. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P10-2) described above, for example.

Further, different effects performed as a result of an operation different from the operation in the long press mode of the decision button 81 described above can be performed while the operation in the specific mode is being executed, for example, as shown in FIGS. 213 and 214. When an operation different from the operation in the long press mode of is performed beyond one predetermined display effect, this different operation is performed across one predetermined display effect and the next predetermined display effect. Notify you that you have been damaged. As a result, even when an operation different from the operation in the long press mode of the determination button 81 is performed beyond one predetermined display effect, it can be clearly recognized. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P10-3) described above, for example.

Further, different effects performed as a result of an operation different from the operation in the long press mode of the decision button 81 described above are determined by continuing the operation in the specific mode, for example, as shown in FIGS. 212 to 214. When the condition is satisfied, it notifies that this different operation has been performed. As a result, when the operation in the specific mode is continuously performed, it is possible to clearly recognize that the operation different from this is performed. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P10-4) described above, for example. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P10-4) described above, for example.

In Examples 47 and 48 described above, the third symbol display device 42 has a picture information indicating that the enter button 81 is being pressed and the characters "long press!" While the effect corresponding to long press is being executed. The long press request image 45b including the information was displayed, but the player could press and hold the enter button 81 and release the enter button 81, which is different from the long press mode. May be displayed in such a manner that it can be visually recognized. Hereinafter, this point will be described with reference to FIGS. 215 to 218. The long press response effect of this embodiment is the same as that of the long press charge effect of Example 48.

FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing the determination button input monitoring / effect processing by the sub control device 262 of the 51st embodiment. FIG. 216 is a charge pattern selection table in the long press charge effect. FIG. 217 is a diagram showing a display mode of a long press corresponding effect when the long press operation is performed without interruption. FIG. 218 is a diagram showing a display mode of a long press corresponding effect when the long press operation is interrupted for a moment.

The effect execution function by the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 described above is predetermined to the third symbol display device 42 when the enter button 81 is operated during the execution of the variable display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 42. Information is displayed. The predetermined information is the long-press operation image 45b1 if the long-press charge effect is being executed. By the above-mentioned effect execution function, the long press operation image 45b1 is displayed in a mode synchronized with the operation so that the presence or absence of the operation in the long press mode can be recognized during the execution of the long press charge effect. When the operation of releasing the hand from the decision button 81 is performed as an operation different from the operation in the pressing mode, it is displayed in a mode recognizable as the operation in the long pressing mode.

With reference to FIG. 215, the determination button input monitoring / effect processing by the sub control device 262 will be described.

The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 is long when the decision button 81 is detected to be pressed at the start of execution of the long press charge effect (step S2312: YES, step S4501: YES, step S4502: YES, step S4503: YES). The push timer is activated (step S4504), and a long press determination is made as to whether or not the press detection of the enter button 81 continues for 1.0 second (step S4505A). At the start of execution of the long press charge effect, the third symbol display device 42 displays an image showing that the enter button 81 is not pressed. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 activates the long-press timer when the decision button 81 is first pressed in the long-press charge effect, and shows that the decision button 81 is not pressed in step S4504A. A button pressing command is set to display the image showing the state in which the decision button 81 is pressed on the third symbol display device 42 instead of the image.

The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines that the press button 81 has not been pressed (step S2312: NO), and when the button long press effect flag is 1 (step S4512: YES), the decision button 81 When it is determined that there is no pressing of the button is the timing when the long press flag is not 1 (step S4513: NO), in step S4513A, it is determined whether or not the long press timer is being activated. If the timing when it is determined that the press of the enter button 81 is not detected is during the activation of the long press timer, the process proceeds to step S4513B, and if the long press timer is not activated, the process proceeds to step S4513D.

In step S4513B, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 returns the long press timer to 0 in order to redo the long press determination, and proceeds to step S4513C. In step S4513C, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 replaces the image showing the state in which the decision button 81 is pressed, and the state in which the decision button 81 is not pressed (or a hand from the decision button 81 different from the long press mode). Set the button return command to display the image showing the operation of releasing).

In step S4513D, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not (the timing when it is determined that the press of the decision button 81 is not detected) is within the valid period of the long press charge effect. If it is not within the valid period, the valid period has elapsed without pressing the enter button 81, so the process proceeds to step S4513E in order to end the long press charge effect. If it is within the valid period, this process is terminated in order to determine whether or not the press of the enter button 81 is detected. In step S4513E, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the button long-press effect flag to 0 and ends the process in order to end the long-press charge effect.

If it is determined that the press of the enter button 81 is not detected during the long press charge effect (step S4513: YES) and no detection continues until the next checkpoint (step S4515: NO), the determination is made again. Since the button 81 is pressed, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 continues to display an image showing how the decision button 81 is pressed in order to continue the long press charge effect.

When it is determined that the press of the enter button 81 is not detected during the long press charge effect (step S4513: YES) and the no detection continues until the next checkpoint (step S4515: YES), the running length is executed. In order to end the push charge effect, a process of setting the long press flag, the long press timer, the long press charge counter, and the checkpoint passing counter to 0 (steps S4516 to S4519) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S4519A. In step S4519A, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 does not press the decision button 81 instead of the image showing that the decision button 81 displayed before passing the next checkpoint is pressed. A button return command is set in order to display an image showing (or an operation of releasing the hand from the decision button 81, which is different from the long press mode).

In this way, when it is determined that there is an operation of the decision button 81 during the long press charge effect (including the case where there is an operation of the long press mode), the enter button 81 is pressed in synchronization with the actual operation. When it is determined that there is no operation of the long press mode of the enter button 81 during the long press charge effect (step S4515: YES), an image showing the state of being pressed is displayed, and the operation is synchronized with the actual operation. , An image showing that the enter button 81 is not pressed is displayed, but it is determined that an operation of releasing the hand for a moment different from the long press mode of the enter button 81 is performed during the long press charge effect (step S4515). : NO) can display an image showing that the enter button 81 is pressed without synchronizing with the actual operation.

With reference to FIG. 216, the lottery of the charge pattern in the long press charge effect will be described. In the long-press charge effect from Example 44 to Example 48 described above, the percentage of the charge increased as a result of the long-press charge effect was determined according to the operation time in the long-press mode. In the embodiment, the percentage of the charge will be increased by the lottery according to the operation time in the long press mode and the value of the variable type counter so that the jackpot expectation is suggested according to the percentage of the charge. I have decided.

The long press charge effect is executed in a specific fluctuation pattern. Specifically, in the case of a big hit result, the variation type counter CS1 (0 to 198) is in the range of "141 to 198" and the variation type counter CS2 (0 to 240) is in the range of "0 to 120". It is executed in some cases, that is, in the case of jackpot super reach E (120 seconds). If the result is out of range, the variation type counter CS1 (0 to 198) is in the range of "171 to 198" and the variation type counter CS2 (0 to 240) is in the range of "0 to 199", that is, out of range. It is executed when it is Super Reach E.

When the charge pattern in the long press charge effect is the jackpot super reach E, the charge pattern A is selected if the variation type counter CS2 (0 to 240) is in the range of “0 to 90”. In the charge pattern A, the operation in the long press mode of the enter button 81 is performed from 2.70 seconds to 3.00 seconds in the case of Example 44 to Example 47 (from 5.40 seconds in the case of Example 48). Although it is up to 6.00 seconds, it will be described below using the time of Examples 44 to 47.) It is a pattern in which the charge accumulates to 90 to 100% when it is performed. For example, 2.70 seconds is 90%, 2.73 seconds is 91%, 2.76 seconds is 92%, ... 3.00 seconds is 100%. Even in the case of the charge pattern A, a pattern in which the charge is irresistible up to 90 to 100% (for example, a pattern such as the charge pattern B) may be provided.

If the variation type counter CS2 (0 to 240) is in the range of "91 to 110", the charge pattern B is selected. The charge pattern B is a pattern in which the charge is accumulated to 80 to 89% when the operation in the long press mode of the enter button 81 is performed from at least 2.40 seconds to 3.00 seconds. That is, in this embodiment, even if the operation in the long press mode is performed for 2.70 seconds or more, when the charge pattern B is selected, the charge does not accumulate to 90 to 100%, but is 80 to 89%. It is set to stop. For example, if it is 2.40 seconds, it will be 80%, if it is 2.43 seconds, it will be 81%, if it is 2.46 seconds, it will be 82%, and if it is 2.67 seconds or more, it will be 89%. Even in the case of the charge pattern B, a pattern in which the charge is accumulated up to 90 to 100% in a pseudo manner (for example, a pattern such as the charge pattern A) may be provided.

If the variation type counter CS2 (0 to 240) is in the range of "111 to 120", the charge pattern C is selected. The charge pattern C is a pattern in which the charge becomes 70 to 79% when the operation in the long press mode of the enter button 81 is performed from at least 2.10 seconds to 3.00 seconds. That is, in this embodiment, even if the operation in the long press mode is performed for 2.40 seconds or more, when the charge pattern C is selected, the charge does not accumulate to 80 to 100%, but is 70 to 79%. It is set to stop. For example, 70% for 2.10 seconds, 81% for 2.13 seconds, 72% for 2.16 seconds ... 79% for 2.37 seconds or more. Even in the case of the charge pattern C, a pattern in which the charge is accumulated up to 80 to 100% in a pseudo manner (for example, a pattern such as the charge pattern A or the charge pattern B) may be provided.

Similarly, in the case of the out-of-order super reach E, if the variation type counter CS2 (0 to 240) is in the range of "0 to 99", the charge pattern B is selected and the variation type counter CS2 (0 to 240). If is in the range of "100 to 199", the charge pattern C is selected. The charge pattern A is set so that it is selected only in the case of a big hit and not selected in the case of a miss.

In this way, when the charge is accumulated up to 90 to 100%, that is, when the charge pattern A is internally selected, it can be suggested that the jackpot expectation is the highest in the super reach E. When 90 charges are accumulated to 80 to 89%, that is, when charge pattern B is selected internally, the jackpot expectation is lower than charge pattern A but higher than charge pattern C in super reach E. Can be suggested. When the charge is accumulated to 70 to 79%, that is, when the charge pattern C is selected internally, it can be suggested that the jackpot expectation is the lowest in the super reach E. Further, as will be described later, at the end of the long press charge effect, a suggestion image 45c3 suggesting a jackpot expectation is displayed as a result of the long press charge effect.

With reference to FIG. 217, a display mode of the long press corresponding effect when the long press operation is performed without interruption will be described.

As shown in (a), when a variable effect including a long-press charge effect is executed, the third symbol display device 42 is provided with a long-press notice display period, for example, during reach display, and the long-press notice image. 45a is displayed. After the end of the display period of the long-press notice image 45a, the long-press charge effect is started. In the long-press charge effect, as shown in (b), the long-press operation image 45b1 capable of reflecting the operation of the long-press mode of the enter button 81 and the long-press determination indicating that the long-press determination is in progress. Image 45b2 is displayed. Here, the long-press operation image 45b1 is an image showing, for example, a state in which the enter button 81 is not pressed, and the long-press determination image 45b2 is, for example, from 0 seconds to 1. depending on the time for pressing the enter button 81. It is an image like an indicator that changes up to 0 seconds and a character image of "during long press determination".

If the player does not operate the enter button 81 even once, the long-press charge effect is displayed as the long-press operation image 45b1 shown in (b) is displayed, and the valid period of the long-press charge effect elapses. Is finished. After that, the reach display effect is executed, and the result is displayed.

As shown in (c), when the decision button 81 is pressed, the long press operation image 45b1 shows the state in which the decision button 81 is pressed from the image showing the state in which the decision button 81 is not pressed. You can switch to the image you have just created. The indicator of the long press determination image 45b2 changes according to the time during which the decision button 81 is continuously pressed. When the enter button 81 is pressed for 0.50 seconds from the start of the long press charge effect, the indicator changes to the position of 0.5 seconds.

As shown in (d), when the enter button 81 is pressed for 1.00 seconds from the start, the long press operation image 45b1 is displayed as an image showing how the enter button 81 is pressed. .. The long press determination image 45b2 shows that the indicator changes to the position of 1.0 second and the long press determination is completed.

As shown in (e), when the enter button 81 is pressed for 1.03 seconds from the start, the long press operation image 45b1 shows that the enter button 81 is continuously pressed from the long press determination period. Although the image is displayed as it is, the long press charge image 45c is displayed instead of the long press determination image 45b2. The long press charge image 45c shows that the charge is 1 percent. After that, by continuing the operation in the long press mode of the enter button 81, the charge continues to increase by 1% every 0.03 seconds.

As shown in (f), when the enter button 81 is pressed for 2.50 seconds from the start, the long press operation image 45b1 is displayed as an image showing how the enter button 81 is pressed. .. The long press charge image 45c shows that the charge is 50 percent. As shown in (g), when the enter button 81 is pressed for 4.00 seconds from the start, the long press operation image 45b1 is displayed as an image showing how the enter button 81 is pressed. .. The long press charge image 45c shows that the charge is 100%. That is, in this long-press charge effect, the player can recognize that the jackpot expectation is the highest among the jackpot super reach E (charge pattern A is internally selected).

As shown in (h), at the end of the long-press charge effect, for example, "charge rate over 90%!" To suggest to the player that the result of this long-press charge effect is a high hit expectation. A suggestion image 45c3 suggesting that the jackpot expectation is high, including textual information such as "Geki Fever !?", is displayed. Since the charge pattern A is a pattern for determining the jackpot, the jackpot result is displayed as shown in (i) after the result of the reach display effect is displayed.

When the charge pattern B is selected, at the end of the long-press charge effect, as a result of the long-press charge effect, a suggestion suggesting a jackpot expectation such as "charge rate over 80%! Hot !?" Image 45c3 is displayed. When the charge pattern C is selected, at the end of the long-press charge effect, as a result of the long-press charge effect, a suggestion suggesting a jackpot expectation such as "charge rate is over 70%! I don't know yet !?" Image 45c3 is displayed. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the result of the long press charge effect.

With reference to FIG. 218, a display mode of the long press corresponding effect when the long press operation is interrupted for a moment will be described. Specifically, a case where the long press operation is momentarily interrupted during the long press determination at the start of the long press charge effect and during the execution of the middle stage of the long press charge effect will be described. The same parts as in FIG. 217 will be omitted, and different points will be described.

As shown in (c), when the decision button 81 is pressed for 0.50 seconds from the start of the long press charge effect, the player performs an operation of momentarily releasing the decision button 81, which is different from the long press mode. Then, as shown in (d), the long-press operation image 45b1 is switched from an image showing that the enter button 81 is pressed to an image showing that the enter button 81 is not pressed. In the long press determination image 45b2, the indicator returns from the position of 0.5 seconds to the position of 0 seconds. When the player presses the decision button 81 again, as shown in (e), the long press operation image 45b1 shows that the decision button 81 is pressed from the image showing that the decision button 81 is not pressed. In the long press determination image 45b2, the indicator is increased again from the position of 0 seconds, and the long press determination is repeated. As shown in (f), when the indicator of the long press determination image 45b2 changes to the position of 1.0 second, the long press determination is completed.

After that, as shown in (g) and (h), the operation in the long press mode of the decision button 81 continues, and the long press operation image 45b1 shows an image showing that the decision button 81 is pressed. While displayed, the charge of the long press charge image 45c continues to increase. As shown in (i), for example, even when the player releases the decision button 81 different from the long press mode when the charge of the long press charge image 45c displays 43%, the above-described embodiment is performed. Similar to the description of Example 47 from 44, the charge continues to increase until the next checkpoint (timing when the charge reaches 50%) arrives. Specifically, as shown in (j), the charge of the long press charge image 45c continues to increase until the charge reaches 47%. During the period from (i) to (j), the long-press operation image 45b1 shows that the decision button 81 is pressed even though the operation of releasing the hand from the decision button 81, which is different from the long-press mode, is performed. Continue to display the image showing. As shown in (k), when the player presses the decision button 81 again at the timing when the charge reaches 48%, the long press operation image 45b1 displays an image showing that the decision button 81 is pressed. As shown in (l), the charge of the long-pressed charge image 45c continues to increase.

After the player releases the decision button 81, which is different from the long press mode as shown in (i), the player does not press the decision button 81 again, and the charge is the next checkpoint. When 50% arrives, the long-press operation image 45b1 is switched from an image showing that the enter button 81 is pressed to an image showing that the enter button 81 is not pressed, and a long-press charge effect is produced. It returns at the start of, and is restarted from the long press judgment.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 51st embodiment, the above-mentioned effect execution function provides predetermined information (for example, for example) to the third symbol display device 42 during execution of a predetermined display effect (for example, variable display effect). The long press operation image 45b1) is displayed. The above-mentioned long-press operation image 45b1 is displayed in a mode synchronized with the operation so that the presence or absence of the operation in the long-press mode can be recognized during the execution of the long-press corresponding effect (for example, the long-press charge effect). When the operation of releasing the enter button 81 is performed as an operation different from the operation in the long press mode, it is displayed in a mode recognizable as the operation in the long press mode.

As a result, the predetermined information (for example, the long press operation image 45b1) displayed on the third symbol display device 42 during the execution of the predetermined display effect is displayed during the execution of the long press corresponding effect (for example, the long press charge effect). Since the presence or absence of the operation in the long press mode is displayed in a mode synchronized with the operation so that the presence or absence of the operation in the long press mode can be recognized, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the operation in the long press mode is performed. When the operation to release the enter button 81 is performed as an operation different from the operation in the long press mode, it is displayed in a mode in which it can be recognized that the operation in the long press mode is performed, so the decision is made from the beginning. It is possible to visually recognize that it is not necessary to redo the operation of the button 81. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the fun of the long press response effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P6-0) above, for example.

Further, the effect executing means is during a predetermined display effect when the player's operation is performed in a specific mode (for example, a long press mode of the enter button 81) within the valid period during which the player's operation is valid. If an operation different from the operation in the specific mode is performed within the period in which the operation corresponding to the specific operation (for example, the long press charge effect) is executed and the presence / absence of the operation in the specific mode is determined, the effect corresponding to the specific operation is performed. Reflects the result of an operation different from the operation in the specific mode (for example, when the operation of releasing the decision button 81 different from the operation in the specific mode is performed while the execution of is continued, a predetermined number of charges are made. The long-press operation image 45b1, which was displayed in the mode in which the button was pressed until then, is displayed in the mode in which the button is not pressed). As a result, even if an operation different from the operation in the specific mode is performed after the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect is started, the operation in the specific mode is the state in which the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect is continued. Since the results of different operations are reflected, it is necessary to recognize that it is not necessary to restart the operation of the operation means from the beginning even if the operation is different from the operation in the specific mode, without discomfort in the specific operation corresponding production. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the production corresponding to the specific operation. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P6-00) above, for example.

In the above-mentioned Example 51, the long-press operation image 45b1 is one type of image (long-press operation image 45b1), and the state in which the enter button 81 is long-pressed and the hand from the enter button 81 different from the long-press mode. The state in which the operation of releasing the button is released is displayed in a manner that the player can visually recognize, but these may be displayed by two types of images. This point will be described below with reference to FIG. 219. FIG. 219 is a diagram showing a display mode of the long press mode effect of Example 52.

From (a) to (h), the long press determination and the long press charge effect are executed as in FIG. 218 of the above-mentioned Example 51. When the player releases the decision button 81, which is different from the long press mode, a long press operation image displaying an image showing how the decision button 81 is pressed, as shown in (i). Along with 45b1, a long press release time notification image 45e4 is displayed, which is an image notifying that the hand release operation has been performed and displaying the time until the long press release. The long press release time notification image 45e4 is an image that allows the player to visually recognize the time from the time when the operation of releasing the decision button 81, which is different from the long press mode, to the arrival of the next checkpoint. .. Further, the long-press release time notification image 45e4 is operated to release the hand from the determination button 81, which is different from the long-press release mode, while the long-press release time notification image 45e4 is displayed, but internally. It is possible to make the player recognize that the operation is performed in the long press mode. As a result, even if the operation of releasing the hand from the decision button 81, which is different from the long press mode, is performed for a moment, it is not necessary to restart the operation from the beginning while the long press release time notification image 45e4 is displayed. It is easy to understand.

In the long press release time notification image 45e4, for example, an indicator having a length corresponding to the time from the time when the operation of releasing the decision button 81, which is different from the long press mode, to the arrival of the next checkpoint is held. It is displayed with an effect that decreases according to the time when the operation of releasing the hand from the decision button, which is different from the mode, is performed. With reference to FIG. 183 of the above-described embodiment 44, the time for the next checkpoint to arrive from the time when the player releases the decision button 81, which is different from the long press mode, is, for example, 0.20 seconds. (Note that a long production time may be set as in the 47th embodiment). As shown in (j), the long press release time notification image 45e4 shows the process from 0.20 seconds to 0.00 seconds for the indicator. As shown in (k), if the enter button 81 is pressed again by the time the indicator of the long press release time notification image 45e4 reaches 0 seconds, the long press release time notification image 45e4 is displayed as shown in (l). It will be erased and the long press charge effect will continue.

If the enter button 81 is not pressed again by the time the indicator of the long press release time notification image 45e4 reaches 0 seconds, the long press charge image 45c is returned to 0% when the indicator reaches 0 seconds. If it is within the valid period, the long press charge effect will be redone.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 52nd embodiment, the above-mentioned predetermined information (for example, long press operation image 45b1) is long-pressed during execution of a long-press corresponding effect (for example, long-press charge effect). The first information (for example, long-press operation image 45b1) that can be displayed in a mode synchronized with the operation so that the presence or absence of the operation in the mode can be recognized, and the hand from the enter button 81 as an operation different from the operation in the long-press mode. When the operation of releasing the button is performed, the second information (for example, the long press release time notification image 45e4) can be displayed in a mode recognizable as the operation in the long press mode. As a result, the first information is displayed in a mode synchronized with the operation so that the presence or absence of the operation in the long press mode can be recognized during the execution of the long press corresponding effect, so that the operation in the long press mode can be performed. It can be easily confirmed whether or not it is present. Further, when the operation of releasing the enter button 81 is performed as an operation different from the operation in the long press mode, the second information is displayed in a mode in which it can be recognized that the operation in the long press mode is performed. Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize that it is not necessary to redo the operation of the enter button 81 from the beginning. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P6-1) above, for example.

In the 52nd embodiment described above, the first information is the long press operation image 45b1 displayed in a manner imitating the enter button 81, and the second information is the long press release time notification image 45e4 displayed by the indicator. However, the first information and the second information may be one type of image, for example, information (long press operation image 45b1 or long press charge image 45c) that is the object of the long press correspondence effect. This point will be described with reference to FIG. 220. FIG. 220 is a diagram showing a display mode of the long press mode effect of Example 53.

In the long-press charge effect of this embodiment, the long-press determination image 45b2 is not displayed during the long-press determination display period, and as shown in (b) to (f), the long-press operation image 45b1 and the long-press charge are displayed. Image 45c is displayed. That is, the long-press operation image 45b1 shows how the decision button 81 is pressed in synchronization with the operation of the decision button 81 during the determination period, as in the above description of the 51st and 52nd embodiments. It may be an image that is displayed, or an image that shows that the enter button 81 is not pressed. In accordance with this, the long-pressed charge image 45c also increases the charge or returns to 0 in accordance with the pressing of the enter button 81 during the determination period. As a result, the player can easily recognize whether or not the operation can be performed in the long press mode by looking at any of the images.

Further, after the elapse of the determination period, both the long-press operation image 45b1 and the long-press charge image 45c are pressed when the decision button 81 is released from the decision button 81, which is different from the long-press mode. An image showing the situation and an image with an increasing charge are displayed. If the enter button 81 is pressed again when the next checkpoint arrives, an image showing that the enter button 81 is pressed and an image showing an increase in charge are continuously displayed. If the enter button 81 is not pressed when the next checkpoint arrives, the image is switched to the image showing that the enter button 81 is not pressed at that time, and the image in which the charge returns to 0 is displayed. .. As a result, even if the player releases the decision button 81, which is different from the long press mode, an image showing that the decision button 81 is pressed is displayed, and an image showing an increase in charge is displayed. During this period, it can be easily recognized that it is not necessary to re-operate the enter button 81 from the beginning in a long-pressed manner.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 53rd embodiment, the above-mentioned first information is the determination button 81 so that the presence or absence of the operation in the long press mode can be recognized during the execution of the long press corresponding effect. The first operation information (for example, the long-press operation image 45b1 during the display period of the long-press determination) is displayed in a mode imitating the above-mentioned second information, and the above-mentioned second information is determined as an operation different from the operation in the long-press mode. When the operation to release the button 81 is performed, the second operation information (for example, the charge increases) displayed in a mode imitating the enter button 81 so that it can be recognized that the operation is performed in the long press mode. It is a long press operation image 45b1) during the period. As a result, the first information is displayed in a mode imitating the decision button 81 so that the presence or absence of the operation in the long press mode can be recognized during the execution of the long press corresponding effect, so that the operation in the long press mode can be performed. You can intuitively recognize whether or not you can do it. Further, when the operation of releasing the hand from the decision button 81 is performed as an operation different from the operation in the long press mode, the decision button 81 is imitated so that it can be recognized that the operation in the long press mode is performed. Since the second information is displayed in the embodiment, it is possible to intuitively recognize that it is not necessary to restart the operation of the enter button 81 from the beginning. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P6-2) above, for example.

Further, the above-mentioned first information is displayed in a mode synchronized with the operation so that the presence or absence of the operation in the long press mode can be recognized during the execution of the long press support effect, and the purpose of the long press support effect is The first long press correspondence information (for example, the long press charge image 45c during the display period of the long press determination), and the above-mentioned second information is a hand from the enter button 81 as an operation different from the operation in the long press mode. When the release operation is performed, the second long press correspondence information (for example, the charge is increasing), which is displayed in a manner recognizable as the operation in the long press mode, is the purpose of the long press correspondence effect. It is a long press charge image 45c) during the period. As a result, during the execution of the long press correspondence effect, the first long press correspondence information that is the purpose of the long press correspondence effect is displayed in a manner synchronized with the operation so that the presence or absence of the operation in the long press mode can be recognized. Therefore, it is possible to intuitively recognize whether or not the operation can be performed in the long-press mode while enjoying the purpose of the long-press compatible effect. Further, when the operation of releasing the enter button 81 is performed as an operation different from the operation in the long press mode, the purpose of the long press response effect is such that it can be recognized that the operation is performed in the long press mode. Since the second long press correspondence information is displayed, it is possible to intuitively recognize that it is not necessary to restart the operation of the enter button 81 from the beginning while enjoying the purpose of the long press correspondence effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P6-3) above, for example.

In the above-described embodiment, the long-press compatible effect describes the long-press charge effect in which the charge is accumulated based on the long-press operation for a predetermined time (3 seconds), but the long-press compatible effect is the long-press charge effect. It may be a different production. In the effect corresponding to the long press in this embodiment, the color of the color change image 45h (FIG. 230), which will be described later, displayed on the third symbol display device 42 changes according to the operation in the long press mode of the enter button 81. Long press color change effect. Hereinafter, each configuration for executing this long-press color change effect will be described.

The long-pressed color change effect is an effect in which the color change image 45h changes a plurality of times according to the operation in the long-press mode of the enter button 81, and the jackpot expectation is high according to the number of times the color change image 45h changes. It is a production. For example, the color change image 45h changes from white to blue to yellow to iridescent. The color change image 45h is set so that the expectation of white color is the lowest and the expectation of iridescent color is the highest.

As one of the effect execution functions, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 has a length within the valid period during which the operation of the decision button 81 is valid and during the period during which the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in the long press mode. It is equipped with an effect continuation lottery function that draws a lottery as to whether or not to continue the push color change effect. The effect continuous lottery function is executed in steps S4801C to S4805, step S4808 to step S4811, steps S4815 to step S4818, and steps S4822 to S4825 of the color change lottery process (FIG. 223) described later. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 is a case where it is determined that the player is operating the decision button 81 at the checkpoint (determination timing), and the lottery result of the effect continuous lottery (color change lottery) is long-pressed. When the result is to continue the execution (color change) of the color change effect, the execution (color change) of the long press color change effect is continued at the next specific interval (for example, the period until the next checkpoint).

The control for executing the long press color change effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 221 to 224. FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing a variation display mode setting process by the sub control device of the 54th embodiment. FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing the determination button input monitoring / effect processing by the sub control device. FIG. 223 is a flowchart showing a color change lottery process by the sub control device. FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing a color change lottery process following FIG. 223.

A variation display mode setting process performed by the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. 221. For the same processing as the variation display mode setting processing described with reference to FIG. 42, the above description will be referred to, and the processing related to the long press color change effect peculiar to this embodiment will be described.

In step S2474D, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the received variation pattern designation command is a command with a long press color change effect. Specifically, in the variation pattern designation command, the presence / absence of the long-press color change effect is determined by using the long-press color change pattern selection table (FIG. 227) described later. If there is a long press color change effect, the process proceeds to step S2474E, and if not, this process ends.

In step S2474E, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines the long press color change pattern. Specifically, using the long-press color change pattern selection table described later, a long-press color change pattern is selected from the four long-press color change patterns A, B, C, and D, and the process proceeds to step S2474F. ..

In step S2747F, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the long press color change effect flag to 1, and proceeds to step S2747G. In step S2747G, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the long press color change effect setting process described later, and ends this process.

Next, the decision button input monitoring / effect processing performed by the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. 222. For the same processing as the decision button input monitoring / effect processing described with reference to FIG. 178, the above description will be referred to, and the process related to the long-press color change effect peculiar to this embodiment will be described.

When the press of the enter button 81 is detected in step S2312, in step S4501A, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the above-mentioned long press color change effect flag is 1. If the long press color change effect flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S4502, and if not, this process ends. If the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 is within the valid period of the operation of the long press color change effect (step S4502) and the long press flag is 0 (step S4503), the long press timer is activated (step S4504). A long press determination is made (step S4504, step S4505, step S4506), and the process proceeds to step S4506A. If the long press flag is 1, the long press operation is in progress, and the process proceeds to step S4507A.

In step S4506A, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the white display flag to 1 in order to display the start time of the long press color change effect in white, and proceeds to step S4507A. In step S4507A, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the color change lottery process described below. The color change lottery process is a process that is continuously executed during the period in which the operation in the long press mode of the decision button 81 is performed.

When the press of the enter button 81 is not detected in step S2312, in step S4512A and step S4513, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 loses the operation in the long press mode during the long press color change effect. Determine if it exists. From step S4514 to step S4515, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the operation in the long press mode is restarted by the arrival of the next checkpoint. If the operation in the long press mode is not restarted by the arrival of the next checkpoint, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 ends the long press color change effect from step S4516 to step S4519. If the operation in the long press mode is resumed by the arrival of the next checkpoint, the long press color change effect is continued.

In this way, even in the long-press color change effect, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted after the long-press color change effect is started, the decision button by the player is reached by the next checkpoint (judgment timing). When the operation of the 81 is resumed, the execution of the long-pressed color change effect is continued, so that it is not necessary to wait for the time until the operation of the enter button 81 becomes the long-pressed mode from the beginning.

Next, the color change lottery process performed by the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 will be described with reference to FIGS. 223 and 224.

In step S4801A, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the checkpoint passage counter is 0. If the checkpoint passage counter is 0, the process proceeds to step S4801B, and if not, the process proceeds to step S4801C. That is, at the start of the long press color change effect, the following processing is performed from step S4801B, and after passing the checkpoint even once, the following processing is performed from step S4801C.

In step S4801B, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 reads out the long-pressed color change pattern with reference to the color change pattern selection table described later, and proceeds to step S4801C. The color change pattern selection table stores the relationship between the variation pattern and the highest color that can be changed by the color change. Thereby, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 can determine whether or not there is a possibility of the first, second, and third color changes in the step described later.

In step S4801C, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not it is the color change lottery timing. The color change lottery is regularly performed during the period when the operation in the long press mode is performed. The color change lottery timing is set for a predetermined time (for example, 0.1) so that the checkpoints come multiple times, for example, when the long press color change effect flag is 1 and the long press flag is 1. It is the timing when it arrives at every second) or a predetermined number of interruptions corresponding to it. The color change lottery timing may be a shorter time (for example, every 0.01 seconds, which is the timing of operation detection), or a predetermined number of interruptions corresponding to the timing. If it is the color change lottery timing, the process proceeds to step S4802, otherwise the process ends.

In step S4802, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 acquires the value of the color change lottery counter for determining the success or failure of the color change lottery, and proceeds to step S4803. In step S4803, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the value of the color change lottery counter is correct by referring to the color change lottery table described later. The ease of hitting the value of the color change lottery counter is changed according to the type of the long press color change pattern and the number of times the checkpoint is passed, as will be described later. If the value of the color change lottery counter is correct, the process proceeds to step S4804, and if the value of the color change lottery counter is different, the process proceeds to step S4805.

In step S4804, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the value of the color change flag to 1 and proceeds to step S4806A. In step S4805, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the value of the color change flag to 0 and proceeds to step S4806A. Whether the color change flag is set to 1 or 0 is determined, for example, by whether or not the value of the color change lottery counter is correct in the color change lottery performed immediately before the checkpoint. By doing so, even if a color change pattern in which the checkpoint timing changes significantly is included, the timing of the color change lottery can be flexibly matched.

Whether the color change flag is set to 1 or 0 is determined by changing the color at the next checkpoint if the value of the color change lottery counter is hit even once in the color change lottery performed between the checkpoints. It may be determined that the flag is set to 1. In this way, the longer the period in which the operation in the long press mode is performed, the more opportunities for the color change lottery can be given.

In step S4806A, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not there is a possibility of the first color change (white → blue color change). Except for the long-press color change pattern D, when the long-press color change patterns A to C are used, there is a possibility of the first color change. If there is a possibility of the first color change, the process proceeds to step S4806B, and if there is no possibility of the first color change, the process proceeds to step S4806C. In step S4806C, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 maintains the white color at the start of the effect and ends the process.

In step S4806B, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not it is the first color change timing. The timing of the first color change is set to match the first checkpoint. If it is the first color change timing, the process proceeds to step S4807A, and if not, the process proceeds to step S4812A.

In step S4807A, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the long press flag is 1. If the long press flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S4807B. In step S4807B, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the checkpoint passage counter to +1 and proceeds to step S4808.

If the long press flag is not 1 in step S4807A, the process proceeds to step S4807C. The case where the long press flag is not 1 is the case where the first checkpoint is reached in step S4515 (FIG. 222) described above without detecting the operation in the long press mode. In this case, in step S4807C, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the color return flag to 1 in order to return the color of the color change image 45h to the color at the start of the effect, and ends this process. If the long press operation is redone with the remaining time, this process is redone from the beginning.

In step S4808, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the color change lottery flag described above is 1. If the color change flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S4809, otherwise (if the color change flag is 0), the process proceeds to step S4811. In step S4809, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the blue display flag to 1 in order to execute the first color change, and proceeds to step S4810. In step S4810, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 returns the value of the color change flag to 0, and proceeds to step S4812. In step S4811, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 maintains the color (white) at the beginning of the effect and proceeds to step S4812A.

Here, in the case of the long-pressed color change pattern A, the color change is performed up to 3 times (any of 0 to 3 times) by the color change lottery. In the case of the long-press color change pattern B, the color change is performed up to twice (any of 0 times to 2 times) by the color change lottery. In the case of the long-press color change pattern C, there is a possibility that the color change is performed at most once (either 0 times or 1 time) by the color change lottery. In the case of the long press color change pattern D, the color change due to the color change lottery is 0 times.

Note that 0 times indicates a case where the color does not change at the first color change timing (when the color change flag is 0). In this case, the color is the same as the original color of the production. The first time indicates a case where the color changes at the first color change timing but does not change at the second color change timing. The second time indicates a case where the color changes at the first and second color change timings and does not change at the third color change timing. The term "three times" indicates a case where the color changes at all the color change timings from the first time to the third time.

In step S4812A, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not there is a possibility of a second color change (blue → yellow color change). Except for the long-pressed color change patterns C and D, if the long-pressed color change patterns A and B are used, there is a possibility of a second color change. If there is a second color change, the process proceeds to step S4813, and if not, the process proceeds to step S4812B. In step S4812B, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 maintains the color at the time of the first color change, and ends this process.

In step S4813, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not it is the second color change timing. The timing of the second color change is set to match the second checkpoint. If it is the second color change timing, the process proceeds to step S4814A, and if not, the process proceeds to step S4819.

In step S4814A, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the long press flag is 1. If the long press flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S4814B. In step S4814B, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the checkpoint passage counter to +1 and proceeds to step S4815.

If the long press flag is not 1 in step S4814A, the process proceeds to step S4814C. The case where the long press flag is not 1 is the case where the second checkpoint is reached in step S4515 (FIG. 222) described above without detecting the operation in the long press mode. In this case, in step S4814C, similarly to the 44th embodiment, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the color return flag to 1 in order to return the color of the color change image 45h to the color (white) at the start of the effect. , End this process. If the long press operation is redone with the remaining time, this process is redone from the beginning.

In step S4815, it is determined whether or not the color change flag is 1. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not to execute the color change based on the result of the color change lottery at the time when the second color change timing is reached. If the color change flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S4816, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4818.

In step S4816, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the yellow change flag to 1 in order to execute the second color change, and proceeds to step S4817. In step S4817, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 returns the color change flag to 0 and proceeds to step S4819. In step S4818, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 maintains the first color-changed color (blue) and ends this process.

In step S4819, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not there is a possibility of a third color change. Except for the long-pressed color change patterns B, C, and D, if the long-pressed color change pattern A is used, there is a possibility of a third color change. If there is a third color change, the process proceeds to step S4820, and if not, this process ends.

In step S4820, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not it is the third color change timing. The timing of the third color change is set to match the third checkpoint. If it is the third color change timing, the process proceeds to step S4821A, otherwise the process ends.

In step S4821A, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the long press flag is 1. If the long press flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S4821B. In step S4821B, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the checkpoint passage counter to +1 and proceeds to step S4822.

If the long press flag is not 1 in step S4821A, the process proceeds to step S4821C. The case where the long press flag is not 1 is the case where the third checkpoint is reached in step S4515 (FIG. 222) described above without detecting the operation in the long press mode. In this case, in step S4807C, similarly to the 44th embodiment, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the color return flag to 1 in order to return the color of the color change image 45h to the color (white) at the start of the effect. , End this process. If the long press operation is redone with the remaining time, this process is redone from the beginning.

In step S4822, it is determined whether or not the color change flag is 1. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not to execute the color change based on the result of the color change lottery at the time when the third color change timing is reached. If the color change flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S4823, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4825.

In step S4823, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets the rainbow color change flag to 1 and returns the second yellow change flag to 0 in order to execute the third color change, and proceeds to step S4824. In step S4824, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 returns the color change flag to 0 and ends this process. In step S4825, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 maintains the second color-changed color (yellow) and ends this process.

In this way, the long-press color change effect is a display mode (for example, color change patterns A, B, C, D) are different. For example, in the case of the color change pattern A, the color change is performed up to 3 times, in the case of the color change pattern B, the color change is performed up to 2 times, and in the case of the color change pattern C, the color change is performed up to 1 time. The change is performed, and if the color change pattern D is used, the color change is not performed. As a result, the fun of the long-pressed color change effect can be suitably improved by the difference in the display mode of the long-press color change effect according to the predetermined condition obtained as a result of the jackpot determination.

Further, the effect continuous lottery function by the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 detects the operation at the determination timing (checkpoint), and the long press is performed based on the lottery result (color change lottery) of the effect continuation lottery. Since the execution of the color change effect (color change) is continued, if the operation detection is continued, the fun of the long press compatible effect is preferably improved as compared with the case where the execution of the long press compatible effect is continued. Can be done.

In addition, since the continuous production lottery (color change lottery) is performed at intervals shorter than the specific interval (checkpoint interval), there are more opportunities for lottery than when the lottery is done at the judgment timing (checkpoint), so press and hold. It is possible to suitably improve the interest of the corresponding staging.

Next, the long press color change effect setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 225. FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing a long press color change effect setting process performed by the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262. The long-press color change effect setting process is a process of setting a command for executing a long-press color change effect from the sub control device 262 to the display control device 45. The same process as the button long press effect setting process in FIG. 180 will be omitted.

In step S4605, it is determined whether or not the operation of the enter button 81 is within the valid period, in step S4606, it is determined that the value of the long press flag is 1, and it is determined that the immediately preceding long press flag is 0. If so, in step S4609A, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the returned flag described later is 1. If the returned flag is not 1, the process proceeds to step S4609B, and if the returned flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S4609L.

In step S4609B, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets a white display command in order to start the long press color change effect, and proceeds to step S4609C. In step S4609C, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the blue change flag is 1. If the blue change flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S4609D, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4609E. In step S4609D, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a blue change command in order to change the color of the color change image 45h from white to blue, and proceeds to step S4618.

In step S4609E, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the yellow change flag is 1. If the yellow change flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S4609F, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4609G. In step S4609F, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets a yellow change command in order to change the color of the color change image 45h from blue to yellow, and proceeds to step S4618.

In step S4609G, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the rainbow color change flag is 1. If the rainbow color change flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S4609H, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4609I. In step S4609H, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 sets a rainbow color change command in order to change the color of the color change image 45h from yellow to rainbow color, and proceeds to step S4618.

In step S4609I, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the return flag described in step S4807C, step S4814C, and step S4821C described above is 1. If the return flag is 1, the process proceeds to step S4609J, otherwise the process proceeds to step S4618. In step S4609J, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets a return command in order to return the color of the color change image 45h to the original color (white) at the start of the effect, and proceeds to step S4609K.

In step S4609K, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the returned flag indicating that the color of the color change image 45h has been returned to the original color of the effect to 1. As a result, in the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262, in step S4609A described above, whether the change of the long press flag from 0 to 1 is an event at the start of the long press color change effect, or during the long press color change effect. As an operation different from the long press mode, it is possible to determine whether the event is caused by the player passing the checkpoint with the player releasing his / her hand from the decision button 81.

When it is determined in step S4609A described above that the returned flag is 1, in step S4609L, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 is the length at the time when the operation in the long press mode of the decision button 81 is performed again. It is determined whether or not the remaining time of the pressed color change effectable time (for example, 6 seconds) is less than the time required to reach the maximum color of the long-pressed color change pattern (maximum color arrival time). The time to reach the maximum color (rainbow color) of the long-pressed color change pattern A is 2.1 seconds from the start of the change. The time to reach the maximum color (yellow) of the long-pressed color change pattern B is 0.9 seconds from the start of the change. The time to reach the maximum color (blue) of the long-pressed color change pattern C is 0.3 seconds from the start of the change. If the remaining time is less than the maximum color arrival time, the process proceeds to step S4609M, and if not, the process proceeds to step S4609N.

In step S4609M, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 returns the returned flag to 0, proceeds to step S4609B described above, and executes the processing of step S4609C or less in order to execute the long press color change effect again in the remaining time. do. In step S4609N, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets a color change impossibility notification command to notify the player that the long press color change effect cannot be executed in the remaining time, and proceeds to step S4618.

In step S4618, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the end time of the long press color change effect, that is, the above-mentioned long press color change effect possible time (6 seconds) has ended. If the long press color change effect reaches the end time, the process proceeds to step S4619, otherwise the process ends.

In step S4619, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the long press effect end command and proceeds to step S4620. In step S4620, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 returns the button long press effect flag to 0, and proceeds to step S4621. In step S4621, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 returns the long press flag, the long press timer, the checkpoint passage counter, the white / blue / yellow / rainbow color change flag, the returned flag, etc. to 0, and performs this process. finish.

Next, the long press color change effect display process will be described with reference to FIG. 226. FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing a long press color change effect display process performed by the CPU 521 of the display control device 45. The long-press color change effect display process is a process for the display control device 45 to display the long-press color change effect on the third symbol display device 42. The same process as the button long press effect display process of FIG. 181 will be omitted.

In step S4706A, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the white display command has been received. If the white display command has been received, the process proceeds to step S4706B, and if not, the process proceeds to step S4706C. In step S4706B, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays a white image on the third symbol display device 42 in order to start the long press color change effect, and ends this process. This white image is a color change image 45h.

In step S4706C, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the blue display command has been received. If the blue display command has been received, the process proceeds to step S4706D, and if not, the process proceeds to step S4706E. In step S4706D, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays a blue image on the third symbol display device 42, and ends this process. The color change image 45h may replace the white image with the blue image, or may display the blue image while displaying the white image.

In step S4706E, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the yellow display command has been received. If the yellow display command is received, the process proceeds to step S4706F, and if not, the process proceeds to step S4706G. In step S4706F, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays a yellow image on the third symbol display device 42, and ends this process. The color change image 45h may replace the blue image with the yellow image, or may display the yellow image while displaying the blue image.

In step S4706G, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the rainbow color display command has been received. If the rainbow color display command is received, the process proceeds to step S4706H, and if not, the process proceeds to step S4706I. In step S4706H, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays a rainbow-colored image on the third symbol display device 42, and ends this process. The color change image 45h may be replaced with a rainbow-colored image from the yellow image, or the rainbow-colored image may be displayed while the yellow image is displayed.

In step S4706I, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the return command has been received. If the return command has been received, the process proceeds to step S4706J, and if not, the process proceeds to step S4706K. In step S4706J, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the color change image 45h at the start of the effect on the third symbol display device 42, and ends this process. The color change image 45h may be returned to white if the production start time is white, or may be colorless or display if the production start time is colorless or non-display.

In step S4706K, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the color change impossible notification command has been received. If the color change impossibility notification command is received, the process proceeds to step S4706L, and if not, the process proceeds to step S4723 (determination of end of production time). In step S4706L, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays a color change impossibility notification image informing the player that the long press color change effect cannot be executed on the third symbol display device 42, and ends this process. The color change impossibility notification image may be an image that clearly indicates that the long-press color change effect cannot be executed, or an image that suggests that the long-press color change effect cannot be executed. Further, as long as it is possible to notify the player that the long press color change effect cannot be executed, other transmission methods such as voice may be used instead of the image.

Next, the selection of the color change pattern used for the above-mentioned long-press color change effect will be described with reference to FIG. 227. FIG. 227 is a table for selecting a color change pattern.

The long press color change effect is executed in a specific variation pattern. The specific variation pattern is a variation display effect having a high expectation of a big hit among the variation display effects. For example, a specific fluctuation pattern is executed in the range of "141 to 198" of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (0 to 198) when a jackpot result is obtained, and when a deviation result is obtained, the fluctuation type counter CS1 (0 to 198) is executed. It is a super reach with a fluctuation time of 120 seconds, which is executed in the range of "171 to 198" out of 0 to 198) and has a high expectation of a big hit. Specifically, among the super reach (super reach E, F) with a fluctuation time of 120 seconds, if the jackpot result is obtained, the jackpot supermarket whose fluctuation type counter CS2 (0 to 240) is in the range of "0 to 120". If it is executed in reach E (120 seconds) and a deviation result is obtained, the variation type counter CS2 (0 to 240) is executed in the deviation super reach E in the range of "0 to 199".

If the color change pattern in the long press color change effect is the jackpot super reach E, the color change pattern A is selected if the variation type counter CS2 (0 to 240) is in the range of "0 to 85", and the variation type. If the counter CS2 (0 to 240) is in the range of "86 to 105", the color change pattern B is selected, and if the variation type counter CS2 (0 to 240) is in the range of "106 to 115", the color change pattern C is selected. Is selected, and if the variation type counter CS2 (0 to 240) is in the range of "116 to 120", the color change pattern D is selected. Further, in the case of the out-of-order super reach E, if the variation type counter CS2 (0 to 240) is in the range of "0 to 59", the color change pattern B is selected, and the variation type counter CS2 (0 to 240) is set to "0 to 240". If the range is "60 to 119", the color change pattern C is selected, and if the variation type counter CS2 (0 to 240) is in the range of "120 to 199", the color change pattern D is selected. The color change pattern A is set to be selected only in the case of a hit and not to be selected in the case of a miss, but it may be set to be selected in any case.

In this way, in the long-press color change effect, the display mode (color change pattern) is different depending on the degree of expectation that the result of the jackpot determination is a specific result (for example, the jackpot result), so that the long-press color change effect is produced. Depending on the difference in the display mode (color change patterns A to E), it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the result of the jackpot determination will be a specific result.

Since the long-press compatible effect is a long-press color change effect, the display mode of the color change image 45h is different depending on the jackpot expectation, but if the long-press compatible effect is a different display effect, a different target. The display mode may be different. For example, in the case of a long-press response effect (long-press treasure hunt effect) in which treasure boxes are opened one after another in response to a long-press operation, the higher the jackpot expectation, the greater the number of treasure boxes that can be found, and the higher the value from the treasure box. It may be something like a treasure.

Next, the color change lottery used for the above-mentioned long-press color change effect will be described with reference to FIG. 228. FIG. 228 is a color change lottery table.

When the color change pattern A shown in (a) is selected, in the color change lottery performed when the number of counts of the checkpoint passing counter is 0, "0" of the color change lottery counters (0 to 99) is used. "-44" is a hit (changes to blue), and "45-99" is off (remains white). In the color change lottery performed when the checkpoint passing counter counts once, "0 to 29" of the color change lottery counters (0 to 99) wins (changes to yellow), and "30". ~ 99 ”is off (remains blue). In the color change lottery performed when the checkpoint passing counter counts three times, "0 to 19" of the color change lottery counters (0 to 99) wins (changes to rainbow color), and " 20-99 ”is off (remains yellow).

When the color change pattern B shown in (b) is selected, in the color change lottery performed when the number of counts of the checkpoint passing counter is 0, "0" of the color change lottery counters (0 to 99) is used. "-44" is a hit (changes to blue), and "45-99" is off (remains white). In the color change lottery performed when the checkpoint passing counter counts once, "0 to 29" of the color change lottery counters (0 to 99) wins (changes to yellow), and "30". ~ 99 ”is off (remains blue).

When the color change pattern C shown in (c) is selected, in the color change lottery performed when the number of counts of the checkpoint passing counter is 0, "0" of the color change lottery counters (0 to 99) is used. "-44" is a hit (changes to blue), and "45-99" is off (remains white).

When the color change pattern D shown in (d) is selected, in the color change lottery performed when the number of counts of the checkpoint passing counter is 0, "0" of the color change lottery counters (0 to 99) is used. ~ 99 "Everything is off (remains white).

In this way, as the number of color change lottery increases, it is set so that it is difficult to select a color change to a color with a high expectation, so it is suggested to the player that the jackpot expectation increases as the color change progresses. can do.

Next, the color change display in the long press color change effect will be described with reference to FIG. 229. FIG. 229 is a graph showing a color change display for each color change pattern. FIG. 230 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of the color change of the color change patterns A to D. Here, while the player presses and holds the color change effect, the player operates the enter button 81 in a long press manner, or the checkpoint does not straddle even if the operation is interrupted. It is explained as.

When the color change lottery is performed in the color change patterns A to D, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs the color change display according to the color change graphs shown in FIGS. 229 (a) to 229 (d). (A) to (d) show the operation mode (whether the pressed state is ON or the non-pressed OFF state) at each timing. Reference numerals such as (g1) and (g2) shown together with the operation mode indicate the color change image 45h at each timing shown in FIG. 230. The display mode of the color change shown in FIGS. 230 (a) to 230 (l) corresponds to the color change pattern A1 described later, but it is also diverted to the explanation of other color change patterns at each timing. There is.

In (a), a color change pattern A that may become rainbow-colored as the final result of the long-press color change effect is shown. For convenience of explanation, the color change pattern A is divided into color change patterns A1 to A4 according to the lottery result for each color change lottery. As shown by the broken line, the color change pattern A4 is a pattern in which the white color is maintained because the result of the color change lottery is out of order at the first color change timing (checkpoint CP1 in the figure; the same applies hereinafter). Externally, the color change images 45h (g1) (g2) that change colors in the white range shown in FIGS. 230 (c) and 230 (d) are displayed until 0.3 seconds after the start of the change, and the change starts 0. The white color change image 45h (g2) is maintained from 3 seconds to the end of the change (that is, 3.0 seconds after the start of the change).

As shown by the alternate long and short dash line, the color change pattern A3 changes from white to blue because the result of the color change lottery is a hit at the first color change timing, and the second color change timing (checkpoint CP2 in the figure). This is a pattern in which the blue color is maintained because the result of the color change lottery is out of order (the same applies hereinafter). Externally, a color change image 45h (g1) (g2) that changes color in the white range is displayed until 0.3 seconds after the start of change, and from 0.3 seconds to 0.9 seconds after the start of change. Displays a color change image 45h (g3) (g4) that changes color in the blue range shown in FIGS. 230 (e) and 230 (f), and a blue color change image 45h from 0.9 seconds after the start of the change to the end of the change. (G4) is maintained.

As shown by the two-point chain line, the color change pattern A2 changes from white to blue because the result of the color change lottery is a hit at the first color change timing, and the result of the color change lottery at the second color change timing. This is a pattern in which the color changes from blue to yellow because it is a hit, and yellow is maintained because the result of the color change lottery is out of order at the third color change timing (checkpoint CP3 in the figure; the same applies hereinafter). Externally, a color change image 45h (g1) (g2) that changes color in the white range up to 0.3 seconds after the start of change is displayed, and 0.3 seconds to 0.9 seconds after the start of change. Up to, a color change image 45h (g3) (g4) that changes color in the blue range is displayed, and from 0.9 seconds to 2.1 seconds after the start of the change, the yellow color shown in FIGS. 230 (g) (h) is displayed. The color change image 45h (g5) (g6) that changes color in the range is displayed, and the yellow color change image 45h (g6) is maintained from 2.1 seconds after the start of the change to the end of the change.

As shown by the solid line, the color change pattern A1 changes from white to blue because the result of the color change lottery is a hit at the first color change timing, and the result of the color change lottery is a hit at the second color change timing. Therefore, it is a pattern that changes from blue to yellow and changes from yellow to rainbow because the result of the color change lottery is a hit at the third color change timing. Externally, a color change image 45h (g1) (g2) that changes color in the white range is displayed until 0.3 seconds after the start of change, and from 0.3 seconds to 0.9 seconds after the start of change. Is a color change image 45h (g3) (g4) that changes color in the blue range, and a color change image 45h (g5) that changes color in the yellow range from 0.9 seconds to 2.1 seconds after the start of change. ) (G6) is displayed, and the iridescent color change image 45h (g7) shown in FIG. 230 (i) is displayed from 2.1 seconds after the start of the change to the end of the change.

(B) shows a color change pattern B that may turn yellow as the final result of the long press color change effect. For convenience of explanation, the color change pattern B is divided into color change patterns B1 to B3 according to the lottery result for each color change lottery. The color change pattern B is characterized in that the time required to reach the highest point of yellow is faster than that of the color change pattern A.

As shown by the broken line, the color change pattern B3 is a pattern in which the white color is maintained because the result of the color change lottery is out of order at the first color change timing. Externally, a color change image 45h (g1) (g2) that changes color in the white range is displayed until 0.3 seconds after the start of the change, and the change ends (that is, the start of the change) 0.3 seconds after the start of the change. The white color change image 45h (g2) is maintained until 3.0 seconds). The color change pattern B3 undergoes the same color change as the color change pattern A4 shown in (a) above.

As shown by the alternate long and short dash line, the color change pattern B2 changes from white to blue because the result of the color change lottery is a hit at the first color change timing, and the result of the color change lottery at the second color change timing. It is a pattern in which the blue color is maintained because it is out of alignment. Externally, a color change image 45h (g1) (g2) that changes color in the white range is displayed until 0.3 seconds after the start of change, and from 0.3 seconds to 0.9 seconds after the start of change. Is displayed with a color change image 45h (g3) (g4) that changes color in the blue range, and the blue color change image 45h (g4) is maintained from 0.9 seconds after the start of the change to the end of the change. The color change pattern B2 undergoes the same color change as the color change pattern A3 shown in (a) above.

As shown by the two-point chain line, the color change pattern B1 changes from white to blue because the result of the color change lottery is a hit at the first color change timing, and the result of the color change lottery at the second color change timing. It is a pattern in which the color changes from blue to yellow because it is a hit, and yellow is maintained because the result of the color change lottery is out of order at the third color change timing. Externally, a color change image 45h (g1) (g2) that changes color in the white range is displayed until 0.3 seconds after the start of change, and from 0.3 seconds to 0.9 seconds after the start of change. Is a color change image 45h (g3) (g4) that changes color in the blue range, and a color change image 45h (g5) that changes color in the yellow range from 0.9 seconds to 1.8 seconds after the start of the change. ) (G6) is displayed, and the yellow color change image 45h (g6) is maintained from 1.8 seconds after the start of the change to the end of the change. As described above, the color change pattern B1 is characterized in that the time required to reach the highest point of yellow is 0.3 seconds earlier than that of the color change pattern A2 shown in (a) above.

(C) shows a color change pattern C that may turn blue as the final result of the long press color change effect. For convenience of explanation, the color change pattern C is divided into color change patterns C1 and C2 according to the lottery result for each color change lottery. As shown by the broken line, the color change pattern C2 is a pattern in which the white color is maintained because the result of the color change lottery is out of order at the first color change timing. Externally, a color change image 45h (g1) (g2) that changes color in the white range is displayed until 0.3 seconds after the start of the change, and the change ends (that is, the start of the change) 0.3 seconds after the start of the change. The white color change image 45h (g2) is maintained until 3.0 seconds). The color change pattern C2 undergoes the same color change as the color change patterns A4 and B3 shown in the above-mentioned (a).

As shown by the alternate long and short dash line, the color change pattern C1 changes from white to blue because the result of the color change lottery is a hit at the first color change timing, and the result of the color change lottery at the second color change timing. It is a pattern in which the blue color is maintained because it is out of alignment. Externally, a color change image 45h (g1) (g2) that changes color in the white range is displayed until 0.3 seconds after the start of change, and from 0.3 seconds to 0.9 seconds after the start of change. Is displayed with a color change image 45h (g3) (g4) that changes color in the blue range, and the blue color change image 45h (g4) is maintained from 0.9 seconds after the start of the change to the end of the change. The color change pattern C1 undergoes the same color change as the color change patterns A3 and B2 shown in the above-mentioned (a).

In (d), the color change pattern D which remains white as the final result of the long press color change effect is shown. As shown by the broken line, the color change pattern D is a pattern in which the white color is maintained because the result of the color change lottery is out of order at the first color change timing. Externally, a color change image 45h (g1) (g2) that changes color in the white range is displayed until 0.3 seconds after the start of the change, and the change ends (that is, the start of the change) 0.3 seconds after the start of the change. The white color change image 45h (g2) is maintained until 3.0 seconds). The color change pattern D undergoes the same color change as the color change pattern A4 shown in (a) and the color change pattern B3 shown in (b) and the color change pattern C2 shown in (c).

As described above, it is difficult to distinguish which of the change patterns A4, B3, C2, and D is because the color change image 45h is only white. In each of the change patterns A3, B2, and C1, the color change image 45h has only one color change (up to blue), so that the player has a higher expectation of a big hit than the change patterns A4, B3, C2, and D. I understand. Since the color change image 45h changes color twice (up to yellow) in each of the change patterns A2 and B1, it can be seen that the jackpot expectation is higher than that of the change patterns A3, B2 and C1. Since the change pattern A1 is a big hit, the player's expectation can be maximized.

Next, the color change when an operation different from the operation of the long press mode is performed on the decision button 81 in the long press color change effect will be described. FIG. 231 is a graph showing the color change for each color change pattern when an operation different from the operation of the long press mode is performed.

Here, as an operation different from the operation of the long press mode, for example, the player repeats an operation of pressing and holding the decision button 81 and an operation of releasing the hand from the decision button 81 at intervals of 0.3 seconds. Suppose you went. The first 0.1 seconds from the start of the operation is spent on determining whether or not the operation is in the long press mode.

The long-press color change effect is an operation different from the long-press mode (for example, an operation of releasing the hand from the decision button 81 or pressing the decision button 81 again) after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in the long-press mode. Is set so that the jackpot expectation is suggested by the difference in the display mode of the long press color change effect. That is, in the long-press color change effect, after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in the long-press mode, the player does not detect the operation of the decision button 81 by an operation different from the long-press mode at the determination timing. Therefore, when the player detects the operation of the decision button 81 after the determination timing, the display mode is different, so that the jackpot expectation degree is suggested. Hereinafter, this point will be described in detail.

In (a), the color change pattern A is selected. After 0.1 seconds from the start of the operation, the color change is started based on the determination that the operation is in the long press mode. Until 0.3 seconds after the start of the change, the color change is performed within the white range. The color change image 45h 0.3 seconds after the start of this change is shown in FIG. 232 (a1) described later. After 0.3 seconds from the start of the change, the player releases the decision button 81 as an operation different from the long press mode. When the first checkpoint is reached, the color change is interrupted because the hand is released from the enter button 81 by an operation different from the long press mode. Specifically, the color change is returned from the white current position to the white starting point 0.4 seconds after the start of the change. The color change image 45h 0.4 seconds after the start of this change is shown in FIG. 232 (a2) described later.

The player resumes the operation of the enter button 81 0.5 seconds after the start of the change (second long press). 0.6 seconds after the start of the change, the color change is restarted from the beginning based on the determination that the operation is in the long press mode. From 0.6 seconds after the start of the change to 0.9 seconds after the start of the change, the color change is performed within the white range. The color change image 45h 0.9 seconds after the start of this change is shown in FIG. 232 (a3) described later. After 0.9 seconds from the start of the change, the player releases the decision button 81 again as an operation different from the long press mode. When the first checkpoint for the second time is reached, the color change is interrupted because the hand is released from the decision button 81 by an operation different from the long press mode. Specifically, the color change is returned from the white current position to the white starting point 1.0 second after the start of the change. The color change image 45h 1.0 second after the start of this change is shown in FIG. 232 (a4) described later.

The player resumes the operation of the enter button 81 1.1 seconds after the start of the change (third long press). However, 1.2 seconds after the start of the change, the color change is not restarted even if it is determined that the operation is in the long press mode. That is, if the restart time is the timing at which the change cannot be executed up to the highest level of the color change pattern A (rainbow color which is the highest color of the color change pattern A1), the color change is not restarted. The color change image 45h 1.2 seconds after the start of this change is shown in FIG. 232 (a5) described later. Further, the color change image 45h 1.5 seconds after the start of the change is shown in FIG. 232 (a6) described later.

The player resumes the operation of the enter button 81 1.7 seconds after the start of the change (fourth long press). However, 1.8 seconds after the start of the change, the color change is not restarted even if it is determined that the operation is in the long press mode. The color change image 45h 1.8 seconds after the start of this change is shown in FIG. 232 (a7) described later. Further, the color change image 45h 2.1 seconds after the start of the change is shown in FIG. 232 (a8) described later.

The player resumes the operation of the enter button 81 2.3 seconds after the start of the change (fifth long press). However, after 2.4 seconds from the start of the change, the color change is not restarted even if it is determined that the operation is in the long press mode. The color change image 45h 2.4 seconds after the start of this change is shown in (a9) of ZC8 described later. Further, the color change image 45h 2.7 seconds after the start of the change is shown in (a10) of ZC8 described later.

As described above, when the color change pattern A having the highest jackpot expectation is selected, the operation of pressing and holding the enter button 81 and the operation of releasing the enter button 81 are different from the long press mode. When the operation is repeated at intervals of 0.3 seconds, the color change image 45h changes color in the white range according to the long press of the enter button 81 in the first long press and the second long press. However, in the third to fifth long presses, the color change of the color change image 45h is not performed even if the enter button 81 is long pressed.

In (b), the color change pattern B is selected. After 0.1 seconds from the start of the operation, the color change is started based on the determination that the operation is in the long press mode. Until 0.3 seconds after the start of the change, the color change is performed within the white range. The color change image 45h 0.3 seconds after the start of this change is shown in FIG. 233 (b1) described later. After 0.3 seconds from the start of the change, the player releases the decision button 81 as an operation different from the long press mode. When the first checkpoint is reached, the color change is interrupted because the hand is released from the enter button 81 by an operation different from the long press mode. Specifically, the color change is returned from the white current position to the white starting point 0.4 seconds after the start of the change. The color change image 45h 0.4 seconds after the start of this change is shown in FIG. 233 (b2) described later.

The player resumes the operation of the enter button 81 0.5 seconds after the start of the change (second long press). 0.6 seconds after the start of the change, the color change is restarted from the beginning based on the determination that the operation is in the long press mode. From 0.6 seconds after the start of the change to 0.9 seconds after the start of the change, the color change is performed within the white range. The color change image 45h 0.9 seconds after the start of this change is shown in FIG. 233 (b3) described later. After 0.9 seconds from the start of the change, the player releases the decision button 81 again as an operation different from the long press mode. When the first checkpoint for the second time is reached, the color change is interrupted because the hand is released from the decision button 81 by an operation different from the long press mode. Specifically, the color change is returned from the white current position to the white starting point 1.0 second after the start of the change. The color change image 45h 1.0 second after the start of this change is shown in FIG. 233 (b4) described later.

The player resumes the operation of the enter button 81 1.1 seconds after the start of the change (third long press). 1.2 seconds after the start of the change, the color change is restarted from the beginning based on the determination that the operation is in the long press mode. From 1.2 seconds after the start of the change to 1.5 seconds after the start of the change, the color change is performed within the white range. The color change image 45h 1.5 seconds after the start of this change is shown in FIG. 233 (b5) described later. The player releases the decision button 81 again 1.5 seconds after the start of the change, as an operation different from the long press mode. When the first checkpoint for the third time is reached, the color change is interrupted because the hand is released from the enter button 81 by an operation different from the long press mode. Specifically, the color change is returned from the white current position to the white starting point 1.6 seconds after the start of the change. The color change image 45h 1.6 seconds after the start of this change is shown in FIG. 233 (b6) described later.

The player resumes the operation of the enter button 81 1.7 seconds after the start of the change (fourth long press). However, 1.8 seconds after the start of the change, the color change is not restarted even if it is determined that the operation is in the long press mode. That is, if the restart time is the timing at which the change cannot be executed up to the highest level of the color change pattern B (yellow, which is the highest color of the color change pattern B1), the color change is not restarted. The color change image 45h 1.8 seconds after the start of this change is shown in FIG. 233 (b7) described later. Further, the color change image 45h 2.1 seconds after the start of the change is shown in FIG. 233 (b8) described later.

The player resumes the operation of the enter button 81 2.3 seconds after the start of the change (fifth long press). However, after 2.4 seconds from the start of the change, the color change is not restarted even if it is determined that the operation is in the long press mode. The color change image 45h 2.4 seconds after the start of this change is shown in FIG. 233 (b9) described later. Further, the color change image 45h 2.7 seconds after the start of the change is shown in FIG. 233 (b10) described later.

In this way, when the color change pattern B having the next highest expectation of jackpot after the color change pattern A is selected, the operation of pressing and holding the enter button 81 and the enter button are different from the long press mode. When the operation of releasing the hand from 81 is repeated at intervals of 0.3 seconds, the color change image 45h is displayed according to the long press of the enter button 81 from the first long press to the third long press. The color changes in the white range, but in the fourth and fifth long presses, the color change of the color change image 45h does not occur even if the enter button 81 is pressed and held. From this, as an operation different from the long press mode, when the operation of pressing and holding the enter button 81 and the operation of releasing the enter button 81 are repeated at intervals of 0.3 seconds, the operation is repeated twice. If the color change is performed in the white range, it is understood that the color change pattern A is not obtained.

In (c), the color change pattern C is selected. After 0.1 seconds from the start of the operation, the color change is started based on the determination that the operation is in the long press mode. Until 0.3 seconds after the start of the change, the color change is performed within the white range. The color change image 45h 0.3 seconds after the start of this change is shown in FIG. 234 (c1) described later. After 0.3 seconds from the start of the change, the player releases the decision button 81 as an operation different from the long press mode. When the first checkpoint is reached, the color change is interrupted because the hand is released from the enter button 81 by an operation different from the long press mode. Specifically, the color change is returned from the white current position to the white starting point 0.4 seconds after the start of the change. The color change image 45h 0.4 seconds after the start of this change is shown in FIG. 234 (c2) described later.

The player resumes the operation of the enter button 81 0.5 seconds after the start of the change (second long press). 0.6 seconds after the start of the change, the color change is restarted from the beginning based on the determination that the operation is in the long press mode. From 0.6 seconds after the start of the change to 0.9 seconds after the start of the change, the color change is performed within the white range. The color change image 45h 0.3 seconds after the start of this change is shown in FIG. 234 (c3) described later. After 0.9 seconds from the start of the change, the player releases the decision button 81 again as an operation different from the long press mode. When the first checkpoint for the second time is reached, the color change is interrupted because the hand is released from the decision button 81 by an operation different from the long press mode. Specifically, the color change is returned from the white current position to the white starting point 1.0 second after the start of the change. The color change image 45h 1.0 second after the start of this change is shown in FIG. 234 (c4) described later.

The player resumes the operation of the enter button 81 1.1 seconds after the start of the change (third long press). 1.2 seconds after the start of the change, the color change is restarted from the beginning based on the determination that the operation is in the long press mode. From 1.2 seconds after the start of the change to 1.5 seconds after the start of the change, the color change is performed within the white range. The color change image 45h 1.5 seconds after the start of this change is shown in FIG. 234 (c5) described later. The player releases the decision button 81 again 1.5 seconds after the start of the change, as an operation different from the long press mode. When the first checkpoint for the third time is reached, the color change is interrupted because the hand is released from the decision button 81 by an operation different from the long press mode. Specifically, the color change is returned from the white current position to the white starting point 1.6 seconds after the start of the change. The color change image 45h 1.6 seconds after the start of this change is shown in FIG. 234 (c6) described later.

The player resumes the operation of the enter button 81 1.7 seconds after the start of the change (fourth long press). 1.8 seconds after the start of the change, the color change is restarted from the beginning based on the determination that the operation is in the long press mode. From 1.8 seconds after the start of the change to 2.1 seconds after the start of the change, the color change is performed within the white range. The color change image 45h 2.1 seconds after the start of this change is shown in FIG. 234 (c7) described later. After 2.0 seconds from the start of the change, the player releases the decision button 81 again as an operation different from the long press mode. When the first checkpoint for the fourth time is reached, the color change is interrupted because the hand is released from the decision button 81 by an operation different from the long press mode. Specifically, the color change is returned from the white current position to the white starting point 2.2 seconds after the start of the change. The color change image 45h after 2.2 seconds from the start of this change is shown in FIG. 234 (c8) described later.

The player resumes the operation of the enter button 81 2.3 seconds after the start of the change (fifth long press). However, after 2.4 seconds from the start of the change, the color change is not restarted even if it is determined that the operation is in the long press mode. That is, if the restart time is the timing at which the change cannot be executed up to the highest level of the color change pattern C (blue, which is the highest color of the color change pattern C1), the color change is not restarted. The color change image 45h 2.4 seconds after the start of this change is shown in FIG. 234 (c9) described later. Further, the color change image 45h 2.7 seconds after the start of the change is shown in FIG. 234 (c10) described later.

In this way, when the color change pattern C having the next highest expectation of jackpot after the color change pattern B is selected, the operation of pressing and holding the enter button 81 and the enter button are different from the long press mode. When the operation of releasing the hand from 81 is repeated at intervals of 0.3 seconds, the color change image 45h is displayed according to the long press of the enter button 81 from the first long press to the fourth long press. The color changes in the white range, but in the fifth long press, the color change of the color change image 45h does not occur even if the enter button 81 is pressed and held. From this, as an operation different from the long press mode, when the operation of pressing and holding the enter button 81 and the operation of releasing the enter button 81 are repeated at intervals of 0.3 seconds, the operation is repeated four times. If the color change is performed in the white range, it can be seen that the color change patterns A and B are not (the jackpot expectation is lower than when the color change patterns A and B appear).

In (d), the color change pattern D is selected. After 0.1 seconds from the start of the operation, the color change is started based on the determination that the operation is in the long press mode. Until 0.3 seconds after the start of the change, the color change is performed within the white range. The color change image 45h 0.3 seconds after the start of this change is shown in FIG. 235 (d1) described later. After 0.3 seconds from the start of the change, the player releases the decision button 81 as an operation different from the long press mode. When the first checkpoint is reached, the color change is interrupted because the hand is released from the enter button 81 by an operation different from the long press mode. Specifically, the color change is returned from the white current position to the white starting point 0.4 seconds after the start of the change. The color change image 45h 0.4 seconds after the start of this change is shown in FIG. 235 (d2) described later.

The player resumes the operation of the enter button 81 0.5 seconds after the start of the change (second long press). 0.6 seconds after the start of the change, the color change is restarted from the beginning based on the determination that the operation is in the long press mode. From 0.6 seconds after the start of the change to 0.9 seconds after the start of the change, the color change is performed within the white range. The color change image 45h 0.3 seconds after the start of this change is shown in FIG. 235 (d3) described later. After 0.9 seconds from the start of the change, the player releases the decision button 81 again as an operation different from the long press mode. When the first checkpoint for the second time is reached, the color change is interrupted because the hand is released from the decision button 81 by an operation different from the long press mode. Specifically, the color change is returned from the white current position to the white starting point 1.0 second after the start of the change. The color change image 45h 1.0 second after the start of this change is shown in FIG. 235 (d4) described later.

The player resumes the operation of the enter button 81 1.1 seconds after the start of the change (third long press). 1.2 seconds after the start of the change, the color change is restarted from the beginning based on the determination that the operation is in the long press mode. From 1.2 seconds after the start of the change to 1.5 seconds after the start of the change, the color change is performed within the white range. The color change image 45h 1.5 seconds after the start of this change is shown in FIG. 235 (d5) described later. The player releases the decision button 81 again 1.5 seconds after the start of the change, as an operation different from the long press mode. When the first checkpoint for the third time is reached, the color change is interrupted because the hand is released from the decision button 81 by an operation different from the long press mode. Specifically, the color change is returned from the white current position to the white starting point 1.6 seconds after the start of the change. The color change image 45h 1.6 seconds after the start of this change is shown in FIG. 235 (d6) described later.

The player resumes the operation of the enter button 81 1.7 seconds after the start of the change (fourth long press). 1.8 seconds after the start of the change, the color change is restarted from the beginning based on the determination that the operation is in the long press mode. From 1.8 seconds after the start of the change to 2.1 seconds after the start of the change, the color change is performed within the white range. The color change image 45h 2.1 seconds after the start of this change is shown in FIG. 235 (d7) described later. The player releases the decision button 81 again 2.1 seconds after the start of the change, as an operation different from the long press mode. When the first checkpoint for the fourth time is reached, the color change is interrupted because the hand is released from the decision button 81 by an operation different from the long press mode. Specifically, the color change is returned from the white current position to the white starting point 2.2 seconds after the start of the change. The color change image 45h after 2.2 seconds from the start of this change is shown in FIG. 235 (d8) described later.

The player resumes the operation of the enter button 81 2.3 seconds after the start of the change (fifth long press). After 2.4 seconds from the start of the change, the color change is restarted from the beginning based on the determination that the operation is in the long press mode. From 2.4 seconds after the start of the change to 2.7 seconds after the start of the change, the color change is performed within the white range. The color change image 45h 2.7 seconds after the start of this change is shown in FIG. 235 (d9) described later. After 2.7 seconds from the start of the change, the player releases the decision button 81 again as an operation different from the long press mode. When the first checkpoint for the fifth time is reached, the color change is interrupted because the hand is released from the decision button 81 by an operation different from the long press mode. Specifically, the color change is returned from the white current position to the white starting point 2.8 seconds after the start of the change. The color change image 45h after 2.8 seconds from the start of this change is shown in FIG. 235 (d10) described later.

As described above, when the color change pattern D having the lowest jackpot expectation is selected, the operation of pressing and holding the enter button 81 and the operation of releasing the enter button 81 are different from the long press mode. When the operation is repeated at intervals of 0.3 seconds, the color of the image 45h changes in the white range according to the long press of the enter button 81 from the first long press to the fifth long press. It has the characteristic of doing. From this, as an operation different from the long press mode, when the operation of pressing and holding the enter button 81 and the operation of releasing the enter button 81 are repeated at intervals of 0.3 seconds, all five times are performed. If the color change is repeatedly performed in the white range, it can be seen that the color change patterns are not A, B, and C (the jackpot expectation is low).

As described above, in the long-press color change effect, after the operation of the enter button 81 is performed in the long-press mode during the execution of the color change patterns A to D, an operation different from the long-press mode (for example, from the enter button 81). When the operation of releasing the hand or pressing the enter button 81 again) is performed, the jackpot expectation can be suggested by the difference in the display mode of the long press color change effect. Specifically, the long-press color change effect is determined when the player does not detect the operation of the determination button 81 at the determination timing after the operation of the determination button 81 is performed in the long-press mode. When the player detects the operation of the determination button 81 after the timing, the jackpot expectation can be suggested by the difference in the display mode of the long press color change effect. As a result, during the long-press color change effect, as an operation different from the operation of the long-press mode, for example, another operation such as releasing the hand from the enter button 81 or pressing the enter button 81 again is performed to obtain a jackpot expectation. The fun of being given suggestions arises.

Next, a display mode of the long press color change effect for each color change pattern will be described. FIG. 232 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of a long-pressed color change effect of the color change pattern A. FIG. 233 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of the long press color change effect of the color change pattern B. FIG. 234 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of a long-pressed color change effect of the color change pattern C. FIG. 235 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of a long-pressed color change effect of the color change pattern D.

That is, in the long-press color change effect, after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in the long-press mode, an operation different from the long-press mode (for example, the decision button 81 is released or the decision button 81 is pressed again). When the operation) is performed, the predetermined condition (big hit expectation) obtained as a result of the big hit determination is suggested by the difference in the display mode of the long press color change effect. Specifically, the long-press color change effect is determined when the player does not detect the operation of the determination button 81 at the determination timing after the operation of the determination button 81 is performed in the long-press mode. When the operation of the decision button 81 is detected by the player after the timing, whether or not the specific notification (display of the specific notification image 45i described later) is executed differs. This point will be described in detail below.

As shown in FIG. 232, when the color change pattern A is selected, the player presses and holds the enter button 81 for a long time and releases the enter button 81 as operations different from the long press mode. It is assumed that the operation of repeating the above steps is performed, and the color is changed in the white range by the first and second long presses. That is, as an operation different from the long press mode, an image that changes color in the white range shown in (a1) is displayed during the first long press period, and during the period when the hand is released from the first enter button 81. The undo image shown in (a2) is displayed. As an operation different from the long press mode, an image that changes color in the white range shown in (a3) is displayed during the second long press period, and (a4) during the period when the hand is released from the second enter button 81. The undo image shown in) is displayed.

Further, during the third to fifth long press period, the specific notification image 45i indicating that the color change is not performed is displayed three times. That is, as an operation different from the long press mode, the specific notification image 45i shown in (a5) "I can't go up anymore!" Is displayed during the third long press period, and the hand is released from the third decision button 81. During this period, the original image shown in (a6) is displayed. As an operation different from the long-press mode, the specific notification image 45i shown in (a7) "I can't go up anymore!" Is displayed during the fourth long-press period, and the period when the hand is released from the fourth decision button 81. The original image shown in (a8) is displayed in. As an operation different from the long-press mode, the specific notification image 45i shown in (a9) "I can't go up anymore!" Is displayed during the fifth long-press period, and the period when the hand is released from the fifth decision button 81. The original image shown in (a10) is displayed in.

As described above, when the operation of pressing and holding the enter button 81 and the operation of releasing the enter button 81 are repeated as an operation different from the long press mode, the operation is white at the beginning of the long press color change effect. If the specific notification image 45i is displayed instead of the color change being performed in the range of, but the color change is not performed from the middle stage to the final stage, it means that the color change pattern A has the highest expectation of big hit. I understand.

As shown in FIG. 233, when the color change pattern B is selected, the player presses and holds the enter button 81 for a long time and releases the enter button 81 as operations different from the long press mode. Assuming that the operation of repeating the above is performed at intervals of 0.3 seconds, the color change is performed in the white range by the first to third long presses, as in the case where the color change pattern A is selected. That is, as an operation different from the long press mode, an image that changes color in the white range shown in (b1) is displayed during the first long press period, and during the period when the hand is released from the first enter button 81. The undo image shown in (b2) is displayed. Further, as an operation different from the long press mode, an image that changes color in the white range shown in (b3) is displayed during the second long press period, and during the period when the hand is released from the second enter button 81. The undo image shown in (b4) is displayed. Further, as an operation different from the long press mode, an image that changes color in the white range shown in (b5) is displayed during the third long press period, and during the period when the hand is released from the third enter button 81. The undo image shown in (b6) is displayed.

Further, in the fourth and fifth long press periods, the specific notification image 45i is displayed twice. That is, as an operation different from the long-press mode, the specific notification image 45i shown in (b7) "I can't go up anymore!" Is displayed during the fourth long-press period, and the hand is released from the fourth decision button 81. During this period, the original image shown in (b8) is displayed. As an operation different from the long-press mode, the specific notification image 45i shown in (b9) "I can't go up anymore!" Is displayed during the fifth long-press period, and the period when the hand is released from the fifth decision button 81. The original image shown in (b10) is displayed in. In this way, the color does not change during the 4th and 5th long press periods, and the character image "I can't go up anymore!" Is displayed twice.

As described above, when the operation of pressing and holding the enter button 81 and the operation of releasing the enter button 81 are repeated as an operation different from the long press mode, the operation up to the middle of the long press color change effect is performed. If the color change is performed in the white range, but the color change is not performed at the end stage and the specific notification image 45i is displayed, it means that the color change pattern B has the second highest expectation of jackpot. I understand.

As shown in FIG. 234, when the color change pattern C is selected, the player presses and holds the enter button 81 for a long time and releases the enter button 81 as operations different from the long press mode. Assuming that the above is repeated at intervals of 0.3 seconds, the color changes in the white range with the first to fourth long presses. That is, as an operation different from the long press mode, an image that changes color in the white range shown in (c1) is displayed during the first long press period, and during the period when the hand is released from the first enter button 81. The undo image shown in (c2) is displayed. As an operation different from the long press mode, an image that changes color in the white range shown in (c3) is displayed during the second long press period, and (c4) during the period when the hand is released from the second enter button 81. The undo image shown in) is displayed. As an operation different from the long press mode, an image that changes color in the white range shown in (c5) is displayed during the third long press period, and (c6) during the period when the hand is released from the third enter button 81. The undo image shown in) is displayed. As an operation different from the long press mode, an image that changes color in the white range shown in (c7) is displayed during the fourth long press period, and (c8) during the period when the hand is released from the fourth enter button 81. The undo image shown in) is displayed.

Further, the color change is not performed by the fifth long press, and the specific notification image 45i is displayed once. That is, as an operation different from the long-press mode, the specific notification image 45i shown in (c9) "I can't go up anymore!" Is displayed during the fifth long-press period, and the hand is released from the fifth decision button 81. The original image shown in (c10) is displayed during this period.

In this way, when the operation of pressing and holding the enter button 81 and the operation of releasing the enter button 81 are repeated as an operation different from the long press mode, until the end of the long press color change effect. If the specific notification image 45i is displayed instead of the color change being performed in the white range but not being performed at the end, it means that the color change pattern C has the third highest expectation of jackpot. I understand. Further, in the color change pattern C, the number of times that the specific notification image 45i "I can't go up anymore!" Is displayed is smaller than that in the color change pattern A and the color change pattern B. Therefore, the player repeats the operation of pressing and holding the decision button 81 and the operation of releasing the decision button 81 as an operation different from the operation of the long press mode during the period of the long press color change effect. If you do, you will notice that the more times the specific notification image 45i that says "I can't go up anymore!" Is displayed, the higher the expectation of a big hit. As a result, during the long-press color change effect, it is interesting that the operation of releasing the hand from the enter button 81 is repeated as an operation different from the operation of the long-press mode, and the suggestion of the jackpot expectation is given. ..

As shown in FIG. 235, when the color change pattern D is selected, the player presses and holds the enter button 81 for a long time and releases the enter button 81 as operations different from the long press mode. Assuming that the operation of repeating the above is performed at intervals of 0.3 seconds, the color is changed in the white range by pressing and holding all the first to fifth times. That is, as an operation different from the long press mode, an image that changes color in the white range shown in (d1) is displayed during the first long press period, and during the period when the hand is released from the first enter button 81. The undo image shown in (d2) is displayed. As an operation different from the long press mode, an image that changes color in the white range shown in (d3) is displayed during the second long press period, and (d4) during the period when the hand is released from the second enter button 81. The undo image shown in) is displayed. As an operation different from the long press mode, an image that changes color in the white range shown in (d5) is displayed during the third long press period, and (d6) during the period when the hand is released from the third enter button 81. The undo image shown in) is displayed. As an operation different from the long press mode, an image that changes color in the white range shown in (d7) is displayed during the fourth long press period, and (d8) during the period when the hand is released from the fourth enter button 81. The undo image shown in) is displayed. As an operation different from the long press mode, an image that changes color in the white range shown in (d9) is displayed during the fifth long press period, and (d10) during the period when the hand is released from the fifth enter button 81. The undo image shown in) is displayed.

That is, in the color change pattern D, unlike the color change pattern A to the color change pattern C, the specific notification image 45i "I can't go up anymore!" Is not displayed. Therefore, the player repeats the operation of pressing and holding the decision button 81 and the operation of releasing the decision button 81 as an operation different from the operation of the long press mode during the period of the long press color change effect. If the specific notification image 45i saying "I can't go up anymore!" Is not displayed, I notice that the expectation of the big hit is low. As a result, during the long-press color change effect, as an operation different from the operation of the long-press mode, the operation of pressing and holding the enter button 81 and the operation of releasing the enter button 81 are repeated to expect a big hit. The fun of being given a suggestion of degree arises.

As described above, in the long-press color change effect, after the operation of the enter button 81 is performed in the long-press mode during the execution of the color change patterns A to D, an operation different from the long-press mode (for example, from the enter button 81). When the operation of releasing the hand or pressing the enter button 81 again) is performed, the degree of expectation of a big hit can be suggested by the difference in the display mode of the long press color change effect. Specifically, the long-press color change effect is determined when the player does not detect the operation of the determination button 81 at the determination timing after the operation of the determination button 81 is performed in the long-press mode. When the player detects the operation of the determination button 81 after the timing, the jackpot expectation can be suggested by the difference in the display mode between the color change image 45h and the specific notification image 45i. As a result, during the long-press color change effect, as an operation different from the operation of the long-press mode, for example, an operation of long-pressing the enter button 81 and an operation of releasing the hand from the enter button 81 are repeated to make a big hit. It is interesting that the suggestion of the degree of expectation is given.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 54th embodiment, the decision button 81 that receives the operation by the player, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that performs the main control regarding the game, and the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 make a big hit. Based on the result of the determination, the third symbol display device 42 is provided with an effect execution function by the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 to execute a predetermined display effect, and the above-mentioned effect execution function enables the operation of the decision button 81. When the operation of the enter button 81 is performed in the long press mode within the valid period to be performed, the long press corresponding effect (for example, the long press color change effect) is executed during the predetermined display effect, and the enter button is executed. Within the period in which the presence or absence of the operation in the long press mode of 81 is determined (for example, the period from the start of the long press color change effect to the maximum execution time of the long press color change effect of 6.00 seconds), the long press mode is used. Even if it is determined that there is no operation, the execution of the long press color change effect is continued.

As a result, even if the operation of the decision button 81 in the long press mode is interrupted after the long press color change effect is started, the operation in the long press mode is determined within the period in which the presence or absence of the operation in the long press mode is determined. When the operation is resumed, the execution of the long-press color change effect is continued, so it is necessary to restart the operation of the enter button 81 from the beginning and wait for the time until the long-press color change effect is in the state before the interruption. do not have. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the fun of the long-pressed color change effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P1-0) above, for example.

Further, the above-mentioned effect execution function includes an operation detection function capable of detecting the operation of the determination button 81 by the player at predetermined intervals (for example, 0.01 second intervals) within the valid period, and a long press of the operation of the determination button 81. When performed in the embodiment, the player operates the determination button 81 at a determination timing (for example, the first to third color change timings in each color change pattern) provided at specific intervals longer than a predetermined interval. Based on the presence or absence of detection of, it is determined whether or not to continue the execution of the long press color change effect. As a result, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted after the long-press color change effect is started, if the player's operation of the decision button 81 is resumed by the determination timing, the long-press color change effect is produced. Since the execution is continued, it is not necessary to restart the operation of the enter button 81 from the beginning and wait for the time until the long-pressed color change effect is in the state before the interruption. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the fun of the long-pressed color change effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P1-1) above, for example.

Further, in the above-mentioned effect execution function, an operation of releasing the hand from the decision button 81 is performed as an operation different from the operation in the long press mode within the period in which the presence or absence of the operation in the long press mode of the decision button 81 is determined. Even if it is pressed, the execution of the long press color change effect is continued. As a result, even if the operation of releasing the enter button 81 is performed as an operation different from the operation in the long press mode after the long press color change effect is started, the execution of the long press color change effect is continued. Therefore, it is not necessary to restart the operation of the operation means from the beginning even if the operation is different from the operation in the long press mode. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the fun of the long-pressed color change effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P2-0) above, for example.

Further, in the above-mentioned long press response effect, after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in the long press mode, an operation different from the long press mode (for example, the decision button 81 is released or the decision button 81 is pressed again). As a result of the jackpot determination, due to the difference in the display mode of the long press response effect (for example, the higher the jackpot expectation is, the less the number of color changes occurs in the color change patterns A to D). The obtained predetermined conditions (for example, jackpot expectation) are suggested. For example, in the color change patterns A to D, the higher the number of restarts of the color change due to different operations, the lower the expectation of a big hit. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the long-press compatible effect by the difference in the display mode of the long-press compatible effect according to the predetermined condition obtained as a result of the jackpot determination. Further, during the long press response effect, as an operation different from the operation of the long press mode, for example, an operation of releasing the hand from the decision button 81 or pressing the decision button 81 again was performed, and the result of the jackpot determination was obtained. It is interesting that the suggestion of a predetermined condition is given. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P2-0B) above, for example.

The above-mentioned effect execution function depends on a predetermined condition obtained as a result of the jackpot determination (for example, whether the jackpot is a jackpot or a deviation obtained from the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, or the type of the fluctuation pattern obtained from the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2). The display mode (for example, color change patterns A, B, C, D) of the effect corresponding to long press is changed. For example, in the case of the color change pattern A, the color change is performed up to 3 times, in the case of the color change pattern B, the color change is performed up to 2 times, and in the case of the color change pattern C, the color change is performed up to 1 time. The change is performed, and if the color change pattern D is used, the color change is not performed. As a result, the fun of the long-pressed color change effect can be suitably improved by the difference in the display mode of the long-press color change effect according to the predetermined condition obtained as a result of the jackpot determination. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P2-1) above, for example.

In the above-mentioned long-press color change effect, after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in the long-press mode, an operation different from the long-press mode (for example, the decision button 81 is released or the decision button 81 is pressed again). When the operation) is performed, the predetermined condition (big hit expectation) obtained as a result of the big hit determination is suggested by the difference in the display mode of the long press color change effect. As a result, during the long-press color change effect, as an operation different from the operation of the long-press mode, for example, an operation of releasing the hand from the enter button 81 or pressing the enter button 81 again is performed to suggest a jackpot expectation. The fun of being given arises. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P2-2) above, for example.

Further, the above-mentioned long-press color change effect has a different display mode when the player does not detect the operation of the decision button 81 at the determination timing after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in the long-press mode. .. For example, in the case of the color change patterns A and B, there is no detection of the operation of the decision button 81 by the player, and the decision button by the player is made after the determination timing (for example, 1.2 seconds after the start of the change). When the operation of 81 is detected (re-detected), an image suggesting or notifying that the color change is not restarted (for example, a character image saying "I can't go up anymore!") Is displayed. In the case of the color change pattern C, for example, if the player re-detects the operation of the decision button 81 after 2.4 seconds after the start of the change, an image suggesting or notifying that the color change is not restarted is displayed. To. In the case of the color change pattern D, even if the player re-detects the operation of the decision button 81, the color change is not performed in the first place, so that it is suggested or notified that the color change is not restarted. The image is not displayed. As a result, when the operation of the enter button 81 is canceled after the long-press color change effect is started, the fun of the long-press color change effect is suitably improved by the difference in the display mode after the release. Can be done. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P2-3) above, for example.

Further, the above-mentioned long-press color change effect is a case where the player does not detect the operation of the determination button 81 at the determination timing after the operation of the determination button 81 is performed in the long-press mode, and the determination timing Later, when the player detects the operation of the decision button 81, the presence or absence of execution of the specific notification (for example, the specific notification image 45i composed of the characters "I can't go up anymore!") Is different. For example, in the case of the color change patterns A to C, when the player re-detects the operation of the decision button 81 and the restart time is the timing at which the change cannot be executed to the highest level of the color change pattern, it is specified. The broadcast image 45i is displayed, but if the color change pattern D is used, the color change is not performed in the first place, so that the specific broadcast image 45i is not displayed. As a result, after the long-press color change effect is started, the operation of the enter button 81 is canceled, but when the operation is resumed after that, the interest of the long-press color change effect depends on whether or not the specific notification is executed. The property can be suitably improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P2-6) above, for example.

Further, the above-mentioned predetermined condition is the degree of expectation that the result of the jackpot determination will be a specific result (for example, a jackpot result). For example, as for the degree of expectation of a big hit result, the color change pattern A selected only when the big hit result is obtained is the highest, and when the big hit result is obtained, the color change pattern B which is easier to be selected than the color change patterns C and D is 2. The color change pattern C, which is the third highest and is easier to be selected than the color change pattern D when the jackpot result is obtained, is the third highest, and the color change pattern D which is the most difficult to be selected is the lowest when the jackpot result is obtained. As a result, the degree of expectation that the result of the jackpot determination will be a specific result is suggested by the difference in the display mode of the long press color change effect, so that the interest of the long press color change effect can be suitably improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P2-8) above, for example.

Further, the above-mentioned predetermined condition is a change pattern of the display mode of the long-pressed color change effect determined according to the degree of expectation. As a result, the difference in the display mode of the long-pressed color change effect suggests the degree of expectation that the result of the jackpot determination will be a specific result, so that the interest of the long-pressed color change effect can be suitably improved. can. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P2-9) above, for example.

Further, the above-mentioned effect execution function executes a predetermined effect for a predetermined period without ending the long press corresponding effect when the operation of the operating means is not detected during the execution of the long press corresponding effect. This predetermined effect is an effect that continues to change the display mode of the specific operation corresponding effect for a predetermined period. As a result, even if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted during the execution of the long press response effect after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in the long press mode, the display mode is continuously changed for a predetermined period. Since there is a continuity of changes in the display mode before and after the operation detection is interrupted, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the specific operation-compatible production as compared with the case where the production is terminated when the operation detection is interrupted. can. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P3-3) above, for example.

Further, in the long press response effect, after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in the long press mode, an operation different from the long press mode (for example, the operation of releasing the hand from the decision button 81 or pressing the decision button 81 again is performed. ) Is performed, a mode of another effect different from the long-press compatible effect executed during the long-press compatible effect and a mode of the long-press compatible effect (for example, a character image of "I can't go up anymore!" And a long press. The result of the jackpot determination can be suggested by the white image displayed by the pressing color change effect). This is different from the long press corresponding effect indicated by, for example, an operation of releasing the hand from the enter button 81 or pressing the enter button 81 again as an operation different from the operation of the long press mode during the long press corresponding effect. It is interesting that the suggestion of the result of the jackpot determination is given depending on the mode of the separate effect and the mode of the effect corresponding to long press. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P4-0) above, for example.

Further, does the above-mentioned effect execution function continue the effect corresponding to long press during the valid period in which the operation of the enter button 81 is valid and the operation of the enter button 81 is performed in the long press mode? A staging continuous lottery function for selecting whether or not to draw (processing performed by CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 in steps S4801C to S4805, step S4808 to step S4811, step S4815 to step S4818, and steps S4822 to S4825. ), And the above-mentioned effect execution function is when it is determined that the player is operating the decision button 81 at the determination timing, and the lottery result of the effect continuation lottery continues the execution of the effect corresponding to long press. If this is the result, the execution of the long press response effect is continued at the next specific interval. As a result, the execution of the long press corresponding effect is continued based on the detection of the operation at the determination timing and the lottery result of the continuous effect lottery. Compared to the case where the execution is continued, it is possible to preferably improve the fun of the long press response effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P5-0) and (P5-1) described above, for example.

The above-mentioned effect continuation lottery function draws a lottery as to whether or not to continue the operation-corresponding effect at the next specific interval at intervals shorter than the specific interval (for example, every 0.1 second interval or every several interrupts). As a result, since the continuous production lottery is performed at intervals shorter than the specific interval, the chances of lottery are increased as compared with the case where the lottery is performed at the determination timing, so that the interest of the long-press compatible production can be suitably improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P5-3) above, for example.

In addition, the above-mentioned effect continuation lottery function has drawn a lottery as to whether or not to continue the operation corresponding effect at the next specific interval at an interval shorter than the specific interval, but at the determination timing, the next specific interval is reached. It may be a lottery to decide whether or not to continue the long press response effect. As a result, since the continuous production lottery is performed at the judgment timing, the lottery opportunity increases as compared with the case where the long-press compatible production is decided by the lottery at the start of the production, so that the fun of the long-press compatible production can be suitably improved. .. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P5-2) above, for example.

In the long-pressed color change effect of Example 54 described above, the color of the color-changing image 45h is changed when the player passes the checkpoint with the decision button 81 released as an operation different from the long-pressed mode. Although it was restored to the color at the start, the color at that time may be maintained without returning to the color at the start of the change.

FIG. 236 will describe another example of the color change when the decision button 81 is operated to release the hand from the decision button 81 as an operation different from the operation of the long press mode in the long press color change effect. FIG. 236 is a graph showing the color change for each color change pattern when an operation different from the operation of the long press mode of the 55th embodiment is performed. The operation different from the operation of the color change pattern and the long press mode is different from the operation of the same color change pattern and long press mode as in the above-described Example 54.

That is, in the long-press color change effect, after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in the long-press mode, the player does not detect the operation of the decision button 81 by an operation different from the long-press mode at the determination timing. In addition, the display mode is different. Specifically, the long-press color change effect is performed when the player does not detect the operation of the decision button 81 at the checkpoint (determination timing) after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in the long-press mode. , The way of changing the display mode is different. More specifically, in the long-press color change effect, after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in the long-press mode, the player detects the operation of the decision button 81 by an operation different from the long-press mode at the checkpoint. However, when the player detects the operation of the determination button 81 after the checkpoint has elapsed, the display mode is changed differently. This point will be described in detail below.

In (a), the color change pattern A is selected. After 0.1 seconds from the start of the operation, the color change is started based on the determination that the operation is in the long press mode. Until 0.3 seconds after the start of the change, the color change is performed within the white range. The color change image 45h 0.3 seconds after the start of this change is shown in FIG. 237 (a1) described later. Here, the player releases the decision button 81 from 0.3 seconds to 0.5 seconds after the start of the change as an operation different from the long press mode, and 0.9 seconds from 0.5 seconds after the start of the change. Until later, the enter button 81 is held down again.

The color change continues until the first checkpoint (0.3 seconds after the start of the change) is reached, and after the first checkpoint, if the result of the color lottery is successful, the color change is continued and the color changes. If the result of is off, or if the operation of the enter button 81 is not detected by an operation different from the long press mode as described later, the color at the time when the first checkpoint is reached is maintained. For example, the color 0.4 seconds after the start of change when the result of the first color lottery is out of order, or when the operation of the enter button 81 is not detected by an operation different from the long press mode as described later. The change image 45h is shown in FIG. 237 (a2) described later. As will be described later, when the operation of the enter button 81 is not detected by an operation different from the long press mode, it is determined that the operation of the enter button 81 is in the long press mode again. Moreover, it ends at the time when the result of the color lottery is successful (for example, 0.6 seconds after the start of change). The color change image 45h 0.6 seconds after the start of this change is shown in FIG. 237 (a3) described later. If the operation of the enter button 81 remains undetected due to an operation different from the long press mode, or if the result of the color lottery is out of order, the color maintenance is continued as it is.

The color change is restarted 0.6 seconds after the start of the change. The restarted color change is performed according to the color change pattern A. That is, here, since the result of the color change lottery is a hit at the first color change timing, the color changes from white to blue, and at the second color change timing, the result of the color change lottery is a hit, so the color changes from blue to yellow. It changes and changes from yellow to rainbow because the result of the color change lottery is a hit at the third color change timing. Externally, blue is displayed from 0.6 seconds to 1.2 seconds after the start of change, yellow is displayed from 1.2 seconds to 2.4 seconds after the start of change, and 2. The rainbow color is displayed from 4 seconds to the end of the change.

In this case, the color change image 45h 0.9 seconds after the start of change is shown in (a4) of FIG. 237 described later, and the color change image 45h 1.2 seconds after the start of change is shown in the same (a5), and the change start 1 The color change image 45h 8 seconds later is shown in the same (a6), the color change image 45h 2.4 seconds after the start of change is shown in the same (a7), and the color change image 45h 2.7 seconds after the start of change is shown. It is shown in the same (a8).

In (b), the color change pattern B is selected. The color change of the color change image 45h when the color change pattern B is selected is the same as when the color change pattern A is selected until the third color change timing, but the maximum color change is up to yellow. Therefore, the color change image 45h shown in (a7) is maintained from 2.4 seconds after the start of the change.

In (c), the color change pattern C is selected. The color change of the color change image 45h when the color change pattern C is selected is the same as when the color change pattern A is selected until the second color change timing, but the maximum color change is up to blue. Therefore, the color change image 45h shown in (c5) is maintained 1.2 seconds after the start of the change.

In (d), the color change pattern D is selected. Since the color change of the color change image 45h when the color change pattern D is selected is within the white range, the color change image 45h shown in (a3') is maintained 0.3 seconds after the start of the change.

Next, a display mode of the color change for each color change pattern will be described. FIG. 237 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of color change for each color change pattern. The operation different from the operation of the color change pattern and the long press mode is different from the operation of the same color change pattern and long press mode as in Example 54 described above.

(C) As shown, when the color change pattern A is selected, it is a period during which the hand is released from the first decision button 81 as an operation different from the first long press mode. The color changes in the white range until the checkpoint is passed. That is, the color change image 45h (a1) whose color changes in the white range is displayed during that period. As an operation different from the long press mode after passing the first checkpoint, a white image with color change until the period when the hand is released from the first enter button 81 and the period until the second long press is performed. (A1) is maintained. That is, as shown in (d), the color change image 45h (a2) that maintains white color is displayed during this period. In this way, the color-changed color change image 45h (a2) is displayed during the period when the hand is released from the first decision button 81 as an operation different from the long press mode after passing the first checkpoint. Since it is maintained, it is more difficult for the player to know that the checkpoint has been passed, as compared to the case where the color change returns to its original state.

If the result of the color change lottery is successful at the time of the second long press, the color change of the color change image 45h is restarted according to the color change pattern A from the time when the operation is restarted. At the time of this second long press, an image showing that the operation in the long press mode is resumed is displayed at the timing when the color change is restarted and at the timing when the remaining color change can be performed to the end. Specifically, as shown in (e), a character image (specific notification image 45i) of "start!" Is displayed, indicating that the color change is restarted. Then, as shown in (f), the color change is started in the blue range of the color change image 45h. In this way, the character image of "Start!" Is displayed when the operation in the long press mode is resumed, so that the player can perform a variable display effect with a high expectation that the color change will continue from now on. You can get a suggestion that it may have been done.

The display of the character image of "Start!" And the voice output are not only when the result of the color change lottery is successful at the time of the second long press, but also when the result of the color change lottery is wrong. Will be executed. At this time, the color change image 45h (a2) that maintains the white color shown in (d) seems to be a color change pattern D having a low expectation at first glance, but the character image of "start!" Shown in (e) is. By displaying it, it is possible to give an impression that it is different from the color change pattern D. As a result, even if a color change that looks like a color change pattern D with a low expectation is executed by performing an operation different from the operation of the long press mode for the enter button 81, the actual operation is actually performed. It is possible to obtain a suggestion that a variable display effect with a high degree of expectation may be executed.

If the result of the color change lottery is a hit, after the character image of "Start!" Is displayed, the checkpoint is also during the period when the second decision button 81 is released as an operation different from the long press mode. As long as it does not exceed, the color change in the blue range of the color change image 45h (a4) is continued as shown in (f). In the period of the third long press, the color change image 45h is changed from blue to yellow, and in the period of the fourth long press, the color change images 45h (a6) (a7) are shown in (h) and (i). ) Continues in the yellow range. During the fifth long press period, the color change image 45h is changed in color from yellow to iridescent. As an operation different from the long press mode, the color change of the color change image 45h (a8) is maintained in the rainbow color range as shown in (j) during the period when the hand is released from the determination button 81 for the fifth time. In this way, after the character image of "Start!" Is displayed, the color change of the color change image 45h continues, so that the player can press and hold the "Start!" When the operation is resumed. It can be noticed that the display of the character image is an indication of high expectation.

In the above description, not only the case where the operation of the determination button 81 is not detected at the first determination timing due to the operation different from the long press mode, but also the second determination timing and the third determination timing are determined. The same applies when the operation of the enter button 81 is no longer detected.

When the color change pattern B is selected, the color change of the color change image 45h is displayed in the same manner as when the color change pattern A is selected. That is, the display of the color-changed color change image 45h (a1) is maintained during the period when the hand is released from the first decision button 81 as an operation different from the long press mode after passing the first checkpoint. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to know that the checkpoint has been passed. In addition, at the time of the second long press, if the result of the color change lottery is a hit, the operation in the long press mode is performed at the timing when the color change starts and at the timing when the color change can be performed to the end. Since the image indicating that the color has been restarted (the character image "Start!") Is displayed, the player can get an indication that a variable display effect with a high expectation that the color change will continue is being executed. Can be done. After the character image of "Start!" Is displayed, the color change of the color change image 45h continues until yellow, so that the player can press and hold the character "Start!" When the operation is resumed. It can be noticed that the display of the image is an indication of high expectations.

As shown in (c), even when the color change pattern C is selected, the color change of the color change image 45h is displayed in the same manner as when the color change pattern A is selected. That is, since the display of the color-changed color-changed image 45h is maintained during the period when the hand is released from the first decision button 81 as an operation different from the long-pressed mode after passing the first checkpoint. , It is difficult for the player to know that the checkpoint has been passed. In addition, at the time of the second long press, if the result of the color change lottery is a hit, the operation in the long press mode is performed at the timing when the color change starts and at the timing when the color change can be performed to the end. Since the image indicating that the color has been restarted (the character image "Start!") Is displayed, the player can get an indication that a variable display effect with a high expectation that the color change will continue is being executed. Can be done. However, after the character image of "Start!" Is displayed, the color change of the color change image 45h is in the blue range, so that the player "starts!" When the operation in the long press mode is resumed. Even if the character image of "" is displayed, it can be noticed that the high degree of expectation of big hit may not increase so much.

As shown in (d), even when the color change pattern D is selected, the color change of the color change image 45h is displayed as in the case where the color change pattern A is selected. That is, since the display of the color-changed color-changed image 45h is maintained during the period when the hand is released from the first decision button 81 as an operation different from the long-press mode after passing the first checkpoint. , It is difficult for the player to know that the checkpoint has been passed. Further, at the time of the second long press, the color change is not performed at the timing when the color change is started, so that the above-mentioned character image "Start!" Is not displayed ((a3') in the figure). .. Therefore, the player can obtain a suggestion that the variable display effect having a low expectation that the color change does not occur is executed. However, after the character image of "Start!" Is displayed, the color change of the color change image 45h is in the white range, and the player "Starts!" When the operation in the long press mode is resumed. If the character image of is not displayed, it can be noticed that the high degree of expectation of big hit does not rise so much.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 55th embodiment, the above-mentioned effect execution function is operated in the long-pressed mode within the period in which it is determined whether or not the decision button 81 is operated in the long-pressed mode. Even when the operation of releasing the decision button 81 is performed as an operation different from that of the operation, the execution of the long press color change effect is continued. As a result, even if the operation of releasing the enter button 81 is performed as an operation different from the operation in the long press mode after the long press color change effect is started, the execution of the long press color change effect is continued. Therefore, it is not necessary to restart the operation of the operation means from the beginning even if the operation is different from the operation in the long press mode. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the fun of the long-pressed color change effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P2-0) above, for example.

In the above-mentioned long press response effect, after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in the long press mode, an operation different from the long press mode (for example, the operation of releasing the hand from the decision button 81 or pressing the decision button 81 again is performed. ) Is performed, the difference in the display mode of the effect corresponding to long press (for example, the color change is restarted after the color of the color change patterns A to C is maintained by different operations, but the color of the color change pattern D is changed. (Staying maintained) suggests a predetermined condition (eg, jackpot expectation) obtained as a result of the jackpot determination. For example, when the color change is restarted after the color is maintained by a different operation, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the color is maintained. As a result, during the long press response effect, as an operation different from the operation of the long press mode, for example, an operation of releasing the hand from the decision button 81 or pressing the decision button 81 again is performed, and the result of the jackpot determination is obtained. It is interesting to be given the suggestion of certain conditions. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P2-0B) above, for example.

Further, in the above-mentioned long-press color change effect, after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in the long-press mode, the player detects the operation of the decision button 81 by an operation different from the long-press mode at the determination timing. If not, the display mode is different as described below. As a result, when the operation of the enter button 81 is canceled by an operation different from the long press mode after the long press color change effect is started, the long press color change effect is produced due to the difference in the display mode after the release. It is possible to suitably improve the interest. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P2-3) above, for example.

Further, in the above-mentioned long-press color change effect, after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in the long-press mode, the player detects the operation of the decision button 81 by an operation different from the long-press mode at the determination timing. If not, the way of changing the display mode is different as described below. As a result, when the operation of the enter button 81 is canceled by an operation different from the long press mode after the long press color change effect is started, the long press is performed due to the difference in the way of changing the display mode after the release. It is possible to suitably improve the fun of the color change effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P2-4) above, for example.

Further, in the long-press color change effect, after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in the long-press mode, the player does not detect the operation of the decision button 81 by an operation different from the long-press mode at the determination timing. Therefore, when the player detects the operation of the determination button 81 after the determination timing, the display mode is changed differently. For example, in the case of the color change patterns A to C, after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in the long press mode, the player does not detect the operation of the decision button 81 by the operation different from the long press mode. After the determination timing, the color is maintained until the player detects (re-detects) the operation of the decision button 81, and then the player re-detects the operation of the decision button 81. In a certain case, if the next color change lottery is won, the color change is restarted from the maintained color. In the case of the color change pattern D, after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in the long press mode, if the player does not detect the operation of the decision button 81 by an operation different from the long press mode, after the determination timing, Even if the player re-detects the operation of the decision button 81 and then the player re-detects the operation of the decision button 81, the pattern does not change color in the first place, so that the white color is maintained. As a result, after the long-press color change effect is started, the operation of the enter button 81 is canceled by an operation different from the long-press mode, but when the operation is resumed thereafter, the display mode is changed. Depending on the difference, the fun of the long-pressed color change effect can be suitably improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P2-5) above, for example.

Further, in the long-press color change effect, after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in the long-press mode, the player does not detect the operation of the decision button 81 by an operation different from the long-press mode at the determination timing. Therefore, when the player detects the operation of the decision button 81 after the determination timing, whether or not the specific notification is executed (for example, the specific notification image 45i composed of the character image of "start!"" As described below. (Presence / absence of display) is different. For example, in the case of the color change patterns A to C, after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in the long press mode, the player does not detect the operation of the decision button 81 by the operation different from the long press mode. Then, when the player re-detects the operation of the decision button 81 after the determination timing, the specific notification for displaying the character image of "Start!" Is executed. In the case of the color change pattern D, after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in the long press mode, if the player does not detect the operation of the decision button 81 by an operation different from the long press mode, after the determination timing, Even if the player re-detects the operation of the decision button 81, since the pattern does not change color in the first place, the specific notification that displays the character image of "Start!" Is not executed. As a result, after the long-press color change effect is started, the operation of the enter button 81 is canceled by an operation different from the long-press mode, but when the operation is resumed thereafter, depending on whether or not the specific notification is executed. , It is possible to suitably improve the fun of the production corresponding to a specific operation. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P2-6) above, for example.

Further, the above-mentioned specific notification may be notification of whether or not the long-pressed color change effect is restarted (for example, whether or not the character image of "start!" Indicates that the color change is restarted is displayed). For example, in the color change patterns A to C, after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in the long press mode, the player does not detect the operation of the decision button 81 by an operation different from the long press mode. When the player re-detects the operation of the decision button 81 after the determination timing and the result of the color change lottery is a hit, the specific notification that displays the character image of "Start!" May be executed. That is, the character image of "Start!" May be displayed only when the color change is actually restarted. As a result, after the long-press color change effect is started, the operation of the enter button 81 is canceled, but when the operation is resumed after that, the long-press color change effect is notified by the notification of whether or not the long-press color change effect is restarted. It is possible to suitably improve the fun of the color change effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P2-7) above, for example.

Further, the above-mentioned predetermined condition is a jackpot expectation degree in which the result of the jackpot determination is a specific result (for example, a jackpot result). As a result, the difference in the display mode of the long-press color change effect suggests a jackpot expectation that the result of the jackpot determination is a specific result, so that the interest of the long-press color change effect can be suitably improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P2-8) above, for example.

Further, the above-mentioned predetermined condition is a change pattern (for example, color change patterns A to D) of a display mode of a long-pressed color change effect determined according to a jackpot expectation degree. As a result, the difference in the display mode of the long-pressed color change effect suggests the jackpot expectation that the result of the jackpot determination is a specific result, so that the interest of the long-pressed color change effect is suitably improved. be able to.

Further, the above-mentioned effect execution function is a continuous effect lottery (when the player does not detect the operation of the decision button 81 within the valid period after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in the long press mode. For example, based on the lottery result of the above-mentioned color change lottery), even after the operation of the enter button 81 is no longer detected, the long press color change effect is continued. As a result, if the detection of the player's operation is interrupted after the long press color change effect is started, it is determined whether or not to continue the execution of the specific operation corresponding effect according to the lottery result of the effect continuation lottery. Since the variation of the effect when the detection of the player's operation is interrupted is widened, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the effect corresponding to the specific operation. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P5-4) above, for example.

In the long-press corresponding effect (long-press charge effect) of the above-described embodiment 44, when the operation in the long-press mode is interrupted, the value of the charge counter at the time of interruption is displayed. Therefore, when the value of the charge counter at the time of interruption is a specific value (for example, the ones place is "7", or the ones place and the second place are "7" "7". If you do), you may misunderstand that you have all the values that will lead to a favorable result for the player. Also, in the case of a system where the number of long-pressed effects is accumulated (for example, an effect of earning points, an effect of displaying the number of defeated enemies, etc.), the upper limit is unknown, so such a specific value. In that case, such mistrust may be likely to occur. Therefore, in this embodiment, control is performed so that the value displayed in the long press corresponding effect (for example, the long press point get effect) at the time of interruption does not become a specific value. The control system for executing the long press point get effect by the gaming machine 10 of the 44th embodiment will be described.

FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing the determination button input monitoring / effect processing by the sub-control device of the 56th embodiment. FIG. 239 is a table for selecting a point get pattern. FIG. 240 is a long press point lottery table for each point get pattern. FIG. 241 is a lottery result of a long press point lottery in each point get pattern.

With reference to FIG. 238, the determination button input monitoring / effect processing by the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 will be described. For the same processing as the decision button input monitoring / effect processing described with reference to FIG. 178, the above description will be referred to, and the process related to the long press point get effect peculiar to this embodiment will be described.

From step S4501B to step S4506, when the long press point get effect flag is 1, the valid period is within the valid period, and the long press flag is 0, the operation in the long press mode of the enter button 81 is detected. In that case, the long press flag is set to 1 and the process proceeds to step S4509. In step S4509, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the count time of the long press timer is 0.3 n seconds (n = an integer from 1 to 10). If the long press timer counts 0.3 n seconds, the process proceeds to step S4510, and if not, this process ends.

In step S4510, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 increments the checkpoint passage counter by +1 each time the long press timer counts 0.3 n seconds, and proceeds to step S4510A. 0.3n seconds is a checkpoint for a long press point get effect. Since the long press point get effect is performed for 3 seconds, there are 10 checkpoints from 1 to 10.

In step S4510A, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 acquires the value of the long press point lottery counter. The long press point lottery counter is a loop counter (0 to 100) in which "1" is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated and the counter returns to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The counter is updated periodically, and the updated value is stored in the RAM 553 of the sub control unit 262. The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines the long press point addition value with reference to the value of the long press point lottery counter and the long press point addition value table described later.

In step S4510B, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 adds the value of the long press point lottery counter to the current total value of long press points, and proceeds to step S4510C. In step S4510C, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the long press point get effect. When the operation in the long press mode of the enter button 81 continues for 3 seconds, it is determined that it is the end timing of the long press point get effect. If it is the end timing, the process proceeds to step S4510D, and if not, the present process is terminated.

In step S4510D, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the total value of the long press points at the end of the long press operation is a specific value. The specific value is, for example, "77". If it is a specific value, the process proceeds to step S4510E, and if not, the process ends. In step S4510E, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs a specific value avoidance process on the total value of the long press points, and ends this process. Specifically, the specific value avoidance process avoids ending with a specific value by adding or subtracting a predetermined number to the total value of long press points that becomes a specific value at the end of the long press point get effect. It is a process.

As a result, when the total value of the long press points becomes a specific value at the end of the long press operation, it is possible to recognize that the total value of the long press points is not a specific value. The method of making the total value of long press points recognized as not a specific value is not limited to the method of adding "1", and a predetermined number other than "1" may be added, or "1" or "1" or "1". A predetermined number other than "1" may be subtracted, or a predetermined number may be multiplied.

From step S4512 to step S4515, when it is determined that the operation of the enter button 81 is not detected, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 is in the process of obtaining a long press point at that time, and is operated in the long press mode. If so, it is determined whether or not no detection continues until the next checkpoint elapses. If no detection continues until the time when the next checkpoint elapses, it is determined that the long press operation is interrupted, and the process proceeds to step S4515A. If not, this process ends.

In step S4515A, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the total value of the long press points at the time when the long press operation is interrupted is a specific value. The specific value is, for example, "77". If it is a specific value, the process proceeds to step S4515B, and if not, the process proceeds to step S4516.

In step S4515B, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs a specific value avoidance process on the total value of the long press points, and proceeds to step S4516. Specifically, the specific value avoidance process avoids ending at a specific value by adding or subtracting a predetermined number to the total value of long press points that becomes a specific value at the time of interruption of the long press point get effect. It is a process. As a result, when the total value of long press points is likely to be a specific value at the time of interruption of the long press operation, it is possible to recognize that the total value of long press points is not a specific value.

In step S4516, step S4517, and step S4519, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 returns the long press flag, the long press timer, and the checkpoint passage counter to 0, and ends the long press point get effect. This ends this process.

In this way, in the long-press point get effect, even if the total long-press point value displayed at the time when the long-press point get effect ends or is interrupted becomes a specific value indicating the occurrence of a state advantageous to the player. , The total value of long press points that are actually displayed is a value that avoids a specific value by adding or subtracting a predetermined number to it, so it is a simple method to mislead the player to think that it will be in an advantageous state. Can be reduced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 239, the lottery of the point get pattern in the long press point get effect will be described.

The long press point get effect is executed in a specific fluctuation pattern. Specifically, in the case of a big hit result, the variation type counter CS1 (0 to 198) is in the range of "141 to 198" and the variation type counter CS2 (0 to 240) is in the range of "0 to 120". It is executed in some cases, that is, in the case of jackpot super reach E (120 seconds). If the result is out of range, the variation type counter CS1 (0 to 198) is in the range of "171 to 198" and the variation type counter CS2 (0 to 240) is in the range of "0 to 199", that is, out of range. It is executed when it is Super Reach E.

As for the point get pattern in the long press point get effect, when the jackpot super reach E is set, the point get pattern A is selected if the variation type counter CS2 (0 to 240) is in the range of "0 to 90". The point get pattern A is a pattern in which, when the operation in the long press mode of the enter button 81 is performed for 3 seconds, the total value of the long press points by the long press for 3 seconds becomes 90 to 100 points. If the variation type counter CS2 (0 to 240) is in the range of "91 to 110", the point get pattern B is selected. The point get pattern B is a pattern in which the total value of long-pressed points by long-pressing for 3 seconds becomes 80 to 89 points. If the variation type counter CS2 (0 to 240) is in the range of "111 to 120", the point get pattern C is selected. The point get pattern C is a pattern in which the total value of long-pressed points by long-pressing for 3 seconds becomes 70 to 79 points. Further, in the case of the out-of-order super reach E, if the variation type counter CS2 (0 to 240) is in the range of "0 to 99", the point get pattern B is selected, and the variation type counter CS2 (0 to 240) is ". If it is in the range of "100 to 199", the point get pattern C is selected. The point get pattern A is set to be selected only in the case of a hit and not to be selected in the case of a miss, but it may be set to be selected in any case.

Next, with reference to FIG. 240, a long press point lottery table for each point get pattern will be described.

In the long press point get effect, when a long press is performed for 3 seconds, 10 long press point lottery is performed every time the checkpoint is passed. In the 10 long press point lottery, the long press point lottery table is used. This long press point lottery table is stored in the ROM 552 of the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262.

The points selected in each long press point lottery differ depending on the type of point get pattern. In the point get pattern A, for example, 10 points are selected in the 1st to 7th lottery, 7 to 10 points are selected in the 8th lottery, and 7 to 10 points are selected in the 9th lottery. Is selected, and in the 10th lottery, one of 6 to 10 points is selected. As a result, in the point get pattern A, the total value of long-pressed points by long-pressing for 3 seconds becomes 90 to 100 points.

In the point get pattern B, for example, 10 points are selected in the first to fourth lottery, 9 or 10 points are selected in the fifth lottery, 8 or 9 points are selected in the sixth lottery, and the seventh time. 7 to 9 points are selected in the lottery, 6 to 8 points are selected in the 8th lottery, 5 to 7 points are selected in the 9th lottery, and 5 or 6 points are selected in the 10th lottery. As a result, in the point get pattern B, the total value of long-pressed points by long-pressing for 3 seconds becomes 80 to 89 points.

In the point get pattern C, for example, 10 points are selected in the first and second lottery, 9 or 10 points are selected in the third and fourth lottery, and 8 or 9 points are selected in the fifth lottery. , 7 or 8 points are selected in the 6th lottery, 6 or 7 points are selected in the 7th lottery, 5 or 6 points are selected in the 8th lottery, and 4 or 5 points are selected in the 9th lottery. Selected, 3 or 4 points will be selected in the 10th lottery. As a result, in the point get pattern C, the total value of long-pressed points by long-pressing for 3 seconds becomes 70 to 79 points.

Next, with reference to FIG. 241, the lottery result of the long press point lottery in each point get pattern will be described.

(A) shows the points selected in each lottery for each long-pressed point total value when the point get pattern A is selected. Here, if the total value of long-pressed points becomes a specific value (for example, "77"), 10 points are selected in the first to seventh lottery, and after seven points are selected in the eighth lottery, This is a case where the long press operation is interrupted by the time the ninth lottery is performed. This is surrounded by a double-dashed line, and if the long-press point lottery is performed up to the 10th time, it will be 90 or 91 points, and if the long-press point lottery is performed up to the 8th time, the long-press in the point get pattern. Corresponds to the lottery result of the point lottery. That is, in the point get pattern A, if the point is interrupted at the time when the eighth long press point lottery is performed, the total value of the long press points may become a specific value depending on the lottery result.

(B) shows the points selected in each lottery for each long-pressed point total value when the point get pattern B is selected. Here, if the total value of long-pressed points becomes a specific value (for example, "77"), 10 points are selected in the first to fourth lottery, 9 points are selected in the fifth lottery, and the sixth time. 8 points are selected in the lottery, 7 points are selected in the 7th lottery, 7 points are selected in the 8th lottery, 6 points are selected in the 9th lottery, and then the 10th lottery is performed. This is the case when the long press operation is interrupted by the time it is pressed. This is a long-pressed point lottery in the point get pattern when the long-pressed point lottery is performed up to the 9th time, when the long-pressed point lottery is surrounded by a double-dashed line and it becomes 82 points. Corresponds to the lottery result of. That is, in the point get pattern B, if the 9th long press point lottery is interrupted, the total value of the long press points may become a specific value depending on the lottery result.

(C) shows the points selected in each lottery for each long-pressed point total value when the point get pattern C is selected. Here, if the total value of long-pressed points at the time of interruption becomes a specific value (for example, "77"), 10 points are selected in the first to third lottery, and 9 points are selected in the fourth lottery. 8 points are selected in the 5th lottery, 8 points are selected in the 6th lottery, 7 points are selected in the 7th lottery, 6 points are selected in the 8th lottery, and 6 points are selected in the 9th lottery. This is the case where 5 points are selected and 4 points are selected in the 10th lottery to end the long press point get effect. This is a long-pressed point lottery with a point get pattern when the long-pressed point lottery is performed up to the 10th time, which is surrounded by a double-dashed line, and it becomes 77 points. Corresponds to the lottery result of. That is, in the point get pattern C, when the long press point lottery ends, the total value of the long press points may become a specific value depending on the lottery result.

FIG. 242 is a time chart of the point get pattern A. FIG. 243 is another time chart of the point get pattern A shown in FIG. 242. FIG. 244 is a time chart of the point get pattern C. FIG. 245 is another time chart of the point get pattern C shown in FIG. 244.

Here, a case where the long press point get effect does not reach a specific value and a case where the long press point get effect is prevented from becoming a specific value at the time of interruption or end will be described.

With reference to FIG. 242, when the point get pattern A is selected and the long press operation for 3 seconds is performed, the timing of the long press point get effect will be described. The explanations of (a) detection timing, (b) effective timing, (c) operation timing, (d) long press timer, (e) long press checkpoint, and (f) long press flag are the same as in FIG. 182. Since there is, it is omitted.

In the long press point get image shown in (g), it is an example when it is determined that all the long press operations are performed at the first to tenth checkpoints.

Specifically, if the press is detected 1.3 seconds after the start of the long press point get effect (first checkpoint), an image showing the acquisition of 10 points is displayed 1.6 seconds after the start. If the press is detected 1.6 seconds after the start (second checkpoint), another 10 points are added 1.9 seconds after the start, and an image showing a total of 20 points is displayed. If the press is detected 1.9 seconds after the start (third checkpoint), another 10 points are added 2.2 seconds after the start, and an image showing the total acquisition of 30 points is displayed. If the press is detected 2.2 seconds after the start (fourth checkpoint), another 10 points are added 2.5 seconds after the start, and an image showing a total of 40 points is displayed. If the press is detected 2.5 seconds after the start (fifth checkpoint), another 10 points are added 2.8 seconds after the start, and an image showing the total acquisition of 50 points is displayed. If the press is detected at the 6th checkpoint 2.8 seconds after the start, another 10 points are added 3.1 seconds after the start, and an image showing the total acquisition of 60 points is displayed. If the press is detected 3.1 seconds after the start (7th checkpoint), another 10 points are added 3.4 seconds after the start, and an image showing a total of 69 points is displayed.

If the press is detected 3.4 seconds after the start (8th checkpoint), another 7 points are added 3.7 seconds after the start, and an image showing a total of 77 points is displayed. If the press is detected 3.7 seconds after the start (9th checkpoint), another 7 points are added 4.0 seconds after the start, and an image showing a total of 85 points is displayed. If the press is detected 4.0 seconds after the start (10th checkpoint), another 6 points will be added 4.3 seconds after the start, an image showing a total of 90 points will be displayed, and a long press point will be obtained. The production ends.

In this way, when the long-pressed point total value of the long-pressed point get effect does not reach a specific value, the long-pressed point total value can be displayed as it is.

With reference to FIG. 243, when the point get pattern A is selected, the operation shown in FIG. 242 is interrupted in the middle, and the timing of the long press point get effect when the specific value is avoided. Will be explained.

The operation timing shown in (c) indicates that the long press operation is interrupted 3.50 seconds after the start of the long press point get effect, and the long press point get effect ends. The long press timer shown in (d) continues to measure the time at the timing when the operation in this long press mode is interrupted, and finishes the time measurement at the timing when the long press flag becomes 0. The checkpoint shown in (e) indicates the determination timing from the first to the tenth time, similarly to the checkpoint shown in FIG. 242 (e). The long press flag shown in (f) continues until the 9th checkpoint that arrives after the timing at which the long press operation is interrupted (passing the 8th checkpoint).

The long press point get image shown in (g) is the length corresponding to the first to seventh checkpoints shown in FIG. 242 (g) for the press detection at the first to seventh checkpoints. The same image as the push point get image is displayed. That is, since the press is detected 1.3 seconds after the start of the long press point get effect (first checkpoint), an image showing the acquisition of 10 points is displayed 1.6 seconds after the start. Since the press is detected 1.6 seconds after the start (second checkpoint), another 10 points are added 1.9 seconds after the start, and an image showing a total of 20 points is displayed. Since the press is detected 1.9 seconds after the start (third checkpoint), another 10 points are added 2.2 seconds after the start, and an image showing a total of 30 points is displayed. Since the press is detected 2.2 seconds after the start (fourth checkpoint), another 10 points are added 2.5 seconds after the start, and an image showing a total of 40 points is displayed. Since the press is detected 2.5 seconds after the start (fifth checkpoint), another 10 points are added 2.8 seconds after the start, and an image showing the total acquisition of 50 points is displayed. Since the press is detected at the 6th checkpoint 2.8 seconds after the start, another 10 points are added 3.1 seconds after the start, and an image showing the total acquisition of 60 points is displayed. Since the press is detected 3.1 seconds after the start (7th checkpoint), another 9 points are added 3.4 seconds after the start, and an image showing a total of 69 points is displayed.

Since the press was detected 3.4 seconds after the start (8th checkpoint), 8 points were added 3.7 seconds after the start, and an image showing a total of 77 points was displayed. It should end due to the interruption, but it does not end even if an image showing a total of 77 points earned is displayed. That is, in order to avoid the specific value of 77 points in total, 1 point is subtracted 4.0 seconds after the start. An image showing the total of 76 points earned is displayed and the process ends. As a result, an image showing the total acquisition of 76 points is displayed at the end of the interruption, and the long press point get effect ends. Therefore, even if the player sees this image at the end of the effect, it shows the occurrence of an advantageous state. The risk of misidentifying it as a thing is reduced.

In this way, when the total value of the long press points at the time of interruption of the long press point get effect becomes a specific value, the total value of the long press points avoiding the specific value can be displayed. Here, after displaying the total value of long-pressed points that has once become a specific value, the total value of long-pressed points that is not a specific value is displayed, but the total value of long-pressed points that is not a specific value may be displayed from the beginning. .. For example, if the configuration is such that the added value for each long-pressed point lottery is not displayed, the total value of long-pressed points that is not a specific value from the beginning can be displayed without discomfort.

With reference to FIG. 244, when the point get pattern C is selected and the long press operation is performed for 3 seconds, the timing of the long press point get effect when the specific value is avoided will be described. do.

Since the long-pressed point get image shown in (g) is detected to be pressed 1.3 seconds after the start of the long-pressed point get effect (first checkpoint), 10 points are obtained 1.6 seconds after the start. The image is displayed. Since the press is detected 1.6 seconds after the start (second checkpoint), another 10 points are added 1.9 seconds after the start, and an image showing a total of 20 points is displayed. Since the press is detected 1.9 seconds after the start (third checkpoint), another 10 points are added 2.2 seconds after the start, and an image showing a total of 30 points is displayed. Since the press is detected 2.2 seconds after the start (fourth checkpoint), another 9 points are added 2.5 seconds after the start, and an image showing a total of 39 points is displayed. Since the press is detected 2.5 seconds after the start (fifth checkpoint), another 8 points are added 2.8 seconds after the start, and an image showing a total of 47 points is displayed. Since the press is detected 2.8 seconds after the start (sixth checkpoint), another 8 points are added 3.1 seconds after the start, and an image showing a total of 55 points is displayed. Since the press is detected 3.1 seconds after the start (7th checkpoint), another 7 points are added 3.4 seconds after the start, and an image showing a total of 62 points is displayed.

Since the press is detected 3.4 seconds after the start (8th checkpoint), another 6 points are added 3.7 seconds after the start, and an image showing a total of 68 points is displayed. Since the press is detected 3.7 seconds after the start (9th checkpoint), another 5 points are added 4.0 seconds after the start, and an image showing a total of 73 points is displayed. Since the press was detected 4.0 seconds after the start (10th checkpoint), 4 points were added after 4.3 seconds from the start, and an image showing a total of 77 points was displayed. , Long press point get production should end, but in order to avoid ending with a specific value of 77 points in total, 1 point is added 4.3 seconds after the start, and an image showing a total of 78 points earned Is displayed, and the long press point get effect ends. As a result, an image showing the total acquisition of 78 points is displayed, and the long press point get effect ends. Therefore, even if the player sees this image at the end of the effect, he / she mistakenly recognizes that an advantageous state has occurred. Fear is reduced.

In this way, even when the total value of the long press points at the end of the long press point get effect becomes a specific value, the total value of the long press points avoiding the specific value can be displayed.

With reference to FIG. 245, when the point get pattern B is selected and the operation shown in FIG. 242 is interrupted in the middle, a specific value is displayed, but the specific value is in an advantageous state for the player. The timing of the long press point get effect when it is difficult to cause a misunderstanding that it is an indication of the fact will be described.

Since the long-pressed point get image shown in (g) is detected to be pressed 1.3 seconds after the start of the long-pressed point get effect (first checkpoint), 10 points are obtained 1.6 seconds after the start. The image is displayed. Since the press is detected 1.6 seconds after the start (second checkpoint), another 10 points are added 1.9 seconds after the start, and an image showing a total of 20 points is displayed. Since the press is detected 1.9 seconds after the start (third checkpoint), another 10 points are added 2.2 seconds after the start, and an image showing a total of 30 points is displayed. Since the press is detected 2.2 seconds after the start (fourth checkpoint), another 10 points are added 2.5 seconds after the start, and an image showing a total of 40 points is displayed. Since the press is detected 2.5 seconds after the start (fifth checkpoint), another 9 points are added 2.8 seconds after the start, and an image showing a total of 49 points is displayed. Since the press is detected 2.8 seconds after the start (sixth checkpoint), another 8 points are added 3.1 seconds after the start, and an image showing a total of 57 points is displayed. Since the press is detected 3.1 seconds after the start (7th checkpoint), another 7 points are added 3.4 seconds after the start, and an image showing a total of 64 points is displayed.

Since the press is detected 3.4 seconds after the start (8th checkpoint), another 7 points are added 3.7 seconds after the start, and an image showing a total of 71 points is displayed. Since the press was detected 3.7 seconds after the start (9th checkpoint), 6 points were added after 4.0 seconds from the start, and an image showing a total of 77 points was displayed. It should end due to interruption, but 4.3 seconds after the start, an image showing a total of 77 points earned is displayed, and an additional image (character image "Actually, it should go up ..." shown in FIG. 249) is displayed. do. As a result, an image showing a total of 77 points earned at the end of the interruption is displayed, and even if the long press point get effect is completed, the player sees this additional image at the end of the effect, and an advantageous state occurs. The risk of misidentifying it as indicating is reduced.

In this way, when the total value of the long press points at the time of interruption or end of the long press point get effect becomes a specific value, there is a risk of misunderstanding that it indicates the occurrence of an advantageous state even if the specific value is displayed. Can be reduced.

Next, the display mode of each point get pattern in the long press point get effect will be described. FIG. 246 is a diagram showing a display mode corresponding to FIG. 242 of the point get pattern A. FIG. 247 is a diagram showing a display mode corresponding to FIG. 243 of the point get pattern A. FIG. 248 is a diagram showing a display mode corresponding to FIG. 244 of the point get pattern C. FIG. 249 is a diagram showing a display mode corresponding to FIG. 245 of the point get pattern C.

With reference to FIG. 246, a display mode corresponding to FIG. 242 of the point get pattern A will be described. It should be noted that the same display mode as in the long press charge effect described with reference to FIG. 185 will be omitted by using the same reference numerals.

The long-press point get effect is the same as the long-press charge effect described with reference to FIG. 185, during the execution of the variable display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 42, for example, during the reach development effect during the reach display effect. Will be executed. The long-press point get production during this reach development production is, for example, a production in which the number of points acquired is competed, and it is suggested that the more points acquired, the higher the expectation that a big hit will occur. It is a production. Points are earned according to the time of operation in the long press mode of the enter button 81.

Before executing the long-press point get effect, the third symbol display device 42 is executed with a notice effect for announcing the start of the long-press point get effect as shown in (a). For example, an operation in the long-press mode of the enter button 81 such as "Press and hold the button to get points! (The higher the point, the hotter !?)" and the long-press notice image 45a that announces the long-press point get effect. It is displayed on the third symbol display device 42. The display time of the long press notice image 45a is, for example, about 2 seconds.

When the display of the long-press notice image 45a is completed, the third symbol display device 42 has acquired the long-press request image 45b that requests the operation of the decision button 81 in the long-press mode as shown in (b). A long press point image 45c1 indicating a point is displayed. (B) indicates the start time of the long press point get effect. The long-pressed point image 45c1 is displayed as "0 point" because the operation in the long-pressed mode of the enter button 81 is not executed.

When it is determined that the operation of the enter button 81 is an operation in the long press mode, as shown in (c) and subsequent steps, an image in which points according to the time during which the operation in the long press mode continues is added is an image. Is displayed. (C) is an image 1.30 seconds after the start of the long press point get effect (at the time of passing the first checkpoint), and the long press point image in which the current long press point is displayed as "0 point". 45c1 and a long-pressed point addition image 45c2 of "+10" indicating that 10 points have been obtained are displayed. (D) is an image 1.60 seconds after the start of the long press point get effect (at the time of passing the second checkpoint), and the long press displayed as "10 points" due to the addition of 10 points. A point image 45c1 and a long-pressed point addition image 45c2 of "+10" indicating that 10 points have been obtained are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 242 above, the long press operation is continued even at the time of passing the check from the third time to the tenth time, and points are added. (E) is an image 3.40 seconds after the start of the production (at the time of passing the 8th checkpoint), and indicates that a long press point image 45c1 displayed as "70 points" and an additional 7 points have been acquired. A long-pressed point addition image 45c2 of "+7" is displayed. (F) is an image 3.70 seconds after the start of the production (at the time of passing the 9th checkpoint), and the long press point image 45c1 displayed as "77 points" by adding 7 points. Further, a long press point addition image 45c2 of "+7" indicating that 7 points have been obtained is displayed. (G) is an image 4.00 seconds after the start of the production (at the time of passing the 10th checkpoint), and is a long press point image 45c1 displayed as "84 points" by adding 7 points. Further, a long press point addition image 45c2 of "+6" indicating that 6 points have been obtained is displayed. (H) is an image 4.30 seconds after the start of the effect, and the long press point image 45c1 displayed as "90 points" is displayed by adding 6 points.

As shown in (i), it consists of the text image "Over 90 points in total! The suggestion image 45c3 may be displayed.

In this way, when the long-pressed point total value of the long-pressed point get effect does not reach a specific value, the long-pressed point total value can be displayed as it is.

With reference to FIG. 247, the display mode corresponding to FIG. 243 of the point get pattern A will be described. In the same display mode as in the long press point get effect described with reference to FIG. 247, the same reference numerals are used and the description thereof will be omitted.

Here, it is assumed that the operation of the enter button 81 has already been determined to be an operation in the long press mode. (A) is an image 1.30 seconds after the start of the production (at the time of passing the first checkpoint), and is a long press point image 45c1 displayed as "0 points" and "10 points". A long press point addition image 45c2 of "+10" is displayed. As shown in FIG. 243 above, the checkpoints from the second to the fifth are passed. (B) is an image 2.80 seconds after the start of the long-press point get effect (at the time of passing the sixth checkpoint), the long-press point image 45c1 displayed as "50 points", and another 10 points. A long-pressed point addition image 45c2 of "+10" indicating that the image has been acquired is displayed.

(C) is an image 3.10 seconds after the start of the production (at the time of passing the 7th checkpoint), a long press point image 45c1 in which 10 points are added and displayed as "60 points", and another 9 points. A long-pressed point addition image 45c2 of "+9" indicating that the image has been acquired is displayed. (D) is an image 3.40 seconds after the start of the production (at the time of passing the 8th checkpoint), and the long press point image 45c1 displayed as "69 points" by adding 9 points. Further, a long press point addition image 45c2 of "+8" indicating that 8 points have been obtained is displayed. (E) is an image 3.50 seconds after the start of the effect (before the arrival of the ninth checkpoint), and the same long-press point image 45c1 and long-press point addition image 45c2 as in (d) are displayed. There is. Further, (e) indicates that the hand was released from the decision button 81 at this timing.

(F) is an image 3.70 seconds after the start of the production (at the time of passing the 9th checkpoint), and it is shown that the hand is released from the decision button 81 even at this timing, and 8 points are shown. The long press point image 45c1 displayed as "77 points" due to the addition is displayed. (G) is an image 3.80 seconds after the start of the effect, and is a specific value avoidance image 45c4 displayed as "-1" indicating that 1 point is subtracted in order to avoid 77 points, and "77 points". The long press point image 45c1 displayed as "" is displayed. (H) is an image 4.00 seconds after the start of the effect, and a long press point image 45c1 displayed as "76 points" indicating that one point has been subtracted is displayed.

As shown in (i), 4.30 seconds after the start of the production, that is, at the end of the long press point get production, it suggests that the original jackpot expectation cannot be suggested due to the interruption. A suggestion image 45c5 composed of a character image of "Yo!" May be displayed.

In this way, when the total value of the long press points at the time of interruption of the long press point get effect becomes a specific value, the total value of the long press points avoiding the specific value is displayed, which indicates the occurrence of an advantageous state. It is possible to reduce the risk of misidentification.

With reference to FIG. 248, the display mode corresponding to FIG. 244 of the point get pattern C will be described. In the same display mode as in the long press point get effect described with reference to FIG. 247, the same reference numerals are used and the description thereof will be omitted.

Here, too, it is assumed that the operation of the enter button 81 has already been determined to be an operation in the long press mode. (A) is an image 1.30 seconds after the start of the production (at the time of passing the first checkpoint), and is a long press point image 45c1 displayed as "0 points" and "10 points". A long press point addition image 45c2 of "+10" is displayed. As shown in FIG. 244 above, the checkpoints from the second to the sixth are passed. (B) is an image 3.10 seconds after the start of the long press point get effect (at the time of passing the 7th checkpoint), the long press point image 45c1 displayed as "55 points", and another 7 points. A long-pressed point addition image 45c2 of "+7" indicating that the image has been acquired is displayed.

(C) is an image 3.40 seconds after the start of the production (at the time of passing the 8th checkpoint), a long press point image 45c1 in which 7 points are added and displayed as "62 points", and another 6 points. A long-pressed point addition image 45c2 of "+6" indicating that the image has been acquired is displayed. (D) is an image 3.70 seconds after the start of the production (at the time of passing the 9th checkpoint), and the long press point image 45c1 displayed as "68 points" due to the addition of 6 points. Further, a long press point addition image 45c2 of "+5" indicating that 5 points have been obtained is displayed. (E) is an image 4.00 seconds after the start of the production (at the time of passing the 10th checkpoint), and the long press point image 45c1 displayed as "73 points" due to the addition of 5 points. Further, a long press point addition image 45c2 of "+4" indicating that 4 points have been obtained is displayed.

(F) is an image 4.30 seconds after the start of the effect, and the long press point image 45c1 displayed as "77 points" is displayed by adding 4 points. (G) is an image 4.60 seconds after the start of the effect, and is a specific value avoidance image 45c4 displayed as "+1" indicating that 1 point is subtracted in order to avoid 77 points, and "77 points". The long press point image 45c1 displayed as is displayed. (H) is an image 4.90 seconds after the start of the effect, and a long press point image 45c1 displayed as "78 points" indicating that one point has been added is displayed.

As in (i), 5.20 seconds after the start of the production, that is, at the end of the long press point get production, the character "70 points in total! I don't know yet!", Which suggests that the jackpot expectation is not so high. A suggestion image 45c5 consisting of an image may be displayed.

In this way, even when the total value of long press points at the end of the long press point get effect becomes a specific value, the total value of long press points avoiding the specific value is displayed, indicating the occurrence of an advantageous state. It is possible to reduce the risk of misidentifying it as a thing.

With reference to FIG. 249, a display mode corresponding to FIG. 245 of the point get pattern B will be described. In the same display mode as in the long press point get effect described with reference to FIG. 247, the same reference numerals are used and the description thereof will be omitted.

Here, too, it is assumed that the operation of the enter button 81 has already been determined to be an operation in the long press mode. (A) is an image 1.30 seconds after the start of the production (at the time of passing the first checkpoint), and is a long press point image 45c1 displayed as "0 points" and "10 points". A long press point addition image 45c2 of "+10" is displayed. As shown in FIG. 244 above, the checkpoints from the second to the sixth are passed. (B) is an image 3.10 seconds after the start of the long press point get effect (at the time of passing the 7th checkpoint), the long press point image 45c1 displayed as "57 points", and another 7 points. A long-pressed point addition image 45c2 of "+7" indicating that the image has been acquired is displayed.

(C) is an image 3.40 seconds after the start of the production (at the time of passing the 8th checkpoint), a long press point image 45c1 in which 7 points are added and displayed as "64 points", and another 7 points. A long-pressed point addition image 45c2 of "+7" indicating that the image has been acquired is displayed. (D) is an image 3.70 seconds after the start of the production (at the time of passing the 9th checkpoint), and the long press point image 45c1 displayed as "71 points" due to the addition of 7 points. Further, a long press point addition image 45c2 of "+6" indicating that 6 points have been obtained is displayed. (E) is an image 3.80 seconds after the start of the effect (before the arrival of the 10th checkpoint), and the same long-press point image 45c1 and long-press point addition image 45c2 as in (d) are displayed. However, at this timing, the hand is released from the enter button 81.

(F) is an image 4.00 seconds after the start of the production (at the time of passing the 10th checkpoint), and the long press point image 45c1 displayed as "77 points" is displayed by adding 6 points. Has been done. (G) is an image 4.30 seconds after the start of the effect, and is to suggest that the long-pressed point image 45c1 displayed as "77 points" and the displayed "77 points" are not specific values. An additional image 45c6 composed of a character image "should have risen more ..." is displayed.

As shown in (h), the characters "70 points in total! I don't know yet!", Which suggests that the expectation for big hits is not so high after 4.60 seconds from the start of the production, that is, at the end of the long press point get production. A suggestion image 45c5 consisting of an image may be displayed.

In this way, when the total value of the long press points at the time of interruption or end of the long press point get effect becomes a specific value, there is a risk of misunderstanding that it indicates the occurrence of an advantageous state even if the specific value is displayed. Can be reduced.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 56th embodiment, the decision button 81 that receives the operation by the player, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that performs the main control regarding the game, and the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 make a big hit. Based on the result of the determination, the third symbol display device 42 is provided with an effect execution function by the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 to execute a predetermined display effect, and the above-mentioned effect execution function enables the operation of the decision button 81. Numerical value to execute numerical information display effect (for example, long press point get effect) to display numerical information (for example, long press point total value) during a predetermined display effect based on the operation of the enter button 81 within the valid period. It is equipped with an information display effect execution function, and the above-mentioned numerical information display effect execution function becomes 77 points by adding predetermined numerical information (for example, 77 points or predetermined points) in the numerical information display effect (for example, long press point get effect). When a numerical value) is displayed, a specific change effect is executed in which the predetermined numerical information is changed to different specific information (for example, "76 points", "78 points", "77 points" with additional information added). do. Due to the unexpectedness of such a display, it is possible to improve the fun of the display effect accompanied by the numerical change effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (Q0) above, for example.

Further, in the above-mentioned numerical information display effect execution function, the numerical information displayed as a result of the numerical information display effect suggests specific information (for example, jackpot winning information), specific suggestion information (for example, a specific value such as "77"). Perform a specific change effect to prevent it from becoming. As a result, misunderstandings about the result of the display effect can be reduced, and the reliability of the display effect can be improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (Q1) above, for example.

Further, in the above-mentioned specific change effect, as a result of increasing or decreasing the numerical information based on the operation of the enter button 81, the numerical information displayed as the result of the numerical information display effect (for example, the long press point get effect) is the specific suggestion information. In this case, the specific suggestion information is changed to non-specific information that does not suggest specific information (for example, 78 in which 1 is added to 77 or 76 in which 1 is subtracted from 77). This makes it possible to improve the reliability of the display effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (Q2) above, for example.

Further, in the above-mentioned specific change effect, as a result of increasing or decreasing the numerical information based on the operation of the enter button 81, the numerical information displayed as the result of the numerical information display effect (for example, the long press point get effect) is the specific suggestion information. In this case, non-specific information that does not suggest specific information (for example, additional information such as "should be higher ...") is added to the specific suggestion information. This makes it possible to improve the reliability of the display effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (Q3) above, for example.

Further, in the above-mentioned numerical information display effect, the numerical value displayed during the predetermined display effect is increased or decreased based on the operation of the enter button 81 within the valid period in which the operation of the enter button 81 is valid. It is a change effect (for example, a long press point get effect). This makes it possible to improve the reliability of the display effect accompanied by the numerical change effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (Q4) above, for example.

Further, the above-mentioned numerical value change effect may increase or decrease the numerical value according to the number of operations of the decision button 81. This makes it possible to improve the reliability of the display effect accompanied by the numerical change effect that changes the numerical information according to the number of operations of the decision button 81. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (Q5) above, for example.

In the 56th embodiment described above, when the player performs an operation in the long-press mode from the beginning to the end in the long-press point get effect, the long-press point image 45c1 is reached when the long-press valid period of 3 seconds ends. There was an example of displaying "77 points". Since the fluctuation pattern that displays this "77 points" is both the jackpot super reach E and the missed super reach E, the suggestion image 45c5 displayed after the end of the long press valid period is "a total of 70 points! It was only showing a slightly hot (not so hot) suggestion, "No!".

In this embodiment, as a fluctuation pattern in which the long press point image 45c1 displays "77 points" at the end of the long press valid period of 3 seconds, there are both jackpot super reach E and missed super reach E. An example in which a very hot fluctuation pattern for a player is determined, such as not only a slightly hot fluctuation pattern but also a jackpot super reach E, will be described.

Further, in the above-mentioned Example 56, when suggesting a fiery fluctuation pattern for the player, the suggestion image 45c3 displayed after the end of the long press valid period is said to be "total 90 points over! Fiery heat !?". As shown above, it was shown to be 90 points or more, but in this embodiment, since it is a heat in the 70 points range (77 points), it is displayed in a different manner. That is, when "77 points" is displayed at the end of the long press, both the hit super reach E and the missed super reach E have a fluctuation pattern (the fluctuation type counter CS2 among the jackpot super reach E shown in FIG. 239). Is 111 to 120 or when the variation type counter CS2 of the out-of-order super reach E is 100 to 199), the character size is displayed as it is, but when the variation pattern is only the hit super reach E (shown in FIG. 239). (When the variable type counter CS2 of the jackpot super reach E is 0 to 90) is changed from the character size as it is to the character size expanded. As a result, the player can be expected to end with "77 points" at the end of the long press valid period.

As described above, in this embodiment, high points (90 points or more) are obtained at the end of the long press valid period, or 77 points are obtained at the end of the long press valid period, and the 77 points are expanded. The content has the highest expectation of a big hit when it is changed to the character size. It should be noted that the jackpot may be confirmed, or there may be a slight possibility of deviation.

By giving a feeling of expectation that it will end at "77 points" in this way, in the long press point get production, the operation in the long press mode is continued until the long press valid period ends, so that the long press valid period can be achieved. It is a game that expects to get high points (90 points or more) at the end, and by stopping the operation in the long press mode at the time of 77 points acquisition in the middle of the long press point get production, it is maintained at 77 points. Then, at the end of the long press validity period, it is possible to provide the player with a game property in which the degree of expectation of a big hit is determined depending on whether or not the 77 points change to the expanded character size.

Such a configuration will be described in a little more detail with reference to FIGS. 250 to 254. FIG. 250 (a) is a table for selecting a point get pattern according to the 57th embodiment, and FIG. 250 (b) is a lottery result of a long press point lottery in the point get pattern S. FIG. 251 is a time chart of the point get pattern S. FIG. 252 is a time chart of another point get pattern that is very similar to the point get pattern S. FIG. 253 is a display mode corresponding to the point get pattern S. FIG. 254 is a display mode corresponding to another point get pattern that is very similar to the point get pattern S.

As shown in FIG. 250, in this embodiment, as a point get pattern in which "77" is displayed at the end of the long press point get effect, there is a point get pattern S executed only by the jackpot super reach E. .. Specifically, as shown in (a), 0 to 30 of the fluctuation counters CS2 (0 to 240) are enlarged when the long press point get effect executed by the jackpot super reach E is completed. It corresponds to the point get pattern S in which the character size "77" ("7" and "7" described later) is displayed.

Further, as shown in (b), there are three types of point get patterns S, S1 to S3, depending on the timing at which the result of "77" is displayed. The point get pattern S1 is a pattern in which 10 points are given in the first to seventh lottery, but 7 points are given in the eighth lottery, and the total is 77 points. In the point get pattern S2, 10 points are given in the first to fourth lottery, 9 points are given in the fifth lottery, 8 points are given in the sixth lottery, and eight points are given in the seventh lottery. 7 points are given, 7 points are given in the 8th lottery, 6 points are given in the 9th lottery, and the pattern ends with a total of 77 points. In the point get pattern S3, 10 points are given in the first to third lottery, 9 points are given in the fourth lottery, 8 points are given in the fifth lottery, and eight points are given in the sixth lottery. 8 points will be given, 7 points will be given in the 7th lottery, 6 points will be given in the 8th lottery, 5 points will be given in the 9th lottery, and 4 points will be given in the 10th lottery. It is a pattern that ends with a total of 77 points.

With reference to FIG. 251, a time chart of a long press point get effect performed in the point get pattern S2 will be described. The detection timing of the decision button 81 shown in (a) and the validity period of the decision button shown in (b) are the same as those in the 56th embodiment. The operation timing shown in (c), the long press timer shown in (d), and the long press flag shown in (f) indicate that the long press operation was continuously performed during the execution of the long press point get effect. ing. The long press checkpoint shown in (e) has nine checkpoints because the ninth lottery is the final in the point get pattern S2. The long-pressed point image shown in (g) indicates that the long-pressed point image is displayed immediately after passing each checkpoint.

That is, in the point get pattern S2, a long press point image corresponding to 10 points is displayed immediately after 1.30 seconds from the start when the lottery result from the first time is performed. Immediately after 1.60 seconds after the start of the second lottery result, a long press point image corresponding to a total of 20 points is displayed. Immediately after 1.90 seconds after the start of the third lottery result, a long press point image corresponding to a total of 30 points is displayed. Immediately after 2.20 seconds after the start of the fourth lottery result, a long press point image corresponding to a total of 40 points is displayed. Immediately after 2.50 seconds after the start of the fifth lottery result, a long press point image corresponding to a total of 49 points is displayed. Immediately after 2.80 seconds after the start of the sixth lottery result, a long press point image corresponding to a total of 57 points is displayed. Immediately after 3.10 seconds after the start of the 7th lottery result, a long press point image corresponding to a total of 64 points is displayed. Immediately after 3.40 seconds after the start of the 8th lottery result, a long press point image corresponding to a total of 71 points is displayed. Immediately after 3.70 seconds after the start of the 9th lottery result, a long press point image corresponding to a total of 77 points is displayed.

As will be described later, the result of the ninth lottery will continue to be displayed even after 4.00 seconds from the start. After that, at the end of the long press point get effect, for example, from 6.00 seconds after the start to 8.00 seconds after the start, the display mode is changed (enlarged or emphasized) to different display modes "7" and "7". .. "7" and "7" suggest that the jackpot expectation is high. This makes it possible for the player to have a sense of expectation that the long-press point get effect will end at "77 points".

With reference to FIG. 252, a time chart of a long press point get effect performed by a point get pattern similar to the point get pattern S2 will be described. Here, the total points will be 82 if the 10th lottery is performed, but the point get pattern B will be described in which the total points end at 77 when the long press operation is stopped after the 9th lottery. The detection timing of the decision button 81 shown in (a) and the validity period of the decision button shown in (b) are the same as those in the 56th embodiment. The operation timing shown in (c), the long-press timer shown in (d), and the long-press flag shown in (f) are 3.80 seconds after the start of the long-press point get effect, that is, the start of the ninth lottery. It ends immediately after .70 seconds. There are 10 long press checkpoints shown in (e), but the lottery is only held up to the 9th time. The long-pressed point image shown in (g) indicates that the long-pressed point image is displayed immediately after passing each checkpoint. After displaying the 9th long press point image, the player performed an operation of releasing the hand from the decision button 81 different from the long press mode, and an operation of releasing the hand from the decision button 81 different from the long press mode. The state continues until the arrival of the 10th checkpoint, but in this embodiment, the display of the long press point image that was displayed before releasing the hand is maintained without returning to 0 point.

That is, the point get pattern B, which should originally end with 82 points, is a long press corresponding to 10 points immediately after the start 1.30 seconds when the lottery result from the first time is performed, as in the point get pattern S2. The point image is displayed. Immediately after 1.60 seconds after the start of the second lottery result, a long press point image corresponding to a total of 20 points is displayed. Immediately after 1.90 seconds after the start of the third lottery result, a long press point image corresponding to a total of 30 points is displayed. Immediately after 2.20 seconds after the start of the fourth lottery result, a long press point image corresponding to a total of 40 points is displayed. Immediately after 2.50 seconds after the start of the fifth lottery result, a long press point image corresponding to a total of 49 points is displayed. Immediately after 2.80 seconds after the start of the sixth lottery result, a long press point image corresponding to a total of 57 points is displayed. Immediately after 3.10 seconds after the start of the 7th lottery result, a long press point image corresponding to a total of 64 points is displayed. Immediately after 3.40 seconds after the start of the 8th lottery result, a long press point image corresponding to a total of 71 points is displayed. Immediately after 3.70 seconds after the start of the 9th lottery result, a long press point image corresponding to a total of 77 points is displayed. After that, since the operation of the enter button 81 is stopped 3.80 seconds after the start, the tenth lottery is not performed, but it is displayed before the operation of releasing the enter button 81, which is different from the long press mode. Press and hold points End with 77 points of total points displayed in the image.

The interruption of the operation of the determination button 81 at the time when the result of the ninth lottery is displayed may be intentionally performed by the player. That is, by stopping the operation in the long press mode when 77 points are acquired in the middle of the long press point get production, the character is maintained at 77 points and the 77 points are expanded at the end of the long press valid period. Depending on whether or not the size changes, it is possible to determine whether or not the point get pattern S is used, that is, whether or not the jackpot expectation is high.

With reference to FIG. 253, a display mode of the long press point get effect performed in the point get pattern S2 will be described. As shown in (a), the third symbol display device 42 displays, for example, a long-press notice image 45a during reach display, and as shown in (b), 0 points are obtained at the start of the long-press point get effect. The long press point image 45c1 indicating is displayed.
The long press point get effect is started by the operation in the long press mode of the enter button 81, and the points displayed in the long press point image 45c1 are added by the lottery performed according to the long press time.

As shown in (c), 2.80 seconds after the start of the long press point get effect, the long press point image 45c1 is displayed to have a total of 57 points based on the result of the sixth lottery. As shown in (d), after 3.10 seconds from the start, the long-pressed point image 45c1 is displayed to have a total of 64 points based on the result of the seventh lottery. As shown in (e), 3.40 seconds after the start, the long-pressed point image 45c1 is displayed to have a total of 71 points based on the result of the eighth lottery. As shown in (f), 3.70 seconds after the start, the long-pressed point image 45c1 is displayed to have a total of 77 points based on the result of the ninth lottery. As shown in (g), the long-pressed point image 45c1 showing the total of 77 points is displayed until 4.00 seconds after the start, that is, until the end timing of the addition of the long-pressed point get effect. After that, as shown in (h), at the end of the long press point get effect, the total points "7" and "7" are changed (enlarged or expanded) to "7" and "7" which are different from the display mode so far. (Emphasis), and in order to suggest that the expanded or emphasized "7" and "7" have high expectations for big hits, a suggestion image consisting of the text information "" 7 "and" 7 "points! 45c3 is displayed. In (i), as a result of the variation display after the suggestion image 45c3 is displayed, the jackpot result (for example, 777) is displayed.

With reference to FIG. 254, a display mode of the long press point get effect performed in the point get pattern B in which the total points should originally end at 82 will be described. As shown in (a) to (e), the third symbol display device 42 operates the enter button 81 in a long-pressed manner, so that the long-pressed point image 45c1 has a total of 71 as the result of the eighth lottery. It is displayed up to the point. As shown in (g), after 3.70 seconds from the start, the long press point image 45c1 displays a total of 77 points as the result of the ninth lottery, but 3.80 seconds after the start immediately after this, the game is played. The person performs an operation of releasing the hand from the decision button 81, which is different from the long press mode. Since the 10th checkpoint, 4.00 seconds after the start, arrives while the operation of releasing the hand is released from the decision button 81, which is different from this long-press mode, the 10th lottery is not performed, and the total is 77. The point is the result of the addition of the long press point get effect.

The total of 77 points here is performed in the point get pattern B where the total points should end at 82, so after that, as shown in (h), a big hit is expected at the end of the long press point get effect. A suggestion image 45c5 consisting of a character image "total 70 points! I don't know yet!", Which suggests that the degree is not so high, is displayed. Then, as a result of the variation display after the suggested image 45c3 is displayed, either the jackpot result or the miss result is displayed as shown in (i).

In the long press point get effect performed in the point get pattern S2, the player does not know that it is performed in the point get pattern S2, and when the ninth long press point image (77 points) is displayed. , When the operation to release the decision button 81, which is different from the long press mode, is performed, the enlarged character size changes to "7" and "7" points at the end of the long press point get effect, which is large. You can get joy. Therefore, when the long-press point image reaches 77 points in the middle of the long-press point get effect, release the enter button 81, and at the end of the long-press point get effect, the enlarged character size "7". Depending on whether or not it becomes "7", the fun of trying to predict the jackpot expectation will occur.

In this way, by giving a feeling of expectation that the point get pattern S will end at "77 points", in the long press point get effect, the operation in the long press mode until the long press valid period ends. The game is expected to get high points (90 points or more) at the end of the long press validity period by continuing, and the operation in the long press mode when 77 points are earned in the middle of the long press point get production. By stopping, it is maintained at 77 points, and depending on whether the 77 points change to the expanded character size at the end of the long press validity period, whether it is the point get pattern S or not, that is, the jackpot expectation degree It is possible to provide the player with a game property that determines whether or not the value is high.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 57th embodiment, the above-mentioned numerical information display effect execution function has predetermined numerical information (for example, 77 points) in the numerical information display effect (for example, long press point get effect). Is displayed, a specific change effect that changes the predetermined numerical information into different specific information (enlarged size “77”) is executed. This makes it possible to improve the fun of the display effect accompanied by the numerical change effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (Q0) above, for example.

Further, the above-mentioned effect execution function is performing a predetermined display effect (for example, during a variable display effect) when the enter button 81 is operated in a long-pressed manner within the valid period during which the operation of the enter button 81 is valid. ), A specific operation corresponding effect (for example, a long press point get effect) is executed, and a specific suggestion (for example, "7" and "7" points of the enlarged character size) that can suggest the result of the jackpot judgment depending on the mode of the effect. (Display of specific information) is executed, and in this specific operation corresponding effect, after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in the long press mode, the operation of releasing the hand from the decision button 81 different from the long press mode is performed. When performed, this specific suggestion can also be executed by a mode of the effect different from the specific operation corresponding effect executed during the specific operation corresponding effect (for example, the point get effect is intentionally stopped at 77 points). .. As a result, not only when the operation of the specific mode is performed during the specific operation corresponding effect, but also when the operation different from the operation of the specific mode is performed, the operation of the specific mode is performed by the mode of the effect different from the specific operation compatible effect. It is interesting that the suggestion (specific suggestion) of the result of the same judgment as in the case of performing the above is given. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the production corresponding to the specific operation. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P4-0) above, for example.

In the above-mentioned Example 57, "77 points" is displayed at the end of the long press valid period, and then the character size of "77 points" is changed from the normal character size to the enlarged character size. However, before displaying "77 points", an effect indicating whether or not the jackpot expectation is high may be executed.

For example, in this embodiment, the cut-in image is displayed and the cut-in image is displayed at the time when "73 points" (see FIGS. 241 (c) and 244) immediately before the acquisition of "77 points" are acquired. While displaying, an effect suggesting whether or not the score is "77 points" is performed. It should be noted that the suggestion is not limited to whether or not the score is "77 points", but may be a suggestion as to whether or not the score is "90 points" or more.

Specifically, for example, in a cut-in image, if "77" shown as a character image catches up with "73" shown as another character image, "77 points" are obtained and "77" becomes "73". If you run away from "", you will not be able to get "77 points" (that is, you will end up with "73 points").

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 58th embodiment, the above-mentioned numerical information display effect execution function has predetermined numerical information (for example, 77 points) in the numerical information display effect (for example, long press point get effect). When the previous 73 points) is displayed, a specific change effect (for example, a cut-in image) that changes the predetermined numerical information into different specific information (for example, a cut-in image suggesting whether or not it becomes 77 points). Display effect) is executed. This makes it possible to improve the fun of the display effect accompanied by the numerical change effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (Q0) above, for example.

In the 56th embodiment described above, "77 points" are specified by adding or subtracting to "77" or displaying additional information while the long press point image 45c1 ("77 points") is displayed. Although the player is made to recognize that it is not a value, the player may be made to recognize that "77 points" is not a specific value without displaying the long press point image 45c1. Hereinafter, this point will be described with reference to FIGS. 255 and 256. FIG. 255 is a time chart of the point get pattern A shown in the 59th embodiment. FIG. 256 is a diagram showing a display mode corresponding to the point get pattern A.

In FIG. 255, as shown in (e), if the tenth lottery of the point get pattern A is performed, the point get pattern in which the total points become 91 points is executed, but as shown in (c). In addition, 3.5 seconds after the start of the long-press point get effect, the player will be in a state of releasing the hand from the decision button 81, which is different from the long-press mode, so only the 8th lottery will be performed. .. As shown in (g), if the result of the eighth lottery is added, the long press points will be 77 points. After that, when the operation of releasing the hand from the decision button 81 different from the long press mode is performed, the cut-in image 45c9 described later is immediately before the end time of the long press point get effect of this embodiment (for example, start 6. It is displayed until (00 seconds later). In the cut-in image 45c9, an effect of whether or not the final score is 77 points is performed. After that, after 6.00 seconds from the start, "76" is displayed, which avoids becoming a specific value. If the operation of releasing the hand from the decision button 81, which is different from the long press mode, is not performed, it is avoided that the specific value is reached at the original end point (for example, 4.00 seconds after the start). Is displayed.

In this embodiment as well, as in the above-mentioned Example 57, when the 77 points having a specific value have a high expectation of a big hit as in the point get pattern S2, the final “77” is performed in the same manner. May be displayed.

A display mode corresponding to the point get pattern A will be described with reference to FIG. 256. In (a) to (e), the player operates the decision button 81 in a long-pressed manner, so that the long-pressed point get effect is executed. In this embodiment, the long-pressed point image 45c1 does not display the number of points obtained as the lottery result, but displays the number of points obtained by adding the lottery result. As shown in (f), 77 points are displayed in the long-pressed point image 45c1 when the eighth addition is displayed, but at this time, the final result is not known until the cut-in effect described later is passed. It is displayed as "77 points !?" suggesting that. Further, the long press request image 45b is switched to the hand release operation notice image 45b3 such as "Release your hand!".

After that, as shown in (g), instead of the long press point image 45c1, a cut-in image 45c9 suggesting whether or not the final point is 77 points is displayed. The cut-in image 45c9 indicates, for example, whether the numbers 74 to 78 rotate and stop at 77 or at any other number. After that, as shown in (h), as a result of the cut-in image 45c9, "76", which is avoided to be a specific value, is displayed. If the operation of releasing the hand from the decision button 81, which is different from the long press mode, is not performed, "76" is displayed at the original end point, in which the specific value is avoided, but "76" is displayed. If it ends with "77", it is displayed as "77 points" without displaying "!?", And then, as shown in (i) to (j), it suggests the degree of expectation of the result of the long press point get effect. The suggestion image 45c5 is displayed, and then the result of the variable display is displayed.

In this embodiment as well, when "77" is displayed after the end of the cut-in image 45c9 as in the above-mentioned Example 57, the character size is enlarged from the normal character size "77". It is changed to "7" and "7".

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 58th embodiment, the above-mentioned numerical information display effect execution function has a predetermined numerical information (for example, from 77 points) in the numerical information display effect (for example, a long press point get effect). When the previous numerical value 74 points) is displayed, a specific change effect (for example, a cut-in image) that changes the predetermined numerical information into different specific information (for example, a cut-in image 45c9 suggesting whether or not it becomes 77 points). Display effect) is executed. This makes it possible to improve the fun of the display effect accompanied by the numerical change effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (Q0) above, for example.

Further, the above-mentioned effect execution function is performing a predetermined display effect (for example, during a variable display effect) when the enter button 81 is operated in a long-pressed manner within the valid period during which the operation of the enter button 81 is valid. ), A specific operation corresponding effect (for example, a long press point get effect) is executed, and a specific suggestion (for example, "7" and "7" points of the enlarged character size) that can suggest the result of the jackpot judgment depending on the mode of the effect. (Display of specific information) is executed, and in this specific operation corresponding effect, after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in the long press mode, the operation of releasing the hand from the decision button 81 different from the long press mode is performed. When performed, this specific suggestion can also be executed by an effect mode (for example, a cut-in image display effect) different from the specific operation corresponding effect executed during the specific operation corresponding effect. As a result, not only when the operation of the specific mode is performed during the specific operation corresponding effect, but also when the operation different from the operation of the specific mode is performed, the operation of the specific mode is performed by the mode of the effect different from the specific operation corresponding effect. It is interesting that the suggestion (specific suggestion) of the result of the same judgment as in the case of performing the above is given. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the production corresponding to the specific operation. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P4-0) above, for example.

In Examples 56 to 58 described above, the jackpot expectation level has been suggested by a number indicating the acquired points such as "77 points", but a pattern other than the number may be used to suggest the jackpot expectation level.

For example, in this embodiment, there is a possibility that the jackpot expectation is high during the execution of the long press point get effect (for example, the time point between 60 points shown in FIG. 235 (c) and 69 points shown in (d)). The character image "CHANGE" suggesting that is displayed. If the operation of releasing the enter button 81 is performed within this period, at the end of this period (for example, at the time of 69 points shown in FIG. 235 (d)), the long press point get effect is deleted and a different effect is used. Switch to a production that maintains the display of a certain "CHANGE" image. If the enter button 81 is continuously pressed within this period, the "CHANGE" image is deleted at the end of this period and the long press point get effect is continued.

If the display of the "CHANGE" image is maintained until the end of the long press validity period, and if the jackpot expectation is high (for example, if the fluctuation pattern is only for the jackpot Super Reach E), the "CHANGE" image will be "heated!" It is displayed by changing to an image that suggests that the jackpot expectation is very high. Also, if the display of the "CHANGE" image is maintained until the end of the long press validity period, the jackpot expectation is not so high (for example, if the jackpot super reach E and the missed super reach E are both in a certain fluctuation pattern). ), "CHANGE" Do not change the image, or display an image that suggests that the jackpot expectation is not so high, such as "I don't know yet!".

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 60th embodiment, the above-mentioned numerical information display effect execution function performs predetermined numerical information (for example, 60 points) in the numerical information display effect (for example, long press point get effect). Is displayed, a specific change effect (eg, "CHANGE" image display effect) that changes the predetermined numerical information into different specific information (for example, "CHANGE" image) is executed. This makes it possible to improve the fun of the display effect accompanied by the numerical change effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (Q0) above, for example.

A long press point get effect for displaying a “CHANGE” image in a mode different from that of the above-described 60th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 257 and 258. FIG. 257 is a time chart showing the point get pattern of Example 61. FIG. 258 is a diagram showing a display mode of the point get pattern of FIG. 257.

The time chart shown in FIG. 257 is common to the time chart of FIG. 255 described above, except that the points obtained by the lottery are added one by one in this embodiment. As shown in (c), 3.50 seconds after the start of the long press point get effect, the player performs an operation of releasing the hand from the determination button 81, which is different from the long press mode. Therefore, as shown in (g), the long-pressed point image should be internally added up to 77 points by the eighth lottery, but is interrupted when up to 74 points are added. 74 points will continue to be displayed for the time until the next checkpoint (or the next checkpoint), after which the "CHANGE" image display effect will be displayed until just before the end of the long press point get effect (start 6.00 seconds). , Results such as "7" and "7" suggesting that the jackpot expectation is high at the end, or results other than "7" and "7" suggesting that the expectation is low (for example, "76") are displayed. Will be done.

In the long press point get effect shown in FIG. 258, the long press notice image 45a is displayed as shown in (a). From (b) to (f), points are added one by one to the long-pressed point image 45c1, and "74 points" are displayed at the time point (f) (3.50 seconds after the start). As shown in (g), "74 points" continue to be displayed until the start 3.70 seconds corresponding to the next checkpoint (or the start 4.00 seconds corresponding to the next checkpoint). This suggests to the player that different changes may occur.

During the period when "74 points" is displayed, as shown in (h), the long-press request image 45b is a hand-release operation notice such as "CHANGE! The image is changed to 45b3, and the player is urged to perform an operation of releasing the hand from the determination button different from the long press mode. When the player releases the enter button different from the long press mode, the CHANGE image 45c10 with "CHANGE!" Is displayed until 6.00 seconds after the start as shown in (i). After 6.00 seconds from the start, as shown in (j), the long press point image 45c1 ("7" "7") suggesting that the jackpot expectation is high as a result of the CHANCE image display effect, or the jackpot expectation. A long press point image 45c1 (for example, "76") suggesting that the degree is low is displayed. If the player does not release the decision button different from the long press mode, the CHANCE image 45c10 is not displayed, and the long press point image 45c1 ("7" "7" suggesting that the jackpot expectation is high. ]) Alternatively, a long press point image 45c1 (for example, "76") suggesting that the jackpot expectation is low is displayed. After that, the suggestion information 45c3 and the suggestion information 45c5 suggesting the jackpot expectation may be displayed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 61st embodiment, the above-mentioned numerical information display effect execution function performs predetermined numerical information (for example, long press point) in the numerical information display effect (for example, long press point get effect). When the 74 points in the image 45c1) is displayed, the specific numerical information is changed to different specific information (for example, the hand-release operation notice image 45b3, the CHANGE image 45c10), and the specific change effect (for example, the "CHANGE" image display effect) is displayed. ) Is executed. This makes it possible to improve the fun of the display effect accompanied by the numerical change effect. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (Q0) above, for example.

Further, the above-mentioned effect execution function is performing a predetermined display effect (for example, during a variable display effect) when the enter button 81 is operated in a long-pressed manner within the valid period during which the operation of the enter button 81 is valid. ), A specific operation corresponding effect (for example, a long press point get effect) is executed, and a specific suggestion (for example, "7" and "7" points of the enlarged character size) that can suggest the result of the jackpot judgment depending on the mode of the effect. (Display of specific information) is executed, and in this specific operation corresponding effect, after the operation of the decision button 81 is performed in the long press mode, the operation of releasing the hand from the decision button 81 different from the long press mode is performed. When performed, this specific suggestion can also be executed by an effect mode (for example, "CHANGE" image display effect) different from the specific operation corresponding effect executed during the specific operation corresponding effect. As a result, not only when the operation of the specific mode is performed during the specific operation corresponding effect, but also when the operation different from the operation of the specific mode is performed, the operation of the specific mode is performed by the mode of the effect different from the specific operation corresponding effect. It is interesting that the suggestion (specific suggestion) of the result of the same judgment as in the case of performing the above is given. As a result, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the production corresponding to the specific operation. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (P4-0) above, for example.

In the above-described embodiment, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 counts the numerical information generated in connection with the display effect, outputs a command for displaying the counted numerical information to the display control device 45, and outputs the command to display the counted numerical information to the display control device 45. Although the CPU 521 displays the counted numerical information, it may have a function of checking whether the counted numerical information and the displayed numerical information are correct. In the following, as the numerical information, the numerical value of the charge counter in the long press charge effect described in the above-mentioned Example 44 will be described as an example, but a color that changes like the long press color change effect may be used, and the long press may be used. It may be the number of points obtained by lottery as in the point get effect, or it may be the number of fluctuations such as the number of time reductions.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 outputs a display command for displaying display information including predetermined information (for example, long press charge image 45c1) on the third symbol display device 42.
Based on the operation of the enter button 81, the CPU 521 of the sub control device 262 sets predetermined information in the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 from certain information (for example, the value of the long press charge counter) to another information (for example, the value of the long press charge counter). Outputs an instruction command (for example, long press charge +1 command) that instructs the display to change to (+1 value).

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 has another information instructed by the instruction command (for example, a value obtained by adding +1 to the value of the long press charge counter) and predetermined information displayed by the display command (for example, the value of the long press charge image 45c1). It has an error judgment function to determine whether or not an error that does not match with has occurred. At least one of the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 and the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 is provided with an error handling function that performs a predetermined error handling process corresponding to this error when this error occurs. As an error handling function, for example, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 is provided with an error notification function for notifying the occurrence of an error.

First, the control system in the sub-control device 262 of the pachinko machine 10 of the 62nd embodiment will be described. FIG. 259 is a flowchart showing a normal process by the sub-control device of the 62nd embodiment. FIG. 260 is a flowchart showing an effect execution management process by the sub control device. FIG. 261 is a flowchart showing a display / inter-sub counter consistency confirmation process by the sub control device.

The normal processing by the sub-control device 262 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 259. Since the basic description is the same as the content described with reference to FIG. 33 in the above-mentioned Example 1, a difference from this will be described.

That is, in this embodiment, as shown in step S2111A, the sub control device 262 receives a command from the display control means 45, and confirms that the display control device 45 displays the above-mentioned counted numerical information. There is.

With reference to FIG. 260, the effect execution management process by the sub-control device 262 of this embodiment will be described. Since the basic description is the same as the content described with reference to FIG. 39 in the above-mentioned Example 1, a difference from this will be described.

That is, in this embodiment, as shown in step S2404A, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 confirms whether the counters related to the numerical information are consistent between the display control device 45 and the sub control device 262. Is processed. This process is called display / sub-counter consistency check process.

The display / inter-sub counter consistency confirmation process by the sub-control device 262 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 261.

In step S4901, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the display control device 45 has received the long press charge counter + 1 completion command shown in step S4709A described later. If the long press charge counter + 1 completion command has been received, the process proceeds to step S4902, otherwise the process ends. In step S4902, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 adds 1 to the long press charge counter for sub confirmation, and proceeds to step S4903. Thereby, the sub control device 262 can confirm that the display control device 45 has displayed the above-mentioned counted numerical information on the third symbol display device 42.

In step S4903, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 saves the numerical information of the charge counter for sub instruction in the storage area SC of the RAM 553 of the sub control device 262, and proceeds to step S4904. The numerical information of the charge counter for sub-instruction is the numerical information of the long-press charge counter which is incremented by 1 according to the time when the player operates the decision button 81 in the long-press mode in step S4508 of the above-mentioned embodiment 44. Equivalent to. As shown in step S4611 of the above-described embodiment 44, based on the numerical information of the long press charge counter, the numerical value of the long press charge is added by 1 according to the time when the player operates the enter button 81 in the long press mode. A long press charge + 1 command for instructing the display control device 45 to do so is transmitted.

In step S4904, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 saves the numerical information of the above-mentioned sub-confirmation charge counter in the storage area KC of the RAM 553 of the sub control device 262, and proceeds to step S4905.

In step S4905, in the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262, does the numerical information of the sub-instruction charge counter stored in the storage area SC match the numerical information of the sub-confirmation charge counter stored in the storage area KC? Judge whether or not. If the two numerical information match, this process ends, and if they do not match, the process proceeds to step S4906.

In step S4906, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the display count information error command. As a result, the sub control device 262 can notify the outside that a display count information error has occurred in which the numerical information counted by itself and the numerical information actually displayed by the display control device 45 do not match. ..

Next, the control system in the display control device 45 will be described. FIG. 262 is a flowchart showing a button long press effect display process by the display control device. FIG. 263 is a flowchart showing the display count information error display process by the display control device.

A button long press effect display process by the display control device 45 will be described with reference to FIG. 262. Since the basic description is the same as the content described with reference to FIG. 181 in the above-mentioned Example 1, a difference from this will be described.

In step S4709A, when the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the long press charge +1 command (step S4708) and the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the long press charge +1 image (step S4709), the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 Is set to send a long press charge + 1 completion command to the sub control device 262 as described above. As a result, the display control device 45 can notify the sub control device 262 that the display of the numerical information counted based on the command from the sub control device 262 has been completed.

The display count information error display process by the display control device 45 will be described with reference to FIG. 263.

In step S4921, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not a display count information error command has been received from the sub control device 262. If the display count information error command has been received, the process proceeds to step S4922, and if not, this process ends.

In step S4922, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 controls the third symbol display device 42 to display the display count information error. In addition to being displayed on the third symbol display device 42, the display count information error may be displayed by turning on the error notification lamp or outputting the error notification voice. As a result, the player or the hall staff can notice the display count information error and take measures to eliminate the display count information error.

In step S4923, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the display count information error has been resolved. For example, when a measure for eliminating the display count information error is performed on the display control device 45, the display control device 45 determines that the display count information error has been resolved. The measure for resolving this display count information error may be a action taken for the sub-control device 262. In this case, the sub-control device 262 that has been treated may send a command indicating that the display count information error has been resolved to the display control device 45. As a result, the display control device 45 can determine that the display count information error has been resolved.

In step S4924, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 erases the display count information error displayed on the third symbol display device 42. As a result, it can be seen that the display count information error has been resolved.

Next, a display mode of the display count information error will be described. FIG. 264 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of the display count information error.

In (a), the image 2.50 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect shown in FIG. 185 (f) of the above-mentioned Example 44 is displayed. The third symbol display device 42 has a long press request image 45b, a long press charge image 45c indicating that the long press charge is 50%, and a long press duration image indicating the duration of the operation in the long press mode. 45f is displayed. The long press duration image 45f is displayed as 1.50 seconds.

In (b), an image 2.80 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect, which is a continuation of the above-mentioned (a), is displayed. The third symbol display device 42 has a long press request image 45b, a long press charge image 45c indicating that the long press charge is 60%, and a duration of the operation in the long press mode of 1.80 seconds. A long press duration image 45f indicating that is displayed.

In (c), an image 3.10 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect, which is a continuation of the above-mentioned (b), is displayed. The third symbol display device 42 displays a long press request image 45b and a long press duration image 45f indicating that the duration of the operation in the long press mode is 2.10 seconds. In the push charge image 45c, the long press charge remains at 60%. That is, a display count information error has occurred in the display of the long-pressed charge image 45c.

In (d), an image 3.40 seconds after the start of the long press charge effect, which is a continuation of the above-mentioned (c), is displayed. The third symbol display device 42 stopped at 60% with a long press request image 45b and a long press duration image 45f indicating that the duration of the operation in the long press mode was 2.40 seconds. The long-press charge image 45c and the display count information error image 45g consisting of a character image such as "Display count information error occurred!" Showing that a display count information error has occurred are displayed on the display of the long-press charge image 45c. ing. As a result, the player or the hall staff can notice the display count information error and take measures to eliminate the display count information error.

After that, the hall staff notices the display count information error and takes measures to eliminate the display count information error, whereby the display count information error is resolved.

In this embodiment, the error handling function is, for example, an error notification function for notifying the occurrence of an error by displaying a display count information error image 45g, but error handling processing is performed without notifying the occurrence of an error. You may go. For example, when an error occurs, instead of displaying the display count information error image 45g, an error hidden image "???" which is meaningless to the player is displayed, and while the error hidden image is displayed. , At least one of the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 and the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs a process of eliminating the error.

As a process for resolving the error, for example, the execution of the long press charge effect is canceled, and the error hidden image continues to be displayed. The error hidden image may be an image related to the story of the display effect that has been displayed so far, in addition to "???". Further, as a process for resolving the error, for example, an image (for example, a long press charge attack) scheduled to be displayed after the long press charge effect by the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 according to an instruction command from the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262. Image) is displayed. The image to be displayed next is determined based on the result of the jackpot judgment, so even if the long press charge effect is hidden by "???" in the middle, it will be displayed without discomfort. You can continue.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 62nd embodiment, the determination button 81 that receives the operation by the player, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that performs the main control regarding the game, and the third symbol display device 42 are predetermined. Based on the operation of the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 that outputs the display command for displaying the display information including the information (for example, the long press charge image 45c1) and the enter button 81, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 has predetermined information. Sub-control device that outputs an instruction command (for example, long press charge +1 command) that instructs the display to change from information (for example, the value of the long press charge counter) to another information (for example, the value obtained by adding the value of the long press charge counter by +1). 262 CPU 521, another information instructed by the instruction command (for example, the value obtained by adding +1 to the value of the long press charge counter) and predetermined information displayed by the display command (for example, the value of the long press charge image 45c1). An error determination function that determines whether or not an error that does not match with is occurring (for example, a display / inter-counter consistency check processing function by the CPU 551 of the sub control unit 262) and when this error occurs, It is provided with an error handling function (for example, a count information error display processing function by the CPU 521 of the display control device 45) that performs a predetermined error handling process corresponding to this error.

As a result, when it is instructed to change the predetermined information from one information to another based on the operation of the enter button 81, the other information instructed and the predetermined information displayed by the display control device 45 are displayed. If they do not match, error handling processing corresponding to the error is performed, so that it is possible to reduce the player's feelings from being attenuated by the error, and it is possible to improve the fun of the display effect including the change of predetermined information. .. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (R0) above, for example.

Further, it is provided with an error notification function (for example, a count information error display processing function by the CPU 521 of the display control device 45) for notifying the occurrence of an error. As a result, the occurrence of the error is notified, so that the reliability of the effect of changing the predetermined information is improved, and thus the interest of the display effect including the change of the predetermined information can be improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (R1) above, for example.

Further, the display control device 45 has a function (display) of outputting a completion command (for example, long press charge + 1 completion command) indicating that the change of the predetermined information has been executed to the sub control device 262 when the change of the predetermined information is executed. The sub-control device 262 includes the functions of steps S4708, S3709, and S4709A by the CPU 521 of the control device 45), and the sub-control device 262 causes an error that the other information instructed by the instruction command and the predetermined information indicated by the completion command do not match. It has an error judgment function to determine whether or not it is present. As a result, when the display control device 45 cannot execute the change of the predetermined information even though the sub control device 262 has instructed the change to another information, the occurrence of the error is notified. Therefore, since the reliability of the effect of changing the predetermined information is improved, it is possible to improve the fun of the display effect including the change of the predetermined information. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (R2) above, for example.

Further, the predetermined information is operation display information (for example, long press charge image 45c1) that changes based on the operation of the enter button 81. As a result, the operation display information (for example, long press charge) is displayed on the display control device 45 even though the sub control device 262 instructs the change to another information (for example, the value obtained by adding the value of the long press charge by +1). When the change of the image 45c1) cannot be executed, the occurrence of the error is notified, so that the reliability of the effect of changing the operation display information is improved. Can be improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (R5) above, for example.

Further, the operation display information is operation numerical information (for example, long press charge image 45c1) that changes based on the operation of the enter button 81. As a result, even though the sub control device 262 instructs the change to another information (for example, the value obtained by adding the value of the long press charge by +1), the display control device 45 displays the operation numerical information (for example, the long press charge). When the change of the image 45c1) cannot be executed, the occurrence of the error is notified, so that the reliability of the effect of changing the operation numerical information is improved. Can be improved. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (R6) above, for example.

Further, since the above-mentioned error notification function displays the error as a display count information error image 45 g during the display effect, it is possible to make it easier to notice the occurrence of the error. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (R7) above, for example.

The pachinko machine 10 of the above-described embodiment 62 displays an error of change in predetermined information (for example, long press charge image 45c1) that changes based on the operation of the enter button 81, but is counted in an advantageous gaming state. It may display an error of the number of fluctuations. This point will be described below.

The CPU 501 of the main control device 261 generates an advantageous gaming state (for example, a time saving state or a probable change state) that is advantageous to the player until a predetermined number of fluctuations or the next big hit occurs as the main control regarding the game. The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 outputs, as predetermined information, a display command for causing the third symbol display device 42 to display game count information indicating the current number of fluctuations or the remaining number of fluctuations in the advantageous gaming state.

Each time the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 receives a variation pattern command based on the result of the jackpot determination by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 changes the game count information from the previous game count information to the next. Outputs an instruction command that instructs the display to change to the number of times information.

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 has an error determination function for determining whether or not an error has occurred in which the next fluctuation count information instructed by the instruction command and the game count information instructed by the display command do not match. When this error occurs, it has an error handling function that performs predetermined error handling processing corresponding to this error. As an error handling function, for example, an error notification function for displaying the occurrence of an error on the third symbol display device 42 is provided. The error notification function displays an error as a variation number information error image 45g1 during the variation display effect.

The control system of the sub-control device 262 of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 265 is a flowchart showing a display / inter-sub counter consistency confirmation process by the sub control device 262 of the 62nd embodiment.

In step S4901A, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the display control device 45 has received the remaining fluctuation number counter-1 completion command shown in step S3216 described later. If the remaining fluctuation count counter-1 completion command has been received, the process proceeds to step S4902A, and if not, this process ends. In step S4902A, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 subtracts 1 from the sub-confirmation remaining fluctuation count counter, and proceeds to step S4903A. Thereby, the sub control device 262 can confirm that the display control device 45 displays the remaining number of fluctuations obtained by subtracting the above 1 on the third symbol display device 42.

In step S4903A, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 saves the numerical information of the remaining fluctuation count counter for the sub instruction in the storage area SC of the RAM 553 of the sub control device 262, and proceeds to step S4904A. The numerical information of the remaining fluctuation count counter for the sub-instruction is the high-probability support state transition command or the low-probability support state transition command transmitted from the main control device 261 to the sub-control device 262 in steps S563 and S567 of the above-mentioned first embodiment. Is included in.

In step S4904A, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 saves the numerical information of the above-mentioned remaining fluctuation count counter for sub confirmation in the storage area KC of the RAM 553 of the sub control device 262, and proceeds to step S4905.

In step S4905, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 has the numerical information of the sub-instruction remaining fluctuation count counter stored in the storage area SC and the numerical information of the sub-confirmation remaining fluctuation counter stored in the storage area KC. Determine if they match. If the two numerical information match, this process ends, and if they do not match, the process proceeds to step S4906.

In step S4906, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the display count information error command. As a result, the sub control device 262 notifies the outside that a display count information error has occurred in which the remaining number information counted by itself and the remaining number information actually displayed by the display control device 45 do not match. Can be done.

Next, the control system in the display control device 45 will be described. FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing a symbol sequence variation display process by the display control device. Since the basic description is the same as the content described with reference to FIG. 47 in the above-mentioned Example 1, a difference from this will be described.

In step S3214, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives a stop display command in steps S3211 to S3213 to stop the symbol sequence variation display, and then determines whether or not the game is in an advantageous gaming state. Whether or not the game is in an advantageous game is determined by whether or not the high-probability / support state transition command for display in step S3113 and the low-probability / support state transition command for display in step S3115, which are described with reference to FIG. 46, have been received. It is judged by. If it is in the advantageous gaming state, the process proceeds to step S3215, and if not, this process ends.

In step S3215, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs a display in which the remaining number of fluctuations displayed on the third symbol display device 42 is subtracted by 1, and the process proceeds to step S3216.

In step S3216, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 is set to transmit the remaining fluctuation number-1 completion command indicating that the remaining fluctuation number displayed on the third symbol display device 42 is subtracted by 1. do. As a result, the display control device 45 can notify the sub control device 262 that the display for reducing the remaining number of fluctuations counted based on the command from the sub control device 262 has been completed.

When an error of the remaining number of fluctuations has occurred, the sub-control device 262 displays an error based on the display count information error display process described above in the 62nd embodiment.

Next, a display mode of the remaining fluctuation number information error image will be described. FIG. 267 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of the remaining fluctuation number information error.

In (a), the third symbol display device 42 displays an image during variable display during 100 support games as an advantageous game state. The third symbol display device 42 has a high probability, right-handed information 44m in the support state, and "remaining 89 rotations" indicating that the change number information in the support state is the 11th rotation, that is, the remaining number of fluctuations is 89 rotations. The displayed support state change frequency information 44 m2 and the high-speed change change screen 43c are described. In (b), the all-symbol stop screen 43e indicating that the variation display at the 11th rotation was off is displayed.

In (c), an image during the next variation display during 100 support games is displayed as an advantageous gaming state based on the next variation display command. The third symbol display device 42 describes a high-probability / support state right-handed information 44 m, a support state change frequency information 44 m2 displayed as “remaining 89 rotations”, and a high-speed change state screen 43c. Here, the change frequency information 44m2 during the support state is erroneously displayed as "remaining 89 rotations" instead of being correctly displayed as "remaining 88 rotations". Therefore, in (d), the remaining fluctuation number information consisting of the character image "remaining fluctuation number information error occurred!" Indicates that the variation number information 44m2 in the support state displayed as "remaining 89 rotations" was an error. The error image 45g1 is displayed.

After that, the player notices the remaining fluctuation number information error image 45g1 and calls the hall clerk, and the hall clerk takes measures to eliminate the remaining fluctuation number information error, so that the remaining fluctuation number information error is eliminated.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the 63rd embodiment, the predetermined information is the game display information (for example, the game number information indicating the remaining number of fluctuations) that changes based on the result of the jackpot determination by the main control device 261. be. As a result, even though the sub control device 262 instructs the change to another information (for example, the remaining number of fluctuations obtained by subtracting 1 from the number of fluctuations), the display control device 45 changes the game display information. When the execution is not performed, the occurrence of the error is notified, so that the reliability of the effect of changing the game display information is improved, and therefore the fun of the display effect including the change of the game display information can be improved. .. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (R3) above, for example.

Further, the game display information is game numerical information (for example, game number information indicating the remaining number of fluctuations) that changes based on the result of determination by the main control device 261. By this. When the display control device 45 cannot execute the change of the game numerical information even though the sub control device 262 has instructed the change to another information, the occurrence of the error is notified. Since the reliability of the effect of changing the game numerical information is improved, it is possible to improve the fun of the display effect including the change of the game numerical information. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (R4) above, for example.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and may be another configuration having the same effect, and can be modified and implemented as follows, for example.

[1] In the above-described first embodiment, the ending countdown information 44v is descriptively displayed as "ending time: after ○ seconds", but the present invention is not limited to this. Another example of the ending countdown information 44v is a timer image showing numerical information. Since the player can recognize that the ending period has entered by looking at the ending screen 44j, he / she can recognize that the ending time is counted down just by displaying the timer image. As a result, the ending screen 44j can be displayed in a cohesive manner. In another example, the ending time may be represented by a band graph and replaced with a seek bar that visually indicates the remaining time of the ending time by indicating the current position on the band graph-shaped bar.

Further, in the first embodiment, the countdown information 44v counts down the ending time, but the time in the jackpot round gaming state including the ending period may be counted down. That is, the countdown may be performed from the start time of the jackpot round game or the middle of the game to the end timing of the ending period.

[2] In Example 1 described above, as an example of the "non-arrival suggestion information" of the present invention, a configuration in which the ending right-handed information 44k, the next game state proximity information 44l, and the ending countdown information 44v are all displayed is taken as an example. As described above, each of them may be displayed as "non-arrival suggestion information" alone, or may be displayed as "non-arrival suggestion information" in combination of the two.

[3] In the above-described first embodiment, the "predetermined gaming state" of the present invention is defined as the jackpot round gaming state, and the "next gaming state" is defined as the high probability / support state after the jackpot round gaming state. "Game state" and "next game state" may be other game states. For example, the "predetermined gaming state" may be set as an advantageous gaming state such as a high probability / support state of cutting the number of times, and the "next gaming state" may be set as a gaming state (for example, a normal gaming state) after the end of the advantageous gaming state. ..

[4] In Example 1 described above, the "specific operation" of the present invention is a volume control operation, but the "specific operation" may be another operation. For example, if the player can select a character image to appear in the display effect, and the selectable period is set during high-speed fluctuation or a jackpot round game state, the character image selection operation is also the present invention. It is included in the "specific operation" of.

[5] In Example 1 described above, the information 44a during the specific operation period was displayed during the period when the "specific operation" of the present invention was permitted, but the information 44a during the specific operation period was not displayed and was predetermined. When the timing of is reached, the proximity information 44e at the end of the specific operation period may be displayed.

[6] In the first embodiment described above, these screens are displayed by pressing the enter button 81 on the normal screen 43a, the demo screen 43b, the high-speed changing screen 43c, the opening screen 43h, the round screen 43i, the ending screen 43j, or the like. Although the screen has been switched to the specific operation screen 44b, these screens may be switched to the specific operation screen 44b by pressing the left selection button 82 or the right selection button 83 different from the enter button 81. In this case, the player is informed in advance that the specific operation can be executed by pressing any of the frame buttons 80 while the information 44a (“volume can be changed”) is displayed during the specific operation period. As a result, it is intuitive and easy to understand, and it is possible to reduce the failure to perform a specific operation.

Further, by bringing the hand close to the predetermined area of the display screen 42a at the timing of displaying the information 44a (“volume changeable”) during the specific operation period, these screens are switched to the specific operation screen 44b. You may do it. For example, information such as "When changing the volume, bring your hand close to the screen" is displayed on the display screen 42a. As a result, it is more intuitive and easy to understand, and it is possible to reduce the failure to perform a specific operation.

[7] In the above-described embodiment, for example, as in the ending effect pattern shown in FIG. 61, each ending information (next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, card removal forgetting prevention information 44y, digging prevention information 44z). The display time of was the same time such as 5 seconds or 10 seconds, but may be different times. For example, the next game state suggestion information 44w is 6 seconds, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y is 8 seconds, and the immersive prevention information 44z is 10 seconds. Further, even if the ending information is of the same type, the display time of the ending information may be changed according to a predetermined condition. For example, the display time of the ending information is changed according to the length of the fluctuation time.

[8] In the above-described embodiment, for example, as in the ending effect pattern shown in FIG. 61, each ending information is in a certain order (generally, next game state suggestion information 44w, manufacturer information 44x, card removal forgetting prevention information). It was displayed in the order of 44y, immersive prevention information 44z), but for example, the next game state suggestion information 44w is displayed last, the card removal forgetting prevention information 44y is displayed first, and the ending of the same display time. A pattern for changing the display order of information may be provided.

The ending information of the same display time is not limited to the information whose display time is exactly the same, and may be similar to the display time as long as the display time is within the allowable range. In this case, the display order of the ending information can be changed by extending the display time of the shortage or reducing the display time of the excess within the range permitted in the production.

[9] In Examples 23 to 26 described above, a top lamp such as the third illuminated portion 304 has been described as an example as a light emitting region of the decorative cover arranged on the front side of the gaming machine main body. However, it may be a side lamp such as the first illumination unit 301 or the second illumination unit 302. Further, it may be another lamp constituting the front frame set 14.

[10] In Examples 27 to 30 described above, as the light emitting region of the decorative cover of the movable illuminated portion 305, the movable illuminated portion 305 arranged on the back side of the right edge portion of the opening of the center frame 37 is an example. As described above, the movable illumination portion 305 arranged on the back side of the left edge portion of the opening of the center frame 37 and the movable illumination portion 305 arranged on the upper edge portion of the opening of the center frame 37. There may be. Further, the movable illumination portion 305 may be one in which all or part of the right edge portion, the left edge portion, or the upper edge portion of the opening of the center frame 37 is always exposed.

[11] In Examples 27 to 30 described above, the movable illumination unit 305 was arranged on the center frame 37, but the movable illumination unit 305 is located at a location other than the center frame 37 of the game board 30. It may be visually recognized in the arranged state, or may be visually recognized from the opening of the center frame 37 in the state of being arranged in the inner frame 12 or the movable display device unit 35.

[12] In Examples 27 to 30 described above, the light irradiating device 707 that irradiates the movable illumination unit 305 with light is a light emitting substrate, but a light emitting substrate other than the light emitting substrate is used. You may. For example, the decorative cover of the movable illumination unit 305 may be made to emit light by using the light emitted from the third symbol display device 42.

[13] In Examples 23 to 26 described above, the control for the light irradiation device 607 is an attitude control for setting the irradiation angle of the light emitted from the light emitting substrate 611 to the first irradiation angle, or emits light. Although it was an irradiation area control for setting the irradiation area of the light emitted from the substrate 611 to the first irradiation area, a predetermined point (for example, a center point) of the first light emitting region 605 and the second light emitting region 606). The irradiation distance control may be performed so as to change the irradiation distance between the light emitting substrate 611 and a predetermined point (for example, the center point) of the light emitting substrate 611.

[14] In Examples 23 to 33 described above, the irradiation means rotates (rotates), tilts, and moves in the left-right direction, but bends, bends, expands and contracts, and moves in the front-back direction. At least one of the movements may be possible. In addition, the irradiation area can be easily adjusted by bending the structure that can be bent with a hinge or the like, bending it if it is a flexible substrate, or expanding or contracting it if it has a structure that can be expanded or contracted by a slide mechanism or the like. can do. The irradiation distance may be easily adjusted by moving in the front-back direction.

[15] In Examples 23 to 26 described above, the push-in portion 616 is a protrusion and the push-in receiving portion 617 is a surface that receives the push-in portion 616 with respect to the input portion of the control means. The push-in portion 616 may be a surface, and the push-in receiving portion 617 may be a protrusion in contact with the surface.

[16] In Examples 24 and 28 described above, as a configuration for controlling the mode of light by means other than the light irradiation means, the translucent plates 631 and 731 have been described as an example, but reflection that reflects light has been described. The member may be tilted or rotated to control the mode of light.

[17] In Examples 34 to 40 described above, the setting suggestion effect images (videos) having different times are only played by using the jackpot time, but the setting suggestion effect images are performed in a mini-game format. It may be. The setting suggestion effect image in the mini-game format is, for example, given setting suggestion information according to the number of correct answers of the quiz answered by the player by operating the operation means in the quiz game. For example, if the number of correct answers is 10 or more, it is taught which of the settings 1 to 6, and if the number of correct answers is less than 10, it is only taught whether the setting is 4 or more. It's a mini game. In the quiz, the longer the jackpot time, the more questions you can answer, so it is easier to get advantageous information.

Further, instead of the setting suggestion effect image, a music composition may be selected. If it is a gaming machine that can change songs and create a favorite medley during the ending time, the longer the jackpot time, the easier it is to select the favorite song, and the more the number of favorite songs selected, the player. It is easy to obtain the benefit of being able to play the game in a favorable environment for the player.

[18] In the above-mentioned Example 38, the smaller the number of fluctuations, the easier it is to enter the V region 32b, but conversely, the larger the number of fluctuations, the easier it is to enter the V region 32b. good. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the jackpot round game state in that the number of fluctuations digested in the high-probability game state is increased (mahar) and the ball entry rate into the V region 32b is increased. .. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (M7), for example.

[19] In the above-described Example 35, the jackpot time-compatible image is an ending time-corresponding image, but the jackpot time-corresponding image is an interval time-corresponding image corresponding to the interval time or an opening time-corresponding image corresponding to the opening time. However, the longer the interval time compatible image or the opening time compatible image, the more advantageous information may be displayed. This is an example of the gaming machine described in (M5) and (M6), for example. Further, the opening / ending time-compatible image may be an image corresponding to the combined time of the opening time and the ending time, and the longer the opening time-compatible image or the opening / ending time-compatible image is, the more advantageous information is displayed. good.

[20] The configuration of Examples 1 to 33 described above may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 according to Examples 34 to 40 described above. Further, the configuration of Examples 34 to 40 described above may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 according to Examples 1 to 33 described above. Further, the configurations of Examples 34 to 40 described above may be applied to the pachinko machines 10 according to the different Examples 34 to 40, respectively.

[21] The present invention may be carried out on various types of gaming machines (for example, first-class, third-class, etc.), or on pachinko machines of a type different from the above-mentioned examples. For example, once a big hit is made, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the big hit until multiple (for example, two or three times) big hits occur. It may be carried out as.). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be in a special gaming state on condition that the ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that is in a special gaming state when the ball enters a predetermined winning opening. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines that use a game ball such as an arrange ball type pachinko machine or a sparrow ball.

[22] Unless the means for carrying out the invention, the invention described in the examples, and the invention described in each of the above-mentioned modifications are contradictory to each other, the configuration of the invention is appropriately changed, replaced, or deleted. It is also possible to make a configuration such as or a combination.

As described above, the present invention is suitable for gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

30 ... Game board 30a Game area 70 Main control device (main control device)
30 Game board 32 Variable winning device 32a Large winning opening 33a Starting winning device for special figure 1 33b Starting winning device for special drawing 2 34 Starting opening for normal symbol 35 Variable display device unit 36 Out opening 40 1st symbol display device 41 2nd Symbol display device 42 3rd symbol display device 43b Demo image 43a Normal screen surface 43c High-speed fluctuation screen 43d Left symbol stop screen 43e All symbol stop screen 43f Normal reach display screen 43g Development reach display screen 43g-1 Strong light emission flashing screen 43h Opening screen 43i Round screen 43j Ending screen 43k High probability state screen 43l High probability state middle reach display screen 44a Specific operation period information 44b Specific operation screen 44c Change information display unit 44d Operation method display unit 44e Specific operation period end proximity information 44e1 First specific Operation period end proximity information 44e2 Second specific operation period end proximity information 44f Opening information 44g Opening right-handed explanation information 44h Round right-handed information 44i Round number information 44j Ending information 44k Ending right-handed information 44l Next game state proximity information 44l1 1st next game state proximity information 44l2 2nd next game state proximity information 44l3 3rd next game state proximity information 44l4 4th next game state proximity information 44l5 5th next game state proximity information 44m High probability / support state Middle right-handed information 44n Bonus image 44o Luminous gaze prevention information 44p Bonus information 44q Information with setting suggestion 44v Ending countdown information 44w Next game status suggestion information 44x Manufacturer information 44y Card removal prevention information 44z Insertion prevention information 44z1 First squeeze prevention information 44z2 Second squeeze prevention information 45a Long press notice image 45b Long press request image 45c Long press charge image 45c1 Long press point image 45c2 Long press point addition image 45c3 Suggested image 45c4 Specific value avoidance image 45c5 Suggested image 45c6 Additional image 45d-A charge Attack image 45d-B Charge attack image 45d-C Charge attack image 45e Long press release notification image 45e1 Reoperation reminder image 45e2 Darkening image 45e3 Long press end notification image 45f Long press duration image 45g Display count information error Image 45g1 Remaining number of fluctuation information Error image 45h Color change image 80 Frame button 81 Enter button 300 Illuminations 301 1st Illuminations 302 2nd Illuminations 303 3rd Illuminations 305 Movable Illuminations 602 Transition mechanism 603 Slide Groove 604 Separate third illumination unit 605 First light emitting area (first light emitting area)
606 Second light emitting region (second light emitting region)
607 Light irradiation device (irradiation means)
608 Control mechanism (control means)
609 3rd Illuminations cover (decorative cover)
610 Separate 3rd Illuminations Cover (Separate Decorative Cover)
611 Light emitting board (light emitting board)
612 LED
613 Board support 614 Input section (input means)
615 Output unit (output means)
616 Push-in part 617 Push-in receiving part 618 Shaft 619 Coil spring 620 Main body side fixing part 621 Posture regulation part 630 Translucent part (translucent means)
631 Translucent plate 632 Translucent plate support 641 Separate cover detection sensor (detection means)
642 Tilt motor 643 Separate cover detection protrusion 650 Separate third illuminated cover 651 Partial light emitting area 642 Non-light emitting area 703 Movable lighting unit 705 First light emitting area (first light emitting area)
706 Second light emitting region (second light emitting region)
707 Light irradiation device (irradiation means)
708 Control mechanism (control means)
709 Movable Illuminations cover (decorative cover)
710 Drive mechanism 711 Light emitting board 712 LED
713 Board support 714 Input section (input means)
715 output unit (output means)
716 Push-in part 717 Push-in receiving part 718 Shaft 719 Coil spring 721 Attitude control part 730 Translucent part (translucent means)
731 Translucent plate 732 Translucent plate support 741 Displacement detection sensor (detection means)
742 Rotating motor 750 Movable illumination part (light guide plate)
751 Partial light emitting area 752 Non-light emitting area 753 Light guide plate light emitting part 754 Partial light emitting part 755 Non-light emitting part

Claims (1)

The operation means to receive the operation by the player and
The main control means that performs the main control related to the game,
A display control means that outputs a display command for displaying a display effect including predetermined information on the display means, and a display control means.
Sub-control that outputs an instruction command instructing the display control means to change the predetermined information from one information to another based on the result of the determination by the main control means or based on the operation of the operation means. It is a gaming machine equipped with means and
An error determining means for determining whether or not an error has occurred in which the other information instructed by the instruction command and the predetermined information displayed by the display command do not match.
A gaming machine characterized by comprising an error handling means for performing a predetermined error handling process corresponding to the error when the error has occurred.

Images